Manuale Principale 2651 3061 4071 00ZMX4071S1E

TopPage
3 : ‘21/Nov.
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX4071/S4E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-3061S/3561S/4061S 3
MX-3071S/3571S/4071S
MX-2651/3051/3551/4051
MX-3061/3561/4061
MODEL MX-3071/3571/4071
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICE [6] SIMULATION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Function of each key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 3. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 4. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 5. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit, [7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
the developing unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
1. Trouble code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2. JAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
8. Relationship between the model name and
3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
the designation in description of the document . . . . . . . iii
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
1. System diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
[9] MAINTENANCE
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance . . 9-1
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. Display of maintenance execution timing. . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
2. Copy function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
3. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
3. Printer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
4. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 [10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
5. Dimension and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 1. Disassembly of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
6. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2. Disassembly and assembly of each unit . . . . . . . . . 10-31
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
1. Consumable system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3. Manual paper feed section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
3. Definition of drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
4. Tray paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
5. Paper registration section (Paper transport section) 11-10
5. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
6. Paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
7. ADU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
8. LSU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
9. OPC drum section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
3. I/F connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
10. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
4. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
11. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
5. DSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
12. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
6. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
13. Waste toner collection section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
7. Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
14. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
8. Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
15. DSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
9. Clutches and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
16. RSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37
10. Drive motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
17. Fan and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
11. Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
12. Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 [12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
13. Fans and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
14. PWB/memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
15. Fuses and thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
[13] OTHERS
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
1. TOOL LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
3. Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
NOTE
MX-4071
FOR SERVICE  Grounding
Service wire for telephone line
Manual
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
1. Precautions for servicing • Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forcibly
• When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the bend, or pull the power cord.
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
when performing the communication test, etc.
• Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
• There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use extreme
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
care when servicing.
• Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the machine.
It may cause a burn.
• There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may cause
an electric shock. Be careful when servicing. • Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate the
machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oily hands.
• Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective material
such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. It may cause an electric shock.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
• When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to posi- 3. Note for installing site
tion your hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other driving Do not install the machine at the following sites.
sections. • Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low
• Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature and
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside the humidity.
machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury. Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine,
• When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink exces- causing paper jam or copy dirt.
sively. Do not get them in the eyes. For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with water described later.
immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
• The machine has sharp edges inside. Be careful not to damage fin-
gers when servicing.
• Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner
may ignite and burn you.
• When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the specified
replacement battery.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a machine
malfunction or breakdown. • Place of extreme vibrations
• When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it, be It may cause a breakdown.
sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.
• When removing and servicing a unit with PWB or electronic parts
installed to it, be sure to use an earth band.
CAUTION : Double pole, neutral fusing.

Disconnect mains before servicing.
ATTENTION. Double pôle, fusible sur le neutre.
Débrancher l'alimentation avant l'entretien.
• Poorly ventilated place
An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.
2. Warning for servicing The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as not
to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a machine
• Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in a well ventilated
the specified voltage and current requirements. place.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric shock.
• If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal smell,
interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage occurs
without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, ground-
ing must be made.
• When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the follow-
ing points.
 Gas tube
 Lightning conductor
 A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
MX-4071 NOTE FOR SERVICE – i

• Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may undergo
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to observe
qualitative change. the following precautions in order to prevent against damage by static
It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems. electricity.
• When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or an
anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
• Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine may
undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as ammo-
nium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue print
machine may result in poor quality output. • When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag (case),
use an earth band as shown below:
• Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.
• Place of much dust

When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause a
breakdown or poor quality output.
• Place near a wall

The machine will require ventilation.
If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may result.
11-13/16" • When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the proce-

(30cm) dure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
• Unstable or irregular surface

If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or
machine malfunction.
Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock
the casters.
MX-4071 NOTE FOR SERVICE – ii

3 : ‘21/Nov.
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU Screw kinds and tightening torques
Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following items.
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the Tightening Tightening Tightening
power plug from the power outlet. Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures (Nꞏm) (kgfꞏcm) (lbft)
described in this Service Manual. M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
• When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all the M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
parts including the cover installed and perform the operation check. M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
• Do not modify the LSU. Tapping screws (for iron)

• When visually checking the inside of the machine for the operation
check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones diameter fixed
(Nꞏm) (kgfꞏcm) (lbft)
safety may be at risk. M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
(Plate thickness
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer 0.8mm or above)
unit, the developing unit and the fusing unit M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
(Plate thickness
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the develop- 0.8mm or above)
ing unit, strictly observe the following items. M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
(Plate thickness
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the copy
less than 0.8mm)
and print image quality.
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
Drum unit (Plate thickness
• To prevent damage to the OPC drum, avoid working on the OPC less than 0.8mm)
drum unit in high intensity light areas.
Tapping screw (for plastic)
• Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights for a
long time. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
• When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it with diameter fixed
light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheets of (Nꞏm) (kgfꞏcm) (lbft)
paper to cover it.) M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the OPC drum surface.
Transfer unit
8. Relationship between the model name and
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
the designation in description of the
material on the transfer roller, primary transfer belt, and the second- document
ary transfer roller.
Developing unit Model name
Designation in
description
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
MX-2651 26ppm machine
material on the developing unit.
MX-3051 / MX-3061 / MX-3071 / 3061S / 3071S 30ppm machine 3
Fusing unit
MX-3551 / MX-3561 / MX-3571 / 3561S / 3571S 35ppm machine
• Be careful not to "leave" fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign MX-4051 / MX-4061 / MX-4071 / 4061S / 4071S 40ppm machine
material on the fusing roller and the external heating belt.
• Do not leave the fusing roller in contact state for a long time. If these
items are neglected, trouble may be generated in the copy and print
image quality.
7. Screw tightening torque

The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three types.
These types are classified according to the shape of the screw
grooves and use positions.
The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening
torques depending on the use position.
When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
table.
However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than specified
on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are described
on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such an exception.
Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an electrode or

a current flows, use enough care to tighten securely to avoid loosen-
ing.
MX-4071 NOTE FOR SERVICE – iii

2 : ‘21/Oct. 3 : ‘21/Nov.
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

MX-4071
Service Manual
1. System diagram
3 MX-3061S
MX-3561S
MX-PN14
MX-4061S MX-2651
B/C/D MX-UT10
MX-3071/3071S MX-3061 MX-3051
MX-FN28 PUNCH MODULE MX-3571/3571S MX-3561 MX-3551 UTILITY TABLE
MX-PN15
B/C/D FINISHER (1K) MX-4071/4071S MX-4061 MX-4051
PUNCH DIGITAL FULL COLOR DIGITAL FULL COLOR
MODULE MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-FN27 N MX-TR19 N
INNER FINISHER EXIT TRAY UNIT
MX-FN29 MX-LT10
SADDLE STITCH LONG PAPER
FINISHER (1K) MX-RB25 N FEEDING TRAY
PAPER PASS UNIT
2 MX-TR20/TR20 N
JOB SEPARATOR TRAY
MX-LC17 N
MX-PN16 MX-FN30 LARGE CAPACITY
TRAY
B/C/D FINISHER (3K)
PUNCH
MODULE MX-TU16
EXIT TRAY CABINET
MX-FN31
SADDLE STITCH
FINISHER (3K)
MX-DE29 N MX-DE25 N MX-DE26 N MX-DE27 N MX-DE28 N

LOW STAND/550 SHEET STAND/550 SHEET STAND/2x550 SHEET STAND/3x550 SHEET STAND/550&2100 SHEET
PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER
MX-PK13 MX-PF10 MX-PU10 MX-EB19 MX-EB20 MX-FX15

PS3 EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT DIRECT PRINT EXPANSION ENHANCED COMPRESSION OCR EXPANSION KIT FACSIMILE EXPANSION
KIT KIT KIT
AR-SU1 MX-FWX1 MX-FR62U MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10

STAMP UNIT INTERNET FAX DATA SECURITY KIT SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE
EXPANSION KIT KIT KIT KIT
MX-US50 MX-USA0 MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-EB18

SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE APPLICATION APPLICATION EXTERNAL ACCOUNT WIRELESS LAN ADAPTOR
KIT KIT INTEGRATION MODULE COMMUNICATION MODULE MODULE
MX-4071 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

2 : ‘21/Oct. 3 : ‘21/Nov.
2. Option list
MX-2651
3 MX-3071 MX-3071S MX-3061 MX-3061S
MX-3051
Model name Description MX-3571 MX-3571S MX-3561 MX-3561S Remarks
MX-3551
MX-4071 MX-4071S MX-4061 MX-4061S
MX-4051
Document Feed ― REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER ― ― STD STD STD
System ― DUPREX SINGLE PASS FEEDER STD STD ― ― ―
Paper Feed MX-DE25 N STAND/550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
System MX-DE26 N STAND/2x550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-DE27 N STAND/3x550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-DE28 N STAND/2100 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-DE29 N LOW STAND/550 SHEET PAPER OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
DRAWER
MX-LC17 N LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-LT10 LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
Paper Exit MX-TR19 N EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
System MX-TU16 EXIT TRAY CABINET STD/OPT OPT STD/OPT OPT STD/OPT *1
MX-TR20 JOB SEPARATOR TRAY OPT ― OPT ― OPT
2 MX-TR20 N JOB SEPARATOR TRAY OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-FN27 N FINISHER OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-PN14B PUNCH MODULE OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT For MX-FN27 N
MX-PN14C OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-PN14D OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-RB25 N PAPER PASS UNIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-FN28 FINISHER (1K) OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-FN29 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (1K) OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-PN15B PUNCH MODULE OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT For MX-FN28/
MX-PN15C OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT FN29
MX-PNX5D OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-FN30 FINISHER (3K) OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-FN31 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (3K) OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-PN16B PUNCH MODULE OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT For MX-FN30/
MX-PN16C OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT FN31
MX-PN16D OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
Printer MX-PK13 PS3 EXPANSION KIT STD STD STD STD OPT
Expansion MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-PU10 DIRECT PRINT EXPANSION KIT STD STD STD STD OPT
Image Send MX-EB19 ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT STD STD STD STD OPT
Expansion MX-EB20 OCR EXPANSION KIT STD STD STD STD OPT
MX-FX15 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT *2
AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-FWX1 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
Authentication / MX-FR62U DATA SECURITY KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
Security
Application / MX-USX1 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
Solution MX-USX5 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-US10 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-US50 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-USA0 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-AMX1 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-AMX2 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION STD/OPT STD STD/OPT STD OPT *1
MODULE
MX-AMX3 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE STD/OPT STD STD/OPT STD OPT *1
Other MX-UT10 UTILITY TABLE OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-EB18 Wireless LAN adaptor STD/OPT OPT STD/OPT OPT OPT *2
― KEYBOARD STD STD STD STD ― *2
STD: Standard equipment

OPT: Installable option
*1: Option in some area
*2: No support in some area
MX-4071 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

[2] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-4071
Service Manual
1. Basic specifications (2) Bypass
A. Engine specification 26 ppm 30 ppm 35 ppm 40 ppm

machine machine machine machine
Paper size
Photo Conductor OPC (Diameter: Bk: φ30mm, CL (Y/M/C): Mo Co Mo Co Mo Co Mo Co
φ30mm x3) no lor no lor no lor no lor
Recording method Electronic Photo (Laser) A3 15 15 15 15 17 17 19 19
Development method Dry-Type Dual-Component Magnetic Brush 8K 15 15 15 15 17 17 19 17
Development 11x17 15 15 15 15 17 17 19 17
Charging method Charged Saw-Tooth Method B4, 8.5x14, 8.5x13, 8.5x13.4,
16 16 17 17 20 19 21 19
Transfer method Middle Transfer Belt 8.5x13.5
Separation method Natural Separation Method A4, 16K 26 26 30 28 35 28 39 28
*Sub Separation pawl is equipped. 8.5x11 26 26 30 27 35 27 39 27
Cleaning method Counter Blade B5, A5 26 26 30 28 35 30 39 30
Fusing method Belt Method A4R, 16KR, 8.5x11R 20 20 20 20 23 22 25 22
Waste toner disposal Toner Collecting Container B5R, 7.25x10.5R 20 20 20 20 23 22 25 22
A5R, 5.5x8.5R 20 20 20 20 27 27 29 27
B. Engine speed (ppm) A3W, 12x18 14 14 14 14 16 16 18 16
(1) Tray1-4,LCC SRA4 25 25 25 25 26 26 30 27
SRA3 14 14 14 14 16 16 18 17
26 ppm 30 ppm 35 ppm 40 ppm OHP (A4,8.5x11) 25 21 25 21 25 21 25 21
machine machine machine machine OHP (A4R,8.5x11R) 20 17 20 17 20 17 20 17
Paper size
Mo Co Mo Co Mo Co Mo Co Extra 14 14 14 14 16 16 18 16
no lor no lor no lor no lor Extra ( - 215.9mm) and the
A3 15 15 16 16 18 18 20 20 length of horizontal scanning 26 26 30 27 35 27 39 27
8K 15 15 16 16 18 18 20 20 is 257mm and over.
11x17 15 15 16 16 18 18 19 19 Extra (216 - 225mm) and the
B4, 8.5x14, 8.5x13, 8.5x13.4, length of horizontal scanning 25 25 25 25 26 26 30 27
16 16 17 17 20 20 22 22 is 257mm and over.
8.5x13.5
A4, B5, 8.5x11, 16K, A5 26 26 30 30 35 35 40 40 Extra ( - 225mm) and the
length of horizontal scanning 20 20 20 20 26 26 29 27
A4R, 16KR, 8.5x11R, B5R,
21 21 21 21 23 23 26 26 is less than 257mm.
7.25x10.5R
Extra (225.1 - 297mm) 20 20 20 20 23 22 25 22
A5R, 5.5x8.5R 21 21 21 21 27 27 29 29
Extra (297.1mm - ) 14 14 14 14 16 16 18 16
A3W, 12x18 14 14 14 14 16 16 18 18
Envelope (Monarch, Com-9,
SRA4 25 25 25 25 28 28 32 32 17 15 17 15 17 15 17 15
Com-10, DL, C4, C5, C6)
SRA3 15 15 15 15 16 16 18 18
Heavy Paper (A3, 11x17, 8K) 15 13 15 13 15 13 15 13
Extra ( - 210mm) and the
Heavy Paper (B4, 8.5x14,
length of horizontal scanning 26 26 30 30 35 35 40 40 15 13 15 13 15 13 15 13
8.5x13, 8.5x13.4, 8.5x13.5)
is 257mm and over.
Heavy Paper (A4, 8.5x11,
Extra (210.1 - 215.9mm) and 25 21 25 21 25 21 25 21
16K, B5, A5R, 5.5x8.5R, A5)
the length of horizontal 26 26 30 30 35 35 40 40
scanning is 257mm and over. Heavy Paper (A4R, 16KR,
20 17 20 17 20 17 20 17
8.5x11R, B5R, 7.25x10.5R)
Extra (216 - 225mm) and the
length of horizontal scanning 25 25 25 25 28 28 32 32 Heavy Paper (A3W, 12x18) 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13
is 257mm and ove.r Heavy Paper (Extra) 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13
Extra ( - 225mm) and the Heavy Paper (Extra: -
25 21 25 21 25 21 25 21
length of horizontal scanning 21 21 21 21 27 27 29 29 215.9mm)
is less than 257mm. Heavy Paper (Extra:216 -
25 21 25 21 25 21 25 21
Extra (225.1 - 297mm) 21 21 21 21 23 23 26 26 225mm)
Extra (297.1mm - ) 14 14 14 14 16 16 18 18 Heavy Paper (Extra:225.1 -
20 17 20 17 20 17 20 17
Envelope (Monarch,Com-9) 17 15 17 15 17 15 17 15 297mm)
Heavy Paper (A3, 11x17, 8K) 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Heavy Paper (Extra:297.1mm
14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13
-)
Heavy Paper (B4, 8.5x14,
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Heavy Paper (Postcard:
8.5x13, 8.5x13.4, 8.5x13.5) 25 21 25 21 25 21 25 21
HIGH)
Heavy Paper (A4, B5, 8.5x11,
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 Heavy Paper (Postcard:
16K, A5R, 5.5x8.5R, A5) 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13
LOW)
Heavy Paper (A4R, 16KR,
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 Heavy Paper (SRA4) 25 21 25 21 25 21 25 21
8.5x11R, B5R, 7.25x10.5R)
Heavy Paper (A3W, 12x18) 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Heavy Paper (SRA3) 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13
Heavy paper (Extra: -
215.9mm)
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 C. Printable area
Heavy paper (Extra:216 -
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Void area Top: 41mm
225mm)
Rear: 2mm or more, 5mm or less, Total 8mm or less
Heavy paper (Extra:225.1 -
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 FR total: 4mm2mm
297mm)
Max printable area 319mmx1,292mm
Heavy paper (Extra:297.1mm
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
-)
Heavy paper (SRA3) 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Heavy paper (SRA4) 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
MX-4071 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
D. Engine resolution Thin paper mode Single 26 sheets/minute
39 sheets/minute (600x600dpi)
Resolution *1 Copy Writing (600x400dpi)
600x600dpi 26 sheets/minute
9,600 (equivalent)x600dpi (600x600dpi)
1,200x1,200dpi (BW only) Fax Single: N/A
Print Writing 80 sheets/minute
600x600dpi (200x200dpi, 1bit)
9,600 (equivalent)x600dpi Duplex:
1,200x1,200dpi 25 pages/minute
Tone (equivalent to Copy Writing (200x200dpi, 1bit)
256 levels *2) 600x600dpi 4bit Internet FAX Single: N/A
9,600(equivalent)x600dpi — 80 sheets/minute
Print Writing (200x200dpi, 1bit)
Duplex:
PCL 600x600dpi 1bit, 4bit
25 pages/minute
9,600(equivalnet)x600dpi —
(200x200dpi, 1bit)
1,200x1,200dpi 1bit
Scanner Single: Single:
PS 600x600dpi 1bit, 4bit 80 sheets/minute 80 sheets/minute
9,600(equivalnet)x600dpi — (200x200dpi, 1bit) (200x200dpi, 1bit)
1,200x1,200dpi 1bit (300x300dpi, 1bit) (300x300dpi, 1bit)
Duplex: Duplex:
*1: Default resolution is 600dpi 25 pages/minute 25 pages/minute
*2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8bit input will be per- (200x200dpi, 1bit) (200x200dpi, 1bit)
formed. (300x300dpi, 1bit) (300x300dpi, 1bit)
Document setup Upward standard (1toN feeding standard)
*1200x1200dpi N/A for MX-xx51
Direction
E. Scanner section Document standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random
position feeding)
(1) Resolution / Gradation Document transport Sheet-through method
method
Scan Resolution Monochrome Color Mix feeding (same Available (Simplex/Duplex)
for Copying (dpi) RSPF model DSPF model RSPF/DSPF AB or inch system,
OC 600x600 600x600 600x600 same width)
(default) (default) Random feeding Available (Duplex is not available)
600x400 600x400 (different (Combination allowed: A3&B4, B4&A4R, A4&B5,
600x300 combination of AB/ B5&A5, 11&8.5-inch.
RSPF 600x600 600x600 inch system, AMS effective. 2-sided scanning is disabled during
600x400 different width) random feeding.)
—
(default) Document weight Single Thin paper: 35 - 49g/m2, 9 - 13- lb. Bond
600x300 Plain paper: 50 - 128g/m2, 13 - 32 lb. Bond
DSPF 600x600 600x600 Duplex 50 - 105 g/m2, 13 - 28 lb. Bond
600x400 Document capacity Max. 120 sheets (64g/ m2 17 lb. Bond)
—
(default) Max. 100 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) or max. 13cm,
600x300 1/2 inch or less
Exposure Lamp White LED Types of document The following documents are NOT allowed;
Scan Levels 10bit that may not be OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper, carbon
transported paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken / torn
(2) Document Glass document, document with cuts and pastes,
documents printed by an ink ribbon, and perforated
Type Fixing Method (Flat bed) document except 2-punched / 3-punched (Perforated
Scan Range 297x432mm document by punch unit is allowed.)
Original Cover Left back Paper detection Yes
Standard Location Detectable paper Auto detection
Detection Yes size
Detection size Auto Detect Paper Feeding Right hand feeding
Heater Service parts Direction
(Scanner section) Stamp Option
Power Source Provided from the main unit
F. Document feeder Dimensions W 580 x D 465 x H 155mm, W 22 53/64 x D 18 20/64 x
(1) RSPF H 6 7/64inch
Weight Approx.6.7kg, Approx.14.8lb.
Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)
(2) DSPF
Scan Speed Monochrome (A4/8.5x11) Color (A4/8.5x11)
Copy Single: Single: Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)
80 sheets/minute 53 sheets/minute
Scan Speed Monochrome (A4/8.5x11) Color (A4/8.5x11)
(600x400dpi) (600x600dpi)
53 sheets/minute Duplex:
(600x600dpi) 22 pages/minute
Duplex: (600x600dpi)
25 pages/minute
(600x400dpi)
22 pages/minute
(600x600dpi)
Copy Single: Single: G. Paper feed section
110 sheets/minute 55 sheets/minute
(600x300dpi) (600x600dpi)
(1) Basic specification
82 sheets/minute
(600x400dpi) Duplex: Type Standard 1 Tray + Multi bypass
55 sheets/minute 110 pages/minutes Maximum 4 Trays+ Tandem desk + Multi bypass + LCC
(600x600dpi) (600x600dpi) Heater Service part
Duplex:
Tray Tray 1 Multi Bypass
220 pages/minutes
Paper Standard 550 sheets 100 sheets
(600x300dpi)
Capacity paper (80g/m2)
164 pages/minutes
(600x400dpi) Paper Size Detection Available Available
110 pages/minutes Paper Type Settings Yes
(600x600dpi) Method to change paper size By user By user
Default Inch-system 8.5x11 —
Thin mode 54 sheets/minute 36 sheets/minute Paper Size AB-system A4 —
(600x300dpi) (600x600dpi) Settings
46 sheets/minute Detection of Remaining None and 3 levels Available
(600x400dpi) Paper (100%, 67%, 33%, Detect “None” status
36 sheets/minute None) only.
(600x600dpi) Display of paper remaining No —
Fax Single: 110 sheets/minute N/A
(200x200dpi, 1bit) (2) Extra Paper Capacity
Duplex: 220 pages/
minutes (200x200dpi, Paper type Feeding Tray Multi Bypass
1bit) Postcard Yes 20 sheets
Internet FAX Single: 110 sheets/minute N/A Envelope 50 sheets 20 sheets
(200x200dpi, 1bit) OHP N/A 20 sheets
Duplex: 220 pages/ Heavy paper 106 - 220g/m2: 200 sheets, 106 - 256g/m2: 40 sheets
minutes (200x200dpi, 221 - 300g/m2: 100 sheets 257 - 300g/m2: 20 sheets
1bit)
Tab paper N/A 20 sheets
Scanner Single: 110 sheets/minute Single: 110 sheets/minute
Glossy paper N/A 1 sheet
(200x200dpi, 300×300dpi, (200x200dpi, 300×300dpi,
Others N/A 1 sheet
1bit) 8bit)
Duplex: 220 pages/ Duplex: 220 pages/
(3) Feedable Paper Type
minutes (200x200dpi, minutes (200x200dpi,
300×300dpi, 1bit) 300×300dpi, 8bit)
Multi
Document setup Upward standard (1toN feeding standard) Paper feed section Tray1
Bypass
Direction
Min.paper weight 60g/m2 55g/m2
Document standard Center standard
Max.paper weight 300g/m2 300g/m2
position
Thin paper 55-59g/m2 13-16 lb. bond - Yes
Paper Type
Document transport Sheet-through method

method Plain paper 1
Yes Yes
60-89g/m2 (16-24 lbs bond)
Mix feeding (same Available (Simplex/Duplex)
AB or inch system, Plain paper 2
Yes Yes
same width) 90-105g/m2 (24-28 lbs bond)
Random feeding Available (Simplex/Duplex) Recycled Paper Yes Yes
(different (Combination allowed: A3&B4, B4&A4R, A4&B5, Colored Paper Yes Yes
combination of AB / B5&A5, 11&8.5-inch. AMS effective.) Letter head Yes Yes
inch system, Pre printed Yes Yes
different width) Pre Punched Yes Yes
Document weight Single Thin paper: 35 - 49g/m2, 9 - 13- lb. Bond Heavy Paper 106-176g/m2 28 lbs bond-65 lbs
Yes Yes
Plain paper: 50 - 157g/m2, 13 - 32 lb. Bond Cover
Duplex 50 - 157g/m2, 13 - 32 lb. Bond Heavy Paper 177-220g/m2 65 lbs Cover-80 lbs
Yes Yes
Document capacity Max. 180 sheets (64g/ m2 17 lb. Bond) Cover
Max. 150 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) or max. Heavy Paper 221-256g/m2 80 lbs Cover-140 lbs
Yes Yes
19.5mm, 50/64inch or less Index
Types of document The following documents are NOT allowed; Heavy Paper 257-300g/m2140 lbs Index-110 lbs
Yes Yes
that may not be OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper, carbon Cover
transported paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken / torn Embossed paper - Yes
document, document with cuts and pastes, Envelope Yes Yes
documents printed by an ink ribbon, and perforated
Transparency - Yes
document except 2-punched / 3-punched (Perforated
Label - Yes
document by punch unit is allowed.)
Tab Paper - Yes
Paper detection Yes
Glossy Paper - Yes
Detectable paper Auto detection
size User setting 1-7 Yes Yes
Paper Feeding Right hand feeding
Direction
Stamp Option
Power Source Provided from the main unit
Dimensions H 615 x D 482 x H 159 mm, W 24_1/4 x D 19 x H 2_3/
8inch
Weight Approx.14.8 kg, Approx.32.6 lb.
Multi Ethernet 1 port
Paper feed section Tray1
Bypass Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX,
SRA3 320x450 Yes Yes 1000Base-T
Paper Size
12x18 (A3W) 305x457 Yes Yes Support TCP/IP(IPv4, IPv6): Supported

SRA4 320x225 Yes Yes Protocol IPX/SPX: Not Supported
Ledger (11x17) 279x432 Yes Yes EtherTalk: Not Supported
Legal (8.5x14) 216x356 Yes Yes USB 2.0(High ARM11 Not used
Asian Legal (8.5x13.5) 216x343 Yes Yes speed) (Host) 2 port SOC For Wireless
Mexican Legal (8.5x13.4) 216x340 Yes Yes LAN module
(internal)
Foolscap (8.5x13) 216x330 Yes Yes
USB HUB Front port
Letter (8.5x11) 279x216 Yes Yes
(4 port) For IC card
Letter-R (8.5x11R) 216x279 Yes Yes
reader
Executive-R (7.25x10.5R) 184x266 Yes Yes
(internal)
Invoice-R(5.5x8.5R) 140x216 Yes Yes
Keyboard
A3 297x420 Yes Yes (internal)
B4 257x364 Yes Yes Rear port
A4 297x210 Yes Yes Audio IC
A4R 210x297 Yes Yes USB 2.0 1port (default off)
B5 257x182 Yes Yes (High speed) (device)
B5R 182x257 Yes Yes
A5 210x148 Yes Yes J. MemoryꞏHard disk
A5R 148x210 Yes Yes
8K 270x390 Yes Yes ICU PWB
Flash
16K 270x195 Yes Yes eMMC REUS SOC HDD
memory
16KR 195x270 Yes Yes On board On board
Postcard 100x148 Yes Yes 2MB 16GB 1 GB(STD) 4 GB(STD) 500GB
Monarch 98x191 Yes Yes
eMMC
COM9 98.4x225.4 Yes Yes
COM10 105x241 - Yes Utilized memory Area Boot/Program area
DL 110x220 - Yes FAX data storage area: 1GB
Paper Size
C5 229x162 - Yes
Custom-Custom Size Yes Yes K. Wireless LAN
Extra - Yes
Item Specification
Custom range Min X 182mm / 140mm/
7_1/4 5_1/2 Compliant regulation IEEE802.11 n/g/b
inch inch Transmission method IEEE802.11n/g OFDM method
Max X 457mm / 457mm/ IEEE802.11b DS-SS method
18 inch 18 inch HOST I/F USB 2.0 Type A - Connect the module to MFP’s
Min Y 132mm / 90mm/ internal USB I/F
5_1/4 3_5/8 DEVICE I/F IEEE802.11 n/g/b
inch inch Antenna type Integrated antenna
Max Y 320mm / 320mm/ Access mode Infrastructure mode, Access point mode
12_1/2 12_1/2 Security WEP, WPA/WPA2-mixed PSK, WPA/WPA2-mixed
inch inch EAP*,WPA2 PSA,WPA2 EAP*
Long paper Width: *Not applicable to access point mode
90 - 320mm
- Yes
Length: L. Warm-up time
458 - 1300mm
Warm up time Main power SW on*1 33 sec
H. Operation panel Sub Power SW on*1 20 sec
Availability of Preheat mode Yes
Size 10.1 inch
Jam recovery time 20 sec
Form Dot matrix LCD, Touch panel
Number of Display Dot 1024 x 600 dot (WSVGA) *1: Result may change depending on the environmental condition.
Color Yes
LCD Drive Display Area (WxD) 222.72x125.28mm (CMO 10.1 inch) M. Power source
LCD Back Light LED backlight method
North America 200V
LCD Contrast Adjustment Yes
Voltage / Current AC120V 12A AC220-240V 8 A
Angle/Position Adjustment Yes (free stop)
Frequency 60Hz 50/60Hz
Touch Panel Method Resistive touch display (effective 2-
point touch) Power source cord Fixed type (Direct) Inlet type
Power switch 2 switches
I. Controller board Primary switch: in the front cover
Secondary switch (momentary SW): on the operation
CPU ARM11 600MHz panel
ARM9 400MHz (1W energy
saving mode 75MHz:)
SOC Cortex A72 Quad 1.4GHz
Interface
IEEE1284 Parallel No
N. Power consumption 4. Image send function
100V 200V A. Mode
Max. rated power 1.5 kW 1.84 kW
consumption*1 Mode Sub mode
Fax waiting power Yes No Scanner E-mail, FTP server, Shared folder (SMB),
consumption is 1W or less/ (Except when using Desktop, USB memory, HDD
*Condition of Standing by Fax/NW Internet Fax/ Direct SMTP -
Network: simultaneously.) Fax -
Connect with TCP/IP Data input (metadata) E-mail, FTP server, Shared folder (SMB),
protocol only. Desktop
Recovery time from Preheat 6 seconds Remote PC scan -
mode
*1: Power ON. Dehumidiator switch: OFF

B. Support image
O. Security Format /
Mode Compression Item
Admin/Service password scheme YES method
Scanner File format TIFF, PDF, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-1a, Encrypted
(Mono 2 PDF, XPS, Searchable PDF, Office file (pptx,
2. Copy function gradation) xlsx, docx), Text file (TXT) (UTF-8), Rich text
file (RTF)
A. First copy time
File format Color TIFF, JPEG, PDF, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-1a,
(Color/ Encrypted PDF, XPS, Searchable PDF, Office
Engine Mono Color Grayscale) file (pptx, xlsx, docx), Text file (TXT) (UTF-8),
OC 4.7 6.7 Rich text file (RTF)
RSPF 7.6 9.7 Compression Non-compression, G3 (1-dimentional)= MH
method (Modified Huffman), G4= MMR (Modified MR)
DSPF 7.3 10
(Mono 2
gradation)
3. Printer function Compression JPEG (High/Middle/Low), Black Letter
method Emphasis
A. Printer driver supported OS (Color/
Grayscale)
Custom Internet File format TIFF-FX(TIFF-F / TIFF-S)
Custom
OS PCL6 PPD PC-Fax TWAIN Fax (Monochrome)
PS
SPDL2-c Direct Compression G3 (1-dimentional)= MH (Modified Huffman),
Server 2008 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM SMTP
Windows
method G4 = MMR (Modified MR)

Server 2008 (Monochrome)
CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
x 64 Fax Compression MH/ MR/ MMR/JBIG
Windows 7 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM method
Windows 7 (Monochrome)
x 64 File per page (Setting of the number of pages available)
Windows 8.1 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8.1
C. Image processing
x 64
Server 2012
(1) Color Mode
x 64
Internet Fax/
Windows 10 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM Scanner Fax
Windows
Direct SMTP
Windows 10
CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM B&W Yes Yes Yes
x64
Grayscale Yes N/A N/A
Server 2016
CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM Full color Yes N/A N/A
x64
X10.6 No CD-ROM No No No Auto Color Selection
Yes N/A N/A
Mac
(ACS)
X10.7 No CD-ROM No No No
X10.8 No CD-ROM No No No (2) Resolution
X10.9 No CD-ROM No No No
X10.10 No CD-ROM No No No Internet Fax/ Direct
Level Scanner Fax
X10.11 No CD-ROM No No No SMTP
X10.12 No CD-ROM No No No 1 100x100dpi 200x100 dpi Standard: 203.2x97.8 dpi
X10.13 No CD-ROM No No No (Half Tone: N/A.) (Half Tone: N/A.)
2 150x150dpi N/A N/A
B. PDL emulationꞏFont 3 200x200dpi 200x200dpi Fine (203.2x195.6 dpi)
4 300x300dpi 200x400dpi Super Fine (203.2x391 dpi)
PDL (command) Pre-installed font Optional Font 5 400x400dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine (406.4x391 dpi)
PCL5c/PCL6 STD European outline font Barcode font 6 600x600dpi 600x600dpi N/A
compatible =80 styles =28 styles
Line printer font (BMP)
(3) Exposure / Original Type
=1 style
Internet Fax/
Genuine Postscript3 STD European outline font Mode Scanner Fax
— Direct SMTP
=139 styles
Halftone reproduction Equivalent to <- <-
Font for List Print STD Arfic mobile font
— 256
Scalable font
gradations
Unicode font STD
Exposure Auto Yes <- <-
Adjustment Manual 5 levels <- <-
Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Original Text Yes N/A N/A
document Text / Photo Yes N/A N/A
type Text / Printed Yes N/A N/A
(Selectable photo
in manual Photo Yes N/A N/A
mode)
Printed photo Yes N/A N/A
Map Yes N/A N/A
Area devision + Suppress Yes N/A N/A
background
Selection of image quality N/A Halftone Halftone
(B&W only) (B&W only)
ON/OFF ON/OFF
D. Number of available Fax sending/receiving

Sending 100 messages (in common use with Image send) or 20000
images (in common use with Copy/Print/Image send)
Receiving 400 messages/2000 images (in common use with Fax and
Internet Fax for both messages and images)
*Use ITU-T No.1 chart
5. Dimension and weight

Outer dimensions DSPF model:
(WxDxH) 616 x 660 x 838 (mm)
24.17/64 x 25.63/64 x 33 (inch)
RSPF model:
608 x 650 x 834 (mm)
23.15/16 x 25.19/32 x 32.27/32 (inch)
Dimensions occupied DSPF model: 1009 x 660 x 838 (mm) when
by machine extending bypass tray
RSPF model: 1003 x 650 x 834 (mm) when
extending bypass tray
Weight (Not including DSPF model: 87.1 kg 191.2 lb
consumables. Including RSPF model: 78.9 kg 173.1 lb
photoconductor and
developer.)
6. Environmental conditions
(Humidity)
85%
60%
AREA 1
20%
10 °C 30 °C 35 °C (Temperature)
1 : ‘19/Feb. 2 : ‘21/Oct.
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

MX-4071
Service Manual
1. Consumable system table

A. 26 ppm / 30 ppm / 35 ppm machine
(1) North America, Central America, South America
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge (Black) MX-61NT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life:A4/Letter size at area
Toner cartridge (Cyan) MX-61NT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10 coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) MX-61NT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
Toner cartridge (Yellow) MX-61NT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
Developer (Black) MX-61NV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 - 10
Developer MX-61NV-SA Developer 1 - 10
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
(3 colors/set)
1 Developer (Cyan) MX-61NV-CA Developer (Cyan developer) 1 - 10
Developer (Magenta) MX-61NV-MA Developer (Magenta developer) 1 - 10
Developer (Yellow) MX-61NV-YA Developer (Yellow developer) 1 - 10
Drum MX-60NR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printed life
rotation 26 ppm:BK:180K CL:150K
Drum unit MX-40NU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 30/35 ppm:BK:200K CL:150K
(Process unit+Drum) rotation
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 Maximum printed life
Charger cleaner 1 26 ppm:BK:200K CL:170K
2 * Discontinued after production in March 2021 30/35 ppm:BK:230K CL:170K
(2) Europe, Australia
Qty in
package
Toner cartridge (Black) MX-61GT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life:A4/Letter size at area
Toner cartridge (Cyan) MX-61GT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10 coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) MX-61GT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
Toner cartridge (Yellow) MX-61GT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
Toner cartridge (Black) MX-61GT-BB Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 20K 10
Toner cartridge (Cyan) MX-61GT-CB Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Magenta) MX-61GT-MB Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Yellow) MX-61GT-YB Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 12K 10
Developer (Black) MX-61GV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 - 10
Developer MX-61GV-SA Developer 1 - 10
(3 colors/set)
1 Developer (Cyan) MX-61GV-CA Developer (Cyan developer) 1 - 10
Developer (Magenta) MX-61GV-MA Developer (Magenta developer) 1 - 10
Developer (Yellow) MX-61GV-YA Developer (Yellow developer) 1 - 10
Drum MX-60GR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printed life
Drum unit MX-40GU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 30/35 ppm:BK:200K CL:150K
30/35 ppm:BK:230K CL:170K
MX-4071 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

1 : ‘19/Feb.
(3) New Zealand
Qty in
package
(3 colors/set)
Drum unit MX-40GU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 30/35 ppm:BK:200K CL:150K
30/35 ppm:BK:230K CL:170K
(4) Asia (Except for Singapore, India), Hong Kong
Qty in
package
Toner cartridge (Black) MX-61AT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life:A4/Letter size at area
Toner cartridge (Cyan) MX-61AT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10 coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) MX-61AT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
Toner cartridge (Yellow) MX-61AT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
Developer (Black) MX-61AV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 - 10
Developer MX-61AV-SA Developer 1 - 10
(3 colors/set)
1 Developer (Cyan) MX-61AV-CA Developer (Cyan developer) 1 - 10
Developer (Magenta) MX-61AV-MA Developer (Magenta developer) 1 - 10
Developer (Yellow) MX-61AV-YA Developer (Yellow developer) 1 - 10
Drum MX-60AR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printed life
Drum unit MX-40AU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 30/35 ppm:BK:200K CL:150K
30/35 ppm:BK:230K CL:170K
(5) Singapore, India
Qty in
package
Toner cartridge (Black) MX-61AT-BB Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 20K 10
Toner cartridge (Cyan) MX-61AT-CB Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Magenta) MX-61AT-MB Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Yellow) MX-61AT-YB Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 12K 10
(3 colors/set)
Drum unit MX-40AU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 30/35 ppm:BK:200K CL:150K
30/35 ppm:BK:230K CL:170K

1 : ‘19/Feb.
(6) Middle East, Africa
Qty in
package
Toner cartridge (Black) MX-61FT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life:A4/Letter size at area
Toner cartridge (Cyan) MX-61FT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10 coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) MX-61FT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
Toner cartridge (Yellow) MX-61FT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
Toner cartridge (Black) MX-61FT-BB Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 20K 10
Toner cartridge (Cyan) MX-61FT-CB Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Magenta) MX-61FT-MB Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Yellow) MX-61FT-YB Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 12K 10
Developer (Black) MX-61FV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 - 10
Developer MX-61FV-SA Developer 1 - 10
(3 colors/set)
1 Developer (Cyan) MX-61FV-CA Developer (Cyan developer) 1 - 10
Developer (Magenta) MX-61FV-MA Developer (Magenta developer) 1 - 10
Developer (Yellow) MX-61FV-YA Developer (Yellow developer) 1 - 10
Drum MX-60FR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printed life
Drum unit MX-40FU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 30/35 ppm:BK:200K CL:150K
30/35 ppm:BK:230K CL:170K
(7) Taiwan, Philippines, Israel
Qty in
package
(3 colors/set)
Drum unit MX-40FU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 30/35 ppm:BK:200K CL:150K
30/35 ppm:BK:230K CL:170K

1 : ‘19/Feb. 2 : ‘21/Oct.
B. 40 ppm machine
Qty in
package
Toner cartridge (Black) MX-61NT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life:A4/Letter size at area
Toner cartridge (Cyan) MX-61NT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10 coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) MX-61NT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
Toner cartridge (Yellow) MX-61NT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
Developer (Black) MX-61NV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 - 10
Developer MX-61NV-SA Developer 1 - 10
(3 colors/set)
1 Developer (Cyan) MX-61NV-CA Developer (Cyan developer) 1 - 10
Developer (Magenta) MX-61NV-MA Developer (Magenta developer) 1 - 10
Developer (Yellow) MX-61NV-YA Developer (Yellow developer) 1 - 10
Drum MX-60NR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printed life
rotation BK:250K CL:200K
Drum unit MX-40NU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10
(Process unit+Drum) rotation Maximum printed life
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 BK:285K CL:230K
Charger cleaner 1
2 * Discontinued after production in March 2021
(2) Europe, Australia
Qty in
package
Toner cartridge (Black) MX-61GT-BB Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 20K 10
Toner cartridge (Cyan) MX-61GT-CB Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Magenta) MX-61GT-MB Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Yellow) MX-61GT-YB Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 12K 10
(3 colors/set)
Drum unit MX-40GU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10
Charger cleaner 1
(3) New Zealand
Qty in
package
(3 colors/set)
Drum unit MX-40GU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10
Charger cleaner 1

1 : ‘19/Feb.
(4) Asia (Except for Singapore, India), Hong Kong
Qty in
package
(3 colors/set)
Drum unit MX-40AU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10
Charger cleaner 1
(5) Singapore, India
Qty in
package
Toner cartridge (Black) MX-61AT-BB Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 20K 10
Toner cartridge (Cyan) MX-61AT-CB Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Magenta) MX-61AT-MB Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Yellow) MX-61AT-YB Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 12K 10
(3 colors/set)
Drum unit MX-40AU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10
Charger cleaner 1

1 : ‘19/Feb.
(6) Middle East, Africa
Qty in
package
Toner cartridge (Black) MX-61FT-BB Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 20K 10
Toner cartridge (Cyan) MX-61FT-CB Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Magenta) MX-61FT-MB Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 12K 10
Toner cartridge (Yellow) MX-61FT-YB Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 12K 10
(3 colors/set)
Drum unit MX-40FU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10
Charger cleaner 1
(7) Taiwan, Philippines, Israel
Qty in
package
(3 colors/set)
Drum unit MX-40FU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10
Charger cleaner 1

2. Maintenance parts list
A. 26 ppm / 30 ppm machine
Qty in
Model
Item Content Qty Life collective Remarks
name
package
Fusing belt kit MX-601FB Fusing belt unit 1 250K 4
Pressure roller kit MX-601LH Pressure roller 1 250K 10
Primary transfer belt kit MX-601B1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 250K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-601TL Primary transfer blade 1 250K 10
Cleaning roller 1
PTC kit MX-608CU PTC unit 1 250K 10
Secondary transfer roller kit MX-607U2 Secondary transfer roller 1 250K 10
Filter kit MX-607FL Ozone filter 1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-601HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 2) 1 50K 10
Main charger kit MX-407MK Main charger unit 1 Drum rotation 10 Standard printed life
Cleaning gum AS 1 1350K BK:200K CL:150K
Cleaning blade 1 Maximum printed life
BK:230K CL:170K
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge MX-SC11 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Stamp cartridge 2 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-601U1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 1
Fusing unit MX-409FU1 Fusing unit (120V series) 1 1
(2) Europe
Qty in
Model
name
package
Cleaning roller 1
UFP filter kit MX-609UF UFP filter 1 300K 10
BK:230K CL:170K
Fusing unit MX-409FU Fusing unit (200V series) 1 1

(3) Australia, New Zealand, Asia, Middle East, Africa, Phirippines, Israel
Qty in
Model
name
package
Cleaning roller 1
BK:230K CL:170K
Fusing unit MX-409FU Fusing unit 200V series) 1 1
B. 35 ppm / 40 ppm machine

Qty in
Model
name
package
Cleaning roller 1
Cleaning gum AS 1 1350K 35 ppm:BK:200K CL:150K
Cleaning blade 1 40 ppm:BK:250K CL:200K
Maximum printed life
35 ppm:BK:230K CL:170K
Fusing unit MX-409FU1 Fusing unit (120V series) 1 1

(2) Europe
Qty in
Model
name
package
Cleaning roller 1
UFP filter kit MX-609UF UFP filter 1 300K 10
(3) Australia, New Zealand, Asia, Middle East, Africa, Phirippines, Israel
Qty in
Model
name
package
Cleaning roller 1

3. Definition of drum life end 4. Production number identification
When the drum counter reaches the maximum printable count. A. OPC drum
When the drum rpm reaches the specified count.
When either of the above reach the specified count, it is judged as life
end.
In an actual case, the ratio of monochrome output and color output

may differ greatly.
When data of mixed documents (monochrome and color) are output,
monochrome document data may be output in the color mode in order
to prevent against fall in the job efficiency. (ACS auto color selection).
In addition, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well
as output operation, the drum rotates.
Therefore, the drum consuming level cannot be determined only by
the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the specified
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
amount, it is judged as life end.
To check the drum life, use SIM22-13.
The lot number is comprised of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the con-
tent as follows.
However, when the copy/print quantity is large and the drum counter
The number is printed on the flange on the front side.
reaches the maximum printable quantity even if the rpm does not
reach the specified amount, it is judged as life end. Digit Character type Content
The table which shows the relation between the standard printable 1 Number For this model is 2
quantity and the maximum printable quantity in the specified rpm 2 Alphabet Model conformity code
amount is as follows. 3 Number End digit of the production year
4 Number or Production month
X, Y, Z X stands for October
* Standard printable quantity means the printing quantity under the
Y November
specified drum count by using the specified test data Z December
5 Number Day of the production date
Drum 6
7 Number or Day of the month of packing
Standard printable Maximum Rotation X, Y, Z X stands for October
number printable Y November
number Z December
Mono Color Mono Color Mono Color 8 Number Day of the packing date
26 ppm 9
180K 150K 200K 170K 1350K 1350K
machine
10 Alphabet Production factory
30 ppm
200K 150K 230K 170K 1350K 1350K
machine B. Developer
35 ppm
200K 150K 230K 170K 1350K 1350K
machine
40 ppm
250K 200K 285K 230K 1350K 1350K C. M .Y
machine
BK
3B301
The lot number is 8 digits (BK) and 5 digits (CMY) in length. Each digit
indicates the content as follows.
The number is printed on the back side of the developer bag.

[BK] 5. Environmental conditions
Digit Character type Content
2 Number End digit of the production year （Humidity）
3 Number Production month
85%
4
60%
6
7 hyphen
8 Number production lot
[C,M,Y]
20%
Digit Character type Content
1 Number End digit of the production year 10℃ 30℃ 35℃
（Temperature）
3 Number or Production month
X, Y 0 stands for October
X November Standard environmental Temperature 21 – 25°C
Y December conditions Humidity 50 ± 10%RH
5 Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35°C
conditions Humidity 20 – 85%RH
C. Toner cartridge
The number is printed on the side of the toner cartridge Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state.
Drum:36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state.
: Unit code/Model name

: Color code
(Black: BK/Cyan: CY/Magenta: MA/Yellow: YE)
: Destination
: Skating
: Production factory
: Production date (YYYYMMDD)
: Serial number
: Version number
: Line No.

MX-4071
[4] Service Manual
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. External view
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Output tray (exit tray cabinet)* Output is delivered to this tray.
2 Job separator tray (upper tray)* Received faxes and printed papers are delivered to this tray.
3 Automatic document feeder RSPF
It automatically feeds and scans multiple originals.
DSPF
Both sides of 2 sided originals can be automatically scanned at one time.
4 USB port (A type) This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine. Supports USB 2.0
(Hi-Speed).
5 Operation panel This panel hosts the [Power] button, [Power Save] button/indicator, error indicator, [Home Screen] button,
main power button, data notification indicator and touch panel. Use the touch panel to operate each of
these functions.
6 Exit tray unit (right tray)* Set this tray as the output tray if needed.
7 Keyboard Use this as a substitute for the soft keyboard displayed on the touch panel. When not being used, it can
be stored under the operation panel.
8 Inner finisher* This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper.
* Optional
MX-4071 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

9 10 11 12 13 14
19
20
21
15 16 17 18

9 Finisher* This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper.
10 Saddle Stitch Finisher* This staples and folds paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper.
11 Paper pass unit* Relay between the machine and the finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
12 Motion sensor This sensor detects the presence of a person that approaches the machine, and [MX-xx61/xx71]
automatically wakes the machine from sleep mode (Motion Sensor Mode Only).
13 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R,
pull out the extension guide.
14 Tray 1 Store paper in this tray.
15 Punch module* This is used to punch holes in output. Requires an inner finisher, finisher, or saddle stitch finisher.
16 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" to replace a toner cartridge.
17 Tray 3 (when a stand/2x550/3x550 sheet Store paper in this tray.
paper drawer is installed)*
18 Tray 4 (when a stand/3x550 sheet paper Store paper in this tray.
drawer is installed)*
19 Tray 2 (when a stand/550/2x550/3x550/ Store paper in this tray.
550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed)*
20 Tray 4 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet Store paper in this tray.
21 Tray 3 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet Store paper in this tray.
* Optional

A. DUPLEX SINGLE PASS FEEDER
1 2 3 4 5
6 7

1 Document feeding cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed.
2 Original guides These guides help ensure that the original is scannedcorrectly. Adjust the guides to the width of the
original.
3 Document feeder tray Place the original. Place the original with the print side facing up.
4 Original exit tray The original is discharged to this tray after scanning.
5 Original size detector This unit detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the automatic document feeder are scanned here.
7 Document glass If you want to scan books or other thick originals that cannot be fed through the automatic document
feeder, place them on this glass.
B. REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8

1 Document feed roller Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration roller and
this roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.
2 Document feeding cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed.
3 Original guides These guides help ensure that the original is scannedcorrectly. Adjust the guides to the width of the
original.
4 Document feeder tray Place the original. Place the original with the print side facing up.
5 Original exit tray The original is discharged to this tray after scanning.
6 Original size detector This unit detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
7 Scanning area Originals placed in the automatic document feeder are scanned here.
8 Document glass If you want to scan books or other thick originals that cannot be fed through the automatic document
feeder, place them on this glass.

2. Internal structure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12
No. Name Function/Operation Note

1 The main power switch Use this switch to turn on the power for the machine. When using the
fax or Internet fax functions, always keep this switch in the “ | ”
position.
2 Toner cartridge This cartridge contains toner. When the toner in a cartridge runs out,
replace with new one.
3 Waste toner box This container collects excess toner that remains after printing.
A service technician collects

replaced waste toner box.
4 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
The fusing unit is hot. Take

care not to burn yourself when
removing a misfeed.
5 Transfer belt During full color printing, the toner images of the four colors on the
photoconductive drums are combined
together on the transfer belt. During black and white printing, only the Do not touch or damage the
black toner image is transferred onto the transfer belt. transfer belt. This may cause a
defective image.
6 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
7 Paper reversing section cover This unit is used for reversing paper when 2-sided printing is
performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
8 Waste toner box release button Press this button when you need to release the waste toner box lock to
replace the waste toner box or clean the laser unit.
9 Handle Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.
10 A stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2, 3 and 4.
paper drawer right-side cover
11 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1.
12 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right
side cover.

3. I/F connectors

1 USB port Connect a USB device to the machine.
2 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. Use a shielded LAN
cable.
3 Extension phone jack (TEL)* When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this jack.
4 Telephone line jack (LINE)* When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this jack.
5 Power plug
* Optional

4. Operation panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 Data notification indicator The indicator lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of a job. When the Job separator or Exit tray unit
(right tray) is used for output, this blinks until the output is removed.
2 Touch panel Messages and keys appear on the touch panel display. Operate the machine by directly tapping the
displayed keys.
3 Communication indicator This lamp illuminates when the power to the machine is turned on and when logs in to the machine.
4 Error indicator Lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of the error.
5 Main power indicator This lamp lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the “ ” position. Blinks green during the
time that the [Power] button does not operate immediately after the main power switch is switched on.
6 [Power] button Use this button to turn the machine's power on and off.
7 [Power Save] button/indicator Use this button to set the machine to Sleep mode for energy saving. [Power Save] button blinks when the
machine is in Sleep Mode.
8 [Home Screen] key Use this button to display the home screen.
9 NFC touch point area Connect mobile device to the machine by touching the mobile device. [MX-xx61/xx71]
[Home Screen] key You can change the angle of the touch panel.
Use your finger to touch the [Home Screen] key. If you use a pen or
other tool to touch the key, it may not operate properly. Risk of mal-
functioning if you use with jewelry or other accessories.

5. DSPF
A. Rollers
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No. Name Function and operation

1 Pickup roller Picks up document and feed it to the document feed roller
2 Document feed roller Perform the document feed operation of documents
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double feed
4 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from paper feed roller to transport roller 2
5 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides transport power of the transport roller to document
6 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from transport roller to registration roller
7 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to
document
8 Registration roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport
9 Registration roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the registration roller to
document
10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the No.1 scan section to the transport roller 4
11 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document
12 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 3 to the document exit roller
13 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document
14 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document
15 Document exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the document exit roller and provides transport power of the document exit roller to
document

B. Sensors and switches
SCOV SPRDMD
SPPD2 STUD
SPED1 SPLS2
SPPD1
SPLS1
STLD SPWS
SPED2
SPPD3 SPOD
SOCD SPPD5
SPPD4 SPOTD
SLCOV
Signal name Name Type Function and operation

SCOV Upper cover sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the upper cover
SLCOV Lower cover sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the lower cover
SOCD SPF sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the SPF unit
SPED1 Document sensor 1 Transmission type Detects document empty of the document feeder tray
SPED2 Document sensor 2 Transmission type Detects document empty of the document feeder tray
SPLS1 Document length sensor 1 Reflection type Detects document length of the document feeder tray
SPLS2 Document length sensor 2 Reflection type Detects document length of the document feeder tray
SPOD Document exit sensor Transmission type Detects document exit
SPOTD Document exit tray sensor Transmission type Detects document empty of the document exit tray
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects document pass
SPPD2 Document pass sensor 2 Reflection type Detects document pass
SPRDMD Document random sensor Transmission type Detects document size in random document feed
SPWS Document width sensor Volume type resistor Detects document width of the document feeder tray
STLD Tray lower limit sensor Transmission type Detects lower limit of the document feeder tray
STUD Tray upper limit sensor Transmission type Detects upper limit of the document feeder tray

C. Motors/Clutches/PWB/Lamps/Fan
STRC
SPFM
STRRC
SPFC
SRRC
SPFFAN
CCD PWB SPOM

SLUM
LED PWB
DSPF PWB
LED PWB
POT LED PWB

SLUM Lift motor PM stepping motor Lifts up and down the document feeder tray
SPFC Document feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of rollers in the document feed section
SPFFAN SPF fan DC brushless motor Cools the motors and the clutches
SPFM Transport motor DC brushless motor Drives transport roller
SPOM Document exit motor PM stepping motor Drives document exit roller
SRRC Registration roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of registration roller
STRC Transport roller 2 clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of transport roller 2
STRRC Transport roller 1 clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of transport roller 1
Name Function and operation

CCD PWB Scans document images and perform A/D conversion of scanning signal
DSPF PWB Controls image data process and all the DSPF
LED PWB Radiates light onto document for the CCD to scan document image
POT LED PWB Radiates light onto the document exit tray for notifying that document has been discharged

6. RSPF
A. Rollers
5 4 3 2 1
6 7 8 9 10 11
No. Name Function and operation

2 Document feed roller Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration roller and this roller to
correct the start position of document skew and document image scan
3 Separation roller Separates a document to prevent double-feeding
4 Registration roller (Drive) Transports a document to the transport roller 1 / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the document
scanning timing
5 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to the
document
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to the
document
8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller
9 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to the
document
10 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning the back
surface
11 Paper exit roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to the
document

B. Sensors
SCOV
SPPD1 SPED SPLS2
SPLS1
SPPD2
SPWS
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD4

SCOV Cover sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the cover
SOCD SPF sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the SPF unit
SPED Document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty of the document feeder tray
SPLS1 Document length sensor 1 Transmission type Detects document length of the document feeder tray
SPLS2 Document length sensor 2 Transmission type Detects document length of the document feeder tray
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects document feed and document size in random paper feed
SPPD4 Document pass sensor 4 Transmission type Detects document exit and switchback
SPWS Document width sensor Volume type resistor Detects document width of the document feeder tray

C. Motors/Clutches/Solenoidos/PWB
SPFM
SRRC
SPUM
SPRS
RSPF DRIVER PWB

SPFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives transport roller
SPRS Document exit roller Electromagnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of document exit roller
solenoid
SPUM Document feed motor Stepping motor Drives document feed roller
SRRC Registration roller clutch Electromagnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of registration roller
Name Function and operation

RSPF DRIVER PWB Drives the motor, the solenoid and the clutch in the SPF section

7. Sensors
MHPS OCSW
TH_US2
POD4
TFD2
SHPOS
TH_UM APPD1
POD2
TH_US1
POD1 HLPCD
DSW_ADU
TCED_Y TCED_M TCED_C TCED_K
REGS_F/PCS_F TH_LM
REGS_R/PCS_R
1TUD_CL 2TPD
1TUD_K APPD2
DHPD_CL DHPD_K
TH_CL/
HUD_CL 2TUD
MPLD1
TNFD MPED
MPWS
TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C TCS_K MPFD
PPD2
C1PFD
TNFD2 C1PFPD
LSU_TH1
BD C1LUD
LSU_TH2 C1PED
C1SS1
C1SS2
C1SS3 C1SPD DSW_C1
C1SS4

1TUD_CL Transfer mode sensor (CL) Transmission type Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode
1TUD_K Transfer mode sensor (K) Transmission type Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode
2TPD Secondary transfer paper sensor Transmission type Detects paper remained after recovery from paper JAM
2TUD Secondary transfer position sensor Transmission type Detects the position (separation) of the secondary transfer unit
APPD1 ADU paper transport sensor 1 Transmission type Detects paper entry and paper pass in the ADU section
APPD2 ADU paper transport sensor 2 Transmission type Detects paper pass of the transport roller 9
BD Laser beam sensor Bindiode Detects laser beam scan timing
C1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit sensor Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the paper lift up (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PED Paper empty sensor Transmission type Detects paper empty (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PFD Paper transport sensor Transmission type Detects paper pass in the paper transport section (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PFPD Paper pass sensor Transmission type Detects paper pass in the paper transport section (Paper feed tray 1)
C1SPD Paper remaining quantity sensor Transmission type Detects the paper remaining quantity (Paper feed tray 1)
C1SS1-4 Paper size sensor Tact switch Detects paper size (Paper feed tray 1)
DHPD_CL Drum phase sensor (CL) Transmission type Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum
DHPD_K Drum phase sensor (K) Transmission type Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum
DSW_ADU ADU cover sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the ADU cover
DSW_C1 Transport cover sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the transport section cover (Paper feed tray 1)
HLPCD Fusing pressure sensor Transmission type Detects the fusing pressure state
LSU_TH1 LSU temperature sensor 1 Thermistor Detects LSU temperature
LSU_TH2 LSU temperature sensor 2 Thermistor Detects LSU temperature
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Transmission type Detects the scanner home position
MPED Paper empty sensor Transmission type Detects presence of paper (Manual paper feed tray)
MPFD Paper feed sensor Transmission type Detects paper pass (Manual paper feed tray)
MPLD1 Paper length sensor Transmission type Detects the paper length (Manual paper feed tray)
MPWS Paper width sensor Volume type resistor Detects the paper width (Manual paper feed tray)
OCSW Paper size detection trigger sensor Transmission type Detects generation of the paper size detection trigger signal
POD1 Paper exit sensor 1 Transmission type Detects paper transport from the fusing section
POD2 Paper exit sensor 2 Transmission type Detects paper transport to the center paper exit tray

POD4 Paper exit sensor 4 Transmission type Detects paper transport to the upper paper exit tray
PPD2 Paper transport sensor 2 Reflection type Detects paper pass in the transport roller 4 and registration roller
REGS_F/ Image registration / Density sensor (F) Reflection type Detects image color shift and the toner patch density
PCS_F
REGS_R/ Image registration / Density sensor (R) Reflection type Detects image color shift and the toner patch density
PCS_R
SHPOS Shifter home position sensor Transmission type Detects the shifter home position
TCED_C Toner cartridge ejecting sensor (C) Transmission type Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge
TCED_K Toner cartridge ejecting sensor (K) Transmission type Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge
TCED_M Toner cartridge ejecting sensor (M) Transmission type Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge
TCED_Y Toner cartridge ejecting sensor (Y) Transmission type Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge
TCS_C Toner sensor (C) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge
Detects toner density
TCS_K Toner sensor (K) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge
TCS_M Toner sensor (M) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge
TCS_Y Toner sensor (Y) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge
TFD2 Paper exit tray full sensor Magnetic sensor Detects paper full in the center paper exit tray
TH_CL/ Temperature / Humidity sensor Thermistor Detects the temperature and the humidity
HUD_CL
TH_LM Fusing temperature sensor (main) Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the pressure roller
TH_UM Fusing temperature sensor (main) Thermistor Detects the surface temperature at the center section of the fusing belt
TH_US1 Fusing temperature sensor (sub1) Thermistor Detects the surface temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt
TH_US2 Fusing temperature sensor (sub2) Thermistor Detects the surface temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt
TNFD Waste toner sensor Transmission type Detects full of waste toner
TNFD2 Waste Developer sensor Transmission type Detects full of waste developer

8. Switches
MSW
DSW_R
DSW_F
Signal name Name Type Function and Operation

DSW_F Front door switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door. Detects ON/OFF of the power line of the
fusing unit, the motors, and the LSU laser.
DSW_R Right transport unit (right door) switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right paper transport section (right door). Detects ON/
OFF of the power line of the fusing unit, the motors, and LSU laser.
MSW Main power switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main power.

9. Clutches and solenoids
POGS
1TURC_1
1TURC_2
2TURC
MPFS
HPFC
MPUC
C1PUC
C1PFC

1TURC_1 Primary transfer separation clutch 1 Magnetic clutch Controls separation of the primary transfer unit
1TURC_2 Primary transfer separation clutch 2 Magnetic clutch Controls separation of the primary transfer unit
2TURC Secondary transfer separation clutch Magnetic clutch Controls separation of the secondary transfer unit
C1PFC Vertical transport clutch Magnetic clutch Controls the transport roller (Paper feed tray1)
C1PUC Paper feed clutch Magnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller (Paper feed tray1)
HPFC Horizontal transport clutch Magnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller (Paper feed tray1, Manual paper
feed tray)
MPFS Paper feed solenoid Magnetic solenoid Controls the paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
MPUC Paper feed clutch Magnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
POGS Gate solenoid Magnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the gate solenoid selecting upper tray and lower tray

10. Drive motors
MIM
POM
SBM TNM_Y
OSM
TNM_M
ADUM1
TNM_C
PRM TNM_K
PGM
FUM
ADUM2
DM_CL
DM_K
RRM PFM
CPFM
C1LUM

ADUM1 ADU motor 1 DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller in the right door and right paper exit section
ADUM2 ADU motor 2 DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller in the right door section
C1LUM Paper tray lift motor DC brush motor Lifts the lift plate of the paper feed tray (Paper feed tray1)
CPFM Paper feed motor DC brushless motor Drives the paper feed section
DM_CL Drum motor (CL) DC brushless motor Drives the OPC drum/developing section
DM_K Drum motor (K) DC brushless motor Drives the OPC drum, developing and primary transfer section
FUM Fusing motor DC brushless motor Drives the fusing section
MIM Scan motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner unit (scan, return operations)
OSM Offset motor Stepping motor Offsets (shifts) paper
PFM Transport motor DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller 4
PGM Polygon motor DC brushless motor Scans laser beams
POM Paper exit motor DC brushless motor Drives the roller in the paper exit section
PRM Fusing pressure motor Stepping motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing roller pressure
RRM Registration motor DC brushless motor Drives the registration roller
(Controls the timing of the transfer image for the paper)
SBM Reverse motor DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller in duplex mode
TNM_C Toner motor (C) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit
TNM_K Toner motor (K) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit
TNM_M Toner motor (M) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit
TNM_Y Toner motor (Y) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit

11. Rollers
32
31
30
29
22
21
19
20
18
17
23
24
35
34
33
25
26
28
9
8
10
27
7
6
1
2
15 16 13 14 11 12 3 5 4
No. Name Function and Operation

1 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray to the transport roller 3
3 Paper pickup roller Feeds paper to the paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 1)
4 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent double feeding (Paper feed tray 1)
5 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section (Paper feed tray 1)
7 Transport roller 2(Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 3
8 Paper pickup roller Feeds paper to the paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
9 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section (Manual paper feed tray)
10 Separation roller Separate paper to prevent double feeding (Manual paper feed tray)
12 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and 2 to the transport roller 4
14 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller. Paper is buckled between the registration roller and this roller to correct the paper
skew and the relation between images and paper
15 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
16 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts relative position between the
images and paper
17 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the fusing section to the paper exit section and the switchback section
20 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports paper to the paper exit section
22 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper to transport roller 8

24 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper transported from switchback section to the transport roller 9
26 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper transported from transport roller 8 to the transport roller 4
27 Transport roller 10 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
28 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper transported from manual paper tray to the transport roller 4
29 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to paper
30 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper to the lower paper exit tray
32 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper to the upper paper exit tray or switchback to the ADU section
33 Heat roller Heats the fusing belt
34 Fusing roller The sponge layer of the roller forms a wide nip between the fusing belt and fusing roller
35 Pressure roller Heats the back surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper

12. Lamps
CL_ON
DL_Y
DL_M
HL_UM/US
DL_C
CCFT HL_LM
DL_K

CCFT LCD backlight LED LCD backlight
CL_ON Scanner lamp LED Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image
DL_C Discharge lamp C LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum
DL_K Discharge lamp K LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum
DL_M Discharge lamp M LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum
HL_LM Heater lamp Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller
HL_UM/US Heater lamp Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller and the fusing belt

13. Fans and filter
1
PSFM1
PROFM1
FUFM
POFM
2
PROFM2
Signal name Name Function and Operation

FUFM Fusing fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section
POFM Paper exit fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section
PROFM1 Process fan 1 Discharges air and cools the process section
PSFM1 Power supply fan 1 Cools the power supply unit

1 Toner filter Prevents toner splash
2 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section

14. PWB/memory device
3
8 5
12 19
26
25
18
7
10, 17
11
6
14
16
21
22
4
23
2
24
20
13
15

1 AC PWB Noise filter for AC input power supply
2 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal
3 CCD PWB Scan document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal
4 DC PWB Generates DC voltage
5 eMMC PWB Stores the SOC program data, snapshot, the e-manual data, the watermark data, the log data
6 FRONT LED PWB Display indication state of MFP (Blue, Green, Red)
7 FRONT USB PWB Relays USB device and SCN MFP PWB
8 HDD Stores the filing data, the log data and authentication data also used as a work memory
9 HL PWB Drives the heater lamp
10 HOME KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal [For MX-xx51 series]
11 KEYBOARD CONTROL PWB Controls the input signal from keyboard SCN MFP PWB [For MX-xx61/xx71 series in some region]
12 LED DRIVER PWB Drives the scanner lamp
13 LSU PWB Controls the LSU and generates the video data. Controls laser diode and power
14 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal from SCN MFP PWB and controls the touch panel
15 MC PWB Generates the main charger voltage and DV bias voltage
16 MOTION SENSOR PWB Detects the approach of human in energy saving mode and send signal to SCN MFP PWB [For MX-xx61/xx71 series]
17 NFC HOME KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal and built in NFC tag [For MX-xx61/xx71 series]
18 ORS_LED Drives the LED for the document size detection
19 ORS_PD Outputs the document size detection signal
20 PCU PWB Controls engine section
21 PWR-R PWB Power switch, Buzzer, Display power ON / OFF status with green LED
22 RD I/F PWB Detects each sensor in the right door unit
23 SCN MFP PWB Controls image data (compression, decompression and filing) and controls the whole machine.
Converts print data into image data.
24 TC PWB Generates the transfer voltage
25 USB CN PWB Connect WIRELESS LAN PWB and SCN MFP PWB [Nothing in some region]
26 WIRELESS LAN PWB Connect the network by the wireless LAN [Nothing in some region]

15. Fuses and thermostats
TS US
TS UM
TS LM
DC PWB AC PWB
F2
F001
F1
F004 F005
F105
F104
F103
F102
F101
Signal name Name Type Section

F1 Fuse 20A 250V AC PWB (For 100V series)
F001 Fuse 10A/250V DC PWB
F004 Fuse 0.25A DC PWB
F005 Fuse 2A DC PWB
F101 Fuse 6.3A/250V DC PWB

TS LM Thermostat Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_LM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated
TS UM Thermostat Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated (center section)
TS US Thermostat Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated (edge section)

[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
MX-4071
Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Developing unit adjustment 1-A Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 High voltage values adjustment 2-A Main charger grid voltage adjustment 8-2
2-B Developing bias voltage adjustment 8-1
2-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 3 Image density sensor 3-A Image density sensor adjustment 44-2
adjustment
ADJ4 Print image position, image 4-A Print image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Print engine) (Manual 50-10
magnification ratio adjustment adjustment)
(Print engine) (Manual 4-B Print image position (main scanning direction, sub scanning direction adjustment, (Print 50-10
adjustment) engine) (Manual adjustment)
ADJ5 Print engine image distortion 5-A Print engine image distortion adjustment (Manual adjustment), OPC drum phase adjustment 50-22
adjustment, OPC drum phase (Automatic adjustment), Color registration adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
adjustment, Color registration 5-B Print engine image skew (LSU skew) adjustment (Manual adjustment) (No need to adjust 50-20
adjustment (Print engine normally) (64-1)
section) 5-C Color registration offset adjustment (No need to adjust normally) 50-20
ADJ6 Scan image distortion 6-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment (sub scanning direction distortion adjustment)
adjustment (Document table 6-B Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
mode)
ADJ7 Scanner image skew 7-A RSPF scan image skew adjustment
adjustment (DSPF/RSPF 7-B DSPF parallelism adjustment
mode) 7-C DSPF skew adjustment (front surface mode)
7-D DSPF skew adjustment (back surface mode)
ADJ8 Scan image focus adjustment 8-A Image focus adjustment (document table mode, DSPF/RSPF front surface mode) 48-1
8-B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ9 Scan image magnification ratio 9-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
adjustment (Manual 9-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
adjustment) (Document table mode)
9-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(DSPF/RSPF mode)
9-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(DSPF/RSPF mode)
ADJ10 Scan image off-center 10-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) 50-12
adjustment (Manual 10-B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) 50-12/50-6
adjustment)
ADJ11 Copy image position, image 11-A Copy image position, image loss (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) 50-1
loss adjustment (Manual 11-B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) 53-8
adjustment) 11-C Copy image position, image loss (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ12 Print lead edge image position adjustment (printer mode) 50-5
ADJ13/ Color balance and density Note before execution of the image quality adjustment
SET1 adjustment Copy image quality check
Printer image quality check
13-A Scanner calibration 13-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) (document table 63-3
(1) mode)
13-A Shading adjustment (DSPF mode) 63-2
(2)
13-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-3
(3)
SET Color balance 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup 63-7/8/11
1 adjustment target setup 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup 67-26/27/
28
13-B FR density variation 13-B FR density unevenness automatic correction 61-11
correction (1)
13-B FR density unevenness visual inspection correction 61-12
(2)
13-C Copy, printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (Basic 46-74
adjustment)
MX-4071 ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 1

Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ13/ Color balance and density 13-D Copy image quality 13-D Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic 46-24
SET1 adjustment adjustment (Basic (1) adjustment)
adjustment) 13-D Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual 46-21
(2) adjustment)
13-E Copy, Image send, FAX 13-E Color copy density adjustment (for each color copy 46-1
image quality adjustment (1) mode) (separately for the low density area and the high
(Individual adjustment) density area) (No need to adjust normally)
13-E Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each 46-2
(2) monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low density
area and the high density area) (No need to adjust
normally)
13-E Color copy color balance, gamma adjustment (for each 46-10
(3) color copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
13-E Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment (for each 46-16
(4) monochrome copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
13-E Automatic monochrome (Copy/scan/FAX) mode 46-19
(5) document density scanning operation (exposure
operation) conditions setting (No need to set normally)
13-E Document low density image density reproduction 46-32
(6) adjustment in the automatic monochrome (copy/scan/
FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
13-E Copy, scan low density image density adjustment (for 46-63
(7) each mode) (No need to adjust normally)
13-E Color copy, text, line image reproduction adjustment 46-27
(8) (edge gamma, density adjustment) (Text, Map mode)
(No need to adjust normally)
13-E Monochrome (Copy/scan/FAX) mode color document 46-37
(9) reproduction adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
13-E Color copy mode dark area gradation (black component 46-38
(10) quantity) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
13-E Color (copy/scan) mode sharpness adjustment (No 46-60
(11) need to adjust normally)
13-E Copy high density image density reproduction setting 46-23
(12) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
13-E Copy color balance adjustment (single color copy mode) 46-25
(13) (No need to adjust normally)
13-E DSPF/RSPF mode (copy/scan/FAX) density adjustment 46-9
(14) (No need to adjust normally)
13-E Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for each dither 46-54
(15) (Automatic adjustment)
13-E Dropout color adjustment (Normally not required) 46-55
(16)
13-E Watermark adjustment (Normally not required) 46-66
(17)
13-F Printer image quality 13-F Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 67-24
adjustment (Basic (1)
adjustment) 13-F Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25
(2)
13-G Printer image quality 13-G Printer density adjustment (low density section density 67-36
adjustment (Individual (1) adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment) 13-G Printer high density image density reproduction setting 67-34
(2) (supporting the high density section tone gap) (No need
to adjust normally)
13-G Printer gamma adjustment for each dither (Automatic 67-54
(3) adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
13-H Copy, Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 67-20
ADJ14 Paper size sensor adjustment 14-A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
14-B DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray document size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ15 Document size detection 15-A Sensitivity adjustment of the original size sensor 41-2
adjustment
ADJ16 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ17 Fusing paper guide position adjustment

3. Details of adjustment 7) Shake the toner cartridge horizontally several times
ADJ 1 Developing unit adjustment

1-A Toner density control reference value
setting
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
• When developer is replaced
Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is

replaced. Never execute it in the other cases. 8) Open the front cover and insert each toner cartridge
Perform the toner density reference control level adjustment with

the toner cartridges removed.
If adjustment is performed with toner cartridge installed, the EE-EL
trouble code or an over toner condition may occur.
1) With the front cover opened, enter Sim25-2
2) Close the front cover
3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The DV
roller rotates and the toner density sensor detects toner den-
sity and the output value is displayed.
The above operation is executed for 1 minutes and the aver-
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saves) as the reference toner density control value. Be sure to install the color cartridge to their proper positions.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation Avoid installation to a different color position.
is completed [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight.
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is
completed or not. Do not forcibly insert the toner cartridge.
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed Push it in until the cartridge is securely locked in place.
mode and the middle speed mode and the reference toner
density control value is set for each of them.
Developing units removed, be sure to remove the toner car-

tridges as well to prevent toner clogging.
If the operation is interrupted within 1 minutes the adjustment
result is not reflected.
Mounting location of the toner cartridge of each color
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the operation, the
operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal
display.
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL] or [EE-EC] is displayed, setting of the ref-
erence toner density control value is not completed normally.
Troubleshoot the cause, remove the cause and perform setting
again.
Error display Error name Details of error

EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 77 or
control voltage over 207
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 177 or
control voltage less than 52
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level other than 128 
3 9) Close the front cover
10) Confirm that "Toner replacement in progress" is displayed and
5) Cancel Sim 25-2
wait until the display disappears (It takes 30 sec - 6 min)
6) Confirm that "Instal the toner cartridge " is displayed and instal
the toner cartridge by the following procedures
This procedure is for checking the toner supply operation from

the toner cartridge to the DV unit. The operation time differs
depending on the toner quantity in the toner cartridge, uneven
distribution of toner and the internal state of the toner car-
tridge.

3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) in the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
Do not perform operations which interrupt the above operation Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified on
such as opening the front cover, entering the Sim mode and the label attached on the MC PWB.
turning OFF/ON the power. If this precaution is ignored. Trou-
ble codes F2-40 - 43 or F2-64 - 67 or a over toner condition
may occur.
When replacing developer always replace all the three colors of

Yellow, Magenta and Cyan.
If only one color is replaced color balance may be adversely
affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.
When developer is replaced be sure to perform the color balance

adjustment.
When not replacing the developer. do not execute Sim25-2
ADJ 2 High voltage values adjustment

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed the voltage entered in the proce-
dure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
2-A Main charger grid voltage adjustment
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
• When the MC PWB has been replaced
• U2 trouble has occurred
Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC-
• The PCU PWB has been replaced PWB. Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the adjustment
1) Enter the Sim 8-2 mode value. This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore it is advisable to
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted put down the adjustment value in advance.
adjustment actual When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
Item/Display (mode) mode
range voltage
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Main charger K 50 - 850 -607V
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
tain relationship.
GB_K (middle
B MIDDLE speed mode) C 50 - 850 -607V
SPEED ±5V
GB_C
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
C MIDDLE M 50 - 850 -607V
meter in this model, a judgement of the output must be made by
SPEED ±5V
checking the print image quality
GB_M
D MIDDLE Y 50 - 850 -607V
SPEED ±5V 2-B Developing bias voltage adjustment
GB_Y This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
LOW A LOW Main charger K 50 - 850 -598V
• When the MC PWB has been replaced
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
GB_K (low speed • U2 trouble has occurred
B LOW mode) C 50 - 850 -598V • The PCU PWB has been replaced
SPEED ±5V
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced
GB_C
C LOW M 50 - 850 -598V 1) Enter the Sim 8-1 mode
SPEED ±5V 2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.
GB_M
D LOW Y 50 - 850 -598V Adjustmen Actual
Item/Display (mode) Content
SPEED ±5V t range voltage
GB_Y MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage 5V
DVB_K (middle
B MIDDLE speed) C 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V
DVB_C
C MIDDLE M 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V
DVB_M
D MIDDLE Y 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V
DVB_Y

Adjustmen Actual When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
Item/Display (mode) Content dure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved. When
t range voltage
LOW A LOW Developing K 0 - 600 –450V [EXECUTE] key is pressed again the output is stopped.
SPEED bias voltage 5V
DVB_K (low speed)
B LOW C 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC
DVB_C PWB . Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC
C LOW M 0 - 600 –450V PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the adjustment
SPEED 5V value. This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore it is advisable to
DVB_M put down the adjustment value in advance.
D LOW Y 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V
DVB_Y When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) in the middle matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
speed mode and press [OK] key. tain relationship.
Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified on
the label attached on the MC PWB.
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
meter in this model, a judgement of the output must be made by
checking the print image quality.
2-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment

• When the TC PWB has been replaced
• U2 trouble has occurred
• The PCU PWB has been replaced
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced
1) Enter the Sim 8-6 mode
2) Select an item to be adjusted
Actual
Setting Default
Item/Display Content output
range value
value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer bias color K low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K adjustment value middle speed 0 - 255 94 12 μA
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C middle speed 0 - 255 94 12 μA
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M middle speed 0 - 255 94 12 μA
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y middle speed 0 - 255 94 12 μA
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K monochrome K low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K middle speed 0 - 255 94 12 μA

Actual
Setting Default
range value
value
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer bias color Plain front surface 0 - 255 103 -40 μA
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX adjustment value paper back surface 0 - 255 110 -45 μA
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 103 -40 μA
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 103 -40 μA
O TC2 PLAIN2 CL SPX color Plain front surface 0 - 255 103 -40 μA
P TC2 PLAIN2 CL DPX paper 2 back surface 0 - 255 110 -45 μA
Q TC2 PLAIN2 BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 103 -40 μA
R TC2 PLAIN2 BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 103 -40 μA
S TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX color Heavy front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
T TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX paper 1 back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
U TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
V TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
W TC2 HEAVY2 CL SPX color Heavy front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
X TC2 HEAVY2 CL DPX paper 2 back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
Y TC2 HEAVY2 BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
Z TC2 HEAVY2 BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
AA TC2 HEAVY3 CL SPX color Heavy front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AB TC2 HEAVY3 CL DPX paper 3 back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
AC TC2 HEAVY3 BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AD TC2 HEAVY3 BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
AE TC2 HEAVY4 CL color Heavy paper 4 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AF TC2 HEAVY4 BW monochrome 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AG TC2 OHP CL color OHP 0 - 255 103 -40 μA
AH TC2 OHP BW monochrome 0 - 255 103 -40 μA
AI TC2 ENVELOPE CL color envelope 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AJ TC2 ENVELOPE BW monochrome 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AK TC2 THIN CL color thin paper 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AL TC2 THIN BW monochrome 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AM TC2 GLOSSY PAPER CL color gloss paper 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AN TC2 GLOSSY PAPER BW monochrome 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AO TC2 EMBOSS CL color emboss paper 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AP TC2 EMBOSS BW monochrome 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AQ TC2 LABEL CL color label paper 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AR TC2 LABEL BW monochrome 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AS TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW SPX front edge bias adjustment front surface low speed 0 - 255 76 -20 μA
AT TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW DPX value back surface low speed 0 - 255 69 -15 μA
AU TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE SPX front surface middle speed 0 - 255 76 -20 μA
AV TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE DPX back surface middle speed 0 - 255 69 -15 μA
AW TC2 BACKEND LOW SPX rear edge bias adjustment front surface low speed 0 - 255 76 -20 μA
AX TC2 BACKEND LOW DPX value back surface low speed 0 - 255 69 -15 μA
AY TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE SPX front surface middle speed 0 - 255 0 -0 μA
AZ TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE DPX back surface middle speed 0 - 255 0 -0 μA
BA TC2 INTERVAL LOW SPEED interval bias adjustment low speed(+) 0 - 255 66 4 μA
BB TC2 INTERVAL MIDDLE SPEED value middle speed(+) 0 - 255 95 8 μA
BC TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW SPEED cleaning bias adjustment low speed(–) 0 - 255 54 -4 μA
BD TC2 CLEANING MINUS MIDDLE SPEED value middle speed(–) 0 - 255 59 -8 μA
BE TC2 CLEANING PLUS LOW SPEED low speed(+) 0 - 255 66 4 μA
BF TC2 CLEANING PLUS MIDDLE SPEED middle speed(+) 0 - 255 95 8 μA
BG PTC LOW CL SPX PTC current adjustment color low front surface 0 - 255 109 -200 μA
BH PTC LOW CL DPX value speed back surface 0 - 255 109 -200 μA
BI PTC MIDDLE CL SPX middle front surface 0 - 255 206 -400 μA
BJ PTC MIDDLE CL DPX speed back surface 0 - 255 109 -200 μA
BK PTC LOW BW SPX monochrome low front surface 0 - 255 109 -200 μA
BL PTC LOW BW DPX speed back surface 0 - 255 109 -200 μA
BM PTC MIDDLE BW SPX middle front surface 0 - 255 206 -400 μA
BN PTC MIDDLE BW DPX speed back surface 0 - 255 206 -400 μA
BO CASE VOLT LOW CL SPX PTC voltage adjustment color low front surface 0 - 255 0 0V
BP CASE VOLT LOW CL DPX value speed back surface 0 - 255 0 0V
BQ CASE VOLT MIDDLE CL SPX middle front surface 0 - 255 0 0V
BR CASE VOLT MIDDLE CL DPX speed back surface 0 - 255 0 0V
BS CASE VOLT LOW BW SPX monochrome low front surface 0 - 255 0 0V
BT CASE VOLT LOW BW DPX speed back surface 0 - 255 0 0V
BU CASE VOLT MIDDLE BW SPX middle front surface 0 - 255 0 0V
BV CASE VOLT MIDDLE BW DPX speed back surface 0 - 255 0 0V

Actual
Setting Default
range value
value
BW DHV LOW SPEED CL SPX separation bias color low front surface 0 - 255 77 -1000 V
BX DHV LOW SPEED CL DPX adjustment value speed back surface 0 - 255 102 -1500 V
BY DHV LOW SPEED BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 77 -1000 V
BZ DHV LOW SPEED BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 102 -1500 V
CA DHV MIDDLE SPEED CL SPX color middle front surface 0 - 255 153 -2500 V
CB DHV MIDDLE SPEED CL DPX speed back surface 0 - 255 179 -4000 V
CC DHV MIDDLE SPEED BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 153 -2500 V
CD DHV MIDDLE SPEED BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 179 -4000 V
*Plain paper 1: 60-89g/m2 Plain paper 2: 80-105g/m2

*Heavy paper 1:106-176g/m2 Heavy paper 2:177-220g/m2 Heavy paper 3:221-256g/m2 Heavy paper 4:257-300g/m2
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] By setting the value (specified value) the specified output is pro-
key. vided.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
dure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved. When
[EXECUTE] key is pressed again the output is stopped.
ADJ 3 Image density sensor ADJ 4 Print image position, image

adjustment magnification ratio adjustment
Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the following (Print engine) (Manual
items. adjustment)
• Check to confirm that the color image density sensor (image reg-
istration sensor) is clean
4-A Print image magnification ratio adjustment
• Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
(main scanning direction) (Print engine)
scratches.
(Manual adjustment)
3-A Image density sensor adjustment This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
• When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
The image density sensor and the transfer belt surface are used to
make the sensitivity adjustment of the image registration sensor. • U2 trouble has occurred
This adjustment executes automatically at the outset of registration • The PCU PWB has been replaced
adjustment operation and process control operation as well as Sim • The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced
44-2 1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode.
Normally therefore it is not required to perform this adjustment. It is 2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray.
performed only when the sensor is replaced or when the adjust-
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
ment result is checked.
key.
1) Enter Sim 44-2 mode
4) Touch [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The check pattern is printed out.
The sensitivity adjustment of the color image density sensor 5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed halftone is
(image registration sensor) is automatically performed. 240±1.2mm.
After completion of the adjustment the adjustment result is dis-
played and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
If the adjustment is not completed normally. "ERROR" is dis-
played.
When an error occurs, check the following sections for any abnor-
mality.
• Color image density sensor
• The PCU PWB
• Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
• Transfer belt cleaner 240±1.2mm
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

6) Change the set value of set item A. 5) Change the adjustment value.
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed Enter the adjustment value and touch [OK] key or [EXECUTE]
by 0.1mm. key.When touch [EXECUTE] key, the adjustment pattern is
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification printed.
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
value is decreased , the BK image magnification ration in the
tern is shifted to the front frame side.When it is decreased, the
main scanning direction is decreased.
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
Repeat procedure 2) to 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
When the set value is changed by 1 the shift distance is
changed by 0.1mm.
4-B Print image position (main scanning
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)
direction, sub scanning direction) are satisfied. In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained
adjustment (Print engine) (Manual by repeating the above procedures, perform the following pro-
adjustment) cedure.
• When LSU unit is replaced or removed.
• When a paper tray is replaced. MAIN-STD and SUB-STD are shifted for image position for all
trays. Use this adjustment items accordingly when LSU unit
• When the paper tray section is disassembled.
replaced to need to be adjusted.
• When the manual feed tray is replaced.
6) loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
• When the manual feed tray is disassembled. pcs) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray
• When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled. and change the gear until position in the front/rear frame direc-
• When the registration roller section is disassembled. tion. Repeat the adjustment procedure from 4).
• U2 trouble has occurred.
• The PCU PWB has been replaced.
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following

item
• The print image magnification ratio adjustment ADJ4-A (main
scanning direction) (print engine) (manual adjustment) has been
properly adjusted.
1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode.
2) Select the target paper feed tray with the scroll key.
The adjustment pattern is printed
4) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
rect position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.
Z1(2.0mm)
ADJ 5 Print engine image distortion

adjustment, OPC drum phase
adjustment, Color registration
X Y adjustment (Print engine
4.0±1.0mm 2.0∼5.0mm
section)
• When the color shift occurred.
• When LSU unit is replaced
• When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.
• When maintenance work is performed (replacement of the OPC
drum, the transfer unit, the transfer belt)
• When ADJ4-A print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
Z2(2.0mm) (main scanning direction) is performed.
Content Standard adjustment value • When the PCU PWB is replaced.
X Lead edge void area 4.0 ± 1.0mm
• When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
Y Rear edge void area 2.0mm - 5.0mmm
• When the color phase is not proper even after execution of the
Z1 / Z2 FRONT/REAR VOID AREA Total 4.0 ± 2.0mm
color balance adjustment.
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. • When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.

• When the primary transfer unit is replaced (when it removed from Repeat the procedures 2) to 5) until the display of C, M and Y
the machine) (SKEW) becomes OK. C, M and Y (SKEW) is OK, go to the
• When the developing unit or the OPC drum unit is removed from procedure 6).
the machine. For the adjustment, remove the front cover and the waste
toner box and turn the skew adjustment screw.
5-A Print engine image distortion adjustment 6) Repeat the procedures 2) to 4) again and check to confirm that
(manual adjustment), OPC drum phase C, M and Y (SKEW) are OK. If any of them is NG turn the LSU
skew adjustment screw of the corresponding color to adjust.
adjustment (auto adjustment), color
registration adjustment (auto adjustment)
This adjustment performs the print engine image distortion adjust-
ment, the OPC drum phase adjustment and the color registration
adjustment simultaneously.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto
adjustment is started. (it takes about 15 sec to complete the
adjustment)
3) When the adjustment is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display and the value of the adjustment result is
displayed. The current skew level for each color is displayed
on the SKEW display section.
Display Content Display Default NOTE

/Item value
MAIN F C Registration 1.0 - 200
M adjustment value 399.0
Y main scanning
direction F side
MAIN R C Registration 1.0 - 200
M adjustment value 399.0
Y main scanning
direction R side When the adjustment is made by turning the LSU skew adjust-
SUB C Registration 1.0 - 200 ment screw of K, the states of C, M and Y (SKEW) are
M adjustment value 399.0 changed. Execute SIM50-22 to check to confirm that C, M and
Y sub scanning Y (SKEW) are OK. When an abnormality occurs ERROR is
direction
displayed.
SKEW C Print skew L99.9 - 0 If the value is
M amount R99.9 positive “L” is In this case, check each drive section and process section
Y calculation result displayed at the The adjustment result can be checked by the following manual
head of the adjustment mode.
value if negative *ADJ5B
“R” is displayed.
Image skew adjustment (manual adjustment) (SIM 50-20)
PHASE OPC drum phase 1-8 1
adjustment value *ADJ5C
Color registration offset adjustment (SIM 50-20)
4) Write down the displayed skew level.
Meaning of the skew level value and the adjustment pro-
cedure
When the color registration is greatly shifted due to replace-
* If OK is displayed for all items of SKEW C, M, Y, there is no
ment of the LSU etc, if SIM 50-22 is used to perform the color
need to perform the adjustment.
registration automatic adjustment an error may occur.
* When “R” is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU
skew adjustment screw clockwise. In this case, the adjustment may be properly executed by set-
* When ”L” is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU ting the adjustment items A - I of SIM 50-20 to 200 and execut-
skew adjustment screw counterclockwise. ing the automatic adjustment again. If color shift in an actual
* The turning amount of the adjustment screw corresponds to print image differs in the center, the front side and the rear side
each adjustment value. C, M and Y indicate numbers of clicks. the color shift offset adjustment can improve it. Normally there
The display value is rounded at the decimal point. is a difference in color shift in several dots. Perform the adjust-
* C, M and Y (SKEW) shows the number of adjustment click ment only when the adjustment is required.
steps for each adjustment screw of C, M and Y.
5-B Print engine image skew (LSU skew)
Contents in ( ) adjustment (manual adjustment)
MAIN, SUB: Difference from the previous adjustment value of (No need to adjust normally)
image registration.
If a more accurate adjustment that the auto adjustment ADJ5A is
Example: 105 for this time and 103 for the previous time, it is
required, use this method of adjustment.
displayed as 105.0 (+2.0)
SKEW: Judgment of LSU skew adjustment result OK or NG. This adjustment is made by changing the parallelism of the LSU
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value of the previous unit scan laser beams for the OPC drum.
time. 1) Enter the SIM 50-20 or 64-1 mode.
5) If the display of C, M and Y (SKEW) is NG. all the LSU skew 2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11” x 17”) paper in it and
adjustment screws to adjust and perform the procedures 2) to touch [EXECUTE] key.
4). 3) The image skew (image registration) adjustment pattern is
printed.

4) Check the printed black image for any skew. 5) Open the front cover, remove the waste toner box and turn the
Use the four cross points printed in black to measure the four LSU image skew adjustment screws in the same direction
squareness. by the same amount.
There are following two methods of checking the black image For the adjustment, remove the front cover and the waste
for any skew toner box and turn the skew adjustment screw.
Method 1
Measure the distances between opposing corners of the rect-
angle print pattern and compare the two distances to check the
squareness.
Method 2
Check the squareness of the vertical and horizontal sides of
the rectangle print pattern by using A3 or 11” x 17” paper sides.
In this case, the right angle of paper to be used may not be
exact, be sure to check the right angle of paper to be used in
advance.
A B
Diagonal Diagonal
About 220mm
line C line D
Skew adjustment screw rotation direction

When C is greater that Din the method 1 or there is some skew
in some skew in the direction A in the method 2, turn the screw
clockwise.
When C is smaller that D in the method 1 or there is some
skew in the direction B in the method 2, turn the screw coun-
terclockwise.
About 300mm
Reference of the rotation amount of the skew adjustment
screw
Method 1
In case of the method1, 0.8mm / 1.5 rotations
Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print
In case of the method2, 0.5mm / 1.5 rotations
pattern.
Repeat the procedures 2)to 6).
Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C and
D of the diagonal lines. After completion of the black image skew adjustment, go to the
procedure 7).
Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in the
following range. 6) Perform the same procedure as 1) and 2).
C – D = ±0.8mm 7) Check the printed color image for any skew.
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there If the difference between the shift amounts on the F and R
is no need to adjust. sides is within ±1 scale of the fine adjustment check scale.
there is no need to perform the adjustment. Measure the skew
Method 2
amount from the print patterns on the front and rear sides of
Fit the side of A3 or 11” x 17” paper to the long side of the rect- each color.
angle print pattern.
Measure the slant (skew) of the vertical side for the horizontal
side of paper as shown in the figure.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to R side
adjust.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
F side

C (Image shift fine adjustment
5-C Color registration offset adjustment
Color image shift check
scale (Fine adjustment) reference frame) (No need to adjust normally)
B-sub This adjustment is used to set the offset value for the auto color
registration adjustment (ADJ5A).
If there is any difference in color phase at the center and the four
corner of an actual print image, this adjustment may improve it.
Especially when there is any color shift at the center area, this
adjustment may improve it effectively. This adjustment cannot elim-
inate color shifts in all the areas, but average the overall color
B-main A-main
shifts. After the auto adjustment, use this color registration offset
adjustment to correct color shift partially, performing the adjustment
efficiently.
Before execution of this adjustment, check to confirm that the fol-

A-sub lowing adjustment has been performed.
Color image shift
A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check section *ADJ5A or ADJ5B image skew adjustment (LSU unit)
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern (Rough adjustment) Kinds of adjustment values
B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale There are following two kinds of registration adjustment values.
B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale
C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern • Base registration adjustment value: XXX (FRONT) / XXX
(REAR)
In each Y, M and C color print pattern printed separately in the They are manual adjustment values and auto adjustment values
F side and in the R side, note the same print color pattern and and reflected when the auto registration adjustment is executed.
check to confirm that the F side and the R side are in the same If varies for every operation of the auto registration adjustment.
condition.
• offset adjustment value: OFFSETXXF / OFFSETXXR
Rough adjustment pattern check:
They are the offset adjustment values added to the above base
Check the sub scan rough adjustment color image shift check registration adjustment values and are not changed unless
section on R side and the F side of each color, use the center SIM50-20 is executed to change.
position of the black scale as the reference and check the bal-
ance in shifts of the color image line positions in the positive
and the negative directions. The balance in the R side must be 2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11” x 17”) paper in it.
the same as that in the F side 3) Touch [EXECUTE] key.
Fine adjustment pattern check: The color image registration check pattern is printed.
Check the square frames on the R side and the F side of each
color (normally five sections of high density can be seen)
Check the sub scanning direction position of the center area of
high density (one of the above five section). These must be on Rear pattern
the same position on the R side and the F side.
In this case, use the sub scan direction color image shift check
scale (five adjustment) as the reference. Visually check the
color density and make the darkest section as the center and
use it as the read value of the shift amount. Check that the dif- Center pattern
ference in the center position of the dark density section is
within ±1 step. The positional relations of the front and the rear
frame of the print color patterns of a same color are compared.
There is no need that all the colors are in the same state. Com-
pare only the positional relations of color patterns of a same
color. If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the follow- Front pattern
ing procedure.
8) Turn the LSU skew adjustment screw of the adjustment target
color to adjust. Reference arrow mark
Skew adjustment screw rotation direction
When the F side is skewed to the right side for R side:
Turn the screw clockwise.
When the F side is skewed to the left side for the R side:
Turn the screw counterclockwise.
Reference of the rotation amount of the skew adjustment
screw
Skew of difference by one step between F and R sides (differ-
ence by one scale of the fine adjustment check scale) / turn for
about 2 clicks.
Repeat the procedure 7) to 8) until satisfactory result is
obtained.

4) Check the color image registration. At that time, use the color image registration check scale (for fine
There 6 color image registrations in total, two on each of the F adjustment) as reference.
side, the R side and the center. Check all the patterns to con- Assume the spot where looks the darkest color as center and read
firm that they are within the specified range. Also check to con- out the shift amount.
firm that there is not much shift in each color image registration Check whether the center position of the dark density section is
check pattern. within ± 1 step.
(The adjustment won’t be necessary if the print pattern for fine
adjustment is placed 0 ± 1 step of reference pattern.)
There are two kinds of adjustment, one in the main scanning direc- Increase the adjustment value if the position is shifting toward the
tion and the other in the sub scanning direction. The vertical direc- arrow X1 or Y1. Decrease the value if shifting toward the arrow X2
tion in the above figure is that in the main scanning direction and or Y2.
the horizontal direction is that in the sub scanning direction. Reference adjustment value
There are also two kinds of adjustments the rough adjustment and 1 scale / 2 (When the set value is changed by 2, shift is made by 1
the fine adjustment. Perform the rough adjustment then perform the scale.)
fine adjustment deliberately.
Perform this adjustment if there is a considerable difference in color
For the main scan direction image registration the offset on the F shift in the square and at the center area.
side the R side and at the center is independently adjusted. Select adjustment item (OFF SET X F / OFF SET X R / OFF SET X
If there is a difference in the sub scanning direction image registra- S) and change adjustment value.
tion between the F and R sides, perform the skew adjustment
OFF SET X F:
AJ5A.
F side main scanning direction registration offset set value (The
color shift on the F side and at the center area is changed.)
X2 X1 OFF SET X R:
Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment R side main scanning direction registration offset set value (The
scale (Fine adjustment) reference frame) color shift on the R side and at the center area is changed.)
B-sub
OFF SET X S:
Sub scanning direction registration offset set value (The overall
color shift toward sub scanning direction overall.)
Adjustment conditions and method
Y2
To adjust evenly overall, adjust so that the color shifts on the F side,
the R aide and at the center are of the same level.
B-main A-main To adjust with the center area most focused, adjust so that the color
shift at the center becomes smaller than that on the F side and the
R side.
Y1
When the offset adjustment value is 0, if the color registration

adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed, the color shift on
the F side and that on the R side are automatically adjusted to be
smaller than that on the center area.
A-sub Color image shift
A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check section Adjust
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern (Rough adjustment) ment Default
Display/Item Content
B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale value value
B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale range
C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern A CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(FRONT) Value (Main scanning
Check the print patterns of the rough adjustment and the fine direction) (Cyan) (F side)
adjustment of 18 check patterns. B CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
How to check the rough adjustment pattern and input of the (REAR) value (Main scanning
adjustment value: direction) (Cyan) (R side)
Visually check the color image registration check section, use the C MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
center position of the black scale as the reference and check the
direction) (Magenta) (F side)
shift balance in the positive and negative directions at the color
D MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
image line position. (REAR) value (Main scanning
Use the center position of the black scale as the reference and direction) (Magenta) (R side)
check that the color image line is symmetrical in the positive side E YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
and the negative side. (FRONT) value (Main scanning
If shift is in the arrow mark X1 and Y1 increase the adjustment direction) (Yellow) (F side)
value. if shift is in the arrow mark X2 and Y2 decrease the adjust- F YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(REAR) value (Main scanning
ment value.
direction) (Yellow) (R side)
The reference arrow on the check pattern faces the positive direc- G CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
tion. (SUB) value (Sub scanning
Guideline on adjustment value direction) (Cyan)
1 scale/20 (Changing the set value by 20 shifts the scale by one.) H MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(SUB) value (Sub scanning
Checking fine adjustment pattern and entering the adjustment direction) (Magenta)
value I YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
Check whether the darkest spot (one of five spots usually seen) is (SUB) value (Sub scanning
within the center area of reference frame for image registration fine direction) (Yellow)
adjustment in the square frame.

Adjust
Display/Item Content
ment Default ADJ 6 Scan image distortion
value value
range
adjustment
J OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50 (Document table mode)
C_MAIN_F adjustment value (Main
scanning direction) (Cyan) (F This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
side) • When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
K OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50 • When the copy image is distorted.
C_MAIN_R adjustment value (Main
scanning direction) (Cyan) (R
side) 6-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism
L OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50 adjustment (Sub scanning direction
M_MAIN_F adjustment value (Main distortion adjustment)
scanning direction) (Magenta)
(F side) Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
M OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50 glass.
M_MAIN_R adjustment value (Main 1) Remove the lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which are
scanning direction) (Magenta) fixing the scanner unit and the drive wire. Release the scanner
(R side) unit from the drive wire.
N OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
Y_MAIN_F adjustment value (Main
scanning direction) (Yellow)
(F side)
O OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
Y_MAIN_R adjustment value (Main
(R side)
P OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 51
C_SUB adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction) (Cyan)
Q OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 51
M_SUB adjustment value (Sub
R OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 51
Y_SUB adjustment value (Sub
S OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
C_SUB_HV12 adjustment value (Sub
(Heavy paper 1/2)
T OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
M_SUB_HV12 adjustment value (Sub 2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the 2/3 mirror
scanning direction) (Magenta) unit to bring it into contact with the stopper.
(Heavy paper 1/2)
U OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
When the 2/3 mirror unit is in contact with the two stoppers on
Y_SUB_HV12 adjustment value (Sub the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
scanning direction) (Yellow) proper.
(Heavy paper 1/2)
V OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
C_SUB_HV34 adjustment value (Sub
(Heavy paper 3/4)
W OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
M_SUB_HV34 adjustment value (Sub
(Heavy paper 3/4)
X OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
Y_SUB_HV34 adjustment value (Sub
(Heavy paper 3/4)
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame 2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
side of the 2/3 mirror unit. ment table and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is
completed.)
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform

4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side the following procedure.
of the 2/3 mirror unit so that it is in contact with two stoppers on
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand
the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
and right-hand side images distortions.
5) Screw edge face of scanner unit and right edge face of the
frame together on both sides to fix the scanner unit while this
unit is in contact with both stoppers. Lc Lc
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There are some differences
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the the right and that on the
left. left.
Lc = Ld /F/G
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side.
6-B Scan image (main scanning direction)

distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L L
L = 10mm
L Remove the left cover of the operation panel. Loosen the scan-
ner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the right
and the left heights of the scanner rail.

Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until there is no difference in Check Method 2
image distortions (distortion balance) between both sides. Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 1.0 mm.
frame side, change the overall height.
7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the 1.0
specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
A
ADJ 7 Scanner image skew

adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
7-A RSPF scanner image skew adjustment
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• The RSPF section has been disassembled.
If the copy image is not in the above state, perform the proce-
• The RSPF unit has been replaced
dure 3).
• The RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
3) Open the RSPF unit, and loosen the fixing screw of the hinge.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing the self print pattern
(grid pattern) available in Simulation 64-2 in duplex mode.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A' and 'B' to the
front and rear side of leading edge on front side of the paper.
A Paper feed direction
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the RSPF feed tray so that the mark on the 4) Slide the RSPF unit in the arrow direction to make the skew
adjustment chart is at the edge). adjustment.
• Check with one of the following methods. 5) Make a copy again and measure a and b on the copied test
Check Method 1 chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition (a - b = ± 1
mm or less) is satisfied.
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: 7-B DSPF parallelism adjustment
_DE_PP This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• The DSPF section has been disassembled.
• The DSPF unit has been replaced
A B • Paper jam occurs at DSPF
• Skew occurs while feeding paper from DSPF
• Skew appears on the image scanned from the DSPF
a b

1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the Repeat steps 2) to 3) until an acceptable result is obtained.
projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF 4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projec-
glass holding resin surface. tion on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of
the main unit.
7-C DSPF skew adjustment

2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1 mm or less (Front surface mode)
and the clearance B is 0 mm (in contact).
If the above requirement is not met, do step 3).
• The DSPF section has been disassembled.
• When replacing the DSPF unit.
• The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart.
Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
1mm duplex print mode.
SIM64-2 set value
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A' and 'B' to the
A
front and rear side of leading edge on front and back side of
the paper.
0mm B

3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear
frame horizontal level.

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
R skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
•Check with one of the following methods.
When the front frame side is higher (There is a clearance of 1

mm or more in B):
Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise.
When the rear frame side is higher (There is a clearance of 1
mm or more in A):
Turn the height adjustment screw L of the DSPF rear frame
counterclockwise.

[Check Method 1] 4) Open the DSPF and loosen the screw.
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition:
_DE_PP
A B
a b
(Back side)
_FG_PP
C D
c d
5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right
[Check Method 2] side of the DSPF rear frame.
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print
line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 1.0 mm.
1.0
If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the

back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3) of
"ADJ 7D DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)."
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3). [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments. left]
If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew adjusting
screw.
ĭ [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw.
Ĭ Repeat steps 2) to 5) until an acceptable result is obtained.
7-D DSPF skew adjustment

(Back surface mode)
• DSPF section has been disassembled.
• The DSPF unit has been replaced.
• The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart.
Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
duplex print mode.
SIM64-2 set value
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255

Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A' and 'B' to the procedures of step 3).
front and rear side of leading edge on front and back side of 3) Open the upper door, and remove the adjustment cover.
the paper.

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to
(Front side) adjust.
_DE_PP
A B
a b
(Back side)
_FG_PP
C D
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
left]
c d
If c < d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A counterclock-
wise, or turn the adjustment screw B clockwise.
[Check Method 2]
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print right]
line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 1.0 mm.
If c > d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A clockwise, or
turn the adjustment screw B counterclockwise.
* The adjustment screws A and B must be turned in proper bal-
1.0 ance. For example, if the trouble is not removed by turning the
adjustment screw A 180 degrees clockwise, do not turn the
adjustment screw A furthermore, but turn the adjustment
screw B 180 degrees counterclockwise.
A Repeat steps 2) to 4) until an acceptable result is obtained.
ADJ 8 Scan image focus adjustment

8-A Image focus adjustment (Document table
mode/DSPF/RSPF front surface mode)
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the • The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3) of • The CCD unit has been replaced.
"ADJ 7C DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)." • When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.

• When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan- 9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
ning direction is not properly adjusted. CCD unit base as shown below.
1) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is

replaced.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
4) Make a normal copy on A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.

5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10 mm with the scale of 10 mm on the
copy image. NOTE: Never loosen the screws marked with X.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1 angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
100 mm scale 10 20 90 100 110 CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
(Original)
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
1.0mm scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked in
procedure 9).
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
shorter than 10 20 90 100 110
the original)
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the

B
following procedures.
7) Remove the document table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.

12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again. NOTE: Never loosen the screws marked with X.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 ± 0.8%, Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied. unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust-
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 ± 0.8%) the entire scanner unit.
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti- 6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
cal system structure. direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
8-B Image focus adjustment CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
(DSPF back surface mode)
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
• When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
• When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked in
• When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly procedure 4).
adjusted.
• When the DSPF unit is removed.
• When the DSPF unit is replaced.
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Open the upper door. Remove the screws, and remove the
transport PG upper.
7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.

If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 ± 0.8%,
repeat the procedures of 4) – 6) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 ± 0.8%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the cal system structure.
CCD unit base as shown below.
ADJ 9 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
9-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(main scanning direction) (Manual
5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
NOTE: If the default adjustment value of the scan image magnifi-
cation ration adjustment (main scanning direction) of SIM
48-1 is changed, copy image quality may be degraded.
Therefore, this adjustment must be executed only when
there is a special necessity.
• When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
• When the scanner motor is replaced.

• When the SCN MFP PWB is replaced. 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
• When the EEPROM of the SCN MFP PWB is replaced. below.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)
Ჷ X 100%
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. cation ratio Original dimension
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
(Example 1)
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
Copy A
range (100 ± 0.8%). (Shorter than
10 20 90 100 110
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 the original)
± 0.8%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica- Scale
10 20 90 100 110
tion ratio is increased. (Original)
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
is within the specified range (100 ± 0.8%).
(Example 2)
Copy B
9-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Longer than
10 20 90 100 110
(sub scanning direction) (Manual the original)

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
• When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image sub scan- range (100 ± 0.8%).
ning direction is not properly adjusted. If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
• When the scanner motor is replaced. ± 0.8%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
• U2 trouble has occurred. ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
• When the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
• When the EEPROM of the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
is within the specified range (100 ± 0.8%).
9-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode)
• When the EEPROM on the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.

• When U2 trouble occurs.
9-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
• When the copy magnification ratio of the DSPF/RSPF mode
copy image in the main scanning direction is not proper. (sub scanning direction) (Manual
• When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled. adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode)
a. Adjustment procedures This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- • When the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF. • When the EEPROM on the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. • When U2 trouble occurs.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and • When the copy magnification ratio of the DSPF/RSPF mode
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. copy image in the sub scanning direction is not proper.
• When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled.
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
Paper pass direction A4 size ment tray.
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
(Both the front surface
and the back surface)
10mm
10mm 10mm
Paper pass direction
2)
3)
Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
A4 size
images.
original 10mm
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.

copy 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
images.
10 50 100 150 200 250
10
10 50 100 150 200 250

50
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following

100
formula:
10
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100

original
150
50
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
200
100
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range

copy
150
(100 ± 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.

If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
200
cedures.
5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. 4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with formula:
the scroll key. Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
SPF(MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Front surface) Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
SPFB(MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
(Back surface) (100 ± 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica- cedures.
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02% 6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
SPF(SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
(Front surface)
obtained.
SPFB(SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface)
7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
key, and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%.

8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. Repeat the procedures of 1) - 6) until the above condition is
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is satisfied.
obtained.
10-B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual
adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode)
ADJ 10 Scan image off-center This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
adjustment (Manual • When the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
adjustment) • When the EEPROM on the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
• When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
10-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual • When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
adjustment) (Document table mode) • When a U2 trouble occurs.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: • When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.
• When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. • When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.
• When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. NOTE: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ10-A
• When a U2 trouble occurs. Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode)
must have been properly adjusted.
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur-
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (using the document
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport
table) in the adjustment mode.
direction.
Paper transport
direction
Front surface Back surface
#
#$
Draw a line at the center of the front surface

2) Check the copy image center position. and the back surface of paper in parallel
If A - B = ± 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required. with the paper transport direction.
2) Set the adjustment chart to the DSPF/RSPF.

3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.
A'
original copy
A' - B' = ±1.0mm
a
(100%)
B'
b

procedures. If the difference is within the range of 0 ± 2.7mmm there is no
3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode. need to perform the adjustment.
4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key. If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. 4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode.
The entered value is set. 5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi- (SIM50-12)
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm. SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
6) Go to the copy mode, and make a copy SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode

(SIM50-6) 2) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
Item/ Content Setting Default
6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. Display range value
Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step A RRCA Document lead edge reference 0 - 99 50
position (OC)
When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
G LEAD Lead edge image loss area setting 0 - 99 40
shifted to the rear.
H SIDE Side image loss area adjustment 0 - 99 20
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is
obtained. 4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
Shift to the copy mode, and make a copy at 100% in the docu-
ment table mode.
ADJ 11 Copy image position and image When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
loss adjustment (Manual image from 4.0 mm is not copied in 100% copy scale.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
adjustment)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
11-A Copy image position, image loss, and void
area adjustment (Manual adjustment)
Scale image 4.0mm position
(Document table mode)
Paper lead
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: edge

• When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
• When the LSU is replaced or removed.
100%
• When the registration roller section is disassembled. 5mm 10mm
• The PCU PWB has been replaced. 5) Image loss adjustment
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
• The SCN MFP PWB has been replaced. default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in
the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value,
• The EEPROM on the SCN MFP PWB has been replaced.
change these adjustment items.
Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that the ADJ
4/ADJ 5 Print engine image skew, image position, image magnifica-
tion ratio adjustments have been completed normally. Paper lead edge
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure Copy area
below.
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide 1 2 3 4
plate. 5mm 10mm
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
edge can be seen.
Void area: 4.0 mm, Image loss: 4.0 mm
Adjust Standard
Item/ Default
Content ment adjustment
Display value
range value
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 40 4±1.0mm
adjustment image loss
adjustment
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 4±2.0mm
loss
adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.

1) The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce-
11-B Image scanning position adjustment dures.
(Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: horizontally on the front and the back surfaces.
• When the SCN MFP PWB is replaced. At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge,
• When the EEPROM on the SCN MFP PWB is replaced. the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification
• When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. marks of the front surface and the back surface.
• When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
R Front surface
• When U2 trouble occurs. (#%'
• When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.

• When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.
This simulation is to adjust the scanning position when scanning in L T
the DSPF/RSPF mode.

If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is
shifted from the specified position and a shade of the document Put
table may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image the position
in the DSPF/RSPF mode. marks.
F
1) Make a copy in the DSPF/RSPF mode, and check for any
shade on the lead edge section of the copy image. Draw arrows.
4 Back surface
$#%-
Papar lead edge

L 6
Image area
Put
the position
marks.
Shadow image of RSPF F
Draw arrows.
If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge
DSPF
section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. range value
Front surface document scan
When the set value is increased, the distance from the home A SIDE1 1 - 99 50
position adjustment (CCD)
position to the DSPF/RSPF scanning position is increased.
Back surface document scan
When the set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is B SIDE2 1 - 99 50
position adjustment (CCD)
changed by 0.1mm. LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge
C 0 - 99 20
Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
obtained. FRONT_REAR Front surface side image loss
D 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) amount setting
NOTE: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge
11C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment E 0 - 99 40
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting
(Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode). LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge
F 0 - 99 40
11-C Copy image position, image loss, void area G
FRONT_REAR Back surface side image loss
0 - 99 20
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/ TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge image
RSPF mode) H 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) loss amount setting
RSPF
• When the EEPROM on the SCN MFP PWB is replaced. Item/Display Content Setting Default
• When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. range value
A SIDE1 Front surface document scan 1 - 99 50
• When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. position adjustment (CCD)
• When U2 trouble occurs. B SIDE2 Back surface document scan 1 - 99 50
• When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled. position adjustment (CCD)
• When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced. C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image loss 0 - 99 20
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 20

Item/Display Content Setting Default Rear edge image loss adjustment
range value 1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check
G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image loss 0 - 99 20 to confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the
(SIDE2) amount setting front surface and the back surface.
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge image 0 - 99 40
(SIDE2) loss amount setting
Paper rear edge
*Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
timing is delayed.
*Item C – H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
image loss is increased.
Lead edge image loss adjustment
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE
(SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to
the following values.
When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is Copy image
increased.
(Standard set value)
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 1): 20 Lead edge image loss set value
(Front surface)
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 2): 20 Lead edge image loss set value Image loss 2.0 - 5.0 mm
(Back surface)
2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
to confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0 ± 1.0 mm procedure.
on the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead 2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2)
edge must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge. with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
TRAIL EDGE(SIDE1): Rear edge image loss adjustment value
(Front surface)
Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be TRAIL EDGE(SIDE2): Rear edge image loss adjustment value
aligned with the image lead edge.
(Back surface)
When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image
loss is increased.
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check
to confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and
Copy image
the rear frame side are 2.0 ± 2.0mm on the front surface and
the back surface.
Paper F Image loss

Image loss side edge 2.0 ± 2.0 mm
4.0±1.0 mm
Copy image
procedure.
3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and
press [OK] key.
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre-
sumed image lead edge.
SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi- Copy image
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.
Paper R Image loss
Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is 2.0 ± 2.0 mm
side edge
obtained.
procedure.
2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) /
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.
FRONT/REAR(SIDE 1): Front/Rear image loss adjustment
value (Front surface)
FRONT/REAR(SIDE 2): Front/Rear image loss adjustment
value (Back surface)
When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
loss is increased.

Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is 4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the check pat-
obtained. tern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is in
the standard adjustment value range.
Standard adjustment value: 4.0 ± 1.0mm
ADJ 12 Print lead edge image position
adjustment (PRINTER MODE)
• When the registration roller section is disassembled.
• When the LSU unit is replaced or removed.
4.0±1.0mm
This adjustment should be performed if the user wishes

to increase the lead edge void area for printer mode greater than
the standard value (3 mm).
2) Select the set item M with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper
in it.
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
Setting 5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
Display/Item Content Default
range
ment item DENC with the scroll key.
A DEN-C Printer lead edge image 1 - 99 30
position adjustment 6) Change the adjustment value.
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
adjustment [EXECUTE] key.
C FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern is printed.
REAR adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
area adjustment correction
value the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satis-
adjustment correction value fied.
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area
1 - 99 50
ADJ 13 Color balance/density
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the color balance/density adjust-
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value ment
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void area 1 - 99 55 * Requisite conditions before execution of the color balance/density
adjustment correction value adjustment
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50 Before execution of the color balance/density adjustment, check to
L MULTI Number of print 1 - 999 1 insure that the adjustments which affect the color balance/density
COUNT have been completed properly.
M PAP MFT Tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
The importance levels of them are shown below:
ER CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3 (Since the following items affect the color balance/density
CS3 Tray 3 4 directly, they must be adjusted or set before execution of the
CS4 Tray 4 5 image quality adjustments.)
LCC LCC 6 1) The following item must be adjusted properly.
N DUP YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1
LEX NO print No 1 Job No. Adjustment item Simulation
selection Print engine image distortion adjustment/ OPC
ADJ5 phase adjustment/ Color registration adjustment 50-22/20
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (Print engine section)
The check pattern is printed.
(Though the following items affect the color balance/density,
there is no need to adjust them frequently. When, however, a
trouble occurs, they must be checked and adjusted.)

1) The following items must be adjusted properly. Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
Job
Adjustment item Simulation the following conditions.
No.
Developin For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test chart
Toner density control (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.
ADJ1 g unit ADJ1A 25-2
reference value setting
adjustment
Adjust the main charger
ADJ2A 8-2 (Color copy)
grid voltage
High Patch 1 is
Adjust the developing bias slightly copied.
SHARP gray chart
ADJ2 voltage ADJ2B 8-1 SHARP GRAY CHART
voltage
adjustment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Transfer current and
ADJ2C 8-6
voltage adjustment
ADJ8 Scan image focus adjustment 48-1
Note for the color balance/density check and adjustments

Patch 2 is copied.
• For the color balance adjustments, be sure to use the paper
specified for color (recommended paper).
Note that, if another kind of paper is used for the color balance
adjustment, proper image qualities (color balance, density) may (Black-and-white copy)
not be obtained. Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
• When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
the automatic color balance adjustment procedures, place 5
sheets of white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to pre-
vent back copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as far
as possible.
Relationship between the servicing job contents and the color Patch 3 is copied.
balance/density check and adjustment Patch 1 is not copied.
Note that the jobs before and after execution of the color balance/
density check and adjustment depend on the machine status and Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/
the servicing conditions. UKOG-0326FC11)
Follow the flowchart of the color balance/density adjustment proce- In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
dures depending on the actual conditions. check to insure the following conditions.
There are following three, major cases.
1) When a periodic maintenance is performed. (Color copy)
2) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.

Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
3) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
(3) Copy color balance and density check
Before checking the copy color balance and density, be sure to
execute the following jobs.
• Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) The densities of patches 1 - 6 of
each color are properly balanced.
Patch 7 is slightly
copied or not copied.
• Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
Method 1
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy
of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11), and check that they are proper.
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in
the color copy mode
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart
(UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11). Set the copy density
level to "3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make a
copy.
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust-
ment mode must be set to the default (center).
In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-
0162FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/
Printed Photo mode (Manual).
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust-
ment mode must be set to the default (center).

Color copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) The color difference in gray balance between the F and the R
2) Registrations (one point for the main scanning, and one point sides is not so great.
for the sub scanning) are not shifted. 5) There are no white and black streaks.
3) The resolution of 5.0 (5 points) can be seen. 6) Color texts are clearly reproduced.
7) The solid density is not so light.
Solid density

Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) There are no white and black streaks.
2) The resolution of 4.0 (5 points) can be seen. 5) The background solid is not so light.
3) The density difference between the F and the R sides is not so 6) The black low-density gradation is copied slightly.
great.
Solid density

(Method 2) (Method 2)
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance adjustment sheet, and Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
check each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the black compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
patch in order to confirm that the color balance adjustment is black patch to check the color balance.
proper or not more precisely.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Low High Low density High density

density density Y
Y
M
M
C
C
Bk
Bk
CMY
CMY blend
blend A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C and BK is copied.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK

3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. The patch density is changed gradually.
The patch density is changed gradually.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY) is to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is proper. If reversed.
the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed in this mode is The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
slightly shifted to Magenta, it is converted into the natural gray color
Patch B may not be copied.
balance by the color table in an actual copy mode.
Patch A must not be copied.
(When the color balance target is DEF 1.)
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed
(4) Printer color balance/density check color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray
execute the following procedures in advance. color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is
• Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) DEF 1.)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
• The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26) 13-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
(Method 1)
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. 13-A (1)
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
print test pattern is printed. (Document Glass Mode)
• When the CCD unit is replaced.
• When a U2 trouble is occurred.
(1) Note before adjustment
• Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens sur-
face are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
• Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the
scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) is free from dirt
and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
Since the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ)
same level.
is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and
humidity and temperature, put it in a bag.
Adjustment procedures

1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) to the 2) Open DSPF original scanning section. Insert the shading
reference position on the left rear frame side of the document adjustment sheet (UKOG-0333FCZZ), and then close DSPF
table. original scanning section.
Set the chart in order that the arrow mark is placed on the left
side.
Insert the shading adjustment sheet along the rear edge

frame, and set it in order that the rear edge of the shading
adjustment sheet is placed to the base of the actuator.

4) Press [DSPF SHADING] [EXECUTE] key.
If the scanner adjustment chart is not available, execute SIM Shading adjustment starts.
63-5 to set the CCD gamma to the default. In this case, how-
ever, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with 13-A (3)
the adjustment method using the scanner adjustment chart.
Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
(DSPF Mode)
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display. • When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
• When a U2 trouble is occurred.
13-A (2) • When DSPF PWB is replaced.
Shading adjustment (calibration) (1) Note before adjustment
(DSPF Mode) 1) Check that DSPF scanner glass, mirrors, and the lens surface
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: are free from dirt and dust.
• When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. (If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
• When a U2 trouble is occurred. 2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) is free from
• When DSPF PWB is replaced.
dirt and scratches.
(1) Note before adjustment
If they are dirty, clean them.
1) Check that DSPF scanner glass, mirrors, and the lens surface
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)

(2) Adjustment procedures
Since the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) 1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) to the
is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and paper feed tray of DSPF face down.
humidity and temperature, put it in a bag.
If the scanner adjustment chart is not available, execute SIM

63-5 to set the CCD gamma to the default. In this case, how-
ever, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with
the adjustment method using the scanner adjustment chart.
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
SET 1 Color balance adjustment target setup

a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer- This setting is required in the following cases.
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target. • When the color balance and density adjustments are executed
There are following three kinds of the target. manually (SIM46-21) (SIM67-25)
• Factory color balance (gamma) target • U2 trouble has occurred.
• Service color balance (gamma) target • When the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
• User color balance (gamma) target • When the EEPROM on the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set • When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
to a desired level. • When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
SET 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup
• Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
Type Descriptions
A Factory color balance There are three kinds of the color balance target, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use SIM
(gamma) target 63-11 to select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which
emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color balance This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's
(gamma) target unique color balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by
the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color
balance target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 63-11. The default
setting (factory setting) of the color balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color
reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the color balance to the
factory color balance target.
C User color balance (gamma) Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this
target color balance target is also changed accordingly.
• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/46-24)

Color balance target in the copy color balance
automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Factory color balance

Use SIM 63-11 to select one of the three target (DEF1) = Service color balance
target Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 63-7 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance Factory color balance Execute SIM 63-8.
target (DEF3) target
(one of DEF1 - 3)
= Service color balance
target (The service color balance target is the
same as the factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target
• Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-74/46-24)

By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM63-8

Factory color balance target
Factory color balance target (DEF1) = Service color balance
Hue (DEF1) target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
(A) operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction
of Red DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

SIM63-8
• Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
ment ((Automatic adjustment) SIM 46-74/46-24). required.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to to register the service color balance target data by using adjust-
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with ment pattern that was printed in this mode.
SIM 63-11.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing the
the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
46-74/46-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 46-21.

By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. 2) Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.
It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created 3) Press [SETUP] key.
with SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the 4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
same color balance target to another machine. adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. (Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) on the document table.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
from discoloration and dirt. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
The service color balance target data is registered immediately (adjustment pattern).
after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21. If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal- SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe-
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
6) The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
The accuracy of the service color balance target data can be
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
judged as follows.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - P
When result of the color balance adjustment (Auto) with selecting (MAX).
the service color balance target in SIM 46-74/46-24 is unsatisfac-
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as
tory or abnormal.
abnormal.
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
7) Press [OK] key.
adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
a. Setting procedure This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
the service color balance target)
get with SIM 63-7.
1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
adjustment) mode) to print color patch image (adjustment pat- be sure to execute this procedure.
tern).
In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and [YES] key.
the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an balance as the factory color balance target.
adjustment.
SET 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup

• Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
Type Descriptions
A Factory color balance There are three kinds of the color balance targets, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use
(gamma) target SIM 67-26 to select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color balance This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's
(gamma) target unique color balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by
the serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color
balance target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26. The
default setting (factory setting) of the color balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color
reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the
factory color balance target.
C User color balance (gamma) Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this
target color balance target is also changed accordingly.
• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/76-24)

Color balance target in the printer color balance
automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select one of the three

target (DEF1)
= Service color balance
target
Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 67-27 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance Execute SIM 67-28.
target (DEF3)
target (one of DEF1 - 3) = Service color balance
target
(The service color balance target is
the same as the factory color balance
target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment

Color balance target for Service color balance
the user color balance
adjustment
= target
• Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24)
By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM67-28 Factory color balance target (DEF1)

Factory color balance target = Service color balance target/Color
(DEF1) balance target for theuser color
Hue balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
(A) operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
table in an actual printer mode and print is made. (Factory setting)
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table
Direction in an actual copy mode and print is made.
of Red
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

SIM67-28
• Service color balance target in the printer color balance adjust- If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
ment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24). required.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to register the service color balance target data by use of the
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with printed adjustment pattern.
SIM 67-26.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing the
the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
(SIM 46-74/67-24). When, therefore, the service color balance
target is changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 67-25.

By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
with SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
same color balance target to another machine. get with SIM 67-27.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 67-26,
not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from be sure to execute this procedure.
discoloration and dirt. 1) Enter the SIM 67-28 mode.
The service color balance target data is basically registered imme- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key and then [YES] key.
diately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25. The service color balance target and the color balance target
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal- for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the balance as the factory color balance target.
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. 13-B FR density variation correction
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
Make sure followings are confirmed prior to the adjustment:
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
• Charge unevenness is not occurring
judged as follows.
• A paper tray with A4 (LT) size papers is available.
When result of the color balance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
the service color balance target in SIM 46-74/67-24 is unsatisfac- • The auto correction of FR density unevenness will clear the cor-
tory or abnormal. rection value in “ADJ13B manual correction of FR density
unevenness”. Do not execute auto correction if you wish to main-
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
tain the manual correction value.
adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
• Execute Sim 61-13 if any one of DV unit, Drum Process unit and
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
LSU unit has been replaced.
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
13-B (1)
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with FR density unevenness automatic
SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously. correction (32 point adjustment for all
a. Setting procedure colors)
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
the service color balance target) • Density unevenness toward main scan direction has been
1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual observed
adjustment) mode) to print color patch image (adjustment pat- 1) Enter Simulation 61-11.
tern).
2) Press [AUTO CORRECTION] key.
In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing
Press [DATA] to confirm present auto correction value.
the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
3) Select the density level to adjust and press [EXECUTE] key.
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
The adjustment pattern will be output.
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an 4) Place the adjustment pattern in the step 3) and the arrows on
adjustment. the adjustment pattern should be placed on left side (A4R/LTR
2) Enter the SIM 67-27 mode. direction) on the document table. and press [EXECUTE] key.
Also put five blank sheets on top of the adjustment pattern.
3) Press [SETUP] key.
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) on the document table.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color bal-
ance (manual) was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color
balance requested by the user and it was registered as the
service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
6) The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C,
M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - P
(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
judged as abnormal.
7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)

5) After scanning the adjustment pattern, the data will be updated 5) The adjustment result pattern will be printed automatically.
and the adjustment result pattern will be printed automatically. Check whether density on front and rear side matches.
Check whether density on front and rear side matches.
6) After step 5) if you furthermore require this adjustment, press

6) Press [RETRY] and repeat the steps in 3) to 5) until you are [RETRY] key and repeat the steps 3) to 5).
satisfied with the result in step 5).
Execute Simulation 61-13 to clear auto/manual correction value to
Execute Sim 61-13 to clear auto/manual correction value to resume the factory default setting.
default setting. Execute Simulation 46-74 (Copy/Printer color balance adjustment)
7) Execute Simulation 46-74 (Copy/Printer color balance adjust- after completing all the adjustments.
ment) after completing all the adjustments.
13-C Copy/Printer color balance and density
13-B (2) adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (Basic
FR density unevenness visual inspection adjustment)
(CMYK 5 point adjustment or CMYK 32 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
point adjustment) • When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases. replaced.
• Density unevenness toward main scan direction has been • When the CCD unit is replaced.
observed:
1) Enter Simulation 61-12.
• When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
2) Press [VISUAL INSPECTION] key.
Press [DATA] to confirm present manual correction value.
3) Select the density level to adjust and press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern will be output.
a. General
4) Check the adjustment pattern in the step 3).
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and
Select either [5 POINT CORRECTION] or [32 POINT COR- density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color bal-
RECTION], enter adjustment value and press [EXECUTE] key. ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
Larger the adjustment value, the higher the density and vice Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
versa. (automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
this mode.
This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
matic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjust-
ment individually.
The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
Black automatically.
When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the copy/printer modes are revised.

b. Adjustment procedures
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Copy/printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-74) procedure flowchart
Start
Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density adjustment
(automatic density). (SIM46-74)
(Copy color balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment))
Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
(Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1) Automatic adjustment color balance target change
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Change the color balance and density target. (SIM63-11)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone image correction is automatically
performed.) (*2) NO
Press [EXECUTE] key. (Execute the halftone image correction.)
Though the FACTORY color balance

Cancel SIM46-74. and density target (available in 3
kinds) is changed, satisfactory color
balance and density are not obtained
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result. (SIM63-11), or the SERVICE target is
selected.
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text
/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density.
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color YES
balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to
Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment).

(SIM46-21/44-21) (*3)
Are the color balance and density NO
at the specified level?
YES
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic
adjustment). (SIM67-24)
End
Automatic color balance target change
Change the color balance and density target.

(SIM67-26)
*1: NO
When the color balance and density are customized
and registered as the SERVICE target, select the
SERVICE target.
*2:
If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is Though the FACTORY color balance
not properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and and density target (available in 3
kinds) is changed, satisfactory color
density cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print
balance and density are not obtained
engine for any problems. (SIM67-26), or the SERVICE target is
*3: selected.
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with copy color balance and density
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (SIM46-21/44-21),
check the print engine for any problems.
YES
*4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed
check pattern, check the print engine for any problems. Printer color balance and density adjustment
(Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25)

1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. The printer color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. out. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
The copy color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
6) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
procedure 5) on the document table.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 2) on the document table.
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
PRINTER CALIBRATION
7) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.

When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
When the color balance is customized by the manual color bal-
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
ance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request, get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
and the color balance is registered with SIM63-7 as the service
balance, select the [SERVICE] target.
target, if the color balance is required to be adjusted, select the
The printer color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
[SERVICE] target.
performed and the color balance check patch image is printed
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
out. If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check
and prints the color balance check patch image. pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
tern, check the print engine for any problems.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Low density High density

Low High ;
density density
Y /
M %
C $M
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
Bk
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q 1) The max. density section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C and BK is copied.

2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
8) The initial setting menu of the halftone image correction is dis-
played.
Press [OK] key. The initial setting of the halftone image correc-
tion is performed.

9) Wait until [EXECUTE] key is displayed. When it is displayed,
press it. 13-D Copy quality adjustment (Basic adjustment)
The halftone image correction is performed. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
10) When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the • When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
adjustment operation is completed. Cancel the simulation. replaced.
11) Check the copy color balance and density. • The CCD unit has been replaced.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density • When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
check.) • When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained • U2 trouble has occurred.
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in • When the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM • When the EEPROM on the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- 13-D (1)
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment.
Copy color balance and density adjustment
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
(Automatic adjustment)
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment. a. General
12) Check the printer color balance and density. The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
Black automatically. When this adjustment is executed, the color
check.)
balance adjustments of all the copy modes are revised.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
procedure 7), change the factory color balance target with SIM
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
67-26 and repeat the procedures from 1). If a satisfactory
is used.)
result is not obtained with the above procedure, perform the
manual color balance adjustment. Also when the service tar- 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
get is selected in procedure 7) to execute the automatic adjust- mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
ment and a satisfactory result is not obtained, perform the The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
manual color balance adjustment. reduce the number of service calls.
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level If the copy color balance is lost for some reason, the user can
even after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
there may be another cause. When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
and repeat the adjustment from the beginning. work effectively.
If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal prob-
lem occurs, or the normal color targets cannot be obtained,
service must recalibrate the machine to specification.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

b. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-24) procedure flowchart
Start

(automatic density).
Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.

(Automatic selection)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the

FACTORY target or the SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is
automatically performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the halftone image correction
is automatically performed. (*3) Automatic color balance target change
Cancel SIM46-24 Change the color balance and

density target. (SIM63-11)
Check the color balance and density adjustment result. NO
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a

copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color bal- Though the
ance and density. FACTORY color
balance and density
target (available in 3 kinds)
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the is changed, satisfactory color
patch color balance and density in the process gray. (If the color bal- balance and density are not
ance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.) obtained (SIM63-11),
or the SERVICE
target is selected.
Are the color balance and den- NO YES

sity at the satisfactory level?
Manual copy color balance and density

YES adjustment.
(SIM46-21/44-21).(*2)
Check that the initial setting of the halftone image correction was properly
performed. (*3) *1:
When the copy color balance and density are
customized and registered as the SERVICE
Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction. target, select the SERVICE target.
(SIM44-21) *2:
If satisfactory color balance and density are
not obtained with manual copy color balance
Execute the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26) and density adjustment (SIM46-21/44-21),
check the print engine for any problems.
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) *3:
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check If the initial setting of the halftone image
the color balance and density. correction is not properly made, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be
obtained. In this case, check the print engine
for any problems.
NO *4:
Are the color balance and den-
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the
sity at the satisfactory level?
printed check pattern, check the print engine
for any problems.
YES
End

1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
automatically selected.) ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
procedure 2) on the document table. MODE" is displayed. Do not cancel the simulation until
"PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE" is displayed.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
6) Check the color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
copy color balance and density check.)
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper. 7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the halftone image correction. (Forc-
ible execution)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
8) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy
color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color
balance and density check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
form the following procedures.
9) Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
10) Execute the halftone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy
color balance and density check.)
Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy
color balance and density are not in the specified range, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works,
and repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
ual adjustment (SIM 46-21).
operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment.
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level
even after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments,
there may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works,
Low High
density density and repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
;
13-D (2)
/ Copy color balance and density adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
%
a. General
$M The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
adjust the copy density of CMYK. This is used at the following situ-
ation.
When the result of auto adjustment described above is not existing
within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required.
When there is request from the user for changing (customizing) the
color balance.
This manual adjustment is executed only for the color patch which
could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel. If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
halftone image correction is performed. efficiency.
b. Adjustment procedure

Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure
flowchart (SIM46-21)
Start

(Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM46-21 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.
(Automatic selection)

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern, and select a

target adjustment color with the color keys (C, M, Y, K).
Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Check the patch color balance and density in the process

gray of the color balance check pattern. (If the gray color is
slightly shifted to Magenta, the color balance is properly
adjusted.)
Are the color balance NO

and density at the sati-
sfactory level?
YES
Cancel the SIM46-21 mode.
Perform the initial setting of the halftone image correction.

(SIM44-21)
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density.
Are the color balance NO

sfactory level?
YES
Check to confirm that the initial setting of the halftone image correction is
properly set. (*2)
Perform the initial setting of the halftone image correction.

(SIM44-21)
Perform the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)

to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density.
*1:
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
NO Are the color balance engine for any problems.
and density at the sati- *2:
sfactory level? If the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is not properly adjusted, satisfactory
YES color balance and density cannot be obtained. In
this case, check the print engine for any problems.
Set the SERVICE target for the automatic copy color
balance adjustment. (SIM63-7)
End

1) Enter the SIM46-21 mode. 6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is 0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user's document accord-
automatically selected.) ing to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result.
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory. 7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Halftone image correction)
If not, execute the following procedures. It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
This procedure is to save the copy color balance

adjustment data as the reference data for the halftone correc-
tion.
Low High Immediately after execution of Color balance adjustment
density density (Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this procedure.
;
When Color balance adjustment (Auto) is executed with SIM
46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
/
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the halftone image correction.
% (Forcible execution) Press [EXECUTE] key.
$M 9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document accord-
CMY
blend ing to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the
copy color balance/density check.)
1) The max. density section is not blurred. If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied. specified level, there may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to

register the color balance as the service target.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
required.
not be reversed.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
level.
the next color balance adjustment.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
rection table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance
target is DEF 1.)
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. Repeat
procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.

13-E Copy / Image send / FAX image quality
adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the basic adjust-
ments
ADJ 14B and ADJ 14C or there is a request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this adjustment.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
Copy Mode Image Scan Mode

Simulation No. and descriptions of the adjustment Color Monochrome Color Monochrome
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-01 Color copy density adjustment (for each color
copy mode) (separately for the low density
  — — — — — — — —
area and the high-density area) (No need to
adjust normally)
46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for
each monochrome copy mode) (separately for
— — — —   — — — —
the low-density area and the high-density
area) (No need to adjust normally)
46-04 Color image send mode image density
adjustment (for each mode) (No need to — — — —   — — — —
adjust normally)
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image
density adjustment (for each mode) (No need — — — — — —   — —
to adjust normally)
46-08 Image send mode RGB color balance
adjustment (separately for the low-density
— — — —   — — — —
area and the high-density area) (No need to
adjust normally)
46-09 RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density
         —
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-10 Color copy color balance, gamma adjustment
(for each color copy mode) (No need to adjust   — — — — — — — —
normally)
46-16 Monochrome copy density, gamma
adjustment (for each monochrome copy — —   — — — — — —
mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
mode document density scanning operation
— —  — — —  —  —
(exposure operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
46-21 Copy color balance and density adjustment
    — — — — — —
(Manual adjustment)
46-23 Copy high density image density reproduction
setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting     — — — — — —
change)
46-24 Copy color balance and density adjustment
    — — — — — —
46-25 Copy color balance adjustment (Single color
—  — — — — — — — —
copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-26 Single color copy mode color balance default
—  — — — — — — — —
setting
46-27 Color copy, text, line image reproduction
adjustment (edge gamma, density
  — — — — — — — —
adjustment) (Text, Map mode) (No need to
adjust normally)
46-30 Copy mode sub scanning direction resolution
  — — — — — — — —
setting
46-32 Document low density image density
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No — —  — — —  —  —
need to adjust normally) (Background density
adjustment in the scanning section)
46-36 2-color (red, black) copy mode fine color
—  — — — — — — — —
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color
document reproduction adjustment (No need — —   — —    
to adjust normally)
46-38 Color copy mode dark area gradation (black
component quantity) adjustment (No need to   — — — — — — — —
adjust normally)
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment — — — — — — — —  —
46-40 FAX send image density adjustment
— — — — — — — —  —
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)

Copy Mode Image Scan Mode
Simulation No. and descriptions of the adjustment Color Monochrome Color Monochrome
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-41 FAX send image density adjustment (Normal
— — — — — — — —  —
text mode)
46-42 FAX send image density adjustment (Fine text
— — — — — — — —  —
mode)
46-43 FAX send image density adjustment (Super
— — — — — — — —  —
fine mode)
46-44 FAX send image density adjustment (Ultra
— — — — — — — —  —
fine mode)
46-45 FAX send image density adjustment (600dpi
— — — — — — — —  —
mode)
46-46 FAX send image density adjustment
— — — — — — — —  —
(RGB_RIP)
46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send
image (JPEG) compression ratio setting          
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-48 Resolution setting for each color copy mode
— —   — — — — — —
46-51 Gamma manual adjustment for the copy
mode heavy paper and the image process     — — — — — —
mode (dither) (No need to adjust normally)
46-52 Gamma default setting for the copy mode
heavy paper and the image process mode     — — — — — 
(dither)
46-54 Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for
each dither (Automatic adjustment) (No need     — — — — — 
to adjust normally)
46-55 Dropout color setting — — — — — — —  — —
46-58 Pseudo resolution UP function setting     — — — — — —
46-60 Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness
        — 
46-61 Area separation recognition level adjustment
         —
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image
process, automatic exposure mode operation
        — —
conditions setting (Normally unnecessary to
the setting change)
46-63 Copy/Scan low density image density
adjustment (for each mode) (No need to   — —   — — — —
adjust normally)
46-65 Color correction table setting (No need to
  — — — — — — — —
adjust normally)
46-66 Watermark adjustment     — — — — — 
46-68 Scan mode auto resolution judgement
— — — —  —  — — —
adjustment
46-74 Printer/Copy color balance and density
adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (Basic     — — — — — 
adjustment)
46-90 High-compression PDF image process
operation setting (Normally unnecessary to — — — —   — — — —
the setting change)
46-91 Black text emphasis fine adjustment — — — —   — — — —
13-E (1) Display/Item Content

Setting
Default
Color copy density adjustment (for each range
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
color copy mode) (separately for the low
HIGH 1 - 99 50
density area and the high-density area) B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
(No need to adjust normally) HIGH 1 - 99 50
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
• When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
HIGH 1 - 99 50
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
• When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
HIGH 1 - 99 50
• When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
copy mode individually. HIGH 1 - 99 50
• When there is request from the user. G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
1) Enter the SIM 46-1 mode. HIGH 1 - 99 50
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
HIGH 1 - 99 50

Setting • When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
Display/Item Content Default copy mode individually.
range
I TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 • When there is request from the user.
(COPY TO (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.
COPY)
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
PHOTO (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO Setting
COPY) range
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY) B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
L TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 C AUTO3 Auto 3 LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 D TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE enhancement) E TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
F TEXT/PHOTO Text/photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
G PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) H PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 I MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
Q MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 J AUTO1 Auto1 LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) K AUTO2 Auto2 LOW 1 - 99 50
R LIGHT Light LOW 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (copy to copy) HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 L AUTO3 Auto3 LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
M TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
T SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
N TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY)
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
U TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
V TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
P LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
mode and change the adjustment value. mode and change the adjustment value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased. density is decreased.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. 4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor- Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check- mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
13-E (2) 13-E (3)

Monochrome copy density adjustment (for Color copy color balance, gamma
each monochrome copy mode) (separately adjustment (for each color copy mode) (No
for the low-density area and the high- need to adjust normally)
density area) (No need to adjust normally) This adjustment is used to execute the color balance adjustment
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. for each density level in each color copy mode.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low • When there is necessity to change the color balance and gamma
density and high density part at each copy density individually. by each the copy mode individually.
• When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the • When there is request from the user.
copy by each the copy mode individually. 1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.

3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color Density level Adjustment
key. Item/Display Default
(Point) Value range
4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll K POINT11 Point11 1 - 999 500
key. L POINT12 Point12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 Point13 1 - 999 500
Density level Adjustment N POINT14 Point14 1 - 999 500
Item/Display Default
(Point) value range O POINT15 Point15 1 - 999 500
A POINT1 Point1 1 - 999 500 P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point2 1 - 999 500 Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point4 1 - 999 500 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
E POINT5 Point5 1 - 999 500 When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
F POINT6 Point6 1 - 999 500 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
G POINT7 Point7 1 - 999 500 sity is decreased.
H POINT8 Point8 1 - 999 500 When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
I POINT9 Point9 1 - 999 500 adjusted.
J POINT10 Point10 1 - 999 500
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
K POINT11 Point11 1 - 999 500
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
L POINT12 Point12 1 - 999 500
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
M POINT13 Point13 1 - 999 500
printed out.
N POINT14 Point14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point15 1 - 999 500 The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
P POINT16 Point16 1 - 999 500 referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 practical to make a copy and check it.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
sity is decreased.
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
with the color keys are collectively adjusted.
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point 13-E (5)
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed out.
mode document density scanning
This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color bal-
operation (exposure operation) conditions
ance and the density for each density level (point). setting (Normally no need to set)
6) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
ment, change the setting.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
This setting is required in the following cases.
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. • When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
automatic copy mode.
• When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
13-E (4)
• When a document with colored background is copied.
Monochrome copy density, gamma
adjustment (for each monochrome copy
2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE
mode) (No need to adjust normally)
STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.
This adjustment is used to execute the density adjustment for each
density level in each monochrome copy mode. Display/
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: Content Set value Default
Item
• When it is required to change the gamma in each copy mode. AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1 MODE2
• When there is request from the user. MODE2
MODE3
AE_STOP_ Auto B/W exposure REALTIME PRESCAN
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll COPY Stop (for copy) STOP
key.
PRESCAN
AE_STOP_ Auto B/W exposure ON ON
Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default FAX Stop (for FAX) OFF
(Point) Value range
A POINT1 Point1 1 - 999 500 AE_STOP_ Auto B/W exposure REALTIME STOP
SCAN Stop (for scanner) STOP
B POINT2 Point2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point3 1 - 999 500 PRESCAN
D POINT4 Point4 1 - 999 500 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
E POINT5 Point5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point6 1 - 999 500 SHARP
G POINT7 Point7 1 - 999 500 AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
H POINT8 Point8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 Pint10 1 - 999 500
MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)

MODE2: Normal gamma
STOP: Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of
Document table/DSPF mode
document, decides the output image density according to the den-
sity of that part. (The output image density is constant at whole
3 to 7mm
area.)
REALTIME: Reads the density of width of the document one by
one, decides the output image density according to the density of
each part of the document. (The output image density may be not
constant at whole area.)
PRESCAN: Once the densities on the document surface are
scanned, the output image density is determined according to the AE WIDTH = FULL
average of the scanned densities. (The output image density is
even for all the surface.)
In addition, the original type is automatically determined and the
processing is carried out in an optimum original mode.
AE WIDTH FULL: Document density reading area in monochrome
auto mode is 3 - 7mm (leading edge of document) x Document
width. No relationship to PRESCAN MODE Document table mode
AE WIDTH PART: Document density reading area in monochrome
auto mode is 3 - 7mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm 3 to 7mm
(width). No relationship to PRESCAN MODE
Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
When the density of the document of the read area is light, output
100mm
image density is increased by control. When the density of the doc-
ument of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased
by control.
AE WIDTH = PART
DSPF mode
3 to 7mm
100mm AE WIDTH = PART
Document density detection area
13-E (6)
Document low density image density
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
• When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
• When there is request from the user.
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.

3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. Set
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the value
background and the low density image is increased. When the I COLOR COPY: Copy document, 1-9 5
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- TEXT (COPY TO COPY) Text (Color copy)
ground and the low density image is decreased. J COLOR COPY: Copy document, 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
DSPF
(COPY TO COPY) (Color copy)
K COLOR PUSH: Text print 1-9 5
Display/Item Content Set Value Default
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH)
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
L COLOR PUSH: Text 1-9 5
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
TEXT (Color PUSH)
(SIDE1) (for DSPF: Side-1)
M COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH)
N COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
PHOTOGRAPH (Color PUSH)
(for OC)
O COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 5
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
TEXT/PHOTO (Color PUSH)
P COLOR PUSH: Map 1-9 5
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
MAP (Color PUSH)
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.
RSPF
13-E (8)
Display/Item Content Set value Default
Color copy, text, line image reproduction
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: RSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
adjustment (edge gamma, density
(for RSPF) adjustment) (Text, Map mode)
C SCAN: OC Scanner mode 1 - 250 196 (No need to adjust normally)
(for OC)
Adjustment 1
D SCAN: RSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(for RSPF) By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy
E FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the
F FAX: RSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 reproducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally.
(for RSPF) With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and
lines can be varied.
13-E (7) Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode
Copy/Scan low density image density (manual).
adjustment (for each mode) (No need to This adjustment is required in the following cases.
adjust normally) • When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is to be
changed.
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the copy/scanner mode. • When there is request from the user.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. 1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.
• When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document. Set
value
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode. (SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
Set C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
value (SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
A COLOR COPY: Text print 1-9 3 D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
TEXT / PRINTED PHOTO (Color copy) (INTERCEPT) adjustment
B COLOR COPY: Text 1-9 3 E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
TEXT (Color copy) (SLOPE) skew adjustment (Text/Map
C COLOR COPY: Printed Photo 1-9 5 mode)
PRINTED PHOTO (Color copy) F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
D COLOR COPY: Photograph 1-9 5 (INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
PHOTOGRAPH (Color copy)
E COLOR COPY: Text/Photograph 1-9 3 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
TEXT/PHOTO (Color copy) When the adjustment values of items A and C are changed,
F COLOR COPY: Map 1-9 5 the gamma at the character edge and the line edge section is
MAP (Color copy) changed.
G COLOR COPY: Light document 1-9 6 When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
LIGHT (Color copy)
character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjust-
H COLOR COPY: Copy document, 1-9 5
ment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text print
line edge is decreased.
(COPY TO COPY) (Color copy)

When the adjustment value of the item B and D are increased, DSPF model
the image density at the character edge and the line edge sec-
Set
tion is increased, and vice versa. Display/Item Content Default
value
4) Press [OK] key. A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 127
5) Make a copy in color text/printed photo copy mode (manual), B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 814
check the copy. C R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin char- D G-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
acter and line image.
RSPF model
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27
mode and change the adjustment value. Set
value
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 137
obtained.
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 827
Adjustment 2 C R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
This adjustment is used to change the gamma and the density in D G-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
the Text/Map copy mode.
Gray making setting (B)
• To change the contrast and the density of the Text/Map copy B-Ratio
(1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
mode images. Print gray making setting (B)
B-Ratio RIP
• When there is request from the user. (1000-R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP)
1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,
copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
Set
Display/Item Content Default value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
value
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge gamma 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased,
(SLOPE) skew adjustment copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50 value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.
(INTERCEPT) adjustment 4) Press [OK] key.
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode
(SLOPE) skew adjustment
(manual), check the copy.
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37
E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma skew 1 - 99 50 mode and change the adjustment value.
(SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode) Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50 obtained.
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. 13-E (10)

When the adjustment value of the adjustment item E is Color copy mode dark area gradation (black
changed, the gamma (contrast) is changed. component quantity) adjustment (No need
When the adjustment value is increased, the contrast is to adjust normally)
increased, and vice versa. Use to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
When the adjustment value of the item F is increased, the (except character and line image)
image density is increased, and vice versa. As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part
4) Press [OK] key. changes.
5) Make a copy in the color Text/Map copy mode (manual), and This adjustment is required in the following cases.
check the output print.
• When reproduction as solid of black image is required.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change
• To make the black background and the dark area darker
the adjustment value.
• When change of gradation of the shade part is required.
obtained.
13-E (9) 2) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color
3) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
document reproduction adjustment (No
need to adjust normally) Display/Item (Copy Select Content Defa
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow mode) button ult
image when printing color document that included the red/yellow MAN TEXT PRT (-)LUT2 Text print (Manual) NOR
image in monochrome copy mode. UAL (-)LUT1 MAL
NORMAL
(+)LUT1
• When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red
(+)LUT2
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in
TEXT (-)LUT2 Text (Manual) NOR
monochrome copy mode. MAL
(-)LUT1
• When there is request from the user. NORMAL
1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode. (+)LUT1
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. (+)LUT2

Display/Item (Copy Select Content Defa (obtain crispy image) (decreases moire)
mode) button ult • When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image
MAN PRINTED (-)LUT2 Printed photo (Manual) NOR shade part (for decrease of asperity)
UAL PHOTO (-)LUT1 MAL
• To make the black background and the dark area darker.
NORMAL
• To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
(+)LUT1
(+)LUT2 • When there is request from the user.
PHOTO (-)LUT2 Photograph (Manual) NOR 1) Enter the SIM 46-60 mode.
(-)LUT1 MAL 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
NORMAL
(+)LUT1 Setting
(+)LUT2 range
TEXT PHOTO (-)LUT2 Text/Photograph NOR A SCREEN Sharpness (filter) Strong 1 3
(-)LUT1 (Manual) MAL FILTER adjustment of dot emphasis
LEVEL pattern image in auto Soft 2
NORMAL
copy mode emphasis
(+)LUT1
Auto 3
(+)LUT2
B RGB RGB sharpness (filter) SOFT 1 2
MAP (-)LUT2 Map (Manual) NOR
FILTER adjustment in copy/ CENTER 2
(-)LUT1 MAL
LEVEL push scan /FAX mode HIGH 3
NORMAL
C CPY Sharpness (filter) SOFT 1 2
(+)LUT1
PUSH adjustment for the CENTER 2
(+)LUT2
AUTO auto push scan mode HIGH 3
CPY TO CPY/ (-)LUT2 Copy document/Text NOR FILTER (Text, Text/Printed
TXT PRT (-)LUT1 printed (Manual) MAL LEVEL Photo/ Text, Text/
NORMAL Printed Photo image)
(+)LUT1 D COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
(+)LUT2 COPY: setting to C, M, Y ON 1
CPY TO CPY/ (-)LUT2 Copy document/Text NOR CMY image in color copy
TEXT (-)LUT1 (Manual) MAL mode
NORMAL E COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
(+)LUT1 COPY: K setting to K image in ON 1
color copy mode
(+)LUT2
F SINGLE Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
CPY TO CPY/ (-)LUT2 Copy document/Printed NOR
COLOR: setting to C, M, Y ON 1
PHOTO (-)LUT1 photo (Manual) MAL
CMY image in single color
NORMAL copy mode
(+)LUT1 G 2 Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
(+)LUT2 COLOR setting to C, M, Y ON 1
LIGHT (-)LUT2 Pencil NOR COPY: image in 2-color copy
ORIGINAL (-)LUT1 MAL CMY mode
NORMAL H 2 Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
(+)LUT1 COLOR setting to K image in ON 1
(+)LUT2 COPY: K 2-color copy mode
AUTO AUTO (-)LUT2 Auto mode judgment NOR I B/W Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
(-)LUT1 MAL COPY setting in ON 1
monochrome copy
NORMAL
mode
(+)LUT1
J COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
(+)LUT2
PUSH: setting to image in ON 1
4) Press the black component amount select button. RGB push scan color mode
K B/W Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
When reproduction as solid of black image is required: Selects
PUSH setting to image in ON 1
+ button push scan
When there is desire to darken copy of black image: Selects + monochrome mode
button L COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
When a dark color image is reproduced in the black: Selects - PRINT: setting to CMY image ON 1
CMY in color print mode
button
M COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
5) Make a copy in color copy mode and check the copy. PRINT: K setting to K image in ON 1
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-38 color print mode
mode and change the adjustment value. N B/W Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is PRINT setting in ON 1
monochrome print
obtained.
mode
13-E (11) 3) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter

Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness process mode).
adjustment • Adjustment item A:
(No need to adjust normally) When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pat-
tern state automatically and adjusts sharpness.
Use for sharpness adjustment in copy/scan mode and smoothness
(asperity) adjustment of the dark area in copy/scan mode. Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
numeric value to decrease moire.
• When changing the sharpness of copy/scan image in copy
mode.

• Adjustment item B: • In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce to item A and B.
moire. The tone gap may occur in high density part.
• Adjustment item C:
When selecting AUTO, Select HIGH to obtain clear images.
Select SOFT to reduce moire. Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If these val-
• Adjustment item D- K: ues are changed, density of the high density part is changed.
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part If these values are changed, be sure to execute the copy color bal-
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases) ance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment)
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy and check the copy image. 13-E (13)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-60 Copy color balance adjustment (Single
mode and change the adjustment value. color copy mode)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is (No need to adjust normally)
obtained. This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
the single color copy mode to the user's request.
13-E (12) The adjustment is made by changing Y, M, C components of each
Copy high density image density color.
reproduction setting This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
(Normally unnecessary to the setting is a request from the user.
change) When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
required in the following cases.
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in copy mode, or if there
is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density, • When it is required to change the color balance in the single
change the setting. color copy mode.
This setting is normally not required. When, however, there are • When there is request from the user.
case of following, change the setting. a. Adjustment procedure
• When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. 1) Enter the SIM 46-25 mode.
• When there is a necessity to increase the density of the part of 2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.
high density. 3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
• When there is request from the user. 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Adjustment Default
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key. Display/Item
range C M Y
Setting A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
range B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0 C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
(0: ENABLE density correction mode D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
1: DISABLE) Enable E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
1 CMY engine maximum F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
density correction mode G ORANGE 0 - 255 0 150 255
Disable H NAVY 0 - 255 255 200 0
B K 0 K engine maximum 0-1 1 I LIGHT GREEN 0 - 255 150 0 150
(0: ENABLE density correction mode
J LIGHT BLUE 0 - 255 150 20 0
1: DISABLE) Enable
K AQUA MARINE 0 - 255 170 0 50
1 K engine maximum
L PURPLE 0 - 255 128 255 0
density correction mode
Disable M PINK 0 - 255 0 150 20
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for CYAN 0 - 999 500 N YELLOW GREEN 0 - 255 128 0 255
TARGET maximum density correction O BEIGE 0 - 255 0 50 170
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
5) Press [OK] key.
MAX MAGENTA maximum density
TARGET correction 6) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
E YELLOW Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 copy.
MAX YELLOW maximum density If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25
TARGET correction mode and change the adjustment value.
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET BLACK maximum density
correction obtained.
G RATIO LOW Mix ratio of high density 0-100 0
correction (LOW) (1/100) 13-E (14)
H RATIO HIGH Mix ratio of high density 0-100 0 DSPF/RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density
correction (HIGH) (1/100)
I DITHER Dither threshold (LOW) 0-255 255
THRESHOLD This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
J SLOPE Slope threshold (HIGH) (1/ 100-500 500 cases, make changes to the setting:
THRESHOLD 100) • When copy in DSPF/RSPF mode differs from copy in document
table mode.
• If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
• When copy density in DSPF/RSPF mode is low or too high.
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better. • When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.

• When the DSPF/RSPF unit is disassembled. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
• The CCD unit has been replaced. In case of increase of image density, input large numeric
• U2 trouble has occurred. value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
numeric value.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in the DSPF/RSPF mode and check the copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
mode and change the adjustment value.
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A”.
When adjusting density on high density part, select "D”.
obtained.
DSPF
Setting Def
13-E (15)
Item/Display Content Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for
range ault
A OC COPY SIDEA: Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 47 each dither (Automatic adjustment)
LOW adjustment (Low density
This simulation is used to improve the image quality in a certain
side)
mode. (Refer to the list in procedure 6.)
B SCAN SIDEA: Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 47
LOW adjustment (Low density 1) Enter the SIM46-54 mode.
side) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
C FAX SIDEA: FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 47
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
side) The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed.
D COPY SIDEA: Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 52 3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
HIGH adjustment (High density dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
side) printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
E SCAN SIDEA: Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 52
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
HIGH adjustment (Low density
side)
F FAX SIDEA: FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 52
HIGH adjustment (High density
side)
A DSPF COPY SIDEB: Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 47
side)
B SCAN SIDEB: Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 47
side)
C FAX SIDEB: FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 47
side)
D COPY SIDEB: Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 50
side)
E SCAN SIDEB: Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 50
HIGH adjustment (Low density
side)
F FAX SIDEB: FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 50
side)
G BALANCE Color balance R 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R
H BALANCE Color balance G 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G
I BALANCE Color balance B 1 - 99 50 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
SIDEB: B The color balance and the density are automatically adjusted.
RSPF The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
mality.
Setting Def 5) Press [OK] key.
range ault
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
A COPY: LOW Copy mode exposure adjustment 1 - 99 48
(Low density side) 6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
B SCAN: LOW Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side) Select item
Content
(Mode/Image)
C FAX: LOW FAX mode exposure adjustment 1 - 99 48
(Low density side) HEAVY PAPER *1 Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
heavy paper mode
D COPY: HIGH Copy mode exposure adjustment 1 - 99 53
(High density side) BLACK EDGE Adjustment item (K) to improve the reproduction of
lines, text density, and thickness
E SCAN: HIGH Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (Low density side) COLOR EDGE Adjustment item (Color) to improve the reproduction
of lines, text density, and thickness
F FAX: HIGH FAX mode exposure adjustment 1 - 99 53
(High density side) COLOR ED Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
text mode and the map mode.

Select item
Content 13-E (16)
(Mode/Image)
B/W ED Adjustment item to improve the density and Dropout color adjustment (Normally not
gradation in the monochrome auto mode, text mode, required.)
map mode and light original mode
This adjustment is used to adjust the level of chroma of color
B/W 1200 Adjustment item to improve the density and
images which are reproduced as monochrome images in the image
gradation in the monochrome Printed Photo mode
send mode (monochrome manual text mode).
and Photo mode.
B/W 600 Adjustment item to improve the density and This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
gradation in the monochrome auto mode Text/ • When there is request from the user.
Printed Photo mode and Text/Photo mode.
B/W 600 LOW Adjustment item to improve the density and
gradation in the monochrome auto mode (Printed 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
Photo mode and Photo mode). When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
WOVEN1 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
density in the watermark mode 1 adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult
WOVEN2 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark to widen the reproduction range.
density in the watermark mode 2
WOVEN3 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark Setting Default
density in the watermark mode 3 range value
WOVEN4 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
density in the watermark mode 4
3) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome
*1: When performing adjustments in the heavy paper mode, manual text mode) and check the adjustment result.
load paper in the manual paper feed tray.
When black characters When the color section is not

are fainted, Document dropped out,
Decrease the adjustment value. Color dropout Increase the value.
Reproduced
image
SIM value 0 SIM value 3 SIM value 6

(Minimum value) (Default) (Maximum value)
The reproduction range is widened. The reproduction range is narrowed.
Effect and adverse effect when decreasing the value Effect and adverse effect when increasing the value
[Effect] [Effect]
When black characters are fainted by color shift, etc, the black Colors (of low chroma) which are difficult to be dropped out
area is outputted clearly. can be dropped out.
[Adverse effect] [Adverse effect]
Dropout of color sections becomes difficult. Black characters are fainted or cracked.

J:
13-E (17)
This is used to adjust the variation in the watermark density
Watermark adjustment (Normally not when the adjustment value of the watermark print/contrast
required) adjustment in the system setting is changed by 1. When this
This adjustment is used to adjust the reproduction capability of the value is increased, the variation is also increased. When the
watermark in the copy/printer mode. value is decreased, the variation is also decreased.
This adjustment is used for watermark documents (primary output). When the adjustment value is 0, the result of the contrast
The result of this adjustment affects the result of watermark print adjustment is not reflected. (* The adjustment value must be
(secondary output). set to 1 or greater.)
In the printer mode, the watermark density can be adjusted by the K:
printer driver. That adjustment is based on the result of this adjust- To reproduce the containing characters of watermark copy
ment. (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43.
1) Enter the SIM 46-66 mode. In that case, however, the containing characters of the water-
2) Select the PATTERN mode, then select an adjustment item in mark document (primary output) can be easily reproduced.
the following list according to the situation. L:
To reproduce the containing characters of watermark copy
Setting Default (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43.
range setting
In that case, however, the containing characters of the water-
A WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 15
DEN BK Black/Adjustment for light images) mark document (primary output) can be easily reproduced.
LOW Changing adjustment values of adjustment items A - I and
B WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 19 trade off
DEN BK Black, Density: Standard)
MIDDLE Kinds of
C WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 23 watermarks
Adjustmen
DEN BK Black, Density: Dark) (Mode
Density t values of
HIGH selected in Effect
value adjustment
D WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 19 the
items A - I
DEN C Cyan / Adjustment for light images) watermark
LOW copy mode)
E WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 23 Characters Decrease. The The watermark images
DEN C Cyan, Density: Standard) appearing. adjustment become easy to disappear.
MIDDLE value is The containing characters
F WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 27 decreased. become lighter.
DEN C Cyan, Density: Dark) Increase. The The containing characters
HIGH adjustment become darker.
G WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 15 value is The watermark images
DEN M Magenta / Adjustment for light increased. become difficult to disappear.
LOW images) Background Decrease. The The containing characters
H WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 18 appearing. adjustment become easy to disappear.
DEN M Magenta, Density: Standard) value is The watermark images
MIDDLE decreased. become easy to disappear.
I WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 21 Increase. The The watermark images
DEN M Magenta, Density: Dark) adjustment become darker.
HIGH value is The containing characters
increased. become difficult to disappear.
J CONTR Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2
AST
K HT For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42
TYPE positive 4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.
(POSI) Descriptions on the watermark
L HT For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42
TYPE negative
(NEGA) Containing
characters
Copy / Print Copy
Description
A~I:
The adjustment value is changed to increase or decrease the COPY INHIBITED
density of the watermark of background documents (primary
output). COPY INHIBITED
To increase the watermark density, increase the adjustment COPY INHIBITED
value.
To decrease the watermark density, decrease the adjustment Document Watermark document Watermark copy
value. (Copy document or (Primary output) (Secondary output)
When the adjustment value is increased, the watermark area Print data) (Copy or Printer output) (This machine or other
which is originally not reproduced becomes difficult to disap- (This machine) company's machine)
pear.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the watermark area Watermark The watermark color is available in Cyan, Magenta, and
which is originally reproduced becomes easy to disappear. color Black.
Containing Characters embedded in a watermark, such as "COPY
characters INHIBITED," are called containing characters.

Kinds of There are two kinds: "Character appearing" and Note for adjusting the watermark with SIM46-54
watermarks "Background appearing." When the color balance automatic adjustment is executed with
When a watermark of "Character appearing" is copied, the SIM46-74 or SIM46-24 but the containing characters are repro-
background disappears and the containing characters duced, use SIM46-54 to execute the color balance automatic
appear.
adjustment for each dither.
When a watermark of "Background appearing" is copied,
the watermark of the character area disappears and the However, note the following items.
containing characters become outline characters. • When either of item K or L of the PATTERN mode is 42, the
Principle of A watermark is composed of two dots: fine dots and rough adjustment must be executed for the both modes of WOVEN1
watermarks dots. and WOVEN2 of SIM46-54.
Since fine dots disappear when copied, they are called
• When either of item K or L of the PATTERN mode is 43, the
disappearing patterns. Since rough dots remain when
copied, they are called remaining patterns. adjustment must be executed for the both modes of WOVEN3
In a watermark of "Character appearing," the background is and WOVEN4 of SIM46-54.
a disappearing pattern and the containing characters are • WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 must be adjusted in a pair as well as
remaining patterns. WOVEN3 and WOVEN4.
In a watermark of "Background appearing," the background
If it is ignored, the containing characters remain reproduced.
is a remaining pattern and the containing characters are
disappearing patterns.
Note for Watermarks have the following characteristics: 13-F Printer image quality adjustment
watermarks • A watermark is presumed to be synthesized with text (Basic adjustment)
documents. If it is used with photos or images, the
containing characters may be seen in the watermark Requisite condition before execution of the printer color bal-
document (primary output) or the containing characters ance/density adjustment
may not appear properly in the watermark copy Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
(secondary output). the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been com-
• When a watermark is synthesized with newspapers or pleted properly.
other dark-background documents, the containing
characters may not appear in the watermark copy This adjustment is required in the following cases.
(secondary output). • Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjust-
• Containing characters may not appear in the watermark ment is required.
copy (secondary output) depending on the kind of the
• After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
copier which makes the watermark copy (secondary
output) and the copy mode.
• Containing characters may not appear clearly in the 13-F (1)
watermark copy (secondary output) depending on the Printer color balance adjustment
copy mode in which the watermark document (primary
output) is made.
• When the print engine status changes, the containing The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
characters may not be concealed properly in the the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
watermark document (primary output). In this case, matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
follow the procedures below to conceal the containing
When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
characters.
* Use SIM46-24 to execute the color balance adjustment. of all the print modes are revised.
* Use SIM46-54 to execute the color balance adjustment There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
for each dither. ment.
* Adjust the watermark print contrast in the system setting.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24
• Though the watermark of cyan or magenta is selected in
is used.)
the black and white mode, the black watermark is
synthesized. 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
• For a document which is judged as monochrome with mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
ACS selected, though the watermark color is specified as The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
cyan or magenta, the black watermark is synthesized.
reduce the number of service calls.
• The preview screen of the watermark only indicates the
setting of the watermark color, and does not indicate an If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
actual copy image. use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
• When the document control (printer mode) is used When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
together, it is advisable to use "Characters appearing" machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
setting. If "Background appearing" setting is used
work effectively.
together, the detection accuracy of document control
may be reduced. On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
• In the printer mode watermark, setting of 1200dpi and a serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
watermark cannot be used together. though the machine condition is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
Watermark adjustment in the system setting the normal color balance.
System setting -> Security setting -> Watermark print -> Contrast To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
tab
understood.
Watermark kind
Density Adjustment
mode selection
Character appearing To increase the Decrease the contrast value.
text density (Default: 5)
To decrease the Increase the contrast value.
text density (Default value: 5)
Background To increase the Increase the contrast value.
appearing text density (Default value: 5)
To decrease the Decrease the contrast value.
text density (Default: 5)

Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure
flowchart (SIM67-24)
Start
Printer color balance and density adjustment

(Automatic adjustment).
Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

Select the FACTORY target or the SERVICE target,
and press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern
is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically
Automatic adjustment color balance target change
performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Change the color balance and density target.
(SIM67-26)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or
unclear copy. (*4) NO
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone

image correction is automatically performed.) (*2) Though the FACTORY
color balance and density
target (available in 3 kinds) is
Cancel SIM67-24. changed, satisfactory color
balance and density are not
obtained (SIM67-26), or the
SERVICE target is
selected.
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer
color balance and density adjustment.
YES
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print
check pattern, and check the printer color balance Printer color balance and density adjustment
and density. (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*3)
*1:
When the color balance and density are customized and
registered as the SERVICE target, select the SERVICE
Are the color balance and NO target.
density at the satisfactory *2:
level? If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is not
properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
YES any problems.
*3:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
with printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual
End adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the print engine for any
problems.
*4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine for any problems.

1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. MODE" is displayed.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
procedure 2) on the document table. After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper 6) Check the color balance and density.
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are (Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed check.)
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper. When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
PRINTER CALIBRATION If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25).
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment.
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
13-F (2)
Printer color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the printer density of C, M, Y and K. This is used at the fol-
lowing situation. When the result of auto adjustment described
above is not existing within the range of reference. When a fine
4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment is required. When there is request from the user for
When the color balance is customized with the manual color changing (customizing) the color balance.
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
balance, select the service target. ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed efficiency.
and prints the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed.

Printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
adjustment) procedure flowchart (SIM67-25) The color patch image (Adjustment pattern) is printed.
3) Check that the following condition is satisfied or the color bal-
Start
ance is satisfactory.
If not, execute the following procedures.
Printer color balance and density
adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection.)
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Check the printed adjustment check pattern,

and select a target adjustment color with the
Low density High density
color keys (C,M,Y,K).
;
Select a target adjustment density level.
/
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
%
$M
Check the patch color balance and density in the
process gray of the color balance check pattern. CMY
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
Are the color balance 1) The max. density section is not blurred.
NO
sfactory level? 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C and BK is copied.

YES
Cancel the SIM67-25 mode. The patch density is changed gradually.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
balance and density adjustment.
not be reversed.
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
check pattern, and check the level.
printer color balance and density.
NO
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
Are the color balance and request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
density at the satisfactory
level?
color balance stated above.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
YES
adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
Set the SERVICE target for the the color balance target is DEF 1.)
automatic printer color balance
adjustment. (SIM67-27) 4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
End 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
*1: SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
engine for any problems. To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.

6) Check the color balance and density. Setting
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density range
check.) B K K engine maximum 0 0-1 1
0:ENABLE density correction mode
1:DISABLE Enable
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register K engine maximum 1
the color balance as the service target.
Disable
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not C CYAN Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
required. MAX TARGET CYAN maximum density
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar- correction
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
the next color balance adjustment. MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
correction
E YELLOW Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
13-G Printer image quality adjustment MAX TARGET YELLOW maximum density
(Individual adjustment) correction
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each F BLACK Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the MAX TARGET BLACK maximum density
correction
basic adjustments ADJ 14E (1) and ADJ 14E (2) or there is a
G PRINTER Printer total toner limit set up 0-3 0
request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this
TOTAL TONER
adjustment.
LIMIT SETUP
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment. H RATIO LOW Mix ratio of high density 0-100 33
correction LOW
13-G (1) I RATIO HIGH Mix ratio of high density 0-100 0
correction HIGH
Printer density adjustment (Low density
J DITHER Dither threshold LOW 0-255 250
section density adjustment) (No need to THRESHOLD
adjust normally) K SLOPE Slope threshold HIGH 100- 400
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den- THRESHOLD 500
sity area in the printer mode. • If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image. The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
This adjustment is required in the following cases. gap is better.
• When it is required not to reproduce images in the low density • In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
section, or to reproduce low-density images. to item A and B.
• When there is request from the user. The tone gap may occur in high density part.
1) Enter the SIM 67-36 mode. If the setting values of item C, D, E and F are changed, density of
2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key. the high density part is changed.
In case of increase of the image density on low density part, When these values are changed, be sure to perform the printer
increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density color balance and density adjustment. (Automatic adjustment)
on low density part, decrease the adjustment value.
13-G (3)
13-G (2) Printer gamma adjustment for each dither
Printer high density image density (Automatic adjustment) (No need to adjust
reproduction setting (Supporting the high normally)
density section tone gap) This adjustment is used to adjust the color balance and the density
(No need to adjust normally) in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode, and the gloss
When a tone gap is generated in the high density section in the paper mode.
printer mode, the setting is changed to lower the density in the high This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
density section. and images.
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following 1) Enter the SIM67-54 mode.
cases, a change of setting must be made. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
• When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
• To lower the density in the high density section.
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
Setting
range
A CMY CMY engine maximum 0 0-1 0
0:ENABLE density correction mode
1:DISABLE Enable
CMY engine maximum 1
Disable

3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the 8) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on procedure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
patch image (adjustment pattern). patch image (adjustment pattern).
PRINTER CALIBRATION PRINTER CALIBRATION
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.

The color balance adjustment is automatically performed. The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
Check it for any abnormality. 10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
5) Press [OK] key. and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
press [EXECUTE] key.
Select item
Content After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
(Mode/Image)
Adjustment item to improve the color balance Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
HEAVY PAPER
in the heavy paper mode tered.
Adjustment item to improve the color balance 11) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
1200DPI_1BIT
in 1200dpi mode
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
Adjustment item to improve the density and
B/W check.)
gradation in the monochrome mode
Adjustment item to improve the color balance
4BIT_GRAPHICS 13-H Copy, Printer gray balance and density
in the text mode
DOT_SCREEN1
Adjustment item to improve the color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
in Dot (High Line Number).
Used to adjust CMY mixed color gray patch.
Adjustment item to improve the color balance
DOT_SCREEN2 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
in Dot (Low Line Number) mode
Adjustment item to improve the density and • When the user requests for the color balance after it has been
DOT_SCREEN1_BW gradation in Dot mode of Monochrome High adjusted.
Quality mode
General
Adjustment item to improve the density and
DOT_SCREEN2_BW gradation in Dot mode of Monochrome Ultra SIM 67-20 is a function to automatically adjust the gray balance by
Fine mode selecting an appropriate gray out of CMY mixed color gray patches.
Adjustment item to improve the color balance If SIM 46-74 does not satisfy the color balance, it may be improved
SHIGH by SIM 67-20.
in Super Fine Text mode
When this adjustment is executed, SIM46-74 color balance adjust-
ment result and [SERVICE] target registered by SIM63-7 and 67-27
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. are updated.
NOTE: Execute SIM46-74 [SERVICE] target immediately before. If
it does not, color balance may differ greatly
1) Execute SIM 67-20
2) Select target item [COPY] [PRINTER]
Patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed

3) Set patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in step2)
on the document table ADJ 14 Paper size sensor adjustment
Place patch image (adjustment pattern) so that the fine lines
are on the left side, at that time place 5 blank paper on the 14-A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width)
printed patch image (adjustment pattern)
sensor adjustment
When [COPY] is selected When [PRINTER] is selected • The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
• The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion.
4) Tap [EXCUTE] key

Patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed
5) Set patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in step4)
on the document table
Place patch image (adjustment pattern) so that the fine lines
are on the left side, at that time place 5 blank paper on the
printed patch image (adjustment pattern)
When [COPY] is selected When [PRINTER] is selected

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
6) Tap [EXECUTE] key [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
7) Tap [OK] key display.
When “Please quit this mode” is displayed the adjustment Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
operation was completed? 8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
Repeat step2) if executing both copy and printer mode tion.
Cancel SIM 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
8) Execute SIM 46-74 selecting [SERVICE] at this time [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
9) Check gray balance
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
played.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.

14-B DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray document size ADJ 15 Document size detection
(width) sensor adjustment
adjustment
• The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray section has been disassem- This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
bled. • When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
• The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced. • When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
• When a U2 trouble occurs. • When U2 trouble has occurred.
• The scanner PWB has been replaced. • When the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
• The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced. • When the EEPROM on the SCN MFP PWB is replaced.
2) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width 15-A Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
position. sensor
1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE
PHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
ADJ 16 Touch panel coordinate setting

• The operation panel has been replaced.
• The SCN MFP PWB has been replaced.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. • The EEPROM on the SCN MFP PWB has been replaced.
The maximum width detection level is recognized. 1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode.
4) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the
A4R size.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
6) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the
A5R size.
8) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width
position. 2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
9) Press [EXECUTE] key. When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
The minimum width detection level is recognized. and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
* When each of the above operations has been completed, the pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
has failed, the "ERROR" message appears. In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such as a
needle or a pin).

ADJ 17 Fusing paper guide position
adjustment
Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ing cases, perform this adjustment.
• When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
• When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
• When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
paper rear edge section.
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws on the two posi-
tions in the front/rear frame direction.
2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
The standard fixing position is at the marking scale center.

However, the position may be varied depending on the situa-
tion.
* When a wrinkle is made on paper, change the position in the
error direction A.
* When an image deflection or unclear image is generated in the
lead edge area of paper, change the position in the arrow direc-
tion B.

[6] SIMULATION
MX-4071
Service Manual
1. General and purpose

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine
for improved serviceability.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis) data
check, clear
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc) data Ver
transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.
Simulation mode
Easy mode Displays commonly used simulations for each category,

allowing easy access for technicians to change settings,
perform maintenance and adjustments.
Classic mode All simulations are listed and can be accessed by
entering the main code, then sub code as per previous
model series.
2. Function of each key
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3) Touch the (#) key → Asterisk (*) key → Clear key → Asterisk
(*) key → Ready for input of main code of simulation.
No. Name Function

1 TEST key Change test mode
2 Mode setting key Change Easy mode, Classic mode
3 Language setting key Change language in simulation mode
4 INFO key Display operation of current display
5 EXIT key Exit from simulation mode
6 BACK key Back to the previous display
7 Clear key Clear input value
3. Starting the simulation

Entering the simulation mode.
1) Double-click the HOME key
2) Touch the Ver display section (10-key mode input mode
screen)
MX-4071 SIMULATION 6 – 1
4. List of simulation codes Main menu Sub menu SIM Function
6 Ready for 10-3 Toner cartridge eject
A. List of easy mode transport sensor check
6-90 Load move for shipment
(1) List of menu (Installation)
10 History 1 Date list Use
SIM
Main menu Sub menu SIM Function
1 Adjustment 1 Process 46-74 Copy/printer gradation (2) List of menu (Maintenance)
auto adjustment
50-22 Auto adjustment of Main menu Sub menu SIM Function
registration & drum 1 Data 1 Counter 22-1 Counter display
position display display 22-8 Org./staple counter display
2 Positioning 50-10 Manual image position
22-9 Paper feed counter display
adjustment
22-13 Process cartridge display
3 Copy 46-21 Color copy gradation
2 JAM 22-3 JAM history data display
manual adjustment
history data 22-12 SPF JAM history data
4 Printer 67-25 Printer gradation manual
display display
adjustment
3 System/ 22-5 ROM version data display
64-5 Printer self print (PCL)
Version 22-10 Machine system display
5 Image 63-2 Shading execution
Quality 4 List printing 22-6 Data print mode
63-3 Scanner color balance
Adjustment auto adjustment 23-2 JAM/trouble data print
mode
44-6 High density / engine
halftone process control 5 USB 56-99 Export all log data
compulsory execution storage
44-26 Half tone density correct 2 Adjustment 1 Positioning 50-10 Manual image position
execution adjustment
46-74 Copy/printer gradation 50-22 Auto adjustment of
auto adjustment registration & drum
position
2 Registration 1 Function/ 26-1 Paper output system setup
Settings Option 2 Process 25-2 Automatic developer
26-2 Size setup
settings adjustment
26-3 Auditor setup
44-2 Process control gain
26-33 Special function setting
adjustment
26-50 Function setting
46-74 Copy/printer gradation
26-65 Finisher alarm mode setup auto adjustment
(staple limit)
3 Image 44-2 Process control gain
26-78 ROPE password setting Quality adjustment
2 Counter 26-5 A3 (11x17) countup Adjustment 44-6 High density / engine
mode 26-8 Banner size countup halftone process control
26-52 A blank paper count mode compulsory execution
setup 44-26 Half tone density correct
3 FAX/Image 66-1 Image send software SW. execution
send setting 61-13 Laser power correction
settings data clear
4 Toner 26-18 Toner save mode setup 61-11 Laser power auto
setting 26-69 Toner near end setting correction
5 FSS setting 27-2 FSS function setup (input) 63-3 Scanner color balance
27-4 FSS function setup auto adjustment
27-7 FSS function setup 63-5 Standard scanner gamma
(function) setup
27-9 FSS function adjustment 46-74 Copy/printer gradation
27-14 FSS test mode setup auto adjustment
27-15 FSS connect status 4 Cleaning 6-4 Charger cleaner check
27-16 FSS alert setting 43-31 Fuser web cleaning check
27-17 FSS paper order alert 5 Replacing 10-3 Toner cartridge eject
setting developer sensor check
3 Data 1 Counter 22-1 Counter display 25-2 Automatic developer
display display 22-9 Paper feed counter display adjustment
22-13 Process cartridge display 3 Counter 24-1 JAM/trouble counter data
2 System/ 22-5 ROM version data display clear clear
Version 22-10 Machine system display 24-2 Paper feed counter clear
3 List printing 22-6 Data print mode 24-3 Org./output counter data
clear
23-2 JAM/trouble data print
mode 24-4 Maintenance counter clear
4 USB 56-99 Export all log data 4 Registration 21-1 Maintenance cycle setup
storage Settings
4 Version 49-1 Firmware update 5 Version 49-1 Firmware update
upgrade upgrade 49-7 Pre-install data update
49-7 Pre-install data update
5 Error 13 U1 trouble cancellation 6 Error 13 U1 trouble cancellation
release release 14 Trouble cancellation
14 Trouble cancellation
(other) (other)
15 Paper feed trouble 15 Paper feed trouble
cancellation cancellation
16 U2 trouble cancellation 16 U2 trouble cancellation
Main menu Sub menu SIM Function Main menu Sub menu SIM Function
10 History 1 Date list Use 5 Copy 46-21 Color copy gradation
SIM manual adjustment
44-21 Half tone process control
(3) List of menu (Adjustment and Settings) standard value register
setup
Main menu Sub menu SIM Function 46-24 Copy gradation auto
1 Adjustment 1 Positioning 50-1 Copy edge adjustment adjustment
50-5 Print edge adjustment 46-54 Copy gradation auto
50-6 SPF edge adjustment adjustment (at dither)
50-10 Manual image position 63-7 Copy gradation auto
adjustment adjustment target setup:
50-12 Original center offset setup service
48-1 Ratio adjustment 63-8 Copy gradation auto
48-5 Motor speed adjustment adjustment target clear:
50-22 Auto adjustment of service
registration & drum 63-11 Copy gradation auto
position adjustment target select
2 Image 50-22 Auto adjustment of 6 Printer 67-24 Printer gradation auto
Quality registration & drum adjustment
Automatic position 67-25 Printer gradation manual
Adjustment 50-20 Registration adjustment adjustment
61-11 Laser power auto 67-26 Printer gradation auto
correction adjustment target select
46-74 Copy/printer gradation 67-27 Printer gradation auto
auto adjustment adjustment target setup:
3 Image 61-14 Laser power setting service
Quality collective input 67-28 Printer gradation auto
Adjustment 61-11 Laser power auto adjustment target clear:
correction service
61-13 Laser power correction 7 Touch 65-1 Touch panel adjustment
data clear panel
46-74 Copy/printer gradation 8 Function/ 64-2 Self print (B/W): service
auto adjustment Option
46-54 Copy gradation auto settings
adjustment (at dither) 9 Data 1 Counter 22-1 Counter display
46-52 Copy gradation data clear display display 22-9 Paper feed counter display
(at dither) 22-13 Process cartridge display
67-54 Printer gradation auto 2 System/ 22-5 ROM version data display
adjustment (at dither) Version 22-10 Machine system display
67-52 Printer gradation data clear 3 List printing 22-6 Data print mode
(at dither) 23-2 JAM/trouble data print
67-20 Output auto adjustment mode
2 Process 10-3 Toner cartridge eject 4 USB 56-99 Export all log data
sensor check storage
25-2 Automatic developer 10 History 1 Date list Use
adjustment SIM
44-2 Process control gain
adjustment B. List of classic mode
46-74 Copy/printer gradation
auto adjustment Easy Mode
3 Scanner/ 41-1 PD sensor check
Adjustment and
Maintenance
Installation
SPF 41-2 Document size photo-

Settings
Sim
sensor setup Function
No.
46-9 Exposure adjustment
(SFP)
63-2 Shading execution
53-6 SPF tray adjustment 1-1 Check the operation of the scanner (reading)
53-8 SPF scanning position unit and the control circuit
adjustment 1-2 Check the operation of the sensors in the
63-3 Scanner color balance scanner (reading) section and the control
auto adjustment circuit
63-5 Standard scanner gamma 1-5 Check the operation of the scanner (reading)
setup unit and the control circuit
4 Paper 40-2 Bypass tray adjustment 2-1 Check the operation of the document feeder
feeding, 3-10 Finisher adjustment and the control circuit
Transport 2-2 Check the operation of the sensors in the
and paper document feeder section and the control
ejection circuit
2-3 Check the operation of the loads in the
document feeder and the control circuit
3-2 Check the operation of the sensors in the
finisher and the control circuit
3-3 Check the operation of the load in the
3-10 Adjust the finisher 4
Easy Mode Easy Mode
Adjustment and
Adjustment and
Maintenance
Maintenance
Installation
Installation
Settings
Settings
Sim Sim
Function Function
No. No.
4-2 Check the operation of the sensors in the 22-3 Check misfeed positions and the misfeed 1-2
desk/large capacity tray (LCC) and the count of each position
control circuit 22-4 Check trouble (self diag) history
4-3 Check the operation of the loads in the desk/ 22-5 Check ROM version of each unit 3-2 1-3 9-2
large capacity tray (LCC) and the control 22-6 Output the setting/adjustment data, the 3-3 1-4 9-3
circuit firmware version and the count list
4-5 Check the operation of the paper transport 22-8 Check the operation count of the finisher, the 1-1
clutch (DTRC) in the desk and the LCC SPF and the scan (reading) unit
paper transport clutch (LTRC) 22-9 Check paper feed count of each paper feed 3-1 1-1 9-1
5-1 Check the operation of the display, LCD in section
the operation panel and the control circuit 22-10 Check the system configuration (option, 3-2 1-3 9-2
5-2 Check the operation of the heater lamp and internal hardware)
the control circuit 22-11 Check FAX count
5-3 Check the operation of the scanner lamp 22-12 Check SPF misfeed positions and misfeed 1-2
and the control circuit count at each position
5-4 Check the operation of the discharge lamp 22-13 Check the operating time of the process 3-1 1-1 9-1
and the control circuit section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge)
6-1 Check the operation of the load in the paper and the fusing unit)
transport system (clutches and solenoids) 22-14 Display toner cartridge usage status count
and the control circuit
22-18 Display user data delete history
6-2 Check the operation of each fan motor and
22-19 Check scan and image send count
the control circuit
22-40 Display trouble code information
6-3 Check the operation of the transport unit and
22-41 Check JAM code information
the control circuit
22-42 Display JAM/trouble data
6-6 Check the operation of fusing pressure
release, applying and the control circuit 22-43 Display JAM data details
6-90 Reset the machine to the factory setting 6 22-90 Output system setting list
(The scanner is set to the lock enable 23-2 Output trouble history list of paper jam and 3-3 1-4 9-3
position) misfeed
7-1 Set the operating conditions of againg 23-80 Check the operation of paper feed and paper
7-6 Set the operating intermittent aging cycle transport in the paper feed section and the
paper transport section. Output operation
7-8 Display the warm up time
status list of the sensor and detectors in the
7-9 Color setting in the color copy test mode
paper feed section and the paper transport
(check the copy operation and the image
section
quality for each color)
23-81 Export paper feed time list
7-12 Set the document reading number of sheets
24-1 Clear jam count and trouble count 3
8-1 Check and adjust the operation of the
24-2 Clear paper feed count of each paper feed 3
developping voltage in each print mode and
section
the control circuit. *When the middle speed
is adjusted the low speed is also adjusted 24-3 Clear the finisher, SPF and the scan 3
simultaneously (reading) unit count
8-2 Check and adjust the operation of the main 24-4 Clear maintenance count and printer count 3
charger grid voltage in each printer mode of the transport unit and the fusing unit
and the control circuit. *When the middle 24-5 Clear developer count
speed is adjusted the low speed is also 24-35 Clear toner cartridge usage status count
adjusted simultaneously 25-1 Check the operation of the developing
8-6 Check and adjust the operation of the section
transport voltage and the control circuit 25-2 Make the initial setting of toner density when 1-1 2-2 2
8-10 Set main charger current output replacing developer 2-5
9-2 Check the operation of the sensors in the 25-4 Display the operation data of the toner
paper reverse section (duplex section) and supply quantity
the control circuit 25-5 Display the toner density correction data
9-3 Check the operation of the load in the paper 26-1 Set paper output tray 2-1
reverse section (duplex section) and the 26-2 Set the paper size of the large capacity tray 2-1
control circuit (LCC)
10-1 Check the operation of the toner supply 26-3 Set the auditor mode 2-1
mechanism (toner motor) and the control 26-5 Set count mode of the total count and the 2-2
circuit maintenance count
10-3 Check the operation of the toner cartridge 6 2-5 2 26-6 Set destination area
ejecting position sensor and the control 26-7 Set machine ID
circuit
26-8 Set counter mode for long scale 2-2
13 Cancel U1 trouble 5 6
26-10 Set the trial mode of the network scanner
14 Cancel H3, H4, H5 troubles 5 6
26-18 Set the toner save mode operation 2-4
26-30 Set the CE mark operation mode
26-32 Set the specification of the fusing cleaning
21-1 Set the maintenance cycle 4 operation
22-1 Check print count in each section and each 3-1 1-1 9-1 26-33 Set the special function 2-1
operation mode
22-2 Check total count of misfeed and troubles
Easy Mode Easy Mode
Adjustment and
Adjustment and
Maintenance
Maintenance
Installation
Installation
Settings
Settings
Sim Sim
Function Function
No. No.
26-35 Set the display/mode of SIM 22-4 trouble 43-21 Set the environment correction under high
history when a same trouble occurred temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the
repeatedly. There are two display modes. fusing temperature setting (SIM43-2) in each
Display as one trouble and display as paper mode
several series of troubles 43-24 Set fuser operation mode
26-38 Set continue/stop of print when the 43-35 Check fusing nip operation
maintenance life is reached 44-1 Set each correction operation function in the
26-41 Set magnification ratio auto select function in image forming section
the center binding mode 44-2 Adjust the sensitivity of the image density 2-2 2
26-49 Set the print speed of postcard mode sensor 2-3
26-50 Function setting 2-1 44-4 Set the condition of the high density process
26-52 Set count up mode for non-printed paper 2-2 control operation
26-65 Set the finisher alarm mode 2-1 44-6 Execute the high density process control 1-5 2-3
26-66 Set password for simulation forcibly
26-69 Set the operating condition for toner near 2-4 44-9 Display the result data of the high density
end process control operation
26-73 Adjust image loss for enlargement copy, A3 44-12 Display the operation data of the high
wide copy mode density process control and the image
26-74 Set the OSA trial mode density sensor
26-78 Set password for the remote operation panel 2-1 44-14 Display the output level of the temperature
26-79 Set pop-up display of security and humidity sensor
26-85 Set the function for the simulation mode 44-15 Set the OPC drum idle rotation
27-2 Set the sender's registration number and the 2-5 44-17 Set refresh operation for process section
HOST server telephone number 44-21 Set the halftone process control target 5
27-4 Set the initial call and toner order auto send 2-5 44-22 Display the toner patch density level in the
27-5 Set the machine tag No. halftone process control operation
27-6 Set of the manual service call 44-24 Display the correction target and the
correction level in the halftone process
27-7 Set of the enable, alert callout 2-5
control operation
27-9 Set the paper transport time recording Yes/ 2-5
44-25 Set the calculating conditions of the
No threshold value and shading gain
correction value for the halftone process
adjustment retry number
control
27-10 Clear the trouble prediction history
44-26 Execute the halftone process control 1-5 2-3
information
compulsory
27-11 Check the serial communication retry
44-27 Clear the correction data of the halftone
number and the scanner gain adjustment
process control
retry number history
44-28 Set the process control execution conditions
27-12 Check the high density, halftone process
control and the auto registration adjustment 44-29 Set the operating conditions of the process
error history control during a job
27-13 Check the history of paper transport time 44-31 Adjust the OPC drum phase (Manual
between sensors adjustment)
27-14 Set the FSS function connection test mode 2-5 44-37 Set the development bias correction level in
the continuous printing operation
27-15 Display the FSS connection status 2-5
44-43 Display the identification information of the
27-16 Set the FSS alert send 2-5
developing unit
27-17 Set the FSS paper order alert 2-5
44-62 Set the process control execution conditions
30-1 Check the operation of the sensors in other
46-1 Adjust the copy density in the color copy
than the paper feed section and the control
mode
circuit
46-2 Adjust the copy density in the monochrome
30-2 Check the operation of the sensors in the
copy mode
paper feed section and the control circuit
46-4 Adjust the density in the color image send
30-30 Check the operation of the motion sensor
mode
40-2 Adjust the paper width sensor of the manual 4
46-5 Adjust the density in the monochrome image
paper feed tray
send mode
40-7 Set the adjustment value of the paper width
46-8 Adjust the RGB color balance in image send
sensor of the manual paper feed tray
mode
41-1 Check the operation of the document size 3
46-9 Adjust the scan image density 3
sensor and the control circuit
46-10 Adjust the copy color balance and the
41-2 Adjust the document size sensor detection 3
gamma (for each color copy mode)
level
46-16 Adjust the monochrome copy density and 1-3 5
41-3 Check the operation of the document size
the gamma (for each monochrome copy
mode)
43-1 Set the fusing temperature in each mode
46-19 Set the operating conditions for the scanning
43-2 Set the fusing operation and preheating
(exposure) density of monochrome auto
43-20 Set the environment correction under low copy mode documents
temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the
46-21 Adjust the copy color balance (manual 1-3 5
fusing temperature setting (SIM43-2) in each
adjustment)
paper mode
Easy Mode Easy Mode
Adjustment and
Adjustment and
Maintenance
Maintenance
Installation
Installation
Settings
Settings
Sim Sim
Function Function
No. No.
46-23 Set the density correction of copy high 48-1 Adjust the scan image magnification ratio 1-1
density section (high density tone gap (Main scanning direction and Sub scanning
supported) direction)
46-24 Adjust the copy color balance (Auto 5 48-5 Adjust the scan image magnification ratio 1-1
adjustment) (Sub scanning direction)
46-25 Adjust the copy color balance (Single color 48-6 Adjust the rotation speed of each motor
copy mode) 49-1 Update the firmware 4 5
46-26 Reset the single color mode color balance 49-7 Update the pre-installed firmware 4 5
set value to the default 50-1 Adjust the Copy image position and the 1-1
46-27 Adjust the gamma/density of copy images, image loss
text and line image edges 50-5 Adjust the print lead edge image position in 1-1
46-30 Adjust the resolution in the sub scanning the printer mode
direction in the copy mode 50-6 Adjust the copy image position and the 1-1
46-32 Adjust the document background density image loss (SPF)
reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy 50-10 Adjust the black print image magnification 1-2 2-1 1-1
mode ratio and the off center position
46-36 Adjust the colors in the two color copy mode 50-12 Adjust the scan image off center position 1-1
46-37 Adjust the reproduction capability of color 50-20 Adjust image registration (Manual) 1-2
document in the monochrome mode 50-22 Adjust the image registration (Main scan 1-1 2-1 1-1
46-38 Adjust the black component amount in the direction, sub scan direction) (Auto) / OPC 1-2
color copy mode drum phase (Auto)
46-39 Adjust the sharpness of FAX send images 50-23 Set the registration correction
46-40 Adjust the FAX send image density 50-24 Display the detailed data of SIM 44-2, 50-20,
(Collective adjustment of all the modes) 21 and 22
46-41 Adjust the FAX send image density (Normal) 50-27 Adjust the image loss of scanned images in
46-42 Adjust the FAX send image density (Fine) the FAX and image send mode
46-43 Adjust the FAX send image density (Super 51-1 Adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary
fine) transfer voltage
46-44 Adjust the FAX send image density (Ultra 51-2 Adjust the contact pressure (deflection
fine) amount) on paper by the main unit and the
46-45 Adjust the FAX send image density (600dpi) SPF resist roller
46-46 Adjust the FAX send image density (RGB 53-6 Adjust the detection level of the SPF 3
RIP) document width
46-47 Set the compression rate of copy and scan 53-7 Adjust the SPF document size width sensor
images (JPEG) 53-8 Adjust the document lead edge reference 3
46-48 Set the copy output resolution in the copy and the SPF mode document scan position
mode 53-9 Set scanning position in SPF
46-51 Adjust the gamma for heavy paper in copy 53-10 Execute dirt detection in SPF
mode and the image process mode 55-1 Set the specification of the engine control
46-52 Set the gamma default for heavy paper in 1-3 operations (SOFT SW)
copy mode and the image process mode 55-2 Set the specification of the scanner control
46-54 Adjust the engine halftone auto density 1-3 operation (SOFT SW)
(Dither) 5 55-3 Set the specification of the controller
46-55 Adjust the drop out color in the image send operation (SOFT SW)
mode (Monochrome manual text mode) 55-10 Set the special stamp text (For Taiwan)
46-58 Set the pseudo resolution (smoothing 56-1 Transport data between STORAGE - MFP
process) in the copy mode EEPROM
46-60 Adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy 56-2 Store the data in the EEPROM, ICU DRIVE
mode and STORAGE to the USB memory
46-61 Adjust the area separation recognition level 56-3 Store the document filing data to the USB
46-62 Set the operating condition of the ACS, the memory
area separation, the background image 56-4 Store the JOB log data to the USB memory
process and the auto exposure mode 56-5 Store the SIM22-6 data to the USB memory
46-63 Adjust the density in the copy low density in the text format
section 56-6 Store the SIM23-2 JAM/trouble data to the
46-65 Set the color correction table USB memory in the text format
46-66 Adjust the reproduction capability of 56-7 Store the system log data to the USB
watermarks in the copy/printer mode memory
46-68 Adjust the auto resolution judgement 56-8 Update ICC profile
46-74 Adjust copy color balance (Auto) / printer 1-1 2-2 1-2 56-15 Restore MFP EEPROM data
color balance (Auto) 1-5 2-3 1-3 56-99 Store all log data to the USB memory 3-4 1-5 9-4
2
60-1 Check the memory operations (read/write) of
46-90 Set the process operation of high the SCN MFP PWB
compression PDF images
61-1 Check the LSU polygon motor rotation and
46-91 Adjust the reproduction capability of black laser detection
text
61-3 Set the laser power
61-4 Print out the print image skew adjustment
pattern
Easy Mode Easy Mode
Adjustment and
Adjustment and
Maintenance
Maintenance
Installation
Installation
Settings
Settings
Sim Sim
Function Function
No. No.
61-11 Adjust the laser power (Auto) 2-3 1-2 66-12 Check the transmission of the selected
1-3 signal at 300bps to the line and the main unit
61-12 Adjust the Laser power (Manual) speaker (transmission level: soft SW setting)
61-13 Clear the laser power correction value 2-3 1-3 66-13 Set dial number for SIM66-14/15/16 dial test
61-14 Set the laser power correction value 1-3 66-14 Check the dial pulse (10pps) transmission
62-1 Format the storage test and to adjust the make time
62-3 Check read/write of the STORAGE (all 66-15 Check the dial pulse (20pps) transmission
areas) test and to adjust the make time
62-4 Check the format of the STORAGE (Logical) 66-16 Check the DTMF signal transmission test
62-7 Print the self diagnostics error log of the and to adjust the transmission level
STORAGE 66-17 Check the transmission of the DTMF signal
62-9 Clear the data in the STORAGE to the line and the main unit speaker
(transmission level: max)
62-12 Set auto format in STORAGE error
66-18 Check the transmission of the DTMF signal
62-14 Check/Delete the database file in the
to the line and the main unit speaker
STORAGE
(transmission level: soft SW setting)
62-21 Display the storage information in the
66-21 Print system error, protocol monitor
STORAGE
66-22 Set the handset sound volume (Japan model
63-1 Display the shading correction result
only)
63-2 Execute shading correction 1-5 3
66-29 Clear the address book data
63-3 Adjust scanner (CCD) color balance and 1-5 2-3 3
66-30 Display the TEL/LIU status change (display
gamma
is highlighted by status change)
63-4 Display the scanner test chart patch density
66-31 Set the output port for TEL/LIU
63-5 Set the default of the scanner (CCD) color 2-3 3
66-32 Check the received data and to display the
balance and gamma
result
63-7 Set the service target of the copy mode auto 5
66-33 Check various signals detection result
color balance adjustment
66-36 Check send and receive data of MFP
63-8 Set the default of the service target of the 5
controller interface
copy mode auto color balance adjustment
66-39 Set the destination for FAX
63-11 Set the target color balance of the copy 5
mode auto color balance adjustment 66-42 Write the program to power control installed
in the FAX
64-1 Print test pattern (self print) (color mode)
66-43 Write the adjustment value into the power
64-2 Print test pattern (self print) (monochrome 8
control installed in the FAX
mode)
66-61 Set the FAX related soft SW (151-250)
64-4 Print printer test pattern (self print)
66-62 Store the FAX receive data to the USB
64-5 Print printer test pattern (self print) (PCL) 1-4
memory in PDF format
64-6 Print printer test pattern (self print) (PS)
67-17 Clear printer controller
65-1 Adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) 7
67-20 Adjust the gray balance (Auto adjustment) 1-3
detection coordinates
67-21 Adjust the gray balance (Manual adjustment)
65-2 Display the touch panel (LCD display
section) detection coordinates 67-24 Adjust printer color balance (Auto) 6
65-5 Check the operation panel key input 67-25 Adjust printer color balance (Manual) 1-4 6
66-1 Set the FAX related soft SW (2-150) 2-3 67-26 Set the target color balance of the printer 6
mode auto color balance adjustment
66-2 Set a country code and the default for the
country code 67-27 Set the service target of the printer mode 6
auto color balance adjustment
66-3 Check read/write of the EEPROM and the
SDRAM on the MODEM controller and 67-28 Set the default of the service target of the 6
display the result printer mode auto color adjustment
66-4 Check the transmission of the selected 67-31 Clear the printer calibration value
signal to the line and the main unit speaker 67-33 Set the gamma of the printer screen
(transmission level: max) 67-34 Set the density correction in the printer high
66-5 Check the transmission of the selected density section
signal to the line and the main unit speaker 67-36 Set the density in the low density section
(transmission level: soft SW setting) 67-41 Set 2 color print
66-6 Print the confidential registration check table 67-42 Set 2 color print color density
(BOX No, BOX name, passcode) 67-43 Adjust the color balance in the 2 color mode
66-7 Print the all image data saved in the image 67-46 Adjust the image enhancement
memory 67-52 Set the default of the printer screen gamma 1-3
66-8 Check the transmission of the selected 67-54 Adjust printer color balance 1-3
sound message to the line and the main unit
speaker (transmission level: max)
66-9 Check the transmission of the selected
sound message to the line and the main unit
speaker (transmission level: soft SW setting)
66-10 Clear the FAX and image send image data
66-11 Check the transmission of the selected
signal at 300bps to the line and the main unit
speaker (transmission level: max)
5. Details of simulation DSPF
Item/Display Operation mode Default
1 OC SCAN 300DPI
400DPI
300DPI (372mm/s)
400DPI (372mm/s)
300DPI (372mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (275mm/s)

1-1 1200DPI 1200DPI (137.5mm/s)
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the scanner (read-
ing) unit and the control circuit 2
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure 2-1
1) Select the operation speed. Purpose Operation test/check
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the document
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the feeder and the control circuit
scan resolution (operation speed). Section SPF
RSPF Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Operation mode Default 1) Select the operation mode and the speed.
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI (372mm/s) 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
400DPI 400DPI (372mm/s) The SPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit opera-
600DPI 600DPI (264mm/s) tions at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (opera-
1200DPI 1200DPI (132mm/s) tion speed).
When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the operation is terminated.
DSPF
Item/Display Operation mode Default
RSPF
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI (372mm/s) Item/Display Operation mode Default
400DPI 400DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI 300DPI (396mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (275mm/s) SINGLE 400DPI 400DPI (396mm/s) 300DPI (396mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI (137.5mm/s) 600DPI 600DPI (264mm/s)
300DPI 300DPI (396mm/s)
DOUBLE 400DPI 400DPI (396mm/s) 300DPI (396mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (264mm/s)
1-2
Purpose Operation test/check DSPF
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the sensors in the Item/Display Operation mode Default
scanner (reading) section and the control 300DPI 300DPI (550mm/s)
circuit SINGLE 400DPI 400DPI (412.5mm/s) 300DPI (550mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (275mm/s)
300DPI 300DPI (550mm/s)
Operation/Procedure DOUBLE 400DPI 400DPI (412.5mm/s) 300DPI (550mm/s)
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. 600DPI 600DPI (275mm/s)
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi-
tion.
2-2
1-5 Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the sensors in the
document feeder section and the control
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the scanner (read-
circuit
ing) unit and the control circuit
Section Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors are displayed.
1) Select the operation speed.
The code names of the sensors which are active are highlighted.
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan DSPF
resolution (operation speed). Display Content
When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the operation is terminated. SCOV Upper cover sensor
SLCOV Lower cover sensor
RSPF
SOCD SPF sensor
Item/Display Operation mode Default SPED1 Document sensor 1
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI (372mm/s) SPED2 Document sensor 2
400DPI 400DPI (372mm/s) SPLS1 Document length sensor 1
600DPI 600DPI (264mm/s) SPLS2 Document length sensor 2
1200DPI 1200DPI (132mm/s) SPOD Document exit sensor
SPOTD Document exit tray sensor
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1
Display Content No,/Display item Content
SPPD5 Document pass sensor 5 FNMANSW Manual staple switch
SPRDMD Document random sensor FNMSW1 Front cover switch
STLD Tray lower limit sensor FNPS1 Discharged paper sensor
STUD Tray upper limit sensor FNPS2 Paddle home position sensor
FNPS3 Knurling home position sensor
RSPF FNPS4 Alignment plate front home position sensor
Display Content FNPS5 Alignment plate rear home position sensor
SCOV Cover sensor FNPS6 Staple tray paper sensor
SOCD SPF sensor FNPS7 Paper exit assist home position sensor
SPED Document sensor FNPS8 Bundle hold home position sensor
SPLS1 Document length sensor 1 FNPS9 Paper height sensor
SPLS2 Document length sensor 2 FNPS10 Paper exit tray lower limit sensor
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 FNPS11 Staple shift home position sensor
SPPD2 Document pass sensor 2 FNPS12 Manual staple paper detection sensor
SPPD3 Document pass sensor 3 FNPS14 Paper exit tray position sensor
SPPD4 Document pass sensor 4 FNPS16 Slide position sensor
FNPUDTC Punch unit connection detection signal
FNSTPLHP Staple home position sensor
FNSTPLLS Staple empty detection
2-3 FNSTPLRE Staple lead edge sensor
Purpose Operation test/check Inner finisher punch unit
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the loads in the doc-
No,/Display item Content
ument feeder and the control circuit
FCFULL_S Punch dust full sensor
Section SPF FCPI_S Punch home position sensor
Operation/Procedure FCPUENCS Punch motor rotation sensor
1) Select a target item. FCRI_S Punch mode sensor
FCYKPTRS Punch unit paper rear edge sensor
The selected load performs the operation. Staple-free Staple Unit
DSPF FNPS13 Staple-free staple unit position sensor
FNPS15 Staple-free staple unit home position sensor
Display Content
SLUM Lift motor
1K finisher
SPFC Document feed clutch
SPFFAN SPF fan No,/Display item Content
SPFM Transport motor BLTHPS Release position sensor
SPOM Document exit motor ENT Inlet sensor
SPOTLED Document exit tray LED Paper exit guide plate open/close home position
EXGPLTHP
SRRC Registration roller clutch sensor
STRC Transport roller 2 clutch FDRSW Door open/close sensor
STRRC Transport roller 1 clutch HITHP Flapper home position sensor
JOGHPS Jogger home position sensor
RSPF LDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit lower sensor
LMDLT Intermediate feeder left sensor
Display Content
PRFEX Proof paper exit sensor
SPFM Transport motor
PRFTRYFL Proof tray full sensor
SPRS Document exit roller solenoid
RMDLT Intermediate feeder right sensor
SPUM Document feed motor
SFTROLHP Shift home position sensor
SRRC Registration roller clutch
STMHP Staple shift home position detection
STPDRRHP Staple driver home position sensor
STPNEND Staple near end sensor
STPSPRM Staple self-priming sensor
STPTRPAP Staple tray paper empty sensor
3 UDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit upper sensor
UPCVR Upper cover open/close sensor
3-2 UPEX Shift paper exit (Lift tray paper exit) sensor
UPLMUTSW Lift tray upper switch
UTNRH Tray near home detection sensor
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the sensors in the UTRPH Lift tray paper surface sensor
Section Finisher 1K saddle finisher
Operation/Procedure No,/Display item Content
The operating conditions of the sensors are displayed. BDLTRS Bundle transport sensor
BLTHPS Release home position sensor
The code names of the sensors which are active are highlighted.
ENDSHP Rear edge stopper home position sensor
Inner finisher ENDSTRS Rear edge stopper transport sensor
No,/Display item Content ENT Inlet sensor
FNECODTC Staple-less staple connection detection signal Paper exit guide plate open/close home position
EXGPLTHP
sensor
FNINTSNS Punch unit paper rear edge detection signal
No,/Display item Content No,/Display item Content
FDRSW Door open/close sensor Load tray lower limit (Small coated paper full)
FNFMTSS
FLDCMHP Folding cam home position sensor sensor
FLDEX Half folding paper exit sensor FNHPAR Rear edge assist home position sensor
FLDPLTHP Folding blade home position sensor FNHPCSLS Staple-free stapling clinch home position sensor
HITHP Flapper home position sensor FNHPDSS Staple drive home position sensor
JOGHPS Jogger home position sensor Escape/saddle transport switch flapper home
FNHPFECE
LDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit lower sensor position sensor
LMDLT Intermediate feeder left sensor FNHPFR Rear edge falling home position sensor
Bundle transport lower pressure release home Alignment unit front alignment plate lift home
LPRSRLHP FNHPGJFN
position sensor position sensor
PRFEX Proof paper exit sensor Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift home
FNHPGJRN
PRFTRYFL Proof tray full sensor position sensor
RMDLT Intermediate feeder right sensor FNHPGKS Take-up knurling lift home position sensor
SDLFLLL Half folding tray full lower sensor FNHPGPN Alignment unit paddle lift home position sensor
SDLFLLU Half folding tray full upper sensor FNHPJF Front edge alignment plate home position sensor
SFTROLHP Shift home position sensor Alignment unit front alignment plate home position
FNHPJFN
sensor
SSSTPCHP Saddle stitch staple clincher home position sensor
FNHPJR Rear edge alignment plate home position sensor
STMHP Staple shift home position detection
Alignment unit rear alignment plate home position
STPDRRHP Staple driver home position sensor FNHPJRN
sensor
STPNEND Staple near end sensor
FNHPMSS Staple shift home position sensor
STPSPRM Staple self-priming sensor
FNHPMT Load tray home position sensor
STPTRPAP Staple tray paper empty sensor
FNHPP Paddle home position sensor
STTKSH Staple retracting sensor
Alignment unit paddle rotation home position
UDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit upper sensor FNHPRPN
sensor
UPCVR Upper cover open/close sensor
FNHPS Oscillation home position sensor
UPEX Shift paper exit (Lift tray paper exit) sensor
FNHPTF Front edge tongue home position sensor
UPLMUTSW Lift tray upper limit switch
FNHPTR Rear edge tongue home position sensor
Bundle transport upper pressure release home
UPRSRLHP FNMCSLS Staple-free stapling motor clock sensor
position sensor
FNOCFD Front door open/close switch
UTNRH Tray near home detection sensor
FNSSS Staple safety switch
UTRPH Lift tray paper surface sensor
FNTBP Preprocessing timing sensor
1K finisher punch unit FNULMT Load tray upper limit sensor
No,/Display item Content 3K saddle finisher

PAPPOS Horizontal registration detection sensor
Horizontal registration detection shift home position
PAPPOSHP FN1DDS DIP SW1 detection sensor
sensor
FN1DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 1
PNCHENC Punch rear position sensor
FN1DPS Push SW1 detection sensor
PNCHHP Punch home position sensor
FN2DDS DIP SW2 detection sensor
PNCHHPFL Punch hopper full sensor
FN2DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 2
PNCHMVHP Punch shift home position sensor
FN2DPS Push SW2 detection sensor
PSLTDSW1 Punch selection DIP SW1
PSLTDSW2 Punch selection DIP SW2
3K finisher FNAMS Manual staple operation SW
FNB Buffer sensor
No,/Display item Content FNDCP Punch connection detection signal
FN1DDS DIP SW1 detection sensor FNDCS Saddle connection detection signal
FN1DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 1 FNDES Staple empty detection sensor
FN1DPS Push SW1 detection sensor FNDFET Escape tray full detection sensor
FN2DDS DIP SW2 detection sensor FNDOCFD Front door open/close detection sensor
FN2DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 2 Alignment unit paddle lift paper surface detection
FN2DPS Push SW2 detection sensor FNDOGPN
sensor
FN3DDS DIP SW3 detection sensor FNDOHS Staple cuing detection sensor
FN4DDS DIP SW4 detection sensor FNDPMS Manual staple paper detection sensor
FNAMS Manual staple operation SW FNDPOPT Process tray paper surface sensor
FNB Buffer sensor FNE Entry port sensor
FNDCP Punch connection detection signal FNEE Escape paper exit sensor
FNDCS Saddle connection detection signal FNFMTLC Load tray full (Large coated paper full) sensor
FNDES Staple empty detection sensor FNFMTLS Load tray middle (Large coated paper full) sensor
FNDFET Escape tray full detection sensor Load tray lower limit (Small coated paper full)
FNFMTSS
FNDOCFD Front door open/close detection sensor sensor
Alignment unit paddle lift paper surface detection FNHPAR Rear edge assist home position sensor
FNDOGPN
sensor FNHPCSLS Staple-free stapling clinch home position sensor
FNDOHS Staple cuing detection sensor FNHPDSS Staple drive home position sensor
FNDPMS Manual staple paper detection sensor Escape/saddle transport switch flapper home
FNHPFECE
FNDPOPT Process tray paper surface sensor position sensor
FNE Entry port sensor FNHPFR Rear edge falling home position sensor
FNEE Escape paper exit sensor Alignment unit front alignment plate lift home
FNHPGJFN
FNFMTLC Load tray full (Large coated paper full) sensor position sensor
FNFMTLS Load tray middle (Large coated paper full) sensor Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift home
FNHPGJRN
position sensor
No,/Display item Content The selected load performs the operation.
FNHPGKS Take-up knurling lift home position sensor When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the operation is terminated.
FNHPGPN Alignment unit paddle lift home position sensor
Inner finisher
FNHPJF Front edge alignment plate home position sensor
Alignment unit front alignment plate home position No,/Display item Content
FNHPJFN
sensor FNM1 Transport motor
FNHPJR Rear edge alignment plate home position sensor FNM10 Paddle motor
Alignment unit rear alignment plate home position FNM2 Roller motor
FNHPJRN
sensor FNM3 Front alignment motor
FNHPMSS Staple shift home position sensor FNM4 Rear alignment motor
FNHPMT Load tray home position sensor FNM5 Assist motor
FNHPP Paddle home position sensor FNM6 Tray shift motor
Alignment unit paddle rotation home position FNM7 Staple shift motor
FNHPRPN
sensor FNM9 eco staple motor
FNHPS Oscillation home position sensor FNSL Rear edge falling motor
FNHPTF Front edge tongue home position sensor FNSTPLIF Staple motor
FNHPTR Rear edge tongue home position sensor
FNMCSLS Staple-free stapling motor clock sensor 1K finisher
FNOCFD Front door open/close switch
FNSSS Staple safety switch
BLT_M Release motor
FNTBP Preprocessing timing sensor
ENTRS_M Entry port transport motor
FNULMT Load tray upper limit sensor
EXGPLT_M Paper exit guide plate open/close motor
FSDU Saddle unit detection sensor
EXTRS_M Paper exit transport/Flapping, drawing roller motor
FSE Saddle unit entry port sensor
JCTG_S Branch solenoid
FSEB Saddle unit folding bundle paper exit sensor
JOG_M Jogger motor
Saddle unit folding bundle loading paper empty
FSEPB PSN_M Flapping motor
sensor
SFT_M Shift motor
FSESFS Saddle unit staple front staple empty sensor
STPMOV_M Staple motor
FSESRS Saddle unit staple rear staple empty sensor
STPMV_M Staple shift motor
FSHPDSS Saddle unit staple drive home position sensor
TRYLFT_M Tray lift motor
FSHPEL Saddle unit switch lever home position sensor
UPTRS_M Proof transport motor
FSHPG Saddle unit gripper home position sensor
FSHPJ Saddle unit alignment plate home position sensor
1K Saddle finisher
FSHPP Saddle unit paddle home position sensor
Saddle unit rear edge stopper home position No,/Display item Content
FSHPSR
sensor BLT_M Release motor
FSHPT Saddle unit pushing home position sensor ENDS_M Rear edge stopper motor
FSMCE Saddle unit paper exit motor clock sensor ENTRS_M Entry port transport motor
FSMCF Saddle unit folding motor clock sensor EXGPLT_M Paper exit guide plate open/close motor
FSPV Saddle unit vertical path sensor EXTRS_M Paper exit transport/Flapping, drawing roller motor
FLDPLT_M Folding blade motor
3K finisher punch unit FLTRS_M Folding transport motor
No,/Display item Content GDLED Guide LED
FC1DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 1 JCTG_S Branch solenoid
FC2DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 2 JOG_M Jogger motor
FC3DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 3 LPRSRL_M Bundle transport lower pressure release motor
FC4DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 4 PSN_M Flapping motor
FC5DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 5 SFT_M Shift motor
FCDFWP Punch dust full detection sensor STPMOV_M Staple motor
FCEP Punch hole encoder sensor STPMV_M Staple shift motor
FCHPP Punch hole home position sensor TRYLFT_M Tray lift motor
FCHPR Punch horizontal registration home position sensor UBTRS_M Bundle transport upper motor
Bundle transport upper pressure release/
UPRSRL_M
Paper pass unit Reference fence evacuation motor
UPTRS_M Proof transport motor
PDOS1 Relay cover open/close detection 1
1K Finisher punch unit
PDOS2 Relay cover open/close detection 2
PDPPD1 Relay transport detection 1 No,/Display item Content
PDPPD2 Relay transport detection 2 PNCH_M Punch motor
PNCHMV_M Punch shift motor
STSMOV_M Punch horizontal registration detection shift motor
3-3 3K Finisher
Purpose Operation test/check No,/Display item Content
FNCDP Paddle drive clutch
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the load in the fin-
FNCDRUS Oscillation lower roller drive clutch
isher and the control circuit
FNCEDCE Escape transport drive switch clutch
Section Finisher FNMAR Rear edge assist motor
Operation/Procedure FNMB Buffer motor
1) Select the item to be operation checked. FNMDJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate drive motor
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. FNMDJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate drive motor
FNMDT Tongue drive motor
No,/Display item Content 3-10
FNME Discharge motor
FNMEC Entry port transport motor
Purpose Adjustment
FNMFECES Escape/Saddle transport switch flapper motor Function (Purpose) Adjust the finisher
FNMFR Rear edge falling motor Section Finisher
FNMGJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate lift motor
Operation/Procedure
FNMGJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift motor
FNMGMT Load paper tray lift motor
1) Select target item.
FNMGPN Alignment unit paddle lift motor 2) Enter the set value.
FNMGRS Take-up switch roller lift motor 3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
FNMJF Front alignment motor
Inner finisher
FNMJR Rear alignment motor
FNMMSS Staple horizontal shift motor Setting
Item/Display Content Default
FNMRPN Alignment unit paddle rotation motor range
FNMS Oscillation motor ALIGNMENT Alignment position
A 50 - 150 100
FNMSLS Staple-free staple motor adjustment
FNMSS Staple motor ALIGNMENT Alignment position center
B 90 - 110 100
CENTER adjustment
3K Saddle finisher STAPLE Stapling position
C FRONT adjustment (one position in 50 - 150 100
front)
FNCDP Paddle drive clutch
STAPLE REAR Stapling position
FNCDRUS Oscillation lower roller drive clutch D adjustment (one position at 50 - 150 100
FNCEDCE Escape transport drive switch clutch the rear)
FNMAR Rear edge assist motor STAPLE BOTH Stapling position
FNMB Buffer motor E adjustment (staple pitch of 50 - 150 100
FNMDJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate drive motor two positions binding)
FNMDJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate drive motor MANUAL Manual stapling position
FNMDT Tongue drive motor F STAPLE adjustment 80 - 120 100
FNME Discharge motor POSITION
FNMEC Entry port transport motor STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
FNMFECES Escape/Saddle transport switch flapper motor G STAPLE Y position adjustment (Y : 70 - 130 100
Main scanning direction)
FNMFR Rear edge falling motor
STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
FNMGJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate lift motor
H STAPLE X position adjustment (X : 85 - 115 100
FNMGJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift motor
Sub scanning direction)
FNMGMT Load paper tray lift motor
FNMGPN Alignment unit paddle lift motor I STAPLE welding pressure 85 - 115 100
FNMGRS Take-up switch roller lift motor PRESSURE adjustment (Motor rotation)
FNMJF Front alignment motor BELT Return belt pressure
J 90 - 110 100
FNMJR Rear alignment motor PRESSURE adjustment
FNMMSS Staple horizontal shift motor MANUAL Manual staple time out
K 1-5 2
FNMRPN Alignment unit paddle rotation motor STAPLE TIME setting
FNMS Oscillation motor MANUAL Manual staple pull out time
FNMSLS Staple-free staple motor STAPLE out setting
L 0 - 10 0
FNMSS Staple motor PULLOUT
FSMC Saddle transport motor TIME
FSMDLE Saddle switch lever drive motor PUNCH X Punch hole position
M adjustment (X : Sub 80 - 120 100
FSME Saddle discharge motor
scanning direction)
FSMF Saddle folding motor
FSMG Saddle gripper motor 1K Finisher/1K Saddle finisher
FSMJ Saddle alignment motor
FSMS Saddle staple motor Item/Display Setting Default
Content
FSMSR Saddle rear edge stopper motor range value
STAPLE Stapling position
A 93 - 107 100
3K finisher punch unit POSITION adjustment
JOGGER(A3) Jogger position adjustment
No,/Display item Content B 97 - 103 100
A3
FCMR Punch horizontal registration motor JOGGER(B4) Jogger position adjustment
C 97 - 103 100
FCP Punch hole motor B4
JOGGER(A4- Jogger position adjustment
Paper pass unit D 97 - 103 100
R) A4-R
No,/Display item Content JOGGER(A4) Jogger position adjustment
E 97 - 103 100
A4
PDPTM Relay unit transport motor
JOGGER(B5- Jogger position adjustment
F 97 - 103 100
R) B5-R
JOGGER(B5) Jogger position adjustment
G 97 - 103 100
B5
JOGGER(11 x Jogger position adjustment
H 97 - 103 100
17) 11 x 17
JOGGER(8.5 x Jogger position adjustment
I 97 - 103 100
14) 8.5 x 14
JOGGER(8.5 x Jogger position adjustment
J 97 - 103 100
11R) 8.5 x 11R
Item/Display Setting Default Item/Display Setting Default
Content Content
range value range value
JOGGER(8.5 x Jogger position adjustment HITTING Flapping roller flapping
K 97 - 103 100
11) 8.5 x 11 AJ ROLLER time adjustment B5-R 90 - 110 100
JOGGER(12 x Jogger position adjustment TIME(B5-R)
L 97 - 103 100
18) 12 x 18 HITTING Flapping roller flapping
JOGGER(8KR) Jogger position adjustment AK ROLLER time adjustment B5 90 - 110 100
M 97 - 103 100
8K TIME(B5)
JOGGER(16K- Jogger position adjustment HITTING Flapping roller flapping
N 97 - 103 100
R) 16K-R AL ROLLER time adjustment 11 x 17 90 - 110 100
JOGGER(16K) Jogger position adjustment TIME(11 x 17)
O 97 - 103 100
16K HITTING Flapping roller flapping
JOGGER(OTH Jogger position adjustment AM ROLLER time adjustment 8.5 x 14 90 - 110 100
P 97 - 103 100 TIME(8.5 x 14)
ER) Other
HITTING Flapping roller operation HITTING Flapping roller flapping
Q ROLLER start timing adjustment A3 90 - 110 100 ROLLER time adjustment 8.5 x 11R
AN 90 - 110 100
START(A3) TIME(8.5 x
HITTING Flapping roller operation 11R)
R ROLLER start timing adjustment B4 90 - 110 100 HITTING Flapping roller flapping
START(B4) AO ROLLER time adjustment 8.5 x 11 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(8.5 x 11)
S ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 HITTING Flapping roller flapping
START(A4-R) A4-R AP ROLLER time adjustment 12 x 18 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(12 x 18)
T ROLLER start timing adjustment A4 90 - 110 100 HITTING Flapping roller flapping
START(A4) AQ ROLLER time adjustment 8K 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(8K)
U ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 HITTING Flapping roller flapping
START(B5-R) B5-R AR ROLLER time adjustment 16K-R 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(16K-R)
V ROLLER start timing adjustment B5 90 - 110 100 HITTING Flapping roller flapping
START(B5) AS ROLLER time adjustment 16K 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(16K)
ROLLER start timing adjustment 11 HITTING Flapping roller flapping
W 90 - 110 100 AT ROLLER time adjustment Other 90 - 110 100
START(11 x x 17
17) TIME(OTHER)
HITTING Flapping roller operation HITTING Sheet number type
ROLLER start timing adjustment 8.5 AU ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
X 90 - 110 100 TIME(1-10) adjustment 1 - 10 sheets
START(8.5 x x 14
14) HITTING Sheet number type
HITTING Flapping roller operation AV ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
ROLLER start timing adjustment 8.5 TIME(11-20) adjustment 11 - 20 sheets
Y 90 - 110 100
START(8.5 x x 11R HITTING Sheet number type
11R) AW ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(21-30) adjustment 21 - 30 sheets
ROLLER start timing adjustment 8.5 HITTING Sheet number type
Z 90 - 110 100
START(8.5 x x 11 AX ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
11) TIME(31-40) adjustment 31 - 40 sheets
HITTING Flapping roller operation HITTING Sheet number type
ROLLER start timing adjustment 12 AY ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
AA 90 - 110 100
START(12 x x 18 TIME(41-50) adjustment 41 - 50 sheets
18) SKEW Skew correction striking
AZ 75 - 125 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation QUANTITY(A3) quantity adjustment A3
AB ROLLER start timing adjustment 8K 90 - 110 100 SKEW Skew correction striking
BA 75 - 125 100
START(8K) QUANTITY(B4) quantity adjustment B4
HITTING Flapping roller operation SKEW Skew correction striking
AC ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 BB QUANTITY(A4- quantity adjustment A4-R 75 - 125 100
START(16K-R) 16K-R R)
HITTING Flapping roller operation SKEW Skew correction striking
BC 75 - 125 100
AD ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 QUANTITY(A4) quantity adjustment A4
START(16K) 16K SKEW Skew correction striking
HITTING Flapping roller operation BD QUANTITY(B5- quantity adjustment B5-R 75 - 125 100
ROLLER start timing adjustment R)
AE 90 - 110 100
START(OTHE Other SKEW Skew correction striking
R) BE 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(B5) quantity adjustment B5
HITTING Flapping roller flapping SKEW Skew correction striking
AF ROLLER time adjustment A3 90 - 110 100 BF 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(A5) quantity adjustment A5
TIME(A3) SKEW Skew correction striking
HITTING Flapping roller flapping BG QUANTITY(11 quantity adjustment 11 x 75 - 125 100
AG ROLLER time adjustment B4 90 - 110 100 x 17) 17
TIME(B4) SKEW Skew correction striking
HITTING Flapping roller flapping BH QUANTITY(8.5 quantity adjustment 8.5 x 75 - 125 100
AH ROLLER time adjustment A4-R 90 - 110 100 x 14) 14
TIME(A4-R) SKEW Skew correction striking
HITTING Flapping roller flapping BI QUANTITY(8.5 quantity adjustment 8.5 x 75 - 125 100
AI ROLLER time adjustment A4 90 - 110 100 x 11R) 11R
TIME(A4)
Item/Display Setting Default 3K Finisher / 3K Saddle finisher
Content
range value
Setting Default
SKEW Skew correction striking Item/Display Content
range value
BJ QUANTITY(8.5 quantity adjustment 8.5 x 75 - 125 100
ALIGNMENT Alignment position
x 11) 11 A 50 - 150 100
adjustment
SKEW Skew correction striking
FRONT Front alignment position
BK QUANTITY(5.5 quantity adjustment 5.5 x 75 - 125 100 B 50 - 150 100
ADJUST adjustment
x 8.5) 8.5
REAR ADJUST Rear alignment position
SKEW Skew correction striking C 50 - 150 100
adjustment
BL QUANTITY(12 quantity adjustment 12 x 75 - 125 100
ALIGNMENT Alignment position center
x 18) 18 D 90 - 110 100
CENTER adjustment
BM 75 - 125 100 STAPLE Stapling position
QUANTITY(8K) quantity adjustment 8K
E FRONT adjustment (one position in 50 - 150 100
front)
BN QUANTITY(16 quantity adjustment 16K-R 75 - 125 100
K-R)
F REAR adjustment (one position at 50 - 150 100
the rear)
BO QUANTITY(16 quantity adjustment 16K 75 - 125 100
K)
G BOTH adjustment (staple pitch of 50 - 150 100
two positions binding)
BP QUANTITY(OT quantity adjustment Other 75 - 125 100
MANUAL Manual stapling position
HER)
H STAPLE adjustment 80 - 120 100
BQ 0-1 0 POSITION
MODE(A3) control switch A3
BR 0-1 0 I STAPLE position adjustment 80 - 115 100
MODE(B4) control switch B4
POSITION
BS 0-1 0 BUFFER Buffer paper shift quantity
MODE(A4-R) control switch A4-R J 40 - 160 100
SHIFT(1-2) adjustment (1-2 sheets)
BT 0-1 0 BUFFER Buffer paper shift quantity
MODE(A4) control switch A4 K 40 - 160 100
SHIFT(2-3) adjustment (2-3 sheets)
BU 0-1 0 PUNCH X Punch hole position
MODE(B5-R) control switch B5-R
L adjustment (X : Sub 80 - 120 100
SKEW Skew correction striking scanning direction)
BV 0-1 0
MODE(B5) control switch B5
PUNCH Y Punch hole position
SKEW Skew correction striking M adjustment (Y : Main 97 - 115 100
BW 0-1 0
MODE(A5) control switch A5 scanning direction)
SKEW Skew correction striking EJECTING Paper exit roller height
BX 0-1 0 N 70 - 130 100
MODE(11 x 17) control switch 11 x 17 ROLLER adjustment
SKEW Skew correction striking KNURLING Take-up knurling height
BY MODE(8.5 x control switch 8.5 x 14 0-1 0 O 0 - 150 100
ROLLER adjustment
14)
KNURLING Take-up knurling
SKEW Skew correction striking P ROLLER evacuation height 0 - 200 100
BZ MODE(8.5 x control switch 8.5 x 11R 0-1 0 RETREAT adjustment
11R)
SKEW Skew correction striking Q STAPLE welding pressure 85 - 115 100
CA MODE(8.5 x control switch 8.5 x 11 0-1 0 PRESSURE adjustment (Motor rotation)
11)
DELIVERY Paper exit speed
SKEW Skew correction striking R SPEED(NON- adjustment (Non-sort) 90 - 110 100
CB MODE(5.5 x control switch 5.5 x 8.5 0-1 0 SORT)
8.5)
DELIVERY Paper exit speed
SKEW Skew correction striking S SPEED(ESCA adjustment (Escape) 90 - 110 100
CC 0-1 0
MODE(12 x 18) control switch 12 x 18 PE)
SKEW Skew correction striking EJECTING Bundle paper eject speed
CD 0-1 0
MODE(8K) control switch 8K T SPEED(SHIFT) adjustment (Shift bundle 95 - 105 100
SKEW Skew correction striking ejection)
CE 0-1 0
MODE(16K-R) control switch 16K-R EJECTING Bundle paper eject speed
SKEW Skew correction striking U SPEED(STAPL adjustment (Staple bundle 95 - 105 100
CF 0-1 0
MODE(16K) control switch 16K E) ejection)
SKEW Skew correction striking MANUAL Manual staple time out
CG MODE(OTHER control switch Other 0-1 0 V 1-5 2
STAPLE TIME setting
) MANUAL Manual staple pull out time
PUNCH Y Punch hole position STAPLE out setting
CH adjustment (Y : Main 95 - 105 100 W 0 - 10 0
PULLOUT
scanning direction) TIME
PUNCH X Punch hole position STITCHING Saddle staple position
CI adjustment (X : Sub 85 - 115 100 X 80 - 120 100
UNIT adjustment
scanning direction) STITCHING Saddle staple position
CJ SADDLE Saddle stitch position Y 80 - 120 100
85 - 115 100 UNIT THIN adjustment (Thin paper)
STITCHING adjustment FOLDING Saddle folding position
CK SADDLE Folding position Z 80 - 120 100
85 - 115 100 UNIT adjustment
FOLDING adjustment FOLDING Saddle folding position
FOLDING Folding time adjustment AA 80 - 120 100
CL 0 - 29 0 UNIT THIN adjustment (Thin paper)
TIME * SADDLE Saddle alignment width
AB 80 - 120 100
ALIGNMENT adjustment
* This is displayed only when saddle finisher is connected.
STITCHING Saddle staple folding
AC 30 - 70 50
AND FOLDING position adjustment
Setting Default LCC
range value Display Content
SADDLE Saddle folding position 24VM LCC 24V power monitor
AD FOLDING(A4- adjustment A4-R/8.5 x 30 - 70 50
LCCD LCC main unit connection sensor
R/8.5 x 11R) 11R
LCLSW LCC tray open/close switch
SADDLE Saddle folding position
LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor
AE FOLDING(B4/ adjustment B4/8.5 x 14 30 - 70 50
8.5 x 14) LLSW LCC upper limit switch
SADDLE Saddle folding position LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor
AF FOLDING(A3/ adjustment A3/11 x 17 30 - 70 50 LPFD LCC transport sensor
11 x 17) LPFPD LCC transport sensor 2
SADDLE Saddle folding position LPUD LCC paper upper surface sensor
AG FOLDING(12 x adjustment 12 x 18 30 - 70 50 LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor
18) LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
SADDLE Saddle folding position LWRSW LCC reverse winding detection switch
AH FOLDING(CUS adjustment Custom size 30 - 70 50
TOM)
4-3
4 Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the loads in the
desk/large capacity tray (LCC) and the con-
trol circuit
4-2
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the sensors in the
desk/large capacity tray (LCC) and the con-
trol circuit 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) The selected load performs the operation.
Operation/Procedure When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the operation is terminated.
The operating conditions of the sensors are displayed. Desk
The code names of the sensors which are active are highlighted. Display Content
Desk D1LM Tray 3 lift-up motor
D1PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
Display Content D2LM Tray 4 lift-up motor
D1MDC Desk 3 installation detection connector D2PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch
D1PED Desk 3 paper empty sensor DPFM Desk transport motor
D1PPD Desk 3 paper transport sensor DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
D1PQD Desk 3 remaining paper quantity sensor
D1PRED1 Desk 3 paper rear edge sensor 1 Tandem LCC
D1PRED2 Desk 3 paper rear edge sensor 2
Display Content
D1LM Tray 3 lift-up motor
D1ULD Desk 3 upper limit detector
D2LM Tray 4 lift-up motor
D2MDC Desk 4 installation detection connector
D2PED Desk 4 paper empty sensor
DPFM Desk transport motor
D2PPD Desk 4 paper transport sensor
DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
D2PRED1 Desk 4 paper rear edge sensor 1 LCC
D2PRED3 Desk 4 paper rear edge sensor 3 Display Content
D2PRED4 Desk 4 paper rear edge sensor 4 LLM LCC lift motor
D2ULD Desk 4 upper limit detector LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
LPFM LCC paper transport motor
Tandem LCC LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
LTRC LCC transport clutch
Display Content
D1CDT Desk 3 insertion detection
D1LUD Desk 3 upper limit sensor
D1PFD Desk 3 paper transport sensor
D1PPD1 Desk 3 paper transport sensor 1
D1PPD2 Desk 3 paper transport sensor 2
D2CDT Desk 4 insertion detection
D2LUD Desk 4 upper limit sensor
DHOD Horizontal transport open/close detection
4-5 5-3
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the paper transport Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the scanner lamp
clutch (DTRC) in the desk and the LCC and the control circuit
paper transport clutch (LTRC) Section Scanner (reading)
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select target item.
Check the ON operation 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
Tap the button of the code name for checking the ON operation. The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the operation is terminated.
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
highlighted.
Check the OFF operation 5-4
Tap the highlighted button which is ON.
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the discharge lamp
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
display is maintained.
Section Process
Button Content Operation/Procedure
DTRC Desk transport clutch
LTRC A4 LCC transport clutch
When [ALL] key is tapped, all the items are selected.
The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
5
DL_K Discharge lamp K
DL_C Discharge lamp C
5-1 DL_M Discharge lamp M
Purpose Operation test/check DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the display, LCD in
the operation panel and the control circuit
Section Operation panel
Operation/Procedure 6
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX  6-1
MIN  the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
checked. Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the load in the paper
transport system (clutches and solenoids)
5-2 Section Paper transport/Paper exit section

Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the heater lamp and
the control circuit 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF. sound.
Display Content
Heater lamp operation check method:
C1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1)
Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray, and the
C1PFC Vertical transport clutch
lighting status of each heater lamp can be checked through the
C1PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
clearance between the fusing pressure release drive gear and the
C2LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 2)
frame fusing section.
C2PFC Vertical transport clutch
HL_UM Main heater lamp (Upper main) C2PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
HL_US Sub heater lamp (Upper sub) CPFM Paper feed motor
HL_LM Heater lamp (Lower main) FUM Fusing motor
HPFC Horizontal transport clutch
MPFS Paper feed solenoid (Manual paper feed tray)
MPUC Paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed tray)
OSM Offset motor
PFM Transport motor
POGS Gate solenoid
Display Content 6-6
POM Paper exit motor
RRM Registration motor
SBM_F Reverse motor (Normal rotation) Function (Purpose) Check the operation of fusing pressure
SBM_R Reverse motor (Reverse rotation) release, applying and the control circuit
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
6-2 1) Tap [FUSER] key to highlight it.
Purpose Operation test/check 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fusing
pressure release are repeated.
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of each fan motor and
the control circuit During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis-
played.
Section Others
Operation/Procedure PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying -> Fusing
1) Select target item. applying pressure release -> (Fusing pressure
FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated.
release
Tap [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
6-90
Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, Purpose Setting
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation Function (Purpose) Reset the machine to the factory setting
sound. (The scanner is set to the lock enable posi-
tion)
Display Content
Section Scanner
FUFM Fusing fan
POFM Paper exit fan Operation/Procedure
PROFM1 Process fan 1 1) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
PROFM2 Process fan 2 The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.
PSFM Power supply fan
6-3 7
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the transport unit 7-1
and the control circuit Purpose Setting
Section Process (Transport) Function (Purpose) Set the operating conditions of againg
Operation/Procedure Section Others
1) Select target item. Operation/Procedure
Mode select button Content
TC1 Primary transfer (normal rotation) 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
TC1_R Primary transfer (reverse rotation) The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
TC2 Secondary transfer The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
2) When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the operation of the mode
selected in 1) is performed. AGING Aging operation setup
INTERVAL Intermittent operation setting
Button Display Content NOTE
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring setting
TC1 BLACK Monochrome Black mode position -> Color
FUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring setting
mode position mode position -> Drum
WARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring setting
COLOR Color mode separation position -> (Black
mode position) DV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring setting
position
(Repeated in this sequence.) SHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting setting
FREE Non-transport
position CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting
TC1_R BLACK Monochrome Black mode position -> Drum
mode position separation position -> Color
FREE Non-transport mode position -> (Black mode
position position) (Repeated in this
COLOR Color mode sequence.)
position
TC2 PRINT Print position Print position -> Drum
FREE Non-transport separation position
position (Repeated in this sequence)
7-6
8
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the operating intermittent aging cycle
8-1
Section
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Check and adjust the operation of the
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec). developping voltage in each print mode and
2) Tap [OK] key. the control circuit.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set. *When the middle speed is adjusted the low
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec). speed is also adjusted simultaneously
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- Section Process (Developing)
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys.
7-8 3) Enter the setting value. (The value specified on the label of the
Purpose Operation display high voltage PWB must be entered.)
Function (Purpose) Display the warm up time * When the key is tapped, the setting value of each item
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Section
4) Tap [OK] key. Tap [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Operation/Procedure
Tap [EXECUTE] key. Adjustment Actual
Item/Display (Mode) Content
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for range voltage
warm-up is displayed MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing bias 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED voltage K (Middle +/- 5V
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
DVB_K speed mode)
B MIDDLE Developing bias 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED voltage C (Middle +/- 5V
7-9 DVB_C speed mode)
C MIDDLE Developing bias 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED voltage M (Middle +/- 5V
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode DVB_M speed mode)
(check the copy operation and the image D MIDDLE Developing bias 0 - 600 –450V
quality for each color) SPEED voltage Y (Middle +/- 5V
DVB_Y speed mode)
Section
LOW A LOW Developing bias 0 - 600 –450V
Operation/Procedure SPEED voltage K (Low +/- 5V
1) Select the copy color. DVB_K speed mode)
(Two or more colors can be selected.) B LOW Developing bias 0 - 600 -450V
The key of the selected color is highlighted. SPEED voltage C (Low ±5V
DVB_C speed mode)
C LOW Developing bias 0 - 600 -450V
Copying is performed with the selected color. SPEED voltage M (Low ±5V
When [CLOSE] key is tapped, the display goes into the copy oper- DVB_M speed mode)
ation menu in the simulation mode. D LOW Developing bias 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED voltage Y (Low ±5V
K Setup/cancel of black DVB_Y speed mode)
C Setup/cancel of cyan
M Setup/cancel of magenta
Y Setup/cancel of yellow
7-12
Function (Purpose) Set the document reading number of
sheets (for aging operation)
Section SPF
Operation/Procedure
1) Set document reading quantity.
(Setting range:0 - 255)
2) Tap [OK] key. The set value is saved.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
8-2 Adjustment Actual
Item/Display (Mode) Content
range voltage
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Main charger grid 50 - 850 -607V
Function (Purpose) Check and adjust the operation of the main SPEED voltage K (Middle ±5V
charger grid voltage in each printer mode GB_K speed mode)
and the control circuit. B MIDDLE Main charger grid 50 - 850 -607V
*When the middle speed is adjusted the low SPEED voltage C (Middle ±5V
speed is also adjusted simultaneously GB_C speed mode)
Section Process (Charging) C MIDDLE Main charger grid 50 - 850 -607V
SPEED voltage M (Middle ±5V
Operation/Procedure GB_M speed mode)
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys. D MIDDLE Main charger grid 50 - 850 -607V
2) Select target item. SPEED voltage Y (Middle ±5V
GB_Y speed mode)
3) Enter the adjustment value. (The value specified on the label
LOW A LOW Main charger grid 50 - 850 -598V
of the high voltage PWB must be entered.) SPEED voltage K (Low ±5V
* When the key is tapped, the setting value of each item GB_K speed mode)
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. B LOW Main charger grid 50 - 850 -598V
4) Tap [OK] key. The set value is saved. SPEED voltage C (Low ±5V
GB_C speed mode)
C LOW Main charger grid 50 - 850 -598V
SPEED voltage M (Low ±5V
GB_M speed mode)
D LOW Main charger grid 50 - 850 -598V
SPEED voltage Y (Low ±5V
GB_Y speed mode)
8-6
Function (Purpose) Check and adjust the operation of the
transport voltage and the control circuit
Section Process (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value.
Enter the default specified on the following list.
3) Tap [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Setting
range
A TC1 LOW CL K Primary transfer bias Low 0 - 255 85
K
B TC1 MIDDLE CL K adjustment value Middle 94
C TC1 LOW CL C Low 85
C
D TC1 MIDDLE CL C Middle 94
Color
E TC1 LOW CL M Low 85
M
F TC1 MIDDLE CL M Middle 94
G TC1 LOW CL Y Low 85
Y
H TC1 MIDDLE CL Y Middle 94
I TC1 LOW BW K Low 85
Mono K
J TC1 MIDDLE BW K Middle 94
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer bias Front surface 0 - 255 103
Color
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX adjustment value Back surface 110
Plain paper 1
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Front surface 103
Mono
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 103
O TC2 PLAIN2 CL SPX Front surface 103
Color
P TC2 PLAIN2 CL DPX Back surface 110
Plain paper 2
Q TC2 PLAIN2 BW SPX Front surface 103
Mono
R TC2 PLAIN2 BW DPX Back surface 103
S TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX Front surface 90
Color
T TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX Back surface 96
Heavy paper 1
U TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Front surface 90
Mono
V TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX Back surface 96
W TC2 HEAVY2 CL SPX Front surface 90
Color
X TC2 HEAVY2 CL DPX Back surface 96
Heavy paper 2
Y TC2 HEAVY2 BW SPX Front surface 90
Mono
Z TC2 HEAVY2 BW DPX Back surface 96
AA TC2 HEAVY3 CL SPX Front surface 90
Color
AB TC2 HEAVY3 CL DPX Back surface 96
Heavy paper 3
AC TC2 HEAVY3 BW SPX Front surface 90
Mono
AD TC2 HEAVY3 BW DPX Back surface 96
Setting
range
AE TC2 HEAVY4 CL Secondary transfer bias Color 0 - 255 90
Heavy paper 4
AF TC2 HEAVY4 BW adjustment value Mono 90
AG TC2 OHP CL Color 103
OHP
AH TC2 OHP BW Mono 103
AI TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color 90
Envelope
AJ TC2 ENVELOPE BW Mono 90
AK TC2 THIN CL Color 90
Thin paper
AL TC2 THIN BW Mono 90
AM TC2 GLOSSY PAPER CL Color 90
Gross paper
AN TC2 GLOSSY PAPER BW Mono 90
AO TC2 EMBOSS CL Color 90
Embossed paper
AP TC2 EMBOSS BW Mono 90
AQ TC2 LABEL CL Color 90
Label
AR TC2 LABEL BW Mono 90
AS TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW SPX Secondary transfer front edge bias adjustment Front surface 0 - 255 76
Low
AT TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW DPX value Back surface 69
AU TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE SPX Front surface 76
Middle
AV TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE DPX Back surface 69
AW TC2 BACKEND LOW SPX Secondary transfer rear edge bias adjustment Front surface 0 - 255 76
Low
AX TC2 BACKEND LOW DPX value Back surface 69
AY TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE SPX Front surface 0
Middle
AZ TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0
BA TC INTERVAL LOW Secondary transfer bias adjustment value Low (+ pole) 0 - 255 66
BB TC2 INTERVAL MIDDLE between paper Middle (+ pole) 95
BC TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW Secondary transfer cleaning negative bias Low (- pole) 54
BD TC2 CLEANING MINUS MIDDLE adjustment value Middle (- pole) 59
BE TC2 CLEANING PLUS LOW Secondary transfer cleaning positive bias Low (+ pole) 66
BF TC2 CLEANING PLUS MIDDLE adjustment value Middle (+ pole) 95
BG PTC LOW CL SPX PTC current adjustment value Front surface 0 - 255 109
Low
BH PTC LOW CL DPX Back surface 109
Color
BI PTC MIDDLE CL SPX Front surface 206
Middle
BJ PTC MIDDLE CL DPX Back surface 109
BK PTC LOW BW SPX Front surface 109
Low
BL PTC LOW BW DPX Back surface 109
Mono
BM PTC MIDDLE BW SPX Front surface 206
Middle
BN PTC MIDDLE BW DPX Back surface 206
BO CASE VOLT LOW CL SPX PTC voltage adjustment value Front surface 0 - 255 0
Low
BP CASE VOLT LOW CL DPX Back surface 0
Color
BQ CASE VOLT MIDDLE CL SPX Front surface 0
Middle
BR CASE VOLT MIDDLE CL DPX Back surface 0
BS CASE VOLT LOW BW SPX Front surface 0
Low
BT CASE VOLT LOW BW DPX Back surface 0
Mono
BU CASE VOLT MIDDLE BW SPX Front surface 0
Middle
BV CASE VOLT MIDDLE BW DPX Back surface 0
BW DHV LOW CL SPX Separation bias adjustment Front surface 0 - 255 77
Color
BX DHV LOW CL DPX value Back surface 102
Low
BY DHV LOW BW SPX Front surface 77
Mono
BZ DHV LOW BW DPX Back surface 102
CA DHV MIDDLE CL SPX Front surface 153
Color
CB DHV MIDDLE CL DPX Back surface 179
Middle
CC DHV MIDDLE BW SPX Front surface 153
Mono
CD DHV MIDDLE BW DPX Back surface 179
* Plain paper 1: 60-89g/m2

Plain paper 2: 80-105g/m2
* Heavy paper 1: 106-176g/m2
Heavy paper 2: 177-220g/m2
8-10
10
Function (Purpose) Set main charger current output
10-1
Section Process (Charging)
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the toner supply
1) Select target item. mechanism (toner motor) and the control
2) Enter the set value. circuit
3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Section Process (Developing)
Item/Display Setting Changeabl
Operation/Procedure
Contents Default
range e range 1) Select target item.
Main charger When [ALL] key is tapped, all the items are selected.
MI MIDDLE -500 to -
total current 50 to 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
DD A SPEED 83 800 micro
(Middle speed 100
LE MC_K
mode) K
A The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
Main charger When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the operation is terminated.
LOW1 -500 to -
LO total voltage 50 to
A SPEED 83 800 micro
W (Middle speed 100
MC_K A
1 mode) K
This simulation must be executed without installing the toner car-
tridges.
TNM_K Toner motor K

TNM_C Toner motor C
9 TNM_M Toner motor M
TNM_Y Toner motor Y
9-2
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the sensors in the 10-3
paper reverse section (duplex section) and
the control circuit
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the toner cartridge
Section Duplex ejecting position sensor and the control cir-
Operation/Procedure cuit
The operating conditions of the sensors are displayed. Section Process (Developing)
The code names of the sensors which are active are highlighted. Operation/Procedure
Display Content 1) Select target item.
APPD1 ADU paper transport sensor 1 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
APPD2 ADU paper transport sensor 2
DSW_ADU ADU cover sensor Display Content
TCED_C Toner cartridge ejecting sensor C
TCED_K Toner cartridge ejecting sensor K
TCED_M Toner cartridge ejecting sensor M
9-3 TCED_Y Toner cartridge ejecting sensor Y

Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the load in the paper
reverse section (duplex section) and the
control circuit 13
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure 13--
1) Select target item. Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Cancel U1 trouble
Section
Operation/Procedure
Display Content
ADUM1 ADU motor 1 2) Tap [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
ADUM2 ADU motor 2
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
Default
14 Item/Display Content
Setting 26 ppm/ 35 ppm/
range 30 ppm 40 ppm
machine machine
14--
B MAINTE- Maintenance 0: 250K 300K
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.) NANCE counter Default
COUNTER (Color) 1 - 300:
Function (Purpose) Cancel H3, H4, H5 troubles
(COLOR) 1K- 300K
Section 999:Free
Operation/Procedure
2) Tap [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
22
22-1
15 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Check
15--
Function (Purpose) Check print count in each section and each
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) operation mode
Function (Purpose) Cancel U6 trouble Section
Section LCC Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure Counter value in each mode is displayed.
Item Display Content
2) Tap [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Total TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
output (BW) quantity of black jams
quantity and white
TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
16 Total use
(COL)
TOTAL (BW)
quantity of color jams
Total use quantity Effective paper
quantity of black and white (including self print,
16-- excluding jams)
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity Effective paper
of full color (including self print,
Function (Purpose) Cancel U2 trouble excluding jams)
Section SCN MFP PWB / PCU PWB TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
(2COL) of 2-color (including self print,
Operation/Procedure
excluding jams)
1) Tap [EXECUTE] key. TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
2) Tap [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. (3COL) of 3-color (including self print,
excluding jams)
TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
(SGL_COL) of single color (including self print,
excluding jams)
21 Copy COPY (BW) Black and white Billing target
copy counter (excluding self print)
COPY (COL) Full color copy Billing target
21-1
counter (excluding self print)
Purpose Setting COPY (2COL) 2-color copy Billing target
Function (Purpose) Set the maintenance cycle counter (excluding self print)
COPY Single color copy Billing target
Section (SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print)
Operation/Procedure Print PRINT (BW) Black and white Billing target
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance print counter (excluding self print)
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean- PRINT (COL) Full color print Billing target
ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not counter (excluding self print)
clarify. PRINT (2COL) 2-color print Billing target
counter (excluding self print)
PRINT (3COL) 3-color print Billing target
2) Enter the set value. counter (excluding self print)
3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) PRINT Single color print Billing target
(SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print)
Default Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white
Setting 26 ppm/ 35 ppm/ filing document filing
range 30 ppm 40 ppm print counter
machine machine DOC FIL Color document
A MAINTE- Maintenance 0: 250K 300K (COL) filing print counter
NANCE counter (Total) Default DOC FIL 2-color document
COUNTER 1 - 300: (2COL) filing print counter
(TOTAL) 1K - 300K DOC FIL(SGL Single color
999:Free COL) document filing
print counter
Item Display Content Display Content
Other OTHER (BW) Black and white Self print quantity FONT PCL PCL font data
other counter FONT SPDL Simple PDL font data
OTHER (COL) Color other Self print quantity FONT OFFICE Office Direct font data
counter WATER MARK Water mark data
E-MANUAL Users manual data
OCR-DIC OCR dictionary data
SOUND DATA Sound program
22-2
SCU SCU
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check DSPF DSPF
Function (Purpose) Check total count of misfeed and troubles PCU PCU
DESK/DESK (TANDEM) Desk unit
Section
LCC LCC
Operation/Procedure FINISHER/FINISHER
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed. (1KFIN)/ FINISHER
Finisher
(3KFIN)/ FINISHER
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter (INNER)
SPF JAM SPF JAM counter FIN-SUB 3K finisher sub
TROUBLE Trouble counter SADDLE Saddle
PUNCH/PUNCH(3K)/
Punch unit
PUNCH(IN)
FAX OPT1 FAX 1-Line (Option section)
22-3 FONT UNICODE Front unicode font
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Check misfeed positions and the misfeed
count of each position 22-6
Section Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Output the setting/adjustment data, the
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one firmware version and the count list
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
22-4
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check (Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
Function (Purpose) Check trouble (self diag) history 1) Select the print list mode.
Section
Print list
Operation/Procedure Display Print content
mode
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items. DATA NO.1 Firmware version, counter data, etc.
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.) PATTERN NO.2 SIM50-24 data
NO.3 Data related to the process control
2SIDED PRINT 1-SIDED One sided printing (Default)
22-5 2-SIDED Double sided printing
Purpose Others 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step 1).
Function (Purpose) Check ROM version of each unit
Section Firmware
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to Function (Purpose) Check the operation count of the finisher,
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary. the SPF and the scan (reading) unit
Section
Display Content
Serial No. (The codes for November and Operation/Procedure
S/N
December are "X" and "Y" respectively.) The counter values of the finisher, the SPF, and the scanner related
BUNDLE Bundle version counters are displayed.
ICU-MAIN ICUM (MAIN section)
ICU-BIOS ICUM (BIOS section) Display Content
ASIC-MAIN ASIC (MAIN section) SPF Document feed quantity
ASIC-SUB ASIC (SUB section) SCAN Number of times of scan
IMAGE DATA Image process program STAPLER Staple counter
LANGUAGE Language support data version PUNCHER Puncher counter
LANGUAGE (LIST) Language data for list printing STAMP Stamp counter
EOSA ESCP font ROM SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
UNICONTENTS Contents data for display SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
SIM-TEXT Language data for simulation COVER Document cover open/close counter
PCL (PROFILE) Color profile data HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
POWER-CON Power controller program OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
FONT BARCODE Font data for bar code DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of DSPF lamp (* hour *
FONT PS PS font data minutes)
Display Content LCC MX-LC17 N A4 Large capacity tray
FIN OUTPUT Finisher output counter PUNCHER MX-PN14A Punch unit
STAPLELESS STAPLE Stapleless staple counter MX-PN14B
MANUAL STAPLE Manual staple counter MX-PN14C
MX-PN14D
MX-PN15A
MX-PN15B
22-9 MX-PN15C
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check MX-PN15D
Function (Purpose) Check paper feed count of each paper feed MX-PN16A
section MX-PN16B
MX-PN16C
Section Paper feed, ADU MX-PN16D
Operation/Procedure FINISHER MX-FN27 N Inner finisher
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed. MX-FN28 Finisher 1K
MX-FN29 Saddle stitch finisher 1K
Display Content MX-FN30 Finisher 3K
TRAY1 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1) MX-FN31 Saddle stitch finisher 3K
TRAY2 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 2) SEPARATOR MX-TR20 Job separator tray
TRAY3 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 3) FAX1 MX-FX15 Facsimile expansion kit
TRAY4 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 4) PS STANDARD/ PS expansion kit
MFT Manual paper feed counter MX-PK13
LCC LCC paper feed counter SECURITY MX-FR62U Data security kit
ADU ADU paper transport counter ICU_PWB *****MB ICU REUS capacity
TRAY1_TTL Accumulated tray 1 paper feed counter (REUS)
TRAY2_TTL Accumulated tray 2 paper feed counter ICU_PWB *****MB ICU SOC capacity
TRAY3_TTL Accumulated tray 3 paper feed counter (SOC)
TRAY4_TTL Accumulated tray 4 paper feed counter STORAGE *****GB Storage capacity
MFT_TTL Accumulated manual paper feed counter ICU DRIVE *****MB eMMC capacity
LCC_TTL Accumulated side LCC paper feed counter BARCODE MX-PF10 Barcode font kit
ADU_TTL Accumulated ADU paper feed counter INTERNET- MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
TRAY1_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 1) FAX
TRAY2_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 2) AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
TRAY3_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 3) ACM STANDARD/ Application communication module
MX-AMX2
TRAY4_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 4)
EAM STANDARD/ External account module
MFT_RETRY Manual paper feed retry counter
MX-AMX3
LCC_RETRY LCC paper feed retry counter
OFFICE DRT STANDARD/ Direct print expansion kit
MX-PU10
SHC-PDF STANDARD/ Enhanced compression kit
MX-EB19
22-10
OCR STANDARD/ OCR expansion kit
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check MX-EB20
Function (Purpose) Check the system configuration (option,
internal hardware)
Section 22-11
Operation/Procedure Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
The system configuration is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Check FAX count
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
Section FAX
played.)
Operation/Procedure
MACHINE MX-3071 Main unit The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
MX-3571 are displayed.
MX-4071
MX-3061 FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter
MX-3561 FAX SEND FAX send counter
MX-4061 FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
MX-2651 SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
MX-3051 SEND TIME FAX send time
MX-3551 RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
MX-4051
SPF STANDARD Duplex single pass feeder
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
DESK MX-DE25 N STAND/550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER
MX-DE26 N STAND/2X550 SHEET PAPER
DRAWER
MX-DE27 N STAND/3X550 SHEET PAPER
DRAWER
MX-DE28 N STAND/550&2100 SHEET PAPER
DRAWER
MX-DE29 N LOW STAND/550 SHEET PAPER
DRAWER
22-12 22-14
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Check SPF misfeed positions and misfeed Function (Purpose) Display toner cartridge usage status count
count at each position Section Process
Section SPF Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) Accumul
Accumul
ated No. Accumul
ated No.
Display of ated No.
Content of near
item installed of end
near end
22-13 cartridge (Unit)
(Unit)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check s (Unit)
INSTALL NN END END
Function (Purpose) Check the operating time of the process Toner cartridge use
section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner car- TONER(K) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510
counter (K)
tridge) and the fusing unit) Toner cartridge use
TONER(C) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510
Section Process counter (C)
Operation/Procedure Toner cartridge use
TONER(M) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510
counter (M)
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process Toner cartridge use
section are displayed. TONER(Y) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510
counter (Y)
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter)
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color) 22-18
FUSING BELT Fusing belt
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller
PRESSURE ROLLER Fusing pressure roller Function (Purpose) Display user data delete history
SEPARATE PAWL Fusing separation pawl Section
SEPARATE PLATE Fusing separation plate
Operation/Procedure
FUSING LOAD Fusing pressure release roller
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed.
TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt
TRANSFER BLADE Transfer cleaning blade
Display item
TC CL ROLLER Transfer cleaning roller Content
Item name Date
TC2 ROLLER Secondary transfer roller
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
PTC PTC counter of operation start)
PS PAPER Paper dust cleaner END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter of operation end)
DEVE CTRG (K) DV unit (K)
DEVE CTRG (C) DV unit (C)
DEVE CTRG (M) DV unit (M)
DEVE CTRG (Y) DV unit (Y) 22-19
DRUM UNIT (K) OPC drum unit (K) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
DRUM UNIT (C) OPC drum unit (C)
DRUM UNIT (M) OPC drum unit (M)
Function (Purpose) Check scan and image send count
DRUM UNIT (Y) OPC drum unit (Y) Section
MAIN CHARGER (K) Main charger (K) Operation/Procedure
MAIN CHARGER (C) Main charger (C) Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner
MAIN CHARGER (M) Main charger (M)
Change the display with scroll key.
MAIN CHARGER (Y) Main charger (Y)
MC CLEAN (K) MC cleaner K
MC CLEAN (C) MC cleaner C
Network NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
MC CLEAN (M) MX cleaner M scanner ORG_B/W counter (B/W scan job)
MC CLEAN (Y) MC cleaner Y NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
DRUM BLADE (K) OPC drum cleaning blade K ORG_CL counter (Color scan job)
DRUM BLADE (C) OPC drum cleaning blade C NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
DRUM BLADE (M) OPC drum cleaning blade M ORG_2CL counter (2-Color scan job)
DRUM BLADE (Y) OPC drum cleaning blade Y NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
TONER CTRG (K) Toner cartridge (K) ORG_SGL counter (Single-color scan job)
TONER CTRG (C) Toner cartridge (C) Internet INTERNET Number of internet FAX output
TONER CTRG (M) Toner cartridge (M) FAX FAX OUTPUT
TONER CTRG (Y) Toner cartridge (Y) INTERNET Number of internet FAX sending page
FAX SEND
OUTPUT
INTERNET Number of internet FAX receive
FAX RECEIVE
INTERNET Number of internet FAX send
FAX SEND
E-Mail MAIL Number of times of E-MAIL send
COUNTER
FTP FTP Number of FTP send
COUNTER
Item/Display Content 22-43
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
TRIAL Trial mode counter Function (Purpose) Display JAM data details
MODE_B&C (B/W & COLOR scan job) Section
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
HDD_B/W
Operation/Procedure
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity 1) Select target item.
HDD_CL (COLOR) When [COUNTER] key is tapped, the JAM counter, the paper
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity feed counter, and the paper feed retry counter are displayed.
HDD_2CL (2-COLOR)
When [HISTORY1] key is tapped, the JAM history is displayed.
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity
HDD_SGL (SINGLE color) When [HISTORY2] key is tapped, the temperature and humid-
ity data are displayed.
2) Printable with [COLOR] and [MONO] keys.
Display data and contents (COUNTER)
22-40
Purpose Error contents display Item Content
PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles
Function (Purpose) Display trouble code information
PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with
Section SIM22-09 display content)
Operation/Procedure PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar
with SIM27-18 display content)
1) Select the main error code.
The sub error code and the contents are displayed. Display data and contents (HISTORY1)
Item Content Description
NO No History number
22-41 JAM CODE JAM Code Jam code main
Purpose JAM code contents display DATE/TIME Date/Time Occurrence date
TOTAL_BW Total Count (BW) Total counter (B/W)
Function (Purpose) Check JAM code information
TOTAL_CL Total Count (CL) Total counter (color)
Section P_S (*1) Paper Size Paper size
Operation/Procedure P_T (*1) Paper Type Paper type
1) Select the JAM code. JOB (*1) Job Mode Job mode
Display can be changed by [ENGINE] and [SPF] keys. JN Job No First after JOB start or not
OF Offset Paper exit: Offset
EP Exit Position Paper exit: Exit position
PC Punch Paper exit: Punch
22-42 SP Staple Paper exit: Staple
*1: Refer to the detail display content of HISTORY1.
Function (Purpose) Display JAM/trouble data
Section Display data and contents (HISTORY2)
Operation/Procedure Item Content
1) Select target item. NO. History number
DATE/TIME Occurrence date
2) Printable with [COLOR] and [MONO] keys.
TH_CL External air temperature sensor temperature/AD value
Counter Content HUD_CL External air humidity sensor humidity/AD value
JAM TH1_LSU LSU thermistor temperature/AD value
Display TOTAL TOTAL TH2_LSU LSU thermistor temperature /AD value
CODE/ DATE/
data Display Content COUNT COUN
TROUBLE TIME TH_UM Fusing upper main thermistor temperature/AD value
(BW) T(CL)
CODE Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation)
TH_UM_CS
PAPER PAPER Number Generated Gener Total Total temperature/AD value
JAM JAM of JAM code ated output output Fusing upper main thermistor (differential) temperature/
TH_UM_D
COUNT machine (Machine) date/ quantity quantit AD value
JAM time of black y of TH_SUB2 Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 temperature/AD value
troubles (YY/ and color Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (compensation)
MM/ white TH_SUB2_CS
SPF SPF Number Generated temperature/AD value
JAM JAM of SPF JAM code DD Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (differential)
COUNT JAM (SPF) HH:M TH_SUB2_D
temperature/AD value
troubles M:SS)
TH_LM Fusing lower sub thermistor 2 temperature/AD value
TROUB TROUB Number Generated TH_US Fusing upper sub thermistor temperature/AD value
LE LE of trouble
COUNT troubles code
Detail display content of HISTORY1 Display Content
Display Content 66 AB series SRA3
NON Inch series No paper size 67 fixed form SRA3R
WLG fixed form Double Legal 68 SRA4
WLR Double Legal-R 69 SRA4R
LD Ledger 06A 318 x 469 mm
LDR Ledger-R (Double Letter) 06B 469 x 318 mm
LG Legal 06C 234 x 318 mm
LGR Legal-R 06D 318 x 234 mm
FC Foolscap 06E 312 x 440 mm
FCR Foolscap-R 06F 440 x 312 mm
LT Letter 70 220 x 312 mm
LTR Letter-R 71 312 x 220 mm
IV Invoice (Mini) 82 Domestic DBL Postcard
IVR Invoice-R (Mini) 83 special DBL Postcard-R
84 (Envelope) Postcard
EC Executive
ECR Executive-R 85 Postcard-R
A3W A3W (12x18 in) 87 119 x 277 mm
AWR A3W (12x18 in)-R 89 120 x 235 mm
12 22x17 08B 90 x 205 mm
13 22x17R 08D 90 x 185 mm
14 22x34 08F 240 x 332 mm
15 22x34R 91 216 x 277 mm
16 34x44 93 197 x 267 mm
17 34x44R 95 190 x 240 mm
18 44x68 97 162 x 229 mm
19 44x68R 99 142 x 205 mm
01A 9x12 09B 119 x 197 mm
01B 9x12R 09D 120 x 176 mm
01C 13x19 09F 114 x 162 mm
01D 13x19R 0A1 98 x 148 mm
MLG Mexican-Legal 0A3 105 x 235 mm
MLR Mexican-Legal-R 0A5 95 x 217 mm
ALG Asian-Legal 0A7 98 x 190 mm
ALR Asian -Legal-R 0A9 92 x 165 mm
EXT Other Extra (Special) 0AA AB series E-version
A1 AB series A1 0AB AB series L-version
A1R fixed form A1R 0AC AB series panorama size
A2 A2 0AD AB series name card size
A2R A2R 0AE AB series identification photo
A3 A3 0AF AB series name card small
A3R A3R 0B0 Other A3 width
A4 A4 0B1 B4 width
A4R A4R 0B2 A4 width
A5 A5 0B3 A3 width (Long size)
A5R A5R 0B4 B4 width (Long size)
A6 A6 0B5 A4 width (Long size)
A6R A6R 0BC Custom (Large size)
B3 B3 0BD Custom (Small size)
B3R B3R 0BF Custom
B4 B4 0C2 Oversea Monarch
B4R B4R 0C3 special Monarch-R
0C4 (Envelope) DL
B5 B5
B5R B5R 0C5 DL-R
B6 B6 0C6 C4
B6R B6R 0C7 C4-R
54 A0x2 0C8 C5
55 A0x2 R 0C9 C5-R
A0 A0 0CA C6
A0R A0R 0CB C6-R
B0 B0 0CC C65
B0R B0R 0CD C65-R
B1 B1 0CE ISOB5
B1R B1R 0CF ISOB5-R
B2R B2 0D0 Size6-1/2
B2R B2R 0D1 Size6-1/2-R
K8 K8 0D2 Size9
K8R K8R 0D3 Size9-R
K16 K16 0D8 Com-10
16R K16R 0D9 Com-10-R
K32 K32 0DA Inch series E-version
32R K32R 0DB Inch series L-version
Display Content 22-90
0DC Oversea Inch series panorama size
0DD special Inch series name card large
0DE (Envelope) Inch series identification photo Function (Purpose) Output system setting list
0DF Inch series name card small Section
0EC Other Extra (Special large size)
Operation/Procedure
0ED Extra (Special small size)
0EF Extra (Special/Not fixed)
1) Change the display.
0F0 Long size 2) Select target item.
0FF JAM (Used for canceling temporary charging in 3) Tap [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
a coin vendor.)
Category Item Content
Display content detail: Paper type (P_T)
Machine status MACHINE STATUS LIST Machine status list
Display Content list
UST User type Printer test PCL SYMBOL SET LIST SPDL symbol set list
LHP Letter head paper page PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST SPDL internal font list
PNP Perforated sheet PCL EXTENDED FONT SPDL extended font list
RCL Recycled paper LIST
COL Color paper PS FONT LIST PS internal font list
PLN Standard paper KANJI FONT LIST PS KANJI font list
PRP Pre printed PS EXTENDED FONT LIST PS extended font list
OHP OHP Transparency NIC PAGE NIC page
HV Heavy paper Address INDIVIDUAL LIST Address registration list
LBL Label sheet registration list GROUP LIST Group list
ENV Envelope MEMORY BOX LIST Memory box list
HG Postcard Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing folder
TAB Tab sheet filing list FOLDER LIST list
THN Thin paper Common PAPER SETTING LIST Paper setting list
US1 User type 1 MACHINE Machine identification
IDENTIFICATION settings list
US2 User type 2
SETTINGS LIST
US3 User type 3
OPERATION SETTINGS Operation settings list
US4 User type 4
LIST
US5 User type 5
KEYBOARD SETTINGS Keyboard settings list
US6 User type 6 LIST
US7 User type 7 DEVICE CONTROL LIST Device control list
HV2 Heavy paper 2 Home screen HOME SCREEN LIST Home screen list
PL2 Plain paper 2 (not used) Copy setting COPY SETTINGS LIST Copy settings list
HV3 Heavy paper 3 Printer setting PRINTER SETTINGS LIST Printer settings list
HV4 Heavy paper 4 FAX/Image METADATA SET LIST Meta data set list
GLS Glossy paper send SCAN SETTINGS LIST Scan settings list
FAX SETTINGS LIST Fax settings list
Display content detail: Job mode (JOB)
I-FAX SETTINGS LIST Internet fax settings list
Display Content Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing settings
SHD Shading. filing list SETTINGS LIST list
PCL Process control SHARP OSA SHARP OSA SETTINGS SHARP OSA settings list
SIM Test mode (Sim) setting LIST
ICP Interruption copy Network NETWORK SETTINGS Network settings list
CP Copy setting LIST
FXS FAX send scan Security SECURITY SETTINGS Security settings list
AXS AXIS setting LIST
FXP FAX reception print Energy save ENERGY SAVE LIST Energy save settings list
setting
PR Printer
Image quality IMAGE QUALITY Image quality
FXC FAX communication report print
adjustment ADJUSTMENT LIST adjustment list
00A Zaurus print
Image sending IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
SLF Self/Test print
activity report ACTIVITY REPORT (FAX) report (FAX)
00C Document counter
IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
RMT Remote maintenance ACTIVITY REPORT (SCAN) report (scanner)
00E SIM 52-01 IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
00F Tandem (Cordless handset) ACTIVITY REPORT report (Internet FAX)
CFP Confidential print (INTERNET FAX)
NET Network scanner Transfer table ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER Receive rejection
PRF Proof print list LIST number table
ALLOW/REJECT MAIL Receive rejection/allow
<FmSdata>[amp ] address
DOMAIN NAME LIST
INBOUND ROUTING LIST Transfer table list
DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST To administrator transfer
list
* When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK

model, this setting is invalid.
23 24
23-2 24-1
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Output trouble history list of paper jam and Function (Purpose) Clear jam count and trouble count
misfeed Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Tap [EXECUTE] key to execute print. 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed. 3) Tap [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
23-80 MACHINE Machine JAM counter

SPF SPF JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of paper feed and
paper transport in the paper feed section
and the paper transport section. Output
operation status list of the sensor and 24-2
detectors in the paper feed section and the
Purpose Data clear
paper transport section
Function (Purpose) Clear paper feed count of each paper feed
Section Paper feed, Paper transport section
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the tim-
ing list of paper feed and paper transport is outputted.
Print item list 3) Tap [YES] key.
Item Content The target counter is cleared.
JAM CODE JAM code
DATE/TIME JAM occurrence date TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
MODE Printing mode when JAM is occurred. TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
SIZE Paper size TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
TYPE Paper type TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
PIC TRAY Paper feed tray MFT Manual paper feed counter (Total)
OUT TRAY Paper exit tray LCC LCC paper feed counter (LCC)
INF1(ILLEGAL) Illegal detection ADU ADU paper feed counter
INF2(SENSOR) Sensor information
24-3
23-81 Purpose Data clear
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Clear the finisher, SPF and the scan (read-
Function (Purpose) Export paper feed time list ing) unit count
Section Paper feed, Paper transport Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Connect the USB flash drive to the main unit. 1) Select target item.
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
3) Tap [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. 3) Tap [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
SPF SPF document feed counter

(No. of discharged sheets)
SCAN Scan counter
STAPLER Staple counter
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
COVER Document cover open/close counter
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
DSPF LAMP TIME(*) DSPF section lamp total lighting time
FIN OUTPUT Finisher output counter
STAPLELESS STAPLE Stapleless staple counter
MANUAL STAPLE Manual staple counter
24-4 Item/Display Content
Drum DRUM UNIT K Drum unit (K) (Counter)
Purpose Data clear Drum unit (K) (Number of use days)
Function (Purpose) Clear maintenance count and printer count Drum unit (K)
of the transport unit and the fusing unit (Accumulated number of travel
distance)
Section
DRUM UNIT C Drum unit (C) (Counter)
Operation/Procedure Drum unit (C)
1) Select target item. (Number of use days)
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. Drum unit (C)
(Accumulated number of travel
3) Tap [YES] key.
distance)
The target counter is cleared. DRUM UNIT M Drum unit (M) (Counter)
Drum unit (M) (Number of use days)
Drum cartridge (M)
Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter) (Accumulated number of travel
ALL Maintenance counter (Total) distance)
(Number of use days) DRUM UNIT Y Drum unit (Y) (Counter)
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Color) (Counter) Drum unit (Y) (Number of use days)
COL Maintenance counter (Color) Drum unit (Y)
(Number of use days) (Accumulated number of travel
Fusing FUSING BELT Fusing belt (Counter) distance)
Fusing belt (Number of use days) Main MAIN Main charger (K) (Counter)
Fusing belt charger CHARGER K Main charger (K) (Number of use days)
(Accumulated number of travel Main charger (K)
distance) (Accumulated number of travel
FUSING Fusing roller (Counter) distance)
ROLLER Fusing roller (Number of use days) MAIN Main charger (C) (Counter)
Fusing roller CHARGER C Main charger (C) (Number of use days)
(Accumulated number of travel Main charger (C)
PRESS Pressure roller (Counter) distance)
ROLLER Pressure roller (Number of use days) MAIN Main charger (M) (Counter)
Pressure roller CHARGER M Main charger (M) (Number of use days)
(Accumulated number of travel Main charger (M)
FUSING LOAD Fusing Pressure release roller distance)
(Accumulated number of travel MAIN Main charger (Y) (Counter)
distance) CHARGER Y Main charger (Y) (Number of use days)
Separation SEPARATE Separation pawl (Counter)
Main charger (Y)
PAWL Separation pawl (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of travel
Separation pawl distance)
(Accumulated number of travel MC CLEAN K MC Cleaner K (Number of travel
distance) distance)
SEPARATE Separation plate (Counter) MC CLEAN C MC Cleaner C (Number of travel
PLATE Separation plate (Number of use days) distance)
Separation plate MC CLEAN M MC Cleaner M (Number of travel
(Accumulated number of travel distance)
distance) MC CLEAN Y MC Cleaner Y (Number of travel
Transfer TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt (Counter) distance)
Primary transfer belt Drum blade DRUM BLADE Drum blade K (Counter)
(Number of use days) K Drum blade K (Number of use days)
Primary transfer belt Drum blade K
(Accumulated number of travel (Accumulated number of travel
distance) distance)
TRANS BLADE Transfer blade (Counter) DRUM BLADE Drum blade C (Counter)
Transfer blade (Number of use days) C Drum blade C (Number of use days)
Transfer blade Drum blade C
distance) distance)
TC CL ROLLER Transfer cleaning roller (Counter) DRUM BLADE Drum blade M (Counter)
Transfer blade (Number of use days) M Drum blade M (Number of use days)
Transfer cleaning roller (Accumulated Drum blade M
number of travel distance) (Accumulated number of travel
TC2 ROLLER Secondary transfer roller (Counter) distance)
Secondary transfer roller DRUM BLADE Drum blade Y (Counter)
(Number of use days) Y Drum blade Y (Number of use days)
Secondary transfer roller Drum blade Y
distance) distance)
PTC PTC counter (Counter) Other PS PAPER PS paper dust cleaner (Counter)
PTC counter (Number of use days) PS paper dust cleaner
PTC counter (Number of use days)
(Accumulated number of travel OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter)
distance)
Ozone filter (Number of use days)
24-5 LOW Process speed: Low speed
Purpose Data clear MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed
Function (Purpose) Clear developer count

Section
1) Select target item. Purpose Setting
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Make the initial setting of toner density
3) Tap [YES] key. when replacing developer
The target counter is cleared. Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared automati- 1) Select target item.
cally. 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
The developing motor rotates for 1 min, and the toner density sen-
Button
Content sor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is dis-
display
played.
DV_K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Developer cartridge accumulated travel distance (cm) (K) After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
Number of day that used developer (day) (K) density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
DV_C Developer cartridge print counter (C) trol level.
Developer cartridge accumulated travel distance (cm) (C)
Number of day that used developer (day) (C)
DV_M Developer cartridge print counter (M) When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the reference
Developer cartridge accumulated travel distance (cm) (M) toner concentration level is not set. Also when error code of EE-EC,
Number of day that used developer (day) (M) EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the reference toner density level is
DV_Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y) not set normally.
Developer cartridge accumulated travel distance (cm) (Y)
Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is sup-
Number of day that used developer (day) (Y)
plied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or overtone may
occur, causing a trouble.
Display
24-35 Division Item/Display Default
range
Purpose Data clear Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_L_K 1 - 255 128
adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_L_C 1 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Clear toner cartridge usage status count
low speed AT DEVE ADJ_L_M 1 - 255 128
Section AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 1 - 255 128
Operation/Procedure Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_M_K 1 - 255 128
1) Tap [EXECUTE] key. adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_M_C 1 - 255 128
medium speed AT DEVE ADJ_M_M 1 - 255 128
2) Tap [YES] key.
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 - 255 128
The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_L_K 1 - 255 128
control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_L_C 1 - 255 128
the low speed AT DEVE VO_L_M 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE VO_L_Y 1 - 255 128
25 Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_M_K 1 - 255 128
control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_M_C 1 - 255 128
the medium speed AT DEVE VO_M_M 1 - 255 128
25-1
AT DEVE VO_M_Y 1 - 255 128
Display during execution of the simulation
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the developing sec-
tion Item/Display Content
Section Process (Developing section) TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C)
Operation/Procedure
TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys. TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K)
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3 TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C)
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis- TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M)
played. TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y)
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K) Error content

TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C) Display Error name Error content
TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M) EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 77, or
TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y) the control voltage exceeds 207.
TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K) EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 177, or the
TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C) control voltage is less than 52.
TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M) EE-EC EC abnormality The sensor output level is outside of 128 +/-
TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y) 3.
25-4 Setting
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Destination TRAY4 LCC G/LBS SET
(TANDEM)
Function (Purpose) Display the operation data of the toner sup- U.S.A 8.5×11 8.5×11 LBS
ply quantity (Not used in the market.) CANADA 8.5×11 8.5×11 LBS
Section Process INCH 8.5×11 8.5×11 LBS
Operation/Procedure TAIWAN A4 A4 GRAM
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed. EUROPE A4 A4 GRAM
U.K. A4 A4 GRAM
AUS. A4 A4 GRAM
AB A4 A4 GRAM
25-5
Function (Purpose) Display the toner density correction data
26-3
(Not used in the market.)
Purpose Setting
Section Process
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Set the auditor mode
The toner density correction data are displayed. Section Auditor
Operation/Procedure
Select target item.
26 BUILT-IN
Item/Display
P10
Content
Built-in auditor mode
Default
P10
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
26-1 OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
AUDITOR vendor is used.
Purpose Setting
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
Function (Purpose) Set paper output tray (Only the copy mode can be
controlled.)
Section Paper exit
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which
Operation/Procedure signals for the intercard
1) Enter the set value. connected to the PCU are
2) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) used for communication in
parallel I/F.
This setting is required to use the paper exit tray unit.
P OTHER Mode for an external auditor
connected to the SCU.
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC
A RIGHT PAPER 0 Right paper exit tray YES 1
(*1)
EXIT TRAY 1 Right paper exit tray NO
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job
B JOB SEPARATOR 0 Job separator YES 1 (MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode
1 Job separator NO S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF
document filing print
OFF No support for the auditor in
26-2 document filing print
Purpose Setting PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF
performed in the duplex print
Function (Purpose) Set the paper size of the large capacity tray
mode.
(LCC) If the remaining money
Section Paper feed expires during continuous
Operation/Procedure printing, the sheets in the
machine are discharged
Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed. without being printed on the
back surfaces.
Item Setting value Content OFF Continuous printing is not
0 8.5x11 performed in the duplex print
Tray4 mode. (The remaining
1 A4
(Tandem) amount is checked for
2 B5
printing every surface in all
0 8.5x11
the printing process.)
LCC 1 A4
If the remaining money
2 B5 expires during printing, the
0 Gram sheet is discharged without
G/LBS Set
1 LBS printing on the back surface.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
Item/Display Content Default MODE3 I) If READY signal from the auditor becomes NotReady during
COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_O printing the copy job/print job (including Self-print)/all kinds of
TIMING timing of the paper lead edge UT reprint jobs, all of copy/print/any kinds of reprint jobs on the job
by the sensor after the paper queue will be canceled right after the print of the job in progress
passes the fusing section is stops.
used as the money charging
timing.
FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear edge 26-5
by the sensor after the paper
Purpose Setting
passes the fusing section is
used as the money charging Function (Purpose) Set count mode of the total count and the
timing. maintenance count
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection Section
timing of the paper rear edge
by the paper exit sensor of
Operation/Procedure
the right paper exit tray or of 1) Select target item.
the after process unit is used 2) Enter the setting value.
as the money charging 1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
timing.
IMS ON Image send mode is limited. OFF
3) Tap [OK] key.
CONTROL OFF Image send mode is not The set value in step 2) is saved.
limited.
PRINTER MODE1 All the items in OUTSIDE MODE Item/Display Content Default
CONTROL AUDITOR and VENDOR 3 A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2
MODE are allowed to select. B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (Color)
MODE2 OUTSIDE AUDITOR is C MAINTNANCE Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
always set to P VENDOR1 E (B/W)
and VENDOR MODE is D MAINTNANCE Maintenance counter (Color)
always set to MODE3. E (COL)
MODE3 OUTSIDE AUDITOR is E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
always set to P OTHER and F DEV (COL) Developer counter (Color)
VENDOR MODE is always
set to MODE3.
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.

26-6
(*2) Refer to the details of the vendor mode.
Purpose Setting
Details of the vendor mode
Function (Purpose) Set destination area
Completion Insufficient money during Completion
of the copy job of the
Section
specified specified Operation/Procedure
BW/Color Color
quantity. quantity. 1) Select target item.
(no money (Money
(Money (No money
remaining)
remaining) remaining)
remaining)
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4 The selected set content is saved.
MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1 U.S.A. United States of America
MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3 CANADA Canada
INCH Inch series, other destinations
Operation 1: JAPAN Japan
Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds, TAIWAN Taiwan
which can be changed in the system setting. EUROPE Europe
Operation 2: U.K. United Kingdom
Auto clear is not made. AUS. Australia
AB AB series, other destinations
Operation 3:
The display is shifted to the initial screen.
Details of the printer control
26-7
MODE1 I) Selectable all VENDOR MODE
MODE2 I) Printing of the copy job (not including the reprint in copy Purpose Setting
mode) and print job (including the reprint in printer mode/self- Function (Purpose) Set machine ID
print in printer mode) are exclusively controlled using READY
signal from the vender. Section
Operation/Procedure
II) If READY signal from the vender gets ready during printing, 1) Enter the machine ID.
the print job in progress will be completed and other print jobs
will be held on the job queue, and then the copy job becomes Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be
executable. inputted.
To select a desired character, tap the 10-key repeatedly.
III) If READY signal becomes NotReady, the copy job in
Refer to the following list and enter characters.
progress will be canceled after the print stops, and then the
print of the printer job will resume. Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is input-
ted.
To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key
and enter the correct character.
2) Tap [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1). Long Scale (Small): 631 - 1050mm
Long Scale (Large): 1051 - 1300mm
The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode
function. 26-10
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page Purpose Setting
function. In this mode, this function is made available in the simula-
Function (Purpose) Set the trial mode of the network scanner
tion mode.
Section
Number of times of key input Operation/Procedure
10-key
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 A B C a b c 2 - - -
2) Tap [OK] key.
3 D E F d e f 3 - - - The set value in step 1) is saved.
4 G H I g h i 4 - - -
5 J K L j k l 5 - - - TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
6 M N O m n o 6 - - - 1 Trial mode cancel (Default)
7 P Q R S p q r s 7 -
8 T U V t u v 8 - - -
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 -
26-18
0 0 - - - - - - - - -
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the toner save mode operation
Section
26-8
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set counter mode for long scale
Section
3) Tap [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
The set value in step 2) is saved.
2) Enter the set value. Item/Display Content Default
1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up A COPY(0:OFF 0 Copy toner save mode is 0
1:SV1 2:SV2 inhibited
3) Tap [OK] key. :SV3) 1 Copy toner save mode 1
2 Copy toner save mode 2
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Default 3 Copy toner save mode 3
range (Taiwan)
A TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2 B PRINTER(0: 0 Printer toner save mode is 0
LONG Total counter (B/W) OFF 1:SV1 inhibited
SIZE(S) :SV2 3:SV3) 1 Printer toner save mode 1
B TOTAL Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2 2 Printer toner save mode 2
(COL) LONG Total counter 3 Printer toner save mode 3
SIZE(S) (Color) C COPY TS 0 Copy toner save setting is 0: Other
C MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2 DISPLAY(0:Y displayed. destination
(B/W) LONG Maintenance ES 1 Copy toner save setting is 1: UK
SIZE(S) counter (B/W) :NO) not displayed.
D MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2 D PRINTER TS 0 Printer toner save setting is 0: Other
(COL) LONG Maintenance DISPLAY(0:Y displayed. destination
SIZE(S) counter (Color) ES 1:NO) 1 Printer toner save setting is 1: UK
E DEV(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2 not displayed.
LONG Developer counter
SIZE(S) (B/W)
F DEV(COL) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
LONG Developer counter 26-30
SIZE(S) (color)
Purpose Setting
G TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
LONG Total counter (B/W) Function (Purpose) Set the CE mark operation mode. (For slow
SIZE(L) start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
H TOTAL Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 Section
(COL) LONG Total counter
SIZE(L) (Color) Operation/Procedure
I MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 1) Enter the set value.
(B/W) LONG Maintenance
SIZE(L) counter (B/W) 0 Control allowed
J MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 1 Control inhibited
(COL) LONG Maintenance
SIZE(L) counter (Color) 2) Tap [OK] key.
K DEV(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 The set value in step 1) is saved.
LONG Developer counter * Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
SIZE(L) (B/W)
to the power frequency, etc.
L DEV(COL) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
LONG Developer counter
SIZE(L) (color)
26-32 Item/Display Content Default
Purpose Setting A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance
Function (Purpose) Set the specification of the fusing cleaning life is over (Print Continue)
operation 1 Setting of Print Continue/
Section Fusing Stop when the maintenance
life is over (Print Stop)
Operation/Procedure
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 1
1) Enter the set value. when the fusing web is end
Enable/Disable of the user fusing cleaning function is set. (Print Continue)
2) Tap [OK] key. 1 Continue/Stop setting of print
when the fusing web is end
Setting (Print Stop)
range
A CLEANING Cleaning mode self-printing 0 0
PRINT SET execution screen ON
Cleaning mode self-printing 1 26-41
execution screen OFF Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set magnification ratio auto select function
in the center binding mode
26-33 Section
Purpose Setting Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Set the special function 1) Enter the set value.
Section 0 AMS Disable
Operation/Procedure 1 AMS Enable
1) Tap setting button
2) Tap [OK] key.
Set value is saved
Item Function Default
Function1 Application Portal OFF
Function2 Extended LAN OFF 26-49
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the print speed of postcard mode
26-35 Section
Function (Purpose) Set the display/mode of SIM 22-4 trouble Select target item.
history when a same trouble occurred
repeatedly. There are two display modes. Item/Setting value Content Default
Display as one trouble and display as sev- LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW
eral series of troubles HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value. 26-50
Purpose Setting
0 Only once display. (Default)
1 Any time display. Function (Purpose) Function setting
Section
2) Tap [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
26-38
Purpose Setting Item/Display Content Default
Function (Purpose) Set continue/stop of print when the mainte- A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer to *2
nance life is reached 1 BW reverse copy Enable
B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single color copy mode 0 *1
Section Enable/Disable setting
Operation/Procedure C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0 *3
1) Enter the set value. FUNCTION The number of paper exit is
limited.
2) Tap [OK] key.
1 Finisher special paper
The set value in step 1) is saved. The number of paper exit is not
limited.
D COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome 2
(PRINTER) counters are displayed.
1 All are displayed except for the
3-color print counter.
2 Monochrome and full color
print counters are displayed.
Item/Display Content Default Target Target paper setting
E FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0 paper 0 1
COLOR ON during paper feed Saddle Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
1 Paper feed tray color display Stitch envelope 30 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
OFF during paper feed Finishe discharged continuously. When, stopped when
F BANNER SIZE 0 Banner size print disable 0 r however, different kinds of the paper exit
PRINT 1 Banner size print enable sheets are mixed and tray is full or
G WIRELESS 0 Disables wireless LAN setting. 0 discharged and 30 or less when 500
SET sheets of a kind are sheets of a sheets (67mm
1 Enables wireless LAN setting.
kind are continuously thick) are
H POWER 0 Automatic power shut off is not 0
discharged, the operation is discharged.
SHUT-OFF displayed.
stopped by the paper exit tray
SET 1 Automatic power shut off is full detection.
displayed.
Saddle Label The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
I USB DEVICE 0 USB device setting is disabled 0 Stitch sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
1 USB device is enabled Finishe tab sheet, discharged continuously. When, stopped when
J PUNCH UNIT 0 No destination set 0 r OHP however, different kinds of the paper exit
DESTINATION 1 2 holes sheets are mixed and tray is full or
2 2, 3 holes discharged and 100 or less when 500
3 2, 4 holes sheets of a kind are sheets (67mm
4 4 holes (4 holes wide) continuously discharged, the thick) are
operation is stopped by the discharged.
(*1) Default for each destination of item B paper exit tray full detection.
Mode 2-Color/Single
Set value
Single 2-color Counter
0 OFF OFF OFF 26-52
1 OFF ON OFF Purpose Setting
2 ON OFF OFF
Function (Purpose) Set count up mode for non-printed paper
3 ON ON OFF
(insertion paper, cover paper)
4 OFF OFF ON
5 OFF ON ON Section
6 ON OFF ON Operation/Procedure
7 ON ON ON 1) Enter the set value.
(*2) 0 Count up
<Default of each destination> 1 No count up
Destination Item A 2) Tap [OK] key.

USA 1 The set value in step 1) is saved.
CANADA 1
INCH 1
TAIWAN 1
EUROPE 1 26-65
UK 0 Purpose Setting
AUS 1 Function (Purpose) Set the finisher alarm mode
BRAZIL 1
Section
(*3) Operation/Procedure
Use the touch key to set.
Target Target paper setting
paper 0 1 Item Set value Content Default
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1," Number of stapling sets: Maximum
finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are the operation is LIMIT ON
staple setting is set value. ON
discharged continuously. When, stopped when COPIES
OFF Number of stapling sets. Not Limited
however, different kinds of the paper exit
sheets are mixed and tray is full or
discharged and 10 or less when 250
sheets of a kind are sheets
continuously discharged, the (35.5mm thick) 26-66
operation is stopped by the are discharged. Purpose Setting
paper exit tray full detection.
Function (Purpose) Set password for simulation. (For screen
Label The operation is stopped when
sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
transition to classic mode from easy mode)
tab sheet, discharged continuously. When, Section
OHP however, different kinds of Operation/Procedure
sheets are mixed and
discharged and 100 or less 1) The current password is displayed.
sheets of a kind are 2) Enter the set value.
continuously discharged, the 3) Tap [SET] key.
operation is stopped by the
paper exit tray full detection.
B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparation
26-69
message is displayed.
Purpose Setting C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
Function (Purpose) Set the operating condition for toner near when the toner near end status is reached.
end
Section
Operation/Procedure When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set, printing can be
1) Select target item. made after toner near end. However, improper phenomena such as
insufficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may result
depending on the using conditions. When item E is set to "1" print-
3) Tap [OK] key. ing is disabled after toner near end. In this case, toner end display
The set value in step 2 is saved. is made in the toner near end status, and copy/print/FAX outputs
are disabled.
A TONER 0 The toner preparation 0
PREPARATION message is displayed.
1 The toner preparation 26-73
message is not displayed. Purpose Setting
B REMAINING 5% 0 Toner preparation at remaining 1
Function (Purpose) Adjust image loss for enlargement copy, A3
TONER toner level of 5%
LEVEL wide copy mode
10% 1 Toner preparation at remaining
toner level of 10% Section
15% 2 Toner preparation at remaining Operation/Procedure
toner level of 15%
20% 3 Toner preparation at remaining
toner level of 20% 2) Enter the set value.
25% 4 Toner preparation at remaining 3) Tap [OK] key.
toner level of 25% When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
30% 5 Toner preparation at remaining (shade delete quantity) is increased.
toner level of 30%
35% 6 Toner preparation at remaining Setting
toner level of 35% Item/Display Content Default
range
40% 7 Toner preparation at remaining A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
toner level of 40% SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
45% 8 Toner preparation at remaining (M) (shade delete amount:
toner level of 45% quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
50% 9 Toner preparation at remaining B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
toner level of 50% SHADOW ADJ (S) loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
C TONER NEAR END 0 The toner near end message 0 delete quantity) amount:
is displayed. adjustment 0.1mm/step)
1 The toner near end message
is not displayed.
D TONER END 1 Operation setup 1 2
2 Operation setup 2 26-74
3 Operation setup 3 Purpose Setting
E TONER END 1 Toner end detection number is 1
COUNT A4/5% 0 sheet
Function (Purpose) Set the OSA trial mode
2 Toner end detection number is Section
A4/5% 25 sheets Operation/Procedure
3 Toner end detection number is
A4/5% 50 sheets
F TONER E-MAIL 0 Low status send of E-mail alert 0 2) Tap [OK] key.
ALERT (When the toner preparation
message is displayed) (in near Item/Display Content Default
near toner end) A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 OSA trial mode setting. 1
1 Low status send of E-mail alert 1 OSA trial mode cancel.
(near toner end)
G TONER MIB UNIT 0 Receive the remaining toner 0
level MIB in 1% increment.
1 Receive the remaining toner 26-78
level MIB in 5% increment. Purpose Setting
2 Receive the remaining toner
level MIB in 25% increment. Function (Purpose) Set password for the remote operation
H MIB TONER LOW 0 Receive toner remaining 0 panel
INDICATION quantity from toner MIB when Section
toner low detects.
Operation/Procedure
1 Receive toner low from toner
MIB when toner low detects. 1) Enter a password. (5 - 8 digits)
I E-RIC LIST PRINT 0 Attach list print data to status 0 The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
mail of E-RIC In order to correct the entered password, tap the [clear] key to
1 Unattached list print data to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
status mail of E-RIC
2) Tap [SET] key.
(Contents of set items)
A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display.
26-79
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set pop-up display of security
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Tap [OK] key.
Setting
range
A DISP SET Delete result supported the 1 0
security pop-up display ON
Delete result supported the 0
security display OFF
B SIM Simulation start password 1 0
PASSWORD input display ON
DISP Simulation start password 0
input display OFF
26-85
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the function for the simulation mode
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Tap [OK] key.
Setting
range
A SIM MODE Password input display for 1 0
PASS SET transferring between each
simulation ON
Password input display for 0
transferring between each
simulation OFF
B SIM MODE Simulation mode EASY 1 0
SETTING Simulation mode CLASSIC 0 1 AUS
27
27-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the sender's registration number and
the HOST server telephone number
Section
Operation/Procedure
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
3) Tap [SET] key.
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)

SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
* If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
HOST may be continuously made every time
when the power is turned ON (from OFF) or
rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to
the HOST.
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the initial call and toner order auto send
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Tap [OK] key.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default Remarks
range
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 3
TIMING(K) NEAR_END timing setting (K) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
H TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 3
TIMING(C) NEAR_END timing setting (C) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
I TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 3
TIMING(M) NEAR_END timing setting (M) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
J TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 3
TIMING(Y) NEAR_END timing setting (Y) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
Setting
Item/Display Content Default Remarks
range
K TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
history
L LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
M TONER ORDER TIMING CONTROL Toner order timing Toner order alert call at fixed toner 0-1 0 1
control remaining amount
LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Toner order alert call at predicted 1
toner consumption amount
N TONER ORDER DELIVERY SETTING Toner order delivery setting 0-1 0 0
1
O TONER ORDER DELIVERY INTERVAL Toner order delivery interval setting 1 - 15 3 Unit: Date
P REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (PULL) Pull type firmware update is inhibited or not allowed. 0-1 0 1 0 : Allowed
1 1 : Inhibited
Q FIRMWARE VER. SEARCH INTERVAL Firmware search interval setting 1 - 90 7 Unit: Date
Service call When pressing Service call.

27-5
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
Purpose Setting reached.
Function (Purpose) Set the machine tag No. Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
a new product)
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Alert resend
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits).
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
27-9
In order to correct the entered password, tap the [clear] key to
delete the entered value one digit by one digit. Purpose Setting
2) Tap [SET] key. Function (Purpose) Set the paper transport time recording Yes/
No threshold value and shading gain
adjustment retry number
27-6 Section
Function (Purpose) Set of the manual service call 1) Select target item.
Section
3) Tap [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
Setting
0 Allow (Default) Item/Display Content Default
range
1 Inhibit
A FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%)
transport time between
2) Tap [OK] key.
sensors (SPF)
The set value in step 1) is saved. B GAIN Threshold value of the gain 0 - 20 11
ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number (TIMES)
RETRY
27-7 C JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 1 - 100 10
judgment threshold value (TIMES)
Purpose Setting (Alert judgment threshold
Function (Purpose) Set of the enable, alert callout value for continuous JAM's)
(Setting of the number of
Section JAM's continuously made at
Operation/Procedure which it is judged as an
1) Select target item. alert.)
D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 0 - 99 30
PERIOD interval value (DAYS)
3) Tap [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved. * Items A: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
Setting * Item B: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
range retry is actually not registered.
A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1
FSS function disable 1
B ALERT Alert call enable (*1) 0 0
Alert call disable 1
C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 0
Not used. 1
HTTP connection enable 2
*1 Alert send timing
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert

Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
27-10 27-12
Purpose Data clear Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Clear the trouble prediction history informa- Function (Purpose) Check the high density, halftone process
tion control and the auto registration adjustment
Section error history
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Tap [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
2) Tap [YES] key. The high density, halftone process control and the automatic regis-
tration adjustment error history is displayed.
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
HV_ERR1 High density process control error history 1
Target history Serial communication retry history
High density process control error history
Halftone process control error history
Automatic registration adjustment error history
Scanner gain adjustment retry history
H_TONE ERR1 Halftone process control error history 1
DSPF gain adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors
27-11 AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1
AUTO REG ADJ2 Automatic registration adjustment error history 2
Purpose Others
AUTO REG ADJ3 Automatic registration adjustment error history 3
Function (Purpose) Check the serial communication retry num- AUTO REG ADJ4 Automatic registration adjustment error history 4
ber and the scanner gain adjustment retry AUTO REG ADJ5 Automatic registration adjustment error history 5
number history
Section
Operation/Procedure
27-13
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed. Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Check the history of paper transport time
Display Item between sensors
Occurrence date Retry Content
Item name Section
(Display) number
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial Operation/Procedure
LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication Change the display.
DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits retry number
DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display Item/Display Content
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1
FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2
LCC1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3
LCC2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits FEED TIME4 History of paper transport time between sensors 4
DSPF1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits FEED TIME5 History of paper transport time between sensors 5
DSPF2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits FEED TIME6 History of paper transport time between sensors 6
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain FEED TIME7 History of paper transport time between sensors 7
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry FEED TIME8 History of paper transport time between sensors 8
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history FEED TIME9 History of paper transport time between sensors 9
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits FEED TIME10 History of paper transport time between sensors 10
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain
adjustment retry
history
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF gain 27-14
DSPF GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry Purpose Setting
DSPF GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display
* This is only for
Function (Purpose) Set the FSS function connection test mode
DSPF GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF supported Section
machines. Operation/Procedure
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Black toner order
ORDER(K) alert call date/
time
0 Disable (Default)
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Cyan toner order
ORDER(C) alert call date/ 1 Enable
time
2) Tap [OK] key.
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits magenta toner
ORDER(M) order alert call The set value in step 1) is saved.
date/time
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Yellow toner
ORDER(Y) order alert call
date/time
27-15 Item/ Setting
Content Default NOTE
Display range
PAPER Setting of paper kind 0-2 0 0: Standard
Function (Purpose) Display the FSS connection status TYPE for paper order alert paper and
Section SET recycled paper
Operation/Procedure 1: Standard
paper only
The FSS operating status is displayed. 2: Recycled
paper only
Item/Display Content Setting range Default
A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of
FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not operated 0 setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
FSS connection 1 Operated sheets] (A3)
status.
A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (A4)
B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
27-16 setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
Purpose Setting sheets] (B4)
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
Function (Purpose) Set the FSS alert send
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
Section sheets] (B5)
Operation/Procedure A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set. sheets)
2) Tap [OK] key. A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the
Setting (Number of used first time
range sheets)
A MAINTENANC Maintenance Alert send 0 0 B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
E ALERT alert send Enable FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the
Enable setting Alert send 1 (Number of used first time
Disable sheets)
B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0 B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
ORDER alert send Enable FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the
ALERT Enable setting Alert send 1 (Number of used first time
Disable sheets)
C TONER CTRG Toner cartridge Alert send 0 0
ALERT replacement Enable
alert send Alert send 1
Enable setting Disable
D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0 30
JAM alert send Enable
Enable setting Alert send 1
Disable
30-1
E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0 Purpose Operation test/check
ALERT send Enable Enable Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the sensors in other
setting Alert send 1 than the paper feed section and the control
Disable
circuit
F PAPER Paper order Alert send 0 0
ORDER alert send Enable Section
ALERT Enable setting Alert send 1 Operation/Procedure
Disable The operating conditions of the sensors are displayed.
The sensors which are turned ON are highlighted.
Display Content
27-17
1TUD_CL Transfer mode sensor CL
Purpose Setting 1TUD_K Transfer mode sensor K
Function (Purpose) Set the FSS paper order alert 2TPD Secondary transfer paper sensor
2TUD Secondary transfer position sensor
Section
CCHPD_C Charger cleaner home position sensor C *
Operation/Procedure
CCHPD_K Charger cleaner home position sensor K *
1) Select an item to be set. CCHPD_M Charger cleaner home position sensor M *
2) Enter the set value. CCHPD_Y Charger cleaner home position sensor Y *
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification CCMD_C Charger cleaner shift sensor C *
is set. CCMD_K Charger cleaner shift sensor K *
CCMD_M Charger cleaner shift sensor M *
3) Tap [SET] key.
CCMD_Y Charger cleaner shift sensor Y *
DHPD_C Drum phase sensor C *
DHPD_CL Drum phase sensor CL
DHPD_K Drum phase sensor K
DHPD_M Drum phase sensor M *
DHPD_Y Drum phase sensor Y *
DSW_C1 Transfer cover sensor
Display Content 30-30
DSW_C2 Tray 2 transport cover sensor
DSW_F Front door switch
DSW_FU Front cover sensor Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the motion sensor
DSW_R Right transport unit (right door) switch Section
HLPCD Fusing pressure sensor
Operation/Procedure
POD1 Paper exit sensor 1
When you enter this simulation, the current status of the sensor is
displayed.
POD4 Paper exit sensor 4 *1: Displayed, but not installed in some models.
PPD2 Paper transport sensor 2
PRTPD Paper exit paper sensor
SHPOS Shifter home position sensor
TCED_C
TCED_K
Toner cartridge ejecting sensor C
Toner cartridge ejecting sensor K
40
TCED_M Toner cartridge ejecting sensor M
TCED_Y Toner cartridge ejecting sensor Y 40-2
TED4 Upper paper empty sensor Purpose Adjustment/Setup
TFD2 Paper exit tray full sensor
Function (Purpose) Adjust the paper width sensor of the man-
TFD3 Paper exit tray full sensor (Right paper exit tray)
ual paper feed tray
TNFD Waste toner sensor
TNFD2 Waste developer sensor Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
* Not used
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
30-2 The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4).
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the sensors in the
paper feed section and the control circuit The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R).
Section
Operation/Procedure
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
The operating conditions of the sensors are displayed.
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
The sensors which are turned ON are highlighted.
Display Content The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
C1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit sensor When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
C1PED Paper empty sensor displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
C1PFD Paper transport sensor
C1PFPD Paper pass sensor MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
C1SPD Paper remaining quantity sensor P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
C1SS Tray sensor P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
C1SS1 Paper size sensor MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
C1SS2
C1SS3
C1SS4
C2LUD Paper feed tray upper limit sensor 40-7
C2PED Paper empty sensor Purpose Adjustment/Setup
C2PFD Paper transport sensor
Function (Purpose) Set the adjustment value of the paper width
C2SPD Paper remaining quantity sensor
sensor of the manual paper feed tray
C2SS1 Paper size sensor
C2SS2 Section Paper feed
C2SS2ETM Tray 2 module sensor Operation/Procedure
C2SS3 Paper size sensor 1) Select target item.
C2SS4
C2SSSETD Tray 2 desk sensor
MPED Paper empty sensor 3) Tap [OK] key.
MPFD Paper feed sensor The set value in step 2) is saved.
MPLD1 Paper length sensor
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
B P1 (A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 231
C P2 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
(A4R)
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
3) Select the set value.
41 The set value in step 3) is saved.
Setting
41-1 Display Content Default
range
Purpose Operation test/check PLAIN Used to change the fusing -20 0
PAP&WUP&RDY GR temperature setting of -15
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the document size
plain paper, WUP, and -10
Ready series -5
Section
0
Operation/Procedure +5
The operating conditions of the sensors are displayed. +10
The sensors which are turned ON are highlighted. +15
+20
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display PLAIN PAPER 2 Used to change the fusing -20 0
Close: Highlighted temperature setting of -15
PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display plain paper 2 series -10
sensor status Document present: Highlighted -5
0
+5
+10
41-2 +15
Purpose Adjustment +20
Function (Purpose) Adjust the document size sensor detection HEAVY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
temperature setting of -15
level
heavy paper series -10
Section
-5
Operation/Procedure 0
1) Open the document cover, and tap [EXECUTE] key without +5
place a document on the document table. +10
The sensor level without document is recognized. +15
+20
2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and tap [EXE-
THIN PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
CUTE] key.
temperature setting of thin -15
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed. paper series -10
-5
0
41-3 +5
Purpose Operation test/check +10
+15
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the document size
+20
RECYCLED PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0
Section GR temperature setting of -15
Operation/Procedure recycled paper series -10
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document -5
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time. 0
+5
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
+10
Item/Display Content Detection level range +15
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close) +20
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255 GLOSSY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255
gloss paper series -10
PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255
PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255 -5
PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255 0
PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255 +5
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255 +10
+15
+20
ENV PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
43 envelope series -10
-5
0
43-1 +5
Purpose Setting +10
+15
Function (Purpose) Set the fusing temperature in each mode
+20
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the SW-A or the SW-B.
Setting Setting
Display Content Default Display Content Default
range range
EMBOSS PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0 WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready HH -10 0
temperature setting of -15 HH environment fine -7
embossed paper -10 adjustment -5
-5 -3
0 0
+5 +3
+10 +5
+15 +7
+20 +10
OHP PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0 PLAIN PAP ADJ HH Normal paper HH -10 0
temperature setting of -15 environment fine -7
OHP paper -10 adjustment -5
-5 -3
0 0
+5 +3
+10 +5
+15 +7
+20 +10
FUSING CONDITION Fusing condition 0 0 HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper HH -10 0
ADJ adjustment setting 1 ADJ HH environment fine -7
2 adjustment -5
3 -3
4 0
5 +3
ENV PAPER PRESS Envelop paper pressure 0 0 +5
PATTERN adjustment 1 +7
2 +10
3 SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper HH -10 0
4 HH environment fine -7
WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready LL -10 0 adjustment -5
LL environment fine -7 -3
adjustment -5 0
-3 +3
0 +5
+3 +7
+5 +10
+7
+10
PLAIN PAP ADJ LL Normal paper LL -10 0
environment fine -7 43-2
adjustment -5 Purpose Setting
-3 Function (Purpose) Set the fusing operation and preheating
0
+3
Section
+5 Operation/Procedure
+7 1) Select the SW-A or SW-B.
+10 2) Select target item.
HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper LL -10 0
ADJ LL environment fine -7
adjustment -5
4) Tap [OK] key.
-3 The set value in step 3) is saved.
0
+3 Item / Display Content Setting Default
range
+5
WARMUP Fusing motor previous rotation List of
+7
A FUMON start TH_UM set value 0 - 200 Default
+10
TH_UM T and set
SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper LL -10 0 values for
WARMUP Fusing motor previous rotation
LL environment fine -7 B 0 - 255
FUMOFF complete time each
adjustment -5 destinatio
WARMUP Warm-up complete time
-3 C 0 - 255 n
END TIME
0 FM preliminary rotation start
HI WU FM
+3 D TH_UM when warming up at 0 - 200
ON TMP
+5 alpha degree C or above
+7 Warm-up completion time
HI WU END
+10 E when warm-up at alpha 0 - 255
TIME
degree C or above
Setting value applying time in
LO
warm-up of 120 degrees C or
F WARMUP 0 - 255
below (Timer from Ready
TIME
completion)
Item / Display Content Setting Default
Default
range
Setting value
Setting value applying time in List of Item / Display Content
HI range 26/30 35/40
warm-up of 120 degree C or Default
G WARMUP 0 - 255 ppm ppm
above (Time from Ready and set
TIME Correction value for
completion) values for WARMUP
fusing motor pre-
HI Threshold value alpha to apply each FUMON
A rotation start TH_UM 1 - 99 50 50
H WARMUP the setting value in warm-up of 1 - 119 destinatio TH_UM T
set value under LL
BORDER alpha degree C or above n LL
environment
JOBEND After-rotation time after
Fusing motor prior
I FUMON completion of a job 0 - 255 WARMUP
rotation completion
TIME B FUMOFF 1 - 99 60 60
time under LL
TH_UM E- TH_UM set value when LL
J 30 - 200 environment
STAR preheating
Correction value for
TH_LM E- TH_LM set value when WARMUP
K 30 - 200 warm-up completion
STAR preheating C END TIME 1 - 99 75 75
time under LL
TH_US E- TH_US set value when LL
L 30 - 200 environment
STAR preheating Correction value for
TH_UM TH_UM set value from FM prior rotation start
M 30 - 200 HI_WU_F
PRE-JOB recovering the preheating TH_UM in warm-up at
D M_ON_TM 1 - 99 50 50
alpha degree C or
List of destination groups P_LL
above under LL
Group Destination environment
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – – Correction value for
Group C EUROPE U. K AUS. TAIWAN AB warm-up completion
HI_WU_E
time in warm-up at
E ND_TIME_ 1 - 99 65 65
List of Default and set values for each destination alpha degree C or
LL
above under LL
Item Default environment
SW_A SW_B Correction value of
Group B Group C Group B Group C the setting value
A 0 0 0 0 applying time in
LO_WARM
B 20 20 20 20 warm-up of
F UP_TIME_ 1 - 99 65 65
C 7 7 30 30 120degree C or below
LL
under LL environment
D 0 0 0 0
(Time from Ready
E 7 7 30 30
completion)
F 0 0 0 0
Correction value of
G 0 0 0 0 the setting value
H 60 60 60 60 applying time in
I 8 8 8 8 HI_WARM warm-up of
J 135 135 135 135 G UP_TIME_ 120degree C or 1 - 99 65 65
K 100 100 100 100 LL above under LL
L 135 135 135 135 environment (Time
M 150 150 155 155 from Ready
completion)
Code descriptions Correction value of
the threshold value
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HI_WARM alpha to apply the
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) H UP_BORD setting value in warm- 1 - 99 50 50
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) ER_LL up of alpha degree C
or above under LL
environment
Correction value for
43-20 JOBEND_ the after rotation time
I FUMON_TI when completing a 1 - 99 50 50
Purpose Adjustment/Setup ME LL job under LL
Function (Purpose) Set the environment correction under low environment
temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the Correction value for
fusing temperature setting (SIM43-2) in TH_UM E- preheating TH_UM
J 1 - 99 55 55
STAR LL set value under LL
each paper mode
environment
Section Correction value for
Operation/Procedure TH_LM E- preheating TH_LM
K 1 - 99 55 55
STAR LL set value under LL
environment
2) Enter the set value. Correction value for
3) Tap [OK] key. TH_US E- preheating TH_US
L 1 - 99 55 55
The set value in step 2) is saved. STAR LL set value under LL
environment
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 - Correction value for
99) the set value of
TH_UM
TH_UM when
Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49 M PRE-JOB 1 - 99 55 55
restoring from
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99 LL
preheating under LL
environment
* Item WARMUP END TIME LL: 1 Count = 1s Change
Correction value for the other items: 1 count for 1degrees C List of destination groups
change
Group Destination
Code descriptions Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –
Group C EUROPE U. K AUS. TAIWAN AB
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper)
List of Default and set values for each destination
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper)
Item Default (26/30 ppm) Default (35/40 ppm)
Group B Group C Group B Group C
A 50 50 50 50
43-21 B 50 50 50 50
Purpose Adjustment/Setup C 50 50 50 50
D 50 50 50 50
Function (Purpose) Set the environment correction under high E 50 50 50 50
temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the F 50 50 50 50
fusing temperature setting (SIM43-2) in G 50 50 50 50
each paper mode H 50 50 50 50
Section I 50 50 50 50
Operation/Procedure J 50 50 50 50
1) Select target item. K 50 50 50 50
L 50 50 50 50
M 50 50 50 50
3) Tap [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99) 43-24
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
Function (Purpose) Set fuser operation mode
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Section
Setting Operation/Procedure
Item / Display Content Default
range 1) Select target item.
WARMUP Fusing motor previous List of 2) Enter the set value.
A FUMON rotation start TH_UM set 1 - 99 Default and
TH_UM T HH value set values
3) Tap [OK] key.
WARMUP Fusing motor previous for each The set value in step 2 is saved.
B 1 - 99 destination
FUMOFF HH rotation completion time Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
WARMUP END Warm-up completion time 99)
C 1 - 99
TIME HH
HI_WU_FM_O FM preliminary rotation Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
N_TMP HH start TH_UM when Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
D 1 - 99
warming up at alpha
degree C or above
HI_WU_END_ Warm-up completion time Item / Display Content Setting Default
E TIME HH when warm-up at alpha 1 - 99 Value value
degree C or above COOL_DOWN Cool down time List of Default
A 1-60
LO_WARMUP_ Correction value for AF - _HEAVY (Heavy paper) and set values
F TIME_HH AH application time (Time 1 - 99 COOL_DOWN Cool down time for each
B 1-60
from Ready complete) _OHP (OHP) destination
HI_WARMUP_ Correction value for AJ - COOL_DOWN Cool down time
C 1-60
G TIME HH AL application time (Time 1 - 99 _ENVELOPE (Envelope)
from Ready complete) Fusing web motor
D FUS_MOTOR 1-20
HI_WARMUP_ Threshold value alpha to operating interval
H 1 - 99
BORDER_HH which AN - AP is applied Power supply voltage
JOBEND_FUM After-rotation time after E POWER SET 1:100V, 2 :110 - 1-3
I 1 - 99 120V, 3 : 220 - 240V
ON_TIME HH completion of a job
TH_UM E- TH_UM set value when
J 1 - 99 * Each cool down time: 1 count = 1sec change
STAR HH preheating
K
TH_LM E- TH_LM set value when
1 - 99
List of destination groups
STAR HH preheating
Group Destination
TH_US E- TH_US set value when
L 1 - 99 Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH TAIWAN
STAR HH preheating
TH_UM PRE- Resetting from preheating Group C EUROPE U. K AUS. AB
M 1 - 99
JOB HH TH_UM set value
List of Default and set values for each destination
* Item WARMUP END TIME HH: 1 Count = 1s Change
Item Default
Correction value for the other items: 1 count for 1 degrees C Group B Group C
change A 8 8
Code descriptions B 8 8
C 8 8
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) D 10 10
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) E 2 3
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper)
43-35
Purpose Adjustment and setting Set the items to the default unless a change is specially required.
Function (Purpose) Check fusing nip operation
Item/ Setting
Section Fusing Content Default
Display range
Operation/Procedure HV Normal operation high density Black text
1) Prepare a black-background image, and put it on the tray with process control Enable/Disable on white Allow
the black background facing upward. setting backgrou
HT Normal operation halftone process nd
2) Enter the set value. (The tray is specified.) Allow
control Enable/Disable setting (Inhibit:
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. TN_PIX_ Setting of Enable/Disable of toner 0=NO)
white text Allow
4) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started. SUP supply control for the yield count
TN_FB Enable/Disable setting of FEEDBACK on black
When printing is executed, a jam is always generated. (As Allow
toner supply control backgrou
shown in the photo below.) nd (Allow:
TN_INT Enable/Disable setting of the interval
5) Leave the jam paper for about 30sec, then remove the jam 1=YES) Allow
toner supply control
paper.
TN_REC Enable/Disable setting of developer
6) Measure the width of the gloss change section (nip) of the jam Allow
V recovery
paper, and check to confirm that it is in the range of about TN_ADJ Enable/Disable setting of the sensor
Allow
10.5mm - 12mm. output adjustment
* If the difference between F and R is considerably great, the TN_EMP Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner
Allow
fusing pressure may be insufficient. falling distance detection control
TN_EMP Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner
Setting _INT falling distance detection control of Allow
Item/Display item Content Default job interruption
range
A PAPER MFT Tray selection 1-5 1 2 TN_EMP Enable/Disable setting of fall amount
Allow
CS1 2 _NEW detection control of a new cartridge
CS2 3 TN_PIX_ Enable/Disable setting of toner supply
Allow
TBL control by the yield count
CS3 4
PRT_HT Enable/Disable setting of printer
CS4 5
correction feedback of half-tone Allow
process control
MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the
0APERFEEDDIRECTION "LACKBACKGROUND membrane decrease grid voltage Allow
correction
MD EV Enable/Disable setting of the
membrane decrease environment Allow
grid voltage correction
MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the grid
MC correction by the MC total current Allow
correction
MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the VG grid
'LOSSCHANGE DV correction by the developer bias Allow
SECTION absolute value
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of the
membrane decrease laser power Allow
voltage correction
.IPWIDTH
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of
EV environmental area and the
Allow
membrane decrease count laser
power voltage correction
MD LD Enable/Disable process control laser
Allow
HV power voltage correction
MD DL Enable/Disable setting of the
membrane decrease discharge light Allow
quantity correction
MD DL Enable/Disable setting of the
EV membrane decrease environment Disable
discharge quantity correction
MD MC Enable/Disable setting of the MC total
current correction by an increase in Allow
44 the resistance
MD MC Enable/Disable setting of the MC total
EV current correction by environmental Allow
44-1 change
Purpose Setting AR_AUT Auto registration adjustment Enable/
Allow
O Disable setting
Function (Purpose) Set each correction operation function in
AR_ERR Auto registration adjustment
the image forming section
OR execution error check Enable/Disable Allow
Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop- setting
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) AR_PHA Enable/Disable setting of drum phase
Operation/Procedure SE fitting calculation feedback Enable/ Allow
Disable setting
DM_PHA Drum phase fitting Enable/Disable
(The selected item is highlighted.) Allow
SE setting
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/ Setting Class
Content Default Setting
Display range ificati Content Default
Item/Display range
TC Enable/Disable setting of transfer Black text on
Allow
output correction on white PROC G PCS_F Diffuse reflection dark
0 - 255 0
PTC_EN PTC environment correction Enable/ backgrou ON _DARK voltage (F side)
V Disable setting nd H PCS_R Diffuse reflection dark
0 - 255 0
(Inhibit: _DARK voltage (R side)
0=NO) I PCS_F Linearity correction
white text Allow 0 - 255 20
_V1 coefficients (F side)
on black J PCS_F
backgrou 0 - 255 41
_V2
nd (Allow:
K PCS_F
1=YES) 0 - 255 82
_V3
L PCS_F
0 - 255 122
_V4
M PCS_F
44-2 0 - 255 163
_V5
Purpose Adjustment/Setup N PCS_R Linearity correction
0 - 255 20
Function (Purpose) Adjust the sensitivity of the image density _V1 coefficients (R side)
sensor O PCS_R
0 - 255 41
_V2
Section Process P PCS_R
0 - 255 82
Operation/Procedure _V3
When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the adjustment is executed auto- Q PCS_R
0 - 255 122
matically. _V4
R PCS_R
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis- 0 - 255 163
_V5
played.
S PCS_F Diffuse reflection 100 -
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. 500
_CL_ka normalization coefficients 2000
T PCS_R 100 -
Class 500
Setting _CL_ka 2000
ificati Content Default U BELT_ Belt substrate F side
Item/Display range
on PCS_F monitor max. value 0 - 255 0
PROC A REGS_ Light emitting quantity MAX (Process control)
1 - 255 21
ON/ F LED adjustment value V BELT_ Belt substrate F side
REGI B REGS_ PCS_F monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
1 - 255 21
ST R LED MIN (Process control)
C REGS_ Transfer belt substrate W BELT_ Belt substrate F side
F detection level value (F PCS_F monitor difference
side) when the light 0 - 255 0 0 - 255 0
DIF (BELT_PCS_F MAX-
emitting quantity MIN)
adjustment is completed. X BELT_ Belt substrate R side
D REGS_ Transfer belt substrate PCS_R monitor max. value 0 - 255 0
R detection level value (R MAX (Process control)
side) when the light 0 - 255 0 Y BELT_ Belt substrate R side
emitting quantity PCS_R monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
adjustment is completed. MIN (Process control)
E REGS_ Specular reflection dark Z BELT_ Belt substrate R side
F voltage (F side) 0 - 255 0 PCS_R monitor difference
DARK 0 - 255 0
DIF (BELT_PCS_F MAX-
F REGS_ Specular reflection dark MIN)
R voltage (R side) 0 - 255 0
DARK
Class Error name Error content
Setting
ificati Content Default Registration BELT_REGS_F_ DIF error
Item/Display range
on substrate F scan The difference between the max. value and the
REGI AA BELT_ Belt substrate F side abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
ST REGS_ monitor max. value greater than the specified value when the transfer
0 - 255 0
F_ (Registration) belt rotates 1 turn
MAX Registration BELT_REGS_R_ DIF error
AB BELT_ Belt substrate F side substrate R scan The difference between the max. value and the
REGS_ monitor min. value 0 - 255 0 abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
F_ MIN (Registration) greater than the specified value when the transfer
AC BELT_ Belt substrate F side belt rotates 1 turn
REGS_ monitor difference
0 - 255 0
F_ DIF (BELT_REGS_F MAX-
MIN)
AD BELT_ Belt substrate R side 44-4
REGS_ monitor max. value Purpose Setting
0 - 255 0
R_ (Registration)
MAX Function (Purpose) Set the condition of the high density pro-
AE BELT_ Belt substrate R side cess control operation
REGS_ monitor min. value 0 - 255 0 Section Process
R_ MIN (Registration)
Operation/Procedure
AF BELT_ Belt substrate R side
REGS_ monitor difference 1) Select target item.
0 - 255 0
R_ DIF (BELT_REGS_R MAX- 2) Enter the set value.
MIN)
3) Tap [OK] key.
AG PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level F (K) 0 - 255 0
_F_K
AH PATCH Toner patch detection Set the items to the default unless a change is specially required.
_REGS level F (C) 0 - 255 0
_F_C Setting
AI PATCH Toner patch detection range
_REGS level F (M) 0 - 255 0 A PCS_CL TARGET Color image sensor 1 - 255 204
_F_M adjustment target value
AJ PATCH Toner patch detection B PCS_K TARGET Black image sensor 1 - 255 204
_REGS level F (Y) 0 - 255 0 adjustment target value
_F_Y C LED_CL OUTPUT Color image sensor light 1 - 255 21
AK PATCH Toner patch detection emitting start level
_REGS level R (K) 0 - 255 0 D LED_K OUTPUT Black image sensor light 1 - 255 21
_R_K emitting start level
AL PATCH Toner patch detection E PCS ADJSTMENT Color image sensor 1 - 255 8
_REGS level R (C) 0 - 255 0 LIMIT adjustment error
_R_C allowance level
AM PATCH Toner patch detection F BELT GROUND Transfer belt one-turn 1 - 255 1
_REGS level R (M) 0 - 255 0 DIF substrate detection level
_R_M difference allowance
AN PATCH Toner patch detection level
_REGS level R (M) 0 - 255 0 G BIAS_CL Developing bias (for 0 - 255 60
_R_Y STANDARD DIF color) reference
correction voltage
Error name Error content H BIAS_BK Developing bias (for 0 - 255 0
F sensor adjustment REGS_F LED error STANDARD DIF black) reference
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of correction voltage
adjustments. I BIAS PATCH Toner patch making 1 - 255 60
R sensor adjustment REGS_R LED error INTERVAL developing bias interval
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of J Y_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 42
adjustments. density level (yellow)
F Color sensor PCS_F_CL_ka calculation error K M_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
adjustment The target is not reached density level (magenta)
abnormality L C_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
Process control F BELT_PCS_F DIF error density level (cyan)
sensor adjustment The difference between the max. value and the M K_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 50
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is density level (black)
greater than the specified value when the transfer N HV BK_GROUND Black image sensor 1 - 255 60
belt rotates 1 turn LIMIT adjustment error
R Color sensor PCS_R_CL_ka calculation error allowance level
adjustment The target is not reached
abnormality
Process control R BELT_PCS_R DIF error
sensor adjustment The difference between the max. value and the
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
greater than the specified value when the transfer
belt rotates 1 turn
44-6 44-14
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Execute the high density process control Function (Purpose) Display the output level of the temperature
forcibly and humidity sensor
Section Process Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
Operation/Procedure LSU
Tap [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved. The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
(Refer to the table below.)
In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved. TH_CL External air temperature sensor temperature
External air temperature sensor AD value
Result display Content description HUD_CL External air humidity sensor humidity
COMPLETE Normal complete External air sensor AD value
ERROR Abnormal end TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 temperature
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption LSU thermistor 1 A/D value
TH2_LSU LSU thermistor 2 temperature
Details of error display Content description LSU thermistor 2 A/D value
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color image sensor adjustment abnormality TH_UM Fusing upper main thermistor temperature
Fusing upper main thermistor (AD value)
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality
TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation)
K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
temperature
C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality
Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation) AD value
M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality
TH_UM_D Fusing upper main thermistor (differential) AD value
Y_HV _ERR Y high density process control abnormality
TH_SUB2 Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 temperature
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (AD value)
TH_SUB2_CS Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (compensation)
Details of error display Content description temperature
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color image sensor adjustment abnormality Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (compensation) AD value
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality TH_SUB2_D Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (differential) AD value
K_EHT_ERR K process control abnormality TH_LM Fusing lower main thermistor temperature
C_EHT_ERR C process control abnormality Fusing lower main thermistor (AD value)
M_EHT_ERR M process control abnormality TH_US Fusing upper sub thermistor temperature
Fusing upper sub thermistor (AD value)
Y_EHT_ERR Y process control abnormality
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
44-15
44-9 Purpose Setting
Purpose Operation data display Function (Purpose) Set the OPC drum idle rotation
Function (Purpose) Display the result data of the high density Section Process
process control operation Operation/Procedure
Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop- 1) Select target item.
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) 2) Enter the set value.
Operation/Procedure 3) Tap [OK] key.
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys. The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
Item/ Setting
Content Default
Display range
44-12
A TIME Idle rotation interval (time interval 0 - 255 6
Purpose Operation data display between the previous OPC drum
Function (Purpose) Display the operation data of the high den- idle rotation and the next one)
sity process control and the image density setting (h)
sensor B AREA1 Environmental area difference 0-5 2
judgment threshold value setting
Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop- (difference between the previous
ing) OPC drum idle rotation and the
Operation/Procedure current one)
C AREA2 Environmental area conditions 1 - 15 1
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys.
(AND condition of the previous
OPC drum idle rotation and the
current one)
D CYCLE Previous rotation time setting 0 - 255 0
(sec) in the process control when
recovered from power ON,
preheating/sleep mode.
E FLAG OPC drum idle rotation is 0-1 0
allowed or disabled. (0 : Allow
1 : Disable)
44-17 Category Item/Display Content
Purpose Setting Coefficient [DITHER_RAW_VALU Halftone process control
E] correction value (before
Function (Purpose) Set refresh operation for process section correction)
Section Process Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Halftone process control
Operation/Procedure value reference value
Correction [S_VALUE] Halftone process control
1) Select target item. value correction value
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer halftone process control
3) The refresh operation is executed. correction value
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer halftone process control
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation unless specially required. DITHER_VALUE] reference dither value
Display items and descriptions of contents [PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density adjustment
HT_VALUE] correction value
Display Content Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous halftone process
BLADE REFRESH Blade development refresh correction control value
DEVE REFRESH Development refresh value [BEFORE Previous printer halftone
* DEVE REFLESH execution consume PRINTER_S_VALUE] process control value
W-Letter A3 100% worth of toner.
44-25
44-21
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the calculating conditions of the correc-
Function (Purpose) Set the halftone process control target tion value for the halftone process control
Section Process Section Process
Tap [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select a adjustment target color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
The halftone process control target is set and the operation data 2) Select target item.
are displayed.
Display Content 4) Tap [OK] key.
COMPLETE Normal complete
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor
ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error Set the items to the default unless a change is specially required.
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor
ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error Setting Default
[YMCK] High density process control error Item/Display Content
range K CMY
[YMCK] A HIGHTLIGHT Highlight correction 0 - 128 20 20
OTHER Other errors VALUE LIMIT amount limit value
B MAX VALUE Maximum density value 0 - 128 20 20
LIMIT correction limit value
44-22
Purpose Operation data display
44-26
Function (Purpose) Display the toner patch density level in the
halftone process control operation Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Section Process Function (Purpose) Execute the halftone process control com-
Operation/Procedure pulsory
1) The toner patch density level made in the halftone process Section Process
control operation is displayed. Operation/Procedure
Tap [EXECUTE] key.
The halftone process control is performed and the operation data
ID_n Patch data display (n= 1 to 16)
are displayed.
BASE1 Belt substrate data (START)
BASE5 Belt substrate data (LAST) COMPLETE Normal complete
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
44-24 ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
Purpose Operation data display [YMCK] High density process control error [YMCK]
error
Function (Purpose) Display the correction target and the cor-
OTHER Other errors
rection level in the halftone process control
operation
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
44-27 Setting
range
Purpose Data clear E HUM The temperature Color 0 0
Function (Purpose) Clear the correction data of the halftone and humidity process
process control inside the control
machine are Enable
Section Process monitored only Process 1
Operation/Procedure during a job at the control
1) Tap [EXECUTE] key. interval set by the Disable
item of HUM BK 2
2) Tap [YES] key. HOUR. process
The correction data of the halftone process control are cleared. When the control
changes in the Enable
temperature and
the humidity are
44-28 greater than the
Purpose Adjustment/Setup specified level (the
set value of item
Function (Purpose) Set the process control execution condi- HUM DIF) in
tions comparison with
Section Process the previous
process control.
Operation/Procedure
F REV1 YES When the Enable 0 1
1) Select target item. NO accumulated Inhibit 1
2) Enter the set value. traveling distance
of K or M OPC
drum unit reaches
the specified level
after turning ON
Set the items to the default unless a change is specially required. the power.
G REV2 YES When the Enable 0 1
Setting _BK NO accumulated Inhibit 1
Item/Display Content Default traveling distance
range
A INITI YES When warm-up Enable 0 0 of K OPC drum
AL after clearing the unit reaches the
NO Disable 1
counter of the specified level
OPC drum and the from execution of
developer unit the previous
density correction.
B SW ON When supplying Color 0 3
the power (when process H REV2 YES When the Enable 0 1
canceling power control _CL NO accumulated Inhibit 1
shut-off) Enable traveling distance
of M OPC drum
Process 1
unit reaches the
control
specified level
Disable
from execution of
BK 2
the previous
process
density correction.
control
I REFR YES Select of YES/NO Key 0 1
Enable
ESH of the manual operation
Pixel 3
MOD process control display
count
E NO key with key Key 1
judgment
operation operation
C TIME After passing the Color 0 3
NO
specified time process
display
from leaving control
J DAY When there is no 0: Disable 0 1
READY Enable
color job from of the
continuously Process 1
when the previous specified
(Time can be control
color process days
changed by Disable
control was judgment
INTERVAL TIME) BK 2 performed to 1 - 999: 1 - 999
process when the number 999 days
control of days set by this passing
Enable item setting,
Pixel 3 perform the
count process control
judgment when executing
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is Color 0 0 the next warming
made when process up.
turning ON the control
power and after Enable
passing Process 1
INTERVAL TIME. control
Disable
BK 2
process
control
Enable
Setting Setting
Item/Display Content Default Item/Display Content Default
range range
K HI-COV Setting of the The 0 1 N JOB Simplified process High 0 0
execution process control judgement density
conditions of the control is (During Job) process
process control for performed control :
the print ratio by Allow
considerin Engine
g the half-tone
average process
print ratio control :
of every Allow
10 pages High 1
as the density
judgment process
criteria. control :
Print ratio 1 Inhibit
judgment Engine
inhibit half-tone
(The process
process control :
control for Inhibit
the target High 2
of print density
ratio is not process
performed control :
.) Allow
The 2 Engine
process half-tone
control is process
performed control :
by Inhibit
considerin High 3
g the density
average process
print ratio control
of 30 :Inhibit
pages as Engine
the half-tone
judgment process
criteria in control :
a Allow
continuou O JOB_END Simplified process High 0 0
s print job control judgement density
of 30 or (After Job) process
more control :
pages. Allow
L LO-COV Setting of the Enable 0 1 Engine
execution Inhibit 1 half-tone
judgment of the process
process control in control :
continuous Allow
printing of low High 1
print ratio images density
M TonerCA- Setting of the Enable 0 1 process
END process control Inhibit 1 control :
interval reduction Allow
when the toner Engine
cartridge half-tone
remaining quantity process
is 25% or less (If control :
this is set to Inhibit
Enable, item M P AVERAGE- Setting of the 1: 10 1 3
RATIO is PAGE number of pages pages - 5: 5
changed.) of item 50 pages
1 step
correspon
ds to 10
pages.
Setting Setting
range range
Q LIMIT PAGE Setting of the 1: 10 1 10 A SHT_DIF Half tone engine execution 1 - 255 5
number of pages - C setting by simplified process
connected jobs of 99: 990 control result
the process pages A COLOR Judgment criteria 0: The BK 0 - 999 20
control and of the 1 step D BORDER whether the BK process
limit number of the correspon high density control is
process control ds to 10 process control is executed
A number of pages. 99 individually regardless
reservation jobs performed or not of the M
are connected. (Setting of the OPC drum
When the number ratio of the M OPC traveling
of jobs exceeds drum rotation distance.
the specified distance for the K 1 - 999: 1 -
number of pages OPC drum rotation 999(%)
(the set value of distance (%))
this setting), the A BK ONLY Setting of the Frequency 0 5
process control is E frequency of of once for
performed. / The execution of the 4- 5 times
process control is color high density Frequency 1-5
performed by AND process control of once for
conditions of item when only 1 - 5 times
REV condition and monochrome The 4- 6
the specified output is color high
number of pages continued (The density
(the set value of result of this process
this setting). setting is applied control is
R PIX_RATIO_ Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 10 only when the M always
BK the BK toner count specified OPC drum rotation performed
value distance is smaller .
The set value of 100 than the set value
corresponds to K print of A4 at of COLOR
the print ratio of 5%. BORDER.)
S PIX_RATIO_ Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 10 A HT_DIF HT process control execution 1 - 255 40
CL the color (CMY) toner count F judgment developing bias
specified value variation value
The set value of 100 A RG_ CL Setting of When the 0 0
corresponds to K print of A4 at G ON_ execution of the color
the print ratio of 5%. SYNC registration process
T INTERVAL Setting of the leaving time when 1 - 255 3 adjustment when control is
TIME turning ON the power (including executing the executed.
the sleep recovery time) (h: ALL process control Executed 1
hour) when turning ON regardless
U HUM HOUR Interval setting of the 1 - 24 2 the power of the
temperature and humidity process
monitoring time of "HUM" (unit: control.
10 minutes) CL/ When the 2
V HUM_DIF The specified value of the area 1-9 2 BK color
difference in humidity between process
the level at execution of the control
previous control and the current and the K
humidity (Applied to item HUM) process
W BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 15 control are
the specified value of the BK (Entry executed.
OPC drum traveling distance of of 20 A RG_TEMP_T Time interval from registration 0 - 240 0
"REV2_BK" corresp H IMER adjustment after turning ON the (MINU
onds to power to the next execution. TE)
100,00 AI RG_PERM_T Setting of inhibit time of 0 - 15 0
0mm.) IMER execution of the registration (HOUR
X M_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 15 adjustment )
the M OPC drum traveling (Entry A RG_HOUR_ Setting of the interval time of 0 - 15 6
distance of "REV2_CL" of 20 J TIMER execution of the registration (Above
corresp adjustment )+(HO
onds to UR)
100,00 A RG_BW_SY Setting of Enable/ Enable 0 1
0mm.) K NC Disable of the Inhibit 1
Y REV1_RATI Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 255 20 registration
O the REV1 OPC drum traveling adjustment after a
distance of "REV1" monochrome job
Z SHV_PAGE Simple process control 0 - 999 100 A RG_STATUS Setting of Inhibit 0 0
execution interval number L _SW registration Enable 1
A SHV_RATIO Simple process control 0 - 999 20 adjustment
A execution interval traveling sequence
number
A SHV_DIF Normal process control 1 - 255 60
B execution setting by simplified
process control result
Setting 44-37
range
A 2TRAN_CLE Secondary transfer cleaning 5 - 999 200 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
M AN_ process time judgment Function (Purpose) Set the development bias correction level in
TIME1 threshold value 1 (The total the continuous printing operation
number of sheets for cleaning
execution conditions) (Cleaning Section
time: Short) Operation/Procedure
A 2TRAN_CLE Secondary transfer cleaning 5 - 999 300 1) Select a set target color.
N AN_ process time judgment
TIME2 threshold value 2 (The total
number of sheets for cleaning 3) Enter the set value.
execution conditions) (Cleaning 4) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
time: Medium)
A 2TRAN_CLE Secondary transfer cleaning 5 - 999 500
O AN_ process time judgment
TIME3 threshold value 3 (The total When the print density is varied in the continuous printing opera-
number of sheets for cleaning tion, this simulation is used.
execution conditions) (Cleaning
time: Long) Item/Display Content Setting Default
A BLADE_CLE Blade refresh Enable 0 10 range
P AN_TIME interval setting Inhibit 1 - 99 Multi-grid bias Enable 0
MUL_M
A MC CLEAN MC cleaning Disable 0 0 A correction enable/ 1
C_ADJ Disable 1
Q DISP display setting Enable 1 disable setting
A MC CLEAN MC cleaning display interval 1 - 99 20 Multi-fusing bias Enable 0
MUL_DV
R DISP TIME setting B correction enable/ 0
_ADJ Disable 1
disable setting
44-29
44-43
Purpose Setting
Purpose Data display
Function (Purpose) Set the operating conditions of the process
control during a job Function (Purpose) Display the identification information of the
developing unit
Section Process
Section Developing system
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The identification number and the identification signal level of the
developing unit are displayed.
3) Tap [OK] key.

A COPY During copy job 0: No execution 2 44-62
1: HV only Purpose Setup/Adjustment
2: HV -> HT
B PRINTER During print job 2 Function (Purpose) Set the process control execution condi-
C FAX During FAX print job 2
tions
D SELF PRINT During self print 2 Section Process
E CPY TO PRT Halftone process 0:CALCULATED 0 Operation/Procedure
TABLE control copier - printer 1:DEFAULT This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of
conversion table select SIM44-4 and SIM44-28.
F HT RETRY Halftone process 20
control retry setting
A suitable one is selected among a number of options depending
G HT TARGET Halftone process 3
on the condition.
RETRY control standard value 1) Select an item to be set.
registration retry To change the image density in the high density area, select
PROCON TARGET.
HV: High density process control
To change the frequency of the process control operations,
HT: Halftone process control
select PROCON MODE.
44-31
Function (Purpose) Adjust the OPC drum phase (Manual
adjustment)
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simulation,
but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
Display/Item Content Setting Default
PROCON CL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, and Y decrease. range
TARGET (The C/M/Y high density process control A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
target values decrease.) HIGH 1 - 99 50
CL ID UP The densities of C, M, and Y increase. B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y high density process control HIGH 1 - 99 50
target values increase.) C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
BK ID DOWN The density of K decreases. (The high PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
density process control target value
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
decreases.)
HIGH 1 - 99 50
BK ID UP The density of K increases. (The high
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
density process control target value
increases.) HIGH 1 - 99 50
ALL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, Y and K decrease. F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process HIGH 1 - 99 50
control target values decrease.) G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
ALL ID UP The densities of C, M, Y and K increase. HIGH 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
control target values increase.) HIGH 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The standard density of C, M, Y and K. I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
control target values are the standard J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
values.) PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
PROCON HIGH QUALITY1 The execution frequency of the process COPY) document)
MODE control is high. (It is set when the color K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
image quality is given priority.) (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH QUALITY2 The execution frequency of the process document)
control is highest. (It is set when the color L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50
image quality is given priority.) TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
PRINT The execution frequency of the process ENHANCEMENT)
PERFORMANCE control is low. (It is set when the job M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
speed is given priority.) PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
BW MODE The process control is executed in the TONE (Color tone
normal frequency. (It is set when there ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
are little color jobs and many N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
monochrome jobs.) (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The process control is executed in the ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
normal frequency. O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(When PROCON TARGET is selected.)
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
2A) Select the density level. P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(When PROCON MODE is selected.) ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50
2B) Select the execution frequency of the process control.
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
4) Tap [YES] key. R LIGHT(COLOR LIGHT LOW 1 - 99 50
TONE DOCUMENT(Co HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) lor tone
enhancement)
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver- HIGH 1 - 99 50
sion. T SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
document)
U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
black) copy
46 V TWO COLOR 2-color (red/
HIGH
LOW
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
(COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
46-1 (copy document)
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode)

Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy density in the color copy
mode 46-2
Section Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy density in the monochrome
1) Select target item. copy mode
2) Enter the set value. Section
* When the key is tapped, the setting value of each item Operation/Procedure
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 1) Select target item.
3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 2) Enter the set value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is * When the key is tapped, the setting value of each item
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den- can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
sity is decreased.
3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Setting
Mode Item/Display Content Default
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is range
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den- HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
sity is decreased. B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
Setting PHOTO
range D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
LOW AUTO1 Auto 1 1 - 99 50 E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
A
HIGH 1 - 99 50 F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
LOW AUTO2 Auto 2 1 - 99 50 G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
B
HIGH 1 - 99 50 H RIP – 1 - 99 50
LOW AUTO3 Auto 3 1 - 99 50
C
HIGH 1 - 99 50
LOW TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
D 46-5
HIGH 1 - 99 50
LOW TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
E
HIGH PHOTO 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Adjust the density in the monochrome
LOW TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 50
F image send mode
HIGH Photograph 1 - 99 50
LOW PRINTED Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 Section
G
HIGH PHOTO 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
LOW PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 1) Select target item.
H
HIGH 1 - 99 50 2) Enter the set value.
LOW MAP MAP 1 - 99 50
I * When the key is tapped, the setting value of each item
HIGH 1 - 99 50
LOW AUTO1(COPY Auto 1 (Copy 1 - 99 50
J 3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
HIGH TO COPY) document) 1 - 99 50
LOW AUTO2(COPY Auto 2 (Copy 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
K
HIGH TO COPY) document) 1 - 99 50 increased, and vice versa.
LOW AUTO3(COPY Auto 3 (Copy 1 - 99 50
L Setting Default
HIGH TO COPY) document) 1 - 99 50 Mode Item/Display Content
LOW TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy 1 - 99 50 range
M LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
HIGH COPY) document) 1 - 99 50
LOW TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50 B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
N HIGH PHOTO(COPY Photo (Copy C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
1 - 99 50 PHOTO
TO COPY) document)
LOW PRINTED Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
O HIGH PHOTO(COPY (Copy E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
1 - 99 50
TO COPY) document) F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
LOW LIGHT Light document 1 - 99 50 G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
P
HIGH 1 - 99 50 H RIP – 1 - 99 50
HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
46-4 PHOTO
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Adjust the density in the color image send
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
mode
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
Section H RIP – 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value. 46-8
* When the key is tapped, the setting value of each item
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Adjust the RGB color balance in image
send mode
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa. Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting 1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys.
range
LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 3) Enter the set value.
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 4) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
PHOTO The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 area and the high density area.
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
target color is increased, and vice versa.
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
H RIP – 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content Default
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50
46-9 Setting
range
Purpose Adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) DSPF H BALANCE Color balance G 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Adjust the scan image density SIDEB: G
I BALANCE Color balance B 1 - 99 50
Section
SIDEB: B
Operation/Procedure
46-10
* When the key is tapped, the setting value of each item
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. Purpose Adjustment
3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy color balance and the
gamma (for each color copy mode)
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
mode, and the fax mode. Section
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is Operation/Procedure
increased, and vice versa. 1) Select an adjustment target mode.
[RSPF] 2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys.
Setting 3) Select target item.
range 4) Enter the set value.
A COPY : LOW Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48 * When the key is tapped, the setting value of each item
adjustment (Low density side) can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
B SCAN : LOW Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
C FAX : LOW FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
adjustment (Low density side) increased, and vice versa.
D COPY : HIGH Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (High density side) TEXT Text
E SCAN : HIGH Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53 TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
adjustment (Low density side) PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo
F FAX : HIGH FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53 PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
adjustment (high density) MAP Map
LIGHT Light document
[DSPF] COPY ORG Copy document
Setting
range Density level
Item/Display Setting range Default
OC A COPY Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 47 (Point)
SIDEA: LOW adjustment (Low A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
density side) B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
B SCAN Scanner mode 1 - 99 47 C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: LOW exposure adjustment
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
(Low density side)
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
C FAX SIDEA: FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 47
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
LOW adjustment (Low
density side) G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
D COPY Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 52 H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: HIGH adjustment (High I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
density side) J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
E SCAN Scanner mode 1 - 99 52 K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: HIGH exposure adjustment L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
(Low density side) M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
F FAX SIDEA: FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 52 N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
HIGH adjustment (high O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
density) P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
DSPF A COPY Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 47 Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
SIDEB: LOW adjustment (Low
density side)
B SCAN Scanner mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: LOW exposure adjustment
46-16
(Low density side)
C FAX SIDEB : FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 47 Purpose Adjustment
LOW adjustment (Low Function (Purpose) Adjust the monochrome copy density and
density side) the gamma (for each monochrome copy
D COPY Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 50 mode)
SIDEB: HIGH adjustment (High
density side) Section
E SCAN Scanner mode 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
SIDEB: HIGH exposure adjustment 1) Select target item.
(High density side)
F FAX SIDEB : FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 50
HIGH adjustment (high * When the key is tapped, the setting value of each item
density) can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
G BALANCE Color balance R 1 - 99 50 3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
SIDEB: R
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the check pattern in printed in the
increased, and vice versa. color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment value.
Density level Density level

Item/Display Setting range Default Item/Display Setting range Default
(Point) (Point)
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500 J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500 M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
46-19 46-23
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Set the operating conditions for the scan- Function (Purpose) Set the density correction of copy high den-
ning (exposure) density of monochrome sity section (high density tone gap sup-
auto copy mode documents ported)
Section Section
1) Select target item. 1) Enter the set value
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting
change is saved. 0 Enable
1 Inhibit
Item/Display Content Set value Default
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1 MODE2 2) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
MODE2
MODE3 Setting
range
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME PRESCAN
Stop (for copy) STOP A CMY 0 Engine highest density 0-1 0
PRESCAN (0: ENABLE correction mode:
1: DISABLE) Enable
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
Stop (for FAX) 1 Engine highest density
correction mode:
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME STOP
Disable
Stop (for scanner) STOP
PRESCAN B K 0 Engine highest density 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE correction mode:
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
1: DISABLE) Enable
setting NORMAL
SHARP 1 Engine highest density
correction mode:
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
Disable
PART
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET CYAN maximum density
correction
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
46-21
MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
Purpose Adjustment correction
Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy color balance (manual E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
adjustment) TARGET YELLOW maximum density
correction
Section F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure TARGET BLACK maximum density
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys. correction
G RATIO LOW Mix ratio of high density 0-100 0
2) Select target item. correction (LOW) (1/100)
3) Enter the set value. H RATIO HIGH Mix ratio of high density 0-100 0
* When the key is tapped, the setting value of each item correction (HIGH) (1/100)
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. I DITHER Dither threshold (LOW) 0-255 255
THRESHOLD
J SLOPE Slope threshold (HIGH) (1/ 100- 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is THRESHOLD 100) 500
increased, and vice versa.
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
46-26
and B to "0".
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone Purpose Adjustment
gap is better. Function (Purpose) Reset the single color mode color balance
* To increase the density in the high density area further, set items set value to the default
A and B to "1". Section
The tone gap may occur in high density part. Operation/Procedure
2) Tap [YES] key.
Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these values The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the
are changed, the density in the high density area is changed. default.
46-24 46-27
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy color balance (Auto adjust- Function (Purpose) Adjust the gamma/density of copy images,
ment) text and line image edges
Section Section
1) Tap [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select target item.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 2) Enter the set value.
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, 3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. Item/Display
Content
Setting Default
(Copy mode) range
The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed,
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
then the adjustment result pattern is printed.
(SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
4) Tap [OK] key. B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
The halftone correction target registration is processed. (INTERCEPT) density adjustment
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
46-25
(INTERCEPT) density adjustment
Purpose Adjustment E ED TEXT (SLOPE) Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy color balance (Single color skew adjustment (Text/
Map mode)
copy mode)
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
Section (INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map
Operation/Procedure mode)
1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys.
When the adjustment values of items A and C are changed, the
2) Select target item. gamma of character edge and line edge image density section is
3) Enter the set value. changed.
4) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment
target color is increased, and vice versa. value is decreased, the image contrast of text and line edge is
decreased.
Default When the adjustment values of items B and D are increased, the
Item/Display Setting range
C M Y image density of character edge and line edge section is
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200 decreased, and vice versa.
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
46-30
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
G ORANGE 0 - 255 0 150 255 Function (Purpose) Adjust the resolution in the sub scanning
H NAVY 0 - 255 255 200 0 direction in the copy mode
I LIGHT GREEN 0 - 255 150 0 150
Section
J LIGHT BLUE 0 - 255 150 20 0
K AQUA MARINE 0 - 255 170 0 50
Operation/Procedure
L PURPLE 0 - 255 128 255 0 1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre-
M PINK 0 - 255 0 150 20 sponding to the resolution mode.
N YELLOW GREEN 0 - 255 128 0 255 2) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
O BEIGE 0 - 255 0 50 170
Setting Default
range
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode1 0-1 0 0
RESOLUTION selection Mode2 1
SW
RSPF
46-36
Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)
Scan 25-99% 100-200% 201-400%
Mode
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification Function (Purpose) Adjust the colors in the two color copy
ratio] ratio] ratio] mode
Mode1 OC 600 600 600 Section
RSPF 600 600 -
Operation/Procedure
Mode2 OC 300 600 600
RSPF 300 600 -
DSPF 3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI) By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in
Scan 25-99% 100-200% 201-400% the 2-color copy mode can be performed.
Mode
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification
ratio] ratio] ratio] Default Defa
Mode1 OC 600 600 600 C M Y ult
DSPF 600 600 - OUTC A RED R output color 0 255 200 -
Mode2 OC 400 600 600 OLOR B GREEN G output color 255 0 255 -
DSPF 300 600 - C BLUE B output color 255 150 0 -
D CYAN C output color 255 0 0 -
E MAGENTA M output color 0 255 0 -
F YELLOW Y output color 0 0 255 -
46-32 G ORANGE O output color 0 150 255 -
Purpose Adjustment/Setup H NAVY N output color 255 200 0 -
I LIGHT LG output color 150 0 150 -
Function (Purpose) Adjust the document background density
GREEN
reproducibility in the monochrome auto
J LIGHT LB output color 150 20 0 -
copy mode BLUE
Section K AQUA AM output color 170 0 50 -
Operation/Procedure MARINE
L PURPLE PU output color 128 255 0 -
M PINK P output color 0 150 20 -
2) Enter the set value. N YELLOW YG output color 128 0 255 -
3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) GREEN
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the O BEIGE BE output color 0 50 170 -
background and the low density image is increased. When the CHR A RED / Red extraction - - - 3
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background OMA BLACK mode (The red
recognition area is
and the low density image is decreased.
adjusted.)
RSPF B KS:CHRO Chromatic color - - - 3
MATIC extraction mode
Setting Default
Item / Display Content (The chromatic
range value
color recognition
A COPY:OC Copy mode (OC) 1 - 250 196 area is adjusted.)
B COPY:RSPF Copy mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
C SCAN:OC Scanner mode (OC) 1 - 250 196
D SCAN:RSPF Scanner mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
E FAX:OC FAX mode (OC) 1 - 250 196 46-37
F FAX:RSPF FAX mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
DSPF Function (Purpose) Adjust the reproduction capability of color
document in the monochrome mode
Setting Default
Item / Display Content Section
range value
A COPY:OC Copy mode (OC) 1 - 250 196 Operation/Procedure
B COPY DSPF Copy mode (DSPF top side) 1 - 250 196 1) Select target item.
SIDE1)
C COPY DSPF Copy mode (DSPF back side) 1 - 250 196
SIDE2) 3) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
D SCAN:OC Scanner mode (OC) 1 - 250 196 4) Tap [YES] key.
E SCAN DSPF Scanner mode (DSPF top 1 - 250 196 This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow
SIDE1) side) images when copying color documents with red and yellow images
F SCAN DSPF Scanner mode (DSPF back 1 - 250 196 in the monochrome mode.
SIDE2) side)
G FAX:OC FAX mode (OC) 1 - 250 196 Item/Display Content Default
H FAX DSPF FAX mode (DSPF top side) 1 - 250 196 A R-Ratio Default Gray creation setting R 135
SIDE1)
B G-Ratio Default Gray creation setting G 805
I FAX DSPF FAX mode (DSPF back side) 1 - 250 196
C R-Ratio Fluorescence Gray creation setting R 243
SIDE2)
Fluorescence
D G-Ratio Fluorescence Gray creation setting G 354
Fluorescence
E R-Ratio RIP Print gray creation setting R 299
F G-Ratio RIP Print gray creation setting G 587
46-38 Item/Display Select Default
Content
(Copy mode) button
Purpose Adjustment/Setup AUTO AUTO (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
Function (Purpose) Adjust the black component amount in the (-) LUT1 judgment
color copy mode NORMAL
Section (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE.
46-39
3) Tap the black component amount select key.
This adjusts black component amount in the color copy mode. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(except character and line image) Function (Purpose) Adjust the sharpness of FAX send images
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part Section
changes. Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Select Default 1) Select target item.
Content
(Copy mode) button 2) Enter the set value.
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL 3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(-) LUT1 (Manual)
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
NORMAL
numeric value to decrease moire.
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 Setting
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL Item/Display Content Default
range
(-) LUT1 A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
NORMAL halftone OFF
(+) LUT1 B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT2 halftone OFF
PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual) halftone ON
NORMAL D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT1 halftone OFF
(+) LUT2 E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph/Text NORMAL
photograph F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
(-) LUT1
(Manual) halftone OFF
NORMAL
G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT1
halftone ON
(+) LUT2
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/Photograph NORMAL halftone OFF
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
NORMAL halftone ON
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1 46-40
NORMAL Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density (Collec-
CPY TO (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
tive adjustment of all the modes)
CPY/TXT (-) LUT1 Text printed Section
PRT NORMAL (Manual) Operation/Procedure
(+) LUT1 1) Set the document on the document table.
(+) LUT2
CPY TO (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
CPY/TEXT (-) LUT1 Text (Manual) 3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
NORMAL When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the adjustment value is set
(+) LUT1 and the scanned document image is outputted.
(+) LUT2
CPY TO (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL Setting
CPY/ (-) LUT1 Printed photo range
PHOTO NORMAL (Manual) A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50
LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective
(+) LUT1
adjustment of all the modes)
(+) LUT2
MANUAL LIGHT (-) LUT2 Pencil NORMAL
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1
NORMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
46-41 Setting Default
range
Purpose Adjustment/Setup M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1 1
Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density (Nor- MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 2
mal) Exposure 1
EXP2 Fine/ 3
Section
Exposure 2
Operation/Procedure EXP3 Fine/ 4
1) Set the document on the document table. Exposure 3
2) Enter the set value. EXP4 Fine/ 5
Exposure 4
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
EXP5 Fine/ 6
When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the adjustment value is set Exposure 5
and the scanned document image is outputted. AUTO Fine/ 7
H_TONE Automatic/
Setting Default halftone
range EXP1 Fine/ 8
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 1/
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Halftone
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 EXP2 Fine/ 9
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 2/
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Halftone
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 EXP3 Fine/ 10
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1 1 H_TONE Exposure 3/
MODE mode Exposure 1 Halftone
EXP1 2
EXP4 Fine/ 11
EXP2 Exposure 2 3
H_ONE Exposure 4/
EXP3 Exposure 3 4
Halftone
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
EXP5 Fine/ 12
EXP5 Exposure 5 6 H_TONE Exposure 5/
Halftone
46-42
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 46-43
Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density (Fine) Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Section Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density (Super
Operation/Procedure fine)
1) Set the document on the document table. Section
2) Enter the set value. Operation/Procedure
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 1) Set the document on the document table.
When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the adjustment value is set 2) Enter the set value.
and the scanned document image is outputted. 3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the adjustment value is set
Setting Default and the scanned document image is outputted.
range
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50 Setting
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content
range Default
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 2
Halftone D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 3
Halftone E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 4
Halftone F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 5
Halftone G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50 Auto/Halftone
Halftone H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1/Halftone
Halftone I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2/Halftone
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 3/Halftone
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 4/Halftone
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 5/Halftone
Setting Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range Default range
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine/ 1 1 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1 1
MODE mode Auto MODE mode Auto
EXP1 Super Fine/ 2 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
Exposure 1 Exposure 1
AUTO Super Fine/ 7 AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7
H_TONE Auto/ H_TONE Auto/
Halftone Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 1/ H_TONE Exposure 1/
Halftone Halftone
Halftone Halftone
Halftone Halftone
Halftone Halftone
Halftone Halftone
46-44 46-45
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density (Ultra Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density
fine) (600dpi)
Section Section
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Enter the set value. 2) Enter the set value.
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.
Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range range
A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/ 1 - 99 50 G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Halftone 1
H EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 1/Halftone Halftone
I EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
Setting Default 46-47
range
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/ 1 1 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
MODE mode Auto Function (Purpose) Set the compression rate of copy and scan
EXP1 600dpi/ 2 images (JPEG)
Exposure 1
Section
EXP2 600dpi/ 3
Exposure 2 Operation/Procedure
EXP3 600dpi/ 4 1) Select target item.
Exposure 3 2) Enter the set value.
EXP4 600dpi/ 5
Exposure 4
3) Tap [OK] key.
EXP5 600dpi/ 6 The set value is saved.
Exposure 5
AUTO 600dpi/ 7 Setting
Category Item/Display Content Default
H_TONE Auto/ range
Halftone FILLING A FILLING LOW Low
EXP1 600dpi/ 8 (COLOR) (C) compression 0
H_TONE Exposure (Color)
1/Halftone MIDDLE Medium
EXP2 600dpi/ 9 compression 1 0
2/Halftone HIGH High
EXP3 600dpi/ 10 compression 2
3/Halftone FILLING B FILLING LOW Low
EXP4 600dpi/ 11 (GRAY) (G) compression 0
H_TONE Exposure (Gray)
4/Halftone MIDDLE Medium
EXP5 600dpi/ 12 compression 1 0
H_TONE Exposure (Gray)
5/Halftone HIGH High
compression 2
(Gray)
PRINT C PRINT LOW Low
46-46 HOLD (C) compression 0
(COLOR) (Color)
MIDDLE Medium
Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density (RGB compression 1 0
RIP) (Color)
HIGH High
Section
compression 2
Operation/Procedure (Color)
1) Select target item. PRINT D PRINT LOW Low
2) Set the document on the document table. HOLD (G) compression 0
(GRAY) (Gray)
MIDDLE Medium
4) Tap [OK] key. compression 1 0
When the set value is increased, the density becomes higher. (Gray)
When the set value is decreased, the density becomes lower. HIGH High
compression 2
Setting (Gray)
PUSH E SCAN MIDDLE Medium
range
A STANDARD RIP For Normal/Halftone 1 - 99 50 SCAN (C) 1 compression 0
OFF mode (COLOR) mode 1
B FINE RIP For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50 (Scanner MIDDLE Medium
OFF mode Color) 2 compression 1 1
C FINE RIP H_TONE For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50 mode 2
ON mode MIDDLE Medium
D SUPER FINE RIP For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 3 compression 2
Halftone OFF mode mode 3
E SUPER FINE RIP For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 PUSH F SCAN MIDDLE Medium
H_TONE Halftone ON mode SCAN (G) 1 compression 0
(GRAY) mode 1
F ULTRA FINE RIP For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50
(Scanner MIDDLE Medium
Halftone OFF mode
Gray) 2 compression 1 1
G ULTRA FINE RIP For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50
mode 2
H_TONE Halftone ON mode
MIDDLE Medium
H 600DPI RIP For 600dpi/Halftone 1 - 99 50
3 compression 2
OFF mode
mode 3
I 600DPI RIP H_TONE For 600dpi/Halftone 1 - 99 50
ON mode
46-48 Density level
(Point)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Set the copy output resolution in the copy Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
mode
Section
1) Select target item Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Item Button display Content Default Function (Purpose) Set the gamma default for heavy paper in
AUTO 600DPI ED AUTO 600DPI DT copy mode and the image process mode
600DPI DT Section
TEXT/PRT PHOTO 600DPI ED Text/Printed 600DPI DT Operation/Procedure
600DPI DT Photo
1200DPI DT
TEXT/PHOTO 600DPI DT Text/ 600DPI DT To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
1200DPI DT Photograph 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
PRINTED PHOTO 600DPI DT Printed photo 1200DPI DT 3) Tap [YES] key.
1200DPI DT
PHOTO 600DPI DT Photograph 1200DPI DT Display Content
1200DPI DT Dither HEAVYPAPER Copier/Heavy paper gamma
BLACK EDGE Black edge
COLOR EDGE Color edge
B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
46-51 B/W 1200 Monochrome dither 1200dpi
Purpose Adjustment/Setup B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
B/W 600 LOW Monochrome dither 600dpi Low
Function (Purpose) Adjust the gamma for heavy paper in copy
WOVEN1 Watermark 1
mode and the image process mode
WOVEN2 Watermark 2
Section WOVEN3 Watermark 3
Operation/Procedure WOVEN4 Watermark 4
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [PAPER/DITHER].
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
touch panel.
46-54
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the engine halftone auto density
5) Tap [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key.
(Dither)
When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the self print image is output-
Section
ted.
Operation/Procedure
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust 1) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
the image density. The high density process control is started to make 48 patch
self print. (A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17") paper in the paper
Item/Display Content Color feed tray is used.)
HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma KCMY 2) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and tap
DITH1 Black edge K [EXECUTE] key.
DITH2 Color edge KCMY
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
DITH3 Color error diffusion KCMY
DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K After scanning the 48 patch self print, the 17 patch self print is
DITH7 Monochrome dither (1200dpi) K automatically printed.
DITH8 Monochrome dither (600dpi) K 3) Tap [OK] key.
DITH9 Monochrome dither (600dpi low) K After completion of the correction amount registration, the
screen shifts to the dither selection menu.
Density level 4) Select an item (dither) to be adjusted.
(Point)
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 HEAVYPAPER Copier/Heavy paper gamma
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 BLACK EDGE Black edge
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 COLOR EDGE Color edge
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 B/W 1200 Monochrome dither 1200dpi
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 B/W 600 LOW Monochrome dither 600dpi Low
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 WOVEN1 Watermark 1
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 WOVEN2 Watermark 2
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500 WOVEN3 Watermark 3
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 WOVEN4 Watermark 4
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 The 48 patch self print is printed.
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
6) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and tap Content Setting
[EXECUTE] key. Mode Item/Display Default
(copy mode) range
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started. COLOR K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0
PHOTO (copy ON 1
After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the
document)
dither selection menu.
MONO A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0
7) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment ON 1
items (dither), tap [OK] key. B TEXT Text OFF 0 1
ON 1
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0
46-55 ON 1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0
PHOTO ON 1
Function (Purpose) Adjust the drop out color in the image send E TEXT PHOTO Text OFF 0 0
mode (Monochrome manual text mode) photograph ON 1
Section F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0
Operation/Procedure ON 1
In the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode), the G MAP Map OFF 0 1
range where color images are reproduced as monochrome images ON 1
is adjusted. H LIGHT Light OFF 0 0
document ON 1
1) Enter the adjustment value and tap [OK] key.
I CPY TO CPY/ Auto (copy OFF 0 0
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout AUTO document) ON 1
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the J CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult TEXT document) ON 1
to widen the reproduction range. K CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0
TXT PRT (copy ON 1
Setting document)
range L CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3 PHOTO (copy ON 1
document)
2) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome
manual text mode), and check the adjustment result.
46-60
46-58 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy
Function (Purpose) Set the pseudo resolution (smoothing pro- mode
cess) in the copy mode Section
Section Operation/Procedure
1) Select target item. 2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
2) Enter the set value. process mode).
3) Tap [OK] key. 3) Tap [OK] key.
1(ON): 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
0 (OFF): 600 x 600 dpi and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.
The setting is reflected only the image edge area. Item/Display Content Setting Defa
range ult
Content Setting A SCREEN Sharpness setting of Strong 1 3
Mode Item/Display Default
(copy mode) range FILTER dot pattern image in emphasis
COLOR A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 LEVEL auto copy mode Soft 2
ON 1 emphasis
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 Auto 3
ON 1 B RGB Sharpness setting of SOFT 1 2
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0 FILTER RGB image in copy/ CENTER 2
ON 1 LEVEL push/fax mode HIGH 3
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 C CPY PUSH Sharpness setting for SOFT 1 2
PHOTO ON 1 AUTO the auto push scan CENTER 2
E TEXT PHOTO Text OFF 0 0 FILTER mode HIGH 3
photograph ON 1 LEVEL
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 D COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
ON 1 COPY: setting to CMY image ON 1
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 CMY in color copy mode
ON 1 E COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
COPY:K setting to K image in ON 1
H LIGHT Light OFF 0 0
color copy mode
document ON 1
F SINGLE Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1
COLOR: setting to CMY image ON 1
TEXT document) ON 1 CMY in single color copy
J CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0 mode
TXT PRT (copy ON 1
document)
Item/Display Content Setting Defa
range ult
COLOR AUTO [Color] Auto
G 2 COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
TPP [Color] Manual (Text print)
COPY: setting to CMY images ON 1
CMY in 2 color copy mode COPY(TPP and [Color] Copy document (Text print and
AUTO) auto)
H 2 COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
COPY: K setting to K images in 2 MONO AUTO [Gray/Monochrome] Auto
ON 1
color copy mode TPP [Gray/Monochrome] Manual (Text print)
I B/W COPY Soft filter applying OFF 0 1 COPY(TPP and [Gray/Monochrome] Copy document
setting to images in ON 1 AUTO) (Text print and auto)
monochrome copy
mode Setting
J COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1 Item/Display Content Default
range
PUSH: setting to images in ON 1 SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
RGB push scan color mode A 0-1 0
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot
K B/W PUSH Soft filter applying OFF 0 1 SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
setting to images in ON 1 B 0-1 0
[LINE SCR] line screen
push scan
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
monochrome mode C 0-1 0
[SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area
L COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
Detection ON/OFF:
PRINT: setting to color print ON 1 SEGMENT: SWITCH
D High line number 0-1 0
CMY CMY images [HIGH LPI]
judgment select
M COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
PRINT: K setting to color print K ON 1 E [TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send 0-1 0
images
SEND] dots
N B/W PRINT Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
Detection level
setting to monochrome ON 1 SEGMENT: ADJUST
F adjustment: Black 1 - 99 50
print images [BK TXT 1]
text 1
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
G adjustment: Color 1 - 99 50
[CL TXT 1]
text 1
46-61
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Purpose Adjustment/Setup H adjustment: Black 1 - 49 25
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2]
text 2, Color text 2
Function (Purpose) Adjust the area separation recognition level
Detection level
Section SEGMENT: ADJUST
I adjustment: Thine 1 - 99 50
[THIN LINE]
Operation/Procedure line
1) Select an adjustment mode. Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
J adjustment: Text 1 1 - 99 50
2) Select target item. [TXT ON SCR 1]
on dots
3) Enter the adjustment value. Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
4) Tap [OK] key. K adjustment: Text 2 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR 2]
on dots
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment:
This Sim is overwritten by changing Image “Quality Adjustment” -> L 1 - 15 8
[TXT ON SCR AREA 1] Detection area 1 of
“Copy Image Quality” -> “Image Quality Priority”. text on dots
(It is overwritten just by pressing the “Store” on screen without Detection level
changing the setting.) SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment:
M 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR AREA 2] Detection area 2 of
Make sure to set corresponding item Z to “1” after changing the text on dots
value. Detection level
Then the adjustment of “Image Quality Priority” in System Settings SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment: High
N 1 - 49 25
will be invalidated. (The adjustment itself is allowed from UI point of [HIGH LPI] line number
view however, the image quality won’t change because the setting judgment
won’t be reflected to the Sim.) Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
O adjustment: No 1 - 99 50
- When “AUTO” in “COLOR” or “MONO” has been adjusted: [BK]
chrome judgment
Go to COLOR -> AUTO -> and set Z to 1…. Image Quality Priority Detection level
“Auto” will be invalidated. SEGMENT: ADJUST
P adjustment: Chrome 1 - 99 50
[CL]
- When “TPP” or “COPY (AUTO&TPP)” in “COLOR” or ”MONO” judgment
has been adjusted: Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Q adjustment: Text on 1 - 99 50
Go to COLOR -> TPP -> and set Z to 1…. Image Quality Priority [TXT ON BG]
background
“Text/Prtd.Photo” will be invalidated.
Detection level
(The item Z is not available in “MONO” and “COPY (AUTO&TPP)”) SEGMENT: ADJUST
R adjustment: High 1 - 49 25
[SCR 1 HIGH]
The adjustment of “MONO” -> “TPP” will affect FAX. density dots 1
This must be set to the default unless any change is specially Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
S adjustment: Medium 1 - 49 25
required. [SCR 1 MIDDLE]
density dots 1
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from Detection level
the default, image quality trouble may occur for some documents. SEGMENT: ADJUST
T adjustment: Low 1 - 49 25
[SCR 1 LOW]
density dots 1
SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level
U 1 - 15 8
[SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2
SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level
V 1 - 15 8
[SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3
Setting Setting
range range
Detection level N AE AE mode ON/OFF ON 0 0
SEGMENT: ADJUST
W adjustment: line 1 - 49 25 _ONOFF_MC switch: OFF 1
[LINE HALFTONE]
screen For mono-chrome
Detection level copy
SEGMENT: ADJUST
X adjustment: Small 1 - 49 25 O AE AE mode ON/OFF ON 0 0
[SMALL SCR 1]
Dot Area 1 _ONOFF_CS switch : OFF 1
Detection level For color scan
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Y adjustment: Small 1 - 99 50 P AE AE mode ON/OFF ON 0 0
[SMALL SCR 2]
Dot Area 2 _ONOFF_MS switch : OFF 1
Image Quality For mono-chrome
SEGMENT: SWITCH Priority ON/OFF : copy
Z 0-1 0
[LOCK] Image Quality Q BLANK_JUDGE Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
Priority lock _LV_L adjustment (value)
R BLANK_JUDGE Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
_LV_C adjustment (chroma)
S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing paper 0-6 0
46-62 mode select
Purpose Adjustment/Setup T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing paper 0-6 0
mode select
Function (Purpose) Set the operating condition of the ACS, the U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing paper 0-6 0
area separation, the background image mode select
process and the auto exposure mode V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing paper 0-6 0
Section mode select
Operation/Procedure W SW_CHANGE_ Mode 0: Mode judgment 0-6 0
MODE0 select
1) Select target item. X SW_CHANGE_ Mode 1: Mode judgment 0-6 1
2) Enter the adjustment value. MODE1 select
3) Tap [OK] key. Y SW_CHANGE_ Mode 2: Mode judgment 0-6 2
MODE2 select
Z SW_CHANGE_ Mode 3: Mode judgment 0-6 3
MODE3 select
This must be set to the default unless any change is specially AA SW_CHANGE_ Mode 4: Mode judgment 0-6 4
required. MODE4 select
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from AB SW_CHANGE_ Mode 5: Mode judgment 0-6 5
the default, image quality trouble may occur for some documents. MODE5 select
AC SW_CHANGE_ Mode 6: Mode judgment 0-6 6
Setting MODE6 select
range
A SW_ACS ACS judgment reference 0-1 1
area select
B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3 46-63
priority level adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setup
C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
priority level adjustment Function (Purpose) Adjust the density in the copy low density
D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1 section
threshold value Section
adjustment
Operation/Procedure
E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment target 0-6 3
area adjustment 1) Select target item.
F AE_LV_CC AE background detection 0-8 4 2) Enter the adjustment value.
division result adjustment: 3) Tap [OK] key.
For color copy
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
G AE_LV_MC AE background detection 0-8 4
background and the low density image is increased. When the
division result adjustment:
For monochrome copy adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
H AE_LV_CS AE background detection 0-8 4 and the low density image is decreased.
division result adjustment:
For color scan Setting
range
I AE_LV_MS AE background detection 0-8 4
division result adjustment: A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
For monochrome scan TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0 B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
_LV_L_U density threshold value C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
adjustment (lower limit) PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0 D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
LV_L_O density threshold value PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
adjustment (upper limit) E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5 TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
LV_C detection level adjustment F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
(chroma) G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
M AE AE mode ON/OFF ON 0 0 (color density)
_ONOFF_CC switch: OFF 1 H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
For color copy TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Character print
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
Setting Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
range range
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5 OC COPY O AUTO4 Automatic
(COPY TO COPY) Character mode 0 - 12 0
(color copy) judgment 4
J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5 P AUTO5 Automatic
PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Printed photo mode 0 - 12 0
TO COPY) (color copy) judgment 5
K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 5 Q AUTO6 Automatic
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH) mode 0 - 12 0
L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 5 judgment 6
M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5 PREVI A TEXT Text print
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH) EW PRINTED 0 - 12 0
N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5 PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH) B TEXT Text 0 - 12 3
O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 5 C PRINTED Printed
0 - 12 0
TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH) PHOTO Photo
P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5 D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 1
E TEXT Text
0 - 12 1
PHOTO photograph
F MAP Map 0 - 12 3
46-65 G LIGHT Pencil
0 - 12 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup ORIGINAL
H COPY TO Copy
Function (Purpose) Set the color correction table COPY/ document/
Section TEXT Text print 0 - 12 2
PRINTED
Operation/Procedure
PHOTO
1) Select an adjustment mode. I COPY TO Copy
2) Select target item. COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 3
3) Enter the adjustment value. TEXT Text
J COPY TO Copy
4) Tap [OK] key. COPY/ document/
0 - 12 2
When the setting is changed, the color tone is changed. This func- PHOTO Printed
tion is used to make copies of different color tone for each copy Photo
mode. K AUTO0 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 0
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
judgment 0
Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default L AUTO1 Automatic
range mode 0 - 12 0
judgment 1
OC COPY A TEXT Text print
PRINTED 0 - 12 0 M AUTO2 Automatic
PHOTO mode 0 - 12 1
judgment 2
B TEXT Text 0 - 12 3
N AUTO3 Automatic
C PRINTED Printed
0 - 12 0 mode 0 - 12 1
PHOTO Photo
judgment 3
D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 1
O AUTO4 Automatic
E TEXT Text
0 - 12 1 mode 0 - 12 0
PHOTO photograph
judgment 4
F MAP Map 0 - 12 3
P AUTO5 Automatic
G LIGHT Pencil mode 0 - 12 0
0 - 12 0
ORIGINAL judgment 5
H COPY TO Copy Q AUTO6 Automatic
COPY/ document/ mode 0 - 12 0
TEXT Text print 0 - 12 2 judgment 6
PRINTED
SPF1 COPY A TEXT Text print
PHOTO
(Docume PRINTED 0 - 12 4
I COPY TO Copy nt feeder PHOTO
COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 3 (RSPF)/ B TEXT Text 0 - 12 7
TEXT Text (DSPF)To C PRINTED Printed
J COPY TO Copy p) 0 - 12 4
PHOTO Photo
COPY/ document/
0 - 12 2 D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 5
PHOTO Printed
Photo E TEXT Text
0 - 12 5
PHOTO photograph
K AUTO0 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 0 F MAP Map 0 - 12 7
judgment 0 G LIGHT Pencil
0 - 12 4
L AUTO1 Automatic ORIGINAL
mode 0 - 12 0 H COPY TO Copy
judgment 1 COPY/ document/
M AUTO2 Automatic TEXT Text print 0 - 12 6
mode 0 - 12 1 PRINTED
judgment 2 PHOTO
N AUTO3 Automatic I COPY TO Copy
mode 0 - 12 1 COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 7
judgment 3 TEXT Text
Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
range range
SPF1 COPY J COPY TO Copy SPF2(Do COPY A TEXT Text print
(Docume COPY/ document/ cument PRINTED 0 - 12 8
0 - 12 6
nt feeder PHOTO Printed feeder PHOTO
(RSPF)/ Photo (DSPF) B TEXT Text 0 - 12 11
(DSPF)To K AUTO0 Automatic Back) C PRINTED Printed
p) mode 0 - 12 4 0 - 12 8
PHOTO Photo
judgment 0 D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 9
L AUTO1 Automatic E TEXT Text
mode 0 - 12 4 0 - 12 9
PHOTO photograph
judgment 1 F MAP Map 0 - 12 11
M AUTO2 Automatic G LIGHT Pencil
mode 0 - 12 5 0 - 12 8
ORIGINAL
judgment 2
H COPY TO Copy
N AUTO3 Automatic COPY/ document/
mode 0 - 12 5 TEXT Text print 0 - 12 10
judgment 3 PRINTED
O AUTO4 Automatic PHOTO
mode 0 - 12 4 I COPY TO Copy
judgment 4 COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 11
P AUTO5 Automatic TEXT Text
mode 0 - 12 4 J COPY TO Copy
Q AUTO6 Automatic 0 - 12 10
PHOTO Printed
mode 0 - 12 4 Photo
judgment 6 K AUTO0 Automatic
PREVI A TEXT Text print mode 0 - 12 8
EW PRINTED 0 - 12 4 judgment 0
PHOTO L AUTO1 Automatic
B TEXT Text 0 - 12 7 mode 0 - 12 8
C PRINTED Printed judgment 1
0 - 12 4
PHOTO Photo M AUTO2 Automatic
D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 5 mode 0 - 12 9
E TEXT Text judgment 2
0 - 12 5
PHOTO photograph N AUTO3 Automatic
F MAP Map 0 - 12 7 mode 0 - 12 9
G LIGHT Pencil judgment 3
0 - 12 4
ORIGINAL O AUTO4 Automatic
H COPY TO Copy mode 0 - 12 8
COPY/ document/ judgment 4
TEXT Text print 0 - 12 6 P AUTO5 Automatic
PRINTED mode 0 - 12 8
PHOTO judgment 5
I COPY TO Copy Q AUTO6 Automatic
COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 7 mode 0 - 12 8
TEXT Text judgment 6
J COPY TO Copy SPF2(Do PREVI A TEXT Text print
COPY/ document/ cument EW PRINTED 0 - 12 8
0 - 12 6
PHOTO Printed feeder PHOTO
Photo (DSPF) B TEXT Text 0 - 12 11
K AUTO0 Automatic Back) C PRINTED Printed
0 - 12 8
mode 0 - 12 4 PHOTO Photo
judgment 0 D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 9
L AUTO1 Automatic E TEXT Text
mode 0 - 12 4 0 - 12 9
PHOTO photograph
judgment 1 F MAP Map 0 - 12 11
M AUTO2 Automatic G LIGHT Pencil
mode 0 - 12 5 0 - 12 8
ORIGINAL
judgment 2
H COPY TO Copy
N AUTO3 Automatic COPY/ document/
mode 0 - 12 5 TEXT Text print 0 - 12 10
judgment 3 PRINTED
O AUTO4 Automatic PHOTO
mode 0 - 12 4 I COPY TO Copy
judgment 4 COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 11
P AUTO5 Automatic TEXT Text
mode 0 - 12 4 J COPY TO Copy
Q AUTO6 Automatic 0 - 12 10
PHOTO Printed
mode 0 - 12 4 Photo
judgment 6 K AUTO0 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 0
L AUTO1 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 1
Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
range
SPF2(Do PREVI M AUTO2 Automatic
cument EW mode 0 - 12 9
feeder judgment 2
(DSPF) N AUTO3 Automatic
Back) mode 0 - 12 9
judgment 3
O AUTO4 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 4
P AUTO5 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 5
Q AUTO6 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 6
46-66
Function (Purpose) Adjust the reproduction capability of water-
marks in the copy/printer mode
Section
Operation/Procedure
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the
copy/printer mode.
1) Select the adjustment mode.
3) Enter the adjustment value and tap [OK] key.
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.
Setting
Category Item/Display Content Default NOTE
range
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is changed to
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19 increase or decrease the density of the
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23 watermark of background documents
D WOVEN DEN C LOW Watermark density level (Cyan LOW) 0 - 255 19 (primary output).
To increase the watermark density,
E WOVEN DEN C MIDDLE Watermark density level (Cyan MIDDLE) 0 - 255 23
increase the adjustment value.
F WOVEN DEN C HIGH Watermark density level (Cyan HIGH) 0 - 255 27
To decrease the watermark density,
G WOVEN DEN M LOW Watermark density level (Magenta LOW) 0 - 255 15 decrease the adjustment value.
H WOVEN DEN M MIDDLE Watermark density level (Magenta MIDDLE) 0 - 255 18 NOTE:
I WOVEN DEN M HIGH Watermark density level (Magenta HIGH) 0 - 255 21 When the adjustment value is increased,
the watermark area which is originally not
reproduced becomes difficult to
disappear.
When the adjustment value is decreased,
the watermark area which is originally
reproduced becomes easy to disappear.
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the variation in the
watermark density when the adjustment
value of the watermark print/contrast
adjustment in the system setting is
changed by 1.
When this value is increased, the
variation is also increased. When the
value is decreased, the variation is also
decreased.
When the adjustment value is 0, the
result of the contrast adjustment is not
reflected. (* The adjustment value must
be set to 1 or greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For halftone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For halftone index watermark type negative 42 - 43 42 watermark copy (secondary output) more
clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the containing
characters of the watermark document
(primary output) can be easily
reproduced.
Setting
Category Item/Display Content Default NOTE
range
COPY A TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo mode OFF 0 1 Normally set to the default.
MODE select Enable/Disable ON 1 No need to change in the market.
B TEXT Text mode select Enable/ OFF 0 1
Disable ON 1
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode select OFF 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
D PHOTOGRAPH Photograph mode select OFF 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph mode OFF 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
F MAP Map mode select Enable/ OFF 0 1
Disable ON 1
G LIGHT Light density document OFF 0 1
mode select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
H TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0 1
(CPY TO CPY) Disable of selection of the ON 1
text print mode
I TEXT (CPY TO CPY) Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0 1
Disable of selection of the ON 1
text mode
J PRINTED PHOTO (CPY Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0 1
TO CPY) Disable of selection of the ON 1
printed photo mode
K AUTO Automatic mode select OFF 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
L DEFAULT MODE When the default exposure TEXT/ 0 0
mode background is ON, PRINTED
the exposure mode to be PHOTO
set is specified. TEXT 1
PRINTED 2
PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH 3
TEXT/PHOTO 4
MAP 5
POSITION A LINE SPACE 1 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 50
(24P - 36P)
B LINE SPACE 2 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 60
(37P - 48P)
C LINE SPACE 3 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 70
(49P - 64P)
D LINE SPACE 4 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 80
(65P - 80P)
E BLANK H/B 1 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark 0 - 200 25
print box (24P - 36P)
F BLANK H/B 2 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark 0 - 200 30
G BLANK H/B 3 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark 0 - 200 35
H BLANK H/B 4 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark 0 - 200 40
I BLANK L/R 1 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 60
J BLANK L/R 2 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 90
K BLANK L/R 3 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 120
L BLANK L/R 4 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 150
46-68
Purpose Adjustment/Setup The adjustment result becomes effective only when the adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the auto resolution judgement procedure for both copy and print mode have completed success-
Section fully. For example, when the copy color balance adjustment (auto-
matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the
Operation/Procedure
adjustment result is not effective.
2) Enter the adjustment value.
3) Tap [OK] key. 46-90
Setting Purpose Adjustment
range Function (Purpose) Set the process operation of high compres-
AUTO A RESULT HIGH High resolution 0-3 3 sion PDF images
RESO RESOLUTION
LUTIO Section
B RESULT MID Slight high 0-3 2
N RESOLUTION1 resolution Operation/Procedure
C RESULT MID Slight low 0-3 1 1) Select a target adjustment mode.
RESOLUTION2 resolution
D RESULT LOW Low resolution 0-3 1
RESOLUTION1 3) Enter the set value.
E RESOLUT Non 0-3 1 4) Tap [OK] key. The set value is saved.
UNKNOWN judgemental
RESOLUTION Setting
F LANGUAGE Language 0-1 0 range
SEL setting COLOR A LUMINANCE Luminance setting 0-4 2
G AUTO Auto resolution 0-2 1 ADJUSTMENT
RESOLUTION judgement B CHROMA Chroma setting 0-2 1
MODE mode INTENT
SKEW A MAX DEGREE Maximum skew 20 - 4500 300 BG A BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1
DETE detection LAYER INTENT 1 setting
CTION B MIN DEGREE Minimum skew 20 - 4500 20 B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1
detection INTENT 2 priority setting
C VOID AREA Void area skew 0 - 100 10 SOFT A SKEW Skew correction 0-1 0
detection CIC CORRECTION setting
B FILTER Filter setting 0-1 0
C CIC MODE Compression 0-1 0
mode setting
46-74 D OUTPUT Resolution setting 0-1 0
RESOLUTION
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust copy color balance (Auto) / printer
color balance (Auto)
Section 46-91
Operation/Procedure Purpose Adjustment
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin- Function (Purpose) Adjust the reproduction capability of black
uously. text
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic Section
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic Operation/Procedure
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
1) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is
printed. 3) Tap [OK] key. The adjustment value is set.
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, Item/Display Content Setting Default
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. range
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment is A SEGMENT Area COPY/PUSH 0 0
performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed. PARAM separation common
setting Compression 1
4) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjustment
pattern is printed. B BG:JPEG JPEG Low 0 1
QUALITY LV recompression Middle 1
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, [COL:COMP level setting High 2
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. ACT] Color High
6) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjustment compression
(automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment result mode
pattern is printed. C BG:JPEG JPEG Low 0 1
QUALITY LV recompression Middle 1
7) Tap [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered.
[COL:ULTRA level setting High 2
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, tap it. FINE] Color Ultra fine
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust- mode
ment is completed.
Item/Display Content Setting Default Setting
range range
D BG:JPEG JPEG Low 0 1 D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
QUALITY LV recompression Middle 1 magnification ratio adjustment
[GRY:COMP level setting High 2 (Sub scan)
ACT] Gray High E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
compression magnification ratio adjustment
mode (Main scan)
E BG:JPEG JPEG Low 0 1 F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
QUALITY LV recompression Middle 1 magnification ratio adjustment
[GRY:ULTRA level setting High 2 (Sub scan)
FINE] Gray Ultra fine G COPY Copy magnification ratio 1-7 4
mode CORRECTIO correction (Sub scan)
F FG:TARGET Front ground Type0 0 0 N (SUB)
AREA extraction area Type1 1
setting Type2 2 [DSPF]
G FG:TEXT Front ground Dark 0 5 Setting
DENSITY black text Light 10 range
[COL] density setting A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
Color magnification ratio adjustment
H FG:TEXT Front ground Dark 0 5 (CCD)
DENSITY black text Light 10 B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
[GRY] density setting magnification ratio adjustment
Gray (CCD)
I ULTRA FINE Mode setting High 0 0 C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
MODE compression magnification ratio adjustment
Ultra fine 1 (Main scan)
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
magnification ratio adjustment
cially required. (Sub scan)
When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the ini- E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
tial value, an image quality trouble may occur. magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan)
F COPY Copy magnification ratio 1-7 4
CORRECTIO correction (Sub scan)
N (SUB)
48
48-1
48-5
Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the scan image magnification ratio
(Main scanning direction and Sub scanning Function (Purpose) Adjust the scan image magnification ratio
direction) (Sub scanning direction)
Section Section Scanner section

1) Select target item. 1) Select target item.
2) Enter the set value. 2) Enter the set value.
3) Tap [OK] key. 3) Tap [OK] key.
The set value is saved. The set value is saved.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
ratio is increased. adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
this adjustment.
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
[RSPF] the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default Setting
range Item/Display Content Default
range
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
(CCD) B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(CCD) (High speed)
C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment (Reference speed)
(Main scan)
range value
Purpose Adjustment N RRM- RRM acceleration ratio 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Adjust the rotation speed of each motor OFFSET
O COR-PP Paper transport motors all 1 - 99 50
Section
correction value
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [MID] [LOW A] [LOW B] LOW B HEAVY PAPER 3
LOW C] keys. Setting Default
2) Select target item. range value
3) Enter the set value. A RRM Registration motor correction 1 - 99 46
(COLOR/ value
4) Tap [OK] key. MONO)
The set value is saved. B FUM Fusing motor correction value 1 - 99 39
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased, C CPFM Paper feed motor correction 1 - 99 50
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds value
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed. D PFM Transport motor correction 1 - 99 50
value
MID E POM Paper exit motor correction 1 - 99 50
value
Setting Default
Item/Display Content F SBM Reverse motor correction value 1 - 99 50
range value
A RRM Registration motor correction 1 - 99 53 G POM (OUT) Paper exit motor correction 1 - 99 50
(COLOR) value (Color mode) value (From tray exit)
B RRM Registration motor correction 1 - 99 53 H SBM (OUT) Reverse motor correction value 1 - 99 50
(MONO) value (Monochrome mode) (From tray exit)
C BTM Transfer belt motor correction 1 - 99 47 I ADUM1 ADU motor 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
value (OUT) (From right tray exit)
D DM-K Drum motor K correction value 1 - 99 45 J FUSER- Fusing speed switch timing 1 - 99 50
SETTING value
E DM-CL Drum motor CL correction value 1 - 99 45
K FS-OFFSET FUM acceleration ratio 1 - 99 70
F FUM Fusing motor correction value 1 - 99 37
L RRM-START RRM acceleration start timing 0 - 255 150
G CPFM Paper feed motor correction 1 - 99 50
value M RRM-END RRM acceleration end timing 0 - 255 200
H PFM Transport motor correction 1 - 99 50 N RRM- RRM acceleration ratio 1 - 99 50
value OFFSET
I POM Paper exit motor correction 1 - 99 50 O COR-PP Paper transport motors all 1 - 99 50
value correction value
J SBM Reverse motor correction value 1 - 99 50
LOW C HEAVY PAPER 4
K POM (OUT) Paper exit motor correction 1 - 99 50
value (From tray exit) Setting Default
L SBM (OUT) Reverse motor correction value 1 - 99 50 range value
(From tray exit) A RRM Registration motor correction 1 - 99 46
M ADUM1 ADU motor 1 correction value 1 - 99 50 (COLOR/ value
(OUT) (From right tray exit) MONO)
N COR-IM Image process motors all 1 - 99 50 B FUM Fusing motor correction value 1 - 99 39
correction value C CPFM Paper feed motor correction 1 - 99 50
O COR-PP Paper transport motors all 1 - 99 50 value
correction value D PFM Transport motor correction 1 - 99 50
value
LOW A HEAVY PAPER 1,2 E POM Paper exit motor correction 1 - 99 50
value
Setting Default
Item/Display Content F SBM Reverse motor correction value 1 - 99 50
range value
A RRM Registration motor correction 1 - 99 46 G POM (OUT) Paper exit motor correction 1 - 99 50
(COLOR/ value value (From tray exit)
MONO) H SBM (OUT) Reverse motor correction value 1 - 99 50
B FUM Fusing motor correction value 1 - 99 39 (From tray exit)
C CPFM Paper feed motor correction 1 - 99 50 I ADUM1 ADU motor 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
value (OUT) (From right tray exit)
D PFM Transport motor correction 1 - 99 50 J FUSER- Fusing speed switch timing 1 - 99 50
value SETTING value
E POM Paper exit motor correction 1 - 99 50 K FS-OFFSET FUM acceleration ratio 1 - 99 70
value L RRM-START RRM acceleration start timing 0 - 255 150
F SBM Reverse motor correction value 1 - 99 50 M RRM-END RRM acceleration end timing 0 - 255 200
G POM (OUT) Paper exit motor correction 1 - 99 50 N RRM- RRM acceleration ratio 1 - 99 50
value (From tray exit) OFFSET
H SBM (OUT) Reverse motor correction value 1 - 99 50 O COR-PP Paper transport motors all 1 - 99 50
(From tray exit) correction value
I ADUM1 ADU motor 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
(OUT) (From right tray exit) The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and
J FUSER- Fusing speed switch timing 1 - 99 50 vice versa. Change by +/-1 corresponds to 0.1%.
SETTING value
K FS-OFFSET FUM acceleration ratio 1 - 99 70
L RRM-START RRM acceleration start timing 0 - 255 150
M RRM-END RRM acceleration end timing 0 - 255 200
OCR
49 Voice
49-1
Purpose Data upload
50
Function (Purpose) Update the firmware
50-1
Section
Purpose Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Adjust the Copy image position and the
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
image loss
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
Section
operation panel section.)
Operation/Procedure
3) Select a target firmware file for update.
4) Select a target firmware.
Tap [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
default.
6) Tap [YES] key.
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
The selected firmware is updated. When the operation is nor-
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
mally completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated
abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
Item/Display Content Error display
UPSIDE BUNDLE Bundle version (Upper) UPBDL Setting
BOTTOM BUNDLE Bundle version (Lower) BTMBDL range
ICU-MAIN ICUM main program ICUM A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
ICU-BIOS ICUM sub program ICUB edge edge reference
ICU-LOGO ICU logo data DtLogo adjust- position (OC)
ment
ASIC-MAIN ASIC main program ASICM
value
ASIC-SUB ASIC sub program ASICS
B Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
IMAGE DATA Image process data IMG
loss area loss area setting
LANGUAGE Language support data program LANG setting
C SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
LANGUAGE(LIST) List print language data LANGL value area adjustment
EOSA Embedded OSA program EOSA D Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 40
UICONTENTS UI display program UICON adjust- area adjustment
SIM-TEXT Simulation language data SIMT E ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30
PCL (PROFILE) PCL color profile PCLP area adjustment
SCU SCU program SCU F FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 23
DSPF DSPF program DSPF REAR area adjustment
PCU PCU program PCU G Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
DESK Desk unit program DESK adjust- OC center adjustment
DESK(TANDEM) Tandem desk unit program DESKT ment
LCC LCC program LCC H Magnificat SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
FINISHER(1KFIN) 1K Finisher program FIN1 ion ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio
correc- OC adjustment (CCD)
FINISHER(3KFIN) 3K Finisher program FIN3M
tion
FINISHER(INNER) Inner finisher program INFIN
I Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
FIN-SUB 3K Finisher sub program FINS
scanning correction value
SADDLE Saddle program SDL direction
J DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
PUNCH(3K) 3K Punch unit program 3PUN print area value
PUNCH(IN) Inner punch unit program INPUN K correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
FAX Standard FAX program FAX value value
FAX OPT1 Optional FAX 1st line program FXOT1 L DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value
M DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
49-7 N DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
Purpose Data upload value
O DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Update the pre-installed firmware value
Section P DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure correction value
1) Insert USB drive into main unit. A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying
2) Select target folder for update. the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)
Current version and new version are displayed. * When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. the value is increased, the timing is delayed.
4) Tap [YES] key. B. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
Update is processed. step)
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
E-manual C. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
Watermark
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
(0.1mm/step) paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
D. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ adjustment value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead
step) edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
E. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ about 0.1mm.
step)
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
50-6
F. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy image position and the
image loss (SPF)
50-5 Section SPF
Purpose Adjustment Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Adjust the print lead edge image position in 1) Select target item.
the printer mode 2) Enter the set value.
Section 3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Operation/Procedure [RSPF]
Setting
2) Enter the adjustment value. Item/Display Content Default
range
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
position
printed.
adjustment (CCD)
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is document scan
in the standard adjustment value range. position
Standard reference value: 4.0 +/- 2.0mm adjustment (CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the amount amount setting
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased. setting
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by SIDE1
about 0.1mm. D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) image loss amount
Setting Default amount setting
range E setting TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print lead 1 - 99 30 SIDE1 (SIDE1) edge image loss
edge image position. amount setting
(PRINTER MODE) F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
adjustment amount amount setting
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 23 G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
adjustment SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50 setting
area adjustment correction H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 40
value (SIDE2) edge image loss
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 amount setting
adjustment correction value I OFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 document off-
adjustment correction value center adjustment
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 J OFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value surface document
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 off-center
adjustment correction value adjustment
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50 K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value front surface
magnification ratio
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
(Sub scan)
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction 1 - 99 50
back surface
value
magnification ratio
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
(Sub scan)
M PAPER MFT Tray Manual paper 1 2
selection feed Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
CS1 Tray 1 2 is delayed.
CS2 Tray 2 3
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
CS3 Tray 3 4
is increased.
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6 Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
N DUPLE YES Duplex Yes 0 1 increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
X NO print No 1 All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
selection
[DSPF] Setting
Setting range
Item/Display Content Default D MAIN-MFT Printer off Manual tray 1 - 99 50
range
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 E MAIN-CS1 center Tray1 1 - 99 50
document scan F MAIN-CS2 Tray2 1 - 99 50
position G MAIN-CS3 Tray3 1 - 99 50
adjustment (CCD) H MAIN-CS4 Tray4 1 - 99 50
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 I MAIN-LC LCC 1 - 99 50
document scan J MAIN-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
position K SUB-MFT Registration Manual tray 1 - 99 50
adjustment (CCD) motor timing
L SUB-CS1 Tray1 1 - 99 50
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
M SUB-CS2 Tray2 1 - 99 50
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
N SUB-CS3 Tray3 1 - 99 50
amount amount setting
setting O SUB-CS4 Tray4 1 - 99 50
SIDE1 P SUB-LC LCC 1 - 99 50
D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20 Q SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
loss (SIDE1) image loss amount R SUB-HV-A Shift amount Heavy 1 - 99 50
amount setting paper1,2
E setting TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40 S SUB-HV-B Heavy 1 - 99 50
SIDE1 (SIDE1) edge image loss paper3,4
amount setting T SUB-GLOSSY Glossy paper 1 - 99 50
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 40 PAPER
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss U SUB- Emboss 1 - 99 50
amount amount setting EMBOSS
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20 V SUB-OHP OHP 1 - 99 50
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount W SUB-ENV Envelope 1 - 99 50
setting X MULTI Number of print 1 - 999 1
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20 COUNT
(SIDE2) edge image loss Y PAPER Tray Manual tray 1 2
amount setting selection Tray1 2
I OFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50 Tray2 3
document off-
Tray3 4
center adjustment
Tray4 5
J OFSET_SPF2 DSPF back 1 - 99 50
LCC 6
surface document
off-center Z DUPLEX Duplex print YES 0 1
adjustment NO 1
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50 A ALT FEED Other tray Normal 0 0
front surface A All trays except 1
magnification ratio PAPER
(Sub scan)
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing

is delayed. 50-12
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss Purpose Adjustment
is increased. Function (Purpose) Adjust the scan image off center position
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
Section
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
Operation/Procedure
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-10 3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
Purpose Adjustment
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
Function (Purpose) Adjust the black print image magnification decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
ratio and the off center position
1step = 0.1mm
Section
Operation/Procedure Setting
range
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value. center adjustment
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
Setting C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
range center adjustment
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification 80 - 102
ratio 120
B MAIN-STD Collective Standard 1 - 99 50
C SUB-STD correction Standard 1 - 99 60
range
Purpose Adjustment T OFFSET_M_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Adjust image registration (Manual) UB_HV12 value sub scanning direction
offset value MAGENTA
Section (HEAVY 1/2)
Operation/Procedure U OFFSET_Y_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
1) Select target item. UB_HV12 value sub scanning direction
offset value YELLOW
(HEAVY 1/2)
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) V OFFSET_C_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
UB_HV34 value sub scanning direction
Setting Default offset value CYAN (HEAVY
range 3/4)
A CYAN(FRONT) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 W OFFSET_M_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
value main scanning UB_HV34 value sub scanning direction
direction CYAN F side offset value MAGENTA
B CYAN(REAR) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 (HEAVY 3/4)
value main scanning X OFFSET_Y_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
direction CYAN R side UB_HV34 value sub scanning direction
C MAGENTA(FR Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 offset value YELLOW
ONT) value main scanning (HEAVY 3/4)
direction MAGENTA F side Y MULTICOUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D MAGENTA(RE Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 Z PAPER Tray selection Manual 1 2
AR) value main scanning paper feed
direction MAGENTA R side Tray 1 2
E YELLOW(FRO Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 Tray 2 3
NT) value main scanning
Tray 3 4
direction YELLOW F side
Tray 4 5
F YELLOW(REA Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
LCC 6
R) value main scanning
direction YELLOW R side A DUPLEX Duplex print Yes 0 1
A selection No 1
G CYAN(SUB) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
value sub scanning direction
CYAN
H MAGENTA(SU Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
B) value sub scanning direction
MAGENTA
I YELLOW(SUB) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
value sub scanning direction
YELLOW
J OFFSET_C_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
AIN_F value main scanning
direction offset value CYAN
(FRONT)
K OFFSET_C_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
AIN_R value main scanning
direction offset value CYAN
(REAR)
L OFFSET_M_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
direction offset value
MAGENTA (FRONT)
M OFFSET_M_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
MAGENTA (REAR)
N OFFSET_Y_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
YELLOW (FRONT)
O OFFSET_Y_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
YELLOW (REAR)
P OFFSET_C_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 51
UB value sub scanning direction
offset value CYAN
Q OFFSET_M_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 51
offset value MAGENTA
R OFFSET_Y_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 51
offset value YELLOW
S OFFSET_C_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
UB_HV12 value sub scanning direction
offset value CYAN (HEAVY
1/2)
50-22
Purpose Adjustment The contents of the following list are mainly used by the technical
Function (Purpose) Adjust the image registration (Main scan division, and are not necessary for the market.
direction, sub scan direction) (Auto) / OPC
drum phase (Auto)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
ment data are displayed.
Setting range Color/

Item/Display Content Default NOTE
(unit) History
MAIN F - REG_M_F Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 200
(VALUE) amount main scanning direction F (+/-0.1)
() REG_M_F (DIF) Registration value correction amount -399.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 0
from the previous one, main scanning F (+/-0.1)
MAIN R - REG_M_R Registration adjustment correction value, 1.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 200
(VALUE) main scanning direction R (+/-0.1)
() REG_M_R (DIF) Registration value correction amount -399.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 0
from the previous one, main scanning R (+/-0.1)
SUB - REG_SUB Registration adjustment correction value, 1.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 200
(VALUE) sub scanning direction (+/-0.1)
() REG_SUB (DIF) Registration value correction amount -399.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 0
from the previous one, sub scanning (+/-0.1)
SKEW CMY SKEW_CLC SKEW adjustment rotating direction and L99.9 - R99.9 KCMY/- 0 If the value is plus, L is
the number of clicks (CMY) (+/-0.1) displayed to left side of
numerical value. If the value
is minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
ALL_ SKEW adjustment rotating direction and If the value is plus, L is
ROTATE the number of clicks (K) displayed to left side of
numerical value. If the value
is minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
PHASE PHASE_ADJ Phase adjustment value (1: Value of this 1 - 8 (+/-1) More than 1 -
time, 2: Value of the previous time) 50cpm :
Angle step 0 (1) -> 45 (2) -> 90 (3) -> CMY/2
135 (4) -> 180 (5) -> 225 (6) -> 270 Less than
(7) -> 315 (8) 50 cpm : -/2
Error displays in case of abnormal end
Error code Error display Error contents Description

Forcible end error - SUSPENDED Door open end Door open during operation
- SUSPENDED CA end CA button pressed during operation
- - OFF end Unconfirmed operation during operation (Power OFF)
Basic error 1 TONER EMPTY Toner empty BK or ALL color EMPTY detection
2 BEFORE BEHAVIOR Other condition Other condition
4 SENSOR CALIBLATION F Calibration error F The target is not reached by 3 times of retry of F or R
5 SENSOR CALIBLATION R Calibration error R
6 SENSOR CALIBRATION FR Calibration error FR
7 TIME OVER Time error No data are obtained for 90sec from data acquisition
8 PROCESS CONTROL Process control error Process control error detection
Sub scanning 10 - 49 DATA SUB X X XXX XX
adjustment error
Main scanning 50 - 89 DATA MAIN X X XXX XX
adjustment error
Adjustment range error 90 - 107 RANGE XXX X XX
50-23 Setting
Item/Display Contents Default
range
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the CP_N CP_NORM_ Normal correction
market.) SUB_M operation rate
Function (Purpose) Set the registration correction F correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
(Magenta sub
Section scanning)
Operation/Procedure CP_NORM_ Normal correction
1) Select target item. MAIN_F_Y operation rate
G correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
2) Enter the set value. (Yellow main scanning
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) F side)
CP_NORM_ Normal correction
Setting MAIN_R_Y operation rate
Item/Display Contents Default
range H correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
CT_N CT_NORM_ Normal correction (Yellow main scanning
MAIN_F_C temperature correction R side)
A 1 - 199 104
coefficient (Cyan main CP_NORM_ Normal correction
scanning F side) SUB_Y operation rate
I 1 - 199 100
CT_NORM_ Normal correction correction coefficient
MAIN_R_C temperature correction (Yellow sub scanning)
B 1 - 199 104
coefficient (Cyan main CT_J CT_JOB_M Correction during job
scanning R side) AIN_C temperature correction
A 1 - 199 104
CT_NORM_ Normal correction coefficient (Cyan main
SUB_C temperature correction scanning)
C 1 - 199 103
coefficient (Cyan sub CT_JOB_S Correction during job
scanning) UB_C temperature correction
B 1 - 199 103
CT_NORM_ Normal correction coefficient (Cyan sub
MAIN_F_M temperature correction scanning)
D 1 - 199 107
coefficient (Magenta CT_JOB_M Correction during job
main scanning F side) AIN_M temperature correction
C 1 - 199 107
CT_NORM_ Normal correction coefficient (Magenta
MAIN_R_M temperature correction main scanning)
E 1 - 199 107
coefficient (Magenta CT_JOB_S Correction during job
main scanning R side) UB_M temperature correction
D 1 - 199 97
CT_NORM_ Normal correction coefficient (Magenta
SUB_M temperature correction sub scanning)
F 1 - 199 97
coefficient (Magenta CT_JOB_M Correction during job
sub scanning) AIN_Y temperature correction
E 1 - 199 107
CT_NORM_ Normal correction coefficient (Yellow main
MAIN_F_Y temperature correction scanning)
G 1 - 199 107
coefficient (Yellow main CT_JOB_S Correction during job
scanning F side) UB_Y temperature correction
F 1 - 199 97
CT_NORM_ Normal correction coefficient (Yellow sub
MAIN_R_Y temperature correction scanning)
H 1 - 199 107
coefficient (Yellow main CP_J CP_JOB_M Correction during job
scanning R side) AIN_C operation rate
A 1 - 199 100
CT_NORM_ Normal correction correction coefficient
SUB_Y temperature correction (Cyan main scanning)
I 1 - 199 97
coefficient (Yellow sub CP_JOB_S Correction during job
scanning) UB_C operation rate
B 1 - 199 100
CP_N CP_NORM_ Normal correction correction coefficient
MAIN_F_C operation rate (Cyan sub scanning)
A correction coefficient 1 - 199 100 CP_JOB_M Correction during job
(Cyan main scanning F AIN_M operation rate
side) C correction coefficient 1 - 199 120
CP_NORM_ Normal correction (Magenta main
MAIN_R_C operation rate scanning)
B correction coefficient 1 - 199 100 CP_JOB_S Correction during job
(Cyan main scanning R UB_M operation rate
side) D correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
CP_NORM_ Normal correction (Magenta sub
SUB_C operation rate scanning)
C 1 - 199 100
correction coefficient CP_JOB_M Correction during job
(Cyan sub scanning) AIN_Y operation rate
E 1 - 199 120
CP_NORM_ Normal correction correction coefficient
MAIN_F_M operation rate (Yellow main scanning)
D correction coefficient 1 - 199 100 CP_JOB_S Correction during job
(Magenta main UB_Y operation rate
scanning F side) F 1 - 199 100
correction coefficient
CP_NORM_ Normal correction (Yellow sub scanning)
MAIN_R_M operation rate
E correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
(Magenta main
scanning R side)
50-24 Setting
range
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the Image A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
market.) send loss GE (OC) edge image
Function (Purpose) Display the detailed data of SIM 44-2, 50- mode amount loss amount
20, 21 and 22 setting setting
B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
Section EAR(OC) image loss
Operation/Procedure amount
setting
C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
GE(OC) edge image
50-27 loss amount
Purpose Adjustment setting
D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
Function (Purpose) Adjust the image loss of scanned images in
loss GE surface lead
the FAX and image send mode amount (SPF_SID edge image
Section setting E1) loss amount
Operation/Procedure SPF setting
E SIDE1 FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER] EAR surface side
key. (SPF_SID image loss
2) Select target item. E1) amount
3) Enter the set value. setting
F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
4) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) GE(SPF_ surface rear
[RSPF] SIDE1) edge image
loss amount
Setting setting
range
G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 30 loss GE surface lead
send loss GE (OC) edge image (3mm) amount (SPF_SID edge image
amount loss amount setting E2) loss amount
setting setting SPF setting
B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 20 H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
EAR (OC) image loss (2mm) EAR surface side
amount (SPF_SID image loss
setting E2) amount
C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 20 setting
GE (OC) edge image (2mm) I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
loss amount GE(SPF_ surface rear
setting SIDE2) edge image
D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 20 loss amount
loss GE surface lead (2mm) setting
amount (SPF_SID edge image
setting E1) loss amount [DSPF]
SPF setting
Setting
E SIDE1 FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 20 Item/Display Content Default
range
EAR surface side (2mm)
FAX A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 30
(SPF_SID image loss
send loss GE (OC) edge image (3mm)
E1) amount
amount loss amount
setting
setting setting
F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 30
B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 20
GE surface rear (3mm)
EAR (OC) image loss (2mm)
(SPF_SID edge image
amount
E1) loss amount
setting
setting
C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 20
G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 20
GE (OC) edge image (2mm)
loss GE surface lead (2mm)
loss amount
setting
setting E2) loss amount
D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 20
SPF setting
loss GE surface lead (2mm)
H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 20
(SPF_SID image loss
SPF setting
E2) amount
E SIDE1 FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 20
setting
I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 30
(SPF_SID image loss
E1) amount
(SPF_SID edge image
setting
E2) loss amount
F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 30
setting
(SPF_SID edge image
E1) loss amount
setting
Setting When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
Item/Display Content Default ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
range
FAX G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 30 increased, the timing is delayed.
send loss GE surface lead (2mm) When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
amount (SPF_SID edge image by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
SPF setting Item/Display Content Default
H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 20 A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer voltage ON 55
EAR surface side (2mm) timing setting
(SPF_SID image loss
B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer voltage OFF 47
E2) amount
timing setting
setting
C FRONT EDGE ON Front edge bias ON timing setting 30
I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 20
TIMING
D BACKEND OFF Rear edge bias OFF timing setting 60
(SPF_SID edge image
TIMING
E2) loss amount
setting E DHV ON TIMING Separation output ON timing setting 30
Image A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 0 (0mm) F DHV OFF TIMING Separation output OFF timing setting 50
send loss GE (OC) edge image
mode amount loss amount
setting setting
B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 0 (0mm) 51-2
EAR(OC) image loss Purpose Adjustment/Setup
amount
setting Function (Purpose) Adjust the contact pressure (deflection
C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 0 (0mm) amount) on paper by the main unit and the
GE(OC) edge image SPF resist roller
loss amount Section
setting
Operation/Procedure
D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
loss GE surface lead 1) Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
amount (SPF_SID edge image [ENGINE] keys.
setting E1) loss amount 2) Select target item.
SPF setting
SIDE1
E FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
EAR surface side 4) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(SPF_SID image loss
[RSPF]
E1) amount
setting Mode Display/Item Content Default
F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm) SIDE1 A NORMAL_P RSPF front surface document 50
GE(SPF_ surface rear LAIN_HIGH deflection amount adjustment
SIDE1) edge image value (Normal/Plain paper/
loss amount HIGH)
setting B NORMAL_P RSPF front surface document 50
G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm) LAIN_LOW deflection amount adjustment
loss GE surface lead value (Normal/Plain paper/
amount (SPF_SID edge image LOW)
setting E2) loss amount C NORMAL_T RSPF front surface document 50
SPF setting HIN _HIGH deflection amount adjustment
H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm) value (Normal/Thin paper/
EAR surface side HIGH)
(SPF_SID image loss D NORMAL_T RSPF front surface document 50
E2) amount HIN _LOW deflection amount adjustment
setting value (Normal/Thin paper/
I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm) LOW)
GE(SPF_ surface rear E RANDOM_P RSPF front surface document 50
SIDE2) edge image LAIN_HIGH deflection amount adjustment
loss amount value (Random/Plain paper/
setting HIGH)
F RANDOM_P RSPF front surface document 50
LAIN _LOW deflection amount adjustment
value (Random/Plain paper/
LOW)
51 G RANDOM_T RSPF front surface document 50
HIN_HIGH deflection amount adjustment
value (Random/Thin paper/
51-1 HIGH)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup H RANDOM_T RSPF front surface document 50
HIN_LOW deflection amount adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary value (Random/Thin paper/
transfer voltage LOW)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Mode Display/Item Content Default Mode Display/Item Content Default
SIDE2 A NORMAL_P RSPF back surface document 50 ENGINE T MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
LAIN_ deflection amount adjustment ENV adjustment value
HIGH_1 value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/ (Envelop)
HIGH) U MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 30
B NORMAL_P RSPF back surface document 50 LABEL adjustment value
LAIN_ deflection amount adjustment (Label)
LOW_1 value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/ V ADU PLAIN ADU/deflection adjustment 30
LOW) PAPER (S) value
ENGINE A TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 (Plain paper/Small size)
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment W ADU PLAIN ADU/deflection adjustment 30
PAPER (S) value PAPER (L) value
(Plain paper/Small size) (Plain paper/Large size)
B TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 X ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment A PAPER (S) value
PAPER (L) value (Heavy paper A/Small size)
(Plain paper/Large size) Y ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40
C TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 A PAPER (L) value
HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment (Heavy paper A/Large size)
PAPER(S) value Z ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40
(Heavy paper A/Small size) B PAPER (S) value
D TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 (Heavy paper B/Small size)
HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment AA ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40
PAPER(L) value B PAPER (L) value
(Heavy paper A/Large size) (Heavy paper B/Large size)
E TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 AB DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment 40
HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment value
PAPER(S) value (Plain paper/Small size)
(Heavy paper B/Small size) AC DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40
F TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 HEAVY A value
HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment PAPER(S) (Heavy paper A/Small size)
PAPER(L) value AD DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40
(Heavy paper B/Large size) HEAVY B value
G TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40 PAPER(S) (Heavy paper B/Small size)
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment AE DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment 40
PAPER (S) value value
(Plain paper/Small size) (Plain paper/Large size)
H TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40 AF DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment HEAVY value
PAPER (L) value PAPER (L) (Heavy paper A/Largel size)
(Plain paper/Large size)
AG DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40
I TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40 HEAVY value
HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment PAPER (L) (Heavy paper B/Large size)
PAPER(S) value
AH LCC(S) LCC/deflection adjustment 40
(Heavy paper A/Small size)
value (Plain paper/Small size)
J TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
AI LCC HEAVY LCC/deflection adjustment 40
HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
A PAPER(S) value (Heavy paper /Small
PAPER(L) value
size)
(Heavy paper A/Large size)
K TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40 [DSPF]
HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
PAPER(S) value Defaul
Mode Display/Item Content
(Heavy paper B/Small size) t
L TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40 REGI1 A NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50
HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment _PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment
PAPER(L) value HIGH value (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
(Heavy paper B/Large size) B NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50
M MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40 _PLAIN_L deflection amount adjustment
PLAIN adjustment value OW value (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
PAPER (S) (Plain paper/Small size) C NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50
N MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40 _THIN deflection amount adjustment
PLAIN adjustment value _HIGH value (Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
PAPER (L) (Plain paper/Large size) D NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50
O MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40 _THIN deflection amount adjustment
HEAVY A adjustment value _LOW value (Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper A/Small size) E RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50
P MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40 _PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment
HEAVY A adjustment value HIGH value (Random/Plain paper/
PAPER(L) (Heavy paper A/Large size) HIGH)
Q MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40 F RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50
HEAVY B adjustment value _PLAIN deflection amount adjustment
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper B/Small size) _LOW value (Random/Plain paper/LOW)
R MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40 G RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50
HEAVY B adjustment value _THIN_HI deflection amount adjustment
PAPER (L) (Heavy paper B/Large size) GH value (Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
S MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40 H RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50
OHP adjustment value (OHP) _THIN_L deflection amount adjustment
OW value (Random/Thin paper/LOW)
Defaul Defaul
Mode Display/Item Content Mode Display/Item Content
t t
REGI2 A NORMAL DSPF back surface document 70 ENGINE L TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
_PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
HIGH value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/ PAPER(L) value
HIGH) (Heavy paper B/Large size)
B NORMAL DSPF back surface document 50 M MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
_PLAIN_L deflection amount adjustment PLAIN adjustment value
OW value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/ PAPER (Plain paper/Small size)
LOW) (S)
C NORMAL DSPF back surface document 70 N MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
_THIN_HI deflection amount adjustment PLAIN adjustment value
GH value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/ PAPER (Plain paper/Large size)
HIGH) (L)
D NORMAL DSPF back surface document 50 O MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
_THIN_L deflection amount adjustment HEAVY A adjustment value
OW value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/ PAPER(S) (Heavy paper A/Small size)
LOW) P MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
SIDE2 E RANDOM DSPF back surface document 70 HEAVY A adjustment value
_PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment PAPER(L) (Heavy paper A/Large size)
HIGH value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/ Q MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
HIGH) HEAVY B adjustment value
F RANDOM DSPF back surface document 50 PAPER(S) (Heavy paper B/Small size)
_PLAIN_L deflection amount adjustment R MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
OW value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/ HEAVY B adjustment value
LOW) PAPER (Heavy paper B/Large size)
G RANDOM DSPF back surface document 70 (L)
_THIN_HI deflection amount adjustment S MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
GH value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/ OHP adjustment value (OHP)
HIGH) T MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
H RANDOM DSPF back surface document 50 ENV adjustment value (Envelop)
_THIN_L deflection amount adjustment U MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 30
OW value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/ LABEL adjustment value (Label)
LOW) V ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 30
ENGINE A TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 PLAIN (Plain paper/Small size)
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment PAPER
PAPER value (S)
(S) (Plain paper/Small size) W ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 30
B TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 PLAIN (Plain paper/Large size)
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment PAPER
PAPER value (L)
(L) (Plain paper/Large size) X ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40
C TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 HEAVY A (Heavy paper A/Small size)
HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment PAPER
PAPER(S) value (S)
(Heavy paper A/Small size) Y ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40
D TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 HEAVY A (Heavy paper A/Large size)
HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment PAPER
PAPER(L) value (L)
(Heavy paper A/Large size) Z ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40
E TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 HEAVY B (Heavy paper B/Small size)
HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment PAPER
PAPER(S) value (S)
(Heavy paper B/Small size) AA ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40
F TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 HEAVY B (Heavy paper B/Large size)
HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment PAPER
PAPER(L) value (L)
(Heavy paper B/Large size) AB DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment 40
G TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40 value (Plain paper/Small size)
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment AC DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40
PAPER value HEAVY A value (Heavy paper A/Small size)
(S) (Plain paper/Small size) PAPER(S)
H TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40 AD DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment HEAVY B value (Heavy paper B/Small size)
PAPER value PAPER(S)
(L) (Plain paper/Large size)
AE DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment 40
I TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40 value (Plain paper/Large size)
AF DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40
PAPER(S) value
HEAVY value (Heavy paper A/Large size)
(Heavy paper A/Small size)
PAPER
J TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40 (L)
AG DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40
PAPER(L) value
HEAVY value (Heavy paper B/Large size)
(Heavy paper A/Large size)
PAPER
K TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40 (L)
HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
AH LCC(S) LCC/deflection adjustment value 40
PAPER(S) value
(Plain paper/Small size)
(Heavy paper B/Small size)
Defaul Setting
Mode Display/Item Content Item/Display
t range Default
ENGINE AI LCC LCC/deflection adjustment value 40 D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961
HEAVY A (Heavy paper /Small size)
PAPER(S) [DSPF]
Setting
Note on “Large size” and “Small size” Item/Display
range Default
Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 66
than the LT size (216mm). B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 438
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 699
than the LT size (216mm). D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 893
Adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp
amount is decreased. 53-8
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is Purpose Adjustment
changed by 0.1mm.) Function (Purpose) Adjust the document lead edge reference
and the SPF mode document scan position
Section
Operation/Procedure
53 Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
<AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment>(Auto
53-6 adjustment)
Purpose Adjustment 1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
table.
Function (Purpose) Adjust the detection level of the SPF docu-
ment width 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
adjustment value is saved.)
Section
Operation/Procedure Setting Default
1) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the maximum width. range
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
The maximum width detection level is recognized. RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
3) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the A4R width. reference position
<MANUAL: SPF mode document scan position adjustment>
5) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the A5R width.
The A5R width detection level is recognized. Setting Default Default
range (RSPF) (DSPF)
7) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.
A ADJUST SPF mode document 1 - 99 5 10
8) Tap [EXECUTE] key. VALUE scan position adjustment
The minimum width detection level is recognized. (Scanner stop position
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is adjustment)
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally, * When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-
"COMPLETE" is displayed. tion in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right.
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value * When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value shifted by 0.1mm.
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
53-9
Purpose Adjustment
53-7 Function (Purpose) Set scanning position in SPF
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Section
Function (Purpose) Adjust the SPF document size width sensor Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select target item.
Operation/Procedure 2) Enter the set value.
1) Select target item. 3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
3) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) [RSPF]
[RSPF] Setting
range
Setting
Item/Display A SIDEA_SCAN_P SPF front OFF 0 0
range Default
OSITION_SET_S surface optimum ON 1
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84 TART scan position
B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 509 detection setting
C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 808 (When starting)
Setting Setting
range range
B SIDEA_SCAN_P SPF front OFF 0 1 I SIDEB_EXT_SH SPF back side Defa 0 0
OSITION_SET_J surface optimum ON 1 ADING_SET expansion ult
OB scan position shading setting Both 1
detection setting OFF
(After a job) Both 2
C SIDEA_SCAN_P SPF front Low 0 1 ON
OSITION_LV surface optimum Medi 1 Powe 3
scan position um r on
detection level High 2 ON/
setting OFF
D OC_DIRT_LV OC dirt level Low 0 1 after
setting Medi 1 JOB
um Powe 4
High 2 r on
E SIDEA_DIRT_AL SPF front Low 0 1 OFF/
ARM_LV surface dirt Medi 1 ON
alarm level um after
setting High 2 JOB
F SIDEA_DIRT_SH SPF front OFF 0 1
ADING_SET surface streak ON 1
delete shading
setting 53-10
[DSPF]
Function (Purpose) Execute dirt detection in SPF
Setting
Item/Display Content Default Section
range
A SIDEA_SCAN_P SPF front OFF 0 0 Operation/Procedure
OSITION_SET_S surface optimum ON 1 1) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
TART scan position
detection setting [RSPF]
(When starting)
Item Content
B SIDEA_SCAN_P SPF front OFF 0 1
SPF SIDEA SPF front surface dirt detection position (main scan
OSITION_SET_J surface optimum ON 1 position 1 to 8)
OB scan position
"-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt
detection setting
OC OC surface dirt detection position (main scan position
(After a job)
1 to 8)
C SIDEA_SCAN_P SPF front Low 0 1
"-": No dirt, "*": Dirt
OSITION_LV surface optimum Medi 1
scan position um [DSPF]
detection level High 2
setting Item Content
D OC_DIRT_LV OC dirt level Low 0 1 SPF SIDEA SPF front surface dirt detection position (main scan
setting Medi 1 position 1 to 8)
um "-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt
High 2 SPF SIDEB DSPF back surface dirt detection position (main scan
E SIDEA_DIRT_AL SPF front Low 0 1 position 1 to 8)
ARM_LV surface dirt Medi 1 "-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt
alarm level um OC OC surface dirt detection position (main scan position
setting High 2 1 to 8)
"-": No dirt, "*": Dirt
F SIDEB_DIRT_AL SPF back Low 0 1
ARM_LV surface dirt Medi 1
alarm level um
setting High 2
G SIDEA_DIRT_SH SPF front OFF 0 1
delete shading
setting
H SIDEB_DIRT_SH SPF back OFF 0 1
delete shading
setting
55 J SPECIAL Stamp Disable 0 0
WATERMARK setting Enable 1
55-1 Input value
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially Print Blank A B C E F G
required.) Input value 32 65 66 67 69 70 71
Function (Purpose) Set the specification of the engine control
operations (SOFT SW) Print H I J K L M N
Section Input value 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
Operation/Procedure
Print O P Q R T U V
Input value 79 80 81 82 84 85 86
55-2 Print W X Y Z 0 1 2
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially Input value 87 88 89 90 48 49 50
required.)
Print 3 5 6 7 8 9
Function (Purpose) Set the specification of the scanner control
Input value 51 53 54 55 56 57
operation (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure
56
55-3
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially 56-1
required.) Purpose Backup
Function (Purpose) Set the specification of the controller opera- Function (Purpose) Transport data between STORAGE - MFP
tion (SOFT SW) EEPROM
Section Section
1) Select a target content of data transfer.
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key and tap [YES] key.
55-10
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Function (Purpose) Set the special stamp text (For Taiwan) displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Section
EEPROM -> STORAGE Transfer from EEPROM to STORAGE
Operation/Procedure STORAGE -> EEPROM Transfer from STORAGE to EEPROM
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item.
3) Tap [OK] key.
56-2
Item/Display Content Setting range Default Purpose Data backup
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1
Function (Purpose) Store the data in the EEPROM, ICU DRIVE
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit 32 [blank: 20H]
65 - 90
and STORAGE to the USB memory
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit
D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit [Alphabet: Section
41H("A) - Operation/Procedure
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit
5AH("Z")]
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right 1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
48 - 57 [Numeral:
edge)
30H("0") - 2) Select target item.
39H("9")] 3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and tap [YES] key.
G COLOR K Color specification 0 0
input
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
C 1
M 2 When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Y 3 displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
R 4 (Machine with the DSK installed)
G 5 1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
B 6 2) Select target item.
H TYPE Print Edging 0 1
com- type
3) Enter the password.
posing OR 1 4) Tap [SET] key.
method process 5) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and tap [YES] key.
type
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
No-delete- 2
compo- When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
sition type displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
I DENSITY Stamp density 1-9 3
setting
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and tap [YES] key.
56-3
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Store the document filing data to the USB 56-8
memory
Section
Function (Purpose) Update ICC profile
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
Operation/Procedure
2) Select the ICC profile data to be imported.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
56-15
56-4 Purpose Backup
Purpose Data backup Function (Purpose) Restore MFP EEPROM data
Function (Purpose) Store the JOB log data to the USB memory Section
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Confirm that new EEPROM mounted on the PWB
Operation/Procedure
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and, tap [YES] key.
2) Tap [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
displayed. in case of an abnormal end "ERROR" is displayed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is 56-99
Function (Purpose) Store all log data to the USB memory
56-5 Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Store the SIM22-6 data to the USB memory 1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
in the text format 2) Select the log item data to be imported.
Section 3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and tap [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure
Item Contents
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit. SIM56-5 Import SIM56-5 data.
2) Select a kind of data to be imported. SIM56-6 Import SIM56-6 data.
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and tap [YES] key. SIM00-11 Import SIM00-11 data.
SIM56-4 Import SIM56-4 job log data.
Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
SIM56-7 Import SIM56-7 system log data.
SIM56-2 Perform simplified output of SIM56-2.
56-6
Purpose Operation data check 60
Function (Purpose) Store the SIM23-2 JAM/trouble data to the
USB memory in the text format 60-1
Section Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Check the memory operations (read/write)
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit. of the SCN MFP PWB
2) Select a kind of data to be imported. Section
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and tap [YES] key. Operation/Procedure
Start the test.
56-7
Result display Description
OK Success
Function (Purpose) Store the system log data to the USB mem- NG Fail
ory NONE DIMM trouble
Section INVALID Execution disable
Operation/Procedure
2) Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
Mode Item / Display Content Default
61 COPY
R
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
0
600 LOW(Y) speed/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
61-1 S 0
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
Purpose Operation test/check LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
T 0
Function (Purpose) Check the LSU polygon motor rotation and LOW(BW) speed/BW
laser detection U LASER POWER K1 Laser power setting K1 100
V LASER POWER K2 Laser power setting K2 100
Section LSU
LASER POWER Laser power setting C1
Operation/Procedure W 100
C1
1) Tap [EXECUTE] key. X
LASER POWER Laser power setting C2
100
C2
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
LASER POWER Laser power setting M1
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed. Y 100
M1
Display Content LASER POWER Laser power setting M2
Z 100
M2
LSU test NG:PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
AA LASER POWER Y1 Laser power setting Y1 100
LSU test NG:K Laser light emitting abnormality (K)
AB LASER POWER Y2 Laser power setting Y2 100
LSU test NG:CL Laser light emitting abnormality (C,M,Y)
COPY LASER POWER Laser power setting
A 149
1200 MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
B 117
LOW(BW) speed/BW
61-3
Purpose Adjustment/Setup C 0
Function (Purpose) Set the laser power LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
D 0
LOW(BW) speed/BW
Section
PR600/ LASER POWER Laser power setting
Operation/Procedure A 149
FAX MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY600], B
LASER POWER Laser power setting
149
[COPY1200], [PR600/FAX], [PR1200]. MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
LASER POWER Laser power setting
2) Select target item. C 149
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
3) Enter the adjustment value. LASER POWER Laser power setting
D 149
4) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
When the laser power are increased, the print density is LASER POWER Laser power setting low
E 117
increased and the line width of line images are increased. LOW(K) speed/K
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
MX-xx61/xx71 F 117
LOW(C) speed/C
Mode Item / Display Content Default LASER POWER Laser power setting low
G 117
COPY LASER POWER Laser power setting LOW(M) speed/M
A 149 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
600 MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K H 117
LASER POWER Laser power setting LOW(Y) speed/Y
B 149 LASER POWER Laser power setting
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C I 149
LASER POWER Laser power setting MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
C 149 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M J 117
LASER POWER Laser power setting LOW(BW) speed/BW
D 149 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y K 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting low MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
E 117 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
LOW(K) speed/K L 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting low MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
F 117 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
LOW(C) speed/C M 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting low MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
G 117 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
LOW(M) speed/M N 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting low MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
H 117 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
LOW(Y) speed/Y O 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting LOW(K) speed/K
I 149 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW P 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LOW(C) speed/C
J 117 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
LOW(BW) speed/BW Q 0
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LOW(M) speed/M
K 0 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K R 0
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LOW(Y) speed/Y
L 0 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C S 0
LASER DUTY Laser duty select MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
M 0 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M T 0
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LOW(BW) speed/BW
N 0 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y U 0
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low MIDDLE(K 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/K
O 0 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
LOW(K) speed/K V 0
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low MIDDLE(C 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/C
P 0 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
LOW(C) speed/C W 0
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low MIDDLE(M 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/M
Q 0 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
LOW(M) speed/M X 0
MIDDLE(Y 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/Y
Mode Item / Display Content Default Mode Item / Display Content Default
PR600/ LASER DUTY Laser duty select low COPY LASER Laser power setting low
Y 0
FAX LOW(K 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/K 600 G POWER speed/M 79
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LOW(M)
Z 0
LOW(C 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/C LASER Laser power setting low
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low H POWER speed/Y 79
AA 0
LOW(M 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/M LOW(Y)
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER Laser power setting middle
AB 0
LOW(Y 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/Y I POWER speed/BW 100
LASER DUTY Laser duty select MIDDLE(BW)
AC MIDDLE(BW 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/ 0 LASER Laser power setting low
BW J POWER speed/BW 79
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LOW(BW)
AD 0
LOW(BW 1BIT)) speed (1BIT)/BW LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
K 0
PR LASER POWER Laser power setting MIDDLE(K) speed/K
A 149
1200 MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
L 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting MIDDLE(C) speed/C
B 149
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
M 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting MIDDLE(M) speed/M
C 149
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
N 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting MIDDLE(Y) speed/Y
D 149
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/
O 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LOW(K) K
E 117
LOW(K) speed/K LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/
P 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LOW(C) C
F 117
LOW(C) speed/C LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/
Q 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LOW(M) M
G 117
LOW(M) speed/M LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/
R 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LOW(Y) Y
H 117
LOW(Y) speed/Y LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
S 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting MIDDLE(BW) speed/BW
I 149
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/
T 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LOW(BW) BW
J 117
LOW(BW) speed/BW PR600/ LASER Laser power setting middle
LASER DUTY Laser duty select FAX A POWER speed/K 100
K 0 MIDDLE(K)
MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER Laser power setting middle
L 0 B POWER speed/C 100
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
LASER DUTY Laser duty select MIDDLE(C)
M 0 LASER Laser power setting middle
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
LASER DUTY Laser duty select C POWER speed/M 100
N 0 MIDDLE(M)
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER Laser power setting middle
O 0 D POWER speed/Y 100
LOW(K) speed/K
MIDDLE(Y)
P 0 LASER Laser power setting low
LOW(C) speed/C
E POWER speed/K 79
Q 0 LOW(K)
LOW(M) speed/M
LASER Laser power setting low
R 0 F POWER speed/C 79
LOW(Y) speed/Y
LOW(C)
S 0 LASER Laser power setting low
G POWER speed/M 79
T 0 LOW(M)
LOW(BW) speed/BW
MX-xx51 H POWER speed/Y 79
LOW(Y)
Mode Item / Display Content Default LASER Laser power setting middle
COPY LASER Laser power setting middle I POWER speed/BW 100
600 A POWER speed/K 100 MIDDLE(BW)
MIDDLE(K) LASER Laser power setting low
LASER Laser power setting middle J POWER speed/BW 79
B POWER speed/C 100 LOW(BW)
MIDDLE(C) LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
LASER Laser power setting middle K 0
MIDDLE(K) speed/K
C POWER speed/M 100 LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
MIDDLE(M) L 0
MIDDLE(C) speed/C
LASER Laser power setting middle LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
D POWER speed/Y 100 M 0
MIDDLE(M) speed/M
MIDDLE(Y)
LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
LASER Laser power setting low N 0
MIDDLE(Y) speed/Y
E POWER speed/K 79
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/
LOW(K) O 0
LOW(K) K
F POWER speed/C 79 P 0
LOW(C) C
LOW(C)
Q 0
LOW(M) M
Mode Item / Display Content Default
PR600/ LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/ /DVHUSRZHUDXWRFRUUHFWLRQ02'(0,''/(
R 0
FAX LOW(Y) Y 3OHDVHSODFHWKHSULQWHGWHVWSDWFK
RQWKHGRFXPHQWJODVVWKHQSUHVV>(;(&87(@
LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle WRUHYLVHDQGSURFRQDQGSULQWWHVWSDJH
S 0
MIDDLE(BW) speed/BW
T 0
LOW(BW) BW
U MIDDLE(K speed (1BIT)/K 0
1BIT)
V MIDDLE(C speed (1BIT)/C 0
1BIT)
'LUHFWLRQDUURZDWOHIWVLGHRQGRFXPHQWJODVV
W MIDDLE(M speed (1BIT)/M 0
1BIT)
X MIDDLE(Y speed (1BIT)/Y 0 6) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
1BIT)
7) Tap [RETRY] key if correction is still required.
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed
Y 0
LOW(K 1BIT) (1BIT)/K
Z 0
LOW(C 1BIT) (1BIT)/C 61-12
AA 0 Purpose Adjustment
LOW(M 1BIT) (1BIT)/M
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed Function (Purpose) Adjust the Laser power (Manual)
AB 0
LOW(Y 1BIT) (1BIT)/Y Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
AC MIDDLE(BW speed (1BIT)/BW 0
1BIT) Select VISUAL INSPECTION.
AD LOW(BW (1BIT)/BW 0 Item / Display Content Outline
1BIT)) MEASURING Density meter Adjustment with density meter
INSTRUMENT adjustment
VISUAL Visual check Adjustment by visual check
INSPETION adjustment
61-4 DATA Data display Data display during execution of
screen the manual correction
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Print out the print image skew adjustment [VISUAL INSPECTION]
pattern 1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
Section 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure The adjustment pattern is printed out.
1) Select target item. 3) Tap [5POINT CORRECTION] or [32POINT CORRECTION].
2) Enter the print conditions setting value. 4) Enter an adjustment value of 5 points.
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed. Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the
adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis-
Item/Display Content Default played.
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity (1-999) 1 6) Tap [RETRY] key if adjustment is still required.
B PAPER MFT Tray selection 1 Manual tray 2
7) Tap [DATA] key, display manual adjustment result.
CS1 2 Tray 1 (CS 1)
CS2 3 Tray 2
CS3 4 Tray 3
CS4 5 Tray 4 61-13
LCC 6 LCC Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Clear the laser power correction value
Section
61-11 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment 1) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Adjust the laser power (Auto) 2) Tap [YES] key.
Section 3) Laser power auto correction value (K-Y) 32 points and laser
power manual correction value (K-Y) 32 points are return back
Operation/Procedure
to the default.
1) Tap [AUTO CORRECTION] key.
2) Select a density to be corrected.
4) Check pattern is printed.
5) Place the printed pattern for scanning on the OC in the
A4R(LTR) direction.
3) Tap [YES] key.
61-14
Read/write operations are performed.
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Set the laser power correction value Item Content
ALL Storage read/write check (All area)
Section
PART Storage read/write check (Partial area)
Operation/Procedure SMART (SHORT) Storage self-diagnostic (Partial area)
This Sim mode allows change of laser power settings easily, and all SMART (EXTENDED) Storage self-diagnostic (All area)
at once. However, this change will not change the initial value of
SIM 61-3 (Laser power settings).
The laser power set in this Sim mode will be:
62-4
Initial value of Sim 61-3 x Initial value of Sim 61-14 (%)
1) Tap a target item. Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Check the format of the STORAGE (Logi-
Item Setting range Default cal)
K/BW -2 Fine (80%) 0
Section
-1 Slight fine (90%)
0 Normal (100%) Operation/Procedure
1 Slight thick (110%) 1) Select target item.
2 Thick (120%) 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
C -2 Fine (80%) 0 3) Tap [YES] key.
0 Normal (100%) Item Content
1 Slight thick (110%) FORMAT Format of specified partition
2 Thick (120%) CHECK Specified partition check
M -2 Fine (80%) 0
0 Normal (100%)
1 Slight thick (110%) 62-7
2 Thick (120%) Purpose Operation test/check
Y -2 Fine (80%) 0
Function (Purpose) Print the self diagnostics error log of the
STORAGE
0 Normal (100%)
1 Slight thick (110%) Section
2 Thick (120%) Operation/Procedure
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
62
62-9
62-1
Purpose Data clear
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Clear the data in the STORAGE
Function (Purpose) Format the storage
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
3) Tap [YES] key.
3) Tap [YES] key.
Used to execute the HDD format.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the 62-12
normal display.
Purpose Setting
Item Content Function (Purpose) Set auto format in STORAGE error
ALL AREA Storage format
Section
EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA Storage format (Except system area)
Operation/Procedure
PREINSTALL DATA Storage format (Preinstalled data area)
2) Tap [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
62-3
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
Purpose Operation test/check data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
Function (Purpose) Check read/write of the STORAGE (all data storage area is cleared.
areas)
A 0 Enable
Section
1 Disable (Default)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select target item
62-14 Display item Description Remarks
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 4: END is not asserted.
Purpose Data clear CODE (Gain adjustment)
Function (Purpose) Check/Delete the database file in the 5: STAGE2, Retry
STORAGE maximum
6: STAGE2, Underflow
Section HDD
7: Black shading error
Operation/Procedure 8: Other error
1) Select target item. 9: END is not asserted.
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. (White shading)
3) Tap [YES] key. 10 END is not asserted.
: (Black shading)
Item Content 11 END is not asserted.
: (Light quantity
ALL CLEAR All data base file clear
correction)
PART CLEAR Partial data base file clear
12 END is not asserted.
CHECK All data base file check
:
13 Register check error
: (White booting/Before
gain)
62-21 14 Register check error
Purpose Operation test/check : (Before light quantity
correction)
Function (Purpose) Display the storage information in the
RSPF BACK First scan RSPF back
STORAGE
WHITE surface white reference
Section Mirroring hard disk LEVEL 1ST level
Operation/Procedure RSPF BACK Second scan RSPF back
Storage information is displayed.
LEVEL 2ND level
[DSPF]
Display item Description Remarks
63 OC ANALOG Analog gain adjustment
GAIN ODD value (odd number)
ANALOG Analog gain adjustment
63-1 GAIN EVEN value (even number)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check DIGITAL Digital gain adjustment
Function (Purpose) Display the shading correction result
DIGITAL Digital gain adjustment
Section Scanner GAIN EVEN value (even number)
Operation/Procedure SMP AVE Reference plate
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B]. ODD sampling average value
(ODD)
[RSPF] SMP AVE Reference plate
EVEN sampling average value
Display item Description Remarks
(EVEN)
TARGET Target value
BLACK Black output level
LEVEL
GAIN EVEN value (even number)
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error
CODE 1: STAGE1, Loop
number over
GAIN EVEN value (even number) 2: STAGE2, The
target value is
SMP AVE Reference plate sampling
under the
ODD average value (ODD)
specified value
SMP AVE Reference plate sampling
3: STAGE3, The
EVEN average value (EVEN)
gain set value is
TARGET Target value
negative.
BLACK Black output level
4: END is not
LEVEL
asserted. (Gain
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error adjustment)
CODE 1: STAGE1, Loop number 5: STAGE2, Retry
over maximum
2: STAGE2, The target 6: STAGE2,
value is under the Underflow
specified value
7: Black shading
3: STAGE3, The gain set error
value is negative.
8: Other error
9: END is not
asserted.
(White shading)
10 END is not
: asserted. (Black
shading)
Display item Description Remarks 63-2
OC ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 11 END is not
CODE : asserted. (Light Purpose Adjustment
quantity Function (Purpose) Execute shading correction
correction)
Section
12 END is not
: asserted. Operation/Procedure
13 Register check 1) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
: error (White Used to perform shading.
booting/Before
gain) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
14 Register check normal display.
: error (Before When the DSPF is connected, the following items are displayed.
light quantity
correction) Display Contents
DSPF BACK First scan DSPF back OC analog correction level correction or shading
OC SHADING
WHITE surface white reference correction data creation (OC mode)
LEVEL 1ST level DSPF analog correction level correction or shading
DSPF SHADING
DSPF BACK Second scan DSPF correction data creation (SPF mode)
WHITE back surface white
LEVEL 2ND reference level 63-3
DSPF ANALOG Analog gain adjustment
GAIN ODD value (odd number) Purpose Adjustment
ANALOG Analog gain adjustment Function (Purpose) Adjust scanner (CCD) color balance and
GAIN EVEN value (even number) gamma
Section Scanner
DIGITAL Digital gain adjustment Operation/Procedure
GAIN EVEN value (even number) For OC mode
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error 1) Place the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) on the
CODE 1: STAGE1, Loop reference position of the left rear frame side of the document
number over table.
2: STAGE2, The
target value is
2) Select the color which needs to be adjusted. Then, tap [EXE-
under the CUTE] key.
specified value The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
3: STAGE3, The formed.
gain set value is When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
negative.
normal display.
4: END is not
asserted. (Gain For DSPF mode
adjustment) 1) Place the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) on the
5: STAGE2, Retry DSPF paper tray
maximum 2) Select the color which needs to be adjusted. Then, tap [EXE-
6: STAGE2, CUTE] key.
Underflow
7: Black shading
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
error formed.
8: Other error
9: END is not
asserted. 63-4
(White shading)
10 END is not
: asserted. (Black Function (Purpose) Display the scanner test chart patch density
shading)
Section
11 END is not
: asserted. (Light Operation/Procedure
quantity 1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) to the
correction) reference position on the left rear frame side of the document
12 END is not table.
: asserted.
2) Select the color which needs to be adjusted. Then, tap [EXE-
13 Register check
CUTE] key.
: error (White
booting/Before The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
gain) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
14 Register check the normal display.
: error (Before
3) Select a data display mode.
light quantity
correction)
GAMMATHROUGH SIT chart scan data
DSPF BACK First scan DSPF back
COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart
scan data
LEVEL 1ST level
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of the SIT
DSPF BACK Second scan DSPF
chart scan data
WHITE back surface white
SIT CHECK SIT chart scan data/Check result
LEVEL 2ND reference level
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.
63-5 N Point N target value
O Point O target value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup P Point P target value
Function (Purpose) Set the default of the scanner (CCD) color BASE Background sampling value
balance and gamma
Section
1) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and tap [YES] key
2) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
Function (Purpose) Set the default of the service target of the
default.
copy mode auto color balance adjustment
[RSPF]
Section
Item/Display Contents Operation/Procedure
1 SIDE A(OC) Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction
coefficient
2 TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction 2) Tap [YES] key.
coefficient The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
3 Auto adjustment gamma correction 1 and color adjustment is set to the default.
correction coefficient The service color balance target and the color balance target
[DSPF]
balance as the factory color balance target.
Item/Display Contents
1 SIDE A(OC) Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction
coefficient
63-11
2 TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction
coefficient Purpose Adjustment/Setup
3 Auto adjustment gamma correction 1 and color Function (Purpose) Set the target color balance of the copy
correction coefficient mode auto color balance adjustment
1 SIDE B(DSPF) Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction
coefficient Section
2 TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction Operation/Procedure
coefficient 1) Select the target color balance.

TARGET DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1
63-7 TBL target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Magenta.
When this target is selected, the color
Function (Purpose) Set the service target of the copy mode balance is converted into natural gray
auto color balance adjustment color balance by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made.
Section
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment
Operation/Procedure target in the automatic color balance
1) Tap [SETUP] key. operation is slightly shifted to natural gray
2) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with color balance. When this target is
selected, the color balance is slightly
SIM46-21 on the document table.
shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. actual copy mode and print is made.
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment
4) Tap [OK] key. target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance this target is selected, the color balance is
adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the converted into the color balance with
scanned adjustment pattern sheet. enhanced Cyan by the color table in an
The registered color balance and the density are displayed. actual copy mode and print is made.
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
64
This simulation is executed only when the copy color balance is
manually adjusted. 64-1
B Point B target value
C Point C target value Function (Purpose) Print test pattern (self print) (color mode)
D Point D target value Section
E Point E target value Operation/Procedure
F Point F target value
1) Set the print conditions.
G Point G target value
Select target item.
H Point H target value
I Point I target value Set the print conditions.
J Point J target value Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
K Point K target value 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
L Point L target value
The test print (self print) is performed.
M Point M target value
A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 - 58 (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22, 29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) 22, 29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of blank dot number (N parameter) 0-255 236
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE NONE Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) TEXT/PRINTED specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2
PHOTO except above:1-8)
TEXT/PHOTO Text/ Photograph 3
TEXT Text 4
PHOTO Photograph 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual tray 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Plain paper 1 1-9 1 1
PLAIN2 Plain paper 2 2
HEAVY Heavy paper 3
OHP OHP 4
ENVELOPE Envelope 5
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 6
GLOSSY Glossy paper 7
Print pattern of Item A

Pattern generating
Pattern No. Content NOTE
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC * When the print width is 100 or more and all colors are selected, print is made in the
three colors (CMY).
* Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
* Writing regardless of pound. The first one is fixed to LD1.
2 Dot print -
9 Each color 10% area (A4/ * Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
A4R) density print * If m is not in the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
* K print is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-color dot print (sub scan) * For every 1/4 of the sub scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
* When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.
17 All background (halftone) Halftone * When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 gradations pattern (IMG-ASIC rear * When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
(Other dither) process) * 16 gradations are printed in the main scanning direction, and feedback is made, and
the next 16 gradations are printed. (16 x 16 patch print)
* Print is made from 255 gradations, and 0-254 gradations are printed.
19 256 gradations pattern * Print is made from 255 gradations, and 0-254 gradations are printed.
(For text dither)
21 4-point dot print (main LSU-ASIC * For every 1/4 of the main scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
scan) * When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.
22 Slant line LSU-ASIC
29 Dot print 1200dpi LSU-ASIC * M=1(Fixed), N=1or3
64-2
Function (Purpose) Print test pattern (self print) (monochrome
mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Set the print conditions.

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22, 29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22,
29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 236
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE NONE Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) TEXT/PRINTED specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2
PHOTO except above: 1-8)
TEXT/PHOTO Text/ Photograph 3
TEXT Text 4
PHOTO Photograph 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual tray 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Plain paper 1-6 1 1
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4

Pattern generating
Pattern No. Content NOTE
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC * When the print width is 100 or more and all colors are selected, print is made in the
three colors (CMY).
* Writing regardless of pound. The first one is fixed to LD1.
2 Dot print –
9 Each color 10% area (A4/ * Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
A4R) density print * If m is not in the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
* K print is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-color dot print (sub scan) * For every 1/4 of the sub scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
* When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.
17 All background (halftone) Halftone (IMG-ASIC –
18 256 gradations pattern rear process) –
(Other dither)
19 256 gradations pattern –
(For text dither)
21 4-point dot print (main LSU-ASIC * For every 1/4 of the main scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
scan) * When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.
22 Slant line LSU-ASIC
29 Dot print 1200dpi LSU-ASIC * M=1(Fixed), N=1or3

64-4
Function (Purpose) Print printer test pattern (self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-6 6
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray selection Manual tray 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW Halftone Low line number 0 0
HIGH High line number 1
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting 600dpi 0 1
HIGHQUALITY 600dpi (High Quality) 1
FINE 1200dpi 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 0 1
CALIB correction Calibration 1
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Plain paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 2

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (COLOR)
2 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
3 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) (Y-M-C-K continuous)
4 Halftone pattern (COLOR)
5 Halftone pattern (B/W)
6 Background dot print

64-5
Function (Purpose) Print printer test pattern (self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-5 3
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual tray 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 2
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 2
FINE 1200dpi 2
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Plain paper 1 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
I INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1
SATURATION Saturation 2
J OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0 0
STANDARD Photo image 1
GRAPHICS Graphics 2
K RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0 0
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1
GAMMA1.8 Gamma 1.8 2
TONER SAVE TONER SAVE 6
L GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray print method K only 0 0
KCMY KCMY 1
M PURE BLACK PRINT ON Black monochrome set. 0 0
OFF print not set. 1
N TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1

Pattern No. Content
1 COLOR
2 B/W
3 Continuous COLOR,B/W
4 Service chart (COLOR)
5 Service chart (B/W)

64-6
Function (Purpose) Print printer test pattern (self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
MX-xx61/xx71
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
FINE 1200dpi 2
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
GRAPHICS Graphics 2
KCMY KCMY 1
ON save set. 1
O CMY SIMULATION OFF CMYK simulation OFF 0 0
SWOP SWOP 1
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3

MX-xx51

CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
GRAPHICS Graphics 2
KCMY KCMY 1
ON save set. 1
O CMY SIMULATION OFF CMYK simulation OFF 0 0
SWOP SWOP 1
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3

Pattern No. Content
1 COLOR
2 B/W
65
65-1
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the touch panel (LCD display sec-
tion) detection coordinates
Section Operation panel section
Operation/Procedure
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen.
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to
the simulation sub number entry menu.
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.

65-2 66-2
Purpose Operation check/test Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Display the touch panel (LCD display sec- Function (Purpose) Set a country code and the default for the
tion) detection coordinates country code
Section Section FAX
Touch the touch panel. 1) [DEST CODE] key is tapped, country code list is displayed.
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of 2) Enter the country code (8 digit).
the touched position is displayed in real time. * When [CLEAR] key is tapped, the column of “NEW:” is
cleared.
3) Tap [SET] key.
5) Tap [YES] key.
<Country code list>
JAPAN 00000000
U.S.A. 10110101
AUSTRALIA 00001001
U.K. 10110100
FRANCE 00111101
GERMANY 00000100
SWEDEN 10100101
NEWZEALAND 01111110
CHINA 00100110
65-5 SINGAPORE 10011100
Purpose Operation check/test TW 11111110
MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101
Function (Purpose) Check the operation panel key input
SLOVAKIA 11111100
Section OTHER3 11111011
Operation/Procedure FINLAND 00111100
Tap [HOME] key. NORWAY 10000010
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key DENMARK 00110001
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE" NETHERLANDS 01111011
is displayed. ITALY 01011001
SWITZERLAND 10100110
<Check target key>
AUSTRIA 00001010
10 Inch LCD model INDONESIA 01010100
HOME THAILAND 10101001
MALAYSIA 01101100
INDIA 01010011
PHILIPPINES 10001001
HONGKONG 01010000
66 RUSSIA
SOUTHAFRICA
10111000
10011111
SPAIN 10100000
66-1 PORTUGUESE 10001011
Purpose Setting LUXEMBURG 01101001
BELGIUM 00001111
Function (Purpose) Set the FAX related soft SW (2-150)
CZECH 00101110
Section FAX HUNGARY 01010001
Operation/Procedure GREECE 01000110
1) Enter the set value to [SW NO]. POLAND 10001010
* When [C] key is tapped, the entered value of [SW NO] is BRAZIL 00010110
cleared. KOREA 01100001
VIETNAM 10111100
2) Tap [DATA] key.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
* When [SW NO] button is tapped, the display returns to the
initial screen. 66-3
3) Enter the number to the bit to be changed. Purpose Operation test/Check
* [1] -> [0] Function (Purpose) Check read/write of the EEPROM and the
[0] -> [1] SDRAM on the MODEM controller and dis-
4) When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, it is highlighted and the set- play the result
ting is saved. Section FAX
Operation/Procedure

Memory check status
66-8
NO CHECK No check
Purpose Operation test/Check
CHECKING During checking
OK Check complete OK Function (Purpose) Check the transmission of the selected
NG A## Check complete NG Error occurring address or data sound message to the line and the main
line is displayed for each item. unit speaker (transmission level: max)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-4 1) Select target item.
<Sound message table>
Function (Purpose) Check the transmission of the selected sig-
nal to the line and the main unit speaker NONE (Mute) PAUSE (Pause MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
(transmission level: max) melody) (Message 1) (Message 2)
MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6
Section FAX
(Message 3) (Message 4) (Massage 5) (Message 6)
Operation/Procedure ALARM (Alarm) RINGER EXT.TEL.RING
1) Select target item. (Ringing sound ER (External
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. (Speaker)) telephone call)
<Signal send table>
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34

26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
66-9
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34 Purpose Operation test/Check
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33 Function (Purpose) Check the transmission of the selected
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17 sound message to the line and the main
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t unit speaker (transmission level: soft SW
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100 setting)
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
DP MAKE DP BRK NO MSG Volt/mA
66-5
Purpose Operation test/Check 66-10
Function (Purpose) Check the transmission of the selected sig- Purpose Data clear
nal to the line and the main unit speaker Function (Purpose) Clear the FAX and image send image data
(transmission level: soft SW setting)
Section FAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
2) Tap [YES] key.
66-11
66-6
Purpose Data output/Check
Function (Purpose) Check the transmission of the selected sig-
Function (Purpose) Print the confidential registration check nal at 300bps to the line and the main unit
table (BOX No, BOX name, passcode) speaker (transmission level: max)
Section FAX Section FAX
1) Tap [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select target item.
Confidential check table is printed. 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
<300bps send signal table>
66-7 NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
010101 00001
Purpose Data output/Check
Function (Purpose) Print the all image data saved in the image
memory
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Image data saved in the image memory are printed.

66-12 66-18
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Check the transmission of the selected sig- Function (Purpose) Check the transmission of the DTMF signal
nal at 300bps to the line and the main unit to the line and the main unit speaker (trans-
speaker (transmission level: soft SW set- mission level: soft SW setting)
ting) Section FAX
Section FAX Operation/Procedure
1) Select target item. 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
66-21
66-13 Purpose Check
Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Print system error, protocol monitor
Function (Purpose) Set dial number for SIM66-14/15/16 dial Section FAX
test
Operation/Procedure
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter number.
<FAX information print content table>
2) Tap [SET] key.
PROTOCOL LINE 1 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1
66-14
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Check the dial pulse (10pps) transmission
test and to adjust the make time 66-22
Section FAX Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Set the handset sound volume (Japan
1) Select target item. model only)
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-15 2) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Check the dial pulse (20pps) transmission
test and to adjust the make time 66-29
Section FAX Purpose Clear
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Clear the address book data
1) Select target item. Section FAX
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
2) Tap [YES] key.
66-16 The telephone book data area cleared.
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Check the DTMF signal transmission test
and to adjust the transmission level 66-30
Section FAX Purpose Operation test/Check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Display the TEL/LIU status change (display
1) Select target item. is highlighted by status change)
Operation/Procedure
1) RGDT, RHS, EXHS and SiDAA are highlighted when the sig-
66-17 nal is detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not
Purpose Operation test/Check detected.
Function (Purpose) Check the transmission of the DTMF signal <TEL/LIU status change item description>
to the line and the main unit speaker (trans- RGDT Telephone line voltage
mission level: max) RHS Handset hook SW
Section FAX EXHS External telephone hook SW
Operation/Procedure SiDAA Polarity inversion signal


66-31 66-39
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the output port for TEL/LIU Function (Purpose) Set the destination for FAX
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. <Destination setting table>
<Port which outputs to TEL/LIU> JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIA
CION S. 150Von CHINA ASIA&OTHERS
66-32 66-42
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Check the received data and to display the Function (Purpose) Write the program to power control installed
result in the FAX
3) Tap [YES] key.
66-33
Purpose Operation test/Check 66-43
Function (Purpose) Check various signals detection result Purpose Setting
Section FAX Function (Purpose) Write the adjustment value into the power
control installed in the FAX
Operation/Procedure
Section FAX
When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG Operation/Procedure
CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected, 1) Select target item.
they are normally displayed. 2) Enter set value and tap [OK] key.
<Signal used for signal detection check> 3) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
(When "FNET" is selected) <Set range and default of each set value>
FNET Item Set range Default
A CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 6
(When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected)
B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 to 254 10
BUSY TONE CNG CED DTMF C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 to 255 142
D CI_COUNT 2 to 15 3
E RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 15
F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 225 240
66-36 G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 2
Purpose Operation test/Check H SON_TIMEOUT 1 to 127 20
Function (Purpose) Check send and receive data of MFP con-

troller interface
Section FAX 66-61
Operation/Procedure Purpose Setting
1) Select target item. Function (Purpose) Set the FAX related soft SW (151-250)
<MFP controller I/F check item table> Operation/Procedure
MFP <- MDMC (DATA once) MFP -> MDMC (DATA once) 1) Enter the set value to [SW NO].
Data line Once Data line Once 2) Tap [DATA] key.
MFP <- MDMC (DATA repeat) MFP -> MDMC (DATA repeat)
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
Data line Repeat Data line Repeat
MFP <- MDMC (CMD once) MFP -> MDMC (CMD once) 3) Enter the number to the bit to be changed.
Command line Once Command line Once * [1] -> [0]
MFP <- MDMC (CMD repeat) MFP -> MDMC (CMD repeat) [0] -> [1]
Command line Repeat Command line Repeat

66-62 Setting
Button Item/Display Content Default
range
Purpose Backup
COPY A LIGHT_X Copy density range 1-11 6
Function (Purpose) Store the FAX receive data to the USB (GRAY) LIGHT X axis
memory in PDF format B LIGHT_Y Copy density range 1-11 6
Section FAX LIGHT Y axis
Operation/Procedure C DARK_X Copy density range 1-11 6
DARK X axis
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit. D DARK_Y Copy density range 1-11 6
2) Select target item. DARK Y axis
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. PRINTER A LIGHT_X Printer density range 1-11 6
(GRAY) LIGHT X axis
Execute import of data selected in procedure 2).
B LIGHT_Y Printer density range 1-11 6
LIGHT Y axis
Error display Content
C DARK_X Printer density range 1-11 6
ERROR: NO USB MEMORY DEVICE No USB flash drive installed
DARK X axis
ERROR: NO IMAGE DATA No image data
D DARK_Y Printer density range 1-11 6
ERROR Other errors
DARK Y axis
67
67-24
67-17 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Purpose Reset Function (Purpose) Adjust printer color balance (Auto)
Function (Purpose) Clear printer controller Section Printer
Section Printer Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
1) Tap [EXECUTE] key. The 48 color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
2) Tap [YES] key. 2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
The set data related to the printer controller are initialized. select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the 3) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
normal display. The printer color balance auto adjustment is performed, and
the adjustment result is printed.
4) Tap [OK] key.
67-20 The halftone correction target registration is processed.
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the gray balance (Auto adjustment)
67-25
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select target item mode. Function (Purpose) Adjust printer color balance (Manual)
Patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. Section Printer
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table. Operation/Procedure
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys.
4) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table. 2) Select target item.
5) Tap [EXECUTE] key. 3) Enter the set value.
6) Tap [OK] key. * When the key is tapped, the setting value of each item
The halftone correction target registration is processed. can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
67-21 increased, and vice versa.
Purpose When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the check pattern in printed in the
color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment value.
Function (Purpose) Adjust the gray balance (Manual adjust-
ment) Item/Display Setting range Default
Section A POINT1 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure B POINT2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 1 - 999 500
1) Select adjustment item.
D POINT4 1 - 999 500
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key. E POINT5 1 - 999 500
Patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. F POINT6 1 - 999 500
3) Input mesurement result based on patch image (adjustment G POINT7 1 - 999 500
pattern) printed. H POINT8 1 - 999 500
4) Tap [EXECUTE] key. I POINT9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 1 - 999 500

Item/Display Setting range Default J Point J target value
O POINT15 1 - 999 500 K Point K target value
P POINT16 1 - 999 500 L Point L target value
Q POINT17 1 - 999 500 M Point M target value
N Point N target value
O Point O target value
P Point P target value
67-26 BASE Background sampling value
Function (Purpose) Set the target color balance of the printer
mode auto color balance adjustment
67-28
Section Printer Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Set the default of the service target of the
1) Select the target color balance. printer mode auto color adjustment
Item/Display Content Default Section Printer
Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1 Operation/Procedure
value target in the automatic color balance 1) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
table operation is slightly shifted to Magenta.
select When this target is selected, the color 2) Tap [YES] key.
balance is converted into natural gray The service target of the printer mode auto color balance
color balance by the color table in an adjustment is set to the default.
actual printer mode and print is made.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
target in the automatic color balance
balance as the factory color balance target.
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray
color balance. When this target is
selected, the color balance is slightly
shifted to Cyan by the color table in an 67-31
Purpose Data clear
target in the automatic color balance Function (Purpose) Clear the printer calibration value
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When
Section Printer
this target is selected, the color balance is
converted into the color balance with Operation/Procedure
enhanced Cyan by the color table in an 1) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
2) Tap [YES] key.
The printer calibration data (Halftone correction data) are
cleared.
67-27 (The printer color balance correction is canceled.)
Function (Purpose) Set the service target of the printer mode
67-33
auto color balance adjustment
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Set the gamma of the printer screen
1) Tap [SETUP] key. Section Printer
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern printed in SIM 67-25 on Operation/Procedure
the document table. 1) Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key. 2) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. 3) Select target item.
4) Tap [OK] key. 4) Enter the set value.
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance 5) Tap [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
adjustment is set according to the scanned adjustment pattern When [EXECUTE] key is tapped, the check pattern in printed in the
sheet patch images. color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment value.
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
Setting
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. Item/Display Content Default
range
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
This simulation is executed only when the printer color balance is C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
manually adjusted. D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128
E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
B Point B target value F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
C Point C target value G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
D Point D target value H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128
E Point E target value I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
F Point F target value J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
G Point G target value K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
H Point H target value L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
I Point I target value M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128

Setting Item/Display Content Default
range B K K engine maximum 0 1
N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128 density correction
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128 ENABLE
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128 K engine maximum 1
Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128 density correction
DISABLE
MX-xx61/xx71 C CYAN MAX TARGET C maximum density 500
correction target
Display Content Button
D MAGENTA MAX TARGET M maximum density 500
HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper CMYK
correction target
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo
E YELLOW MAX TARGET Y maximum density 500
SCREEN2 600dpi 1 bit Graphics
correction target
SCREEN3 600dpi 4 bit Photo
F BLACK MAX TARGET B maximum density 500
SCREEN4 600dpi 4 bit Graphics correction target
SCREEN5 1200dpi 1bit Photo G PRINTER TOTAL TONER Printer total toner limitation 0
SCREEN6 1200dpi 1bit Graphics LIMIT SETUP
SCREEN7 B/W 600dpi 1bit Photo K H RATIO LOW Mix ratio of high density 33
SCREEN8 B/W 600dpi 4bit Photo correction LOW
SCREEN9 B/W 1200dpi 1bit Photo I RATIO HIGH Mix ratio of high density 0
SCREEN11 B/W 600dpi 1bit Graphics correction HIGH
SCREEN12 B/W 600dpi 4bit Graphics J DITHER THRESHOLD Dither threshold LOW 250
SCREEN13 B/W 1200dpi 1bit Graphics K SLOPE THRESHOLD Slope threshold HIGH 400
SCREEN14 DotScreen1 CMYK
* When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set items
SCREEN15 DotScreen2
A and B to "0."
SCREEN16 DotScreen1_BW K
The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone
SCREEN17 DotScreen2_BW
gap is reduced.
SCREEN18 SHIGH CMYK
SCREEN19 1200dpi SHIGH * To increase the density in the high density section further, set
SCREEN20 600dpi Super low items A and B to "1.
SCREEN21 1200dpi Super low The tone gap may occur in high density part.
SCREEN22 Extrahigh
MX-xx51
Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these values
Display Content Button are changed, the density in the high density area is changed.
HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper CMYK
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo
SCREEN2 600dpi 1 bit Graphics
67-36
SCREEN3 600dpi 4 bit Photo
SCREEN4 600dpi 4 bit Graphics Purpose Adjustment/Setup
SCREEN7 B/W 600dpi 1bit Photo K Function (Purpose) Set the density in the low density section
SCREEN8 B/W 600dpi 4bit Photo
Section Printer
SCREEN11 B/W 600dpi 1bit Graphics
SCREEN12 B/W 600dpi 4bit Graphics
Operation/Procedure
SCREEN14 DotScreen1 CMYK 1) Select target item.
SCREEN15 DotScreen2 2) Enter the adjustment value.
SCREEN16 DotScreen1_BW K 3) Tap [OK] key.
SCREEN18 SHIGH CMYK
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images
SCREEN20 600dpi Super low
are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
SCREEN22 Extrahigh
low density are images are weakly reproduced.
When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight
section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.
67-34
Setting
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Item/Display Content Default
range
Function (Purpose) Set the density correction in the printer high A A PATCH INPUT C A patch input value C
density section B A PATCH INPUT M A patch input value M
C A PATCH INPUT Y A patch input value Y
Section Printer
D A PATCH INPUT K A patch input value K 0 - 13 1
Operation/Procedure
1) Select target item
67-41
3) Tap [OK] key.
Item/Display Content Default Function (Purpose) Set 2 color print
A CMY CMY engine maximum 0 0
density correction mode Section Printer
ENABLE Operation/Procedure
CMY engine maximum 1 1) Select target item.
density correction
DISABLE
3) Tap [OK] key.

Setting 67-52
range
A C1 Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5
B V1 Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0
Function (Purpose) Set the default of the printer screen gamma
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target default setting mode.
67-42
Tap [ALL] key to select all the modes.
Purpose Adjustment
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key and tap [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Set 2 color print color density
When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33,
Section Printer SIM67-54, it is reset to the default.
Operation/Procedure MX-xx61/xx71
Item/Display Content Default HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
Black F1 Black : Light F2 Printer heavy paper automatic density
(Achromatic color) F2 Black : Normal correction amount
F3 Black : Dark 1200DPI_1BIT SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit Photo)
SCREEN6 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
COLOR G1 Selected color : Light G2
SCREEN21 (1200dpi SuperLow)
(Selected color) G2 Selected color : Normal
600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit Photo)
G3 Selected color : Dark
B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
67-43 SCREEN9 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
SCREEN11(600dpi 1bit Graphics)
Purpose Adjustment SCREEN12 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)
Function (Purpose) Adjust the color balance in the 2 color SCREEN13 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
mode Printer B/W toner save automatic density
Section Printer correction amount
4BIT_GRAPHICS SCREEN4 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)
Operation/Procedure
DOT_SCREEN1 SCREEN14(Dot Screen1)
1) Select target item. DOT_SCREEN2 SCREEN15(Dot Screen2)
2) Enter the set value. DOT_SCREEN1_BW SCREEN16(Dot Screen1 BW)
3) Tap [OK] key. DOT_SCREEN2_BW SCREEN17(Dot Screen2 BW)
SHIGH SCREEN18(SHIGH)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Color range C M Y MX-xx51
A RED R output CMY 0 - 255 0 235 224
Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
color
Printer heavy paper automatic density
B GREEN G output CMY 0 - 255 180 0 241
correction amount
color
600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit Photo)
C BLUE B output CMY 0 - 255 235 159 0
color
B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
D CYAN C output CMY 0 - 255 182 0 25
color SCREEN8 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)
E MAGENTA M output CMY 0 - 255 0 271 0 SCREEN11(600dpi 1bit Graphics)
color SCREEN12 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)
F YELLOW Y output CMY 0 - 255 0 0 234 Printer B/W toner save automatic density
color correction amount
4BIT_GRAPHIC SCREEN4 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)
S
DOT_SCREEN1 SCREEN14(Dot Screen1)
67-46 DOT_SCREEN2 SCREEN15(Dot Screen2)
DOT_SCREEN1 SCREEN16(Dot Screen1 BW)
Purpose Adjustment
_BW
Function (Purpose) Adjust the image enhancement SHIGH SCREEN18(SHIGH)
Section
Operation/Procedure
67-54
Purpose Adjustment
3) Tap [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Adjust printer color balance
Item/Display Content Default Section Printer
A PROCESS Edge judgement range 0 0 Operation/Procedure
CMYK
This simulation is used to adjust the color balance, the density, and
Edge judgement range K 1
the gradation in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode,
B CANCEL 600dpi Edge cancel 600dpi 64
the 1200dpi mode.
C CANCEL 1200dpi Edge cancel 1200dpi 64
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.

1) Tap [EXECUTE] key. (A4 or A3 paper is automatically After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
selected.) Image), tap [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. tered.
2) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the 10) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
procedure 1) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default.
patch image (adjustment pattern).
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
mality.
4) Tap [OK] key.
5) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
MX-xx61/xx71
Select item (Mode) Content
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in
the heavy paper mode
1200dpi 1bit SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit Photo)
B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit)
SCREEN8 (600dpi 4bit)
Printer B/W toner save automatic density
correction amount
SCREEN11(PCL B/W 600dpi 1bit Graphics)
DOT_SCREEN1 SCREEN14(Dot(HIGH))
DOT_SCREEN2 SCREEN14(Dot(LOW))
DOT_SCREEN1_BW SCREEN16(BW 600dpi DOT)
MX-xx51
Select item (Mode) Content
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in
the heavy paper mode
B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit)
Printer B/W toner save automatic density
correction amount
DOT_SCREEN1 SCREEN14(Dot(HIGH))
DOT_SCREEN2 SCREEN14(Dot(LOW))
6) Tap [EXECUTE] key. (A4 or A3 paper is automatically

selected.)
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
7) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 6) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side.
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
the color balance check patch image is printed out.
9) When [OK] key is tapped, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is tapped, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image), tap
[EXECUTE] key.

[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
MX-4071
Service Manual
1. Trouble code and troubleshooting D. Self diag operation

The machine always monitors its own state.
A. General
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and dis-
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- plays the trouble message.
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is nearly
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user and
expired or is expired.
the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, this
feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the machine to When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or may
minimize the damage. not be stopped.
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
B. Function and purpose the LCD and lamp.
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a trou- Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trouble is
ble.) repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simulation.
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
stopped on detection of a trouble.) cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning messages
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be must be cleared by a simulation.
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.)
Monitors the machine
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows to conditions.
arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This avoids
stopping of the machine due to running out the a consumable
part.) Detects/analyzes
the content.
C. Self diag message kinds
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Warning
࠙࣬
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration,
etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by Trouble
Πρήσ
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others -
൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
stopped.
Others -
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).
Reset
໘‫ܦ‬
Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state
MX-4071 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 1

E. Breakdown sequence
(1) Trouble code and operatable mode
Judge Operable mode

Trouble content ment Trouble code Copy Scan Scan Scan List FAX FAX
Print
block scan (Push) (Pull) ToHDD print send print
Security Security module SCN E7(C0, C1) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
abnormality abnormality MFP
trouble Firmware E7(C2, C3) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
abnormality
FAX trouble FAX board F6(00, 01, 02, 04, 21, 30, 97,       1 1
breakdown 98)
HDD trouble eMMC breakdown E7(A8) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD breakdown E7(03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD-ASIC E7(04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
Operation OPU U9(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
communication communication
trouble trouble
Scanner SCN A0(02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
communication communication E7(80)
trouble trouble
Engine PCU A0(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
communication communication E7(90)
trouble trouble
Backup battery Backup battery U1(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
voltage fall low voltage *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
trouble
Operation Memory error U2(00, 11, 41, 42) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
2_save Serial number U2(30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
data error *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
HDD registration U2(50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
data check sum *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
error
Operation External serial I/F U7(50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble 2 communication
error
Memory error U2(40, 42) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Connection A0(06, 07, 08, 10, 15, 17, 18, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (ICU 19, 20)
detection) E7(60, 61)
Operation Image memory E7(01, 49, 91, 92, 93, 94) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble 3 trouble, decode
error
Operation Personal counter PC(00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble 4 not-installed
trouble
Power controller Power controller L8(20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble trouble
Special function Special function U2(60, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74)        
trouble error *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16

Judge Operable mode
Print
Laser trouble Laser breakdown PCU E7(20, 24, 28, 29, A0) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
L6(10) *10
Engine trouble 1 Connection A0(21) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (PCU E7(50, 55)
detection) F1(50)
Engine trouble PCU trouble H3(00, 01, 02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2_save (motor, fuser etc) H4(00, 01, 02, 30, 32) *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *10 *20 *20
H5(01) *20
U2(90, 91)
Engine trouble 2 PCU trouble C1(01, 10, 14, 15, 16, 40, 41) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(motor, fuser,etc) C4(00, 05, 20, 25, 30, 31, 35, *10
40)
F2(22, 40, 64, 70, 74)
H2(00, 01, 02, 03, 05, 06)
H7(10, 12)
L4(02, 03, 06, 07, 09, 11, 12,
16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 32, 35, 39,
43, 44, 50, 51, 75, 76, 77, 78,
79)
L8(01, 02, 03)
Color trouble PCU color trouble C1(03, 05, 07) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
E7(21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27, A1, *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *10 *19 *19
A2, A3) *19
F2(23, 24, 25, 41, 42, 43, 65,
66, 67, 71, 72, 73, 75, 76, 77,
95, 96, 97, 98)
Paper feed tray 1 Paper feed tray 1 F3(12) 3    3 3  3
trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray 2 Paper feed tray 2 F3(22) 3    3 3  3
Paper feed tray 3 Paper feed tray 3 U6(01) 3    3 3  3
trouble_save breakdown *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *10 *20 *20
*20
*20
*20
Paper feed tray 5 Paper feed tray 5 U6(20, 21, 22, 23, 51) 3    3 3  3
Paper feed tray Paper feed tray U6(00, 10, 50, 52, 54, 55) 11    11 11  11
other trouble other breakdown *10
Finisher trouble Finisher F1(00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
breakdown 08, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, *10
18, 19, 20, 22, 23, 28, 29, 30,
31, 32, 33, 34, 37, 38, 41, 42,
43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 51,
53, 54, 55, 78, 83, 89)
Other trouble Other trouble EE(EC, EL, EU)        
Process control Process control F2(39, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 58,        
trouble breakdown (PCU 78) *12
detection)

Judge Operable mode
Print
Operation Connection SCU A0(22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble trouble (SCN
detection)
Color system SCN color trouble UC(02) 9 9 9 9   9 
trouble (SCU (SCN detection)
detection)
Color system SCN color trouble UC(12) 8 8 8 8   8 
trouble (DSPF (DSPF detection)
detection)
Anticopying Anticopying UC(20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
trouble
Anticopying Anticopying UC(30) 7 7 7 7   7 
trouble (DSPF (DSPF detection)
detection)
Scanner trouble EEPROM error U2(80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
1_save *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
Scanner trouble Scanner section L1(00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
2 breakdown L3(00)
CCD trouble CCD breakdown E7(10, 11, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
SPF/DF trouble RSPF/DF U5(00, 16, 20, 30, 31) 6 6 6 6   6 
breakdown
SPF back General trouble in E6(10, 11, 14) 7 7 7 7   7 
surface trouble the SPF back
surface scanning
section
Trouble only history data are saved
History data is saved (PCU detection) PCU F2(45)        

History data is saved (MFP detection) ICU U2(05)        
: Operation enabled ✕: Operation disabled

1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line
3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section
6: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode
7: When detected during other a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode or one side scan mode
8: When detected in other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the duplex color scan mode
9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the monochrome mode
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred
11: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK
*12: A trouble message is displayed (EX: Ready to copy F2 trouble)
15: When in U2-22 trouble notification cannot be made. If there is no abnormality in the FAX software
*16: Print is enable displays with OK key "Call for service. CODE **-**"
17: Job execution enable only in a format other high compression PDF.
*19: When the color mode is set to disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the monochrome
mode
*20: Displays "Call for service ERROR **-**"

(2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power
MFP event Each block

manager
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6 Saved in the PCU
F3 Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16 sim task
SIM13: U1 trouble cancel

SIM14: H3, H4, H5
(Color mode inhibition) cancel
SIM15: LCC/LCT (U6) trouble cancel,
F3 trouble cancel Trouble cancel
SIM16: U2 trouble cancel Trouble cancel command
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.
The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.
Process sequence Error code Content

50 HDD user authentication data check sum error
U2
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
First
(Low priority) A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
 U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
 E7 48 Scanner expansion PWB ASIC memory error
47 Inconsistency between the MFP and the ACRE firmware
Last 42 Image data trouble (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC)
(High priority)
A0 04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) ROM error
U1 01 Battery trouble
E7 60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection)

F. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Trouble Mechanis
Main Sub Trouble description Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection m
code code
A0 01 PCU ROM error PCU 
02 SCN ROM error SCN 
06 FAX ROM error MFP 
10 Color profile error MFP 
15 Stored DSK data conflict MFP 
17 UI data error MFP 
18 ASIC MAIN firmware inconsistent error MFP 
19 MFP boot error MFP 
20 MFP firmware and EEPROM data inconsistent error MFP 
21 PCU firmware and EEPROM data inconsistent error PCU 
22 SCN firmware and EEPROM data inconsistent error SCN 
C1 10 Main charger error K PCU 
14 Main charger error CL PCU 
15 MC circuit error K PCU 
16 MC circuit error CL PCU 
40 MC PWB trouble PCU 
41 MC / TC PWB trouble PCU 
C4 00 PTC output error PCU 
05 PTC circuit error PCU 
20 1TC output error PCU 
25 1TC circuit error PCU 
30 2TC output open error PCU 
31 2TC output short error PCU 
35 2TC circuit error PCU 
40 TC PWB trouble PCU 
E6 10 Shading black correction error (SPF) SCN 
11 Shading white correction error (SPF) SCN 
14 CCD ASIC error (SPF) SCN 
E7 01 Image data error MFP 
03 HDD error MFP 
04 HDD-ASIC error (DSK) MFP 
10 Shading black correction error (OC) SCN 
11 Shading white correction error (OC) SCN 
14 CCD-ASIC error (OC) SCN 
20 LSU BD detection / LD deterioration error K PCU 
21 LSU LD deterioration error C PCU 
22 LSU LD deterioration error M PCU 
23 LSU LD deterioration error Y PCU 
24 LSU LD driver error K PCU 
25 LSU LD driver error C PCU 
26 LSU LD driver error M PCU 
27 LSU LD driver error Y PCU 
28 LSU ASIC - PCU access error PCU 
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU 
49 Watermark data error MFP 
50 PCU PWB and firmware inconsistent error PCU 
55 PCU PWB information sum error PCU 
60 SCN MFP PWB and firmware inconsistent error MFP 
61 SCN MFP PWB and PCU PWB combination error MFP 
80 SCN MFP PWB scanner communication error MFP 
90 SCN MFP PWB PCU PWB communication error MFP 
91 FAX received image data error MFP 
92 Copy image data error MFP 
93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print image data process error MFP 
94 Image data process error MFP 
99 LSU LD driver connection trouble PCU 
A0 LSU EEPROM / LD driver read/write error K PCU 
A1 LSU EEPROM / LD driver read/write error C PCU 
A2 LSU EEPROM / LD driver read/write error M PCU 
A3 LSU EEPROM / LD driver read/write error Y PCU 
A8 eMMC PWB error MFP 
C0 TPM PWB (DSK) access error MFP 
C1 Security check error MFP 
C2 Firmware check sum error MFP 
C3 Firmware error MFP 
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error PCU 
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (over toner) PCU 

Trouble code
Trouble Mechanis
detection m
code code
EE EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (under toner) PCU 
F1 00 Finisher communication error PCU 
01 Finisher jogger operation trouble (1K) PCU 
02 Finisher entry port transport operation trouble (1K) PCU 
03 Finisher oscillation operation trouble (3K) PCU 
04 Finisher paddle trouble (Inner) PCU 
04 Finisher paddle trouble (3K) PCU 
05 Finisher return operation trouble (Inner) PCU 
06 Finisher paper exit transport operation trouble (1K) PCU 
08 Finisher stapler shift operation trouble (Inner) PCU 
08 Finisher stapler shift operation trouble (1K) PCU 
08 Finisher stapler shift operation trouble (3K) PCU 
10 Finisher staple operation trouble (Inner) PCU 
10 Finisher staple operation trouble (1K) PCU 
10 Finisher staple operation trouble (3K) PCU 
11 Finisher paper exit operation trouble (1K) PCU 
12 Finisher proof transport operation trouble (1K) PCU 
13 Finisher paper exit guide plate operation trouble (1K) PCU 
14 Finisher rear paper edge flap operation trouble (3K) PCU 
15 Finisher tray lift operation trouble (Inner) PCU 
15 Finisher tray lift operation trouble (1K) PCU 
15 Finisher tray lift operation trouble (3K) PCU 
16 Finisher escape/saddle transport switching operation trouble (3K) PCU 
18 Finisher paper bundle hold operation trouble (Inner) PCU 
19 Finisher front paper alignment operation trouble (Inner) PCU 
19 Finisher front paper alignment operation trouble (3K) PCU 
20 Finisher rear paper alignment operation trouble (Inner) PCU 
20 Finisher rear paper alignment operation trouble (3K) PCU 
22 Finisher paper bundle exit operation trouble (Inner) PCU 
22 Finisher paper bundle exit operation trouble (3K) PCU 
23 Safety switch trouble (3K) PCU 
28 Finisher stacking operation trouble (1K) PCU 
28 Finisher stacking operation trouble (3K) PCU 
29 Fuse blown trouble (1K) PCU 
30 Finisher saddle communication error (3K) PCU 
31 Finisher saddle folding operation trouble (1K) PCU 
31 Finisher paper exit operation trouble (3K) PCU 
32 Finisher Punch unit communication error (Inner) PCU 
32 Finisher Punch unit communication error (3K) PCU 
33 Finisher punch shifting operation trouble (1K) PCU 
33 Finisher punch shifting operation trouble (3K) PCU 
34 Finisher punch operation trouble (Inner) PCU 
34 Finisher punch operation trouble (1K) PCU 
34 Finisher punch operation trouble (3K) PCU 
35 Finisher punch registration operation trouble (1K) PCU 
37 Finisher Backup memory error (Inner) PCU 
37 Finisher Backup memory error (3K) PCU 
38 Finisher Punch backup memory error (Inner) PCU 
38 Finisher Punch backup memory error (3K) PCU 
43 Finisher saddle alignment operation trouble (3K) PCU 
44 Finisher saddle gripper operation trouble (3K) PCU 
45 Finisher saddle staple operation trouble (3K) PCU 
47 Finisher saddle paper transport operation trouble (3K) PCU 
48 Finisher bundle transport upper pressure release / reference fence escape PCU 
motor trouble (1K)
49 Finisher bundle transport lower pressure release motor trouble (1K) PCU 
50 Finisher - Main machine incompatible error PCU 
51 Finisher communication error (3K) PCU 
53 Finisher - Main machine inconsistent error PCU 
54 Finisher punch unit destination inconsistent error (Inner)(3K) PCU 
55 Finisher firmware inconsistent error PCU 
78 Finisher eco staple operation trouble (Inner) PCU 
78 Finisher staple free stapler operation trouble (3K) PCU 
83 Finisher guide operation trouble (3K) PCU 
89 Finisher shift operation trouble (1K) PCU 
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble K PCU 
23 Discharge lamp trouble C PCU 

Trouble code
Trouble Mechanis
detection m
code code
F2 24 Discharge lamp trouble M PCU 
25 Discharge lamp trouble Y PCU 
39 Temperature sensor error PCU 
40 Toner density error K PCU 
41 Toner density error C PCU 
42 Toner density error M PCU 
43 Toner density error Y PCU 
45 Color image density sensor error PCU 
49 LSU thermistor error PCU 
50 Drum phase error K PCU 
51 Drum phase error CL PCU 
58 Humidity sensor error PCU 
64 Toner supply trouble K PCU 
65 Toner supply trouble C PCU 
66 Toner supply trouble M PCU 
67 Toner supply trouble Y PCU 
70 Improper toner cartridge error K PCU 
71 Improper toner cartridge error C PCU 
72 Improper toner cartridge error M PCU 
73 Improper toner cartridge error Y PCU 
74 Toner cartridge error K PCU 
75 Toner cartridge error C PCU 
76 Toner cartridge error M PCU 
77 Toner cartridge error Y PCU 
78 Image density sensor error PCU 
95 Toner cartridge ejecting trouble K PCU 
96 Toner cartridge ejecting trouble C PCU 
97 Toner cartridge ejecting trouble M PCU 
98 Toner cartridge ejecting trouble Y PCU 
F3 12 Paper feed tray1 lift operation trouble PCU 
22 Desk paper feed tray1 lift operation trouble PCU 
F6 00 SCN MFP PWB - FAX communication error MFP 
01 FAX EEPROM read/write error FAX 
02 FAX power supply trouble FAX 
04 FAX modem operation trouble FAX 
21 Improper combination of FAX PWB and FAX soft switch inconsistent error FAX 
30 FAX power controller access error FAX 
97 FAX and main machine inconsistent error MFP 
98 FAX and main machine destination inconsistent error MFP 
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU 
01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM) PCU 
02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US1) PCU 
03 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD1) PCU 
H3 00 Fuser high temperature error (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Fuser high temperature error (TH_LM) PCU 
02 Fuser high temperature error (TH_US1) PCU 
H4 00 Fuser low temperature error (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Fuser low temperature error (TH_LM) PCU 
02 Fuser low temperature error (TH_US1) PCU 
30 Thermistor input error (TH_UM) PCU 
32 Thermistor input error (TH_US1) PCU 
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not reached jam detection / Detection of paper PCU 
twining around roller
H7 10 Fuser low temperature recovery error (TH_UM) PCU 
12 Fuser low temperature recovery error (TH_US) PCU 
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCN 
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCN 
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU 
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU 
06 Transfer unit lift trouble PCU 
07 Transfer belt motor trouble PCU 
09 Registration motor trouble PCU 
11 Offset motor trouble PCU 
12 Secondary transfer separation trouble PCU 
16 Fusing pressure release trouble PCU 
17 Drum motor trouble K PCU 
18 Drum motor trouble C PCU 

Trouble code
Trouble Mechanis
detection m
code code
L4 32 Power supply fan 1 trouble PCU 
35 Fusing fan trouble PCU 
43 Paper exit fan trouble PCU 
50 Process fan 1 trouble PCU 
51 Process fan 2 trouble PCU 
75 Paper exit motor trouble PCU 
76 Reverse motor trouble PCU 
77 ADU motor 1 trouble PCU 
78 ADU motor 2 trouble PCU 
79 Transport motor trouble PCU 
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU 
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU 
02 Full wave signal error PCU 
20 Power controller communication error MFP 
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP 
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP 
05 Account data error MFP 
11 MFP EEPROM counter check sum error MFP 
30 SCN MFP PWB and PCU PWB data inconsistency MFP 
40 eMMC PWB system storage data error MFP 
41 HDD storage data area error MFP 
42 Machine adjustment data error MFP 
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFP 
60 Watermark check error MFP 
70 OCR dictionary check error MFP 
71 Voice IC error MFP 
72 Voice data check error MFP 
73 NFC tag error MFP 
74 Recovery data error MFP 
80 SCN EEPROM read/write error SCN 
81 SCN EEPROM check sum error SCN 
90 PCU EEPROM read/write error PCU 
91 PCU EEPROM check sum error PCU 
U5 00 SPF communication error SCN 
16 SPF fan trouble SCN 
20 SPF transport trouble SCN 
30 SPF document feed tray lift up trouble SCN 
31 SPF document feed tray lift down trouble SCN 
U6 00 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk communication error PCU 
01 Desk paper feed tray2 lift trouble PCU 
02 Desk paper feed tray3 lift trouble PCU 
09 LCC lift trouble PCU 
10 Desk paper transport trouble PCU 
20 LCC PWB - PCU PWB communication error PCU 
21 LCC paper transport trouble PCU 
22 LCC 24V power trouble PCU 
23 LCC tray descending trouble PCU 
50 Desk - Main machine combination trouble PCU 
51 LCC - Main machine combination trouble PCU 
52 Desk communication error PCU 
54 LCC firmware inconsistent error PCU 
55 Desk firmware inconsistent error PCU 
U7 50 Vendor machine communication error MFP 
51 Vendor machine operation trouble MFP 
U9 01 Touch panel trouble MFP 
UC 02 ASIC CPT error SCN 
12 ASIC CPT error (DSPF) SCN 
20 ASIC DOCC error SCN 
30 ASIC DOCC error (DSPF) SCN 

G. Details of trouble codes and countermeasures
A0-01 PCU ROM error A0-20 MFP firmware and EEPROM data incon-
Trouble detection PCU
sistent error
Cause The firmware update is not completed properly by Trouble detection MFP
interruption of the power during the update operation
Cause Inconsistency between MFP firmware version and
PCU PWB trouble
EEPROM data version
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute the firmware update
Replace PCU PWB
A0-21 PCU firmware and EEPROM data incon-

A0-02 SCN ROM error
sistent error
Trouble detection MFP
Cause The firmware update is not completed properly by Trouble detection PCU
interruption of the power during the update operation. Cause Inconsistency between PCU firmware version and
SCN MFP PWB trouble EEPROM data version
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute the firmware update Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute the firmware update
Replace SCN MFP PWB
A0-22 SCN firmware and EEPROM data incon-

A0-06 FAX ROM error sistent error
Trouble detection MFP Trouble detection SCN
Cause The content of FAX ROM error Cause Inconsistency between SCN firmware version and
The firmware update is not completed properly by EEPROM data version
interruption of the power during the update operation. Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute the firmware update
FAX PWB trouble
Replace FAX PWB C1-10 Main charger error K
A0-10 Color profile error Cause Open or short circuit of the main charger output
1) Check & SIM8-2 to execute
Remedy >When there is leakage noise or flickering on the
Cause The content of the color profile error operation panel
Combination inconsistency between MFP firmware and Check insertion of main charger
color profile Check MC PWB spring contact point
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute the firmware update Replace main charger
Replace SCN MFP PWB Replace MC PWB harness
Replace developing unit (KCMY)
2) Check & SIM8-2 to execute
A0-15 Stored DSK data conflict Remedy >When there is no leakage noise
Check insertion of main charger
Trouble detection MFP Check connection state of MC PWB harness (T101) or
Cause Inconsistency of ASIC MAIN firmware version replace
DSK management state error Replace MC PWB
Check & Remedy Check ASIC MAIN firmware version Replace PCU PWB
Check installation state of TPM PWB
C1-14 Main charger error CL

A0-17 UI data error
Trouble detection MFP Cause Open or short circuit of the main charger output
Cause Inconsistency between UI contents and UI firmware 1) Check & SIM8-2 to execute
version Remedy > When there is leakage noise or flickering on the
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute the firmware update operation panel
Check MC PWB spring contact point
A0-18 ASIC MAIN firmware inconsistent error Replace main charger
Check connection state of MC PWB harness (T201) or
Trouble detection MFP replace
Cause Inconsistency of ASIC firmware version in MFP 2) Check & SIM8-2 to execute
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute the firmware update Remedy > When there is no leakage noise
Check connection state of MC PWB harness (T201) or
A0-19 MFP boot error replace
Replace MC PWB
Trouble detection MFP Replace PCU PWB
Cause ASIC trouble
Memory trouble
Check & Remedy Extract and insert eMMC PWB
Replace eMMC PWB
Replace SCN MFP PWB

C1-15 MC circuit error K C4-20 1TC output error
Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU
Cause MC PWB connector, harness connection trouble Cause Open circuit of 1TC output
MC PWB error circuit trouble 1) Check & SIM8-6 to execute
Check & Remedy Check connection state of MC PWB connector, harness Remedy > When there is leakage noise or flickering on the
(CN1-10pin) or replace operation panel
Replace MC PWB Check insertion of primary transfer unit
Replace primary transfer unit
Check TC PWB spring contact point
C1-16 MC circuit error CL Replace TC PWB
Replace PCU PWB
Trouble detection PCU 2) Check & Check clutch (1TURC_1/1TURC_2) operation
Cause MC PWB connector, harness connection trouble Remedy If clutch or gear do not move smoothly or have noise
MC PWB error circuit trouble Check/Replace harness and clutch (1TURC_1/
Check & Remedy Check connection state of MC PWB connector, harness 1TURC_2)
(CN1-11pin) or replace Check/Replace primary transfer unit
Replace MC PWB 3) Check & Check OPC drum operation and then is not normal
Remedy movement
Replace motor (DM_K/DM_CL)
C1-40 MC PWB trouble Replace OPC drum

Cause MC PWB connector connection trouble C4-25 1TC circuit error
MC PWB harness connection trouble
24V fuse meltdown and error circuit trouble in MC PWB Trouble detection PCU
Check & Remedy Check connection state of MC PWB connector (CN1) Cause TC PWB harness connection trouble
Check connection state of MC PWB harness (CN1- TC PWB error circuit trouble
10pin, 11pin) or replace Check & Remedy Check connection state of TC PWB harness (CN1-2pin)
Replace MC PWB or replace
Replace TC PWB
C1-41 MC / TC PWB trouble

C4-30 2TC output open error
Cause PCU PWB connector connection trouble Trouble detection PCU
MC PWB, TC PWB connector connection trouble Cause Open circuit of 2TC output
24V fuses meltdown in MC PWB and TC PWB 1) Check & SIM8-6 to execute
Check & Remedy Check connection state of PCU PWB connector (CN10) Remedy > When there is leakage noise or flickering on the
Check connection state of MC PWB and TC PWB operation panel
connector (CN1) Check insertion of primary transfer unit
Replace MC PWB and TC PWB Replace primary transfer unit
Check secondary transfer unit
Replace secondary transfer unit
C4-00 PTC output error Check connection state of TC PWB harness (T101) or
replace
Trouble detection PCU Replace TC PWB
Cause PTC connector connection trouble Replace PCU PWB
PTC unit trouble 2) Check & Check clutch (2TURC) operation
TC PWB trouble Remedy If clutch or gear do not move smoothly or have noise
PCU PWB trouble Check/Replace harness and clutch (2TURC)
Check & Remedy Check connection state of PTC connector (T201) Check/Replace secondary transfer unit
Replace PTC PWB
Replace TC PWB
Replace PCU PWB C4-31 2TC output short error
C4-05 PTC circuit error Cause Incomplete insertion of secondary transfer unit
Secondary transfer unit trouble
Trouble detection PCU TC PWB trouble
Cause TC PWB harness connection trouble Check & Remedy SIM8-6 to execute
TC PWB error circuit trouble Check insertion of secondary transfer unit
Check & Remedy Check connection state of TC PWB harness (CN1-4pin) Check/Replace secondary transfer unit
or replace Replace TC PWB
Replace TC PWB
C4-35 2TC circuit error

Cause TC PWB harness connection trouble
TC PWB error circuit trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of TC PWB harness (CN1-3pin)
or replace
Replace TC PWB

C4-40 TC PWB trouble E7-10 Shading black correction error (OC)
Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection SCN
Cause TC PWB connector connection trouble Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when scanner
TC PWB harness pin disconnection lamp is turned OFF
24V fuse meltdown, error circuit breakage in the TC CCD unit connector, harness connection trouble
PWB CCD unit trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of TC PWB connector (CN1) SCN MFP PWB trouble
Check connection state of TC PWB harness (CN1-2pin, Check & Remedy Check connection state of CCD unit connector, harness
3pin, 4pin) Replace CCD unit
Replace TC PWB Replace SCN MFP PWB
E6-10 Shading black correction error (SPF) E7-11 Shading white correction error (OC)
Trouble detection SCN Trouble detection SCN
Cause CCD unit connector, harness connection trouble Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan level
CCD unit trouble when scanner lamp is turned ON
DSPF PWB trouble CCD unit connector, harness connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of CCD unit connector, harness Dirt on mirror, lens and white reference plate
Replace CCD unit Scanner lamp lighting trouble
Replace DSPF PWB CCD unit trouble
SCN MFP PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of CCD unit connector, harness
E6-11 Shading white correction error (SPF) Check connection state of scanner lamp unit connector,
harness
Trouble detection SCN Clean mirror, lens and white reference plate
Cause CCD unit connector, harness connection trouble Replace CCD unit
Scanner lamp lighting trouble Replace SCN MFP PWB
Dirt on mirror, reference white plate
CCD unit trouble
DSPF PWB trouble E7-14 CCD-ASIC error (OC)
Check & Remedy Check connection state of CCD unit connector, harness
Check connection state of scanner lamp connector, Trouble detection SCN
harness Cause SCN MFP PWB trouble
Clean the reference white plate Check & Remedy Replace SCN MFP PWB
Replace CCD unit
Replace DSPF PWB
SIM63-2 to execute E7-20 LSU BD detection / LD deterioration
error K
E6-14 CCD-ASIC error (SPF) Trouble detection PCU
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble
Trouble detection SCN
LSU connector, harness connection trouble
Cause DSPF PWB trouble BD PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace DSPF PWB LSU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM61-1 to execute
Check connection state of LSU connector, harness
E7-01 Image data error Replace LSU unit

Cause Image data transmission error in SCN MFP PWB E7-21 LSU LD deterioration error C
SCN MFP PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of SCN MFP PWB connector, Trouble detection PCU
harness Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble
Replace SCN MFP PWB LSU connector, harness connection trouble
LSU PWB trouble
E7-03 HDD error Check connection state of LSU connector, harness
Replace LSU unit
Cause SCN MFP PWB and HDD connector, harness
connection trouble E7-22 LSU LD deterioration error M
HDD trouble
SCN MFP PWB trouble Trouble detection PCU
Check & Remedy Check connection state of SCN MFP PWB and HDD Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble
connector, harness LSU connector, harness connection trouble
SIM62-3 to execute LSU PWB trouble
SIM62-4 to execute Check & Remedy SIM61-1 to execute
Replace HDD Check connection state of LSU connector, harness
Replace SCN MFP PWB Replace LSU unit
E7-04 HDD-ASIC error (DSK)

Cause HDD-ASIC trouble
Check & Remedy Replace SCN MFP PWB

E7-23 LSU LD deterioration error Y E7-49 Watermark data error
Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection MFP
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble Cause Watermark data error
LSU connector, harness connection trouble eMMC PWB trouble
LSU PWB trouble Check & Remedy SIM49-7 to execute
Check & Remedy SIM61-1 to execute Replace eMMC PWB
Check connection state of LSU connector, harness
Replace LSU unit
E7-50 PCU PWB and firmware inconsistent
error
E7-24 LSU LD driver error K
Cause Machine incompatible PWB and firmware
Cause LSU connector, harness connection trouble PCU PWB trouble
LSU PWB trouble LSU unit trouble
Check & Remedy SIM61-1 to execute Check & Remedy Check firmware version
Check connection state of LSU connector, harness Replace PCU PWB
Replace LSU unit Replace LSU unit
E7-25 LSU LD driver error C E7-55 PCU PWB information sum error
Cause LSU connector, harness connection trouble
Cause Machine incompatible PWB and firmware
LSU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM61-1 to execute Check & Remedy Check firmware version
Check connection state of LSU connector, harness Replace PCU PWB
Replace LSU unit
E7-60 SCN MFP PWB and firmware inconsis-

E7-26 LSU LD driver error M
tent error
Cause LSU connector, harness connection trouble Trouble detection MFP
LSU PWB trouble Cause Machine incompatible PWB and firmware
Check & Remedy SIM61-1 to execute SCN MFP PWB trouble
Check connection state of LSU connector, harness Check & Remedy Check firmware version
Replace LSU unit Replace SCN MFP PWB
E7-27 LSU LD driver error Y E7-61 SCN MFP PWB and PCU PWB combina-
tion error
Cause LSU connector, harness connection trouble Trouble detection MFP
LSU PWB trouble Cause Combination error of SCN MFP PWB and PCU PWB
Check & Remedy SIM61-1 to execute SCN MFP PWB trouble
Check connection state of LSU connector, harness Check & Remedy Check combination of SCN MFP PWB and PCU PWB
Replace LSU unit Replace SCN MFP PWB
E7-28 LSU ASIC - PCU access error E7-80 SCN MFP PWB, scanner communica-
Trouble detection PCU tion error
Cause Communication error between LSU ASIC and PCU PWB
Connector, harness connection trouble
Cause SCN MFP PWB connector, harness connection trouble
PCU PWB trouble
SCN MFP PWB trouble
LSU PWB trouble
LSU unit trouble Check & Remedy Check connection state of SCN MFP PWB connector,
harness
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace SCN MFP PWB
Replace PCU PWB
Replace LSU unit
E7-90 SCN MFP PWB, PCU PWB communica-

E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error tion error
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Cause SCN MFP PWB, PCU PWB connector, harness
LSU ASIC oscillator trouble connection trouble
LSU ASIC trouble SCN MFP PWB trouble
LSU ASIC frequency error PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness Check & Remedy Check connection state of SCN MFP PWB, PCU PWB
Replace LSU unit connector, harness
Replace SCN MFP PWB
Replace PCU PWB

E7-91 FAX received image data error E7-A1 LSU EEPROM / LD driver read/write error
C
Cause Image compression data corruption Trouble detection PCU
HDD trouble
Cause EEPROM/LD Driver trouble
eMMC PWB trouble
EEPROM/LD Driver access error
SCN MFP PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of LSU PWB connector, harness
FAX PWB trouble
Replace PCU PWB
Replace LSU unit
Replace HDD
Replace eMMC PWB
Replace SCN MFP PWB
Replace FAX PWB
E7-A2 LSU EEPROM / LD driver read/write error
M
E7-92 Copy image data error Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection MFP EEPROM/LD Driver access error
Cause Image compression data corruption Check & Remedy Check connection state of LSU PWB connector, harness
SCN MFP PWB trouble Replace PCU PWB
Check & Remedy SIM60-1 to execute Replace LSU unit
Replace HDD
Replace SCN MFP PWB
E7-A3 LSU EEPROM / LD driver read/write error
Y
E7-93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print
image data process error Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection MFP EEPROM/LD Driver access error
Cause Image compression data corruption Check & Remedy Check connection state of LSU PWB connector, harness
HDD trouble Replace PCU PWB
SCN MFP PWB trouble Replace LSU unit
Replace HDD
Replace SCN MFP PWB E7-A8 eMMC PWB error
E7-94 Image data process error Cause eMMC PWB contact trouble
eMMC PWB trouble
Trouble detection MFP SCN MFP PWB trouble
Cause Image compression data corruption Check & Remedy Check contact state of eMMC PWB
HDD trouble SIM62-4 to execute
SCN MFP PWB trouble Replace eMMC PWB
Check & Remedy SIM60-1 to execute Replace SCN MFP PWB
Replace HDD
Replace SCN MFP PWB
E7-C0 TPM PWB (DSK) access error
E7-99 LSU LD driver connection trouble Trouble detection MFP
Cause TPM PWB connection trouble
Trouble detection PCU TPM PWB used in other MFP was attached
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Check & Remedy Power OFF/ON to cancel
LSU PWB trouble Check connection state of TPM PWB connector, harness
PCU PWB trouble
Replace LSU unit E7-C1 Security check error
Replace PCU PWB
Cause Program error
E7-A0 LSU EEPROM / LD driver read/write error TPM PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Power OFF/ON to cancel
K Check connection state of TPM PWB connector, harness
EEPROM/LD Driver access error E7-C2 Firmware check sum error
Check & Remedy Check connection state of LSU PWB connector, harness
Replace PCU PWB
Cause Program corruption due to storage error
Replace LSU unit
Program error

E7-C3 Firmware error F1-02 Finisher entry port transport operation
trouble (1K)
Cause Program corruption due to storage error Trouble detection PCU
Program error
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Check & Remedy > When " This system can boot up in CN mode, Please Motor (ENTRS_M) trouble
turn the dip-switch ON " is displayed Finisher PWB trouble
Execute firmware update in CN update function
> When " This system cannot boot up in any mode " is
Check connection state of connector, harness
displayed
Replace motor (ENTRS_M)
Replace eMMC PWB
Replace finisher PWB
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment F1-03 Finisher oscillation operation trouble
error (3K)
Cause Sensor (TCS) trouble
Developping unit trouble
Sensor (FNHPS) trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Motor (FNMS) trouble
Check & Remedy Replace sensor (TCS) Finisher PWB trouble
Replace developping unit
Replace PCU PWB
SIM3-3 to execute
Replace sensor (FNHPS)
EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment Replace motor (FNMS)
error (over toner) Replace finisher PWB

Cause Sensor (TCS) trouble F1-04 Finisher paddle trouble (Inner)
PCU PWB trouble Trouble detection PCU
Check & Remedy Replace sensor (TCS) Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Replace developping unit Sensor (FNPS2) trouble
Replace PCU PWB Motor (FNM10) trouble
Finisher PWB trouble
EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment SIM3-3 to execute
error (under toner) Replace sensor (FNPS2)
Replace motor (FNM10)
Cause Sensor (TCS) trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace sensor (TCS)
F1-04 Finisher paddle trouble (3K)
Replace developping unit Trouble detection PCU
Replace PCU PWB
Clutch (FNCDP) trouble
Sensor (FNHPP) trouble
F1-00 Finisher communication error Motor (FNME) trouble
SIM3-3 to execute
PCU PWB trouble
Replace clutch (FNCDP)
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness Replace sensor (FNHPP)
Replace finisher PWB Replace motor (FNME)
Replace PCU PWB Replace finisher PWB
F1-01 Finisher jogger operation trouble (1K) F1-05 Finisher return operation trouble (Inner)
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Sensor (JOGHPS) trouble Sensor (FNPS3) trouble
Motor (JOG_M) trouble Motor (FNM2) trouble
Finisher PWB trouble Finisher PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace sensor (JOGHPS) Replace sensor (FNPS3)
Replace motor (JOG_M) Replace motor (FNM2)
Replace finisher PWB Replace finisher PWB

F1-06 Finisher paper exit transport operation F1-10 Finisher staple operation trouble (1K)
trouble (1K) Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Motor (STPMOV_M) trouble
Motor (EXTRS_M) trouble
Finisher PWB trouble Check & Remedy SIM3-3 to execute
Replace motor (STPMOV_M)
Replace motor (EXTRS_M)
F1-10 Finisher staple operation trouble (3K)

F1-08 Finisher stapler shift operation trouble Trouble detection PCU
(Inner) Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Sensor (FNHPDSS) trouble
Trouble detection PCU Motor (FNMSS) trouble
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Finisher PWB trouble
Sensor (FNPS11) trouble Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
Motor (FNM7) trouble SIM3-3 to execute
Finisher PWB trouble Check connection state of connector, harness
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Replace sensor (FNHPDSS)
SIM3-3 to execute Replace motor (FNMSS)
Check connection state of connector, harness Replace finisher PWB
Replace sensor (FNPS11)
Replace finisher PWB F1-11 Finisher paper exit operation trouble
(1K)
(1K) Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Sensor (BLTHPS) trouble
Trouble detection PCU Motor (BLT_M) trouble
Sensor (STMHP) trouble Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
Motor (STPMV_M) trouble SIM3-3 to execute
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Replace sensor (BLTHPS)
SIM3-3 to execute Replace motor (BLT_M)
Replace sensor (STMHP)
Replace motor (STPMV_M)
Replace finisher PWB F1-12 Finisher proof transport operation trou-
ble (1K)
(3K) Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Sensor (PRFEX) trouble
Trouble detection PCU Motor (UPTRS_M) trouble
Sensor (FNHPMSS) trouble Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
Motor (FNMMSS) trouble SIM3-3 to execute
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Replace sensor (PRFEX)
SIM3-3 to execute Replace motor (UPTRS_M)
Replace sensor (FNHPMSS)
Replace motor (FNMMSS)
Replace finisher PWB F1-13 Finisher paper exit guide plate operation
trouble (1K)
F1-10 Finisher staple operation trouble (Inner) Trouble detection PCU
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Sensor (EXGPLTHP) trouble
Sensor (FNSTPLHP) trouble Motor (EXGPLT_M) trouble
Motor (FNSTPLIF) trouble Finisher PWB trouble
SIM3-3 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute
Replace sensor (EXGPLTHP)
Replace motor (EXGPLT_M)
Replace sensor (FNSTRLHP)
Replace motor (FNSTPLIF)

F1-14 Finisher paper rear edge flap operation F1-18 Finisher paper bundle hold operation
trouble (3K) trouble (Inner)
Sensor (FNHPFR) trouble Sensor (FNPS8) trouble
Motor (FNMFR) trouble Motor (FNM10) trouble
Replace sensor (FNHPFR) Replace sensor (FNPS8)
Replace motor (FNMFR) Replace motor (FNM10)
F1-15 Finisher tray lift operation trouble (Inner) F1-19 Finisher front paper alignment operation
trouble (Inner)
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Trouble detection PCU
Sensor (FNPS9/FNPS10) trouble
Motor (FNM6) trouble
Sensor (FNPS4) trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Finisher PWB trouble
SIM3-3 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute
Replace sensor (FNPS9/FNPS10)
F1-15 Finisher tray lift operation trouble (1K)

F1-19 Finisher front paper alignment operation
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble trouble (3K)
Sensor (UTRPH) trouble
Motor (TRYLFT_M) trouble Trouble detection PCU
Finisher PWB trouble Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Sensor (FNHPJF) trouble
SIM3-3 to execute Motor (FNMJF) trouble
Check connection state of connector, harness Finisher PWB trouble
Replace sensor (UTRPH) Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
Replace motor (TRYLFT_M) SIM3-3 to execute
Replace finisher PWB Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace sensor (FNHPJF)
Replace motor (FNMJF)
F1-15 Finisher tray lift operation trouble (3K) Replace finisher PWB

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble F1-20 Finisher rear paper alignment operation
Sensor (FNHPMT/FNULMT) trouble trouble (Inner)
Motor (FNMGMT) trouble
Finisher PWB trouble Trouble detection PCU
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
SIM3-3 to execute Sensor (FNPS5) trouble
Check connection state of connector, harness Motor (FNM4) trouble
Replace sensor (FNHPMT/FNULMT) Finisher PWB trouble
Replace motor (FNMGMT) Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
Replace finisher PWB SIM3-3 to execute
F1-16 Finisher escape/saddle transport Replace motor (FNM4)
switching operation trouble (3K) Replace finisher PWB

Sensor (FNHPFECE) trouble
Motor (FNMFECES) trouble
SIM3-3 to execute
Replace sensor (FNHPFECE)
Replace motor (FNMFECES)

F1-20 Finisher rear paper alignment operation F1-28 Finisher stacking operation trouble (3K)
trouble (3K) Trouble detection PCU
Sensor (FNHPGKS) trouble
Motor (FNMGRS) trouble
Sensor (FNHPJR) trouble
Motor (FNMJR) trouble
SIM3-3 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute
Replace sensor (FNHPGKS)
Replace motor (FNMGRS)
Replace sensor (FNHPJR)
Replace motor (FNMJR)
F1-29 Fuse blown trouble (1K)

F1-22 Finisher paper bundle exit operation Trouble detection PCU
trouble (Inner) Cause Over current
SIM3-3 to execute
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Check connection state of connector, harness
Sensor (FNPS7) trouble Replace defective solenoid
Motor (FNM5) trouble Replace defective motor
Finisher PWB trouble Replace finisher PWB
SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness F1-30 Finisher saddle communication error
Replace motor (FNM5) (3K)
Cause Firmware is not latest version
F1-22 Finisher paper bundle exit operation Connector, harness connection trouble
trouble (3K) Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute
Sensor (FNHPAR) trouble
Motor (FNMAR) trouble
F1-31 Finisher saddle folding operation trou-
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute ble (1K)
SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness Trouble detection PCU
Replace sensor (FNHPAR) Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Replace motor (FNMAR) Motor (FLTRS_M) trouble
Replace finisher PWB Finisher PWB trouble
F1-23 Safety switch trouble (3K) Replace motor (FLTRS_M)
Sensor (FNDOCFD) trouble F1-31 Finisher paper exit operation trouble
Switch (FNOCFD/FNSSS) trouble (3K)
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Trouble detection PCU
Check connection state of connector, harness Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Replace sensor (FNDOCFD) Motor (FNME) trouble
Replace switch (FNOCFD/FNSSS) Finisher PWB trouble
Replace finisher PWB Check & Remedy SIM3-3 to execute
Replace motor (FNME)
F1-28 Finisher stacking operation trouble (1K) Replace finisher PWB

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble F1-32 Finisher punch unit communication
Sensor (HITHP) trouble
Motor (PSN_M) trouble error (Inner)
SIM3-3 to execute
Punch PWB trouble
Replace sensor (HITHP)
Replace motor (PSN_M) Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace finisher PWB Replace punch PWB

F1-32 Finisher punch unit communication F1-34 Finisher punch operation trouble (3K)
error (3K) Trouble detection PCU
Sensor (FCHPP) trouble
Cause Firmware is not latest version
Motor (FCP) trouble
Punch PWB trouble
Punch PWB trouble
SIM3-3 to execute
Replace punch PWB
Replace sensor (FCHPP)
Replace motor (FCP)
Replace punch PWB
F1-33 Finisher punch shifting operation trou-
ble (1K)
F1-35 Finisher punch registration operation
trouble (1K)
Sensor (PNCHMVHP) trouble
Motor (PNCHMV_M) trouble
Sensor (PAPPOS/PAPPOSHP) trouble
Motor (STSMOV_M) trouble
SIM3-3 to execute
Replace sensor (PNCHMVHP)
SIM3-3 to execute
Replace motor (PNCHMV_M)
Replace sensor (PAPPOS/PAPPOSHP)
Replace motor (STSMOV_M)
F1-33 Finisher punch shifting operation trou-
ble (3K)
F1-37 Finisher backup memory error (Inner)
Sensor (FCHPR) trouble Cause Malfunction due to noises
Motor (FCMR) trouble Finisher PWB trouble
Punch PWB trouble Check & Remedy Replace finisher PWB
SIM3-3 to execute F1-37 Finisher backup memory error (3K)
Replace sensor (FCHPR) Trouble detection PCU
Replace motor (FCMR)
Cause Finisher PWB trouble
Replace punch PWB
F1-34 Finisher punch operation trouble (Inner) F1-38 Finisher punch backup memory error
Trouble detection PCU (Inner)
Sensor (FCPI_S) trouble Trouble detection PCU
Motor (FCMOT) trouble Cause Malfunction due to noises
Finisher PWB trouble Punch PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Check & Remedy Set punch specification
SIM3-3 to execute Replace punch PWB
Replace sensor (FCPI_S)
Replace motor (FCMOT) F1-38 Finisher punch backup memory error
(3K)
F1-34 Finisher punch operation trouble (1K) Cause Punch PWB trouble
Replace punch PWB
Sensor (PNCHHP/PNCHMVHP) trouble
Motor (PNCH_M) trouble
SIM3-3 to execute
Replace sensor (PNCHHP/PNCHMVHP)
Replace motor (PNCH_M)

F1-41 Finisher saddle paper positioning opera- F1-44 Finisher saddle gripper operation trou-
tion trouble (1K) ble (3K)
Sensor (ENDSHP) trouble Sensor (FSHPG) trouble
Motor (ENDS_M) trouble Motor (FSMG) trouble
Replace sensor (ENDSHP) Replace sensor (FSHPG)
Replace motor (ENDS_M) Replace motor (FSMG)
F1-41 Finisher saddle paper positioning opera- F1-45 Finisher saddle staple operation trouble
tion trouble (3K) (3K)
Sensor (FSHPSR) trouble Sensor (FSHPDSS) trouble
Motor (FSMSR) trouble Motor (FSMS) trouble
Replace sensor (FSHPSR) Replace sensor (FSHPDSS)
Replace motor (FSMSR) Replace motor (FSMS)
F1-42 Finisher saddle switching operation F1-46 Finisher saddle folding operation trou-
trouble (3K) ble (1K)
Sensor (FSHPEL) trouble Sensor (FLDPLTHP) trouble
Motor (FSMDLE) trouble Motor (FLDPLT_M) trouble
Replace sensor (FSHPEL) Replace sensor (FLDPLTHP)
Replace motor (FSMDLE) Replace motor (FLDPLT_M)
F1-43 Finisher saddle alignment operation F1-46 Finisher saddle folding operation trou-
trouble (3K) ble (3K)
Sensor (FSHPJ) trouble Sensor (FSMCF) trouble
Motor (FSMJ) trouble Motor (FSMF) trouble
Replace sensor (FSHPJ) Replace sensor (FSMCF)
Replace motor (FSMJ) Replace motor (FSMF)

F1-47 Finisher saddle paper transport opera- F1-53 Finisher - Main machine inconsistent
tion trouble (3K) error
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Cause Firmware is not latest version
Sensor (FSHPP) trouble Finisher PWB trouble
Motor (FSMC) trouble Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute
Finisher PWB trouble Replace finisher PWB
SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness F1-54 Finisher punch unit destination incon-
Replace sensor (FSHPP)
Replace motor (FSMC)
sistent error (Inner)(3K)
Cause Improper destination setting of punch unit
Check & Remedy Set proper destination of punch unit
F1-48 Finisher bundle transport upper pres-
sure release / reference fence escape
motor trouble (1K) F1-55 Finisher firmware inconsistent error
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Cause Finisher firmware inconsistency
Sensor (UPRSRLHP) trouble Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute
Motor (UPRSRL_M) trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute F1-78 Finisher eco staple operation trouble
SIM3-3 to execute
(Inner)
Replace sensor (UPRSRLHP) Trouble detection PCU
Replace motor (UPRSRL_M)
Sensor (FNPS15) trouble
F1-49 Finisher bundle transport lower pres- Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
sure release motor trouble (1K) SIM3-3 to execute
Trouble detection PCU Replace sensor (FNPS15)
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Replace motor (FNM9)
Sensor (LPRSRLHP) trouble Replace finisher PWB
Motor (LPRSRL_M) trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute F1-78 Finisher staple free stapler operation
SIM3-3 to execute
trouble (3K)
Replace sensor (LPRSRLHP) Trouble detection PCU
Replace motor (LPRSRL_M)
Sensor (FNMCSLS) trouble
Motor (FNMSLS) trouble
F1-50 Finisher - Main machine incompatible Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
error SIM3-3 to execute
Trouble detection PCU Replace sensor (FNMCSLS)
Cause Improper combination between main machine and Replace motor (FNMSLS)
finisher Replace finisher PWB
Check & Remedy Install finisher which is proper for main machine
Replace finisher PWB F1-83 Finisher guide operation trouble (3K)
F1-51 Finisher communication error (3K) Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Motor (FNMDT) trouble
Trouble detection PCU Finisher PWB trouble
Cause Firmware is not latest version Check & Remedy SIM3-3 to execute
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute Replace motor (FNMDT)

F1-89 Finisher shift operation trouble (1K) F2-40 Toner density error K
Sensor (SFTROLHP) trouble Sensor (TCS_K) trouble
Motor (SFT_M) trouble DV unit trouble
Finisher PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
SIM3-3 to execute Replace sensor (TCS_K)
Check connection state of connector, harness Replace DV unit
Replace sensor (SFTROLHP) Replace PCU PWB
Replace motor (SFT_M)
F2-41 Toner density error C
F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble K Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Sensor (TCS_C) trouble
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble DV unit trouble
Discharge lamp trouble PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
Check & Remedy SIM5-4 to execute Replace sensor (TCS_C)
Check connection state of connector, harness Replace DV unit
Replace discharge lamp Replace PCU PWB
Replace PCU PWB
F2-42 Toner density error M

F2-23 Discharge lamp trouble C
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Sensor (TCS_M) trouble
Discharge lamp trouble DV unit trouble
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM5-4 to execute Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
Check connection state of connector, harness Replace sensor (TCS_M)
Replace discharge lamp Replace DV unit
Replace PCU PWB Replace PCU PWB
F2-24 Discharge lamp trouble M F2-43 Toner density error Y

Discharge lamp trouble Sensor (TCS_Y) trouble
PCU PWB trouble DV unit trouble
Check & Remedy SIM5-4 to execute PCU PWB trouble
Check connection state of connector, harness Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace discharge lamp Replace sensor (TCS_Y)
Replace PCU PWB Replace DV unit
Replace PCU PWB
F2-25 Discharge lamp trouble Y

F2-45 Color image density sensor error
Discharge lamp trouble Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
PCU PWB trouble Sensor (PCS) dirt or trouble
Check & Remedy SIM5-4 to execute Transfer unit lift operation trouble
Check connection state of connector, harness PCU PWB trouble
Replace discharge lamp Check & Remedy SIM44-2 to execute
Replace PCU PWB Check connection state of connector, harness
Clean/Replace sensor (PCS)
Repair transfer unit lift mechanism
F2-39 Temperature sensor error Replace PCU PWB

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble F2-49 LSU thermistor error
Sensor (TH_CL/HUD_CL) trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Replace sensor (TH_CL/HUD_CL) Thermistor (LSU_TH) trouble
Replace PCU PWB LSU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Replace PCU PWB

F2-50 Drum phase error K F2-66 Toner supply trouble M
Sensor (DHPD_K) trouble Toner cartridge trouble
Drum drive section trouble Toner transport pipe section trouble
PCU PWB trouble Sensor (TCS_M) trouble
Check & Remedy SIM30-1 to execute Motor (TNM_M) trouble
Check connection state of connector, harness DV unit trouble
Replace sensor (DHPD_K) PCU PWB trouble
Repair drum drive section Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace PCU PWB Replace toner cartridge
Check transport pipe section
Replace sensor (TCS_M)
F2-51 Drum phase error CL Replace motor (TNM_M)
Replace DV unit
Trouble detection PCU Replace PCU PWB
Sensor (DHPD_CL) trouble
Drum drive section trouble F2-67 Toner supply trouble Y
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM30-1 to execute Trouble detection PCU
Check connection state of connector, harness Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Replace sensor (DHPD_CL) Toner cartridge trouble
Repair drum drive section Toner transport pipe section trouble
Replace PCU PWB Sensor (TCS_Y) trouble
Motor (TNM_Y) trouble
DV unit trouble
F2-58 Humidity sensor error PCU PWB trouble
Trouble detection PCU Replace toner cartridge
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Check transport pipe section
Sensor (TH_CL/HUD_CL) trouble Replace sensor (TCS_Y)
PCU PWB trouble Replace motor (TNM_Y)
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness Replace DV unit
Replace sensor (TH_CL/HUD_CL) Replace PCU PWB
Replace PCU PWB
F2-70 Improper toner cartridge error K

F2-64 Toner supply trouble K
Trouble detection PCU Cause Improper toner cartridge was inserted
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Toner cartridge trouble
Toner cartridge trouble PCU PWB trouble
Toner transport pipe section trouble Check & Remedy Replace toner cartridge
Sensor (TCS_K) trouble Replace PCU PWB
Motor (TNM_K) trouble
DV unit trouble
PCU PWB trouble F2-71 Improper toner cartridge error C
Replace toner cartridge Trouble detection PCU
Check transport pipe section Cause Improper toner cartridge was inserted
Replace sensor (TCS_K) Toner cartridge trouble
Replace motor (TNM_K) PCU PWB trouble
Replace DV unit Check & Remedy Replace toner cartridge
F2-65 Toner supply trouble C F2-72 Improper toner cartridge error M

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Cause Improper toner cartridge was inserted
Toner cartridge trouble Toner cartridge trouble
Toner transport pipe section trouble PCU PWB trouble
Sensor (TCS_C) trouble Check & Remedy Replace toner cartridge
Motor (TNM_C) trouble Replace PCU PWB
DV unit trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness F2-73 Improper toner cartridge error Y
Replace toner cartridge
Check transport pipe section Trouble detection PCU
Replace sensor (TCS_C) Cause Improper toner cartridge was inserted
Replace motor (TNM_C) Toner cartridge trouble
Replace DV unit PCU PWB trouble
Replace PCU PWB Check & Remedy Replace toner cartridge
Replace PCU PWB

F2-74 Toner cartridge error K F2-96 Toner cartridge ejecting trouble C
Toner cartridge trouble Sensor (TCED_C) trouble
PCU PWB trouble Motor (TNM_C) trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness PCU PWB trouble
Replace toner cartridge Check & Remedy SIM10-3 to execute
Replace PCU PWB Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace sensor (TCED_C)
Replace motor (TNM_C)
F2-75 Toner cartridge error C Replace PCU PWB

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble F2-97 Toner cartridge ejecting trouble M
Toner cartridge trouble
Replace toner cartridge Sensor (TCED_M) trouble
Replace PCU PWB Motor (TNM_M) trouble
PCU PWB trouble
F2-76 Toner cartridge error M Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace sensor (TCED_M)
Trouble detection PCU Replace motor (TNM_M)
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Replace PCU PWB
Toner cartridge trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness F2-98 Toner cartridge ejecting trouble Y
Replace PCU PWB Trouble detection PCU
Sensor (TCED_Y) trouble
F2-77 Toner cartridge error Y Motor (TNM_Y) trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Trouble detection PCU Check & Remedy SIM10-3 to execute
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Check connection state of connector, harness
Toner cartridge trouble Replace sensor (TCED_Y)
PCU PWB trouble Replace motor (TNM_Y)
Replace PCU PWB F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
F2-78 Image density sensor error Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Lift unit trouble
Trouble detection PCU Sensor (C1LUD) trouble
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Motor (C1LUM) trouble
Sensor (PCS) dirt or trouble PCU PWB trouble
Transfer belt dirt, scratch Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
PCU PWB trouble Replace lift unit
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness Replace sensor (C1LUD)
Clean/Replace sensor (PCS) Replace motor (C1LUM)
Clean/Replace transfer belt Replace PCU PWB
Replace PCU PWB
F3-22 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift operation

F2-95 Toner cartridge ejecting trouble K trouble
Sensor (TCED_K) trouble Lift unit trouble
Motor (TNM_K) trouble Sensor (C2LUD) trouble
PCU PWB trouble Motor (C2LUM) trouble
Check connection state of connector, harness Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace sensor (TCED_K) Replace lift unit
Replace motor (TNM_K) Replace sensor (C2LUD)
Replace PCU PWB Replace motor (C2LUM)
Replace PCU PWB

F6-00 SCN MFP PWB - FAX communication H2-00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
error Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection MFP Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Thermistor trouble
FAX PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
AC PWB trouble
Replace FAX PWB
Fusing unit not installed
Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness
F6-01 FAX EEPROM read/write error Check connection state of fusing section connector
Replace thermistor
Trouble detection FAX
Replace PCU PWB
Cause FAX EEPROM trouble
Replace AC PWB trouble
FAX EEPROM access trouble
Check fusing unit installed
Replace FAX EEPROM
Replace FAX PWB
H2-01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM)
F6-02 FAX power supply trouble Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble
Thermistor trouble
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble PCU PWB trouble
DC PWB trouble AC PWB trouble
SCN MFP PWB trouble Fusing unit not installed
FAX PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness
Replace DC PWB Check connection state of fusing section connector
Replace SCN MFP PWB Replace thermistor
Replace FAX PWB Replace PCU PWB
F6-04 FAX modem operation trouble
H2-02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US1)
Cause FAX modem chip operation trouble
Check & Remedy Replace FAX PWB Trouble detection PCU
Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble
F6-21 Improper combination of FAX PWB and Thermistor trouble
FAX soft switch inconsistent error PCU PWB trouble
AC PWB trouble
Trouble detection FAX Fusing unit not installed
Cause Improper destination of FAX PWB Check & Remedy SIM44-14 to execute
FAX PWB trouble Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness
Check & Remedy Check proper destination of FAX PWB Check connection state of fusing section connector
Replace FAX PWB Replace thermistor
Replace PCU PWB
F6-30 FAX power controller access error
Cause FAX power controller access trouble H2-03 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD1)
FAX power controller circuit trouble
Replace FAX PWB
Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
F6-97 FAX and main machine inconsistent AC PWB trouble
error Fusing unit not installed
Trouble detection MFP Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness
Cause Improper FAX PWB Check connection state of fusing section connector
FAX PWB trouble Replace thermistor
Check & Remedy Replace FAX PWB Replace PCU PWB
Replace AC PWB
F6-98 FAX and main machine destination
inconsistent error
Cause Main machine and FAX destination inconsistency
Check FAX destination

H2-05 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US1) H3-02 Fuser high temperature error (TH_US1)
Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble Fusing section connector connection trouble
Thermistor trouble Thermistor trouble
AC PWB trouble AC PWB trouble
Fusing unit not installed Check & Remedy SIM44-14 to execute
Check & Remedy SIM44-14 to execute SIM5-2 to execute
Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness
Check connection state of fusing section connector Replace thermistor
Replace thermistor Replace PCU PWB
Replace PCU PWB Replace AC PWB
Replace AC PWB SIM14 to cancel
H4-00 Fuser low temperature error (TH_UM)

H2-06 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US2)
Trouble detection PCU Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble
Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble Thermistor trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble Thermostat trouble
Thermistor trouble Heater lamp trouble
PCU PWB trouble Interlock switch trouble
AC PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble
Fusing unit not installed AC PWB trouble
Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness SIM5-2 to execute
Check connection state of fusing section connector Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness
Replace thermistor Replace thermistor
Replace PCU PWB Replace thermostat
Replace AC PWB trouble Replace heater lamp
Check fusing unit installed Replace interlock switch
Replace PCU PWB
Replace AC PWB
H3-00 Fuser high temperature error (TH_UM) SIM14 to cancel

Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble H4-01 Fuser low temperature error (TH_LM)
Thermistor trouble Trouble detection PCU
PCU PWB trouble Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble
AC PWB trouble Thermistor trouble
Check & Remedy SIM44-14 to execute Thermostat trouble
SIM5-2 to execute Heater lamp trouble
Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness Interlock switch trouble
Replace thermistor PCU PWB trouble
Replace PCU PWB AC PWB trouble
Replace AC PWB Check & Remedy SIM44-14 to execute
SIM14 to cancel SIM5-2 to execute
Replace thermistor
H3-01 Fuser high temperature error (TH_LM) Replace thermostat
Replace heater lamp
Trouble detection PCU Replace interlock switch
Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble Replace PCU PWB
Fusing section connector connection trouble Replace AC PWB
Thermistor trouble SIM14 to cancel
PCU PWB trouble
AC PWB trouble
SIM5-2 to execute
Replace thermistor
Replace PCU PWB
Replace AC PWB
SIM14 to cancel

H4-02 Fuser low temperature error (TH_US1) H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not reached
jam detection / Detection of paper twin-
Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble ing around roller
Thermistor trouble
Thermostat trouble Trouble detection PCU
Heater lamp trouble Cause Fusing jam was not canceles completely (jam paper
Interlock switch trouble remains)
PCU PWB trouble Fusing unit installation trouble
AC PWB trouble Fusing unit, drive section trouble
Check & Remedy SIM44-14 to execute Sensor (POD1) connector, harness connection trouble
SIM5-2 to execute Sensor (POD1) trouble
Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness PCU PWB trouble
Replace thermistor Check & Remedy Check fusing unit installed
Replace thermostat Check fusing drive section
Replace heater lamp Check connection state of sensor (POD1) connector,
Replace interlock switch harness
Replace PCU PWB Replace sensor (POD1)
Replace AC PWB Replace PCU PWB
SIM14 to cancel Replace fusing unit
SIM14 to cancel
H4-30 Thermistor input error (TH_UM)

H7-10 Fuser low temperature recovery error
Trouble detection PCU (TH_UM)
Thermistor trouble Trouble detection PCU
Thermostat trouble Cause Thermistor connector, harness connection trouble
Heater lamp trouble Thermistor trouble
Interlock switch trouble Thermostat trouble
PCU PWB trouble Heater lamp trouble
AC PWB trouble Interlock switch trouble
SIM5-2 to execute AC PWB trouble
Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness Check & Remedy SIM5-2 to execute
Replace thermistor Check connection state of thermistor connector, harness
Replace thermostat Replace thermistor
Replace heater lamp Replace thermostat
Replace interlock switch Replace heater lamp
Replace PCU PWB Replace interlock switch
Replace AC PWB Replace PCU PWB
SIM14 to cancel Replace AC PWB
H4-32 Thermistor input error (TH_US1) H7-12 Fuser low temperature recovery error
Trouble detection PCU (TH_US)
Thermistor trouble
Thermostat trouble
Thermistor trouble
Heater lamp trouble
Thermostat trouble
Interlock switch trouble
Heater lamp trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Interlock switch trouble
AC PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
AC PWB trouble
SIM5-2 to execute
Replace thermistor
Replace thermistor
Replace thermostat
Replace thermostat
Replace heater lamp
Replace heater lamp
Replace interlock switch
Replace interlock switch
Replace PCU PWB
Replace PCU PWB
Replace AC PWB
Replace AC PWB
SIM14 to cancel

L1-00 Scanner feed trouble L4-07 Transfer belt motor trouble
Trouble detection SCN Trouble detection PCU
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Cause Transfer belt unit load trouble
Scanner unit trouble Motor mounting trouble
Sensor (MHPS) trouble Connection trouble between PCU PWB and motor
Motor (MIM) trouble Motor (DM_K) trouble
SCN MFP PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM1-1 to execute Check & Remedy SIM6-1 to execute after checking transfer belt unit
Check connection state of connector, harness rotational load
Replace scanner unit Check connection state of motor and drive unit
Replace sensor (MHPS) Check connection state of PCU PWB and motor
Replace motor (MIM) Replace motor (DM_K)
Replace SCN MFP PWB Replace PCU PWB
L3-00 Scanner return trouble L4-09 Registration motor trouble

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Cause Paper jam
Scanner unit trouble Motor mounting trouble
Sensor (MHPS) trouble Connection trouble between PCU PWB and motor
Motor (MIM) trouble Motor (RRM) trouble
SCN MFP PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM1-1 to execute Check & Remedy SIM6-1 to execute after removing jammed paper
Check connection state of connector, harness Check belt connection state of motor and drive unit
Replace scanner unit Check connection state of PCU PWB and motor
Replace sensor (MHPS) Replace motor (RRM)
Replace motor (MIM) Replace PCU PWB
Replace SCN MFP PWB
L4-11 Offset motor trouble

L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble
Cause Paper jam Motor (OSM) trouble
Motor mounting trouble Sensor (SHPOS) trouble
Connection trouble between PCU PWB and motor PCU PWB trouble
Clutch (C1PUC) trouble Check & Remedy SIM6-1 to execute
Motor (CPFM) trouble SIM30-1 to execute
PCU PWB trouble Check connection state of connector, harness
Check & Remedy SIM6-1 to execute after removing jammed paper Replace motor (OSM)
Check connection state of motor and drive shaft Replace sensor (SHPOS)
Check connection state of PCU PWB and motor Replace PCU PWB
Replace clutch (C1PUC)
Replace motor (CPFM)
Replace PCU PWB L4-12 Secondary transfer separation trouble
L4-03 Fusing motor trouble Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Secondary transfer separation mechanism trouble
Trouble detection PCU Sensor (2TUD) trouble
Cause Paper jam Clutch (2TURC) trouble
Motor mounting trouble PCU PWB trouble
Connection trouble between PCU PWB and motor Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
Motor (FUM) trouble Check/Repair secondary transfer separation mechanism
PCU PWB trouble Replace sensor (2TUD)
Check & Remedy SIM6-1 to execute after removing jammed paper Replace clutch (2TURC)
Check connection state of motor and drive shaft Replace PCU PWB
Check connection state of PCU PWB and motor
Replace motor (FUM)
Replace PCU PWB L4-16 Fusing pressure release trouble
L4-06 Transfer unit lift trouble Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Pressure release drive gear and idle gear trouble
Trouble detection PCU Sensor (HLPCD) trouble
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Motor (PRM) trouble
Sensor (1TUD) dirt or trouble PCU PWB trouble
Clutch (1TURC) trouble Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
PCU PWB trouble Replace pressure release drive gear and idle gear
Check & Remedy SIM6-3 to execute Replace sensor (HLPCD)
Check connection state of connector, harness Replace motor (PRM)
Clean/Replace sensor (1TUD) Replace PCU PWB
Replace clutch (1TURC)
Replace PCU PWB

L4-17 Drum motor trouble K L4-51 Process fan 2 trouble
Cause Process, Developer and Transfer belt unit load trouble Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Motor mounting trouble Fan (PROFM2) trouble
Connection trouble between PCU PWB and motor PCU PWB trouble
Motor (DM_K) trouble Check & Remedy SIM6-2 to execute
PCU PWB trouble Check connection state of connector, harness
Check & Remedy SIM25-1 to execute after checking installation condition Replace fan (PROFM2)
of process, developer and transfer belt unit Replace PCU PWB
Check connection state of motor and drive unit
Replace motor (DM_K) L4-75 Paper exit motor trouble
Replace PCU PWB
Cause Paper jam
L4-18 Drum motor trouble CL Motor mounting trouble
Connection trouble between PCU PWB and motor
Trouble detection PCU Motor (POM) trouble
Cause Process, Developer and Transfer belt unit load trouble PCU PWB trouble
Motor mounting trouble Check & Remedy SIM6-1 to execute after removing jammed paper
Connection trouble between PCU PWB and motor Check belt connection state of motor and drive unit
Motor (DM_CL) trouble Check connection state of PCU PWB and motor
PCU PWB trouble Replace motor (POM)
Check & Remedy SIM25-1 to execute after checking installation condition Replace PCU PWB
of process, developer and transfer belt unit
Check connection state of motor and drive unit
Check connection state of PCU PWB and motor L4-76 Reverse motor trouble
Replace motor (DM_CL)
Replace PCU PWB Trouble detection PCU
Cause Paper jam
Motor mounting trouble
L4-32 Power supply fan 1 trouble Connection trouble between PCU PWB and motor
Motor (SBM) trouble
Trouble detection PCU PCU PWB trouble
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Check & Remedy SIM6-1 to execute after removing jammed paper
Fan (PSFM1) trouble Check belt connection state of motor and drive unit
PCU PWB trouble Check connection state of PCU PWB and motor
Check & Remedy SIM6-2 to execute Replace motor (SBM)
Check connection state of connector, harness Replace PCU PWB
Replace fan (PSFM1)
Replace PCU PWB
L4-77 ADU motor 1 trouble
L4-35 Fusing fan trouble Trouble detection PCU
Cause Paper jam
Trouble detection PCU Motor mounting trouble
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Connection trouble between PCU PWB and motor
Fan (FUFM) trouble Motor (ADUM1) trouble
Check & Remedy SIM6-2 to execute Check & Remedy SIM9-3 to execute after removing jammed paper
Check connection state of connector, harness Check belt connection state of motor and drive unit
Replace fan (FUFM) Check connection state of PCU PWB and motor
Replace PCU PWB Replace motor (ADUM1)
Replace PCU PWB
L4-43 Paper exit fan trouble

L4-78 ADU motor 2 trouble
Fan (POFM) trouble Cause Paper jam
PCU PWB trouble Motor mounting trouble
Check & Remedy SIM6-2 to execute Connection trouble between PCU PWB and motor
Check connection state of connector, harness Motor (ADUM2) trouble
Replace fan (POFM) PCU PWB trouble
Replace PCU PWB Check & Remedy SIM9-3 to execute after removing jammed paper
Check belt connection state of motor and drive unit
L4-50 Process fan 1 trouble Replace motor (ADUM2)
Replace PCU PWB
Fan (PROFM1) trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Replace fan (PROFM1)
Replace PCU PWB

L4-79 Transport motor trouble U2-05 Account data error
Cause Paper jam Cause Authentication table error
Motor mounting trouble If frequent occurrence of this error is found, the following
Connection trouble between PCU PWB and motor devices may possibly be damaged
Motor (PFM) trouble HDD/mSATA SSD/eMMC PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble SCN MFP PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM6-1 to execute after removing pammed paper Check & Remedy Replace HDD/mSATA SSD/eMMC PWB
Check belt connection state of motor and drive unit Replace SCN MFP PWB
Replace motor (PFM)
Replace PCU PWB U2-11 MFP EEPROM counter check sum error
L6-10 Polygon motor trouble Cause EEPROM trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Trouble detection PCU Strong external noises
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Check & Remedy Check contact of EEPROM socket
Motor (PGM) trouble Replace SCN MFP PWB
LSU PWB trouble SIM16 to cancel
Replace motor (PGM) U2-30 SCN MFP PWB and PCU PWB data
Replace LSU unit
inconsistency
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error Cause When replacing SCN MFP PWB or PCU PWB,
EEPROM which was mounted on PWB before
replacement is not mounted on new PWB
Replace SCN MFP PWB
Power supply unit trouble
Replace PCU PWB
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check EEPROM is properly set
Replace SCN MFP PWB
Replace power supply unit
Replace PCU PWB
Replace PCU PWB
U2-40 eMMC PWB system storage data error

L8-02 Full wave signal error
Cause eMMC PWB system storage data area error
Check & Remedy Power OFF/ON and backup data is written into eMMC
Power supply unit trouble
PWB and machine is automatically recovered
PCU PWB trouble
Check voltage at AC outlet
Replace power supply unit
U2-41 HDD storage data area error
Replace PCU PWB
Cause File error occurs saved data area, disabling backup of
saved file of machine adjustment value in eMMC PWB
L8-20 Power controller communication error Check & Remedy Power OFF/ON to cancel
Trouble detection MFP Perform backup of HDD/eMMC PWB
SIM62 to execute HDD format
Cause SCN MFP PWB trouble
Replace HDD/eMMC PWB
SIM16 to cancel
U1-01 Battery trouble U2-42 Machine adjustment data error

Cause Battery life
Cause Saved file of machine adjustment value in eMMC PWB
Battery circuit trouble
and system saved data in HDD error
Check & Remedy Check battery voltage is 2.5V or above
Check & Remedy Perform backup of HDD and eMMC PWB
Replace battery
SIM62 to execute HDD format
Replace HDD/eMMC PWB
SIM16 to cancel
U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error Adjust machine again and set adjustment values

Cause EEPROM trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Strong external noises
Check & Remedy Check power environment
Replace EEPROM
Replace SCN MFP PWB

U2-50 HDD user authentication data check sum U2-81 SCN EEPROM check sum error
error Trouble detection SCN
Trouble detection MFP Cause EEPROM socket contact trouble
EEPROM trouble
Cause Strong external noises
SCN MFP PWB trouble
HDD trouble
SCN MFP PWB trouble Check & Remedy Check contact of EEPROM socket
Replace EEPROM
Check & Remedy Check data related to check sum error (address book,
Replace SCN MFP PWB
image send system registration data) and register again
SIM16 to cancel
SIM16 to cancel
Replace HDD
Replace SCN MFP PWB
U2-90 PCU EEPROM read/write error
U2-60 Watermark check error
Cause EEPROM socket contact trouble
Trouble detection MFP EEPROM trouble
Cause Watermark data trouble PCU PWB trouble
eMMC PWB trouble Check & Remedy Check contact of EEPROM socket
Check & Remedy SIM49-7 to execute Check SIM adjustment values of engine and adjust again
Replace eMMC PWB if they are improper
Replace EEPROM
Replace PCU PWB
SIM16 to cancel
U2-70 OCR dictionary check error
Cause OCR dictionary data trouble
U2-91 PCU EEPROM check sum error
Cause EEPROM socket contact trouble
Replace EEPROM
U2-71 Voice IC error Replace PCU PWB
Check & Remedy Check contact of EEPROM socket
Replace EEPROM
Cause Voice IC trouble
Replace PCU PWB
SCN MFP PWB trouble
SIM16 to cancel
U5-00 SPF communication error

U2-72 Voice data check error
Cause Malfunction due to noises
Cause Voice data trouble Connector, harness connection trouble
Check & Remedy SIM49-7 to execute DSPF PWB trouble
U2-73 NFC tag error Replace DSPF PWB

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble U5-16 SPF fan trouble
NFC HOME KEY PWB trouble
SCN MFP PWB trouble Trouble detection SCN
Replace NFC HOME KEY PWB Check & Remedy SIM2-3 to execute
Replace SCN MFP PWB Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace fan (SPFFAN)
U2-74 Recovery data error

U5-20 SPF transport trouble
Cause Data corruption due to storage error Trouble detection SCN
Data abnormality Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute Motor (SPFM) trouble
U2-80 SCN EEPROM read/write error Replace motor (SPFM)

Cause EEPROM socket contact trouble U5-30 SPF tray lift up trouble
EEPROM trouble
SCN MFP PWB trouble Trouble detection SCN
Check & Remedy Check contact of EEPROM socket Cause Lift up trouble is detected 5 times continuously
Replace EEPROM Connector, harness connection trouble
Replace SCN MFP PWB Sensor (STLD/STUD) trouble
SIM16 to cancel DSPF PWB trouble
Replace sensor (STLD/STUD)
Replace DSPF PWB

U5-31 SPF tray lift down trouble U6-10 Desk paper transport trouble
Cause Lift down trouble is not detected within specified time Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble Motor (DPFM) trouble
Sensor (STLD/STUD) trouble Desk control PWB trouble
DSPF PWB trouble Check & Remedy SIM4-3 to execute
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace sensor (STLD/STUD) Replace motor (DPFM)
Replace DSPF PWB Replace desk control PWB
U6-00 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk communica- U6-20 LCC PWB - PCU PWB communication
tion error error
Cause Malfunction due to noises Cause Malfunction due to noises
Connector, harness connection trouble Connector, harness connection trouble
Desk control PWB trouble LCC main PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Power OFF/ON to cancel Check & Remedy Power OFF/ON to cancel
Replace desk control PWB Replace LCC main PWB
U6-01 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble U6-21 LCC paper transport trouble
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Cause Paper transport mechanism trouble
Sensor (D1LUD) trouble Motor (LPFM) trouble
Desk control PWB trouble LCC main PWB trouble
Lift unit trouble Check & Remedy SIM4-3 to execute
PCU PWB trouble Check paper transport mechanism
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness Replace motor (LPFM)
Replace sensor (D1LUD) Replace LCC main PWB
Replace desk control PWB
Replace lift unit
Replace PCU PWB U6-22 LCC 24V power trouble
U6-02 Desk paper feed tray 3 lift trouble Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
LCC main PWB trouble
Trouble detection PCU Main machine power PWB trouble
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
Sensor (D2LUD) trouble Replace LCC main PWB
Desk control PWB trouble Replace main machine power PWB
Lift unit trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness U6-23 LCC tray descending trouble
Replace sensor (D2LUD)
Replace desk control PWB Trouble detection PCU
Replace lift unit Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Replace PCU PWB Switch (LWRSW) trouble
U6-09 LCC lift trouble Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace switch (LWRSW)
Trouble detection PCU Replace LCC main PWB
Cause Lift mechanism trouble
Sensor (LRE) trouble
Motor (LLM) trouble U6-50 Desk - Main machine combination trou-
Check & Remedy SIM4-2, 4-3 to execute
ble
Check lift unit
Replace sensor (LRE)
Cause Improper combination between main machine and desk
Replace motor (LLM)
Desk control PWB trouble
Replace LCC main PWB
Check & Remedy Install desk which is proper for main machine
Replace desk control PWB

U6-51 LCC - Main machine combination trou- UC-12 ASIC CPT error (DSPF)
ble Trouble detection SCN
Trouble detection PCU Cause DSPF PWB trouble
Cause Improper combination between main machine and LCC Check & Remedy Replace DSPF PWB
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Install LCC which is proper for main machine UC-20 ASIC DOCC error
Replace LCC main PWB
Replace PCU PWB Trouble detection SCN
U6-52 Desk communication error
Trouble detection PCU UC-30 ASIC DOCC error (DSPF)
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble between main
machine and paper feed tray 2 Trouble detection SCN
PCU PWB trouble Cause DSPF PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness Check & Remedy Replace DSPF PWB
Replace PCU PWB
U6-54 LCC firmware inconsistent error

Cause Firmware version is inconsistency
U6-55 Desk firmware inconsistent error

Cause Firmware version is inconsistency
U7-50 Vendor machine communication error

Cause Strong external noises
Improper setting of vendor machine specifications
Vendor machine trouble
SCN MFP PWB trouble
Change specification of vendor machine
Replace SCN MFP PWB
U7-51 Vendor machine operation trouble

Cause Vendor machine trouble
Check & Remedy Repair vendor machine referring to detailed error code
U9-01 Touch panel trouble

Touch panel trouble
SCN MFP PWB trouble
Replace touch panel
Replace SCN MFP PWB
UC-02 ASIC CPT error


H. LED status and errors of SCN MFP PWB
Check LED status of SCN MFP PWB to presume error content when machine cannot booted.
Process content and LED display.
Lighting up status of LED-S and LED-R.
LED status Condition Countermeasure at error
All eight LED lighting Normal -
Other status (blinking or lighting) Error Replace eMMC PWB → If the same condition remained, replace SCN MFP PWB
SCN MFPC PWB
LED-S LED LED-R LED

2. JAM JAM code JAM content
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM
A. JAM code list MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
(1) Main machine, DESK NO_MATCH Parameter error
P_ON Jam detection at power ON
JAM code JAM content POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
2TPD_N1 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tray 1 paper feed) POD1_NA POD1 not-reached JAM (Jam at second surface)
2TPD_N2 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tray 2 paper feed) POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
2TPD_N3 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tray 3 paper feed) POD1_SA POD1 remaining JAM (Jam at second surface)
2TPD_N4 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tray 4 paper feed) POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM
2TPD_NA 2TPD not-reached JAM (ADU) POD2_S POD2 remaining JAM
2TPD_NL 2TPD not-reached JAM (LCC paper feed) POD3_N POD3 not-remaining JAM
2TPD_NM 2TPD not-reached JAM (Manual paper feed) POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM
2TPD_NT1 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tandem left paper feed) POD4_NB POD4 not-reached JAM (Before switchback)
2TPD_NT2 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tandem right paper feed) POD4_SA POD4 remaining JAM (After switchback)
2TPD_S1 2TPD remaining JAM (Tray 1 paper feed) POD4_SB POD4 remaining JAM (Before switchback)
2TPD_S2 2TPD remaining JAM (Tray 2 paper feed) PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 1 paper feed)
2TPD_S3 2TPD remaining JAM (Tray 3 paper feed) PPD2_N1_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 1 paper feed)
2TPD_S4 2TPD remaining JAM (Tray 4 paper feed) (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
2TPD_SA 2TPD remaining JAM (ADU) PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 2 paper feed)
2TPD_SL 2TPD remaining JAM (LCC paper feed) PPD2_N2_D PPD2 not reached JAM (Tray 2 paper feed)
2TPD_SM 2TPD remaining JAM (Manual paper feed) (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
2TPD_ST1 2TPD remaining JAM (Tandem left paper feed) PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 3 paper feed)
2TPD_ST2 2TPD remaining JAM (Tandem right paper feed) PPD2_N3_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 3 paper feed)
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 4 paper feed)
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM PPD2_N4_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 4 paper feed)
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
C1PFD_N1 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 1 paper feed) PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU)
C1PFD_N2 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 2 paper feed) PPD2_NA_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU)
(Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
C1PFD_N3 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 3 paper feed)
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM (LCC paper feed)
C1PFD_N4 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 4 paper feed)
PPD2_NL_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (LCC paper feed)
C1PFD_NL C1PFD not-reached JAM (LCC paper feed)
C1PFD_NT1 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tandem left paper feed)
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual paper feed)
C1PFD_NT2 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tandem right paper feed)
PPD2_NM_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual paper feed)
C1PFD_S1 C1PFD remaining JAM (Tray 1 paper feed)
PPD2_NT1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left paper feed)
PPD2_NT1_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left paper feed)
C1PFD_S4 C1PFD remaining JAM (Tray 4 paper feed) (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
C1PFD_SL C1PFD remaining JAM (LCC paper feed) PPD2_NT2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem right paper feed)
C1PFD_ST1 C1PFD remaining JAM (Tandem left paper feed) PPD2_NT2_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem right paper feed)
C1PFD_ST2 C1PFD remaining JAM (Tandem right paper feed) (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
C1PFPD_S1 C1PFPD remaining JAM (Tray 1 paper feed) PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 1 paper feed)
C2PFD_N3 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 3 paper feed) PPD2_S1_D PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 1 paper feed)
C2PFD_N4 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 4 paper feed) (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
C2PFD_NT1 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Tandem left paper feed) PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 2 paper feed)
C2PFD_NT2 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Tandem right paper feed) PPD2_S2_D PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 2 paper feed)
C2PFD_S2 C2PFD remaining JAM (Tray 2 paper feed) (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
C2PFD_S3 C2PFD remaining JAM (Tray 3 paper feed) PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 3 paper feed)
C2PFD_S4 C2PFD remaining JAM (Tray 4 paper feed) PPD2_S3_D PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 3 paper feed)
C2PFD_ST1 C2PFD remaining JAM (Tandem left paper feed) (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
C2PFD_ST2 C2PFD remaining JAM (Tandem right paper feed) PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 4 paper feed)
D1PPD_N04 D1PPD not-reached JAM (Tray 4 paper feed) PPD2_S4_D PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 4 paper feed)
D1PPD_S03 D1PPD remaining JAM (Tray 3 paper feed) (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
D1PPD_S04 D1PPD remaining JAM (Tray 4 paper feed) PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU)
D1PPD1_ST1 D1PPD1 remaining JAM (Tandem left paper feed) PPD2_SA_D PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU)
D1PPD2_NT1 D1PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left paper feed) (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
D1PPD2_ST1 D1PPD2 remaining JAM (Tandem left paper feed) PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM (LCC paper feed)
D2PPD_S04 D2PPD remaining JAM (Tray 4 paper feed) PPD2_SL_D PPD2 remaining JAM (LCC paper feed)
DESK_ERR Desk communication error detection
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual paper feed)
DOP Door open JAM
PPD2_SM_D PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual paper feed)
DPFD1_NT1 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem left paper feed)
DPFD1_ST1 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Tandem left paper feed)
PPD2_ST1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tandem left paper feed)
DPFD1_ST2 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Tandem right paper feed)
PPD2_ST1_D PPD2 remaining JAM (Tandem left paper feed)
DRUM Drum JAM
FUSER Fuser JAM
PPD2_ST2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tandem right paper feed)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD not-reached)
PPD2_ST2_D PPD2 remaining JAM (Tandem right paper feed)
MFT_1ST Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (Check paper loading (Delay from PS of previous paper of JAM)
state)
PRI_JAM Time out for image ready
MFT_LE Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (Paper feed roller
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM
needs to be replaced)
STOP_JAM Stop request JAM
MFT_RT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (Check paper state)
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed JAM (C1PFPD not-reached)

JAM code JAM content
TRAY1_1ST Tray 1 paper feed JAM (Check paper loading state) (4) Inner finisher
TRAY1_LE Tray 1 paper feed JAM (Paper feed roller needs to be
replaced) JAM code JAM content
TRAY1_RT Tray 1 paper feed JAM (Check paper state) FCMOT Punch motor JAM
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed JAM (C2PFD not-reached) FNENTER Idling JAM
TRAY2_1ST Tray 2 paper feed JAM (Check paper loading state) FNM2 Return belt motor JAM
TRAY2_LE Tray 2 paper feed JAM (Paper feed roller needs to be FNM3 Front alignment motor JAM
replaced) FNM4 Rear alignment motor JAM
TRAY2_RT Tray 2 paper feed JAM (Check paper state) FNM5 Assist motor JAM
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed JAM (D1PPD not-reached) FNM6 Tray lift motor JAM
TRAY3 Tray 3 (Tandem left) paper feed JAM FNM7 Stapler shift motor JAM
TRAY3_1ST Tray 3 paper feed JAM (Check paper loading state) FNM9 Eco staple motor JAM
TRAY3_1ST Tray 3 (Tandem left) paper feed JAM (Check paper FNM10 Paddle motor JAM
loading state)
FNPS1_N FNPS1 not-reached JAM
TRAY3_LE Tray 3 paper feed JAM (Paper feed roller needs to be
FNPS1_S FNPS1 remaining JAM
replaced)
FNPS8 Bundle motor JAM
TRAY3_LE Tray 3 (Tandem left) paper feed JAM (Paper feed roller
FNPS12 Manual bundle insert JAM
needs to be replaced)
FNSTPLIF Staple JAM
TRAY3_RT Tray 3 paper feed JAM (Check paper state)
FNTIME Paper early reaching JAM
TRAY3_RT Tray 3 (Tandem left) paper feed JAM (Check paper state)
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed JAM (D2PPD not-reached)
TRAY4 Tray 4 (Tandem right) paper feed JAM
TRAY4_1ST Tray 4 paper feed JAM (Check paper loading state) (5) Paper pass unit
TRAY4_1ST Tray 4 (Tandem right) paper feed JAM (Check paper
loading state) JAM code JAM content
TRAY4_LE Tray 4 paper feed JAM (Paper feed roller needs to be PDPPD1_N PDPPD1 not reached JAM
replaced) PDPPD1_S PDPPD1 remaining JAM
TRAY4_LE Tray 4 (Tandem right) paper feed JAM (Paper feed roller PDPPD2_N PDPPD2 not-reached JAM
needs to be replaced) PDPPD2_S PDPPD2 remaining JAM
TRAY4_RT Tray 4 paper feed JAM (Check paper state)
TRAY4_RT Tray 4 (Tandem right) paper feed JAM (Check paper
state) (6) 1K finisher / 1K saddle finisher

(2) DSPF/RSPF FCPNCH_M Punch motor JAM
FCPNCHMV_M Punch shift motor JAM
JAM code JAM content FCSTSMOV_M Punch horizontal registration shift motor JAM
ICU_REQ ICU stop JAM FIN_ERR Finisher communication error detection
P_SHORT Short size JAM FNBDLTRS_N Bundle transport not-reached JAM
SDFS_S Double feed JAM FNBLT_M Release motor JAM
SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM FNENDSTRS_N Rear edge stopper transport sensor not-reached JAM
SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM FNENDSTRS_S Rear edge stopper transport sensor remaining JAM
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM FNENT_N Entrance not-reached JAM
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM FNENT_S Entrance remaining JAM
SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM FNENTRS_M Entrance transport motor JAM
SPPD2_ND SPPD2 not-reached JAM (double feed) FNEXGPLT_M Paper exit guide plate open/close motor JAM
SPPD2_NP SPPD2 not-reached JAM (paper feed) FNEXTRS_M Paper exit transport motor JAM
SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM FNFLDEX_N Folding paper exit not-reached JAM
SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM FNFLDEX_S Folding paper exit remaining JAM
SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM FNJOG_M Jogger motor JAM
SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM FNLMDLT_N Intermediate transport left not-reached JAM
SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM FNLMDLT_S Intermediate transport left remaining JAM
SPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached JAM FNPRFEX_N Proof paper exit not-reached JAM
SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAM FNPRFEX_S Proof paper exit remaining JAM
SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM FNPSN_M Flapping motor JAM
SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM FNRMDLT_N Intermediate transport right not-reached JAM
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end FNSFT_M Shift motor JAM
STOP_JAM Stop request JAM FNSTPMOV_M Stapler motor JAM
FNSTPMV_M Stapler shift motor JAM
FNTRYLFT_M Tray lift motor JAM
(3) LCC FNUPEX_N Shift paper exit not-reached JAM
FNUPEX_S Shift paper exit remaining JAM
JAM code JAM content FNUPTRS_M Proof transport motor JAM
LCC LCC paper feed JAM (LPFPD not-reached) FSENDS_M Rear edge stopper motor JAM
LCC_1ST LCC paper feed JAM (Check paper loading state) FSFLDPLT_M Folding blade motor JAM
LCC_ERR LCC communication error detection FSLPRSRL_M Bundle transport lower pressure release motor JAM
LCC paper feed JAM (Paper feed roller needs to be Bundle transport upper pressure release/Standard fence
LCC_LE FSUPRSRL_M
replaced) evacuation motor JAM
LCC_RT LCC paper feed JAM (Check paper state)
LPFD_NL LPFD not-reached JAM (LCC paper feed)
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (LCC paper feed)

(7) 3K finisher / 3K saddle finisher 3. Image send communication report
code
FCMR Punch shift motor JAM A. Outline and communication report code system
FCP Punch motor JAM
descriptions
FCP2 Punched hole JAM
FIN_TIME Paper early reaching JAM After completion of communication, the communication report table,
FNB_N Buffer sensor time-out JAM the communication management table, and the protocol are described
FNB_S Buffer sensor remaining JAM on the communication report column.
FNCDP Paddle JAM The communication report code is composed as follows:
FNDPMS Manual bundle insert JAM Communication report: XX (XXXX)
FNE_N Entry port sensor time-out JAM The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:
FNE_S Entry port sensor remaining JAM Communication report code of 00 – 99 (Refer to communication report
FNEE_N Escape paper exit sensor time-out JAM main code.)
FNEE_S Escape paper exit sensor remaining JAM
The lower 4 digits of the communication report code:
FNMAR Rear edge assist motor JAM
Used by the serviceman.
FNMDT Tray auxiliary guide motor JAM
FNMFECES Escape/Saddle motor JAM The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to com-
FNMFR Paper rear edge falling motor JAM munication report sub code 1.)
FNMGMT Tray lift motor JAM The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to com-
FNMGRS Return roller lift motor JAM munication report sub code 2.)
FNMJF Front alignment motor JAM
FNMJR Rear alignment motor JAM
FNMMSS Stapler shift motor JAM The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2 are in hexadec-
FNMOTERR Motor trouble JAM imal notation. (The others are in decimal notation.)
FNMS Oscillation motor JAM
FNMSLS Staple free staple motor JAM
FNMSS Staple JAM
FNSSS Safety switch actuation JAM The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the these models.
FNTBP_N Preprocessing timing sensor time-out JAM B. Details
FNTBP_S Preprocessing timing sensor remaining JAM
FSE_N Saddle entry port sensor time-out JAM (1) Communication report main code
FSE_S Saddle entry port sensor remaining JAM
FSEB_N Saddle folding bundle paper exit sensor time-out JAM Report Final receive signal
Final receive signal (Receive side)
code (Send side)
FSEB_S Saddle folding bundle paper exit sensor remaining JAM
0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
FSMDLE Saddle switching lever motor JAM
1 NSF, DIS (SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS
FSME Saddle discharge motor JAM
2 CFR (PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC
FSME2 Saddle paddle JAM
3 FTT EOP
FSMF Saddle folding motor JAM
4 MCF EOM
FSMG Saddle gripper motor JAM
5 PIP, PIN MPS
FSMJ Saddle alignment motor JAM
6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
FSMS Saddle staple JAM
7 No signal, DCN DCN
FSMSR Saddle rear edge stopper motor JAM
8 PPR PPS-EOP
9 PPS-EOM
10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
11 RNR RR
12 CTR CTC
13 ERR EOR-Q
14 PPS-PRI-Q
16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
17 NSF, DIS SID, SUB, NSS, DCS
18 CFR PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC
19 FTT PPS-EOP
20 MCF PPS-EOM
21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
23 No signal, DCN DCN
24 PPR
25 RNR RR
26 CTR CTC
27 ERR EOR-Q
28 PPS-PRI-Q
29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-1
For report codes 16 – 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICATION.

Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
0 – 31 Refer to “previous table”. Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.
33 BUSY The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.
34 CANCEL A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
35 NG35 XXXX Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
36 (No record paper)
37 (Record paper jam)
38 MEM. FULL Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>
Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>
39 (Number of paper
unmatched)
40 (Relay not received)
41 LENGTH OVER The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>
42 LENGTH OVER The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>
43 (Communication) (OK) Speaking before data transmission
44 ORIGINAL ERROR A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>
45 (Picture quality error)
46 NO RESPONSE The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)
47 TX DECODE ERROR A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>
48 OK Normal end of communication
OK REPLY RECEIVE OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.
49 NO RX POLL The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>
50 RX POLL FAIL In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>
51 PASS # NG In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
52 (No confidential function in In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machines)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
53 (Confidential not received) 1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
54 (Confidential BOX NO NG) 1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.
55 (No relay function in remote In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>
party) (Including other company's machine)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
56 NO REL RX 1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>
3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
57 (Relay ID unmatched) 1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>
58 REJECTED In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)
59 RX NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>
60 NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>
61 RX POLL # NG In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
62 F POLL PASS # NG In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
63 NO F FUNC In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)
64 NO F-CODE In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.
2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.
In F code receiving : <Receive>

"F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW."
65 NG65 XXXX If the reservation of the job cannot be completed when reserving the job from PC-FAXorPC-IFAX;
*If an error occurs when storing the job ticket (including fmSyncFile error);
*If an error occurs when creating the thumbnail;
*If an error occurs when creating the map;
*If an error occurs during the storage of the control table;
67 F PASS # NG In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched. <Receive>
68 BOX NO. NG In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.) <Receive>
69 MEMORY OVER Memory over in quick online sending <Send>
70 (JOB MEMORY OVER) In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. <Send>
71 NG71 XXXX *1 In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. <Send>
72 (NG72 XXXX) *1 In department management setting on the machine side:
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the machine side
is specified. <Send>
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the department number is not specified. <Send>

Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
73 NG73 XXXX *1 In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. <Send>
74 NG74 XXXX *1 When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX;
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and the pass-code from PC-XXX does not match with it.
<Send>
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and no pass-code is specified by PC-XXX. <Send>
75 NG75 XXXX *1 • Reservation cannot be made due to machine busy. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted.)
• When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibit" is set on the machine side.
76 NG76 XXXX *1 Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered on the
machine side. <Send>
77 NG77 XXXX *1 In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.
78 NG78 XXXX *1 The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PC-Internet
FAX.
79 NG79 XXXX *1 An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.
80 NG80 XXXX *1 NIC connect failure (network abnormality)
• Check for disconnection of cables.
• A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs.
• The port is set to DISABLE.
• Authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.
• When an error other than the communication result code 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (including error response of
5XX)
81 NG REPORT In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet FAX).
• Error of the disposition-modifier.
• The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or
processed.
82 NO REPORT In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including PC-
Internet FAX).
• In a case where send confirmation wait time-out time is other than 0, when send confirmation reply from an
Internet FAX destination is not received.
• Recalls of the set number of recalls are performed, but send confirmation reply from an internet AFX destination is
not received.
83 NG LIMIT In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.
84 REJECTED In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>
85 NG85 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
• Header acquisition error.
• Time-out during mail receive
86 RECEIVED In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.
Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.
• The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.
• There is no attached file.
87 NG87 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Memory over
88 NG88 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Cannot be stored in memory.
• The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
89 NG89 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.
• Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
90 NG90 XXXX *1 After reservation by re-operation of document filing, conversion for image send cannot be made.
• conversion for image sending cannot be made.
91 NG91 XXXX *1 *2 Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
• The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.
• An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
92 NG92 XXXX *1 *2 The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is executed.
93 NG93 XXXX *1 When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)
• An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.
• Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
94 NG94 XXXX *1 When busy in D-SMTP send
Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
95 NG95 XXXX *1 When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.
96 NG96 XXXX *1 When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.
98 NG98 XXXX *1 The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.
99 NG99 XXXX *1 A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.
*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG XXXX" is displayed. " " is the code number.
For a communication result, "Communication error (XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.
• When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."
• Errors in ( ) are not used.

(2) Communication report sub code 1
The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive

00 When the conditions after 01 do not apply. Send/Receive
01 Send length over Send
02 EOL time up Receive
03 Carrier detection time up Receive
04 Time up of the communication start command from the machine side Receive
05 Time up in phase C (8 min) Send
06 Memory image decode error Receive
07 Memory image decode error Send
08 Time up between frames in phase C (Report code is 0 or 16.) Send/Receive
09 Not used —
10 Not used —
11 Polarity reversion detection Receive
12 Invalid command reception Receive
13 Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time) Receive
14 PUT error Receive
15 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Receive
16 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Receive
17 Command receive time-up from MFP controller Receive
18 Not used —
19 Not used —
20 Polarity reversion detection Send
21 Invalid command reception Send
22 Fallback retry number over Send
23 Command retry number resend over Send
24 Time up (T5 timer) Send
25 Time up (T5 timer) in V.34 mode Send
26 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Send
27 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Send
28 When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time. (V.34, Send
other than V.34)
29 Not used —
30 A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.) —
31 DC current not detected (busy) Send
Line disconnected.
32 Dial tone not detected (busy) Send
33 Busy tone detection (busy) Send
34 T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
35 T1 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
36 In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding) Send
37 Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)> Send
38 Not used —
60 In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding. Resend
61 In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be Resend
Enlarged.)
62 In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated. Resend
63 In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend. Resend
64 In resending data of document file, during conversion for resending, the number of IMS management pages exceeds the upper Resend
limit (999). (IT occurs in OSA Scan to FTP also, resulting in memory over.) OSAScanToFTP
70 E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive
71 Time out occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
72 Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
73 Network communication cannot be made due to port disable. Network send
74 An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled. Network send
75 In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Network send
76 There is no image in network communication (transfer). Network send
80 There is no attached file in received e-mail. E-mail receive
81 The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported. E-mail receive
82 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
ID error
Endian error
Version error
Tag data error
Tag parameter error

Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive
Header size error
Data error
90 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Memory over.
Cannot be stored in memory.
91 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
92 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Cannot be stored in memory.
93 There is character that cannot be processed. —
OCR processing error.
When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."

[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
MX-4071
Service Manual
1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the machine. 2) Update method using FTP
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for repair 3) Update method using the Web page
to the machine. 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be methods.)
repaired. Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
B. Notes for update When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as power-
off during updating, etc., and when retries of these methods are
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update failed, the method 4) is employed.
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s Firmware types
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations of
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or USB
memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
Execution of the firmware by SIM49-1

1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware into 3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation panel.) will be shown for each firmware respectively.
2) Enter the SIM49-1. 4) Press [ALL] key.
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to the All the firmware programs are selected.
update screen. * Normally select all the firmwares and execute updating.
* The number of key changes according to the number of the sfu * In this case, firmwares which do not exist on the machine side
file in the media or USB memory inserted. are ignored.
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to the To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with the
SIM49-1 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE CON- firmware display key.
TAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the screen.
* If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK] key to open and cannot be pressed.
the file. If the media have not been inserted and [OK] key is
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]” becomes
pushed, the next screen does not appear and the screen waits
clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected firemware.
the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB memory is pulled out
on the file list screen, the error is detected by the [FILE] key 6) If the update is normal completion, Display "Complete"
pressing, and the first screen appears. 7) If the update is not normal completion, Display "Error" and its firm-
ware name or dose not reboot, in this case power OFF and ON if
still same machine condition, go to the CN update
MX-4071 FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identifier and
the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page

An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update
the firmware.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL (http:
//xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter the servicing page
menu. Default password : "service". A special firmware upgrade
page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update. "Close the browser and open again to display latest information."
will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
MX-xxxx
D. Firmware update using the CN update function
(There are three methods.)
(1) Outline
The update method using the DIP SW of the SCN MFP PWB is called
the CN update.
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode.
1) Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring data
from the PC which is connected to the SCN MFP PWB, the PCU
PWB, the FAX PWB by means of a USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-1, but differs in the following
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firmware
to the machine. Update processing begins. While processing points:
takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..." appears. When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a sec-
tion other than the boot program for some reasons during firm-
ware update operation of other method than the CN update, this
method can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the eMMC
PWB must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program.
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality in
the boot program.
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is not
displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in the
4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
main program.
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the [Reboot]
key, the machine will restart to complete the update. The browser
will shift to the following screen.

2) Firmware version check function (2) Operating procedures
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5 is a. Necessary items
easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this man-
1) eMMC PWB mounted on the SCN MFP PWB of the machine.
ual.)
2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.
3) ROM making function
(This function is not used in the market, and not described in this
manual.)
Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level lower
b. Purpose directory.
This function is used in the following cases:
b. Procedures
1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other
1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP cover.
than the CN update.
2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the SCN MFP PWB UP DATE. (Tilt it to
When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section other
the PWB side.)
than the boot program for some reasons during firmware update
operation of other method than the CN update, this method can 3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
be used to update the firmware. USB memory installing position
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the eMMC
PWB must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program.
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be
used. In such a case, the eMMC PWB must be replaced with a
new one having the normal boot program.
c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode USB port
To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on the
MFP PWB and boot the machine.
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to
OFF (normal mode).
4) Turn ON the power.

5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes more
than ten seconds to display the menu.)
Update Program Init

Please wait
Version Check
Conf : 00050000
d. Keys used in the CN update mode
Display when booting is completed
The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the nor-
6) Select the firmware update mode.
mal mode.
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.
=72? =$#%-?
Firm Update
From USB Memory
Display of the firmware update mode
7) Press [OK] key.

The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and the
file selection menu is displayed.
=/'07?
Firm Update
=&190? =1-?
> F xxxxxxxx.sfu
Key name Functions in the CN update mode
[OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
Display of file selection
[MENU] key Selects a menu.
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
(Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
[UP] key Selects an item.
[DOWN] key Selects an item.

8) Select the firmware file (SFU).
Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and [DOWN]
key.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: "> D")
displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
menu returns to the original upper directory.
9) Press [OK] key.
The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one min-
ute.
Firm Update
Reading Data
Display of file reading
10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is con-

tinued.
Firm Update IcuM

Writing Data
Display of the firmware update process
* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under update

process is indicated on the right upper corner of the display.
* During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
11) Check the update result.
Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the firm-
ware programs.
Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM

Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG
Display of the firmware update result
OK: Update is completed successfully.

NG: Update is failed.
Not Update: Update is not executed.
12) Turn OFF the power.
13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the SCN MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
DIP-SW to the normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine boots
up normally.
Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
copier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
16) Attach the SCN MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.

[9] MAINTENANCE
MX-4071
Service Manual
1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance

A. Counter check B. Counter reset
Before execution of the maintenance, execute SIM22 to check the When a part or consumable part is replaced with new one in the main-
counter values of the following counters to confirm consuming states tenance. Execute SIM24 reset the following counters.
of each section. 1) Maintenance counter
1) Each consumable part counter 2) Each consumable part counter
2) Each unit counter 3) Each unit counter
3) Trouble counter, JAM counter 4) Trouble counter, JAM counter
C. Firmware version check and update

Execute SIM22-5 to check the firmware version and update it as
needed.
2. Display of maintenance execution timing

The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value. The relations between the message and the
counters are shown below.
A. Maintenance counter
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: TA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total) When SIM21-1 set value is Enable
reached
1 (Print stop) When 90% of SIM21-1 set value
is reached
□Maintenance required: TA 1 (Print stop) When SIM21-1 set value is Disable
reached
Maintenance required: CA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Color) When SIM21-1 set value is Enable
reached
is reached
□Maintenance required: CA 1 (Print stop) When SIM21-1 set value is Disable
reached
Maintenance required: AA 0 (Print continue) Both of Total and Color When SIM21-1 set value is Enable
reached
is reached
□Maintenance required: AA 1 (Print stop) When SIM21-1 set value is Disable
reached
* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total) and the maintenance counter (Color).
B. Primary transfer unit

Display content
Maintenance required: TK1 0 (Print continue) Primary transfer unit print counter 26/30 ppm machine: Enable
When 250K is reached
1 (Print stop) 35/40 ppm machine:
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the primary transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter
and the use day counter.
C. Secondary transfer unit

Display content Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Maintenance required: TK2 0 (Print continue) Secondary transfer unit print 26/30 ppm machine: Enable
counter When 250K is reached
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the secondary transfer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter and
the use day counter.
MX-4071 MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
D. PTC unit
Display content
Maintenance required: TK3 0 (Print continue) PTC unit print counter 26/30 ppm machine: Enable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the PTC unit print counter, accumulated number of rotations counter and the use day
counter.
E. Fusing unit
Display content
Maintenance required: FK1 0 (Print continue) Fusing belt print counter 26/30 ppm machine: Enable
1 (Print stop) When 250K is reached
Maintenance required: FK2 0 (Print continue) Pressure roller print counter 35/40 ppm machine: Enable
1 (Print stop) When 300K is reached
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing roller counter, fusing belt counter, the accumulated rotation number counter
and the use day counter.
F. OPC drum
Display content
Maintenance required: DK 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (K) 26 ppm machine: Enable
OPC drum accumulated rotation When 200K is reached or When
1 (Print stop) number counter (K) 1350K rotation is reached
30/35 ppm machine:
When 230K is reached or When
1350K rotation is reached
40 ppm machine:
When 285K is reached or
When 1350K rotation is reached
Maintenance required: D (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (C/M/Y) 26/30/35 ppm machine: Enable
OPC drum accumulated rotation When 170K is reached or When
1 (Print stop) number counter (C/M/Y) 1350 rotation is reached
40 ppm machine:
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear OPC drum print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter and the use
day counter.
G. Main charger
Display content
Maintenance required: MCK 0 (Print continue) Main charger (K) counter 26 ppm machine: Enable
Main charger (K) accumulated When 200K is reached or When
1 (Print stop) rotation counter 1350K rotation is reached
30/35 ppm machine:
When 230K is reached or When
1350K rotation is reached
40 ppm machine:
Maintenance required: MC (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) Main charger (C/M/Y) counter 26/30/35 ppm machine: Enable
Main charger (C/M/Y) accumulated When 170K is reached or When
1 (Print stop) rotation counter 1350 rotation is reached
40 ppm machine:
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear main charger count/accumulated rotation/use days counters.
H. Waste toner box
Display condition
Display content Print JOB Enable/Disable
Counter name Counter value
Check the waste toner box After detection of near end Near end: Enable
End: Disable
* When the waste toner box is replaced with an empty one, the message disappears
I. Toner
Display content
K/C/M/Y Toner Low No relation Toner motor rotation time Specified time of rotations Enable
(Do not replace cartridge until requested)
(Close to Near end)
Change the toner cartridge No relation Toner supply amount is decreasing ATC sensor output variation Enable
(Near end)
Change the toner cartridge K 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count Disable
(End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value
Change the toner cartridge C/M/Y 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count Enable for
(End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value monochrome
Disable for color
3. Maintenance list
26 ppm machine
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Section/ every
Work When
Unit work Name Unit name Part name 1350K Remarks
sequence calling
sequence rotation
3 Developing section Developing unit 1 Developer x x
(Monochrome) 2 DV blade x x Replace as needed
3 DV side seal F/R x x
4 Toner filter x x
5 DV upper blade x x
6 Bias pin x x
Developing unit 1 Developer x x
(Color) 2 DV blade x x Replace as needed
4 Toner filter x x
6 Bias pin x x
4 OPC drum section OPC drum unit 1 Charger unit x ▲ Replace at specified rotation number or
(Monochrome) printable number
2 Drum x ▲ Replace at specified rotation number or
printable number
3 Cleaning blade x ▲ Replace at specified rotation number or
printable number or 2 year use
4 Toner reception sheet x x Replace as needed
5 Side seal F/R x x
6 Charger cleaner x ▲
OPC drum unit 1 Charger unit x ▲ Replace at specified rotation number or
(Color) printable number
printable number
5 Side seal F/R x x
Section/ Work
When 1000
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 250K 300K 500K 600K 750K 900K Remarks
calling K
sequence nce
1 Document feed RSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller      Replace at 100K of SPF
section 2 Paper feed roller      paper feed counter or 1
3 Separation roller      year use
Apply grease (UKOG-
0013QSZZ) to the paper
feed shaft when
replacing the paper feed
roller
4 Torque limiter SPF x x x x x Replace at 400K of SPF
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x paper feed counter or 2
year use
6 Discharge brush x x x x x
7 Registration roller     
8 Transport roller 1     
10 Paper exit roller     
11 Sensors x x x x x
12 Scan plate     
13 Gears x x x x x
14 Belts x x x x x
15 OC mat     
Section/ Work
When 1000
calling K
sequence nce
2 Scanner Scanner 1 Drive belt x x x x x
section unit 2 Drive wire x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-
0158FCZZ) to the
specified position
5 Mirror     
6 Lamp      LED: Blow air for
cleaning (do not use
alcohol)
Optical bar: Blow air for
cleaning, Clean with
ethanol alcohol if dirt
cannot be eliminated
7 Lens     
8 CCD     
9 Table glass     
10 SPF glass     
5 Transfer Primary 1 Separation pawl - x x x x Replace as needed
section transfer unit 2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
printing number or 2
year use
3 Primary transfer drive - x x x x Replace as needed
gear
4 Primary transfer drive -     Clean with ethanol
roller alcohol
5 Primary transfer tension -    
roller
6 Primary transfer blade -    
backup roller
7 BK auxiliary roller -    
8 Y auxiliary roller -    
9 Pre-transfer roller -    
10 Primary transfer roller - x x x x Replace as needed
11 Resist backup stay - x x x x
cushion
12 Primary transfer blade - x x x x
backup roller sheet
13 Primary transfer toner - x x x x
reception sheet F/R
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
year use
15 Primary transfer cleaner - x x x x Replace as needed
sub blade
16 Primary transfer cleaner - x x x x
seals F/R
17 Primary transfer cleaner - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
blade printing number or 2
year use
Secondary 1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
transfer unit printing number or 2
year use
2 Secondary transfer - x x x x Replace as needed
separation plate
3 Paper guide     
4 Sensors - x x x x
Other 1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 PTC outer holder x     Clean with ethanol
alcohol
3 Image density and x    
image registration
sensor
6 LSU section LSU 1 Dust-proof glass     
Other 2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
7 Manual paper Manual 1 Paper pickup roller x     Replace at 100K of
feed section paper feed 2 Paper feed roller x     manual paper feed
unit 3 Separation roller x     counter or 1 year use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x
5 Transport roller 10 x    
6 Sensors x x x x x
Section/ Work
When 1000
calling K
sequence nce
8 Tray paper feed Tray paper 1 Paper pickup roller x     Replace at 200K of
section feed unit 2 Paper feed roller x     paper feed counter or 1
3 Separation roller x     year use
8 Sensors x x x x x
9 Paper PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x    
registration 2 Registration roller (drive) x    
section/Paper 3 Transport roller 4 x    
exit section/ 4 Reflection type sensor x    
ADU section
Right door 5 Transport roller 8 x    
unit 6 Transport roller 9 x    
8 Sensors x x x x x
Fusing rear 9 Transport roller 6 x    
unit
Paper exit 10 Paper exit roller 2 x    
unit 11 Discharge brush x x x x x
Other 13 Paper dust removing     
unit
- Paper guides     
10 Drive section Main drive 1 Gears - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
unit 2 Shafts - x x x x 0307FCZZ) to the
specified position when
checking
3 Shaft earth section - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
0012QSZZ) to the
checking
4 Belts - x x x x
5 Sensors - x x x x
Transport 6 Gears - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
drive unit 0307FCZZ) to the
checking
7 Gears - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
0299FCZZ) to the
checking
8 Shafts - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
0307FCZZ) to the
checking
9 Belts - x x x x Do not attach grease
10 Connection arm - x x x x
Fusing 11 Gears - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
checking
0307FCZZ) to the
checking
0307FCZZ) to the
checking
Paper exit 15 Belts - x x x x Do not attach grease
drive unit
Section/ Work
When 1000
calling K
sequence nce
11 Fusing section Fusing unit 1 Lower fusing transport x x x x x
roller
2 Gears x x x x x
3 Upper fusing transport x x x x x
roller
4 Pressure bearing x x x x x
5 Separation plate x x x x x Clean foreign matter
adhesion
6 Pressure roller gear x x x x x Replace as needed
7 Pressure roller bearing x x x x x Replace as needed
8 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-
0235FCZZ) to the shaft
when replacing and after
completion of
replacement, Clean new
pressure roller surface
with alcohol
9 Upper thermistor x x x x x Replace as needed
10 Fusing belt unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
11 Lower thermistor x x x x x Replace as needed
12 Main thermistor x x x x x
13 Sub thermistor x x x x x
15 Paper guides     
12 Other Other Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲
UFP filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ For Europe
Right cover filter x    
Front cover cushion x x x x x Be careful not to
damage the cushion
when cleaning the front
cover
Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty
Waste toner box User replacement for every toner full Replace at 50K
Alcohol for cleaning.

Be sure to use ethanol for cleaning.
2 : ‘21/Oct.
30 ppm machine
Section/ every
Work When
sequence calling
sequence rotation
4 Toner filter x x
6 Bias pin x x
4 Toner filter x x
6 Bias pin x x
printable number
5 Side seal F/R x x
printable number
5 Side seal F/R x x
Section/ Work
When 1000
calling K
sequence nce
1 Document feed DSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller      Replace at 100K of SPF
4 Torque limiter x x x x x Replace at 800K of SPF
paper feed counter
2 12 Reflection type sensors x    
13 Transmission type x x x x x
sensors
14 No.1 scanning plate     
15 No.2 scanning section,     
scanning glass
16 No.2 scanning section,     
white reference glass
17 Mirror     
18 Lens, CCD     
alcohol)
20 OC mat     
21 Gears x x x x x
22 Belts x x x x x
23 Sheet     
Section/ Work
When 1000
calling K
sequence nce
1 Document feed RSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller      Replace at 100K of SPF
Apply grease (UKOG-
feed shaft when
roller
4 Torque limiter SPF x x x x x Replace at 400K of SPF
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x paper feed counter or 2
year use
12 Scan plate     
13 Gears x x x x x
14 Belts x x x x x
15 OC mat     
2 Scanner Scanner 1 Drive belt x x x x x
section unit 2 Drive wire x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-
0158FCZZ) to the
specified position
5 Mirror     
alcohol)
7 Lens     
8 CCD     
10 SPF glass     
Section/ Work
When 1000
calling K
sequence nce
5 Transfer Primary 1 Separation pawl - x x x x Replace as needed
section transfer unit 2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
year use
3 Primary transfer drive - x x x x Replace as needed
gear
4 Primary transfer drive -     Clean with ethanol
roller alcohol
5 Primary transfer tension -    
roller
6 Primary transfer blade -    
backup roller
11 Resist backup stay - x x x x
cushion
12 Primary transfer blade - x x x x
backup roller sheet
13 Primary transfer toner - x x x x
reception sheet F/R
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
year use
15 Primary transfer cleaner - x x x x Replace as needed
sub blade
16 Primary transfer cleaner - x x x x
seals F/R
17 Primary transfer cleaner - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
year use
Secondary 1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
year use
2 Secondary transfer - x x x x Replace as needed
separation plate
4 Sensors - x x x x
Other 1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 PTC outer holder x     Clean with ethanol
alcohol
3 Image density and x    
image registration
sensor
6 LSU section LSU 1 Dust-proof glass     
Other 2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
7 Manual paper Manual 1 Paper pickup roller x     Replace at 100K of
feed section paper feed 2 Paper feed roller x     manual paper feed
unit 3 Separation roller x     counter or 1 year use
6 Sensors x x x x x
8 Tray paper feed Tray paper 1 Paper pickup roller x     Replace at 200K of
section feed unit 2 Paper feed roller x     paper feed counter or 1
3 Separation roller x     year use
8 Sensors x x x x x
Section/ Work
When 1000
calling K
sequence nce
9 Paper PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x    
registration 2 Registration roller (drive) x    
section/Paper 3 Transport roller 4 x    
exit section/ 4 Reflection type sensor x    
ADU section
Right door 5 Transport roller 8 x    
unit 6 Transport roller 9 x    
8 Sensors x x x x x
Fusing rear 9 Transport roller 6 x    
unit
Paper exit 10 Paper exit roller 2 x    
unit 11 Discharge brush x x x x x
Other 13 Paper dust removing     
unit
10 Drive section Main drive 1 Gears - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
unit 2 Shafts - x x x x 0307FCZZ) to the
checking
3 Shaft earth section - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
0012QSZZ) to the
checking
4 Belts - x x x x
5 Sensors - x x x x
Transport 6 Gears - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
checking
0299FCZZ) to the
checking
0307FCZZ) to the
checking
Fusing 11 Gears - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
checking
0307FCZZ) to the
checking
0307FCZZ) to the
checking
Paper exit 15 Belts - x x x x Do not attach grease
drive unit
Section/ Work
When 1000
calling K
sequence nce
11 Fusing section Fusing unit 1 Lower fusing transport x x x x x
roller
2 Gears x x x x x
3 Upper fusing transport x x x x x
roller
5 Separation plate x x x x x Clean foreign matter
adhesion
8 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-
completion of
with alcohol
12 Other Other Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲
UFP filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ For Europe
Right cover filter x    
Front cover cushion x x x x x Be careful not to
damage the cushion
cover

2 : ‘21/Oct.
35/40 ppm machine
Section/ every
Work When
sequence calling
sequence rotation
4 Toner filter x x
6 Bias pin x x
4 Toner filter x x
6 Bias pin x x
printable number
5 Side seal F/R x x
printable number
5 Side seal F/R x x
Section/ Work
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
calling
sequence nce
1 Document feed DSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller       Replace at 100K of SPF
section 2 Paper feed roller       paper feed counter or 1
3 Separation roller       year use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x Replace at 800K of SPF
paper feed counter
5 Transport roller 1      
7 Registration roller      
10 Paper exit roller      
11 Discharge brush x x x x x x
2 12 Reflection type sensors x     
13 Transmission type x x x x x x
sensors
14 No.1 scanning plate      
15 No.2 scanning section,      
scanning glass
16 No.2 scanning section,      
white reference glass
17 Mirror      
18 Lens, CCD      
19 Lamp       LED: Blow air for
alcohol)
20 OC mat      
21 Gears x x x x x x
22 Belts x x x x x x
23 Sheet      
Section/ Work
When
calling
sequence nce
1 Document feed RSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller       Replace at 100K of SPF
section 2 Paper feed roller       paper feed counter or 1
3 Separation roller       year use
Apply grease (UKOG-
feed shaft when
roller
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x Replace at 400K of SPF
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x x paper feed counter or 2
year use
11 Sensors x x x x x x
12 Scan plate      
15 OC mat      
2 Scanner Scanner 1 Drive belt x x x x x x
section unit 2 Drive wire x x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-
0158FCZZ) to the
specified position
5 Mirror      
6 Lamp       LED: Blow air for
alcohol)
7 Lens      
8 CCD      
9 Table glass      
10 SPF glass      
Section/ Work
When
calling
sequence nce
5 Transfer Primary 1 Separation pawl - x x x x x Replace as needed
section transfer unit 2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
year use
3 Primary transfer drive - x x x x x Replace as needed
gear
4 Primary transfer drive -      Clean with ethanol
roller alcohol
5 Primary transfer tension -     
roller
6 Primary transfer blade -     
backup roller
7 BK auxiliary roller -     
8 Y auxiliary roller -     
9 Pre-transfer roller -     
10 Primary transfer roller - x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Resist backup stay - x x x x x
cushion
12 Primary transfer blade - x x x x x
backup roller sheet
13 Primary transfer toner - x x x x x
reception sheet F/R
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
year use
15 Primary transfer cleaner - x x x x x Replace as needed
sub blade
16 Primary transfer cleaner - x x x x x
seals F/R
17 Primary transfer cleaner - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
year use
Secondary 1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified
year use
2 Secondary transfer - x x x x x Replace as needed
separation plate
3 Paper guide      
4 Sensors - x x x x x
Other 1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 PTC outer holder x      Clean with ethanol
alcohol
3 Image density and x     
image registration
sensor
6 LSU section LSU 1 Dust-proof glass      
Other 2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
7 Manual paper Manual 1 Paper pickup roller x      Replace at 100K of
feed section paper feed 2 Paper feed roller x      manual paper feed
unit 3 Separation roller x      counter or 1 year use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 10 x     
8 Tray paper feed Tray paper 1 Paper pickup roller x      Replace at 200K of
section feed unit 2 Paper feed roller x      paper feed counter or 1
3 Separation roller x      year use
Section/ Work
When
calling
sequence nce
9 Paper PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x     
registration 2 Registration roller (drive) x     
section/Paper 3 Transport roller 4 x     
exit section/ 4 Reflection type sensor x     
ADU section
Right door 5 Transport roller 8 x     
unit 6 Transport roller 9 x     
Fusing rear 9 Transport roller 6 x     
unit
Paper exit 10 Paper exit roller 2 x     
unit 11 Discharge brush x x x x x x
Other 13 Paper dust removing      
unit
- Paper guides      
10 Drive section Main drive 1 Gears - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
unit 2 Shafts - x x x x x 0307FCZZ) to the
checking
3 Shaft earth section - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
0012QSZZ) to the
checking
4 Belts - x x x x x
Transport 6 Gears - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
checking
7 Gears - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
0299FCZZ) to the
checking
8 Shafts - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
0307FCZZ) to the
checking
9 Belts - x x x x x Do not attach grease
10 Connection arm - x x x x x
Fusing 11 Gears - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
checking
12 Gears - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
0307FCZZ) to the
checking
13 Shafts - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-
0307FCZZ) to the
checking
Paper exit 15 Belts - x x x x x Do not attach grease
drive unit
Section/ Work
When
calling
sequence nce
11 Fusing section Fusing unit 1 Lower fusing transport x x x x x x
roller
2 Gears x x x x x x
3 Upper fusing transport x x x x x x
roller
4 Pressure bearing x x x x x x
5 Separation plate x x x x x x Clean foreign matter
adhesion
6 Pressure roller gear x x x x x x Replace as needed
7 Pressure roller bearing x x x x x x Replace as needed
8 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-
completion of
with alcohol
9 Upper thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
10 Fusing belt unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
11 Lower thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
12 Main thermistor x x x x x x
13 Sub thermistor x x x x x x
15 Paper guides      
12 Other Other Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
UFP filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ For Europe
Right cover filter x     
Front cover cushion x x x x x x Be careful not to
damage the cushion
cover

2 : ‘21/Oct.
A. Document feed section
(1) DSPF
30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

Part name 250K 300K 500K 600K 750K 900K Remarks
sequence calling K
1 Paper pickup roller      Replace at 100K of SPF paper feed
2 Paper feed roller      counter or 1 year use
3 Separation roller     
4 Torque limiter x x x x x Replace at 800K of SPF paper feed
counter
2 12 Reflection type sensors x    
13 Transmission type sensors x x x x x
14 No.1 scanning plate     
15 No.2 scanning section, scanning glass     
16 No.2 scanning section, white reference glass     
17 Mirror     
18 Lens, CCD     
19 Lamp      LED: Blow air for cleaning (do not use
alcohol)
Optical bar: Blow air for cleaning,
Clean with ethanol alcohol if dirt
20 OC mat     
21 Gears x x x x x
22 Belts x x x x x
23 Sheet     
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller       Replace at 100K of SPF paper feed
2 Paper feed roller       counter or 1 year use
3 Separation roller      
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x Replace at 800K of SPF paper feed
counter
2 12 Reflection type sensors x     
13 Transmission type sensors x x x x x x
14 No.1 scanning plate      
15 No.2 scanning section, scanning glass      
16 No.2 scanning section, white reference glass      
17 Mirror      
18 Lens, CCD      
19 Lamp       LED: Blow air for cleaning (do not use
alcohol)
20 OC mat      
23 Sheet      
2 : ‘21/Oct.
2 13 22
2
22 1
3 13
5
13
21
12
4
6 22
21
12
7
14
13 23
8
13
13
9
10
18 11
20
17
19
16 15
a. Disassembly and assembly of maintenance parts 4) Remove the screw. Remove the paper feed cover.
a-1. Paper pickup roller
a-2. Paper feed roller
1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw.
Ĭ Ĭ
5) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle. Remove the

2) Remove the front cabinet. snap band.
ĭ Į
Į
ĭ
į
Ĭ
3) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet. Ĭ
6) Remove the screw, and remove the document feed unit.

ĭ
Ĭ
į
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
2 : ‘21/Oct.
7) Remove the paper feed PG upper cover. 2) Remove the revere pressure release lever, and remove the sepa-
ration roller.
* If the original is double fed, try to change the hooking position of 2

the spring to the low-load position that may improve the situa-
tion.
8) Remove the pickup roller holder. Remove the paper pickup roller
from the pickup roller holder.
9) Remove the paper feed roller.

a-4. Torque limiter
1) Remove the rear cabinet lower.
a-3. Separation roller

1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed PG lower cover.
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
2) Disconnect the connector and open the edge saddle. 5) Remove E-ring, separation clutch and transport clutch.
NOTE: make sure that stopping section in the clutch is fit into the
plate during the assembly.
ĭ ĭ
3) Remove the screws and the paper exit drive unit.
When attaching the paper exit drive unit, tighten the screw in the
order of (1) - (3). 6) Remove the screws and the paper feed drive unit.
Į
Ĭ
į
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
4) Disconnect the connectors. Remove the harness from the wire

saddle.
7) Remove the E-ring, and remove the Transport roller 1 (Idle).
8) Remove the screw. Lift the document paper feed tray and remove a-7. Registration roller
the paper guide. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the left rear lower cabinet.
Ĭ
Į ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the PS knob.

9) Remove the screw, and remove the support plate and the bearing.
Remove the roller shaft, and remove the torque limiter.
İ
ĭ
į 3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide.

Clean the registration roller.
Į
ĭ
a-5. Transport roller 1 ĭ

a-6. Transport roller 2 Ĭ
1) Clean the transport roller 1 and the transport roller 2.
a-8. Transport roller 3 3) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate. Remove the
white reference plate.
a-9. Transport roller 4
1) Open the OC mat.
Ĭ
2) Open the lower door. Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum
plate. Remove the lower door.
4) Clean the transport roller 3 and transport roller 4.
Į Ĭ
a-10. Paper exit roller a-12. No.1 scanning plate
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the a-13. No.2 scanning section, scanning glass
document feed tray. 1) Clean the no.1 scanning plate and the no.2 scanning section,
scanning glass.
ĭ
ĭ
2) Clean the paper exit roller. a-14. No.2 scanning section, white reference glass
1) Use cleaner to clean the no.2 scanning section, white reference
glass.
a-15. Mirror
a-11. Discharge brush 1) Remove the spring, pressure release axis holder, screw and pres-
1) Check the discharge brush. sure release link lever.
NOTE: when replacing the discharge brush, attach to the attach-
ment reference.
į ĭ
0mm
0.5mm
Į
0.5mm 0.5mm Ĭ
Attaching reference
2) Disconnect the connector. 5) Remove the screw and lamp unit.
3) Remove the E-ring, and remove the upper door unit.
6) Remove the screws and paper guide.
Ĭ Į
4) Disconnect the connector for lamp unit from the control PWB.
7) Remove the CCD FFC from the CCD PWB.
8) Remove the screw and cushion. Remove optics fixing plate and a-16. Lens, CCD
optical unit. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the dark box. Remove the dust-
proof cover.
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ ĭ Į
į
9) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror base cover.
2) Remove the lens cover.

Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
3) Clean the lens and the CCD.
10) Clean the mirror.
a-17. Lamp a-19. Gears
1) Remove the screw, and remove the LED PWB guide. 1) Clean the Gears.
ĭ Į Ĭ
Ĭ
2) Clean the lamp.
a-18. OC mat
1) Clean the OC mat.
a-20. Belts
1) When attaching the belt, loosen the screw. Then, tighten the
screw while applying tension.
Ĭ
ĭ
2) When attaching the belt, loosen the screw. Then, tighten the 3) Disconnect the connector.
screw again after reapplying tension in the direction of the arrow. Clean the sensor.
4) Remove the screw and the rotation tray shaft. Then, remove the
document feed tray upper.
a-21. Sensors
a-22. Sheet
1) Clean the transparent sheet for the lighting lamp.
ĭ
Ĭ
5) Clean the sensor.
2) Remove the screw and the document feed tray lower.
6) Remove the screw and the paper feed paper guide upper reinforc-
ing plate.
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
7) Clean the sensor. 10) Clean the sensor.
8) Remove the screw.
11) Remove the screw and the PS upper paper guide.

9) Remove the screw and paper exit tray.
(2) RSPF
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

sequence calling K
1 Paper pickup roller      Replace at 100K of SPF paper feed
2 Paper feed roller      counter or 1 year use
3 Separation roller      Apply grease (UKOG-0013QSZZ) to
the paper feed shaft when replacing
the paper feed roller
4 Torque limiter x x x x x Replace at 400K of SPF paper feed
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x counter or 2 year use
12 Scan plate     
13 Gears x x x x x
14 Belts x x x x x
15 OC mat     
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller       Replace at 100K of SPF paper feed
2 Paper feed roller       counter or 1 year use
3 Separation roller       Apply grease (UKOG-0013QSZZ) to
the paper feed shaft when replacing
the paper feed roller
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x Replace at 400K of SPF paper feed
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x x counter or 2 year use
12 Scan plate      
15 OC mat      
11 14
5
11
1 13
2
11
14
11
7
12
9
10
6
3
4
15
a. Disassembly and assembly of maintenance parts 2) Remove the E-ring, the shaft, the separation roller and the torque
limiter.
a-1. Paper pickup roller
a-2. Paper feed roller
1) Open the paper feed unit and remove the cover.
Ĭ Ĭ Į
a-5. Torque limiter pickup

1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, the pulley and the E-ring.
2) Remove the holder, the paper pickup roller and the paper feed
roller.
Ĭ
ĭ
Į
Į
į
ĭ
2) Remove the E-ring, and the bearing, then pull out the shaft,
remove the holder and the torque limiter pickup.
Ĭ
į
Į
a-3. Separation roller

a-4. Torque limiter
Ĭ
ĭ
į
İ
a-6. Discharge brush a-8. Transport roller 1
1) Open the document tray and remove the discharge brush. a-9. Transport roller 2
a-10. Paper exit roller
a-11. Sensors
a-12. Scan plate
a-13. Gears
a-14. Belts
1) Turn over the left upper corner of the OC mat.
Attaching reference
1mm 1mm
Attaching
reference Ĭ
0mm
0.5mm
a-7. Registration roller

1) Open the paper feed unit and clean the registration roller.
2) Remove the front cabinet.
3) Remove the rear cabinet. 6) Remove the RSPF paper transport unit.
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
4) Disconnect the connector from the RSPF driver PWB. Remove

the holder, and remove the RSPF paper feed tray unit.
7) Clean the transport roller 1, the transport roller 2, the paper exit
roller and the scan plate.
ĭ Į
į
8) Remove the screw and the document tray lower.
5) Remove the earth wire. Disconnect the connector from the RSPF
driver PWB. Ĭ
Ĭ Į
ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
9) Clean the sensor. 12) Remove the screw.
13) Remove the upper cover.
11) Open the scan plate and clean the sensor.
15) Remove the E-ring and the clutch. 18) Clean the gear and the belt.
Ĭ
19) When removing the drive unit, loosen the screw and belt tension.
When attaching the drive unit, loosen the screw. Then, tighten the
When attaching the drive unit, loosen the screw. Then, tighten the
20) Clean the gear and the belt.
17) Remove the screw and the drive unit.
a-15. OC mat
1) Open the RSPF unit and clean the OC mat.
B. Scanner section
(1) Scanner unit
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

sequence calling K
1 Drive belt x x x x x
2 Drive wire x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-0158FCZZ) to
the specified position
5 Mirror     
6 Lamp      LED: Blow air for cleaning (do not use
alcohol)
7 Lens     
8 CCD     
10 SPF glass     
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
sequence calling
1 Drive belt x x x x x x
2 Drive wire x x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-0158FCZZ) to
the specified position
5 Mirror      
6 Lamp       LED: Blow air for cleaning (do not use
alcohol)
7 Lens      
8 CCD      
9 Table glass      
10 SPF glass      
3
10
3
9
7
8
2
5
a. Disassembly and assembly of maintenance parts
a-1. Drive belt
Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the fig-
a-2. Drive wire
ure below and fix it.
1) Remove the table glass and SPF glass.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror unit
to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as shown in
į (DSPF model only) the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then wind two turns
furthermore around the pulley.
İ Ĳ
į ı
Į į
į ĭ
İ
Ĭ
Į
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĳ
ı
2) Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to 1 7 8 9 10
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound without į
clearance. İ
ĭ
Ĭ
Į 10 9 8 7 1
a-3. Sensors
1) Clean the each sensor.
OK NG
a-4. Rails a-8. Lens
1) Remove the table glass. a-9. CCD
2) Grease each rail. 1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box, and the cover.
Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive wires.

Ĭ
If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.
ĭ Ĭ
3) Clean the lens, and the CCD.

a-5. Mirror
a-6. Reflector
a-7. Lamp
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.
a-10. Table glass

a-11. SPF glass
1) Remove the glass holder, the table glass, and the SPF glass.
į (DSPF model only)

3) Clean the lamp, and the No. 1 mirror.
į İ
Į
į
Ĭ
ĭ
2) Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.
C. Developer section
(1) Developer unit
Monochrome
Work every 1350K
Part name When calling Remarks
sequence rotation
1 Developer x x
2 DV blade x x Replace as needed
4 Toner filter x x
6 Bias pin x x
Color
Work every 1350K
sequence rotation
1 Developer x x
2 DV blade x x Replace as needed
4 Toner filter x x
6 Bias pin x x
6
3
2
a. Disassembly of Units 5) While pulling down the lever, pull out the developing unit to
1) Remove the waste toner box. remove.
2) Disconnect the connector of the developing unit before opening
the drum positioning plate.
When pulling out and pushing in the developing unit, put your
hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide.
At the time, be careful not to touch the developing roller surface.
Put it in the horizontal place.
make sure connector correctly inserted when connecting Ĭ
OK NG
3) Check that the cam lock plate is aligned with the "O" mark posi-
tion.
4) Turn the lock to release, and open the drum positioning plate.
ĭ
Ĭ
b. Disassembly and assembly of maintenance parts
b-1. Developer
1) Tilt the developing unit slightly toward the direction of arrow and Do not touch the MG roller.
gently shake up a little.
*To prevent the developer spilling out of developing unit
MG roller
4) While rotating the gear, dispose of developer

2) Remove the screw
3) Press both edges of the cover and remove it while rotating.
5) Loading developer to the developing unit 7) Insert the pawls on the cover into the holes on DV-BOX at an
angle of 45 degrees.
Be sure to shake the bag of developer thoroughly before pouring

into the developing unit
When pouring the developer into the unit, use care not to get
developer into the drive section
8) Rotate and insert the cover.
6) Slightly tilt the developing unit. Load developer on lower side of

MG roller evenly on left and right.
Do not tilt the developing unit after loading the developer.
9) Check the mounting condition of the cover and tighten screws. 2) Pull the center section and remove the boss. Insert a flat-blade
screwdriver into the space (1) in the illustration below. Slide the
cover toward the front and remove the rear-side boss.
Since shoulder screws are used, do not tighten too firmly.

Tightening torque of the screw 0.5 - 0.6Nm
When removing the rear-side boss, press the cover gently to pre-
vent toner dispersion.
Į
The front-side boss and rear-side boss must be handled with care
to prevent fracturing.
Ĭ Make sure that bosses are

fit into holes.
į Press the cover toward

the direction of arrow Ĭ
after assembling.
The cover must be
ĭ Make sure pawls are seated securely.
inserted and secured.
3) Release the front-side boss while sliding the cover toward rear
side and remove the cover.
Execute developer adjustment after replacement of the developer.
(Sim25-2)
b-2. DV blade
1) Remove the screw
4) Remove the DV blade b-3. DV side seal FR
1) Remove the DV side seal FR
When replacing the DV blade, affix the DV blade based on the ref-
erence position. When replacing the DV side seal FR, affix the seals based on the
reference position.
Before affixing new DV blade, make sure to remove any foreign

material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface completely. Before affixing new DV side seal FR, make sure to remove any
foreign material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface
completely.
Steady the DV blade after affixing the blade. (Make sure that the
sheet is seated securely.) DV side seal F DV side seal R
Make sure there are no crinkles on lead edge of the DV blade

after affixing the DV blade.
Reference position Reference position

Reference position Reference position (Edge face) (Edge face)
(Wall surface) (Wall surface)
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm
0mm 0mm
(Steps) (Edge face)
2) Insert two front-side bosses into the holes on DV-BOX.

Insert one rear-side boss into the holes on DV-BOX while slightly
bending the cover.
Insert the boss on back side of the cover securely and tighten
screw.
Do not mistake for DV blade upper.
Į
DV blade. DV blade upper.
Cut surface No cut surface

į
Ĭ ĭ
3) Attach the filter cover.
Make sure a part of DV blade is placed on top of DV side seal FR. Put the hole through the boss.
DV blade is Side seal is

placed on top placed on top
Insert the ribs.
Hook the filter cover

with pawls.
b-4. Toner filter
1) Uplift a knob on the filter cover (1), slide toward the direction of (2) Make sure to hook the filter cover
with pawl and rib securely.
and remove the cover.
b-5. DV blade upper

1) Remove the DV cover
2) Remove the DV blade upper
ĭ When replacing the DV blade upper, affix it based on the refer-

ence position.
Ĭ
Before affixing new DV blade upper, make sure to remove any for-
eign material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface com-
pletely.
Steady the DV blade upper after affixing the blade. (Make sure
2) Remove the toner filter from the filter cover that the sheet is seated securely.)
Make sure to attach the filter in proper mounting direction for
replacement.
upper after affixing the DV blade.
Wider in width
Reference
position
(Wall surface)
0mm
0mm 0.3mm 0.5mm

Reference position
(Wall surface)
Do not mistake for DV blade.
DV blade upper. DV blade.
No cut surface Cut surface
3) Attach the cover.

b-6. Bias pin
1) Check the bias pin.
D. OPC drum section
(1) OPC drum unit
Monochrome
Work every 1350K
sequence rotation
1 Charger unit x ▲ Replace at specified rotation number or printable number
2 Drum x ▲ Replace at specified rotation number or printable number
3 Cleaning blade x ▲ Replace at specified rotation number or printable number or 2 year
use
5 Side seal F/R x x
Color
Work every 1350K
sequence rotation
1 Charger unit x ▲ Replace at specified rotation number or printable number
2 Drum x ▲ Replace at specified rotation number or printable number
3 Cleaning blade x ▲ Replace at specified rotation number or printable number or 2 year
use
5 Side seal F/R x x
1
6
a. Disassembly of Units b. Disassembly and assembly of maintenance parts
1) Remove the waste toner box. b-1. Charger unit
2) Open the drum positioning plate. 1) Uplift the lock lever and pull out the charger unit.
3) Remove the developing unit.
4) While pulling up the lever, pull out the OPC drum to remove.
When pulling out and pushing in the OPC drum unit, put your
hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide on
the right side.
At the time, be careful not to touch the OPC drum surface.
b-2. Drum
1) Remove the screw and pull out the shaft from the drum
lever
*If the drum shaft is hard to remove, insert a flat-blade screwdriver

between process frame and cutout on bearing to remove (as
shown in the illustration below).
Cutout area
Check method
Check to confirm that the drum is free from fingerprints or oily dirt and
When inserting the drum shaft, make sure to insert the pin all the that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the following method
way toward the direction of arrow (in the illustration below). • Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11 x 8.5)
paper and check the printed paper for any abnormality in the image
(2) Prior exposure prevention
Note
• Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light
• Do not expose the unit to light for a long time
• Cover the drum with light-blocking material (when using paper, use
about 10 sheets of paper to block light)
Countermeasures
If the drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior exposure)
perform the following countermeasures
1) Print half tone image on the whole surface of A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
2) Remove the drum and check to confirm that there is no irregular density area in the
previously exposed section
2) If the drum is subject to stress by being exposed to strong light. It
may be recovered by leaving it in a dark and cool place. If it may
not be recovered replace it with a new one
When the drum is removed perform the following procedures
1) After removing the drum, apply stearic acid powder (UKOG-

0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the drum
When handling the drum, make sure to hold within 15 mm of both

edges or less.
15 mm or less 15 mm or less
2) After mounting the drum on drum frame, hold both edges of drum
within 15 mm or less. Rotate the drum manually in the forward
direction twice (toward the direction of arrow as shown in the illus-
tration below) and remove the stearic acid powder (UKOG-
0312FCZZ) from drum surface.
Note for servicing the drums

(1) Prevent contamination
Note
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints or oil dirt on the drum surface
(keep the unit always oils and dust)
• When replacing the drum, cover the drum with the protection sheet
and hold the protection sheet. If it is required to hold the drum
directly, use enough care not to touch the cleaning blade area.
15mm inside from both edges of the drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt
is attached to the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning
blade may flip)
Countermeasures
If a fingerprint is attached to the drum surface erroneously, perform the
following countermeasures
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt • Do not touch the drum surface except for the both ends (15
mm) of the drum
• Any section of the drum may be touched from above the black
protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly
b-3. Cleaning blade 2) Remove the screw and the cleaning blade
1) Remove the pawls and the MC cover.
Do not touch the lead edge of the cleaning blade.

F side
Ĭ When attaching the cleaning blade, tighten the screw in the order
of (1) - (3).
Ĭ
ĭ
Į ĭ
Į
Pay attention to center section
hooked with a pawl.
Followings must be observed while attaching the cover:

• (1) Insert the pawl on MC unit to the square hole on process
frame.
• (2) Insert the pawl into the hole securely until it clicks.
• (3) Insert the pawl on front side securely.
b-4. Toner reception sheet

Į Steady the cover 1) Remove the toner reception sheet
from above.
When replacing the toner reception sheet, affix the sheet based
F side on the reference position. Clean the affixing surface with alcohol.
Make sure the pawl is

secured.
Reference position
(Wall surface)
0mm 0.3mm
ĭ Reference 0mm
position
(Steps)
0.3mm
Ĭ
Inset the pawl

into the frame.
Insert the pawl to

the square hole.
b-5. Side seal FR 2) (1) Remove the charger cleaner attached in front end of the MC
1) Remove the side seal FR cleaning bar and attach new charger cleaner.
(2) If you have any spare charger cleaner, attach it near handle
and keep it for next replacement.
When replacing the side seal FR, attach the cleaning blade first.
Then move the side seals toward front side and attach based on Ĭ
the reference position. Clean the affixing surface with alcohol.
Before affixing new seal, make sure to remove any foreign mate-
rial and remaining adhesive from affixing surface completely.
*The blade should not be put on top of the side seals while hold-
ing down the blade.
*The width of the clearance should be 0.3 mm or less.
Reference position (Wall surface)

0mm
0.3mm
0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm

Reference position (Contact point with the blade)
b-6. Charger cleaner

1) Open the cover and remove the MC cleaning bar.
Detach the cleaning bar by firstly detaching the bar from right-side
pawl, move the right-side bar over the pawl. It will make left side of
the bar slightly tilt upward; rotate the bar just a little and detach left
side of the bar. Finally remove the bar from the center pawl.
E. Transfer section
(1) Primary transfer unit
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

sequence calling K
1 Separation pawl - x x x x Replace as needed
2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified printing number
or 2 year use
3 Primary transfer drive gear - x x x x Replace as needed
4 Primary transfer drive roller -     Clean with ethanol alcohol
5 Primary transfer tension roller -    
6 Primary transfer blade backup roller -    
11 Resist backup stay cushion - x x x x
12 Primary transfer blade backup roller sheet - x x x x
13 Primary transfer toner reception sheet F/R - x x x x
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified printing number
or 2 year use
15 Primary transfer cleaner sub blade - x x x x Replace as needed
16 Primary transfer cleaner seals F/R - x x x x
17 Primary transfer cleaner blade - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified printing number
or 2 year use
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
sequence calling
1 Separation pawl - x x x x x Replace as needed
2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified printing number
or 2 year use
3 Primary transfer drive gear - x x x x x Replace as needed
4 Primary transfer drive roller -      Clean with ethanol alcohol
5 Primary transfer tension roller -     
6 Primary transfer blade backup roller -     
7 BK auxiliary roller -     
8 Y auxiliary roller -     
9 Pre-transfer roller -     
10 Primary transfer roller - x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Resist backup stay cushion - x x x x x
12 Primary transfer blade backup roller sheet - x x x x x
13 Primary transfer toner reception sheet F/R - x x x x x
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified printing number
or 2 year use
15 Primary transfer cleaner sub blade - x x x x x Replace as needed
16 Primary transfer cleaner seals F/R - x x x x x
17 Primary transfer cleaner blade - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified printing number
or 2 year use
16
15
17
8
6
12
13
16
5
14
11
2
3
13
7
4
10
9
1) Remove the waste toner box. b-1. Separation pawl
2) Open the drum positioning plate. 1) Remove the screw and paper guide
3) Open the right door.
4) Loosen the screw and pull out the primary transfer unit to the posi-
tion slowly where it stops. After removing the paper guide, place it with the separation pawl
5) Hold the handle (Green) on the right side of the primary transfer upward to prevent damage on the tip of the pawl.
unit and guide rail (plate) on the left side of the primary transfer
When attaching the paper guide, handle it carefully not to scratch
unit, and pull out the primary transfer unit slowly while lifting it
transfer belt with separation pawl.
upward.
When removing the primary transfer unit, be sure to open the right
door in advance.
Be careful not to put foreign materials and touch on the primary

transfer belt.
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
2) Place the paper guide with the separation pawl upward. Remove
a screw and detach the separation pawl from the paper guide.
ĭ
Ĭ
b-2. Primary transfer belt 4) Remove the spring
1) Remove the screw while Primary transfer cleaner unit in on top
and remove the rail.
Do not touch the belt.
Ĭ
Handle the belt carefully to avoid contact with floor.
5) Remove the screw
2) Flip the unit upside down and remove screws.

3) Remove primary transfer cleaner unit
6) Insert a driver into the hole on the frame and set the unit upright.
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
7) Fold the primary transfer belt followed roller. NOTE: Caution for attachment
Follow the steps below after replacing the primary transfer
belt.
1) Apply Y powder (CKOG-0345DS51) on entire surface of
the primary transfer belt with primary transfer cleaner unit
being removed.
OK NG
8) Remove the sub frame
2) Attach the primary transfer cleaner unit.

3) Manually rotate the primary transfer drive gear and
remove the powder applied on the primary transfer belt.
Confirm proper rotation direction. Never rotate in inverse

direction.
9) Pull out the primary transfer belt slowly.
When attaching the belt,

place the lot number on
the edge of the belt on
rear side.
b-3. Primary transfer drive gear

Caution for attachment
Do not place the belt on 1) Pull out the pin and remove the primary transfer drive gear
flange on the roller.
b-4. Primary transfer drive roller b-10. Primary transfer roller
b-5. Primary transfer tension roller 1) Remove the E-ring and primary transfer roller
1) Clean the primary transfer drive roller and primary transfer tension
roller with alcohol.
Primary transfer
tension roller
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Primary transfer
drive roller
b-6. Primary transfer blade backup roller

b-7. BK auxiliary roller b-11. Resist backup stay cushion
1) Clean the Primary transfer blade backup roller and BK auxiliary 1) Remove the resist backup stay cushion
roller with alcohol.
When replacing the resist backup stay cushion, attach the cushion
based on the reference position.
Before affixing new resist backup stay cushion, make sure to

remove any foreign material and remaining adhesive from affixing
surface completely.
Primary transfer Affix the resist backup stay cushion so that the cut surface
blade backup roller of the cushion will be placed along the marking-off line.
Reference position
Marking-off line
0.3mm 0mm
BK auxiliary roller
b-8. Y auxiliary roller

b-9. Pre-transfer roller
1) Clean the Y auxiliary roller and Pre-transfer roller with alcohol.

Y auxiliary roller (Edge face) (Edge face)
0.3mm 0.3mm
0mm 0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm 0mm
Pre-transfer
roller
b-12. Primary transfer blade backup roller sheet b-13. Primary transfer toner reception sheet FR
1) Remove the parts in the order of a screws, the grounding elec- 1) Remove the primary transfer toner reception sheet FR
trode for blade backup roller, and the frame.
Į When replacing the primary transfer toner reception sheet FR,

affix the sheets based on the reference position.
Ĭ
Į į
ĭ Before affixing new primary transfer toner reception sheet FR,
make sure to remove any foreign material and remaining adhe-
sive from affixing surface completely.
Reference Reference
position position
Edge face Edge face
of the rib of the rib
Ensure that the grounding electrode is contacting 1.0mm 1.0mm
the upper surface of the shaft after attaching the
groounding electrode for blade backup roller.
0mm 0mm
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm
2) Remove the primary transfer blade backup roller sheet Reference position Reference position
Wall surface Wall surface
When replacing the primary transfer blade backup roller sheet, b-14. Cleaning roller
affix the sheet based on the reference position.
1) Remove the E-ring and cleaning roller
Before affixing new primary transfer blade backup roller sheet, Ĭ

Reference 0.3mm
position
Marking-off line 0mm
0mm 0.3mm
Reference position(Edge face)
b-15. Primary transfer cleaner sub blade
1) Remove the primary transfer cleaner sub blade
Before replacing the primary transfer cleaner sub blade, affix the
blade based on the reference position.
Before affixing new primary transfer cleaner sub blade, make sure
to remove any foreign material and remaining adhesive from affix-
ing surface completely.
0mm 0mm
Reference position
0.3mm Steps 0.3mm
Reference position
Edge face of the blade
0.3mm 0mm 0.3mm 0mm
b-17. Primary transfer cleaner blade

1) Remove the screw and primary transfer cleaner blade
Reference
position
Wall surface
0.3mm 0.3mm Do not touch the edge of the blade.
0mm 0mm
Reference position 0.3mm 0mm Do not deform the toner agitation sheet when attaching the blade.
Wall surface Reference position
Steps
b-16. Primary transfer cleaner seals F/R

1) Remove the primary transfer cleaner seals F/R
ĭ
When replacing the primary transfer cleaner seals F/R, affix the
seals based on the reference position. Ĭ
Do no place any part of the seals on top of the blade.
The seals should not get stuck at rubber section on the cleaner
blade.
Before affixing new primary transfer cleaner seals F/R, make sure
(2) Secondary transfer unit
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

sequence calling K
1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified printing number
or 2 year use
2 Secondary transfer separation plate - x x x x Replace as needed
4 Sensors - x x x x
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
sequence calling
1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at specified printing number
or 2 year use
2 Secondary transfer separation plate - x x x x x Replace as needed
3 Paper guide      
2
1
4
1) Open the right door. b-1. Secondary transfer roller
2) Remove the spring from the right door unit and remove the sec- 1) Remove the screw and the cover
ondary transfer unit while lifting it upward from the rear side.
Disconnect the connector from the Secondary transfer unit.
Be careful not to put foreign materials on the secondary transfer

roller.
ĭ 2) Remove the secondary transfer roller sub unit
Ĭ Ĭ
* Spring is removed from the right dorr, however,

the spring is not removed from the secondary transfer unit.
Fix the cable position by band after installing

secondary transfer unit to the original position.
3) Remove the E-ring and the secondary transfer roller
band ĭ
b-2. Secondary transfer separation plate b-4. Paper guide
b-3. Paper guide 1) Remove the plate
1) Remove the screw and the cover
ĭ Ĭ
Remove the boss first.
2) Remove the screw, the separating electrode connecting plate and 2) Remove the sheet
the secondary transfer separation plate.
When replacing the sheet, affix the sheet based on the reference
Do not put any oil content etc. by directly touching the separating position.
electrode connecting plate and the secondary transfer separation
plate with your hand.
Before affixing new sheet, make sure to remove any foreign mate-
Make sure that (2) and rial and remaining adhesive from affixing surface completely.
(3) are contacting each
Ĭ other for attachment.
Reference position
Steps
0.5mm
Į 0mm
0mm 0.5mm
Reference position
Wall surface
b-5. Sensors
1) Remove the E-ring, secondary transfer separation sensor cam,
pin, and bearing.
ĭ
Į
Ĭ
2) Remove the secondary transfer separation sensor cam and then

E-ring. Slide secondary transfer separation cam. Remove the par-
allel pin and then remove the secondary transfer separation cam
shaft sub assembly.
į
ĭ
Ĭ
3) Remove the sensor
(3) Other
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

sequence calling K
1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 PTC outer holder x     Clean with ethanol alcohol
3 Image density and image registration sensor x    
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
sequence calling
1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 PTC outer holder x      Clean with ethanol alcohol
3 Image density and image registration sensor x     
Note for cleaning the Image registration sensor, the Density sensor.
When in maintenance or in case of a service call, clean the image registration sensor and the density sensor with dry cloth and perform Sim44-2 and
46-74.
a-1. PTC unit b-1. PTC outer holder
1) Remove the waste toner box. 1) Remove the primary transfer unit.
2) Open the drum positioning plate. 2) Remove the PTC unit.
3) Remove the PTC unit. 3) Clean PTC outer holder with alcohol.
Be careful not to put foreign materials on the wire and the plate.
a-2. Resist sensor unit

1) Remove the toner cartridge.
b-2. Registration sensor unit
2) Remove the upper frame cover.
1) Remove the Image density and image registration sensor.
3) Remove the waste toner box.
5) Remove the OPC drum unit.
7) Remove the primary transfer unit.
8) Clean the resist sensor unit.
Ĭ ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
F. LSU section
(1) LSU / Other
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

sequence calling K
1 Dust-proof glass     
2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
sequence calling
1 Dust-proof glass      
2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
a. Disassembly of Units
1) Remove the left cover. Locked (when connectiong FFC)
2) Disconnect the FFC and the connector. Then, remove the screw,
and remove the LSU unit.
FFC is locked by lowering the lever

ĭ after inserting FFC.
Į Connector lock lever position

(Locked state)
FFC
PWB
ĭ
* Insert the FFC and the connector straight until they stop.
* Insert the FFC alignment tab to the connector alignment guide.
Unlocked (when removing FFC)
FFC alignment tab
NG: The FFC is not

OK connected straight.
FFC can be removed by releasing the lever.
Connector lock lever position

(Unlocked state)
FFC
PWB
b. Disassembly and assembly of maintenance parts b-2. Cleaning base
b-1. Dust proof glass 1) Open the cover and remove the LSU cleaning bar.
1) Open the cover and remove the LSU cleaning bar.
2) Remove the waste toner box

2) Remove the waste toner box 3) Remove the cleaning base from the waste toner box and attach it
3) Insert the LSU cleaning bar with a felt facing downward. Move the to the LSU cleaning bar.
bar a few times back and forth to clean the dust proof glass on
LSU.
G. Manual paper feed section
(1) Manual paper feed unit
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

sequence calling K
1 Paper pickup roller x     Replace at 100K of manual paper
2 Paper feed roller x     feed counter or 1 year use
3 Separation roller x    
6 Sensors x x x x x
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller x      Replace at 100K of manual paper
2 Paper feed roller x      feed counter or 1 year use
3 Separation roller x     
1
2
5 6
a. Disassembly of Units 3) Remove the right door lock pawl, and remove the ADU cabinet F.
1) Remove the inner cover R upper.
Ĭ Į
ĭ Ĭ
Į
ĭ Į
4) Remove the connector, and remove the multi-tray supporting

2) Remove the ADU cabinet R upper. point cover.
Ĭ
ĭ
5) Remove the multi-tray angle.

Ĭ
ĭ ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
6) Remove the manual paper tray fulcrum shaft, and remove the b. Disassembly and assembly of maintenance parts
manual paper tray.
b-1. Paper pickup roller
b-2. Paper feed roller
1) Remove the cover
Į Ĭ
2) Uplift the pawl and detach the pickup roller. Remove the E-ring
7) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed and detach the paper feed roller.
unit.
The roller insert to the slit

Ĭ when attaching the roller.
Į
Ĭ
ĭ
į
ĭ
Į
b-3. Separation roller

1) Remove a screw and then detach the paper guide. Uplift the pawl
and then detach the separation roller.
į Į
b-4. Torque limiter b-5. Transport roller 10
1) Remove the screw and the frame 1) Remove the screw and the paper guide
Fasten screws in the order of (1) and (2) for assembly. Fasten screws in the order of (1) and (2) for assembly. Clean the
transport roller 10.
ĭ
į Ĭ
Į İ
Ĭ
į
ĭ
ı Į
Insert ribs at
three sections
for assembly.
Attach the torque

limiter on this side
first for assembly. į
2) Remove the E-ring and slide the holder and the bearing toward
the direction of arrow in the illustration below. Remove the shaft
and then remove the torque limiter. b-6. Sensors
1) Remove the screw and the sensor
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ į
ĭ
ĭ
Į
İ
2) Remove the arm 5) Remove the screw, the tray and the sensor
Ĭ Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Į
3) Remove the tray
Insert the ribs at

nine sections for
assembly.
H. Tray paper feed section
(1) Tray paper feed unit
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

sequence calling K
1 Paper pickup roller x     Replace at 200K of paper feed
2 Paper feed roller x     counter or 1 year use
3 Separation roller x    
8 Sensors x x x x x
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller x      Replace at 200K of paper feed
2 Paper feed roller x      counter or 1 year use
3 Separation roller x     
8
5
8
7
4
3
1) Pull out the paper feed tray, and lift and remove it. b-1. Paper pickup roller
b-2. Paper feed roller
1) Remove the paper guide
Insert this part first

for assembly.
2) Remove the right cover rear lower.

3) Remove the right cover front lower.
4) Remove the right door unit.
2) Remove the pawl and then remove the holder.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the tray paper feed unit.
ĭ 3) Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller
ĭ Ĭ
ĭ
b-3. Separation roller b-7. Transport roller 2
b-4. Torque limiter 1) Remove the screws and the paper guide. Clean transport roller 2.
1) Remove the pawl, separation roller and then torque limiter.
Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
Į
Į
Ĭ
Make sure the
earth plate is
contacting the
frame.
b-5. Transport roller 3
1) Clean the transport roller 3 and transport roller 1
b-8. Sensors
1) Clean the each sensor.
I. Paper transport section/paper exit section/ADU section
(1) PS unit / Right door unit / Fusing rear unit / Paper exit unit / Other
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

Unit name Part name 250K 300K 500K 600K 750K 900K Remarks
sequence calling K
PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x    
2 Registration roller (drive) x    
4 Reflection type sensor x    
Right door unit 5 Transport roller 8 x    
8 Sensors x x x x x
Fusing rear unit 9 Transport roller 6 x    
Paper exit unit 10 Paper exit roller 2 x    
Other 13 Paper dust removing unit     
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
Unit name Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x     
2 Registration roller (drive) x     
4 Reflection type sensor x     
Right door unit 5 Transport roller 8 x     
Fusing rear unit 9 Transport roller 6 x     
Paper exit unit 10 Paper exit roller 2 x     
Other 13 Paper dust removing unit      
- Paper guides      
12
11
7
10 12
8
9 5
2
1
13
a. Disassembly of Units
a-1. Paper dust removing unit
1) Remove the waste toner box. When installing the PS unit, confirm the contents shown in the follow-
ing figure.
2) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.
The hole should be

oriented vertically.
Move the lever to adjust

the position of the hole.
a-2. PS unit
1) Paper dust removing unit
3) Remove the paper feed tray.
4) Remove the tray paper feed unit.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the PS unit.
The pin should be

oriented horizontally.
a-3. Right door unit *1
ĭ Ĭ
Insert the FFC straight CAUTION :

until it stops. Check that the FFC
reinforce plate is parallel
to the connector.
The lock is released by pressing

the tab of the FFC connector with
the direction described by
the arrow.
2) Remove the FFC, and remove the right door open/close harness
holder.
*2
* When the lock lever is lifted up,

be care ful not to damage
the connector.
Ĭ
*1
*2 Lift up the lock lever
before inserting the FFC.
į
Į
Insert the FFC straight Pull down the lock lever

until it stops. and lock the part.
CAUTION :
Check that the FFC reinforce
plate is parallel to the connector.
3) Remove the right door. 3) Remove the fusing unit.
4) Remove the fusing rear unit.Then disconnect the connector.
Ĭ
ĭ
a-5. Paper exit unit

1) Remove the front cover upper right.
2) Remove the paper exit unit.
Ĭ Ĭ
When the connector is attached, check that the connector is

a-4. Fusing rear unit attached firmly. (Check that the connector is attached straight.)
1) Remove the right cover rear upper
2) Remove the ground wire from the fusing drive unit.
Į
b. Disassembly and assembly of maintenance parts Right door unit
PS unit b-5. Transport roller 8
b-1. Registration roller (idle) 1) Open the door and clean the transport roller 8.
b-2. Registration roller (drive)
1) Clean the registration roller (idle) and the registration roller (drive).

1) Clean the transport roller 4.
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit and clean the transport roller
9.
b-4. Sensor
1) Remove the screw and the sensor.
ĭ
Ĭ
b-7. Transport roller 7 b-8. Sensor
1) Remove the screw and cover. 1) Remove the secondary transfer unit.
2) Remove the screw and sensor.
ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭĭ
3) Remove the screw and cover.
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
4) Remove the screw and the sensor.
5) Remove the screw and the paper guide. Paper exit unit
b-10. Paper exit roller 2
1) Remove the screw and the paper guide.
Ĭ ĭ
6) Remove the screw and sensor.
2) Clean the paper exit roller 2.
Fusing rear unit

b-11. Discharge brush 3) Remove the screw and shifter drive.
1) Remove the screw, the earth plate and the discharge brush.
Make sure the plate is

contacting to the roller Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
reference position edge face

4) Remove the sensor from the paper guide.
0.3mm 0mm
reference 0mm
position
edge face 0.3mm
b-12. Sensors
1) Remove sensors (x3) from the paper guide.
2) Remove the sensor from the paper guide.
J. Drive section
(1) Main drive unit
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

sequence calling K
1 Gears - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
2 Shafts - x x x x the specified position when checking
3 Shaft earth section - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to
the specified position when checking
4 Belts - x x x x
5 Sensors - x x x x
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
sequence calling
1 Gears - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
2 Shafts - x x x x x the specified position when checking
3 Shaft earth section - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to
4 Belts - x x x x x
2
4
1
a. Disassembly of Units NOTE: Be careful with the following points when the MC PWB is
attached.
a-1. Main drive unit
• Check that each spring electrode is attached correctly.
• Check that each spring electrode is not bent or
deformed.
5) Remove the rear cover.
6) Remove the harness from the wire saddle.
Remove the harness from the rib.
Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB.
Then, open the PCU PWB fixing plate unit and the MC fixing plate
unit.
Wire Saddle Ground wire
7) Remove the main drive unit.

Connector Rib
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ
į Į
ĭ
(2) Transport drive unit / Fusing drive unit / Paper exit drive unit
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

Unit name Part name 250K 300K 500K 600K 750K 900K Remarks
sequence calling K
Transport drive 6 Gears - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
unit the specified position when checking
8 Shafts - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
Fusing drive 11 Gears - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
13 Shafts - x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
Paper exit drive 15 Belts - x x x x Do not attach grease
unit
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
Unit name Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
Transport drive 6 Gears - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
8 Shafts - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
10 Connection arm - x x x x x
Fusing drive 11 Gears - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
13 Shafts - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
Paper exit drive 15 Belts - x x x x x Do not attach grease
unit
15
13
14
11
12
10
6
8
a. Disassembly of Units 4) Remove the transport drive unit.
a-1. Transport drive unit
2) Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB.
Then, open the PCU PWB fixing plate unit.
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
a-2. Fusing drive unit

2) Remove the right cover rear upper.
Ĭ 3) Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB.
3) Remove the connector, the reuse band and the harness from the
transport drive unit.
4) Remove the connector and the reuse band from the fusing drive 4) Remove the connector, the reuse band and the harness from the
unit. paper exit drive unit.
5) Remove the paper exit drive unit.
5) Remove the fusing drive unit

Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
a-3. Paper exit drive unit

3) Remove the delivery fan cover.
K. Fusing section
(1) Fusing unit
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

sequence calling K
1 Lower fusing transport roller x x x x x
2 Gears x x x x x
3 Upper fusing transport roller x x x x x
5 Separation plate x x x x x Clean foreign matter adhesion
8 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-0235FCZZ) to
the shaft when replacing and after
completion of replacement, Clean
new pressure roller surface with
alcohol
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
sequence calling
1 Lower fusing transport roller x x x x x x
2 Gears x x x x x x
3 Upper fusing transport roller x x x x x x
4 Pressure bearing x x x x x x
5 Separation plate x x x x x x Clean foreign matter adhesion
6 Pressure roller gear x x x x x x Replace as needed
7 Pressure roller bearing x x x x x x Replace as needed
8 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-0235FCZZ) to
the shaft when replacing and after
completion of replacement, Clean
new pressure roller surface with
alcohol
9 Upper thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
10 Fusing belt unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
11 Lower thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
12 Main thermistor x x x x x x
13 Sub thermistor x x x x x x
15 Paper guides      
4
2
14
15
4
15
1 6
9
5
15
15
12
13
11
10
1) Open the right door, and remove the fusing unit. b-1. Lower fusing transport roller
1) Clean the lower fusing transport roller
ĭ
2) Remove the connector and detach the harness from the rib.
Ĭ
Ĭ
3) Remove the spring and the cover

NOTE: Do not break the pawls while removing (as shown in the
red circles.).

4) Open the lower paper guide and clean the upper paper guide, NOTE: When mounting the harnesses, make sure to wire the
lower paper guide and upper fusing transport roller. connectors so that the connector won’t protrude.
• Attach the connector in the direction shown in the illustration
below. Hook the connector rib to the holder rib to fix.
• Slide extra harness into the areas in the red circle.
5) Remove the screws, harnesses, and then remove the paper

guide.
Ĭ 6) Remove the E ring, gear and bearing.
Metal side is placed

on the outer side.

7) Remove the E ring. shift the bearing and remove the lower fusing 2) Remove the screw and the cover.
transport roller.
Ĭ Ĭ ĭ
ĭ ĭ
Ĭ
NOTE: Be sure to confirm that bearing should be fixed by the

hole of cover when the cover is installed.
b-2. Gears
1) Remove the screw and the cover.
3) Remove the gear.
Ĭ
ĭ

b-3. Upper fusing transport roller 3) Remove the spring and shift the pressure bearing.
1) Remove the screws, paper guide, and then remove the springs.
NOTE: Make sure the paper guide does not contact with the sep-
aration plate.
When attaching the paper guide, fasten screws in the
order of (1)-(4) shown in the illustration below.
Į
į
ĭ
ı
Ĭ
Ĭ İ
ĭ
4) Hold the pressure bearing and remove the upper fusing transport
roller.
Pressure bearing
2) Remove the screw and earth plate.

NOTE: Be sure to confirm that the edge of the upper fusing trans-
port roller and earth plate are contacted when assembled.
b-4. Pressure bearing
1) Remove the pressure bearing and the spring.
Grease
UKOG-0012QSZZ

b-5. Separation plate b-6. Pressure roller gear
1) Remove the spring b-7. Pressure roller bearing
b-8. Pressure roller
Ĭ 1) Turn the fusing unit upside down. Remove the screws and then
remove the cover.
Make sure the holder has been removed.

Ĭ
2) Disconnect the connectors and detach the harness from the rib.
Hold here with longnose pliers

for attachment and detachment.
2) Slide the holder to the right and left and remove from the boss.
Do not scratch, contaminate or deform the surface of separation

plate.
ĭ
3) Attach the cover (without fastening screw).
NOTE: To protect the mylar sheet, make sure to keep attaching
Ĭ the cover when not flipping the unit upside down.

4) Remove the screw and the holder 8) Remove the upper heater lamp and low heater lamp
9) Remove the spring

5) Remove the screw and the holder
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
10) Remove the screw and the pressure roller unit

NOTE: Do not touch the thermostat and thermistor shown in the
red circle in the illustration below.
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ

NOTE: Different screw is used for front and rear side. Make sure
to fasten proper screw on each side.
Attach the pressure roller without removing the protector sheet.
Remove the sheet after completing the assembly.
Front side Rear side Apply grease (UKOG-0235FCZZ) when replacing the pressure
roller.
Apply grease within 10 mm of the step

and avoid U-shaped groove.
10mm
11) Remove the ring, the bearing and the lever Apply grease to these areas, thin and flat.
Front side b-9. Upper thermistor

1) Remove the screw and the thermistor
Į
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Rib facing outward
12) Remove the ring, gear, bearing and the lever
Rear side Ĭ
Insert this portion of the rib
to the U-shaped groove.
į
Ĭ
Rib facing outward
Rib facing outward

b-10. Fusing belt unit b-12. Main thermistor
1) Remove the screw and the fusing belt unit b-13. Sub thermistor
When attaching fusing belt unit, fasten screws in the order of (1)- 1) Remove the screws. Then remove the paper guide and clean it.
(6) shown in the illustration below.
ĭ
Ĭ
į Ĭ
İ ĭ
ı Į
b-11. Lower thermistor

1) Remove the screw and the lower thermistor 3) Remove the screw and the plate
Ĭ
Į
ĭ Ĭ
Detach the harness from

the square hole.

4) Remove the screw, the cover, the main thermistor and the sub
thermistor
Ĭ ĭ
Detach the pawls on the cover.
b-14. Sensors
b-15. Paper guides

1) Clean the paper guide
Do not deform the paper guide.

L. Other
(1) Filter / Cushion / Toner cartridge / Waste toner box
26/30 ppm machine
Work When 1000

sequence calling K
1 Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲
2 UFP filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ For Europe
3 Right cover filter x    
4 Front cover cushion x x x x x Be careful not to damage the cushion when
cleaning the front cover
5 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty
6 Waste toner box User replacement for every toner full Replace at 50K
35/40 ppm machine
Work When
sequence calling
1 Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 UFP filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ For Europe
3 Right cover filter x     
4 Front cover cushion x x x x x x Be careful not to damage the cushion when
cleaning the front cover
5 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty
6 Waste toner box User replacement for every toner full Replace at 50K
1 4

a. Disassembly of Units a-3. Right cover filter
a-1. Ozone filter 1) Open the right door.Remove the right front cover.
1) Remove the ozone filter cover, and remove the ozone filter.
Ĭ Į ĭ
Ĭ
į
a-2. UFP filter

1) Remove the MFPc cover.
2) Remove the rear cover upper.
3) Remove the rear cover. 2) Clean the right cover filter.
5) Remove the UFP filter.
Attaching reference
(Wall surface)
0mm
0.3mm
0mm 0.3mm
Attaching reference
(Wall surface)

a-4. Front cover cushion a-6. Waste toner box
1) Open the front cover. 1) Open the front cover. Push the Waste toner lock lever to the
2) Check the front cover cushion. inside, and remove the waste toner box.
Ĭ
Attaching ĭ
reference
(Wall surface)
0mm
Ĭ
0.3mm
0mm 0.3mm
a-5. Toner cartridge

1) There are the following methods for removing the toner cartridge.
• system setting
• Image quality adjustment bar -> Removing the toner cartridge
• Sim10-3
• Manual
When installing, push both sides of the waste toner box.

Confirm that it is locked.

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
MX-4071 (1) Front cover
Service Manualupper
1) Remove the front cover upper.
1. Disassembly of Units
Ĭ
A. External view
Į
No. Name
1 Front cover upper
2 MFPc cover
3 Rear cover upper
4 Left cover
5 Rear cover
Į
6 Right cover rear upper
7 Panel hinge section cover
8 Front cover upper right ĭ
9 Left cover upper rear
10 Right cover rear lower
11 Right front cover
12 Right cover front lower į
13 Upper cover front left
ĭ
14 Upper cover front right
15 Upper cover left lower
16 Upper cover right
(2) MFPc cover
1) Remove the rear cabinet cover.
14
13
16
ĭ
Ĭ
7
1 8
10
11
12
ĭ
3
15
6
2
Ĭ
9 Ĭ
5 4
MX-4071 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

(3) Rear cover upper (5) Rear cover
1) Remove the MFPc cover. 1) Remove the rear cover.
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
(6) Right cover rear upper

(4) Left cover 4) Remove the right cover rear upper.
1) Pull out the tray, and open the front cover. Then, remove the
screw.
Į
Ĭ
Ĭ
(7) Panel hinge section cover

Ĭ 1) Remove the panel hinge section cover.
2) Pull out the handle and remove the left cover. Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ

(8) Front cover upper right (11) Right front cover
1) Open the front cover. Remove the front cover upper right. 1) Open the front cover.
ĭ Ĭ
2) Open the right door.Remove the right front cover.

Ĭ
(9) Left cover upper rear

1) Remove the left cover.
3) Remove the left cover upper rear.
Į ĭ
Ĭ
į
Į
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ (12) Right cover front lower

1) Pull out the tray, and pull out the handle. Then, remove the right
cover front bottom.
(10) Right cover rear lower
1) Open the right door and pull out the handle. Then, remove the
right cover rear bottom.
ĭ
İ
į
Į
ĭ Ĭ į

(13) Upper cover front left (16) Upper cover right
1) Remove the upper cover front left. 1) Remove the upper cover right
ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
B. Operation panel section

No. Name
1 Operation panel unit
(14) Upper cover front right
1) Remove the panel hinge section cover.
2) Remove the upper cover front right.
Ĭ
Į
(1) Operation panel unit

(15) Upper cover left lower 1) Remove the panel hinge section cover.
1) Remove the upper cover left lower. 2) Remove the screw.
ĭ
Ĭ

3) Remove the front cover upper right. Non keyboard model
4) Remove the two screws and disconnect the connector. Then, MX-xx61/xx71 [For Europe]
remove the operation panel unit.
Non keyboard model

MX-xx51 [All destinations]
MX-xx61/xx71 [Destinations other than Europe] While pushing the left and
right black locks inwards
pull it downward
Keyboard standard model

MX-xx61/xx71 [For Europe]
While pushing the left and right [For MX-xx61/

black locks inwards pull it downward xx71 series]
Keyboard standard model

MX-xx61/xx71 [Destinations other than Europe]
While pushing the left and

right black locks inwards
pull it downward
While pushing the left and right

black locks inwards pull it downward

Notes of harness processing
Caution: *3 Harness position
*1
*5
Pass the ground wire

in front of the purple harness.
*3
Pass the ground wire
behind the purple harness.
*2
*4
Caution: *4 Reference position of the ground wire
101LCD
harness Body frame end
NFC Keyboard
relay relay
harness harness
Caution: *5 Reference position of the ground wire
NFC relay Keyboard relay 101LCD

harness harness harness
2mm or more
The ground wire is located on

the left side of the reference line.
Each harness passing under

101LCD harness and PWB.

C. Auto document feeder section
Connecting procedure of the connector. (RSPF and DSPF)
Pinch the center position of the harness when insert. No. Name
1 DSPF unit
2 RSPF unit
Caution: Be sure not to have the harness as shown by

figure below.
NG
2
Caution: connector direction
OK NG

(1) DSPF unit (2) RSPF unit
1) Remove the rear cabinet cover. 1) Remove the rear cabinet cover.
2) Loosen the screw fixing the earth cable and remove the earth 2) Loosen the screw fixing the earth cable and remove the earth
cable. Then, disconnect the connector. cable. Then, disconnect the connector.
3) Remove the screws, and remove the DSPF unit from the 3) Remove the RSPF unit from the machine.
machine.

D. Scanner section 6) Remove the motion sensor PWB.
No. Name
1 Scanner unit
7) Disconnect the connector.
(1) Scanner unit

1) Remove the DSPF/RSPF unit.
2) Remove the operation panel unit.
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
4) Remove the upper cover front left, upper cover front right, upper
cover right, rear cover upper and MFPC cover.
5) Disconnect the FFC.
8) Remove the scanner unit.
ĭ Ĭ
*2
*1

*1 *2
Unlocked (when removing FFC) Unlocked (when removing FFC)
PWB
Slide the connector in the direction of
the arrow to unlock.
FFC

(Unlocked state)
Locked (when connectiong FFC)

make sure FFC vertically inserted
Pull out FFC in the direction of the arrow.
FFC is locked by raising the lever

after inserting FFC.
PWB
FFC
Insert FFC in the direction of the arrow,
with the reinforcing plate (Blue) being
placed at the right side.
(Locked state)

the arrow to lock.

E. Waste toner collection section F. Developing section
No. Name No. Name

1 Waste toner box 1 Developing unit
(1) Waste toner box (1) Developing unit

1) Open the front cover. Push the Waste toner lock lever to the 1) Remove the waste toner box.
inside, and remove the waste toner box. 2) Disconnect the connector of the developing unit before opening
the drum positioning plate.
Ĭ
ĭ
make sure connector correctly inserted when connecting
OK NG
When installing, push both sides of the waste toner box.

Confirm that it is locked.

3) Check that the cam lock plate is aligned with the "O" mark posi- G. OPC drum section
tion.
4) Turn the lock to release, and open the drum positioning plate. No. Name
1 OPC drum unit
ĭ
Ĭ
1
5) While pulling down the lever, pull out the developing unit to
remove.
When pulling out and pushing in the developing unit, put your (1) OPC drum unit
hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide. 1) Remove the waste toner box.
At the time, be careful not to touch the developing roller surface. 2) Open the drum positioning plate.
Put it in the horizontal place. 3) Remove the developing unit.
4) While pulling up the lever, pull out the OPC drum to remove.
When pulling out and pushing in the OPC drum unit, put your
hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide on
the right side.
At the time, be careful not to touch the OPC drum surface.
ĭ
lever

H. Transfer section (2) Secondary transfer unit
No. Name
2) Remove the spring from the right door unit and remove the sec-
1 Primary transfer unit
ondary transfer unit while lifting it upward from the rear side.
2 Secondary transfer unit
3 PTC unit Disconnect the connector from the Secondary transfer unit.
4 Registration sensor unit
Be careful not to put foreign materials on the secondary transfer

roller.
1
2
ĭ
3
Ĭ Ĭ

2) Open the drum positioning plate.
3) Open the right door. * Spring is removed from the right dorr, however,
4) Loosen the screw and pill out the primary transfer unit to the posi- the spring is not removed from the secondary transfer unit.
tion slowly where it stops.
5) Hold the handle (Green) on the right side of the primary transfer
unit and guide rail (plate) on the left side of the primary transfer Fix the cable position by band after installing
unit, and pull out the primary transfer unit slowly while lifting it secondary transfer unit to the original position.
upward.
When removing the primary transfer unit, be sure to open the right
door in advance.
Be careful not to put foreign materials and touch on the primary

transfer belt.
band
Ĭ Ĭ

(3) PTC unit I. LSU section
No. Name
2) Open the drum positioning plate.
1 LSU unit
3) Remove the PTC unit.
Be careful not to put foreign materials on the wire and the plate.
(4) Resist sensor unit

1) Remove the toner cartridge.
2) Remove the upper frame cover.
(1) LSU unit
2) Disconnect the FFC and the connector. Then, remove the screw,
5) Remove the OPC drum unit. and remove the LSU unit.
7) Remove the primary transfer unit. Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
Ĭ ĭ

J. Manual paper feed section
No. Name
(Unlocked state)
1 Manual paper feed tray
2 Manual paper feed unit
FFC
PWB
FFC is locked by lowering the lever

after inserting FFC. 1

(Locked state)
FFC
PWB
(1) Manual paper feed tray
* Insert the FFC and the connector straight until they stop.
* Insert the FFC alignment tab to the connector alignment guide.
FFC alignment tab Ĭ
ĭ Ĭ
NG: The FFC is not

OK connected straight.

2) Remove the ADU cabinet R upper. 5) Remove the multi-tray angle.
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
6) Remove the manual paper tray fulcrum shaft, and remove the
3) Remove the right door lock pawl, and remove the ADU cabinet F. manual paper tray.
Ĭ Į
Į
ĭ Į
Į Ĭ
(2) Manual paper feed unit

1) Remove the manual paper feed tray.
4) Remove the connector, and remove the multi-tray supporting
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed
point cover.
unit.
ĭ
Ĭ
Į
Ĭ

K. Tray paper feed section 5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the tray paper feed unit.
No. Name
1 Paper feed tray
2 Tray paper feed unit
L. Paper transport/Paper exit/ADU section

2
1 No. Name
1 Paper dust removing unit
2 PS unit
3 Right door unit
4 Fusing rear unit
5 Paper exit unit
(1) Paper feed tray

1) Pull out the paper feed tray, and lift and remove it.
3
4
(2) Tray paper feed unit 1

2
2) Remove the right cover rear lower.
3) Remove the right cover front lower.
4) Remove the right door unit.

(1) Paper dust removing unit
2) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit. When installing the PS unit, confirm the contents shown in the follow-
ing figure.
The hole should be

oriented vertically.
Move the lever to adjust

the position of the hole.
(2) PS unit
1) Paper dust removing unit
4) Remove the tray paper feed unit.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the PS unit.
The pin should be

oriented horizontally.

(3) Right door unit *1
ĭ Ĭ
Insert the FFC straight CAUTION :

until it stops. Check that the FFC
reinforce plate is parallel
to the connector.
The lock is released by pressing

the tab of the FFC connector with
the direction described by
the arrow.
2) Remove the FFC, and remove the right door open/close harness
holder.
*2

the connector.
Ĭ
*1
*2 Lift up the lock lever
į
Į

CAUTION :

3) Remove the right door. 3) Remove the fusing unit.
4) Remove the fusing rear unit.Then disconnect the connector.
Ĭ
ĭ
(5) Paper exit unit

1) Remove the front cover upper right.
2) Remove the paper exit unit.
Ĭ Ĭ
When the connector is attached, check that the connector is

(4) Fusing rear unit attached firmly. (Check that the connector is attached straight.)
1) Remove the right cover rear upper
2) Remove the ground wire from the fusing drive unit.
Į

M. Drive section
No. Name
1 Main drive unit
2 Transport drive unit
3 Fusing drive unit Ĭ
4 Paper exit drive unit
Į
į Į
ĭ
4
Ĭ
1
3 NOTE: Be careful with the following points when the MC PWB is
attached.
2 • Check that each spring electrode is not bent or
deformed.
(1) Main drive unit

6) Remove the harness from the wire saddle.
Remove the harness from the rib.
Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB.
unit.
7) Remove the main drive unit.
Wire Saddle Ground wire
ĭ
Connector Rib
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ

(2) Transport drive unit (3) Fusing drive unit
1) Remove the rear cover. 1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB. 2) Remove the right cover rear upper.
Then, open the PCU PWB fixing plate unit. 3) Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB.
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ
3) Remove the connector, the reuse band and the harness from the Ĭ
transport drive unit.
4) Remove the connector and the reuse band from the fusing drive
unit.
4) Remove the transport drive unit. 5) Remove the fusing drive unit
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ

(4) Paper exit drive unit N. Fusing section
No. Name
1 Fusing unit
3) Remove the delivery fan cover.
Į
1
ĭ
4) Remove the connector, the reuse band and the harness from the
paper exit drive unit.
(1) Fusing unit

1) Open the right door, and remove the fusing unit.
5) Remove the paper exit drive unit. Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ

O. Toner supply section P. PWB section
No. Name No. Name
1 Toner cartridge (Bk) 1 TC PWB
2 Toner cartridge (C) 2 SCN MFP PWB
3 Toner cartridge (M) 3 PCU PWB
4 Toner cartridge (Y) 4 MC PWB
5 DC PWB
6 AC PWB
7 HL PWB
1
4 2
3
2
1
4
3
There are the following methods for removing the toner cartridge.
• system setting
• Image quality adjustment bar -> Removing the toner cartridge
• Sim10-3 (1) TC PWB
• Manual 1) Remove the left cover.
2) Remove the TC PWB, and disconnect the connector.
Ĭ
ĭ
Į

Caution with replacing the high voltage TC PWB (2) SCN MFP PWB
1) When the part is attached 1) Remove the MFPC cover.
Check the spring electrode on the main unit. 2) Remove the rear cover upper.
• Check that each spring electrode is attached correctly. 3) Remove the rear cover.
• Check that each spring electrode is not bent or deformed. 4) Remove the right cover rear upper.
6) Remove the left cover upper rear.
7) Remove the connector and the FFC, and remove the MFPC PWB
fixing plate unit.
Be careful with the FFC which is attached on the rear side of the
MFPC PWB fixing plate unit.
2) The order for fixing to the main unit Ĭ

Ĭ
8) Remove the FFC cable.

Attach the PWB in order of 1 to 2. With this order, the remaining
resin boss is attached easily.
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ ĭ
3) Check the resin pawl on the main unit.

Fix the TC PWB with the pawls (5 places) correctly.

How to attach/remove the SCN MFP PWB FFC *2

*1
*2
*1
*1
the arrow to unlock.
PWB
Pull out FFC in the direction of the arrow.
FFC

(Unlocked state)

Insert FFC in the direction of the arrow,

with the reinforcing plate (Blue) being
placed at the right side.
FFC is locked by raising the lever after inserting FFC.

PWB
FFC

Connector lock lever position the arrow to lock.
(Locked state)
9) Take out 2 eeprom from the PWB and mount them onto the new
PWB.

(3) PCU PWB
1) Remove the rear cover. Insertion method
Insert FFC into connector.
2) Remove the connector and the FFC, and remove the PCU PWB
fixing plate unit.
ĭ Press the FFC and alternately press the end of the connector
GRZQĺXSĺGRZQĺXSWRORFNWKH))&
Perform the following operations after replacing the PCU PWB.

• Remove the fusing unit and turn ON the main power. Then,
leave the main unit for 10 seconds.
• Turn OFF the main power. CAUTION :
• Attach the fusing unit. Check that the FFC reinforce plate is parallel to the connector.
How to attach/remove the PCU PWB FFC
*2 *1
NG NG
FFC oblique insertion. Connector lock incomplete.
*1
Removal method
Hold both ends of connector and lift it.

*2 4) Disconnect the 3 harnesses on the MC PWB.

the connector.
Lift up the lock lever

5) Disconnect the ground wire on the MC PWB.

CAUTION :
3) Take out the eeprom from the PWB and mount it onto the new
PWB.
(4) MC PWB 6) Remove the 7 pawls, and remove the MC PWB.
1) Remove the MFPC cover.
3) Disconnect the connector from the PCU PWB and open the MC
fixing plate unit.
Ĭ ĭ

Caution with replacing the high voltage MC PWB (5) DC PWB
1) When the part is attached 1) Remove the MFPC PWB fixing plate unit.
Check the spring electrode on the main unit. 2) Remove the connector, and remove the low voltage power unit.
• Check that each spring electrode is not bent or deformed.
Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ ĭ Ĭ
(6) AC PWB
2) Check the connection to the main unit 1) Remove the MFPC cover.
Fix the MC PWB with the pawls (7 places) correctly. 2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Disconnect the connector from the PCU PWB and open the MC
fixing plate unit.
Ĭ ĭ
4) Disconnect the all connectors from the AC PWB.
· The resin boss is gotten out correctly.

· The center screw of the MC PWB is fixed correctly.

5) Remove the reuse band. 4) Remove the screws, and remove the HL PWB.
Remove the AC cord fixing plate unit.
Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ Ĭ Ĭ
ĭ
Saddle for fixing the screw
Į · Fix by the screw with the HL PWB.
Ĭ
ĭ
6) Remove the AC PWB.
Ĭ Ĭ ĭ
Q. Filter section
No. Name
1 Ozone filter
(7) HL PWB
2) Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB.
unit.
Į 1
į Į
ĭ
Į
(1) Ozone filter
1) Remove the ozone filter cover, and remove the ozone filter.
3) Disconnect the connector from the HL PWB.

ĭ

2. Disassembly and assembly of each unit 2) Remove the cover and the screw then open the cover.
A. Operation panel section ĭ

(1) Operation panel unit (Non keyboard model)
Part No. Part name

Į
a LCD
b Touch panel
c HOME KEY PWB [For MX-xx51 series]
NFC HOME KEY PWB [For MX-xx61/xx71 series]
ĭ
c Ĭ
ĭ ĭ
b Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
3) Remove the harness from the clamp and band.

a
a. LCD
1) Remove the harness from the clamp. Ĭ
Be sure that no laxity of

101LCD harness the harness when assembly.
101LCD harness
Bundle black
tape parts
NFC relay harness

There is no twist
in the harness
101LCD harness
Position of the tape binding the band
Lay this harness on top. 101LCD harness

(MX-xx61/xx71 [Destinations other than Europe])
Pass the harness through the hole.

Connector facing direction

Caution of assembly
NFC relay
harness
Ĭ
101LCD
harness
Be sure to attach Banding band direction. Be sure that no laxity of

the lock lever as shown by the harness when assembly.
figure below.
NFC relay 101LCD harness

harness
Bundle black
tape parts
ĳPP
There is no twist
in the harness
OK NG
101LCD harness
Connector facing direction NFC relay harness

the harness when assembly.

4) Remove the screw and open the mylar.
When there is slack in the harness, Ĭ

put it on Mylar side
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
The harness does not
go on Mylar at the connector
insertion part
Caution of assembly
5) Remove the connector and the FFC.
Be sure to attach Banding band direction.

the lock lever as shown by
figure below.
ĳPP
OK NG

How to handle harness. 6) Remove the pawl and LCD holder unit.
MX-xx51 [All destinations] *1

Ĭ
*5
*1 *2
į
*5 *3
*4 *1 *2
ĭ
*5 *3
Process the twist direction of the FPC as shown below.

*1 *2
7) Remove the pawl and open the LCD holder.
į
*3
OK NG Į
*4 The harness does not intersect

OK NG
*5 How to lock the connector.

Unlocked condition Locked condition
Ĭ
Insert the connector with Be sure to lock.

unlocked condition.

8) Remove the connector.
Harness fix by the tape with flat condition of the harness.
Harness do not place on the harness.
OK NG
Be sure to insert
the connector.
Lay low the bar.
OK NG
Attaching reference
:
2.0mm 2.0mm
2.0mm
;
2.0mm
Insert the terminal side is top.
Caution of assembly
The harness should be placed on

the center position of the hole. LCD holder B
9) Remove the LCD.
Be sure that no contortive of

the harness.
There should be no clearance gap

between the holder when attaching the tape.
LCD holder A

b. Touch panel c.
1) Remove the touch panel. c-1. HOME KEY PWB [For MX-xx51 series]
1) Remove the pawl and HOME KEY PWB.
0mm
Attaching
reference Ĭ
0.3mm
ĭ
0mm 0.3mm
Attaching reference
Do not bend.
Ĭ
2) Remove the sheet.
0.3mm
Attaching
reference c-2. NFC HOME KEY PWB [For MX-xx61/xx71 series]
0mm 0.3mm 0mm 1) Remove the pawl and NFC HOME KEY PWB.
Attaching reference
ĭ Ĭ
Attaching reference
0.3mm 0mm
0.3mm
Attaching
reference
0mm
When assembling, holding the board in the order shown below, fix
it to the nail.
ĭ Į Į Ĭ
Do not hold down Do not touch IC parts.

the left side of the board.

(2) Operation panel unit (Keyboard standard model) MX-xx61/xx71 [For Europe]
Part No. Part name

a Keyboard
b LCD
c Touch panel
d NFC HOME KEY PWB
d
NFC relay harness
Keyboard
relay
c harness
101LCD
harness
a
b
Pull out reference position of Keyboard relay harness.
a. Keyboard
1) Remove the harness from the clamp. UL tape
MX-xx61/xx71 [Destinations other than Europe] bottom edge
Clamp
0mm - 5mm
2) Remove the cover and the screw then open the cover.
Keyboard
relay
Į
harness
101LCD
harness
ĭ
Pull out reference position of Keyboard relay harness.
Ĭ
ĭ ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
UL tape
bottom edge Ĭ
0mm - 5mm
Clamp

3) Remove the harness from the clamp and band.
MX-xx61/xx71 [Destinations other than Europe] Caution of assembly
Keyboard
relay
harness 101LCD
harness
Be sure that no
laxity of the harness
when assembly. Be sure to attach Banding band direction.
Į figure below.
Pinch
101LCD harness
Bundle black ࢥPP

tape parts
OK NG
There is no twist
in the harness
Lay this harness on top. 101LCD harness
Pass the harness through the hole.

Connector facing direction

NFC relay When there is slack in the harness,

harness put it on Mylar side
Keyboard
relay
harness
101LCD
harness
ĭ The harness does not

go on Mylar at the connector
insertion part
Be sure that no
laxity of the harness
when assembly. Caution of assembly
Pinch
NFC relay 101LCD harness

harness
Bundle black
tape parts
There is no twist
in the harness
Be sure to attach Banding band direction.

figure below.
101LCD harness
ĳPP
OK NG
Connector facing direction NFC relay harness

the harness when assembly.

4) Remove the screw and the keyboard. How to handle harness.
Ĭ MX-xx61/xx71 [Destinations other than Europe]

*1 *2
Ĭ
Ĭ
*5 *3
Ĭ MX-xx61/xx71 [For Europe]
*4 *1 *2
*5 *3
b. LCD
1) Remove the screw and open the mylar. Process the twist direction of the FPC as shown below.
*1 *2
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
*3
OK NG
Ĭ
2) Remove the connector and the FFC. *4 The harness does not intersect
MX-xx61/xx71 [Destinations other than Europe] OK NG
*5 How to lock the connector.

Unlocked condition Locked condition
Insert the connector with Be sure to lock.

unlocked condition.

3) Remove the pawl and LCD holder unit. 5) Remove the connector.
ĭ
Be sure to insert
the connector.
Ĭ
Lay low the bar.
OK NG
4) Remove the pawl and open the LCD holder.
į
Insert the terminal side is top.
Caution of assembly
The harness should be placed on

İ the center position of the hole. LCD holder B
Be sure that no contortive of

the harness.
There should be no clearance gap

between the holder when attaching the tape.
Ĭ
LCD holder A

c. Touch panel
Harness fix by the tape with flat condition of the harness. 1) Remove the touch panel.
0mm
Attaching
reference
0.3mm
0mm 0.3mm
Attaching reference
Harness do not place on the harness.
OK NG Do not bend.
0.3mm
Attaching
reference
0mm 0.3mm 0mm
Attaching reference
Attaching reference
:
2.0mm 2.0mm
2.0mm
;
2.0mm
Attaching reference
0.3mm 0mm
0.3mm
Attaching
reference
0mm
6) Remove the LCD.

d. NFC HOME KEY PWB B. Document feed section
1) Remove the pawl and NFC HOME KEY PWB.
(1) DSPF unit
Ĭ Part No. Part name

ĭ
a Paper pickup roller
b Paper feed roller
c Separation roller
d Belts
e Gears
f Torque limiter
g Transport roller 1
h OC mat
i No.1 scanning plate
j Transport roller 2
k Registration roller
l No.2 scanning section, white reference glass
m Lamp
n No.2 scanning section, scanning glass
o Mirror
p Lens, CCD
Ĭ q Discharge brush
r Transport roller 3
s Transport roller 4
t Paper exit roller
u Sensors
v Irradiation lamp
When assembling, holding the board in the order shown below, fix
it to the nail.
du
ĭ Į Į Ĭ
u
u f
u
v
Do not hold down Do not touch IC parts.

the left side of the board.
j
bc
a u
u u
r
s
t
q

2) Remove the front cabinet.
d
e
d
e ĭ Į
į
Ĭ
i
u
u
h 3) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
p Į
o ĭ
į
Ĭ
m
Ĭ
4) Remove the screw. Remove the paper feed cover.

l n
a. Paper pickup roller

b. Paper feed roller
1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw.
ĭ

5) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle. Remove the 8) Remove the pickup roller holder. Remove the paper pickup roller
snap band. from the pickup roller holder.
Į
ĭ
Ĭ 9) Remove the paper feed roller.
6) Remove the screw, and remove the document feed unit.
c. Separation roller
ĭ
1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed paper guide lower
Ĭ cover.
Ĭ
ĭ
7) Remove the paper feed paper guide upper cover.
2) Remove the revere pressure release lever, and remove the sepa-
ration roller.

d. Belts 4) Remove the screws and the paper exit drive unit.
1) Remove the screw, and remove the left rear lower cabinet.
When attaching the paper exit drive unit, tighten the screw in the
order of (1) - (3).
2) Remove the rear cabinet lower.
Ĭ
ĭ
5) Disconnect the connectors. Remove the harness from the wire

saddle.
Ĭ
ĭ
3) Disconnect the connector and open the edge saddle.

6) Remove the E-ring and the clutch. 9) Remove the belt, the pulley and the bearing.
NOTE: Make sure that stopping section in the clutch is fit into the
plate during the assembly.
ĭ ĭ ı
İ
į
Į
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
10) Remove the E-ring, the pulley and the belt.
ĭ
7) Remove the screws and the paper feed drive unit.
ĭ
Į Ĭ
e. Gears
Ĭ 1) Remove the Gears.
8) Remove the spring. Loosen the screw and loosen the tension of
the belt.
When attaching the belt, loosen the screw. Then, tighten the
ĭ
Ĭ ĭ

3) Remove the E-ring, and remove the upper door unit.
4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the transport roller 1 (Idle).

f. Torque limiter
1) Remove the spring, pressure release axis holder, screw and pres-
sure release link lever.
į ĭ
5) Remove the screw. Lift the document paper feed tray and remove
the paper guide.
Į
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Į ĭ

6) Remove the screw, and remove the support plate and the bearing. 3) Remove the E-ring and the bearing.
Remove the roller shaft, and remove the torque limiter.
į
ĭ
Į Ĭ
ĭ
4) Remove the transport roller 1.
g. Transport roller 1
1) Remove the screws and paper guide.
Ĭ
h. OC mat
1) Remove the OC mat.
0mm Attaching reference

(Edge face of the
0.5mm frame bending)
Attaching reference
0mm 0.5mm (Edge face of the hole)

i. No.1 scanning plate 4) Remove the dip up unit.
1) Remove the E-ring, and remove the PS knob.
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
2) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide.
Ĭ
Ĭ
5) Remove the no.1 scanning plate.
ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
Į
Ĭ
Ĭ
3) Open the lower door. Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum
plate. Remove the lower door.
ĭ
Į Ĭ
j. Transport roller 2
k. Registration roller
1) Remove the E-ring and the bearing.
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ

2) Remove the screw and the PS upper paper guide. 5) Remove the registration roller and the bearing.
3) Remove the E-ring, the washer, the spring, the collar, the poly l. No.2 scanning section, white reference glass
slider, and the bearing.
1) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate. Remove the
white reference plate.
ı
İ Į
į
ı Į
İ ĭ
į Ĭ
Į
ĭ
Ĭ
2) Remove the glass fixture and the no.2 scanning section, white ref-
erence glass.

m. Lamp o. Mirror
1) Disconnect the connector for lamp unit from the control PWB. 1) Remove the CCD FFC from the CCD PWB.
2) Remove the screw and lamp unit.
2) Remove the screw and cushion. Remove optics fixing plate and
optical unit.
ĭ
Ĭ Į
ĭ
n. No.2 scanning section, scanning glass
1) Remove the no.2 scanning section, scanning glass. Ĭ ĭ
į
3) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror base cover.
Ĭ ĭ
0mm
0.5mm
0.5mm
0mm
Attaching reference
(Wall surface) 0.5mm 0mm

4) Remove the screw, and remove the dark box. Remove the dust- 2) Remove the screws and the CCD unit.
proof cover.
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ
Į
q. Discharge brush
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
document feed tray.
5) Remove the mirror retainers and the mirrors.
ĭ
ĭ
p. Lens, CCD
1) Remove the lens cover. Į

2) Remove the cushion and the discharge brush. 2) Remove the screws and the transport paper guide lower. Discon-
NOTE: Attach to the attachment reference. nect the connector.
When attaching the transport paper guide lower, tighten the screw
in the order of (1) - (2).
Ĭ
(Edge face) (Edge face) (Edge face)
0mm 0mm
0.3mm 0mm
0.3mm 0.3mm Į
1.0mm 1.0mm
(Right end of the arm) į
0mm
ĭ
0.5mm
0.5mm 0.5mm
(Marking-off line) When attaching the transport paper guide lower, make sure that
the nail and boss are inserted securely.
r. Transport roller 3
s. Transport roller 4
t. Paper exit roller
1) Remove the screws and the delivery lower paper guide cover.

3) Remove the screws and the delivery paper guide bottom. 5) Remove the screw and paper exit tray.
Ĭ Į
4) Remove the screws. 6) Remove the E-ring, bearing and the lift up unit.
ĭ
Ĭ

7) Remove the screws and the paper feed section stay unit. 9) Disconnect the connector. Remove the reuse band, the screw and
the paper exit upper unit.
Ĭ
į
İ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
OK NG 10) Remove the E-ring, the transport roller 3 and the bearing.
8) Remove the E-ring and the separate roller release shaft.

Į
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ

11) Remove the E-ring, the bearing and the transport roller 4. 2) Disconnect the connector.
Remove the screws and the sensors.
ĭ
Ĭ
3) Remove the irradiation lamp.

12) Remove the E-ring, the bearing and the paper exit roller.
4) Remove the screw and the rotation tray shaft. Then, remove the
document feed tray upper.
u. Sensors
v. Irradiation lamp Į
1) Remove the screw and the document feed tray lower.
ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
5) Remove the sensor.

Ĭ

6) Remove the screw and the paper feed paper guide upper reinforc- 10) Remove the sensors.
ing plate.
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
11) Remove the sensors.

(2) RSPF unit a. Paper pickup roller
Part No. Part name
a Paper pickup roller 1) Open the paper feed unit and remove the cover.
b Paper feed roller
c Separation roller
d Torque limiter
e Torque limiter pickup
f OC mat
g Discharge brush
h Belts
i Gears
j Scan plate
k Transport roller 2
l Paper exit roller Ĭ
m Transport roller 1
n Registration roller
o Sensors
e h ĭ
a
b
2) Remove the holder, the paper pickup roller and the paper feed
roller.
j
g
c
d
f
Į
h, i
Ĭ
į
m
k
l c. Separation roller
d. Torque limiter
o Į
o
ĭ
o Ĭ

2) Remove the E-ring, the shaft, the separation roller and the torque f. OC mat
limiter. 1) Remove the OC mat.
į
Ĭ
Ĭ Į ĭ
e. Torque limiter pickup

1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, the pulley and the E-ring.
g. Discharge brush
1) Remove the screw and the front cabinet.
ĭ
Į
Ĭ
ĭ
Į
2) Remove the E-ring, and the bearing, then pull out the shaft,
remove the holder and the torque limiter pickup.
2) Remove the screw and the rear cabinet.
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
į Ĭ
İ

3) Disconnect the connector from the RSPF driver PWB. Remove 6) Remove the discharge brush.
the holder, and remove the RSPF paper feed tray unit.
ĭ Į
į
(Marking-off line)
1mm 1mm
(Marking-
off line)
Ĭ 0mm
0.5mm
4) Remove the earth wire. Disconnect the connector from the RSPF
driver PWB.
h. Belts
i. Gears
Ĭ Į
1) Pull out the harness from the hole.
ĭ
2) Remove the spring, the screw and the holder.
5) Remove the RSPF paper transport unit.
Ĭ
Ĭ
Į
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ

3) Remove the paper feed unit and the arm. 6) Remove the screws and the transport upper paper guide.
Ĭ
Ĭ
4) Remove the separate paper guide.

7) Remove the E-ring, the clutch and the gear.
Į
ĭ
5) Remove the reverse gate. When attaching the drive unit, loosen the screw. Then, tighten the

9) Remove the screws and the drive unit. 12) When removing the belt, loosen the screw and belt tension.
When attaching the belt, loosen the screw. Then, tighten the
Ĭ
13) Remove the gears.
10) Remove the bearing and the belt.
14) Remove the gear, the belt and the bearing.

Ĭ
11) Remove the gear and the belt.

j. Scan plate 4) Remove the reading plate.
k. Transport roller 2
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw and the sensor.
2) Remove the pulley, the bearing and the screw. 5) Remove the E-ring, the poly slider, the gear, the pin, the bearing
and the transport roller 2.
l. Paper exit roller


2) Remove the gear, the pin, the E-ring and the bearing. 2) Remove the transport roller 1.
3) Remove the paper exit roller.
3) Remove the E-ring, the poly slider, the gear, the pin and the bear-
ing.
n. Registration roller
m. Transport roller 1 1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw and the sensor.
ĭ
Į
Ĭ

2) Remove the E-ring, the poly slider and the bearing. o. Sensors
1) Remove the screws and the document tray lower.
3) Remove the E-ring, the washer, the spring, the poly slider and the
bearing.
4) Remove the registration roller.
3) Remove the screws.

C. Scanner section
(1) Scanner unit
Part No. Part name

a Table glass
b SPF glass
c Sensors
d Lamp
e Lens
f CCD
g Drive wire
h Drive belt
4) Remove the upper cover. b
c
a
e
f
g
a. Table glass
b. SPF glass
1) Remove the glass holder, the table glass, and the SPF glass.
į (DSPF model only)
į İ
Į
į
Ĭ
ĭ

c. Sensors 3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws, the plates and the
1) Remove the sensors. LED PWBs.
Į ĭ
į
į
Ĭ
Į
4) Remove the waveguide sticks.
d. Lamp
1) Move the lamp unit to the cutout position of the sheet metal.
5) Remove the harness fixture. Disconnect the FFC.
Ĭ
cutout
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws and the LED PWB
assembly.
ĭ ĭ
Į
ĭ

6) Move the 2/3 mirror unit to the position where it hits the sheet e. Lens
metal.
f. CCD
Move the lamp unit to the position where it hits the right end of the
optical base plate. 1) Remove the screws, the dark box, and the cover.
ĭ Ĭ
2) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
7) Remove the screws, the wire holders and the wires. Then,
remove the lump unit.
į
Ĭ
ĭ
Į Į
3) Remove the CCD unit.

* Adjustment is required when it was removed.
Refer to the "5 ADJUSTMENT AND SETTINGS"
NOTE: Never loosen the screws marked with X.

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and
the angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause
a problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.

g. Drive wire D. Developing section
h. Drive belt (1) Developing unit
1) Remove the drive wires and the drive belt.
Part No. Part name
a Developer
b DV blade
c DV side seal FR
d Toner filter
e DV blade upper
c
e
c
f
b
Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the fig-
ure below and fix it.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror unit
to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as shown in
the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then wind two turns
furthermore around the pulley. a
Ĳ a. Developer
ı
1) Tilt the developing unit slightly toward the direction of arrow and
į gently shake up a little.
ĭ
İ *To prevent the developer spilling out of developing unit
Ĭ
Ĳ
ı
1 7 8 9 10
į
İ
ĭ
Ĭ
Į 10 9 8 7 1
2) Remove the screw

3) Press both edges of the cover and remove it while rotating. 5) Loading developer to the developing unit
Be sure to shake the bag of developer thoroughly before pouring

into the developing unit
When pouring the developer into the unit, use care not to get
developer into the drive section
Do not touch the MG roller.
MG roller
6) Slightly tilt the developing unit. Load developer on lower side of
MG roller evenly on left and right.
4) While rotating the gear, dispose of developer
Do not tilt the developing unit after loading the developer.

7) Insert the pawls on the cover into the holes on DV-BOX at an
angle of 45 degrees.

8) Rotate and insert the cover. b. DV blade
1) Remove the screw
9) Check the mounting condition of the cover and tighten screws. 2) Pull the center section and remove the boss. Insert a flat-blade
screwdriver into the space (1) in the illustration below. Slide the
cover toward the front and remove the rear-side boss.
Since shoulder screws are used, do not tighten too firmly.
Tightening torque of the screw 0.5 - 0.6Nm
When removing the rear-side boss, press the cover gently to pre-
vent toner dispersion.
Į
The front-side boss and rear-side boss must be handled with care
to prevent fracturing.
Ĭ Make sure that bosses are

fit into holes.
į Press the cover toward

the direction of arrow Ĭ
after assembling.
The cover must be
ĭ Make sure pawls are seated securely.
inserted and secured.
3) Release the front-side boss while sliding the cover toward rear
Execute developer adjustment after replacement of the developer. side and remove the cover.
(Sim25-2)

4) Remove the DV blade c. DV side seal FR
1) Remove the DV side seal FR
When replacing the DV blade, affix the DV blade based on the ref-
erence position. When replacing the DV side seal FR, affix the seals based on the
reference position.
Before affixing new DV blade, make sure to remove any foreign

material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface completely. Before affixing new DV side seal FR, make sure to remove any
foreign material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface
completely.
Steady the DV blade after affixing the blade. (Make sure that the
sheet is seated securely.) DV side seal F DV side seal R

after affixing the DV blade.
Reference position Reference position Reference position

Reference position
(Wall surface) (Edge face) (Edge face)
(Wall surface)
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm
0mm
0.3mm 0.3mm
0mm 0mm
(Steps) (Edge face)
2) Insert two front-side bosses into the holes on DV-BOX.

Insert one rear-side boss into the holes on DV-BOX while slightly
bending the cover.
Insert the boss on back side of the cover securely and tighten
Do not mistake for DV blade upper. screw.
DV blade. DV blade upper.

Į
Cut surface No cut surface
Ĭ ĭ

e. DV blade upper
1) Remove the DV cover
Make sure a part of DV blade is placed on top of DV side seal FR. 2) Remove the DV blade upper
DV blade is Side seal is

placed on top placed on top
When replacing the DV blade upper, affix it based on the refer-
ence position.
Before affixing new DV blade upper, make sure to remove any for-
eign material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface com-
pletely.
d. Toner filter
1) Uplift a knob on the filter cover (1), slide toward the direction of (2)
and remove the cover. Steady the DV blade upper after affixing the blade. (Make sure
that the sheet is seated securely.)

upper after affixing the DV blade.
2) Remove the toner filter from the filter cover

Make sure to attach the filter in proper mounting direction for
replacement.
Reference
position
Wider in width (Wall surface)
0mm
0mm 0.3mm 0.5mm

Reference position
(Wall surface)
Do not mistake for DV blade.
DV blade upper. DV blade.
3) Attach the filter cover.
Put the hole through the boss.
Insert the ribs.

No cut surface Cut surface
3) Attach the cover.
Hook the filter cover

with pawls.
Make sure to hook the filter cover

with pawl and rib securely.

E. OPC drum section b. Drum
1) Remove the screw and pull out the shaft from the drum
(1) OPC drum unit
Part No. Part name

a Charger unit
b Drum
c Cleaning blade
d Toner reception sheet
e Side seal FR
f Charger cleaner
b *If the drum shaft is hard to remove, insert a flat-blade screwdriver

between process frame and cutout on bearing to remove (as
shown in the illustration below).
c f
Cutout area
a. Charger unit
1) Uplift the lock lever and pull out the charger unit.
When inserting the drum shaft, make sure to insert the pin all the
way toward the direction of arrow (in the illustration below).
ĭ
2) Remove the drum

When handling the drum, make sure to hold within 15 mm of both When the drum is removed perform the following procedures
edges or less.
1) After removing the drum, apply stearic acid powder (UKOG-
15 mm or less 15 mm or less 0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the drum
Note for servicing the drums

(1) Prevent contamination
Note
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints or oil dirt on the drum surface
(keep the unit always oils and dust)
• When replacing the drum, cover the drum with the protection sheet
and hold the protection sheet. If it is required to hold the drum
2) After mounting the drum on drum frame, hold both edges of drum
directly, use enough care not to touch the cleaning blade area.
within 15 mm or less. Rotate the drum manually in the forward
15mm inside from both edges of the drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt
direction twice (toward the direction of arrow as shown in the illus-
is attached to the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning
tration below) and remove the stearic acid powder (UKOG-
blade may flip)
0312FCZZ) from drum surface.
Countermeasures
If a fingerprint is attached to the drum surface erroneously, perform the
following countermeasures
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt
Check method
Check to confirm that the drum is free from fingerprints or oily dirt and
that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the following method
• Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11 x 8.5)
paper and check the printed paper for any abnormality in the image
(2) Prior exposure prevention
Note
• Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light
• Do not expose the unit to light for a long time
• Cover the drum with light-blocking material (when using paper, use
about 10 sheets of paper to block light)
• Do not touch the drum surface except for the both ends (15
Countermeasures
mm) of the drum
If the drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior exposure)
• Any section of the drum may be touched from above the black
perform the following countermeasures
protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly
1) Print half tone image on the whole surface of A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
and check to confirm that there is no irregular density area in the
previously exposed section
2) If the drum is subject to stress by being exposed to strong light. It
may be recovered by leaving it in a dark and cool place. If it may
not be recovered replace it with a new one

c. Cleaning blade 2) Remove the screw and the cleaning blade
1) Remove the pawls and the MC cover.
Do not touch the lead edge of the cleaning blade.

F side
Ĭ When attaching the cleaning blade, tighten the screw in the order
of (1) - (3).
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ
Į
Į
Pay attention to center section
hooked with a pawl.
Followings must be observed while attaching the cover:

• (1) Insert the pawl on MC unit to the square hole on process
frame.
• (2) Insert the pawl into the hole securely until it clicks.
• (3) Insert the pawl on front side securely.
d. Toner reception sheet
1) Remove the toner reception sheet
Į Steady the cover
from above.
When replacing the toner reception sheet, affix the sheet based
on the reference position. Clean the affixing surface with alcohol.
F side
Make sure the pawl is

secured.
Reference position
(Wall surface)
0mm 0.3mm
Reference 0mm
ĭ position
(Steps)
0.3mm
Inset the pawl

into the frame.
Insert the pawl to

the square hole.

e. Side seal FR 2) (1) Remove the charger cleaner attached in front end of the MC
1) Remove the side seal FR cleaning bar and attach new charger cleaner.
(2) If you have any spare charger cleaner, attach it near handle
and keep it for next replacement.
When replacing the side seal FR, attach the cleaning blade first.
Then move the side seals toward front side and attach based on Ĭ
the reference position. Clean the affixing surface with alcohol.
Before affixing new seal, make sure to remove any foreign mate-
*The blade should not be put on top of the side seals while hold-
ing down the blade.
*The width of the clearance should be 0.3 mm or less.
ĭ
Reference position (Wall surface)

0mm
0.3mm
0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm

Reference position (Contact point with the blade)
f. Charger cleaner
1) Open the cover and remove the MC cleaning bar.
Detach the cleaning bar by firstly detaching the bar from right-side
pawl, move the right-side bar over the pawl. It will make left side of
the bar slightly tilt upward; rotate the bar just a little and detach left
side of the bar. Finally remove the bar from the center pawl.

F. Transfer section
Part No. Part name

a Separation pawl
b Primary transfer belt
c Primary transfer toner reception sheet F/R
d Primary transfer tension roller
e Resist backup stay cushion
f Primary transfer drive gear Ĭ
g Primary transfer drive roller
h Primary transfer roller
i Y auxiliary roller
j Primary transfer blade backup roller sheet
k Primary transfer blade backup roller
l Pre-transfer roller
m BK auxiliary roller
n Cleaning roller
o Primary transfer cleaner sub blade
p Primary transfer cleaner seals F/R Ĭ
q Primary transfer cleaner blade
i k
j
c
d
e
f 2) Place the paper guide with the separation pawl upward. Remove
a screw and detach the separation pawl from the paper guide.
c
b
a
m ĭ
h g
l Ĭ
b. Primary transfer belt

o 1) Remove the screw while Primary transfer cleaner unit in on top
and remove the rail.
q
Do not touch the belt.

p
n Ĭ
a. Separation pawl
1) Remove the screw and paper guide.
After removing the paper guide, place it with the separation pawl ĭ
upward to prevent damage on the tip of the pawl.
When attaching the paper guide, handle it carefully not to scratch
transfer belt with separation pawl.
Ĭ

2) Flip the unit upside down and remove screws. 6) Insert a driver into the hole on the frame and set the unit upright.
3) Remove primary transfer cleaner unit.
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
7) Fold the primary transfer belt followed roller.

4) Remove the spring.
Handle the belt carefully to avoid contact with floor. 8) Remove the sub frame.

9) Pull out the primary transfer belt slowly. c. Primary transfer toner reception sheet F/R
1) Remove the primary transfer toner reception sheet F/R
When attaching the belt,
place the lot number on
the edge of the belt on
rear side. When replacing the primary transfer toner reception sheet F/R,
affix the sheets based on the reference position.
Caution for attachment

Do not place the belt on
flange on the roller. Before affixing new primary transfer toner reception sheet F/R,
NOTE: Caution for attachment

Follow the steps below after replacing the primary transfer
belt.
1) Apply Y powder (CKOG-0345DS51) on entire surface of
the primary transfer belt with primary transfer cleaner unit Reference Reference
position position
being removed. Edge face Edge face
of the rib of the rib
1.0mm 1.0mm
OK NG
0mm 0mm
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm

0mm 0mm
0.3mm 0.3mm
2) Attach the primary transfer cleaner unit.

3) Manually rotate the primary transfer belt drive gear and
remove the powder applied on the primary transfer belt.
Confirm proper rotation direction. Never rotate in inverse

direction.

3) Remove the E-rings, the arms, the collars and the poly sliders.
0.3mm 0.3mm
0mm
0mm
Steps Steps
e. Resist backup stay cushion

1) Remove the resist backup stay.
d. Primary transfer tension roller

1) Remove the E-rings.
2) Remove the primary transfer tension roller assembly.
2) Remove the resist backup stay cushions.
When replacing the resist backup stay cushion, attach the cushion
based on the reference position.
Before affixing new resist backup stay cushion, make sure to

remove any foreign material and remaining adhesive from affixing
surface completely.

2) Remove the clip and the bearing.
Affix the resist backup stay cushion so that the cut surface
of the cushion will be placed along the marking-off line.
0.3mm
Reference position
Marking-off line
0mm 0.3mm 0mm
Reference position
Edge face
3) Remove the primary transfer drive roller.

(Edge face) (Edge face)
0.3mm 0.3mm
0mm 0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm 0mm
f. Primary transfer drive gear

1) Pull out the pin and remove the primary transfer drive gear.
h. Primary transfer roller

Ĭ 1) Remove the E-rings and the primary transfer rollers.
ĭ
Ĭ
g. Primary transfer drive roller Ĭ ĭ
1) Remove the bearing. Ĭ
Ĭ

i. Y auxiliary roller 3) Remove the clip and the bearing.
1) Remove the E-ring and the Y auxiliary roller.
4) Remove the E-ring.
j. Primary transfer blade backup roller sheet

When attaching the spring, attach in order of (1) - (2).
5) Remove the E-rings, the gears and the bearing.
ĭ
2) Remove the arm holder and the spring. Ĭ
İ
į

6) Remove the parts in the order of a screws, the grounding elec- k. Primary transfer blade backup roller
trode for blade backup roller, and the frame. 1) Remove the primary transfer frame R.
Ĭ
į
Į ĭ
2) Remove the E-ring and the primary transfer blade backup roller.
OK NG
Ensure that the grounding electrode is contacting

the upper surface of the shaft after attaching the
groounding electrode for blade backup roller.
7) Remove the primary transfer blade backup roller sheet.
When replacing the primary transfer blade backup roller sheet,

affix the sheet based on the reference position.
3) Remove the clip and the shaft.
Before affixing new primary transfer blade backup roller sheet,

Reference 0.3mm
position
Marking-off line 0mm
0mm 0.3mm
Reference position(Edge face)

l. Pre-transfer roller 4) Remove the shaft assembly.
m. BK auxiliary roller
ĭ
Ĭ
5) Remove the clip and the bearing.

2) Remove the arm holder.
6) Remove the spring and the pre-transfer roller assembly.
3) Remove the screw, the cam, the E-rings and the bearing.

7) Remove the E-ring, the arm and the bearing. o. Primary transfer cleaner sub blade
1) Remove the primary transfer cleaner sub blade.
Before replacing the primary transfer cleaner sub blade, affix the
blade based on the reference position.
Before affixing new primary transfer cleaner sub blade, make sure
8) Remove the E-ring, the holder, the bearing, the pre-transfer roller
and the BK auxiliary roller.
Reference
n. Cleaning roller position
1) Remove the E-ring and the cleaning roller. Wall surface
0.3mm 0.3mm
Ĭ
0mm 0mm
Reference position 0.3mm 0mm
Wall surface Reference position
Steps
ĭ
p. Primary transfer cleaner seals F/R
1) Remove the primary transfer cleaner seals F/R.
When replacing the primary transfer cleaner seals F/R, affix the
seals based on the reference position.
Do no place any part of the seals on top of the blade.
The seals should not get stuck at rubber section on the cleaner
blade.
Before affixing new primary transfer cleaner seals F/R, make sure

(2) Secondary transfer unit
Part No. Part name

a Secondary transfer roller
b Secondary transfer separation plate
c Paper guide
d Sensors
b
a
d
0mm 0mm
Reference position
Steps
0.3mm 0.3mm
Reference position c
Edge face of the blade
0.3mm 0mm 0.3mm 0mm
a. Secondary transfer roller

q. Primary transfer cleaner blade
1) Remove the screw and primary transfer cleaner blade.
Do not touch the edge of the blade.
Do not deform the toner agitation sheet when attaching the blade.
Ĭ
ĭ
2) Remove the secondary transfer roller sub unit

3) Remove the E-ring and the secondary transfer roller d. Paper guide
1) Remove the plate
b. Secondary transfer separation plate

c. Paper guide
Ĭ
ĭ Ĭ

Ĭ
2) Remove the sheet
When replacing the sheet, affix the sheet based on the reference
position.
Before affixing new sheet, make sure to remove any foreign mate-
2) Remove the screw, the separating electrode connecting plate and

the secondary transfer separation plate.
Do not put any oil content etc. by directly touching the separating
electrode connecting plate and the secondary transfer separation Reference position
plate with your hand. Steps
0.5mm
Make sure that (2) and
(3) are contacting each 0mm
Ĭ other for attachment.
ĭ 0mm 0.5mm
Reference position
Wall surface

e. Sensors (3) PTC outer holder
1) Remove the E-ring, secondary transfer separation sensor cam, 1) Remove the primary transfer unit.
pin, and bearing. 2) Remove the PTC unit.
3) Remove the PTC outer holder.
ĭ
Į
Ĭ
2) Remove the secondary transfer separation sensor cam and then

E-ring. Slide secondary transfer separation cam. Remove the par-
allel pin and then remove the secondary transfer separation cam
shaft sub assy.
(4) Registration sensor unit
Part No. Part name

a Image density and image registration sensor
į
ĭ a
Ĭ
a. Image density and image registration sensor

Ĭ ĭ
Ĭ ĭ

G. LSU section H. Manual paper feed section
(1) LSU unit (1) Manual paper feed unit
Part No. Part name Part No. Part name

a Cleaning base a Paper pickup roller
b Paper feed roller
c Separation roller
a d Torque limiter
e Transport roller 10
f Sensors
d
a
b
e f
a. Cleaning base
1) Open the cover and remove the LSU cleaning bar.

1) Remove the cover
2) Remove the waste toner box

3) Remove the cleaning base from the waste toner box and attach it
to the LSU cleaning bar.
2) Uplift the pawl and detach the pickup roller. Remove the E-ring
and detach the paper feed roller.
The roller insert to the slit

when attaching the roller.
į
ĭ
Į

c. Separation roller e. Transport roller 10
1) Remove a screw and then detach the paper guide. Uplift the pawl 1) Remove the screw and the paper guide
and then detach the separation roller.
Fasten screws in the order of (1) and (2) for assembly.
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
į Į Į
d. Torque limiter
1) Remove the screw and the frame
į
Fasten screws in the order of (1) and (2) for assembly.
ĭ
į
Į İ 2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the harness.
Ĭ
į
Insert ribs at
three sections
for assembly.
Attach the torque

limiter on this side
first for assembly.
2) Remove the E-ring and slide the holder and the bearing toward
the direction of arrow in the illustration below. Remove the shaft
and then remove the torque limiter.
3) Remove the E-ring, the gear, the collar, the pin and the bearing.
Ĭ
Ĭ į
ĭ
Į
İ

4) Remove the screws and the frame. 7) Remove the screws and the frame.
ĭ
ĭ
5) Remove the E-rings, the gears, the pin, the coupling and the bear-
ing. 8) Remove the paper guide assembly.
6) Remove the screws.
0mm
0.3mm
Reference
0.3mm 0mm position
Wall surface

10) Remove the E-ring, the bearing and the transport roller 10. 3) Remove the tray
f. Sensors
1) Remove the screw and the sensor

ĭ
5) Remove the screw, the tray and the sensor
2) Remove the arm

Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ
Į
Ĭ
Insert the ribs at

nine sections for
assembly.

I. Tray paper feed section 2) Remove the pawl and then remove the holder.
(1) Tray paper feed unit
Part No. Part name

a Paper pickup roller
b Paper feed roller
c Separation roller
d Torque limiter
e Transport roller 3
f Transport roller 1 ĭ
g Sensors
h Transport roller 2
g
e Ĭ
b
a
3) Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller
g
g
h
f
Ĭ
cd
ĭ

b. Paper feed roller c. Separation roller
1) Remove the paper guide d. Torque limiter
1) Remove the pawl, separation roller and then torque limiter.
Insert this part first
for assembly.

e. Transport roller 3 4) Remove the transport roller 3.
1) Remove the screws and the paper guide.
Ĭ ĭ
f. Transport roller 1
Make sure the 1) Remove the spring, the screw, the E-ring and the arm.
earth plate is
contacting the
frame.
2) Remove the screw and the earth plate.
Make sure the

earth plate is
contacting the 2) Remove the gear, the pin, the E-rings, the poly slider, the belt, the
shaft. pulleys and the bearings.
3) Remove the coupling, the pin, the E-rings and the bearings.

3) Remove the screws and the frame. 6) Remove the E-ring, the bearing and the transport roller 1.
When attaching the frame, tighten the screw in the order of (1) -
(2).
g. Sensors
h. Transport roller 2
ĭ
Ĭ
4) Remove the screw and the paper feed unit lower.
2) Remove the pulleys, the belt, the E-ring and the bearing.
5) Remove the screws and the paper guide assembly.

3) Remove the holder and the shaft assembly. 6) Remove the screws and the frame.
4) Remove the coupling, the E-ring and the bearing.
7) Disconnect the connectors. Remove the sensors.

Remove the harness from rib.
5) Disconnect the connector. Remove the sensor.

Remove the harness from rib.

8) Remove the screws and the sheet metal assembly. J. Paper transport section / ADU section / Paper
exit section
(1) PS unit
When attaching the sheet metal assembly, tighten the screw in
the order of (1) - (2). Part No. Part name
a Registration roller (idle)
b Registration roller (drive)
ĭ
c Transport roller 4
d Sensor
a b
a. Registration roller (idle)

9) Disconnect the connector. Remove the sensor. 1) Remove the spring, the E-ring and the handle.
Remove the transport roller 2.
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
When assembling,
align the square hole
and round hole.

3) Remove the registration roller (idle) assembly. 2) Remove the screw, the coupling, the spring and the holder.
3) Remove the screws, the E-ring, the plate and the bearing.
When assembly, the

roller is in contact with
the ground plate.
4) Remove the registration roller (drive) assembly.
4) Remove the plates, the bearings, the E-rings and the gear.
The protruding
surface is the
bearing side
b. Registration roller (drive)

1) Remove the E-ring and slide the gear.
Remove the pin.
5) Remove the bearing, the E-rings and the gear.
Ĭ Į
ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
į
Į

c. Transport roller 4 4) Remove the screw, the coupling, the bearings, the E-ring and the
1) Remove the screw and the earth spring. transport roller 4.
2) Remove the screws and the plate.
d. Sensor
When assembly, the

plate is in contact
with the ground
plate.
3) Remove the screw and the earth plate.
When assembly, the

shaft is in contact
with the ground plate.

(2) Right door unit 2) Remove the screws and the paper guide.
Part No. Part name

a Transport roller 7
b Transport roller 8
c Transport roller 9
d sensor
d Ĭ
d
3) Remove the screws and the cover.
b
a. Transport roller 7
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ

5) Remove the screws and the pawl. 8) Disconnect the connectors. Remove the reuse bands.
6) Remove the screws and the cover. 9) Remove the screws.
10) Remove the motor assembly, the bearings, the belts, the shaft
7) Remove the screw, the holder and the door. assembly and the poly slider.

11) Remove the E-rings, the gear, the pin and the bearing. b. Transport roller 8
c. Transport roller 9
1) Remove the E-rings, the gear, the pin and the bearings.
12) Remove the E-rings, the mylars, the belt, the pulleys, the pins, the
poly slider and the bearing.
2) Remove the E-rings, the poly slider and the bearings.
3) Remove the transport roller 8 and the transport roller 9.

d. sensor (3) Fusing rear unit
Part No. Part name
a Transport roller 6
a. Transport roller 6
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw and the solenoid.
2) Remove the earth plate.

3) Remove the spring and the arm. 6) Slide the roller. Remove the E-ring and the bearing.
When assembling,
place it on the lever.
4) Remove the E-rings, the gears, the belt, the pulleys and the poly
sliders.
(4) Paper exit unit
Part No. Part name

a Sensors
b Discharge brush
c Paper exit roller 2
5) Remove the E-ring, the gear and the bearing. a

a. Sensors 4) Remove the screws, the holder, the gear, the pin and the bearing.
b. Discharge brush
c. Paper exit roller 2
2) Remove the screws and shifter drive. 5) Remove the screw and the holder.
6) Disconnect the connectors. Remove the sensors and the reuse

bands.
3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw.

7) Remove the screws and the paper guide. 10) Remove the screw, the earth plate and the discharge brush.
When attaching the paper guide, tighten the screw in the order of
(1) - (2).
Ĭ Make sure the plate is

contacting to the roller.
When assembling, tighten the

screw while holding the reference
cross boss so that it hits the
inside of the oval hole.
ĭ
reference position edge face
0.3mm 0mm
reference 0mm
position
edge face 0.3mm
11) Remove the actuator.
8) Remove the actuator. Disconnect the connector. Remove the sen-

sor.
12) Remove the E-rings, the bearings and the paper exit roller 2.
9) Remove the paper guide assembly and the collar.

13) Remove the actuator and the sensor. K. Fusing section
(1) Fusing unit
Part No. Part name

a Lower fusing transport roller
b Gears
c Upper fusing transport roller
d Pressure bearing
e Separation plate
f Pressure roller gear
g Pressure roller bearing
h Pressure roller
i Upper thermistor
j Fusing belt unit
k Lower thermistor
l Main thermistor
m Sub thermistor
n Sensors
o Paper guides
14) Remove the sensor. d

b
n
c
o
d
o
a
o
o
i f
g
h

a. Lower fusing transport roller 4) Remove the screws, harnesses, and then remove the paper
1) Remove the connector and detach the harness from the rib. guide.
Ĭ
Ĭ
2) Remove the spring and the cover

NOTE: Do not break the pawls while removing (as shown in the
red circles.).
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ
NOTE: When mounting the harnesses, make sure to wire the

connectors so that the connector won’t protrude.
• Attach the connector in the direction shown in the illustration
below. Hook the connector rib to the holder rib to fix.
• Slide extra harness into the areas in the red circle.
3) Open the lower paper guide.

5) Remove the E ring, gear and bearing. b. Gears
Ĭ
ĭ
Metal side is placed
on the outer side.
6) Remove the E ring. shift the bearing and remove the lower fusing ĭ
transport roller.
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
ĭ ĭ
NOTE: Be sure to confirm that bearing should be fixed by the

hole of cover when the cover is installed.
Į

3) Remove the gear. 2) Remove the screw and earth plate.
NOTE: Be sure to confirm that the edge of the upper fusing trans-
port roller and earth plate are contacted when assembled.
Grease
UKOG-0012QSZZ
c. Upper fusing transport roller

1) Remove the screws, paper guide, and then remove the springs.
NOTE: Make sure the paper guide does not contact with the sep-
aration plate.
When attaching the paper guide, fasten screws in the
order of (1)-(4) shown in the illustration below.
Į
į
3) Remove the spring and shift the pressure bearing.

ı
Ĭ İ
ĭ
4) Hold the pressure bearing and remove the upper fusing transport
roller.
Pressure bearing

d. Pressure bearing 2) Slide the holder to the right and left and remove from the boss.
1) Remove the pressure bearing and the spring.
Do not scratch, contaminate or deform the surface of separation

plate.
e. Separation plate
1) Remove the spring
f. Pressure roller gear

g. Pressure roller bearing
h. Pressure roller
1) Turn the fusing unit upside down. Remove the screws and then
remove the cover.
Make sure the holder has been removed.
Hold here with longnose pliers

for attachment and detachment.

2) Disconnect the connectors and detach the harness from the rib. 5) Remove the screw and the holder
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ
3) Attach the cover (without fastening screw).
NOTE: To protect the mylar sheet, make sure to keep attaching
Ĭ
the cover when not flipping the unit upside down.
Ĭ
Ĭ
8) Remove the upper heater lamp and low heater lamp

9) Remove the spring 11) Remove the ring, the bearing and the lever
Ĭ Ĭ
Front side
Į
ĭ
Rib facing outward
12) Remove the ring, gear, bearing and the lever
Rear side
Insert this portion of the rib
10) Remove the screw and the pressure roller unit to the U-shaped groove.
NOTE: Do not touch the thermostat and thermistor shown in the į
red circle in the illustration below.
Į
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Rib facing outward
Rib facing outward
Ĭ
ĭ Attach the pressure roller without removing the protector sheet.
Remove the sheet after completing the assembly.
Apply grease (UKOG-0235FCZZ) when replacing the pressure
roller.
NOTE: Different screw is used for front and rear side. Make sure
to fasten proper screw on each side.
Apply grease within 10 mm of the step

Front side Rear side and avoid U-shaped groove.
10mm
Apply grease to these areas, thin and flat.

i. Upper thermistor k. Lower thermistor
1) Remove the screw and the thermistor 1) Remove the screw and the lower thermistor
ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
j. Fusing belt unit

1) Remove the screw and the fusing belt unit
When attaching fusing belt unit, fasten screws in the order of (1)-
(6) shown in the illustration below.
l. Main thermistor
m. Sub thermistor
1) Remove the screws. Then remove the paper guide.
Ĳ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
į Ĭ
İ ĭ
ı Į

3) Remove the screw and the plate o. Paper guides
1) Clean the paper guide
Ĭ
Do not deform the paper guide.
Detach the harness from

the square hole.
4) Remove the screw, the cover, the main thermistor and the sub
thermistor
Ĭ ĭ
Detach the pawls on the cover.
n. Sensors

[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
MX-4071
Service Manual
1. Operation panel section

A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
OCSW
8
6
5
4
7
9
1
CCFT 2
10
Signal name Name Function/Operation

CCFT LCD backlight LCD backlight
OCSW Paper size detection trigger sensor Detects generation of the paper size detection trigger signal

1 PWR-R PWB Power switch, Buzzer, Display power ON / OFF status with green LED
2 HOME KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal [For MX-xx51 series]
NFC HOME KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal and built in NFC tag [For MX-xx61/xx71 series]
3 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal from SCN MFP PWB and controls the
touch panel
4 FRONT LED PWB Display indication state of MFP (Blue, Green, Red)
5 WIRELESS LAN PWB Connect the network by the wireless LAN
6 USB CN PWB Connect WIRELESS LAN PWB and SCN MFP PWB
7 FRONT USB PWB Relays USB device and SCN MFP PWB
8 ORS_LED Drives the LED for the document size detection
9 ORS_PD Outputs the document size detection signal
10 MOTION SENSOR PWB Detects the approach of human in energy saving mode and send [For MX-xx61/xx71 series]
signal to SCN MFP PWB
MX-4071 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 1

B. Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB, the FRONT USB PWB, and the HOME KEY PWB / NFC HOME KEY PWB. It
displays the machine operation.
It is provided with the FRONT USB PWB which is used for the firmware update, USB print, and Scan to USB.
In addition, the USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.
A document size is detected by the ORS_LED and the ORS_PD.

The detection timing of document size is determined according to the document size detection trigger sensor signal.

2. Scanner section
MHPS
6 CL_ON
MIM
3
4
CL_ON 5
1

CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position
MIM Scan motor Drives the scanner unit (scan, return operations)

1 CCD PWB Scan document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal
2 SCN MFP PWB Controls image data (compression, decompression and filing) and controls the whole
machine.
Converts print data into image data.
3 LED DRIVER PWB Drives the scanner lamp
4 Lens Reduces a document image (light) and project it to the CCD.
5 1st mirror Leads a document image to the lens.
6 2nd mirror
7 3rd mirror

(1) General
This section performs the following operations.
1) Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the
reflected image is scanned by the 3-line (RGB) CCD elements to
B
be converted into analog image signals.
G
R
2) The analog image signals are converted into 10-bit digital signals
by the A/D converter.
3) The digital image signals are sent to the SCN MFP PWB for
image processing.
(2) Detailed descriptions
a. Optical section drive
The optical section is driven as follows: The drive power is transmitted
from the scanner motor (MIM) through the belt to the drive pulley/wire, R
and the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached to the
G
wire are driven.
B
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled with the signals sent from the
SCN MFP PWB.
Image data of one line
b. Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage which is
generated by the scanner lamp drive PWB with the control signals
sent from the SCN MFP PWB.
c. Image scan and color separation R G B
Red component Green component Blue component
Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the
image data image data image data
reflected image is scanned by the 3-line (RGB) CCD elements to be
converted into analog image signals.
The color components are extracted into R, G, and B by the three d. Image signal A/D conversion
kinds of CCD elements (R, G, and B). 1) Each image signal (analog) of R, G, and B is converted into a
The red CCD extracts the red component of an image, the green CCD 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter in the CCD PWB.
extracts the green component, and the blue CCD extracts the blue Each color pixel has 10bit information.
component. This operation is called color separation. 2) Each 10bit digital image signal of R, G, and B is outputted from
The CCD element is apparently seen as one unit, but it includes the the CCD PWB and sent to the SCN MFP PWB, where it is con-
three kinds of elements (R, G, and B). verted into an 8bit signal and sent to the SCN MFP PWB.
The CCD element scans the document in the main scanning direction.
Scanning in the sub scanning direction is made by shifting the scanner
unit with the scanner motor. CCD PWB
Analog IC
The document images are optically reduced by the lens and reflected CDS
to the CCD. CCD PGA ADC LVDS
R /Clamp
The scanning direction is 600dpi. G
Buffer B
Timing
Generator
e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing the
scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not made optically, but per-
formed by the image process technology (software).

3. Manual paper feed section
CPFM
HPFC
MPUC
MPFS
2
4 MPFD
5 1 MPLD1
6
3
MPED MPWS

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section
HPFC Horizontal transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller (Paper feed tray1, Manual paper feed tray)
MPED Paper empty sensor Detects presence of paper (Manual paper feed tray)
MPFD Paper feed sensor Detects paper pass (Manual paper feed tray)
MPFS Paper feed solenoid Controls the paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
MPLD1 Paper length sensor Detects the paper length (Manual paper feed tray)
MPUC Paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
MPWS Paper width sensor Detects the paper width (Manual paper feed tray)

1 Paper pickup roller Feeds paper to the paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
2 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section (Manual paper feed tray)
3 Separation roller Separate paper to prevent double feeding (Manual paper feed tray)
4 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper transported from manual paper tray to the transport roller 4
5 Transport roller 10 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper
6 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to paper

(1) Paper feed operation
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it to the paper feed
roller section.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to prevent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual paper feed clutch con-
trols ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the registration roller by the manual transport roller.

4. Tray paper feed section
CPFM
HPFC
C1PFC
8 C1PUC
C1LUD
3
7
5 C1PFD
C1PED 6
C1PFPD 4 DSW_C1
1
2
C1SS1
C1SS3 C1SS2
C1SS4
C1LUM
C1SPD

C1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the paper lift up (Paper feed tray 1)
C1LUM Paper tray lift motor Lifts the lift plate of the paper feed tray (Paper feed tray1)
C1PED Paper empty sensor Detects paper empty (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PFC Vertical transport clutch Controls the transport roller (Paper feed tray1)
C1PFD Paper transport sensor Detects paper pass in the paper transport section (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PFPD Paper pass sensor Detects paper pass in the paper transport section (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PUC Paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller (Paper feed tray1)
C1SPD Paper remaining quantity sensor Detects the paper remaining quantity (Paper feed tray 1)
C1SS1-4 Paper size sensor Detects paper size (Paper feed tray 1)
DSW_C1 Transport cover sensor Detects open/close of the transport section cover (Paper feed tray 1)
HPFC Horizontal transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller (Paper feed tray1, Manual paper feed tray)

2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray to the transport roller 3
3 Paper pickup roller Feeds paper to the paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 1)
4 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent double feeding (Paper feed tray 1)
5 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section (Paper feed tray 1)
7 Transport roller 2(Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 3
8 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and 2 to the transport roller 4
(1) Paper feed front operation
• Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller falls.
• The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
• The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate stops at the specified position.
(2) Paper feed operation
• When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup timing, feeding paper.
• At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent
against double feed of paper.
(3) Paper remaining detection
The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper empty. The result is dis-
played.

(4) Paper remaining quantity detection method
• The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rotations of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up operation of the paper
feed tray to turning ON the upper limit sensor.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

5. Paper registration section (Paper transport section)
RRM
PFM
PPD2

PFM Transport motor Drives the transport roller 4
PPD2 Paper transport sensor 2 Detects paper pass in the transport roller 4 and registration roller
RRM Registration motor Drives the registration roller (Controls the timing of the transfer image for the paper)

2 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller. Paper is buckled between the registration roller and
this roller to correct the paper skew and the relation between images and paper
3 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the
4 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts
relative position between the images and paper
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the registration roller by the transport rollers. ON/OFF control of each transport roller is
made by the paper transport clutch. The registration roller controls the relative positions of transported paper and the transfer image. The registration
roller is driven by the transport motor. The relative positions of paper and the transfer image are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.

6. Paper exit section
SBM
POFM
6
5
TFD2 POM
SHPOS
5
POD4
4 POD2
3
FUM
OSM
3
POGS

FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section
OSM Offset motor Offsets (shifts) paper
POD2 Paper exit sensor 2 Detects paper transport to the center paper exit tray
POD4 Paper exit sensor 4 Detects paper transport to the upper paper exit tray
POGS Gate solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the gate solenoid selecting upper tray and lower tray
POM Paper exit motor Drives the roller in the paper exit section
SBM Reverse motor Drives the transport roller in duplex mode
SHPOS Shifter home position sensor Detects the shifter home position
TFD2 Paper exit tray full sensor Detects paper full in the center paper exit tray

2 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports paper to the paper exit section
4 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper to the lower paper exit tray
6 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper to the upper paper exit tray or switchback to the ADU section

• The paper transported from the fusing section is sent from transport roller 6 (which is driven by the FUM motor) to paper exit roller 1, and then dis-
charged to the inner tray.

7. ADU section
2 ADUM1
DSW_ADU
APPD1
1 7
3
ADUM2
4
APPD2

ADUM1 ADU motor 1 Drives the transport roller in the right door and right paper exit section
ADUM2 ADU motor 2 Drives the transport roller in the right door section
APPD1 ADU paper transport sensor 1 Detects paper entry and paper pass in the ADU section
APPD2 ADU paper transport sensor 2 Detects paper pass of the transport roller 9
DSW_ADU ADU cover sensor Detects open/close of the ADU cover

2 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper to transport roller 8
4 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper transported from switchback section to the transport roller 9
6 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper transported from transport roller 8 to the transport roller 4
7 RD I/F PWB Detects each sensor in the right door unit

• The paper transported from the fusing section is sent from transport roller 6 (which is driven by the ADU motor) to paper exit roller 1.
At that time, the paper passed under the gate.
• When POD4 detects the paper lead edge, the paper exit drive motor reverses.
• By reversion of the paper exit motor, the paper is sent to the ADU section. At that time, the paper passes over the ADU guide which fell by its own
weight.
• Transport rollers 7 and 8 are driven the ADU motor 1, and transport roller 9 by the ADU motor 2. The paper is transported to the duplex paper feed
position.
• The paper is once stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and transported again to the inside of the machine.

8. LSU section
12
3
12
3
12
3
12
13 3
9
13
13
9
9
13
LSU_TH1
15
PGM 14
1
11
2
1 4
5
6 7 10
5
LSU_TH2

LSU_TH1 LSU temperature sensor 1 Detects LSU temperature
LSU_TH2 LSU temperature sensor 2 Detects LSU temperature
PGM Polygon motor Scans laser beams

1 Colimeter lens Forms laser beams.
2 f θ lens 1 Equalizes the laser beam dot intervals in the main scanning direction. (Corrects the laser dot
3 f θ lens 2 intervals on the OPC drum.)
4 1st Incident mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.

5 2nd,3rd Incident mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
6 Incident CYL Leads laser beams to the Polygon motor.
7 Incident glass Prevents dust, toner, and foreign materials to polygon motor.
8 1st Outgoing mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
9 last outgoing mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
10 BD mirror Leads laser beams to the BD (Beam Detector).
11 Conversion lens for BD Converges laser beams and leads to the BD (Bean Detector).
12 Filter glass Prevents dust, toner, and foreign materials from entering the LSU.
13 Skew adjustment screw (C, M, Y, K) Adjusts the radiating angle of laser beams for the OPC drum. By turning this adjustment
screw, image skew can be adjusted.
14 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal
15 LSU PWB Controls the LSU and generates the video data. Controls laser diode and power
(1) General Main scanning direction
Image data sent from the LSU PWB are converted into laser beams
and radiated onto the OPC drum surface. The LSU unit is composed
REAR
of : (1) the optical elements from the laser to the polygon mirror, (2) the
primary system including the mirror which secures the optical path, (3) Scanning
the optical elements including the polygon mirror, and (4) the scanning direction
system including the mirror which secure the optical path.
(2) Composition
Primary system
C
BK
Y
M
FRONT
Writing position on paper
Paper exit
direction REAR
Scanning
direction
Scanning system
FRONT
(3) Outline of LSU specifications
MX-xx61/xx71 series MX-xx51 series

Process speed 180mm/sec
Resolution 1200dpi 600dpi
Laser beam 2 beams 1 beam
Polygon motor rotation 42520cpm
speed
Laser power Max 0.375mW/1beam Max 1.1mW
Bearing type Oil bearing
Number of mirrors 6
Laser beam diameter 50 - 85 x 50 - 80m
Effective scan length 329mm
Laser wave length 780-800nm 775-800nm

9. OPC drum section
DM_CL
DHPD_CL
DL_Y DM_K
DL_M
MC-CL DL_C
MC-CL DL_K
1 DHPD_K
MC-CL
MC-K
1
1
GB
MC
1
3 2 GB
MC
3 2 GB
MC
3 2 GB
MC
3 2

DHPD_CL Drum phase sensor (CL) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum
DHPD_K Drum phase sensor (K) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum
DL_C Discharge lamp C Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum
DL_K Discharge lamp K Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum
DL_M Discharge lamp M Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum
DM_CL Drum motor (CL) Drives the OPC drum/developing section
DM_K Drum motor (K) Drives the OPC drum, developing and primary transfer section
GB (Y, M, C, K) Grid (Y, M, C, K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.
GB (Y, M, C, K) Main charger grid voltage (K, M, C, Y) The OPC drum surface charging voltage is controlled.
MC (Y, M, C, K) Main charger (Y, M, C, K) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged.
MC-CL Main charger applying voltage (CL) The main charger is charged to generate negative electric charges.
MC-K Main charger applying voltage (K)

1 OPC drum unit (Y, M, C, K) Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade (Y, M, C, K) Remaining toner on the OPC drum surface is cleaned.
3 Waste toner transport screw Waste toner in the OPC drum unit is transported to the waste toner collection section.

The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger,
then laser image beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the
laser (writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Screen grid High voltage unit OPC drum rotation control

The OPC drum (K) is driven by the DM motor (DM_K), and the
rotation speed is monitored by the OPC drum phase sensor
(DHPD_K).
The color OPC drums (C, M, and Y) are driven by the DM motor
Main corona unit (DM_CL), and the rotation speed is monitored by the OPC drum
phase sensor (DHPD_CL).
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The OPC Based on the signals monitored by the two sensors, the rotation
speeds of K OPC drum and the color OPC drums and the rotation
drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage applied
to the screen grid. phase are controlled.
2) Laser beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser 4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
(writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images.
Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
Aluminum CGL CGL
OPC drum layer CTL CTL
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Lens
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens, light is

Laser beams radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum CGL,
When laser beams are radiated onto the CGL of the OPC drum, positive and negative charges are generated.
positive and negative charges are generated. Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative
charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of
charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
the OPC drum. Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on the
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive
out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage of the OPC
and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum surface voltage. drum.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser beam are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the clean-
ing blade.
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to the
waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.

10. Toner supply section
TNM_Y
TCED_Y
TNM_M
TCED_M
TNM_C
TCED_C
TNM_K
TCED_K
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1

TCED_C Toner cartridge ejecting sensor (C) Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge
TCED_K Toner cartridge ejecting sensor (K) Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge
TCED_M Toner cartridge ejecting sensor (M) Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge
TCED_Y Toner cartridge ejecting sensor (Y) Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge
TNM_C Toner motor (C) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit
TNM_K Toner motor (K) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit
TNM_M Toner motor (M) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit
TNM_Y Toner motor (Y) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit

1 Toner transport screw Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
2 Toner stirring plate Moves toner to the toner transport screw to assist the toner transport operation.
Based on the print pixel count and the process control information, Yes/No of toner supply is judged.
When it is judged that the toner density is decreasing, the toner motor is rotated to supply toner in the toner cartridge through the toner transport
screw and the toner transfer pipe to the developing unit.

11. Developing section
DM_CL
2 DM_K
2
4
BS 1
2
4
BS 1
3
2
TCS_Y 4
BS 1
3
5 TCS_M 4
BS
3
5 TCS_C
5 TCS_K

BS (K, M, C, Y) Developing bias voltage (K, M, C, Y) Voltage to form toner images on the OPC drum. Controls the developing density.
DM_CL Drum motor (CL) Drives the OPC drum/developing section
TCS_C Toner sensor (C) Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge
TCS_K Toner sensor (K) Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge
TCS_M Toner sensor (M) Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge
TCS_Y Toner sensor (Y) Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge

1 Developing roller Attaches toner to electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum and forms toner images.
2 Mixing roller Stirs developer and toner to negatively charge toner.
3 Doctor Maintains the quantities of toner and developer on the DV roller at a constant levels.
4 Toner filter Prevents toner splash.
5 Mixing roller R Exhaust supplied surplus developers and keep the amount of developers constant.

Toner is attached to electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC
drum surface by laser image beams to form toner images.
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are agitated and transported
by the mixing roller.
By stirring, toner and carrier are negatively charged by mechanical
friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC compo-
nent) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher than
the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
The toner sensor detects the toner supply state from the toner car-
tridge.
In this machine, the toner density is detected by the toner sensor, but
the toner supply operation is not controlled only by the toner density
detection result. The toner density control is performed according to
the process control data.
A small amount of carrier is replenished from the toner cartridge at the
same time that toner is replenished, and the developer in the develop-
ing unit is constantly refreshed by discharging the surplus.

12. Transfer section
1
3
2 1TURC_1
4 1TUD_CL
1TURC_2
7 DM_K
7
7 1TUD_K
1TC-K
7
2TC
FUM
REGS_R/PCS_R
10 REGS_F/PCS_F
12
1TC-Y PTC 2TURC
5 15
13
1TC-M
6
1TC-C
8
11 17
9 2TUD
2TPD
16
14

1TC (CMY) Primary transfer voltage (CMY) Flows the transfer current to the primary transfer belt, and transfers toner images from the
OPC drum to the transfer belt.
1TC (K) Primary transfer voltage (K) Flows the transfer current to the primary transfer belt, and transfers toner images from the
OPC drum to the transfer belt.
1TUD_CL Transfer mode sensor (CL) Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode
1TUD_K Transfer mode sensor (K) Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode
1TURC_1 Primary transfer separation clutch 1 Controls separation of the primary transfer unit
1TURC_2 Primary transfer separation clutch 2 Controls separation of the primary transfer unit
2TC Secondary transfer voltage Flows the transfer current to the primary transfer roller, and transfers toner images from the
primary transfer belt to paper.
2TPD Secondary transfer paper sensor Detects paper remained after recovery from paper JAM
2TUD Secondary transfer position sensor Detects the position (separation) of the secondary transfer unit
2TURC Secondary transfer separation clutch Controls separation of the secondary transfer unit
PTC PTC voltage High voltage for PTC
REGS_F/ Image registration / Density sensor (F) Detects image color shift and the toner patch density
PCS_F
REGS_R/ Image registration / Density sensor (R) Detects image color shift and the toner patch density
PCS_R

1 Cleaning blade Cleans residual toner on the primary transfer belt.

2 Cleaning sub blade Prevent toner from cleaner unit.
3 Primary transfer waste toner transport screw Transports waste toner in the primary transfer cleaning unit to the waste toner collection
section.
4 Cleaning roller Stabilization of the cleaning performance.
5 Primary transfer blade backup roller Stabilization of the contact state of a blade and roller.
6 Primary transfer belt Transfers toner images of the OPC drum onto the transfer belt.
7 Primary transfer roller (K, C, M, Y) Applies a high positive voltage to the primary transfer belt.
8 Primary transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt. A negative voltage is applied when in the transfer operation, and an
alternate high voltage (positive and negative) is applied when cleaning.
9 Pre-transfer roller Angle adjustment to the paper feed course of the transfer belt.
10 Primary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower drive
11 BK auxiliary roller Stabilization of the contact state of BK drum and transfer belt.
12 Y auxiliary roller Stabilization of the contact state of Y drum and transfer belt.
13 Separation pawl Separates paper after transfer.
14 PTC unit Reduces positive charges on the primary transfer belt, and improves the transfer efficiency.
15 PTC cleaner Clean the PTC wire.
16 Secondary transfer roller Connects the secondary transfer roller to the GND and flows the transfer current.
17 Discharge brush Discharges the secondary transfer roller after transfer to neutralize it.
(1) Transfer, cleaning operation
Transfer operation
Primary transfer C. C. C. C.
output
C. C. Secondary
transfer output
Remaining toner removed from the primary transfer belt is transported

to the waste toner collection section by the waste toner transport
screw.
Secondary transfer cleaning
A high positive voltage is applied to the primary transfer belt to attach
unnecessary toner to the primary transfer belt, and it is cleaned by the
primary transfer belt cleaning.
PTC output C. C. C. C.
A high positive voltage is applied to the primary transfer roller to trans-

fer toner images from the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt.
Secondary transfer output
Negative electronic charges are generated by the PTC unit, supplying
negative charges to toner.
This operation improves the transfer efficiency in the secondary trans-
fer.
Then a high negative voltage is applied to the primary transfer drive
roller, to transfer toner images from the primary transfer belt to paper.
Primary transfer cleaning operation
The primary transfer belt is cleaned mechanically by the cleaning
blade.

Primary transfer belt mode select
There are three kinds of modes of the transfer belt: the free position,
the color print mode, and the monochrome print mode.
Mode select is made with the developing motor, the mode select
clutches 1TURC1 and 1TURC2.
When the roller separation clutch is turned ON, the transfer cam
rotates, and the primary transfer link in conjunction with the cam is
shifted in the arrow direction, separating the transfer roller.
The color transfer rollers (C, M, and Y) and the black transfer roller (K)
perform an independent separation operation, and the mode state is
detected by the combination of the transfer mode detector 1TUD_CL
and 1TUD_K signals.
To select the rotating direction of the mode select cam, two mode
select clutches 1TURC1 and 1TURC2 are used. b. Functions and operations of the black image density sensor
The two mode select clutches are used to select the mode in the short- and the image registration sensor R (REGS R) provided on the
est time. rear frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the black
Transfer mode detector toner patch density is detected. When the image registration adjust-
Mode
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K ment is performed, the image registration shift on the rear frame side
Monochrome print mode ON ON is detected.
Color print mode OFF ON
Free position ON OFF
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
Monochrome print mode
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
Color print mode
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
Free position
(2) Image density detection and registration detection

operation
The image density detection and the image registration detection are
performed the sensors which are provided separately on the front
frame side and the rear frame side.
a. Functions and operations of the color image density sensor
and the image registration sensor F (REGS F) provided on the
front frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the color
toner patch density is detected. When the image registration adjust-
ment is performed, the image registration shift on the front frame side
is detected.
Before execution of the process control and the automatic registration
adjustment, the standard reflection plate is closed and the sensor sen-
sitivity adjustment is performed by using the standard reflection plate.

13. Waste toner collection section
CPFM
C1PFC
1 TNFD
TNFD2

C1PFC Vertical transport clutch Controls the transport roller (Paper feed tray1)
TNFD Waste toner sensor Detects full of waste toner
TNFD2 Waste Developer sensor Detects full of waste developer

1 Waste toner transport screw Transports waste toner to the waste toner box.
2 Waste toner box Collects waste toner.

B. Operational descriptions (3) Waste developer (BK) full detection operation
(1) Waste toner transport collection operation There is a first collecting part where the waste developer (BK) is
deposited inside the waste toner box and a second collecting part con-
Waste toner generated in the OPC drum and the primary transfer
nected by the slit hole at a height adjacent to the collecting part.
cleaning section is transported to the waste toner box by the waste
The waste developer discharged from the developing section in the
toner transport screw which is driven by the paper feed motor.
first collecting section drops and accumulates and flows over the slit
hole and flows into the second collecting section.
TNFD2 turns on by depositing a certain amount in the waste toner win-
dow cover attached to the wall surface of the second collection part
and then flowing in.
Waste developer (BK)
TNFD
TNFD2
(2) Waste toner full detection operation

The toner collection box section is provided with the waste toner full
detection mechanism. When the waste toner quantity in the toner col-
lection box becomes full, the rotation load of the waste toner transport
screw increases and the waste toner transport screw drive coupler is TNFD2 (OFF) TNFD2 (ON)
stranded to turn ON the waste toner full sensor -(TNFD).
(4) Near end detection and message

When one of the TNFD or TNFD2 is turn ON continuously for 3 sec, it
is judged as near end and the message is displayed to indicate that
the replacement of the toner collection box is approaching.
TNFD (OFF) TNFD (ON)

14. Fusing section
FUFM
PRM
FUM
POD1
TH_US2
TS US
8
9 5
10 TS UM
HLPCD
TH_UM
TH_US1
1
7 TH_LM
6
HL_UM/US 5 TS LM
5
4
HL_LM
2
3

HL_LM Heater lamp Heats the fusing roller
HL_UM/US Heater lamp Heats the fusing roller and the fusing belt
HLPCD Fusing pressure sensor Detects the fusing pressure state
POD1 Paper exit sensor 1 Detects paper transport from the fusing section
PRM Fusing pressure motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing roller pressure
TH_LM Fusing temperature sensor (main) Detects the surface temperature of the pressure roller
TH_UM Fusing temperature sensor (main) Detects the surface temperature at the center section of the fusing belt
TH_US1 Fusing temperature sensor (sub1) Detects the surface temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt
TH_US2 Fusing temperature sensor (sub2) Detects the surface temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt
TS LM Thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_LM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated
TS UM Thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated (center section)
TS US Thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated (edge section)

1 Heat roller Heats the fusing belt
2 Fusing roller The sponge layer of the roller forms a wide nip between the fusing belt and fusing roller
3 Pressure roller Heats the back surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper
4 Belt tension roller make tension of the fusing belt.
5 Discharge brush Discharges static electricity generated in the fusing section to the ground.
6 Separation plate Separates the whole surface of paper. (non-contact)
7 Fusing belt Heats the front surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
8 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the fusing section to the paper exit section and the switchback
section
9 Transport roller 5 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper
10 Pressure shaft Pressure fusing roller and pressure roller.

(1) Outline of operations Fusing roller (Pressure)
Fusing roller
This machine employs the fusing system by the belt.
The features of the belt-type fusing system are as follows: Fusing belt
1) Short warm-up time Fusing roller
2) Low power consumption (Heat)
3) Wide nip providing high fusing capability
(2) Heater lamp driving
The surface temperature of the fusing belt and the fusing roller (pres-
sure) detected by the fusing temperature sensor is sent to the PCU. If
the temperature is lower than the specified temperature, the heater
lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive cir-
cuit in the HL PWB.
When the power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned ON, the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp to light the lamp and heat the
fusing belt.
A thermostat is provided as a safety device against an abnormally high Fusing roller
temperature in the fusing belt and the fusing roller (pressure). Fusing roller
(Pressure)
When the thermostat is opened, the AC power supply to the heater
lamp is cut off.
The heater lamp is arranged to fusing roller (F1) and fusing roller (B).
In heater lamp (HL_UM/US), two lamps are integrated into one. Fusing belt
Heater lamp operations
Heater lamp Operation (4) Automatic pressure release system

Heater lamp Heats fusing roller (heat) and the fusing belt. Normally the upper and lower heat rollers are pressed. When, how-
(HL_UM) ever, the following conditions are satisfied, the pressure is released.
Heater lamp Heats fusing roller (heat) and the fusing belt. • When the machine shifts to the preheat mode.
(HL_US)
• When the machine shifts to the auto power shut off mode.
Heater lamp Heats fusing roller (pressure). Does not turn ON while
(HL_LM) heater lamp (HL_UM) and heater lamp (HL_LS) light • When the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF.
up. • When in the envelope mode.
• When a jam occurs.
(3) Fusing operation
Color toner (Y, M, C, and K) on paper is heated and pressed by the a. Pressure release operation
fusing belt, fusing roller, and fusing roller (pressure) to be fused on The fusing pressure control motor (PRM) rotates to turn ON the fusing
paper. pressure detector (HLPCD) (H level). When the specified time passes
Toner in the four layers on the paper is fused by heating from up and after turning ON the fusing pressure detector (HLPCD) (H level) by
down and both sides. rotation of the fusing pressure control roller (PRM), the pressure
release motor stops to complete the pressure release operation.
The fusing belt, fusing roller which is provided with the sponge layer,
and fusing roller (pressure) realize the following operations.
1) The nip amount is increased and the heat capacity to paper is
increased.
2) By pressing with the flexible roller, toner of many layers can be HLPCD
fused without being deformed.
3) An even pressure is applied to rough surface of toner (due to the
multi-layer composition).

b. Pressure release operation
When the end user makes some operations or when the machine
receives the Job signal, the fusing pressure control motor (PRM)
rotates reversely to drive the pressure release lever to the pressing
state.
When the specified time passes from turning OFF the fusing pressure
detector (HLPCD), the pressure release motor stops to complete the
pressing operation.
HLPCD
When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine, be sure to
turn OFF the power switch of the operation panel and check to confirm
that the LCD display goes off before turning OFF the main power
switch.
If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD lighted, the power
is cut off before completion of the pressure release operation. If this
state is kept for a long time, the fusing roller may be deformed.

15. DSPF section
(1) Paper feed section
SPFM
SPFC
SCOV
SPED1
SPPD1
SLUM
2 STUD 4
SPRDMD SPED2
STLD
1 SPLS1
SPWS
3
SPLS2

SCOV Upper cover sensor Detects open/close of the upper cover
SLUM Lift motor Lifts up and down the document feeder tray
SPED1 Document sensor 1 Detects document empty of the document feeder tray
SPED2 Document sensor 2 Detects document empty of the document feeder tray
SPFC Document feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of rollers in the document feed section
SPFM Transport motor Drives transport roller
SPLS1 Document length sensor 1 Detects document length of the document feeder tray
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Detects document pass
SPRDMD Document random sensor Detects document size in random document feed
SPWS Document width sensor Detects document width of the document feeder tray
STLD Tray lower limit sensor Detects lower limit of the document feeder tray
STUD Tray upper limit sensor Detects upper limit of the document feeder tray

2 Document feed roller Perform the document feed operation of documents
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double feed
4 Torque limiter A fixed level of resistance is always provided for rotation of the separation roller to prevent
double feed.
5 POT LED PWB Radiates light onto the document exit tray for notifying that document has been discharged

(2) Upper transport section
SPFM
STRC
4
STRRC
SPPD2
3 2

STRC Transport roller 2 clutch Controls ON/OFF of transport roller 2
STRRC Transport roller 1 clutch Controls ON/OFF of transport roller 1

1 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from paper feed roller to transport roller 2
2 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides transport power of the
transport roller to document
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from transport roller to registration roller
4 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of
the transport roller to document

(3) Lower transport section
SPFM
SRRC
SPPD3
2
SPPD5
SPPD4 3
1
5
SOCD
SLCOV

SLCOV Lower cover sensor Detects open/close of the lower cover
SOCD SPF sensor Detects open/close of the SPF unit
SRRC Registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of registration roller

1 Registration roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport
2 Registration roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the
registration roller to document
3 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the No.1 scan section to the transport roller 4
4 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the
5 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 3 to the document exit roller
6 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the

(4) Optical section

1 Mirror Sends the document image to the lens.
2 Lens Reduces the document image (light) and reflects it onto the CCD.
3 CCD PWB Scans document images and perform A/D conversion of scanning signal
4 LED PWB Radiates light onto document for the CCD to scan document image

(5) Paper exit section
SPOM
SPOD
SPOTD

SPOD Document exit sensor Detects document exit
SPOM Document exit motor Drives document exit roller
SPOTD Document exit tray sensor Detects document empty of the document exit tray

1 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document
2 Document exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the document exit roller and provides transport power of
the document exit roller to document

(1) Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document size is detected by the DSPF document width sensor
(SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF document
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from
the document width and the document length as shown in the table
below.
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on the
document tray, the largest size is detected.
Document length sensor

Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2

16. RSPF section
(1) Paper feed section
SCOV
SPPD2 SPUM
SPPD1
1
SPED
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2

SCOV Cover sensor Detects open/close of the cover
SPED Document sensor Detects document empty of the document feeder tray
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Detects document feed and document size in random paper feed
SPUM Document feed motor Drives document feed roller
SPWS Document width sensor Detects document width of the document feeder tray

2 Document feed roller Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration
roller and this roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan
3 Separation roller Separates a document to prevent double-feeding

(2) Transport/paper exit section
SPFM
SRRC
SPRS
SPPD3
4 SPPD4
STMPS
SOCD
6
5
8
7

SOCD SPF sensor Detects open/close of the SPF unit
SPPD4 Document pass sensor 4 Detects document exit and switchback
SPRS Document exit roller solenoid Controls ON/OFF of document exit roller
SRRC Registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of registration roller
STMPS Stamp solenoid Drives the finish stamp

1 Registration roller (Drive) Transports a document to the transport roller 1 / Controls the transport timing of the document
and adjusts the document scanning timing
2 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document
3 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning
section
4 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
5 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit
roller
6 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
7 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller
when scanning the back surface
8 Paper exit roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the
paper exit roller to the document

(1) Document size detection The paper exit roller (drive pulley) is separated by the paper exit roller
Size detection on the document tray pressure control solenoid.
The document width is detected with the RSPF document width sen- When the read edge of the document passes the scanning section, the
sor (SPWS), and the document length is detected with the RSPF doc- both rollers are brought into close contact to supply the power for
ument length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged paper exit.
from the document width and the document length according to the
table below. When documents of different sizes are mixed and set on 1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
the document tray, the largest document size is detected.
Document length sensor

Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)
B5R ON OFF
The pick-up roller descends. (The paper feed motor is booted.)
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON (The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF 3) Registration operation (1st sheet)
A4 OFF OFF (Registration clutch ON)
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF (When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
8.5" x 13" ON ON clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
RSPF unit
4) Scanning start (1st sheet)
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
5) Paper feed start (2nd sheet)
(2) RSPF paper feed and transport operations

a. Paper feed operation
The paper feed motor is turned ON and the power of the paper feed
motor is transmitted to the pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
The pickup roller descends to pickup the top document and feed it to 6) Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Registration operation (2nd sheet)
the paper feed roller. (When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
The paper feed roller feeds a document to the transport section. clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
At that time, the document is separated by the separation roller to pre-
vent double-feeding.
b. Single face scanning
The lead edge of the fed document is aligned (registration) by the reg-
istration roller, and passed through transport roller 1 to the document
scanning section, where images are scanned.
Then the document is passed through transport roller 2 to the paper
exit roller.
The rollers (the registration roller, transport rollers 1 and 2, the paper
exit roller) in the transport section are driven by the transport motor.

7) Scanning start (2nd sheet) During the time from when the document rear edge passes the scan-
ning section to when it is switch backed and send to the registration
roller section, the paper exit roller pressure release solenoid is turned
OFF to keep the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle)
in contact.
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)

Pick-up roller descending
9) Scanning complete (2nd sheet)
3) Registration operation (1st sheet, front surface)
10) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)

4) Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)
11) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed motor is rotated 5) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is
reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup roller.) pressed. (Solenoid ON)
6) After stopping the operation, reversing is started.

c. Duplex scanning
Images on the document surface are scanned, and detection of the
rear edge of the document by sensor SPPD3 triggers the following.
That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the reverse gate,
the transport motor is reversed.
Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to switch-
back the document, returning it to the registration roller section and
aligning (registration) the document. 7) After reversing, registration operation is executed.
Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the document
to the scanning section, scanning images on the back surface.
To reset the page order of the documents, the following operations are
made which are triggered by the detection of the rear edge of the doc-
ument. That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the
reverse gate, the transport motor is reversed.
Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to switch-
back the document, returning it to the registration roller section and 8) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-
aligning (registration) the document. sure is released.
Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the document
to the paper exit section and discharge it.
When a duplex document is scanned, the document lead edge section
and the rear edge section intersect. At that timing, the paper exit roller
pressure release solenoid is turned ON to make a gap between the
paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle).

9) Scanning start (First sheet, back surface) 16) After discharge (First sheet), the reverse follower roller pressure
is released.
10) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is

pressed.
d. Stamp operation
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
11) After stopping the operation, reversing is started. 2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)
Pick-up roller descending (The paper feed motor is booted.)
(The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)
12) After reversing, registration operation is executed.
3) Registration operation (1st sheet)

(Registration clutch ON)
(When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
13) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-
sure is released.
4) Scanning start (1st sheet)
14) Scanning start (Second sheet)
5) Scanning complete (1st sheet)
15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller is
pressed.
6) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (1st sheet)

(Stamp solenoid ON)

7) Paper exit start (1st sheet)/Preliminary paper feed start (2nd
sheet)
8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
9) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (2nd sheet)

(Stamp solenoid ON)
10) Paper exit start (2nd sheet)
11) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
12) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed motor is rotated
reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup roller.)

17. Fan and filter
The machine is provided with the following fan to discharge air from the process section and cool the fusing section and the power unit.

PSFM1 Power supply fan 1 Cools the power supply unit
The flow of air is as shown in the figure below.
PSFM1
POFM
FUFM
PROFM1 1
PROFM2
The machine is provided with the following filter to remove ozone generated in the process section.
Filter process fan motor 1 produces an air flow to generate a difference in the air pressure between inside outside of the developing unit, preventing
toner from splashing from the open port of the developing unit.
The toner filter prevents toner from leaking from the slit caused by this difference in air pressure.

1 Toner filter Prevents toner splash
2 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section

1.
MX-4071
563) 81,7
633' 63:6 63/6 6356
(1) MX-xx51
633' 63(' 63/6 63)0
633' 62&' 655& 6380

237,21
633' 6&29
67036
Block diagram
563) '5,9(5 3:%

A. System block diagram
23(5$7,21 81,7
0$,1 '5,9( 81,7
728&+ /&'
785&B
3$1(/
'/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B<
'0B. 785&B
'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B. 81,7 '9B. 81,7
+20( .(< /9'6
3:% 3:% 237,21
'+3'B. '+3'B&/ '0B&/ 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B<
3:55 )URQW 86% ,& &$5'
3:% 3:% 5HDGHU
'(5,9(5< 81,7 )86(5 81,7
237,21
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
6+326 32' 710B. 710B& 710B0 710B<

86% &1 :LUH/HVV
260 32' 7(' 7+B80 32' 7&('B. 7&('B& 7&('B0 7&('B< )URQW /(' 3:% /$1 3:%
ͤ௙ྥࡅ࡟ࡼࡾ67'237
721(5B. 81,7 721(5B& 81,7 721(5B0 81,7 721(5B< 81,7 3:%
+/3&' 7)' 7+B86 +/B80
&580B. &580B& &580B0 &580B<
350 )80 32)0 7+B/0 +/B86
)8)0 7+B68% +/B/0
32*6
237,21
0&.0&&0< &&' 3:% 0+36
3$3(5 3$66 81,7
3&8 3:% 256B/('
'&/+3
5(*,67 6(1625 81,7
/(' 3:% 256B3'
0& 3:%
320 +3)& '6:B5 352)0 5(*6B) 3'26 2&6:
/(' '5,9(5
3&6B) $XGLR ͤ-DSDQ FSP RQO\
3:%
550 33' '6:B) 352)0 3'26 3'370 7&7& 6SHDNHU
+/ 3:%
5(*6B5 237,21
0,0
3)0 78'B. 71)' 36)0 3&6B5 3'33' 3'33'
237,21
0)3& 3:% 730 3:%
7& 3:%
6&8
6%0 78'B&/ 71)' 7+ +8' 3DSHU 3DVV ,) 3:% :+B6&1
3,& +''
237,21
1)& &$5'
5,*+7 '225 81,7 237,21 5HDGHU
237,21 237,21 ͤ-DSDQ RQO\
7ULSOH &$66(77( '(6.
MX-4071 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 1

5' ,) 3:%
QG &$66(77(
)$;
&2,1
),1,6+(5
9(1'(5 /$1 237,21
237,21 &3)' &3)0 &3)' &66
/LQHV
32' $'80 . )LQLVKHU
)$;
Service Manual
&/8' &66 &/8' &63' 237,21

. 6DGGOH )LQLVKHU
7)' $'80 $X W R 6 L ] H 237,21 ͤ-DSDQ RQO\
. )LQLVKHU
&3(' 'H WHF W &3(' &3)& . 6DGGOH )LQLVKHU
/&& )$;
3573' $'8*6 ,QQHU )LQLVKHU
7&
&3)3' &38& /68 81,7
'6:B$'8 :+B/&&
237,21 ͤ-DSDQ㸸67' %' 3:%
73' '6:B& '6:B& &/80
'& 36 /68 3:%
$33' :+B&66
/68B7+
78' &63'
$33' 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 /68B7+
785& &3)&
&38& :+ 3:%
03/' 03)6 '(6. :+B'(6.
3*0
&/80
03:6 237,21
:+6: ͤ-DSDQ㸸67'
03)' 038&
06:
$& 3:%
03('
0$18$/ 3$3(5 )((' 81,7
$& ,1
563) 81,7
633' 63:6 63/6 6356

(2) MX-xx61
633' 63(' 63/6 63)0
633' 62&' 655& 6380

237,21
633' 6&29
67036
563) '5,9(5 3:%
23(5$7,21 81,7
0$,1 '5,9( 81,7
/&' 728&+
785&B 3$1(/
'/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B<
'0B. 785&B 1)& +20( .(<
'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B. 81,7 '9B. 81,7
/9'6
3:% 3:%
'+3'B. '+3'B&/ '0B&/ 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B<
237,21
3:55
3:% )URQW 86% ,& &$5'
3:% 5HDGHU
'(5,9(5< 81,7 )86(5 81,7
6+326 32' 710B. 710B& 710B0 710B< 237,21
86% &1 :LUH/HVV
260 32' 7(' 7+B80 32' 7&('B. 7&('B& 7&('B0 7&('B< )URQW /(' 3:% /$1 3:%
ͤ௙ྥࡅ࡟ࡼࡾ67'237
721(5B. 81,7 721(5B& 81,7 721(5B0 81,7 721(5B< 81,7 3:%
+/3&' 7)' 7+B86 +/B80
&580B. &580B& &580B0 &580B<
3,5 .(<%2$5' .(<
350 )80 32)0 7+B/0 +/B86 3:% 3:% %2$5'
ͤ$PHULFD(XURSH$XVWUDULD RQO\
)8)0 7+B68% +/B/0
32*6
237,21
0&.0&&0< &&' 3:% 0+36
3$3(5 3$66 81,7
3&8 3:% 256B/('
'&/+3
5(*,67 6(1625 81,7
/(' 3:% 256B3'
0& 3:%
320 +3)& '6:B5 352)0 5(*6B) 3'26 2&6:
/(' '5,9(5
3:%
550 33' '6:B) 352)0 3'26 3'370 7&7& 6SHDNHU
+/ 3:%
5(*6B5 237,21
0,0
3)0 78'B. 71)' 36)0 3&6B5 3'33' 3'33'
237,21
0)3& 3:% 730 3:%
7& 3:%
6&8
6%0 78'B&/ 71)' 7+ +8' 3DSHU 3DVV ,) 3:% :+B6&1
3,& +''
237,21
1)& &$5'
5,*+7 '225 81,7 237,21 5HDGHU
237,21 237,21 ͤ-DSDQ RQO\
7ULSOH &$66(77( '(6.

5' ,) 3:%
QG &$66(77(
)$;
&2,1
),1,6+(5
9(1'(5 /$1 237,21
237,21 &3)' &3)0 &3)' &66
/LQHV
32' $'80 . )LQLVKHU
)$;
&/8' &66 &/8' &63' 237,21
. 6DGGOH )LQLVKHU
7)' $'80 $X W R 6 L ] H 237,21 ͤ-DSDQ RQO\
. )LQLVKHU
/&& )$;
7&
&3)3' &38& /68 81,7
'6:B$'8 :+B/&&
237,21 ͤ-DSDQ㸸67' %' 3:%
73' '6:B& &63' '6:B& &/80
'& 36 /68 3:%
$33' :+B&66
/68B7+
78' &3)&
$33' 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 /68B7+
785& &38&
&/80 :+ 3:%
03/' 03)6 '(6. :+B'(6.
3*0
03:6
237,21
:+6: ͤ-DSDQ㸸67'
03)' 038&
06:
$& 3:%
03('
0$18$/ 3$3(5 )((' 81,7
$& ,1
'63) 81,7
633' 62&' 678' 63:6 63))$1 6/80 63)0

(3) MX-xx71
633' 6/&29 67/' 635'0' 63)& 6320 /(' 3:%

237,21
633' 63(' 63/6 6327' 675& &&' 3:%
67036
633' 63(' 63/6 6755& 327 /(' 3:%
633' 632' 6&29 655&

'63)FQW 3:%
23(5$7,21 81,7
0$,1 '5,9( 81,7
/&' 728&+
785&B 3$1(/
'/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B<
'0B. 785&B 1)& +20( .(<
'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B. 81,7 '9B. 81,7
/9'6
3:% 3:%
'+3'B. '+3'B&/ '0B&/ 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B<
237,21
3:55
3:% )URQW 86% ,& &$5'
3:% 5HDGHU
'(5,9(5< 81,7 )86(5 81,7
6+326 32' 710B. 710B& 710B0 710B< 237,21
86% &1 :LUH/HVV
260 32' 7(' 7+B80 32' 7&('B. 7&('B& 7&('B0 7&('B< )URQW /(' 3:% /$1 3:%
ͤ௙ྥࡅ࡟ࡼࡾ67'237
721(5B. 81,7 721(5B& 81,7 721(5B0 81,7 721(5B< 81,7 3:%
+/3&' 7)' 7+B86 +/B80
&580B. &580B& &580B0 &580B<
3,5 .(<%2$5' .(<
350 )80 32)0 7+B/0 +/B86 3:% 3:% %2$5'
ͤ$PHULFD(XURSH$XVWUDULD RQO\
)8)0 7+B68% +/B/0
32*6
237,21
0&.0&&0< &&' 3:% 0+36
3$3(5 3$66 81,7
3&8 3:% 256B/('
'&/+3
5(*,67 6(1625 81,7
/(' 3:% 256B3'
0& 3:%
320 +3)& '6:B5 352)0 5(*6B) 3'26 2&6:
/(' '5,9(5
3:%
550 33' '6:B) 352)0 3'26 3'370 7&7& 6SHDNHU
+/ 3:%
5(*6B5 237,21
0,0
3)0 78'B. 71)' 36)0 3&6B5 3'33' 3'33'
237,21
0)3& 3:% 730 3:%
7& 3:%
6&8
6%0 78'B&/ 71)' 7+ +8' 3DSHU 3DVV ,) 3:% :+B6&1
3,& +''
237,21
1)& &$5'
5,*+7 '225 81,7 237,21 5HDGHU
237,21 237,21 ͤ-DSDQ RQO\
7ULSOH &$66(77( '(6.

5' ,) 3:%
QG &$66(77(
)$;
&2,1
),1,6+(5
9(1'(5 /$1 237,21
237,21 &3)' &3)0 &3)' &66
/LQHV
32' $'80 . )LQLVKHU
)$;
&/8' &66 &/8' &63' 237,21
. 6DGGOH )LQLVKHU
7)' $'80 $X W R 6 L ] H 237,21 ͤ-DSDQ RQO\
. )LQLVKHU
/&& )$;
7&
&3)3' &38& /68 81,7
'6:B$'8 :+B/&&
237,21 ͤ-DSDQ㸸67' %' 3:%
73' '6:B& '6:B& &/80
'& 36 /68 3:%
$33' :+B&66
/68B7+
78' &63'
$33' 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 /68B7+
785& &3)&
&38& :+ 3:%
03/' 03)6 '(6. :+B'(6.
3*0
&/80
03:6
237,21
:+6: ͤ-DSDQ㸸67'
03)' 038&
06:
$& 3:%
03('
0$18$/ 3$3(5 )((' 81,7
$& ,1
%X]]HU
32:(5B.(<
:8B.(< +XPDQ
+20(B.(< 'HWHFW
/&' :8B/(' VHQVRU
+''
%OXH/(' ૮଍/$1 86%+RVW .H\ERDUG
:8B.(< 7RXFK +20(/(' 3KRHQL[67' ,&&$5' 6SHDNHU
*% 3DQHO 7<3($&1 3KRHQL[
+20(B.(< 3DQHO 32:(5B/(' 5($'(5 ঩ম峘峩
ல਱峕峲峴 )URQW ৪௎ൻ
/9'6 +20(B/(' 67$7(B5('B/(' 1)&7DJ
67$7(B*5((1B/(' 67'237
3KRHQL[67'
'63)&1 563)&1
+'6 DXGLR&1 3KRHQL[ *ULIILQ

6$7$&1 3DQHO&1 )5217,)/('&1 86%&1 86%&1
1)&&1 '63)PRGHO 3KRHQL[563)PRGHO &&'&1
6OLGH
6: ''52Q%RDUG
*%
6$7$ 7RXFK
JHQ 3DQHO
B. SCN MFP PWB
''5 &RQWUROOHU
)3'/,1. ''50%
5FYELW
3KRHQL[')3)PRGHO
$)(
/9'6
3KRHQL[
‫ق‬ELW
86%+RVW
86%+RVW
86%+RVW
86%+RVW
/9'6/&'5*%ELW

''5 86%,)
6$7$,) '63)PRGHO
,) +RVW
&18SGDWH
86%+XE $XGLR
86% ,& ''5
/$1-$&. )3'/,1.
/&'&,)
5- 7UDQVPLWWHU
*RUJRQ
*ESV *3,2
6FDQ'DWD $6,&
86%+RVW
ELW
(WKHU3+< *0,, (WKHU0$& 6&1,) %866: )3'/,1.
* 5HFHLYHU
* ELW
86%'HYLFH )3'/,1. 6(/B287
86% 0ESV 86%,) 7UDQVPLWWHU 6(/B$‫&ع‬ $XGLWRU
'HYLFH /9'6/68
'HYLFH 5HXV /68,) &1
7<3(%&1 /9'6
8$57FK
$6,& 5HFHLYHU
8$57 /9'6/68&/. 6<1&
FK
,17 ,17
Q)$;B3,&B,17 FK 32)
,17 0RWRU
FK 0RWRU
6',) 'ULYHU 'ULYHU
,17
:DNH8S 6HULDO)ODVK 86%+XE &1
,17 0ELW 86%
FK ,&FK ,&FK SUJRUDP
&RQWUROOHU 57& %DWWHU\
&RQWUROOHU
,&
,17 .+]
FK ,&FK
&RQWUROOHU
&3/'
(WKHU0$& 8$57 3&,H,) 3&,H,) /RFDO%XV 3,&
4XDG63,
* FK ODQH ODQH ,)
/RFDO%XV
/('
'ULYHU
Q)$;B3,&B,17
&1
8$57 8$57
6HULDO&1 8$57FK &RQWUROO
&38
5,&
0+3
5; &1
&15,&
3&,H[ 8$57 0%
&
JHQ 'HEXJ
*ESV
8$57FK
3'
6HULDO&1 &1
9HQGHU
8$57
SLQ',3
62&.(7
1)&5: 86% ,&
QG/$1 +RVW
((3520
2SW 7<3($&1
NE
'6.
7303:%
86%+RVW 86%+RVW ,& ,& SLQ',3
3&,H 86% 86% ,,& ,,& 62&.(7

ODQH 730&1
((3520
8$57
'HEXJ
NE
/68&1
(WKHU0$& 6LQJOH63,
* 0+]
6HULDO)ODVK
463, 0ELW
SUJRUDP
,&
,,&
)$; 8$57
)$; ,&
&1
[*HQ
1;3/6$ ,,&
&RUWH[$ 8$57
)$; 8$57 &RQWUROO
)$;2SW *3,2
QG FRUH*+]
&1 3&8&1
)$; 8$57 '8$57
)$;2SW UG 8$57 8$57
঩ম &1 'HEXJ
'8$57
8$57
86% '8$57
'HYLFH 8$57
86%
'8$57 6HULDO&1
0HPRU\ 8$57 'HEXJ
H6'+& &RQWUROOHU
+60+] ''5
P6$7$&1
''5RQ%RDUG
*%
H00&
*%
32:(5&1
2SWLRQ
C. PCU PWB
Wh
yƚĂů
Zϱ&ϱϲϱϭ& ůƵƐŚůĞƐƐDŽƚŽƌŽŶƚƌŽů
ϭϰ͘ϳϰϱϲD,ǌ ;KƵƚĞƌZŽƚĞƌƚǇƉĞͿ
Dͺ< ͬDͺ>ͬ&hD
/ŶƚĞƌŶĂůͲh^
^^Ͳ/ ĂƚĂh^΀ϳ͗Ϭ΁ ϯͲǁŝƌĞĚ

zϮϱϴϭϭ
ǆƚĞƌŶĂůͲh^ Wŝǆŝŝ DWt Dͺ<ͬDͺDz
^ĞƌŝĂů
ŽŶƚƌŽůůĞƌ ĚĚƌĞƐƐh^΀ϵ͗Ϭ΁
ĨŽƌůĂƐƐͲKŶůǇ
ǆƚĞƌŶĂůͲh^ŝƐ >< >ŽĂĚŽŶƚƌŽůKƵƚƉƵƚ
ŽŝŶsĞŶĚŽƌ;KƉƚŝŽŶͿ
ZĞƐĞƚ / /ƐŽůĂƚĞĚ ĨƌŽŵ
/ŶƚĞƌŶĂůͲh^
ůƵƐŚůĞƐƐDŽƚŽƌŽŶƚƌŽů
;KƵƚĞƌZŽƚĞƌƚǇƉĞͿ
dDͬW&D
WZKD /Ϯh^
ϭϮϴŬďŝƚ
ůƵƐŚůĞƐƐDŽƚŽƌŽŶƚƌŽů
;/ŶŶĞƌZŽƚĞƌƚǇƉĞͿ
hDϭ ͬhDϮ ͬ^Dͬ
WŽǁĞƌ &t WKDͬW&DͬZZD
^ƵƉƉůǇ
/ͬK W>ϭ >ŽĂĚŽŶƚƌŽůKƵƚƉƵƚ

D&W hZd ϭdhZͺϭͬϭdhZͺϮͬϭWhͬϭW&ͬ,W&
;^hͬW/Ϳ ͬϮdhZͬDWh^ͬDWhͬh'^ͬϮWhͬ
ϮW&ͬWh^ϮͬWK'^
&ůĂƐŚ
>^h ^ĞƌŝĂů /ͬ& ϭϲDďŝƚ ^ĞŶƐŽƌ/ŶƉƵƚ
,Wͺ<ͬ,Wͺͬ,WͺDͬ,Wͺzͬ
ϭ^^ϭͬϭ^^Ϯͬϭ^^ϯͬϭ^^ϰ
WK^ϭͬWK^ϮͬdE&Ϯ
^ZD
ϮDďŝƚ ;DhyͿ
> hZd Ϯ^^ϭͬϮ^^ϮͬϮ^^ϯͬϮ^^ϰͬ
sdzW^>ͺ<ͬsdzW^>ͺͬ
sdzW^>ͺDͬsdzW^>ͺz
&/E/^,Z hZd WDϮ^/ &EDŽƚŽƌŽŶƚƌŽů

&h&DͬWK&DϮͬW^&D
^ƚĞƉƉŝŶŐDŽƚŽƌŽŶƚƌŽů
dEDͺ<ͬdEDͺͬdEDͺDͬdEDͺzͬWZDͬ
K^DͬWWdD
^< hZd
ƌƵƐŚDŽƚŽƌ ŽŶƚƌŽů
ϭ>hDͬϮ>hD
&ƵƐĞƌhŶŝƚ ;,>Ϳ
ŶĂůŽŐ/ŶƉƵƚϭ ,>ͺhDͬ,>ͺh^ͬ,>ͺ>D
Z'^ͺ&ͬZ'^ͺZͬW^ͺ&ͬW^ͺZͬ
d,ͺhDͬd,ͺhDͺ^ͬd,ͺhDͺͬd,ͺh^ͬ E
d,ͺ>Dͬd,ͺhDϮͬd,ͺ^hϮͬ
d,ͺ^hϮͲϮͺ^ͬd,ͺ^hϮͲϮͺͬDWt^ ƌƵŵ>ĂŵƉ
>ͺ<ͬ>ͺͬ>ͺDͬ>ͺz
ŶĂůŽŐ/ŶƉƵƚϮ /Ϯh^ ZhD

d,ͺ>ͬ,hͺ>ͬd,ϭͺ>^hͬd,Ϯͺ>^hͬ ŶĂůŽŐ^t ZhDͺ<ͬZhDͺͬZhDͺDͬ
d^ͺ<ͬd^ͺͬd^ͺDͬd^ͺz E ZhDͺz
ϯͲtŝƌĞĚ
dWt ϭdͬϮd
^ĞƌŝĂů
ŶĂůŽŐ/ŶƉƵƚϯ
sdzWͺ<ͬsdzWͺͬsdzWͺDͬsdzWͺzͬ ŶĂůŽŐ^t
>KWEͺ<ͬ>KWEͺͬ>KWEͺDͬ E ^ĞŶƐŽƌ/ŶƉƵƚ
>KWEͺz WZdWͬdE&ͬϭWͬϮWͬϭ^Wͬ
Ϯ^Wͬ^tͺ&ͬ^tͺ&hͬ^tͺϭͬ
^tͺϮͬ^tͺZͬ,>WͬDW>ϭͬDW
ͬd&Ϯͬd&ϯͬdϰͬ>WWϭͬWWϮͬ
WWϭͬWWϮͬ^,WK^ͬϭ>hͬϮ>hͬ
ϮdWͬϮdhͬ,Wͺ<ͬ,Wͺ>ͬϭW&W
ͬϮW&WͬϭW&ͬDW&ͬϮW&ͬWKϭͬ
ŶĂůŽŐKƵƚƉƵƚ WKϮͬWKϯͬWKϰͬϭdhͺ<ͬϭdhͺ>ͬ
d^'ͺ<ͬd^'ͺͬd^'ͺDͬd^'ͺzͬ ͬ WWWϭͬWWWϮͬ>,W
Z'^ͺ&ͺ>ͬZ'^ͺZͺ> ŽŶǀĞƌƚĞƌ

D. DSPF/RSPF
'63)PRGHO
㻼㼍㼓㼑
㻰㻿㻼㻲㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥
㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻾㻳㻮
㻭㻲㻱㼐㼍㼠㼍㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤
㻟㻌㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻯㻯㻰㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼄
㻛㼀㻳㻟㻡㼎㼕㼠
㻔㻳㻻㻾㻳㻻㻺㻕㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠
㻯㻸㻷
㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻯㻼㼁
㻾㼄㻢㻡㻝㻔㻞㻹㻮㻕㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻭㻲㻱㻕㻌㻝㻚㻤㼂㻸㻰㻻㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻝㻞㼂
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻝㻜㼂㻸㻰㻻
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻝㻞㼂
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻡㻚㻟㼂㻸㻰㻻
㻿㻼㻻㼀㻰
㼀㻾㻭㼅㻌㻡㼂
㼀㻾㻭㼅㻌㻸㻱㻰㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂㻸㻰㻻
㻸㻱㻰㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔㻔㼀㼛㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻕㻌㻝㻚㻞㼂㻸㻰㻻
㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻡㼂
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻘㻌㻼㼍㼓㼑㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻕㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂㻰㻯㻰㻯 563)PRGHO
㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿
㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻸㻱㻰㻯㻸㻷㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻸㻱㻰
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞

㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻔㼒㼛㼞㻌㻼㼍㼓㼑㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻕㻌㻯㻸㻷
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞㻯㻼㼁㻌㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞㻯㻸㻷
㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻔㻝㻥㻚㻢㻢㻜㻤㻹㻴㼦㻕㻾㻿㻼㻲㻙㼁㻺
㻰㻿㻼㻲㻌㻲㻭㻺㻰㻿㻼㻲㻲㻭㻺㻔㼒㼛㼞㻌㻌㼞㼑㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼏㼑㻕㻌
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻿㻯㻺㻙㻹㻲㻼㻯㻌㻌㻌㻼㼃㻮
E. LSU
(1) MX-xx51
㻵㻞㻯
㻿㻯㻸㻛㻿㻰㻭
㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿㻌㻱㻱㻼㻙
㻾㻻㻹
䠄㻸㻰㻰䠅
㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻞㼀㻴㻞㻌㻸㻿㼁
㻭㻹㻼㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻞
㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㼀㻴㻌㻸㻿㼁
㻭㻹㻼㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌
㻵㻰㼇㻜㻦㻜㼉
㻼㻯㼁
㻸㻰
㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㻯㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻼㼃㻮
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻼㻳㻹㼋㻯㻷
㻼㻳㻹㼋㻿㼀㻭㻾㼀
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚䠄㻼㻳㻹㼋㻮㻾㻭㻷㻱䠅㻟
㻻㻚㻯㻚㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻼㻳㻹㼋㻸㻻㻯㻷㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻼㻯㼁㼋㼀㻾㻳
㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞
㻿㻯㻷
㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀
㼑㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀
㻟
㻲㻭㻺㼋㻼㼃㻹
㻲㻭㻺㻻㻚㻯㻚㻻㻚㻯㻚
㻸㻿㼁
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻲㻭㻺㻿㼀㻭㻮㻸㻱㻲㻭㻺
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘
㻿㻯㻸㻵㻞㻯㻌
㻿㻰㻭
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㼃㻼㻱㻱㻼㻙
㻯㻻㻹㼋㻲㻵㻲㻻㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿㻾㻻㻹
㻔㻾㼍㼏㼛㼛㼚㻕
㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯㼋㻱㻺㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯
㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻯㻕
㻾㻿㼀
㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹㼋㻱㻺㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻹㻕
㻔㻾㼍㼏㼛㼛㼚㻕㻞㼄㻱㻾㻾㻝㻛㻞
㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭㼋㻱㻺㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭
㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻭㻕㻞㼂㻸㻰㻱㻾㻾㻝㻛㻞
㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞㻿㼅㻿㻯㻸㻷㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘

㻿㻛㻿㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲
㻔㻿㼅㻿㻯㻸㻷㻕
㻱㻯㻸㻷㼋㻸㻿㼁㻱㻯㻸㻷
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻛㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㼋㻸㻿㼁㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㼄㻭㻼㻯

㻌
㻠㼂㻿㼅㻺㻯㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㼂㻿㼅㻺㻯㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅
䠄㻭㻼㻯
㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚㻛㻱㻺㻮䠅
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚㻮㻰
㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻮㻰
㻱㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹㻲㻼㻱㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹㻲㻼㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯㼋㻱㻺
㻲㻼㻰㻙㻸㻵㻺㻷㻛㻾㼑㼏㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㼋㻹㻲㻼㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㼋㻹㻲㻼㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹㼋㻱㻺

㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭㼋㻱㻺
㻹㻲㻼㻯
㻟㻡㻦㻡㼏㼔㻭㻤㻰㼀㼋㻷㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㻷
㻟㻡㻦㻡㼏㼔㻮㻤㻰㼀㼋㻹㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㻹
㻟㻡㻦㻡㼏㼔㻯㻤㻰㼀㼋㻯㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㻯
㻟㻡㻦㻡㼏㼔㻰㻤㻞
㻰㼀㼋㼅㻗㻙
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㼅
9,'(2,)B$&7

(2) MX-xx61/xx71
㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻞㼀㻴㻞㻌㻸㻿㼁
㻭㻹㻼㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼕㼠㼛㼞㻞
㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻝㼀㻴㻝㻌㻸㻿㼁
㻭㻹㻼㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼕㼠㼛㼞㻝
㻿㻯㻸㻷㻛㼀㼄㻰㻛㻾㼄㻰㻟
㻹㼕㼏㼞㼛㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㻮㼁㻿㻹㼕㼏㼞㼛㼃㼕㼞㼑
㻯㻿㻌㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㻠㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㼔㼕㼜㻌㼟㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㻔㻸㻰㻰㻕
㻯㻿㻌㻱㻱㻼㻙㻾㻻㻹㻌㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㻠㽢㻠
㻯㼔㼕㼜㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻔㻱㻱㻼㻙㻾㻻㻹㻕
㻵㻰㼇㻜㻦㻝㼉
㻼㻯㼁㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠
㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㻯
㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻼㻳㻹㼋㻯㻷
㻵㻾㻽㻝
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㻼㻳㻹㼋㻿㼀㻭㻾㼀
㻭㻿㻵㻯㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚䠄㻼㻳㻹㼋㻮㻾㻭㻷㻱䠅㻟
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻻㻚㻯㻚
㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲㻼㻳㻹㼋㻸㻻㻯㻷
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻼㻯㼁㼋㼀㻾㻳
㻿㻯㻷㼑㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㻟㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀㻲㻭㻺㼋㻼㼃㻹
㻲㻭㻺㻻㻚㻯㻚㻻㻚㻯㻚㻸㻿㼁
㻭㻿㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻲㻭㻺㻿㼀㻭㻮㻸㻱㻲㻭㻺
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻿㻯㻸
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀㻿㻰㻭
㼃㻼㻵㻞㻯
㻯㻻㻹㼋㻲㻵㻲㻻㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿
㻭㻿㻵㻯㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝
㻿㼅㻿㻯㻸㻷㻝
㻳㻭㻵㻺㻌㻲㻵㼄
㻹㻿㻱㼀㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㻠
㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯㻻㻚㻯㻚
㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞
㻔㻿㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙㻌㻯㻸㻷㻕
㻿㻛㻿
6<6&/.
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻞
㻭㻿㻵㻯㻼㻠㼋㻷㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘
㻼㻟㼋㻷㻔㼃㻭㻵㼀㻕
㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲
㻼㻠㼋㻯㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻼㻟㼋㻯㻔㼃㻭㻵㼀㻕㻠
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻝
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻞㼚㼚㻏㻼㻜
㻔㻱㻯㻸㻷㼋㻸㻿㼁㻕㻼㻜㻔㻿㻱㻸㻕㻠
㻔㻱㻯㻸㻷㻕
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻟
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻛㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㼋㻸㻿㼁 +6<1&
㼚㼚㻏㻼㻜㼋㻭㻰㻶
96<1&B.&
㻠㼂㻿㼅㻺㻯㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㼚㻼㻜㼋㻸
㻭㻿㻵㻯㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
96<1&B0< 㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝䠄㻭㻼㻯㼚㼚㻏㻼㻝㻠
㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚㻏㻼㻝㻔㻯㻴㻕
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚㻛㻱㻺㻮䠅㼚㻼㻝㼋㻸
9,'(2,)B$&7
㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㼚㼚㻏㻼㻞㻠
㻏㻼㻞㻔㻿㻴㻕
㼂㻵㻰㻱㻻㻌㻵㻛㻲㻌㻯㻷 (&/. 㼚㻼㻞㼋㻸
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㻠
+6<1& 㻸㻰㻱㻾㻾䚷㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅
㻮㻰
㻮㻰
㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝
㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻟㻡䠖㻡㻤㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻞
㻰㼀㼋㻷㻝㻗㻙
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㻷㻝
㻰㼀㼋㻷㻞㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㻷㻞
㻟㻡䠖㻡㻤㻰㼀㼋㻯㻝㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㻯㻝
㻰㼀㼋㻯㻞㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㻯㻞
㻿㼅㻿㻯㻸㻷㻝㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞

㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻯㻕
㻸㻰㻙㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㼀㼞㼕㼓㼓㼑㼞㻌㻯㼔㼍㼕㼚㻌㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞㼤㻠
㻿㼅㻿㻯㻸㻷㻞㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻹㻕
㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞
㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻭㻕
㻹㻲㻼㻯
㻵㻰㼇㻜㻦㻜㼉
㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚
㻵㻾㻽㻞㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻲㻭㻺㻿㻰㻌㻯㻸㻷
㼏㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㻯㻷㼑㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀㻿㻯㻸
㻿㻰㻭
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀
㻯㻻㻹㼋㻲㻵㻲㻻㼃㻼
㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿㻵㻞㻯
㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻿㼅㻿㻯㻸㻷㻞㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝
96<1&B0< 㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚
㻱㻯㻸㻷㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻼㻠㼋㻹㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚
㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲㻼㻟㼋㻹㻔㼃㻭㻵㼀㻕
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯
㻼㻠㼋㼅㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻼㻟㼋㼅㻔㼃㻭㻵㼀㻕㻠
䠄㻭㻼㻯
㻛㻱㻺㻮䠅㻮㻰
㻠㻵㻺㼀㻌㻿㼀䚷㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅
㻟㻡䠖㻡㻤㻰㼀㼋㻹㻝㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㻹㻝
㻰㼀㼋㻹㻞㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㻹㻞
㻟㻡䠖㻡㻤㻰㼀㼋㼅㻝㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㼅㻝
㻰㼀㼋㼅㻞㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㼅㻞

2.
5 4 3 2 1
㻰㻯㻌㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾㻌㻿㼁㻼㻼㻸㼅
D D
9ROWDJH
&RQYHUVLRQ
+
&1 91
F001
~
~
-
㻺㻛㻲
A. AC power line diagram
DCCNT1
Power line diagram
9ROWDJH
F005 &RQYHUVLRQ
9R
$&3:% 9/
):
*HQHUDWLQJ
&LUFXLW
&1 &1 MSW
F1 Pattern Gap Pattern Gap
DCCNT2
AC IN
L
F2
N
Japan Pattern Gap Pattern Gap
C 200V C
WH-L WH-N
&1 &1 &1
RY1
㻴㻸㻌㻼㼃㻮
INT5V
㼃㻴㻌㻼㼃㻮 &1
F3 F4 L1
HL_PR
5< L2
NC Japan
200V
NO
+24V
WH_CNT
B B
&1 &1 &1 TD1 TD2 TD4
T1 G T1 G T1 G
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR4

1 1 1
HLOUT_US HLOUT_UM HLOUT_LM
WH-SW
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
6 6 6
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
DESK DESK DESK CS SCN HL US HL UM HL LM

LCC HEATER HEATER HEATER HEATER HEATER
HEATER (OPTION)
10W 10W 10W 10W 10W

10W
7+(50267$776B/0
㻸㻯㻯㻔㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺㻕㻰㻱㻿㻷㻔㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺㻕㻯㻿㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠
A A
7+(50267$776B80
㼃㻭㻾㻹㻌㻴㻱㻭㼀㻱㻾㻌㻿㻱㼀㻌㻦㻌㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺㻌㻌㻔㻶㼍㼜㼍㼚㻦㻿㼀㻰㻕
7+(50267$776B86
)86,1*81,7
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PCU PWB HL PWB INT24V1

㻲㼁㻿㻱 1TC-K
INT5V 1TC-C
1TC-M
DSW-R DSW-F INT24V1 1TC-Y
㻲㼁㻿㻱
MC-K
MC-CMY 2TC
5VN3 INT24V1
㻼㼀㻯
INT24V1 㻲㼁㻿㻱 DHV
5VN3 GB-K
SENSOR 24V1 GB-C
A
GB-M PTC A
GB-Y
㻲㻝㻜㻝 24V1 24V1 INT24V1
㻲㻱㼀 DV-K VCASE
6.3A/250V 24V1 RRM FUM PFM CPFM DM_K DV-C
GND DV-M
DV-Y
Inner Outer
brushless brushless Inner Outer
㻲㻝㻜㻞 24V2 24V2 motor motor brushless brushless MC PWB TC PWB
motor motor
6.3A/250V 㻲㼁㻿㻱 INT24V1 FFC
㻲㻝㻜㻟 24V3 24V3 24V3
㻲㼁㻿㻱
ADUM1 ADUM2
6.3A/250V RIGHT GND
5VN4 FFC
B. DC power line diagram
㻲㼁㻿㻱
DOOR Inner brushless motor Interlock Circuit
24V3 GND PWB
24V3 OSM,PRM,TNM_K,TNM_C,TNM_M,TNM_Y Stepping motor
MOTOR
24V2 5VL
SBM,POM Inner brushless motor
MOTOR DM_CL Outer brushless motor ORS PD PWB
㻡㼂㻺 24V3
FW FW 24V2 24V2 24V2 ORS LED PWB
5VN2 5VN2 GND PGM
P-GND P-GND 㻲㼁㻿㻱 24VPD
3.3VPCU 3.3VPCU 5VLD MIM Stepping motor
P-GND P-GND
BD
LSU FFC
GND GND PWB 24VPD LED DRIVER PWB
SINGLE,TWIN 㻵㻯㻲㼁㻿㻱 LEDPWB
D-GND D-GND Model GND
DC 10V
B
POWER 12VPCU 5.3V
CCD-F B
SUPPLY GND 12VPCU 12VPCU 24VPD PWB

㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯
UN 24VPD 24VPD 3.3V 1.8V 5VL
㻸㻰㻻 OCSW
5VN (5VN1) 㻲㼁㻿㻱
GND GND
5VN 5VL
㻲㻱㼀 10V 10V FFC
MHPS
3.3VPCU 㻸㻰㻻
5VL (3.3VPCU) 5.3V 5.3V
㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯
㻸㻰㻻 5VL
P-GND 3.3V 3.3V DSPF18# SENSOR
GND GND 㻸㻰㻻
GND 5VL
㻲㻝㻜㻠 24V4 24V4 5VO_Duty 5VO_Duty POT LED PWB
6.3A/250V 10V
㻸㻰㻻
24V3 24VPD 24VPD 5.3V FFC CCD-R
CLUTCH 㻸㻰㻻
㻲㻝㻜㻡 24V5 12VPCU 12VPCU 3.3VL
PWB 1.8V
24V3 㻸㻰㻻㻸㻰㻻
6.3A/250V
24V4
SOLENOID 5VL 5VL GND
㻼㼀㻯
24V3 24V3 3.3VL 3.3VL 3.3VL

FAN 㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯 SPFFAN
1.2V 5VO 5VO
㻸㻰㻻
5VO_Duty 5VO_Duty 24VPD
1.5V 㻲㼁㻿㻱 2SWLRQ
㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯 GND GND SOLENOID
(SCN CNT) 24V3 24VPD STRC,SRRC,
24V3 CLUTCH STRRC,SPFC
㻲㼁㻿㻱
5VL AUDITOR
2SWLRQ7DLZDQ2QO\ 24VPD
㻲㼁㻿㻱 SLUM
(MFPC)
5VO 5VO_Duty 㻲㼁㻿㻱 BLUE LED 24VPD
C
㻲㻱㼀 SPUFM C
5VL 5VO 㻭㼁㻰㻵㻻㻌㻵㻯 SPEAKER 㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾

㻲㼁㻿㻱㼁㻿㻮 SPOM Stepping motor
5VL 5VL

NFC or 㻲㼁㻿㻱㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯㻲㼁㻿㻱 LED PWB
5VL 5VL USB
㻼㼀㻯
㻼㻵㻯 Rear USB DSPF Model
USB IC CARD
㻼㼀㻯 READER 24VPD 24VPD
RSPF Model
DCCNT1 MOTOR
5VL SPUM,SPFM Stepping motor
DCCNT2 USB WIRELESS 5VO 24VPD

㻼㼀㻯
SOLENOID 2SWLRQ
P-GND P-GND
LAN 2SWLRQ 5VO_Duty 24VPD
RSPF
D-GND D-GND GND DRIVER CLUTCH/SOLENOID
USB
D-GND D-GND 㻼㼀㻯 FRONT USB PWB
USB
㻼㼀㻯
24V4 5VL HUMAN SENSOR PWB

MOTOR 㻼㼀㻯 3KRHQL[67'
5VN USB
PDPTM Stepping motor
PAPER
24V3 PASS Un 12V
LVDS PWB 12V
24V4 㻼㼀㻯㻲㼁㻿㻱 LCD UN KEYBOARD
P-GND DESK 5VL 3.3VL
5VN 2SWLRQ 㻼㼀㻯㻸㻰㻻
D-GND 2SWLRQ 5VO 5VO HOME PWB
5VL (Griffin)
GND FFC
24V4 HDD NFC HOME PWB
P-GND 3.3VL 3.3VL (Phoenix) OPE Un
5VN LCC 㻲㻱㼀㻲㼁㻿㻱
D D-GND D
5VO
㻲㼁㻿㻱 FAX (Built in)
5VL
2SWLRQ 㻲㼁㻿㻱
24V4 24V3
㻲㼁㻿㻱 3.3VFAX
GND 㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯 -DSDQ2QO\
5V P-GND
㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯㻲㼁㻿㻱 D-GND 24V4 㻲㼁㻿㻱
24V4 㻲㼁㻿㻱
P-GND P-GND 5VO 5VO
D-GND 㻲㼁㻿㻱
2SWLRQ
5VN 㻲㼁㻿㻱
5VL 5VL 3.3VFAX 3.3VFAX
TEL LIU
㻲㼁㻿㻱 PWB
3K_FINISHER D-GND 24V3 24V3
INNER GND 㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯
GND
FINISHER 1K_FINISHER MFPC-SCN PWB FAX MAIN
2SWLRQ
2SWLRQ 2SWLRQ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3.
SCN MFP PWB LVDS PWB

ᵡᵬᵓ ᵡᵬᵑᵑ ᵡᵬᵏ
1 1 1 40
GND 2 2 GND GND/(LCD_STBYB) 2 39 GND
SATA_TXP 3 3 SATA_TXP PVCCEN 3 38 PVCCEN
SATA_TXN 4 4 SATA_TXN GND 4 37 GND
GND 5 5 GND 12V_OPE(24V) 5 36 12V(24V)
SATA_RXN 6 6 SATA_RXN 12V_OPE(24V) 6 35 12V(24V)
SATA_RXP 7 7 SATA_RXP 12V_OPE(24V) 7 34 12V(24V)
GND GND GND 8 33 GND
A. HDD, FAX, USB
ᵱᵟᵲᵟᴾᵕᶎᶇᶌ ᵧᵫᵱᵟᵋᵗᵖᵏᵑᵠᵋᵎᵕᵷᵗᵎᵏ 5V_OPE 9 32 5V_OPE_FUSE

5V_OPE 10 31 5V_OPE_FUSE
1 5V_OPE 11 30 5V_OPE_FUSE
3.3V 2 5V_OPE 12 29 5V_OPE_FUSE
3.3V 3 GND 13 28 GND
3.3V 4 HOME_LED 14 27 HOME_LED
ᵦᵢᵢ DGND 5 NHM_KEY 15 26 NHM_KEY
DGND 6 NWU_KEY 16 25 NWU_KEY
DGND 7 WU_LED 17 24 WU_LED
+5VHD 8 XN_X2 18 23 XN_X2
+5VHD 9 ᵡᵬᵔ YN_Y2 19 22 YN_Y2
+5VHD 10 1 XP_X1 20 21 XP_X1 0QFSBUJPOQBOFM QBHF
DGND 11 2 DGND YP_Y1 21 20 YP_Y1

DGND 12 3 5VHD GND 22 19 GND
DGND 13 DGND LCD_DATA3+ 23 18 LCD_DATA3+
Actual wiring chart
12V 14 ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵑ LCD_DATA3- 24 17 LCD_DATA3-

12V 15 GND 25 16 GND
12V LCD_CLK+ 26 15 LCD_CLK+
SATA SIGNAL&POWER LCD_CLK- 27 14 LCD_CLK-
GND 28 13 GND
LCD_DATA2+ 29 12 LCD_DATA2+
LCD_DATA2- 30 11 LCD_DATA2-
GND 31 10 GND
LCD_DATA1- 33 8 LCD_DATA1-
GND 34 7 GND USB CONECTOR PWB WIFI
LCD_DATA0- LCD_DATA0- ᵡᵬᵏ ᵡᵬᵐ CN2
36 5
GND GND 5 1 1
37 4 VBUS_WLAN VBUS
LCD_DISP LCD_DISP 4 VBUS 2 2
38 3 D-_WLAN D-
CCFT(PWM) CCFT(PWM) 3 D- 3 3
39 2 D+_WLAN D+
5VO(3R3VON) 5VO 2 D+ 4 4
40 1 DGND_WLAN GND GND
GND GND 1
SHIELD_WLAN ᵳᵟᵰᵐᵕᵋᵒᵩᵓᵨᵎᵎ ᵳᵟᵰᵐᵕᵋᵒᵩᵓᵨᵎᵎ
ᵤᵦᵒᵖᵋᵒᵎᵱᵋᵎᵌᵓᵱᵴ ᵎᵒᴾᵔᵖᵗᵐᴾᵔᵒᵎᴾᵏᵎᵏᴾᵖᵒᵔᵉ
ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵓ 292250-5
FRONT USB PWB

ᵡᵬᵏ ᵡᵬᵒ
6 1
ᵡᵬᵐᵔ NC VBUS
5 2
15 VBUS4 D-
VBUS_WLAN 4 3
14 D4- D+
CN_WLAN_DN 3 4
13 D4+ GND
CN_WLAN_DP 2
12 DGND4
DGND_WLAN 1 ᵳᵟᵰᵐᵕᵋᵒᵩᵓᵨᵎᵎ
11 SHIELD4 ᵭᵮᵲᵧᵭᵬ
SHIELD_WLAN 10 ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵔ
VBUS_CARDY ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵔ
9
CN_CARD_DN 8
*$DBSESFBEFS
CN_CARD_DP 7
DGND_CARD 6 ᵡᵬᵑ
SHIELD_CARD ᵡᵬᵐ CN2
5 6
VBUS_FRONT VBUS3 1 1
4 5 VBUS VBUS
CN_FRONT_DN D3- 2 2
3 4 D- D-
CN_FRONT_DP D3+ 3 3
2 3 D+ D+
DGND_FRONT DGND3 4 4
1 2 GND GND
SHIELD_FRONT 1 SHIELD3
FGND ᵳᵟᵰᵐᵕᵋᵒᵩᵓᵨᵎᵎ ᵳᵟᵰᵐᵕᵋᵒᵩᵓᵨᵎᵎ
ᵢᵤᵓᵎᵟᵋᵏᵓᵮᵋᵏᵴᵆᵓᵏᵇ ᵢᵤᵓᵎᵟᵋᵏᵓᵱᵋᵏᵡ
ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵎᵏᵲᵋᵑᵌᵐ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵔ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵎᵋᵔ
ᵡᵬᵐᵓ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵔ ᵡᵬᵏ

5 6 6 1
VBUS_KEY 4 5 VBUS_KEY 5 2 VBUS_KEY
CN_KEY_DN 3 4 CN_KEY_DN 4 3 CN_KEY_DP
CN_KEY_DP 2 3 CN_KEY_DP 3 4 CN_KEY_DN
DGND_KEY 1 2 DGND_KEY 2 5 GND KEYBOARD
SHIELD_KEY 1 SHIELD_KEY 1 6 GND
ᵢᵤᵓᵎᵟᵋᵓᵮᵋᵏᵴᵆᵓᵏᵇ ᵢᵤᵓᵎᵟᵋᵓᵱᵋᵏᵡ P-GND P-GND
ᵡᵬᵐᵏ
ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ ᵢᵤᵏᵑᵋᵔᵱᵋᵏᵌᵐᵓᵡ ᵢᵤᵏᵑᵟᵋᵔᵮᵋᵏᵌᵐᵓᵦᵆᵐᵏᵇ
1 ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵔ ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵔ
2 VBUS
86% 3 D-
4 D+
+267 GND
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵕ
ᵳᵟᵰᵐᵕᵋᵒᵩᵓᵨᵎᵎ
1 7
2 DGND 6
ᵡᵬᵏᵖ 3 CN_R_3R3V_ECO_NFC 5
1 4 CN_NFC_SCL 4
0QFSBUJPOQBOFM
2 VBUS 5 CN_NFC_SDA 3
86% 3 D- 6 S_NFC_INT_N 2
QBHF
4 D+ 7 NC 1
'(9,&( GND NC

ᵳᵠᵰᵐᵑᵋᵒᵩᵐᵐᵎᵎ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵕ ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵕ
ᵡᵬᵑᵎ
ᵡᵬᵏᵕ
8 UL10272-26-purple
1 DGND
TRP1+ 7 UL10272-26-purple
2 CN_R_3R3V_ECO_NFC
TRP1- 6 UL10272-26-purple
3 CN_NFC_SCL
4 CN_NFC_SDA
5 S_NFC_INT_N
/$1 TRP3- 3 UL10272-26-purple 1
6 5VL 5VL
TRP2- 2 UL10272-26-purple 2
7 DGND GND )VNBOTFOTPS
TRP4+ 1 UL10272-26-purple 3
8 CN_NHDS NHDS
TRP4-
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵑᵏᵋᵖ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵖ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ
ᵐᵒᵋᵎᵏᵎᵏᵑᵗᵳᵏᵑᵋᵏ
ᵡᵬᵓᵎ
1
2 3R3V
DSR ᵡᵬᵐᵗ ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵑ ᵡᵬᵏ
3
'817'6 RXD 13 UL10272-26-purple 1 13 UL1061-28-purple 1
4 DGND DGND DGND
CTS 12 UL10272-26-purple 2 12 UL1061-28-purple 2
5 5VL 5VL 5VL1
RTS 11 UL10272-26-purple 3 11 UL1061-28-purple 3
6 DGND DGND DGND
TXD 10 UL10272-26-purple 4 10 UL1061-28-purple 4
7 NCN_BLED_RST NCN_BLED_RST NCN_BLED_RST
DTR 9 UL10272-26-purple 5 9 UL1061-28-purple 5 FRONT LED PWB
8 CN_BLED_SCL CN_BLED_SCL CN_BLED_SCL
GND 8 UL10272-26-purple 6 8 UL1061-28-purple 6
CN_BLED_SDA 7 UL10272-26-purple 7 CN_BLED_SDA 7 UL1061-28-purple 7 CN_BLED_SDA
ᵓᵎᵐᵑᵖᵐᵋᵎᵖᵈᵈ 5VL 5VL 5VL2
6 UL10272-26-purple 8 6 UL1061-28-purple 8
OPE_LED_R 5 UL10272-26-purple 9 OPE_LED_R 5 UL1061-28-purple 9 OPE_LED_R
OPE_GREEN_LED 4 UL10272-26-purple 10 OPE_GREEN_LED 4 UL1061-28-purple OPE_GREEN_LED
NPWR_SW 3 UL10272-26-purple 11 NPWR_SW 3 UL1061-28-purple ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵗ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵐᵖᵋᵗ
ᵡᵬᵏᵓ POW_LED POW_LED
2 UL10272-26-purple 12 2 UL1061-28-purple
1 CN_BZR CN_BZR
3R3V 1 UL10272-26-purple 13 1 UL1061-28-purple
2 DGND DGND ᵡᵬᵏ
3 DSR 1
'817'6 RXD ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵑᵏᵋᵑ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ NPWR_SW
4 2
5 CTS 3 POW_LED
6 RTS 4 CN_BZR PWR-R PWB
7 TXD DGND
8 DTR ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵑᵎᵋᵒ
GND
ᵓᵎᵐᵑᵖᵐᵋᵎᵖᵈᵈ
/:ZZ /:ZZZZ
B. Operation panel
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵕ ᵡᵬᵑ
1 7 7
2 DGND 6 6 GND
3 CN_R_3R3V_ECO_NFC 5 5 3.3V
4 CN_NFC_SCL 4 4 SCL
5 CN_NFC_SDA 3 3 SDA
5%0/(229$ᲢRCIG 6 S_NFC_INT_N 2 2 NIRQ
7 NC 1 1 GPO2
NC NFCSET
ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵕ ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵕ ᵢᵤᵏᵑᵋᵕᵱᵋᵏᵌᵐᵓᵡ ᵢᵤᵏᵑᵡᵋᵕᵮᵋᵏᵌᵐᵓᵴᵆᵐᵏᵇᵆᵦᵰᵱᵇ
NFC HOME KEY PWB
HOME PWB LVDS PWB

LVDS PWB ᵡᵬᵑ ᵡᵬᵏ
1 11
ᵡᵬᵑ ᵡᵬᵏ GND GND
2 10
1 11 YP_Y1 YP_Y1
GND GND 3 9 ᵡᵬᵐ
2 10 XP_X1 XP_X1
YP_Y1 YP_Y1 4 8 1
3 9 ᵡᵬᵐ YN_Y2 YN_Y2 X2
XP_X1 XP_X1 5 7 2
4 8 1 XN_X2 XN_X2 Y2 TOUCH
YN_Y2 YN_Y2 X2 6 6 3
5 7 2 HOME_LED HOME_LED X1
XN_X2 XN_X2 Y2 TOUCH 7 5 4
6 6 3 NHM_KEY nHM_KEY Y1
HOME_LED HOME_LED X1 8 4 PANEL
7 5 4 NWU_KEY nWU_KEY
NHM_KEY nHM_KEY Y1 9 3 ᵧᵫᵱᵟᵋᵗᵔᵏᵕᵱᵋᵎᵒᵷᵖᵎᵏ
8 4 PANEL WU_LED WU_LED
NWU_KEY nWU_KEY 10 2
9 3 ᵧᵫᵱᵟᵋᵗᵔᵏᵕᵱᵋᵎᵒᵷᵖᵎᵏ 5VO_FUSE 5VO
WU_LED WU_LED 11 1
10 2 GND GND
5VO_FUSE 11 1 5VO
GND GND ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵐᵖᵋᵏ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵏ ᵢᵤᵏᵑᵋᵏᵏᵱᵋᵏᵌᵐᵓᵡ ᵢᵤᵏᵑᵡᵋᵏᵏᵮᵋᵏᵌᵐᵓᵴᵆᵐᵏᵇ
ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵐᵖᵋᵏ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵏ ᵢᵤᵏᵑᵋᵏᵏᵱᵋᵏᵌᵐᵓᵡ ᵢᵤᵏᵑᵡᵋᵏᵏᵮᵋᵏᵌᵐᵓᵴᵆᵐᵏᵇ
ᵡᵬᵓ CN5
41 UL1354-40-blue 40
ᵡᵬᵓ CN5 B_3R3V_LCD B_3R3V_LCD
40 UL1354-40-blue 39
41 UL1354-40-blue 40 B_3R3V_LCD B_3R3V_LCD
B_3R3V_LCD B_3R3V_LCD 39 UL1354-40-blue 38
40 UL1354-40-blue 39 B_3R3V_LCD B_3R3V_LCD
B_3R3V_LCD B_3R3V_LCD 38 37
39 UL1354-40-blue 38 NC NC
B_3R3V_LCD B_3R3V_LCD 37 36
38 37 NC NC
NC NC 36 35
37 36 NC(CLKEDID) NC(CLKEDID)
NC NC 35 34
36 35 NC(DATAEDID) NC(DATAEDID)
NC(CLKEDID) NC(CLKEDID) 34 UL1354-40-blue 33
35 34 D0- D0-
NC(DATAEDID) NC(DATAEDID) 33 UL1354-40-blue 32
34 UL1354-40-blue 33 D0+ D0+
D0- D0- 32 UL1354-40-blue 31
33 UL1354-40-blue 32 GND GND
D0+ D0+ 31 UL1354-40-blue 30
32 UL1354-40-blue 31 D1- D1-
GND GND 30 UL1354-40-blue 29
31 UL1354-40-blue 30 D1+ D1+
D1- D1- 29 UL1354-40-blue 28
D1+ D1+ 28 UL1354-40-blue 27
29 UL1354-40-blue 28 D2- D2-
28 UL1354-40-blue 27 D2+ D2+
D2- D2- 26 UL1354-40-blue 25
D2+ D2+ 25 UL1354-40-blue 24
26 UL1354-40-blue 25 CLK- CLK-
25 UL1354-40-blue 24 CLK+ CLK+
CLK- CLK- 23 UL1354-40-blue 22
CLK+ CLK+ 22 21
23 UL1354-40-blue 22 NC(D3-) D3-
GND GND 21 20
22 21 NC(D3+) D3+ LCD
NC(D3-) D3- 20 UL1354-40-blue 19
21 20 GND GND
NC(D3+) D3+ LCD 19 18
20 UL1354-40-blue 19 NC NC
GND GND 18 17
19 18 NC NC
NC NC 17 UL1354-40-blue 16
18 17 GND GND
NC NC 16 15
17 UL1354-40-blue 16 NC NC
GND GND 15 14
16 15 NC NC
NC NC 14 UL1354-40-blue 13
15 14 GND GND
NC NC 13 UL1354-40-blue 12

8 UL1354-40-blue 7 CCFT CCFT
7 UL1354-40-blue 6 EN EN
CCFT CCFT 5 UL1354-40-blue 4
EN EN 4 UL1354-40-blue 3
5 UL1354-40-blue 4 VLED VLED
VLED VLED 2 UL1354-40-blue 1
VLED VLED 1
2 UL1354-40-blue 1 NC
VLED VLED ᵐᵎᵒᵓᵒᵋᵎᵒᵎᵲ ᵐᵎᵒᵓᵓᵋᵎᵒᵎᵣᵋᵏᵐ
1
NC ᵤᵧᵋᵰᵬᵣᵒᵏᵱᵸᵋᵦᵤ ᵤᵧᵋᵰᵣᵒᵏᵡᵪᵱ
ᵐᵎᵒᵓᵒᵋᵎᵒᵎᵲ ᵐᵎᵒᵓᵓᵋᵎᵒᵎᵣᵋᵏᵐ
ᵤᵧᵋᵰᵬᵣᵒᵏᵱᵸᵋᵦᵤ ᵤᵧᵋᵰᵣᵒᵏᵡᵪᵱ
C. LSU
LSU 1beam : SCN MFP PWB

PCU PWB
/:ZZ LSU SINGLE PWB
LSU 2beam :
ᵡᵬᵏᵐ LSU TWIN PWB
4 UL10272-26-purple 1
5VN 3 UL10272-26-purple 2 5VN
HUD_CL 2 UL10272-26-purple 3 HUD_CL
GND 1 GND ᵲᵦᵍᵦᵳᵢ
UL10272-26-purple 4
TH_CL TH_CL
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵒ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵒ
ᵡᵬᵐ
UL10272-26-purple 1 ᵡᵬᵕ ᵡᵬᵒᵗ
UL10272-26-purple 2 DGND 1 1
UL10272-26-purple 3 NPCU_TRG DGND 2 2 DGND
UL10272-26-purple 4 JOBEND_INT CH0_N 3 3 CH0_N
ᵡᵬᵏᵏ UL10272-26-purple 5 NRSV_DAT CH0_P 4 4 CH0_P
24 UL10272-26-purple 6 NSCK_LSU DGND 5 5 DGND
(NC) 23 UL10272-26-purple 7 NTRANS_DAT CH1_N 6 6 CH1_N
DGND 22 UL10272-26-purple 8 NTRANS_RST CH1_P 7 7 CH1_P
NPCU_TRG 21 UL10272-26-purple 9 LSUASIC_RST DGND 8 8 DGND
JOBEND_INT 20 UL10272-26-purple 10 TH2_LSU CH2_N 9 9 CH2_N
NRSV_DAT 19 UL10272-26-purple 11 TH1_LSU CH2_P 10 10 CH2_P
NSCK_LSU 18 DGND DGND 11 11 DGND
NTRANS_DAT 17 ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵏ CLK_N 12 12 CLK_N
NTRANS_RST 16 CLK_P 13 13 CLK_P
LSUASIC_RST 15 DGND 14 14 DGND
TH2_LSU 14 CH3_N 15 15 CH3_N
TH1_LSU 13 CH3_P 16 16 CH3_P
DGND DGND 17 17 DGND
ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵐ ᵡᵬᵑ CH4_N 18 18 CH4_N
1 CH4_P 19 19 CH4_P
12 UL10272-26-purple 2 BEAMDETECT DGND 20 20 DGND
SCL_LDD 11 UL10272-26-purple 3 SCL_LDD VSYNC_K 21 21 VSYNC_K
SDA_LDD 10 UL10272-26-purple 4 SDA_LDD VSYNC_C 22 22 VSYNC_C
3.3VN 9 UL10272-26-purple 5 3.3VN VSYNC_M 23 23 VSYNC_M
DGND 8 UL10272-26-purple 6 DGND VSYNC_Y 24 24 VSYNC_Y
5VN 7 UL10272-26-purple 7 5VN DGND 25 25 DGND
DGND 6 UL10272-26-purple 8 DGND DGND(ECLK_LSU_N) 26 26 DGND(ECLK_LSU_N)
5VN 5 UL10272-26-purple 9 5VN DGND(ECLK_LSU_P) 27 27 ECLK_LSU(_P)
DGND 4 UL10272-26-purple 10 DGND DGND 28 28 DGND
24V2 3 UL10272-26-purple 11 24V HSYNC_LSU(_P) 29 29 HSYNC_LSU(_P)
PGND 2 UL10272-26-purple 12 PGND DGND(HSYNC_LSU_N) 30 30 DGND(HSYNC_LSU_N)
24V2 1 UL10272-26-purple 13 24V DGND DGND
PGND PGND ᵎᵒᴾᵔᵖᵗᵐᴾᵔᵑᵎᴾᵏᵎᵏᴾᵖᵒᵔὺ ᵤᵦᵒᵖᵋᵑᵎᵱᵋᵎᵌᵓᵱᵴ
ᵐᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵒ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵐ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵑ
ᵐᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵒ
/:ZZZZ
ᵡᵬᵐ
UL10272-26-purple 1
UL10272-26-purple 2 DGND
UL10272-26-purple 3 NPCU_TRG
UL10272-26-purple 4 JOBEND_INT
ᵡᵬᵏᵏ UL10272-26-purple 5 NRSV_DAT
25 UL10272-26-purple 6 NSCK_LSU
(NC) 24 UL10272-26-purple 7 NTRANS_DAT
DGND 23 UL10272-26-purple 8 NTRANS_RST
NPCU_TRG 22 UL10272-26-purple 9 LSUASIC_RST
JOBEND_INT 21 UL10272-26-purple 10 TH2_LSU
NRSV_DAT 110 UL10272-26-purple 11 TH1_LSU
NSCK_LSU 19 DGND ᵡᵬᵔ ᵡᵬᵏ
NTRANS_DAT 18 7 UL1061-28-Purple 1
ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵏ +5VD +5VD
NTRANS_RST 17 6 UL1061-28-Purple 2
GND 5 UL1061-28-Purple 3 GND
LSUASIC_RST 16 BD 4 UL1061-28-Purple BD BD PWB
TH2_LSU 15 GND 3 UL1061-28-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵎᵋᵑ
TH1_LSU 14 TH1 2 UL1061-28-Purple
DGND
GND 1 UL1061-28-Purple
ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵐ ᵡᵬᵑ TH2
1
13 BEAMDETECT ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵕ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵕ
2
SCL_LDD 12 3 SCL_LDD

SDA_LDD 11 UL10272-26-purple 4 SDA_LDD
3.3VN 9 UL10272-26-purple 5 3.3VN
DGND 8 DGND ᵡᵬᵏ
UL10272-26-purple 6
5VN 7 5VN 1
UL10272-26-purple 7 GND TH1_LSU PWB
DGND 6 DGND 2
UL10272-26-purple 8 TH1
5VN 5 UL10272-26-purple 9 5VN
DGND 4 DGND ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵎᵋᵐ
UL10272-26-purple 10
24V2 3 UL10272-26-purple 11 24V
PGND 2 UL10272-26-purple 12 PGND
24V2 1 UL10272-26-purple 13 24V
PGND PGND
ᵐᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵒ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵐ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵑ
ᵡᵬᵓ ᵡᵬᵏ
ᵐᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵒ
3 1
PGND 2 2 GND TH2_LSU PWB
NFANRDY 1 TH2
24V ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵎᵋᵐ
ᵡᵬᵏᵐ ᵡᵬᵏ ᵶᵽᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵑ
16 UL10272-26-purple 1
AK_CS_C1 15 UL10272-26-purple 2 AK_CS_C1
AK_CS_EEP_C1 14 UL10272-26-purple 3 AK_CS_EEP_C1
AK_CS_K1 13 UL10272-26-purple 4 AK_CS_K1
AK_CS_EEP_K1 12 UL10272-26-purple 5 AK_CS_EEP_K1
AK_CS_Y1 11 UL10272-26-purple 6 AK_CS_Y1
AK_CS_EEP_Y1 10 UL10272-26-purple 7 AK_CS_EEP_Y1
AK_CS_M1 9 UL10272-26-purple 8 AK_CS_M1 ᵡᵬᵒ
AK_CS_EEP_M1 8 UL10272-26-purple 9 AK_CS_EEP_M1 5 UL10272-26-Purple 1
AK_RXD 7 UL10272-26-purple 10 AK_RXD NPOLY_CK 4 UL10272-26-Purple 2 NPOLY_CK
AK_TXD 6 UL10272-26-purple 11 AK_TXD NPOLY_LOCK 3 UL10272-26-Purple 3 NPOLY_LOCK
AK_SCLK 5 UL10272-26-purple 12 AK_SCLK NPOLY_START 2 UL10272-26-Purple 4 NPOLY_START
GND 4 DGND PGND 1 UL10272-26-Purple 5 PGND ᵮᵥᵫ
5VN 3 ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵐ ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵐ 24V 24V
HUD_CL 2 ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵓ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵓ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵓ
GND 1
TH_CL
ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵔ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ
UL10272-26-purple 1
UL10272-26-purple 2 5VN
UL10272-26-purple 3 HUD_CL
GND ᵲᵦᵍᵦᵳᵢ
UL10272-26-purple 4
TH_CL
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵒ
D. Scanner
SCN MFP PWB CCD PWB

ᵡᵬᵑᵒ
50 50
GND 49 49 GND
GND 48 48 GND
GND 47 47 GND
GND 46 46 GND
GND 45 45 GND
GND 44 44 GND
GND 43 43 GND
GND 42 42 GND
GND 41 41 GND
GND 40 40 GND
CN_AFE_SDO 39 39 CN_AFE_SDO
AFE_SDI 38 38 AFE_SDIO
AFE_SCLK 37 37 AFE_SCLK
AFE_CS 36 36 AFE_CS
RES_CCDAD 35 35 RES_CCDAD
GND 34 34 GND
A3.3V 33 33 A3.3V
A3.3V 32 32 A3.3V
A3.3V 31 31 A3.3V
A3.3V 30 30 A3.3V
A3.3V 29 29 A3.3V
A3.3V 28 28 A3.3V
GND 27 27 GND
A5V 26 26 A5V
A5V 25 25 A5V
A5V 24 24 A5V
GND 23 23 GND
A10V 22 22 A10V
A10V 21 21 A10V
GND 20 20 GND
CN_TA_N 19 19 CN_TA_N
CN_TA_P 18 18 CN_TA_P
GND 17 17 GND
CN_TB_N 16 16 CN_TB_N
CN_TB_P 15 15 CN_TB_P
GND 14 14 GND
CN_TC_N 13 13 CN_TC_N
CN_TC_P 12 12 CN_TC_P
GND 11 11 GND
CN_TCLK_N 10 10 CN_TCLK_N
CN_TCLK_P 9 9 CN_TCLK_P
GND 8 8 GND
CN_TD_N 7 7 CN_TD_N
CN_TD_P 6 6 CN_TD_P
GND 5 5 GND
CN_TE_N 4 4 CN_TE_N
CN_TE_P 3 3 CN_TE_P
CCD_SEL2 2 2 CCD_SEL2
CCD_SEL1 1 1 CCD_SEL1
GND GND
ᵤᵦᵒᵖᵋᵓᵎᵱᵋᵎᵌᵓᵱᵴ ᵤᵦᵒᵖᵋᵓᵎᵱᵋᵎᵌᵓᵱᵴ
ᵡᵬᵒᵐ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵒ 1
1 UL1061-26-Purple 4 1 2 MIM_XB
MIM_XB 2 UL1061-26-Purple 3 MIM_XB 2 3 (NC)
MIM_B 3 UL1061-26-Purple 2 MIM_B 3 4 MIM_B
MIM_A 4 UL1061-26-Purple 1 MIM_A 4 5 MIM_A ᵫᵧᵫ
MIM_XA MIM_XA 6 (NC)
ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵒ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵒ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵒ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵒ MIM_XA
ᵮᵦᵰᵋᵔ S6B-PH-K-S
ᵡᵬᵐᵖ
3 UL10272-26-Purple 1
MHPS 2 UL10272-26-Purple 2 MHPS
GND 1 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND ᵫᵦᵮᵱ
5V_MHPS 5VN+R
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵑ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ LED DRIVER PWB
ᵡᵬᵑᵖ ᵡᵬᵏ ᵡᵬᵐ CN1
LED PWB
5 1 1 UL1061-26-Purple 1
24V 4 2 +24VPD LED_ANODE 2 2 LED_ANODE
24V 3 3 +24VPD GND 3 UL1061-26-Purple 3 GND
CL_ON 2 4 LAMP_ON/OFF LED_CATHODE/ 4 UL1061-26-Purple LED_CATHODE/
GND GND LED_ANODE/

1 5 5 502380-0300 502386-0370
GND GND GND 6 UL1061-26-Purple
ᵓᵓᵗᵕᵋᵎᵓᵡᵮᵠᵕᵤ ᵓᵓᵗᵕᵋᵎᵓᵟᵮᵠᵕᵤ LED_CATHODE
292250-6 179228-6
CN1
LED PWB
1
2 LED_ANODE
3 GND
LED_CATHODE/
502380-0300 502386-0370
ᵡᵬᵒᵏ 1
1 UL1061-26-Purple 2 OCSW
OCSW 2 UL1061-26-Purple 3 GND ᵭᵡᵱᵵ
5V_OCSW 3 UL1061-26-Purple 5VN+R
GND 4 UL1061-26-Red ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ
24V 5 UL1061-26-Purple
nSIZE_LED1 6 UL1061-26-Light Blue
nSIZE_LED2
ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵔ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵔ
ORS-LED PWB
1
2 +24V
3 CN_NSIZE_LED1
4 CN_NSIZE_LED2
GND
ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ ᵢᶇᶐᶃᶁᶒ
ORS-PD PWB
CN39
7 UL1061-26-Purple 1
PDSEL0 6 UL1061-26-Purple 2 PDSEL0
5V 3 UL1061-26-Purple 5 5V
PD 2 UL1061-26-Purple 6 PD
GND 1 GND
NC ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵔ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵎᵋᵔ
SCN39 ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵕ
PCU PWB
1
3 C1PFPD
GND 2
2 GND ᵡᵏᵮᵤᵮᵢ
ᵢᵪᵽᵷ NC 3
1 5VN+R
DL_Y
173977-3
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
3 ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵔ
GND 2 ᵡᵬᵐᵎ 1 16 UL10272-26-Purple 1
ᵢᵪᵽᵫ NC 1 ᵡᵬᵐᵏ C1PFPD C1PFD
15 UL10272-26-Purple 2 15 UL10272-26-Purple 2
DL_M UL10272-26-Purple 1 C1PFPD GND GND ᵡᵏᵮᵤᵢ
GND 14 UL10272-26-Purple 3 14 UL10272-26-Purple 3
UL10272-26-Purple 2 GND 5VN+R 5VN+R
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ DL_Y 13 UL10272-26-Purple 4 13
UL10272-26-Purple 3 5VN+R (NC)
GND 12 UL10272-26-Purple 5 12 UL10272-26-Purple 173977-3
UL10272-26-Purple 4 C1PFD C1PFD
DL_M 11 UL10272-26-Purple 6 11 UL10272-26-Purple
3 UL10272-26-Purple 5 GND GND
GND GND 10 UL10272-26-Purple 7 10 UL10272-26-Purple
2 UL10272-26-Purple 6 5VN+R 5VN+R
ᵢᵪᵽᵡ NC DL_C 9 UL10272-26-Purple 8 9 UL10272-26-Purple 1
1 UL10272-26-Purple 7 C1LUD C1LUD C1LUD
DL_C GND 8 UL10272-26-Purple 9 8 UL10272-26-Purple 2
UL10272-26-Purple 8 GND GND GND ᵡᵏᵪᵳᵢ
DL_K 7 UL10272-26-Purple 10 7 UL10272-26-Purple 3
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ 5VN+R 5VN+R 5VN+R
6 UL10272-26-Purple 11 6 UL10272-26-Purple
ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵖ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵖ C1PED C1PED
5 UL10272-26-Purple 12 5 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
GND 4 UL10272-26-Purple 13 GND 4 UL10272-26-Purple
3 5VN+R 5VN+R
GND 3 UL10272-26-Purple 14 3 UL10272-26-Purple
2 DSW_C1 DSW_C1
ᵢᵪᵽᵩ NC 2 UL10272-26-Purple 15 2 UL10272-26-Purple
1 GND GND
DL_K 1 UL10272-26-Purple 16 1 UL10272-26-Purple 1
5VN+R 5VN+R 2 C1PED
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ GND ᵡᵏᵮᵣᵢ
ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵓ ᵑᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵓ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ ᵑᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ 3
5VN+R
E. Paper feed, Tray, Process, DV
1
2 DSW_C1
3 GND ᵢᵱᵵᵽᵡᵏ
5VN+R
1
2 GND
C1LUM ᵡᵏᵪᵳᵫ
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ 2-292253-2
1
2 TNFD2
3 GND ᵲᵬᵤᵢᵐ
5VN+R
ᵢᵴᵳᵬ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵗ 1
1 9 UL10272-26-Purple 2 TNFD
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵔ TNFD2 GND ᵲᵬᵤᵢ
2 8 UL10272-26-Purple 3
6 1 GND 5VN+R
DVTYP_Y 3 7 UL10272-26-Purple
4 UL1061-26-brown 5 2 5VN+R
TSG_Y TSG_Y 4 6 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
3 UL1061-26-brown 4 3 TNFD2
5VN 5VN 5 5 UL10272-26-Purple
2 UL1061-26-brown 3 4 GND ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵑ
ᵲᵡᵱᵽᵷ TCS_Y TCS_Y 6 4 UL10272-26-Purple
1 UL1061-26-brown 2 5 5VN+R
GND GND ᵡᵬᵐᵑ 7 3 UL10272-26-Purple 1 3 UL1061-26-Gray 1
UL1061-26-brown 1 6 17 5VN 5VN 5VN
GND ᵡᵬᵐᵒ UL10272-26-Purple 8 2 UL10272-26-Purple 2 2 UL1061-26-Gray 2
ᵒᵒᵎᵏᵐᵗᵋᵒ 16 GND 16 PPD2 PPD2 PPD2 ᵮᵮᵢᵐ
UL10272-26-Purple UL10272-26-Purple 9 1 UL10272-26-Purple 3 1 UL1061-26-Gray 3
ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵔ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ 15 DVTYP_Y C1LUM 15 UL10272-26-Purple GND GND GND
UL10272-26-Purple 14 DVTYPSEL_Y TNFD2 14 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵗ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵗ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
UL10272-26-Purple 13 TSG_Y GND 13 UL10272-26-Purple
UL10272-26-Purple 12 5VN 5VN+R 12 UL10272-26-Purple
ᵢᵴᵳᵬ UL10272-26-Purple 11 TCS_Y TNFD 11 UL10272-26-Purple
GND GND
ᵭᵮᵲᵧᵭᵬ
UL10272-26-Purple 10 10 UL10272-26-Purple
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵔ UL10272-26-Purple 9 GND 5VN+R 9 UL10272-26-Purple
6 1 8 DVTYP_M 5VN 8 UL10272-26-Purple
4 UL1061-26-brown 5 DVTYP_M 2 UL10272-26-Purple 7 DVTYPSEL_M PPD2 7 UL10272-26-Purple ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵐ ᵡᵬᵓ
TSG_M 3 UL1061-26-brown 4 TSG_M 3 UL10272-26-Purple 6 TSG_M GND 6 UL10272-26-Purple 1 2 UL1061-26-Purple 1
5VN 2 UL1061-26-brown 3 5VN 4 UL10272-26-Purple 5 5VN WH_CNT 5 UL10272-26-Purple 2 WH_CNT 1 UL1061-26-Purple 2 WH_CNT WH PWB
ᵲᵡᵱᵽᵫ TCS_M 1 UL1061-26-brown 2 TCS_M 5 UL10272-26-Purple 4 TCS_M 24V3 4 UL10272-26-Purple 24V3 24V3
GND UL1061-26-brown 1 GND 6 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND PROFM2_LD 3 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵐ
ᵒᵒᵎᵏᵐᵗᵋᵒ GND UL10272-26-Purple 2 GND GND 2 UL10272-26-Purple
ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵔ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ UL10272-26-Purple 1 CPFC1 PROFM2_CNT 1 UL10272-26-Purple
24V3 PROFM2_V
ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵕ
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵒ
1 4
2 PROFM2_LD 3
3 GND 2
4 PROFM2_CNT 1 ᵮᵰᵭᵤᵫᵐ
1 UL10272-26-Purple PROFM2_V
CPFC1

2 UL10272-26-Purple 173977-4 ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵒ
ᵡᵮᵤᵡᵏ 24V3
353293-2
DSW_F
1 UL10272-26-Purple
C1PUC 2 UL10272-26-Purple 1
ᵡᵏᵮᵳᵡ 24V3 DSW_R_OUT
353293-2 ᵮᵱᵋᵏᵏᵎ
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵐ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵐ
ᵢᵴᵳᵬ UL10272-26-Gray 32 1 2 UL10272-26-Purple 1 2 UL1061-24-Red
UL10272-26-Gray 31 C1PUC 2 DSW_R_OUT 1 UL10272-26-Purple 2 DSW_R_OUT 1 UL1061-24-Red 1
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵔ UL10272-26-Gray 30 24V3 DSW_F(5V) DSW_F(5V) DSW_F(5V)
6 1 29 DVTYP_K ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵐ ᵮᵱᵋᵏᵏᵎ
4 UL1061-26-brown 5 DVTYP_K 2 UL10272-26-Gray 28 DVTYPSEL_K
TSG_K 3 UL1061-26-brown 4 TSG_K 3 UL10272-26-Gray 27 TSG_K
5VN 2 UL1061-26-brown 3 5VN 4 UL10272-26-Gray 26 5VN ᵡᵬᵓ
ᵲᵡᵱᵽᵩ TCS_K 1 UL1061-26-brown 2 TCS_K 5 UL10272-26-Gray 25 TCS_K 1
GND UL1061-26-brown 1 GND 6 UL10272-26-Gray 24 GND 2 INT5V
ᵒᵒᵎᵏᵐᵗᵋᵒ GND UL10272-26-Gray 23 GND CN23 3 GND
ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵔ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ 22 DVTYP_C 34 UL10272-26-Gray 4 HLOUT_US
UL10272-26-Gray 21 DVTYPSEL_C DSW_R_OUT 33 UL10272-26-Gray 5 (NC)HLOUT_UW HL PWB
UL10272-26-Gray 20 TSG_C DSW_F(5V) 32 UL10272-26-Gray 6 HLOUT_LM
ᵢᵴᵳᵬ UL10272-26-Gray 19 5VN INT5V 31 UL10272-26-Gray 7 HLOUT_UM
UL10272-26-Gray 18 TCS_C GND 30 UL10272-26-Gray HL_PR
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵔ UL10272-26-Gray 17 GND HLOUT_US 29 UL10272-26-Gray ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵕ ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵕ
6 1 GND HLOUT_UW 28 UL10272-26-Gray
4 UL1061-26-brown 5 DVTYP_C 2 ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ ᵑᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵐ HLOUT_LM 27 UL10272-26-Gray
TSG_C 3 UL1061-26-brown 4 TSG_C 3 ᵑᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵐ HLOUT_UM 26 UL10272-26-Gray
5VN 2 UL1061-26-brown 3 5VN 4 HL_PR 25 UL10272-26-Gray 1
ᵲᵡᵱᵽᵡ TCS_C 1 UL1061-26-brown 2 TCS_C 5 C1SPD 24 UL10272-26-Gray 2 C1SPD
GND UL1061-26-brown 1 GND 6 GND 23 UL10272-26-Gray 3 GND
GND 5VN+R 5VN+R
ᵡᵏᵱᵮᵢ
ᵒᵒᵎᵏᵐᵗᵋᵒ 22 UL10272-26-Gray
ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵔ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ GND 21 UL10272-26-Gray ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
C1SS1 20 UL10272-26-Gray
C1SS2 19 UL10272-26-Gray
C1SS3 18 UL10272-26-Gray
C1SS4
ᵑᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵒ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵕ ᵡᵬᵏ
ᵑᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵒ 1
2 GND
3 GND
4 C1SS1
5 C1SS2 C1SS PWB
6 C1SS3
C1SS4
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵔ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵎᵋᵔ
1 UL1061-26-Purple
TCED_Y 2 UL1061-26-Purple
ᵲᵡᵣᵢᵽᵷ GND 3 UL1061-26-Purple ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵕ
5VN+R 7 1
ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ 6 TCED_Y 2
5 GND 3
1 UL1061-26-Brown 4 5VN+R 4
CRM_Y_DT 2 UL1061-26-Brown 3 CRM_Y_DT 5
CRM_Y_CK 3 UL1061-26-Blue 2 CRM_Y_CK 6
ᵡᵰᵳᵫᵽᵷ 5VN 4 UL1061-26-Gray 1 5VN 7
GND GND
ᵔᵐᴾᵗᵐᵒᵔᴾᵎᵎᵒᴾᵎᵎᵎᴾᵎᵎᵏ ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵕ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵕ 1
PCU PWB 2 TNM_Y_A
3 TNM_Y_B
1 UL1061-26-Purple 4 24V3
TCED_M 2 UL1061-26-Purple ᵡᵬᵔ 5 24V3 TNM_Y
ᵲᵡᵣᵢᵽᵫ GND 3 UL1061-26-Purple ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵕ UL10272-26-Purple 17 ᵡᵬᵕ 6 TNM_Y_XA
5VN+R 7 1 UL10272-26-Purple 16 TCED_Y 15 UL10272-26-Purple TNM_Y_XB
ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ 6 TCED_M 2 UL10272-26-Purple 15 GND TNM_Y_A 14 UL10272-26-Purple 173977-6 292132-6
5 GND 3 UL10272-26-Purple 14 5VN+R TNM_Y_B 13 UL10272-26-Purple
1 UL1061-26-Brown 4 5VN+R 4 UL10272-26-Purple 13 CRM_Y_DT 24V3 12 UL10272-26-Purple
CRM_M_DT 2 UL1061-26-Brown 3 CRM_M_DT 5 UL10272-26-Purple 12 CRM_Y_CK 24V3 11 UL10272-26-Purple
CRM_M_CK 3 UL1061-26-Blue 2 CRM_M_CK 6 UL10272-26-Purple 11 5VN TNM_Y_XA 10 UL10272-26-Purple
ᵡᵰᵳᵫᵽᵫ 5VN 4 UL1061-26-Gray 1 5VN 7 UL10272-26-Purple 10 GND TNM_Y_XB 9 UL10272-26-Purple 1
GND GND UL10272-26-Purple 9 TCED_M TNM_M_A 8 UL10272-26-Purple 2 TNM_M_A
ᵔᵐᴾᵗᵐᵒᵔᴾᵎᵎᵒᴾᵎᵎᵎᴾᵎᵎᵏ ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵕ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵕ UL10272-26-Purple 8 GND TNM_M_B 7 UL10272-26-Purple 3 TNM_M_B
UL10272-26-Purple 7 5VN+R 24V3 6 UL10272-26-Purple 4 24V3
UL10272-26-Purple 6 CRM_M_DT 24V3 5 UL10272-26-Purple 5 24V3 TNM_M
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵑ UL10272-26-Purple 5 CRM_M_CK TNM_M_XA 4 UL10272-26-Purple 6 TNM_M_XA
1 UL10272-26-Purple 3 1 UL10272-26-Purple 4 5VN TNM_M_XB 3 TNM_M_XB
1TUD_CL 2 UL10272-26-Purple 1TUD_CL
2 2 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND PSFM2_LD 2 173977-6 292132-6
ᵏᵲᵳᵢᵽᵡᵪ GND 3 UL10272-26-Purple 1 GND 3 UL10272-26-Purple 2 1TUD_CL GND 1
5VN+R 5VN+R UL10272-26-Purple 1 GND PSFM2_V
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ 5VN+R ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵓ
ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵕ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵑ
30 UL10272-26-Gray 1 3
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵑ UL10272-26-Gray 34 PSFM1_LD 29 UL10272-26-Gray 2 PSFM1_LD 2
1 UL10272-26-Purple 3 1 UL10272-26-Gray 33 1TUD_K GND 28 UL10272-26-Gray 3 GND 1 ᵮᵱᵤᵫ
1TUD_K 2 UL10272-26-Purple 2 1TUD_K 2 UL10272-26-Gray 32 GND PSFM1_V 27 UL10272-26-Gray PSFM1_V
ᵏᵲᵳᵢᵽᵩ GND 3 UL10272-26-Purple 1 GND 3 UL10272-26-Gray 31 5VN+R TNM_K_A 26 UL10272-26-Gray 173977-3 ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ
5VN+R 5VN+R UL10272-26-Gray 30 TCED_K TNM_K_B 25 UL10272-26-Gray
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ UL10272-26-Gray 29 GND 24V3 24 UL10272-26-Gray
F. Toner motor, Paper transport drive
UL10272-26-Gray 28 5VN+R 24V3 23 UL10272-26-Gray

UL10272-26-Gray 27 CRM_K_DT TNM_K_XA 22 UL10272-26-Gray
UL10272-26-Gray 26 CRM_K_CK TNM_K_XB 21 UL10272-26-Gray 1
1 UL1061-26-Purple UL10272-26-Gray 25 5VN TNM_C_A 20 UL10272-26-Gray 2 TNM_K_A
TCED_K 2 UL1061-26-Purple UL10272-26-Gray 24 GND TNM_C_B 19 UL10272-26-Gray 3 TNM_K_B
ᵲᵡᵣᵢᵽᵩ GND 3 UL1061-26-Purple ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵕ UL10272-26-Gray 23 TCED_C 24V3 18 UL10272-26-Gray 4 24V3
5VN+R 7 1 UL10272-26-Gray 22 GND 24V3 17 UL10272-26-Gray 5 24V3 TNM_K
ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ 6 TCED_K 2 UL10272-26-Gray 21 5VN+R TNM_C_XA 16 UL10272-26-Gray 6 TNM_K_XA
5 GND 3 UL10272-26-Gray 20 CRM_C_DT TNM_C_XB TNM_K_XB
1 UL1061-26-Brown 4 5VN+R 4 UL10272-26-Gray 19 CRM_C_CK ᵑᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵎ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵓ 292132-6
CRM_K_DT 2 UL1061-26-Brown 3 CRM_K_DT 5 UL10272-26-Gray 18 5VN ᵑᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵎ 173977-6
CRM_K_CK 3 UL1061-26-Blue 2 CRM_K_CK 6 GND
ᵡᵰᵳᵫᵽᵩ 5VN 4 UL1061-26-Gray 1 5VN 7 ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵕ ᵑᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵒ
GND GND ᵑᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵒ 1
ᵔᵐᴾᵗᵐᵒᵔᴾᵎᵎᵒᴾᵎᵎᵎᴾᵎᵎᵏ ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵕ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵕ 2 TNM_C_A
3 TNM_C_B
4 24V3
1 UL1061-26-Purple 5 24V3 TNM_C
TCED_C 2 UL1061-26-Purple 6 TNM_C_XA
ᵲᵡᵣᵢᵽᵡ GND 3 UL1061-26-Purple ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵕ TNM_C_XB
5VN+R 7 1 292132-6
ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ 6 TCED_C 2 173977-6
5 GND 3
1 UL1061-26-Brown 4 5VN+R 4
CRM_C_DT 2 UL1061-26-Brown 3CRM_C_DT 5
CRM_C_CK 3 UL1061-26-Blue 2
CRM_C_CK 6
ᵡᵰᵳᵫᵽᵡ 5VN 4 UL1061-26-Gray 1 5VN 7
GND GND
ᵔᵐᴾᵗᵐᵒᵔᴾᵎᵎᵒᴾᵎᵎᵎᴾᵎᵎᵏ ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵕ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵕ
1
2 24V1
3 GND
4 PFM_BR
5 PWM ᵮᵤᵫ
ᵡᵬᵐᵓ 6 CW/CCW
14 UL10272-26-Purple 7 5VN
24V1 13 UL10272-26-Purple 8 ENC_B
GND 12 UL10272-26-Purple ENC_A
PFM_BRAKE 11 UL10272-26-Purple 353293-8 ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵔᵋᵖ
PWM 10 UL10272-26-Purple
5VN 9 UL10272-26-Purple
ENC_B 8 UL10272-26-Purple
ENC_A 7 UL10272-26-Purple 1
2TURC 6 UL10272-26-Purple 2 2TURC
24V3 5 UL10272-26-Purple 24V3 ᵐᵲᵳᵰᵡ
HPFC 4 UL10272-26-Purple 353293-2
24V3 3 UL10272-26-Purple
MPUC 2 UL10272-26-Purple
24V3 1 1
(NC) 2 HPFC
2-292208-8 ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ 24V3 ᵦᵮᵤᵡ
353293-2

1
2 MPUC
24V3 ᵫᵮᵳᵡ
353293-2
CN25
28 UL10272-26-Gray 1
24V1 27 UL10272-26-Gray 2 24V1
GND 26 UL10272-26-Gray 3 GND
CPFM_CK 25 UL10272-26-Gray 4 (NC)
CPFM_D 24 UL10272-26-Gray 5 CPFM_CK
CW/CCW 23 UL10272-26-Gray 6 CPFM_D ᵡᵮᵤᵫ
CPFM_LD 22 UL10272-26-Gray 7 CW/CCW
24V1(INT) 21 UL10272-26-Gray CPFM_LD
GND 20 UL10272-26-Gray 173977-7 292132-7
RRM_BRAKE 19 UL10272-26-Gray
PWM 18 UL10272-26-Gray
CW/CCW 17 UL10272-26-Gray
5VN 16 UL10272-26-Gray
ENC_B 15 UL10272-26-Gray 1
ENC_A 2 24V1(INT)
ᵐᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵖ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ 3 GND
ᵐᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵖ 4 RRM_D
5 PWM ᵰᵰᵫ
6 CW/CCW
7 5VN
8 ENC_B
ENC_A
353293-8 ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵔᵋᵖ
ᵡᵬᵒ
1
FUFM_V 2
FUFM_LD 3
ᵤᵳᵤᵫ
GND
ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵑ 179228-3
ᵭᵮᵲᵧᵭᵬ
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵔ
1 6 UL10272-26-Purple 1
2 POD3 5 UL10272-26-Purple 2 POD3
3 GND 4 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND
5VN+R 5VN+R
ᵮᵭᵢᵑ
4 3
5 TFD3 2 ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
6 GND 1
R-Door PWB 5VN+R UL10272-26-Purple 1
353293-6 ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ UL10272-26-Purple 2 TFD3
UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND ᵲᵤᵢᵑ
5VN+R
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵓ
1 5 UL10272-26-Purple 1
2 PRTPD 4 UL10272-26-Purple 2 PRTPD
3 GND 3 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND
5VO+R 5VO+R
ᵮᵰᵲᵮᵢ
4 2
5 ADUGS 1 ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
ᵡᵬᵑ 24V3
19 UL10272-26-Purple 353293-5 ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵓ 292254-2
POD3 18 UL10272-26-Purple UL10272-26-Purple 1 2
GND 17 UL10272-26-Purple UL10272-26-Purple 2 ADUGS 1
5VN+R 16 UL10272-26-Purple 24V3 ᵟᵢᵳᵥᵱ
TFD3 15 UL10272-26-Purple 173977-2 179228-2
5VN+R 13 UL10272-26-Purple
PRTPD 12 UL10272-26-Purple
5VO+R 10 UL10272-26-Purple
G. Right door, Manual paper feed
ADUGS 9 UL10272-26-Purple
24V3 8 UL10272-26-Purple 1
24V1(INT) 7 UL10272-26-Purple 224V1(INT)
GND 6 UL10272-26-Purple 3GND
ADUM1_D 5 UL10272-26-Purple 4ADUM1_D
PCU PWB ADUM1_PWM 4 UL10272-26-Purple 5PWM
ADUM1_CW/CCW CW/CCW
ᵟᵢᵳᵫᵏ
3 UL10272-26-Purple 6
ᵡᵬᵐᵔ ᵡᵬᵐ 5VN 2 UL10272-26-Purple 75VN
30 1 ADUM1_ENC_B 1 UL10272-26-Purple 8ENC_B
MPFS 29 2 MPUS ADUM1_ENC_A ENC_A
VCC_MPWS 28 3 VCC_MPWS ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵗ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵗ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵔᵋᵖ
MPWS 27 4 MPWS ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵖ
MPLD1 26 5 MPLD1
MPFD 25 6 MPFD
2TUD 24 7 2TUD
MPED 23 8 MPED
2TPD 22 9 2TPD
ADUM2_D 21 10 ADUM2_D 1
ADUM2_PWM 20 11 ADUM2_PWM 2 APPD2
ADUM2_ENC_B 19 12 ADUM2_ENC_B 3 GND
ADUM2_ENC_A ADUM2_ENC_A 5VN+R
ᵟᵮᵮᵢᵐ
18 13 ᵡᵬᵒ
APPD1 17 14 APPD1 9 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
DSW_ADU 16 15 DSW_ADU APPD2 8 UL10272-26-Purple
APPD2 15 16 APPD2 GND 7 UL10272-26-Purple
LPPD1 14 17 LPPD1 5VN+R 6 UL10272-26-Purple 1
PRTPD 13 18 PRTPD DSW_ADU 5 UL10272-26-Purple 2 DSW_ADU
5VO+R 12 19 5VO+R GND 4 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND ᵢᵱᵵᵽᵟᵢᵳ
POD3 11 20 POD3 5VN+R 3 UL10272-26-Purple 5VN+R
TFD3 10 21 TFD3 APPD1 2 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
ADUGS 9 22 ADUGS GND 1 UL10272-26-Purple
5VN 8 23 5VN 5VN+R
5VN 7 24 5VN ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵗ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵗ 1
5VN 6 25 5VN 2 APPD1
ADUM1_D 5 26 ADUM1_D 3 GND
ADUM1_PWM ADUM1_PWM 5VN+R
ᵟᵮᵮᵢᵏ
4 27
ADUM1_CW/CCW 3 28 ADUM1_CW/CCW ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
ADUM1_ENC_B 2 29 ADUM1_ENC_B
ADUM1_ENC_A 1 30 ADUM1_ENC_A
GND GND
ᵧᵫᵱᵟᵋᵗᵔᵖᵕᵱᵋᵑᵎᵷᵖᵎᵏ ᵏᵏᵔᵎᵎᵱᵋᵑᵎᵟᵋᵥᵤᵬᵒ
ᵡᵬᵓ
8 UL10272-26-Purple 1
24V1(INT) 7 UL10272-26-Purple 224V1(INT)
GND 6 UL10272-26-Purple 3GND
ᵡᵬᵐᵕ ᵡᵬᵏ ADUM2_D 5 UL10272-26-Purple 4ADUM2_D
10 1 ADUM2_PWM 4 UL10272-26-Purple 5PWM ᵟᵢᵳᵫᵐ
24V1(INT) 9 2 24V1(INT) NC(CW/CCW) 3 UL10272-26-Purple 6CW/CCW
24V1(INT) 8 3 24V1(INT) 5VN 2 UL10272-26-Purple 75VN
24V1(INT) 7 4 24V1(INT) ADUM2_ENC_B 1 UL10272-26-Purple 8ENC_B
GND 6 5 GND ADUM2_ENC_A ENC_A
GND 5 6 GND ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵖ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵖ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵔᵋᵖ
GND 4 7 GND ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵖ
GND 3 8 GND
GND 2 9 GND
24V3 1 10 24V3
24V3 24V3
ᵎᵎᴾᵔᵐᵎᵖᴾᵓᵏᵎᴾᵏᵏᵎᴾᵎᵎᵎᵉ 292254-2
ᵎᵎᴾᵔᵐᵎᵖᴾᵓᵏᵎᴾᵏᵏᵎᴾᵎᵎᵎὺ 1
UL10272-26-Purple 1
UL10272-26-Purple 2 MPFS 2
24V3 ᵫᵮᵤᵱ
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵖ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵐ
UL10272-26-Purple 1 8
UL10272-26-Purple 2 MPFS 7

UL10272-26-Purple 3 24V3 6 UL10272-26-Purple 1
UL10272-26-Purple 4 MPFD 5 UL10272-26-Purple 2 MPFD
UL10272-26-Purple 5 GND 4 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND
5VN+R 5VN+R
ᵫᵮᵤᵢ
UL10272-26-Purple 6 3
UL10272-26-Purple 7 MPED 2 ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
UL10272-26-Purple 8 GND 1
5VN+R UL10272-26-Purple 1
ᵡᵬᵔ 353293-8 353293-8 UL10272-26-Purple 2 MPED
20 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND
MPFS 5VN+R
ᵫᵮᵣᵢ
19
24V3 18 ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
MPFD 17
GND 16
5VN+R 15
MPED 14 UL10272-26-Purple 1
GND 13 ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵔ UL10272-26-Purple 2 VCC_MPWS
5VN+R 12 UL10272-26-Purple 1 6 UL10272-26-Purple 3 MPWS ᵫᵮᵵᵱ
VCC_MPWS 11 UL10272-26-Purple 2 VCC_MPWS 5 GND
MPWS 10 UL10272-26-Purple 3 MPWS 4 ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵔᵏᵋᵑ
GND 9 UL10272-26-Purple 4 GND 3 ᵖᵋᵐᵗᵐᵏᵏᵐᵋᵑ
MPLD1 8 UL10272-26-Purple 5 MPLD1 2
GND 7 UL10272-26-Purple 6 GND 1
5VN+R 5VN+R UL10272-26-Purple 1
6 MPLD1
2TUD UL10272-26-Purple 2
5 353293-6 353293-6 GND ᵫᵮᵪᵢᵏ
GND UL10272-26-Purple 3
4 5VN+R
5VN+R 3
2TPD ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
2
GND 1
5VN+R
ᵐᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵎ ᵐᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵎ
UL10272-26-Purple 1
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵔ UL10272-26-Purple 2 2TUD
UL10272-26-Purple 1 6 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND
2TUD 5VN+R
ᵐᵲᵳᵢ
UL10272-26-Purple 2 5
UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND 4 ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
UL10272-26-Purple 4 5VN+R 3
UL10272-26-Purple 5 2TPD 2
UL10272-26-Purple 6 GND 1 UL10272-26-Purple 1
5VN+R UL10272-26-Purple 2 2TPD
353293-6 353293-6 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND
5VN+R
ᵐᵲᵮᵢ
1
2 POD2
1 GND ᵮᵭᵢᵐ
DHPD_CL 3
2 5VN+R
ᵢᵦᵮᵢᵽᵡᵪ GND 3
5VN+R ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
1
U1026 SHPOS
2
1 GND ᵱᵦᵮᵭᵱ
DHPD_K 3
2 ᵡᵬᵗ 5VN+R
ᵢᵦᵮᵢᵽᵩ GND 3 UL10272-26-Purple 14
PCU PWB
5VN+R 13 DHPD_CL ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
UL10272-26-Purple
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ UL10272-26-Purple 12 GND
11 5VN+R ᵡᵬᵐᵗ ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵏ
UL10272-26-Purple 19
10 DHPD_K UL10272-26-Purple 1 11 UL10272-26-Purple
UL10272-26-Purple POD2 18 POD2
9 GND UL10272-26-Purple 2 10 UL10272-26-Purple
1 UL10272-26-Purple GND 17 GND ᴾᵭᵮᵲᵧᵭᵬ
24V1 2 8 5VN+R UL10272-26-Purple 3 9 UL10272-26-Purple
UL10272-26-Purple 5VN+R 16 5VN+R
GND 3 7 24V1 UL10272-26-Purple 4 8 UL10272-26-Purple
UL10272-26-Purple SHPOS 15 SHPOS
24V1 4 6 GND UL10272-26-Purple 5 7 UL10272-26-Purple ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵔ
UL10272-26-Purple GND 14 GND 6
GND 5 5 24V1 UL10272-26-Purple 6 6 UL10272-26-Purple 1
UL10272-26-Purple 5VN+R 13 5VN+R NC 5
ᵢᵫᵽᵩ (NC) 6 4 GND UL10272-26-Purple 7 5 UL10272-26-Purple 2
UL10272-26-Purple 24V3_OSM 12 24V3_OSM 24V3_OSM 4
DM_K_CK 7 3 DM_K_CK UL10272-26-Purple 8 4 UL10272-26-Purple 3
UL10272-26-Purple /OSM_A 11 /OSM_A /OSM_A 3
DM_K_D 8 2 DM_K_D UL10272-26-Purple 9 3 UL10272-26-Purple 4
UL10272-26-Purple /OSM_B 10 /OSM_B /OSM_B 2 ᵭᵱᵫ
CW/CCW 9 1 CW/CCW UL10272-26-Purple 10 2 UL10272-26-Purple 5
UL10272-26-Purple /OSM_XA 9 /OSM_XA /OSM_XA 1
DM_K_LD DM_K_LD UL10272-26-Purple 11 1 UL10272-26-Purple 6
H. Paper exit, Main drive
/OSM_XB 8 UL10272-26-Purple /OSM_XB /OSM_XB

292132-9 ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵗ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ 24V2 7 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵔ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵔ
SBM_BRAKE 5 UL10272-26-Purple
1 UL10272-26-Gray 28 PWM
24V2 24V2 4 UL10272-26-Purple
2 UL10272-26-Gray 27 CW/CCW
GND GND 3 UL10272-26-Purple
3 UL10272-26-Gray 26 5VN
24V2 24V2 2 UL10272-26-Purple 1
4 UL10272-26-Gray 25 ENC_B 24V2
GND GND 1 UL10272-26-Purple 2
5 UL10272-26-Gray 24 ENC_A GND
ᵢᵫᵽᵡᵪ (NC) 23 DM_CL_CK 3
6 UL10272-26-Gray SBM_BRAKE
DM_CL_CK 22 DM_CL_D ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵗ 4
7 UL10272-26-Gray PWM ᵱᵠᵫ
DM_CL_D 21 CW/CCW 5
8 UL10272-26-Gray CW/CCW
CW/CCW 20 DM_CL_LD 6
9 5VN
DM_CL_LD 19 (NC) 7
8 ENC_B
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵗ UL10272-26-Gray 18 (NC)
ENC_A
UL10272-26-Gray 17 1TURC_1
16 24V3 ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵖ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵔᵋᵖ
UL10272-26-Gray
1 UL10272-26-Gray 15 1TURC_2
1TURC_1 2 24V3
1TURC_1 24V3 ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ ᵐᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵖ
353293-2 ᵐᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵒ
1
2 24V2
3 GND
1 POM_BRAKE
1TURC_2 4
2 PWM ᵮᵭᵫ
1TURC_2 24V3 5
38 UL10272-26-Gray 6 CW/CCW
353293-2 24V2 37 5VN
UL10272-26-Gray 7
GND 36 UL10272-26-Gray 8 ENC_B
POM_BRAKE 35 UL10272-26-Gray ENC_A
PWM 34 UL10272-26-Gray ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵖ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵔᵋᵖ
CW/CCW 33 UL10272-26-Gray
5VN 32 UL10272-26-Gray
ENC_B 31 UL10272-26-Gray ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵐ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵐ
ENC_A 30 UL10272-26-Gray 1 2 UL10368HF-26-Gray 1 2
24V3 29 UL10272-26-Gray 2 24V3 1 UL10368HF-26-Gray 2 24V3 1
/POGS 28 UL10272-26-Gray /POGS /POGS ᵮᵭᵥᵱ
POD4 27 UL10272-26-Gray ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵐ ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵐ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵐ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵐ
GND 26 UL10272-26-Gray
5VN+R 25 UL10272-26-Gray
TED4 24 UL10272-26-Gray 1
GND 23 UL10272-26-Gray 2 POD4
5VO+R 22 UL10272-26-Gray 3 GND ᵮᵭᵢᵒ
TFD2 21 UL10272-26-Gray ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵏᵓᵋᵗ 5VN+R
GND 20 UL10272-26-Gray 1 9 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
5VN+R 2 POD4 8 UL10272-26-Purple
ᵑᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵖ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵗ 3 GND 7 UL10272-26-Purple
ᵑᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵖ 4 5VN+R 6 UL10272-26-Purple 1
5 TED4 5 UL10272-26-Purple 2 TED4
6 GND 4 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND ᵲᵣᵢᵒ
7 5VO+R 3 UL10272-26-Purple 5VO+R
8 TFD2 2 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
9 GND 1 UL10272-26-Purple
5VN+R 1
ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵗ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵗ 2 TFD2
SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4
3 GND ᵲᵤᵢᵐ
5VN+R
1
2 24V1(INT)
3 GND
4 (NC)
5 FUM_CK ᵤᵳᵫ
ᵡᵬᵐᵖ 6 FUM_D
16 UL10272-26-Purple 7 CW/CCW
24V1(INT) 15 UL10272-26-Purple FUM_LD
GND 14 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵕ 292132-7
FUM_CK 13 UL10272-26-Purple
FUM_D 12 UL10272-26-Purple
CW/CCW 11 UL10272-26-Purple
FUM_LD 10 UL10272-26-Purple 1
PRM_A 9 UL10272-26-Purple 2 PRM_A
PRM_B 8 UL10272-26-Purple 3 PRM_B
24V3 7 UL10272-26-Purple 4 24V3 ᵮᵰᵫ
24V3 6 UL10272-26-Purple 5 24V3
PRM_XA 5 UL10272-26-Purple 6 PRM_XA
PRM_XB 4 UL10272-26-Purple PRM_XB

POFM_LD 3 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵔ 292132-6
POFM_CNT 1 UL10272-26-Purple ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵒ
POFM_V 1 4
ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵔ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ 2 POFM_LD 3
3 GND 2
4 POFM_CNT 1 21(/
POFM_V
173977-4 ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵒ
DC PWB
ᵡᵬᵏᵎᵐ
SCN MFP PWB
1 ᵡᵬᵏ
DCCNT1(NRY) 2 UL1061-22-Brown 2
NC 3 UL1061-22-Brown 1 nRY_CNT
DCCNT2(NOFF) nOFF_CNT
ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵑᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵐ ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵐ
CN101
1 UL1007-20-Gray CN48
D-GND 2 UL1007-18-Gray 7
D-GND DGND
I. Power supply, WH
3 UL1007-18-Gray 6
D-GND 4 UL1007-20-Blue 5 DGND
5VO 5 UL1007-18-Blue 4 5VO
5VL 6 UL1007-18-Blue 3 5VL
5VL 7 UL1007-18-Blue 2 5VL
5VL 1 24VN
1-1123723-7 1-1123722-7 DGND
1-1123722-7 1-1123723-7
ᵡᵬᵏᵎᵒ
1
NC(24V1) 2 UL1007-20-Red
24V1 3 UL1007-20-Red
24V2 4 UL1007-20-Red
PCU PWB
24V3 5 UL1007-20-Red
24V3 6 UL1007-20-Red ᵡᵬᵑ
24V4 7 11
24V5 UL10272-26-Purple 10 NC
ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵑᵋᵕ ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵐᵋᵕ UL10272-26-Purple 9 12VN
UL10272-26-Purple 8 FW2
UL10272-26-Purple 7 3.3VN
UL10272-26-Purple 6 3.3VN
ᵡᵬᵏᵎᵑ ᵡᵬᵏ ᵡᵬᵐ UL10272-26-Purple 5 GND
1 UL1007-22-Brown 9 1 UL10272-26-Purple 4 GND
FW 2 UL1007-20-Gray 824V4(OP) 12VN 2 UL10272-26-Purple 3 TED4
P-GND 3 UL1007-20-Gray 7PGND(OP) FW2 3 UL10272-26-Purple 2 RY_CNT
P-GND 4 UL1007-20-Gray 624V1(INT) 3.3VN 4 1 TXD_PCU_LOG
P-GND 5 524V2 3.3VN 5 NC
NC(P-GND) 6 4PGND GND 6 ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ
P-GND 7 324V3(12V_PCU) GND 7
P-GND 8 2DGND TED4_OUT 8
NC(P-GND) 15VL(5VN,3.3V) RY_CNT 9 22
ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵑᵋᵖ ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵐᵋᵖ FW TXD_PCU_LOG 10 UL10272-26-Gray 21 NC
ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵐᵋᵗ ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵑᵋᵗ PCU_TXD 11 UL10272-26-Gray 20 PCU_TXD
PCU_RES 12 UL10272-26-Gray 19 PCU_RES
PCU_RXD 13 UL10272-26-Gray 18 PCU_RXD
PCU_NPOF 14 UL10272-26-Gray 17 PCU_nPOF
PCU_DSR 15 UL10272-26-Gray 16 PCU_DSR
PCU_PRTPD 16 UL10272-26-Gray 15 PCU_PRTPD
PCU_DTR 17 UL10272-26-Gray 14 PCU_DTR
+5VO_DUTY 18 UL10272-26-Gray 13 +5VO_DUTY
PCU_POF_OUT 12 PCU_POF_OUT
ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵖ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵖ RXD_PCU_LOG
ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ ᵐᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵐ
CN1 UL1007-16-Gray ᵐᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵐ
1
N_DC 2 SRA-51T-3 SRA-51T-4
NC 3
L_DC
1-1123724-2 1-1123722-3
HL PWB CN6
1
L-HLIN 2
NC 3
N-HLIN
4-1123724-2 4-1123722-3
ᵭᵮᵲᵧᵭᵬ

1 1
2 WH-N(DESK1) 2
3 FGND 3 5BOEFN%FTL 015*0/
SRA-21T-4 WH-L(DESK1)
CN1 ṵᵏ ᵏᵕᵐᵏᵓᵖᵋᵏ
1 1 WH PWB
L_HL LIVE
2 ᵮᵱᵋᵐᵓᵎᵆᵵᵦᵇ
N_HL
DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) DF22-2S-7.92C(28) 1
NEUTRAL ᵡᵬᵒ
ᵮᵱᵋᵐᵓᵎᵆᵵᵦᵇ ᵡᵬᵓ 1 1 1 1 1
1 WH-N(DESK1) 2 2 WH-N(DESK1) 2 2 WH-N(DESK1) 2
2 WH_CNT NC 3 WH-L(DESK1) WH-L(DESK1) WH_CS1
⋪
MSW ᵮᵡᵳᴾᵮᵵᵠᴾᵡᵬᵐᵑᴾᵆᵕᶎᵿᶅᶃᴾᶍᶐᴾᵖᶎᵿᶅᶃᵇ 24V3 WH-L(DESK1) ᵏᵕᵐᵏᵓᵕᵋᵏ ᵏᵕᵐᵏᵔᵓᵋᵏ ᵏᵕᵐᵐᵑᵑᵋᵏ ᵏᵕᵐᵏᵔᵓᵋᵏ

ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵐ ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵒᵋᵐ ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵐᵋᵑ
1
ᵡᵬᵐ NEUTRAL
AC PWB 1 ᵮᵱᵋᵐᵓᵎᵆᵰᵢᵇ
NEUTRAL_OUT
2 1 1
LIVE_OUT LIVE L-WH
ᵡᵬᵏ ᵢᵤᵐᵐᵋᵐᵮᵋᵕᵌᵗᵐᵢᵱᵟᵆᵎᵓᵇᵆᵵᵦᵇ ᵢᵤᵐᵐᵋᵐᵱᵋᵕᵌᵗᵐᵡᵆᵐᵖᵇ ᵮᵱᵋᵐᵓᵎᵆᵰᵢᵇ ᵡᵬᵐ ᵮᵱᵋᵏᵖᵕ
1 1
LIVE_IN L WH 2
2 ᵡᵬᵑ ᵡᵬᵏ NC 3 WHSW
NEUTRAL_IN 1 1 L WH-SW
ᵢᵤᵐᵐᵋᵐᵮᵋᵕᵌᵗᵐᵢᵱᵟᵆᵎᵓᵇᵆᵵᵦᵇ LIVE_WH 2 2 LIVE_WH ᵒᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵒᵋᵐ ᵒᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵐᵋᵑ
(NC) 3 3 NC 1
ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵓᵏᵲᵋᵒ NEUTRAL_WH NEUTRAL_WH L-WH
ᵓᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵒᵋᵐᵆᵠᵩᵇ ᵓᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵐᵋᵑ ᵓᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵐᵋᵑ ᵓᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵒ ᵮᵱᵋᵏᵖᵕ
ᵨᵮᵍᵣᵶᵏᵎᵎ
ᵡᵬᵑ
1 1 1
ᵡᵬᵏ WH-N(SCAN) 2 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2
1 1 NC 3 WH-L(SCAN) WH_SCN
LIVE IN 2 LIVE_IN WH-L(SCAN) ᵏᵕᵐᵏᵓᵕᵋᵏ ᵏᵕᵐᵏᵔᵓᵋᵏ
FGND 3 2 ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵒᵋᵐ ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵐᵋᵑ
NEUTRAL IN NEUTRAL_IN
INLET ᵢᵤᵐᵐᵋᵐᵮᵋᵕᵌᵗᵐᵢᵱᵟᵆᵎᵓᵇᵆᵵᵦᵇ
ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵓᵏᵲᵋᵒ
ᵣᵶᵐᵎᵎ
1 1
N-HL(LM) HL_LM
ᵢᵏᵌᵐᵓᵋᵫᵑᵆᵬᶇᵇ
TS_L
TS_M
MC PWB
TS_S
1 1
2 N-HL(UM) 2
HL_UM 1 1
N-HL(US) 2 L-HL(UM) 2
HL_US L-HL(US)
1 1
2 L-HL(UM) 2
ᵤᵮᵱᵋᵏᵖᵕ 3 L-HL(US/LW) 3
1 4 L-HL(US/LM) 4
Spring MC-K L-HL(UM)
HL PWB
3URFHVV81 ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵑ
ᵡᵬᵑ
1
ᵮᵱᵋᵏᵖᵕ N-HL(UW) 2
1 (NC) 3
Spring MC-CMY N-HL(LM)
ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵒᵋᵐ ᵏᵋᵏᵏᵐᵑᵕᵐᵐᵋᵑ
J. Fusing, Resist sensor, High voltage
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵑ
ᵡᵬᵒ 1 3
CN1 1 2 GND 2
1 L-HL(US/LM) 3 TH_SUB2_2 1 TH_SUB2
Spring GB-K 24V1(INT) TH_SUB2_2_CS
2 2
24V1(INT) 3 L-HL(UM) 179228-3 ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ
GND 4 ᵢᵤᵐᵐᵪᵋᵐᵮᵋᵕᵌᵗᵐᵢᵱᵟᵆᵎᵓᵇ ᵢᵤᵐᵐᵪᵋᵐᵱᵋᵕᵌᵗᵐᵡᵆᵐᵖᵇ
/HV_DATA 5
Spring GB-C /HV_CLK 6 ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵑ
/HV_LD1 ᵐᵋᵏᵔᵕᵒᵕᵓᵒᵋᵎ ᵐᵋᵏᵔᵕᵒᵕᵓᵓᵋᵏ 3
7 1
3URFHVV81 NC(/HV_LD2) 8 1 1 2 GND 2
MC1 HV_REM 9 2 N-HL(LM) 2 3 TH_UM 1 TH_UM
Spring GB-M DV_REM L-HL(UM) TH_UM_CS
10 ᵡᵬᵐ 3 3
MC_K_ERR 11 1 4 L-HL(US/LM) 4 179228-3 ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ
MC_CMY_ERR N-HL(US) 5 NC 5
1-292207-1 1-353293-1 2 6 N-HL(US) 6
Spring GB-Y N-HL(UM) N-HL(UM)
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵐ
1 2
ᵢᵤᵐᵐᵰᵋᵐᵮᵋᵕᵌᵗᵐᵢᵱᵟᵆᵎᵓᵇ ᵢᵤᵐᵐᵰᵋᵐᵱᵋᵕᵌᵗᵐᵡᵆᵐᵖᵇ 2 GND 1
TH_LM TH_LM
1 9 179228-2 ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵐ
2 WEBEND 8
3 GND 7
4 5VN+R 6
GND
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵐ
5 5 1 2
6 TH_SUB2_2 4 2 GND 1
7 TH_SUB2_2_CS 3 TH_US TH_US
Spring DV-K GND
8 2 179228-2 ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵐ
PCU PWB 9 TH_UM 1
TH_UM_CS
Spring DV-C ᵡᵬᵑ ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵗ ᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵗ
18 UL10272-26-Purple
3URFHVV81 WEBEND 17 UL10272-26-Purple 1 11
ᵡᵬᵏᵎ GND 16 UL10272-26-Purple 2 GND 10
UL10272-26-Gray 22 5VN+R 15 UL10272-26-Purple 3 (NC) 9
Spring DV-M 24V1(INT) GND TH_LM
UL10272-26-Gray 21 14 UL10272-26-Purple 4 8
UL10272-26-Gray 20 24V1(INT) TH_SUB2_2 13 UL10272-26-Purple 5 GND 7
UL10272-26-Gray 19 GND TH_SUB2_2_CS 12 UL10272-26-Purple 6 TH_US 6
UL10272-26-Gray 18 /HV_DATA GND 11 UL10272-26-Purple 7 (NC) 5
Spring DV-Y /HV_CLK TH_UM WEBS
UL10272-26-Gray 17 10 UL10272-26-Purple 8 4
UL10272-26-Gray 16 /HV_LD1 TH_UM_CS 9 UL10272-26-Purple 9 24V2 3 1
UL10272-26-Gray 15 /HV_LD2 GND 8 UL10272-26-Purple 10 POD1 2 2 POD1
UL10272-26-Gray 14 HV_REM TH_LM 7 UL10272-26-Purple 11 GND 1 3 GND ᵮᵭᵢᵏ
UL10272-26-Gray 13 DV_REM GND 6 UL10272-26-Purple 5VN+R 5VN+R
UL10272-26-Gray 12 MC_K_ERR TH_US 5 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵏ
MC_CMY_ERR WEBS 4 UL10272-26-Purple
ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ 24V3 3 UL10272-26-Purple
POD1 2 UL10272-26-Purple
5VN+R
ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵖ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵖ
ᵡᵬᵑᵎ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵒ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵒ

19 UL10272-26-Purple 1 4 UL10272-26-Purple 1
PROFM1_LD 18 UL10272-26-Purple 2 PROFM1_LD 3 UL10272-26-Purple 2 PROFM1_LD
GND 17 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND 2 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND

11 PROFM1_CNT 16 UL10272-26-Purple 4 PROFM1_CNT 1 UL10272-26-Purple 4 PROFM1_CNT ᵮᵰᵭᵤᵫᵏ
10 (NC) PROFM1_V 15 UL10272-26-Purple PROFM1_V PROFM1_V
UL10272-26-Purple 9 (NC) 5VN 14 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵒ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵒ 173977-4 ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵒ
UL10272-26-Purple 8 1TC_ERR GND 13 UL10272-26-Purple
UL10272-26-Purple 7 2TC_ERR REGS_R_LED 12 UL10272-26-Purple
TC PWB UL10272-26-Purple 6 PTC_ERR REGS_R 11 UL10272-26-Purple
UL10272-26-Purple 5 HV_REM PCS_R 10 UL10272-26-Purple
UL10272-26-Purple 4 /TC_LD 5VN 9 UL10272-26-Purple
Spring 1TC-K /TC_CLK GND
UL10272-26-Purple 3 8 UL10272-26-Purple 1
UL10272-26-Purple 2 /TC_DATA REGS_F_LED 7 UL10272-26-Purple 2 5VN
CN1 UL10272-26-Purple 1 GND REGS_F 6 UL10272-26-Purple 3 GND
1 24V1(INT) PCS_F 5 UL10272-26-Purple 4 REGS_R_LED REGS_R/PCS_R
Spring 1TC-C NC(1TC_O-ERR) HLPCD REGS_R
2 ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ ᵐᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵐ 4 UL10272-26-Purple 5
7&81 1TC_ERR 3 ᵐᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵐ GND 3 UL10272-26-Purple PCS_R
2TC_ERR 4 5VN+R 2 UL10272-26-Purple
PTC_ERR 5 DSW_R_IN 1 UL10272-26-Purple 173977-5
Spring 1TC-M HV_REM 5VN
6
/TC_LD 7 ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵗ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵗ
/TC_CLK 8
/TC_DATA 9 1
Spring 1TC-Y GND 5VN
TC1 10 2
24V1(INT) 3 GND
1-292207-0 1-353293-0 4 REGS_F_LED REGS_F/PCS_F
5 REGS_F
PCS_F
ᵮᵱᵋᵏᵖᵕ
Spring 1 173977-5
2TC
2TC (PINK)
1
ᵮᵱᵋᵏᵖᵕ 2 HLPCD
1 3 GND ᵦᵪᵮᵡᵢ
Spring PTC 5VN+R
PTC (WHITE) ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
7&81
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵐ DSW_R
Spring VCASE 1 2 1
2 DSW_R_IN 1 DSW_R_IN
5VN ᵮᵱᵋᵏᵏᵎ
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵐ
1
5VN
Spring DHV
ᵮᵱᵋᵏᵏᵎ
ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵑ
K. DSPF
3
2 5V_SPED1
1 GND ᵱᵮᵣᵢᵏ
ᵡᵬᵏᵎ D_SPED1
ᵏᵐ UL10272-26-Gray ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
SCN MFP PWB DSPF PWB DSPF CCD PWB 5V_SPED1 UL10272-26-Gray
GND
ᵏᵑ
ᵡᵬᵑᵓ ᵡᵬᵔ ᵏᵒ UL10272-26-Gray
1 1 ᵡᵬᵒ ᵡᵬᵏ D_SPED1 UL10272-26-Gray 3
GND GND 5V_SPRDMD
ᵏᵓ 5V_SPRDMD
2 2 1 1 ᵏᵔ UL10272-26-Gray 2
nCTS_SCN 3 3 nRTS_DSPF GND 2 2 GND GND UL10272-26-Gray 1 GND ᵱᵮᵰᵢᵫᵢ
DSDATA_3P DSDATA_3P AFE_SDI AFE_SDO D_RANDOM
ᵏᵕ D_RANDOM
4 4 3 3 ᵏᵖ UL10272-26-Gray
nRTS_SCN 5 5 nCTS_DSPF AFE_SDO 4 4 AFE_SDIO /D_SPFC UL10272-26-Gray ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
DSDATA_3N DSDATA_3N AFE_SCLK AFE_SCLK +24V
ᵏᵗ
6 6 5 5 ᵐᵎ UL10272-26-Gray
RXD_SCN 7 7 TXD_DSPF RES_CCDAD 6 6 RES_CCDAD 5V_SPOTD UL10272-26-Gray
GND GND CCD_SEL CCD_SEL GND
ᵐᵏ
8 8 7 7 ᵐᵐ UL10272-26-Gray 2
TXD_SCN 9 9 RXD_DSPF GND 8 8 GND D_SPOTD 1 /D_SPFC
DSCLK_P 10 10 DSCLK_P A3.3V 9 9 A3.3V ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ +24V ᵱᵮᵤᵡ
GND 11 11 GND A3.3V 10 10 A3.3V ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ
DSCLK_N 12 12 DSCLK_N A3.3V 11 11 A3.3V ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵑ
DSPF_INT 13 13 DSPF_INT A3.3V 12 12 A3.3V 3 1 UL1061-26-Gray 3
GND 14 14 GND A3.3V 13 13 A3.3V 2 5V_SPOTD 2 UL1061-26-Gray 2 5V_SPOTD
GND 15 15 GND GND 14 14 GND 1 GND 3 UL1061-26-Gray 1 GND ᵱᵮᵭᵲᵢ
DSDATA_2P 16 16 DSDATA_2P A5V 15 15 A5V D_SPOTD D_SPOTD
RES 17 17 RES A5V 16 16 A5V ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
DSDATA_2N DSDATA_2N A5V A5V ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
18 18 17 17
DSPFUP 19 19 DSPFUP GND 18 18 GND 3
GND 20 20 GND A10V 19 19 A10V 2 5V_SCOV
TXD_DSPF_LOG 21 21 D_CPU_TXD A10V 20 20 A10V 1 GND ᵱᵡᵭᵴ
DSDATA_1P DSDATA_1P GND GND (NC)
ᵏ D_SCOV
22 22 21 21 ᵐ
SPED 23 23 SPED TA_N 22 22 TA_N (NC) UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
DSDATA_1N DSDATA_1N TA_P TA_P 5V_SCOV
ᵑ
24 24 23 23 ᵒ UL10272-26-Purple
GND 25 25 nLVDS_STBY GND 24 24 GND GND UL10272-26-Purple
GND GND TB_N TB_N D_SCOV
ᵓ
26 26 25 25 ᵔ UL10272-26-Purple 3
NC/(RXD_DSPF_LOG) 27 27 NC TB_P 26 26 TB_P 5V_STUD UL10272-26-Purple 2 5V_STUD
DSDATA_0P DSDATA_0P GND GND GND
ᵕ GND ᵱᵲᵳᵢ
28 28 27 27 ᵖ UL10272-26-Purple 1
nPOF 29 29 nPOF TC_N 28 28 TC_N D_STUD UL10272-26-Purple D_STUD
DSDATA_0N DSDATA_0N TC_P TC_P 5V_SPPD1
ᵗ
30 30 29 29 ᵏᵎ UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
GND GND GND 30 30 GND GND UL10272-26-Purple
TCLK_N TCLK_N D_SPPD1
ᵏᵏ
ᵢᵤᵓᵎᵱᵋᵑᵎᵢᵱᵋᵏᵡ ᵢᵤᵓᵎᵱᵋᵑᵎᵢᵱᵋᵏᵡ ᵢᵤᵓᵎᵋᵑᵎᵢᵮᵋᵏᵴᵆᵓᵏᵇ 31 31
ᵢᵤᵓᵎᵋᵑᵎᵢᵮᵋᵏᵴᵆᵓᵏᵇ TCLK_P TCLK_P
32 32 ᵐᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵐ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ 3
GND 33 33 GND Ώ ῭ᾉᵐᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵐ 2 5V_SPPD1
TD_N 34 34 TD_N 1 GND ᵱᵮᵮᵢᵏ
ᵡᵬᵒᵎ ᵡᵬᵓ TD_P 35 35 TD_P D_SPPD1
1 14 GND 36 36 GND ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
GND 2 13 GND TE_N 37 37 TE_N
GND 3 12 GND TE_P 38 38 TE_P
24V 4 11 24V GND 39 39 GND
24V 5 10 24V AFE_CS 40 40 AFE_CS ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵑ
24V 6 9 24V GND GND 3 1 3
24V 7 8 24V ᵤᵦᵒᵖᵋᵒᵎᵱᵋᵎᵌᵓᵱᵴ ᵤᵦᵒᵖᵋᵒᵎᵱᵋᵎᵌᵓᵱᵴ 2 GND 2 2 GND
12V 8 7 12V 1 SPPD2 3 1 SPPD2 ᵱᵮᵮᵢᵐ
5V 9 6 5V 5V_SPPD2 5V_SPPD2
5VO 10 5 5VO ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
5VO_DUTY 11 4 5V_SPF ᵡᵬᵏᵎᵎᵏ
3.3V 12 3 3.3V 1
3.3V 13 2 3.3V SPFFAN_+V 2 3
GND 14 1 GND SPFFAN_GND 3 ᵡᵬᵏ 2 5V_SPPD3
GND GND SPFFAN_SIG ᵱᵮᵤᵤᵟᵬ 1 GND ᵱᵮᵮᵢᵑ
GND
ᵏᵔ SPPD3
ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ ᵏᵕ
ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵒ ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵒ SPPD2
ᵏᵖ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
5V_SPPD2
5V_SPPD3
ᵏᵗ
GND
ᵐᵎ
SPPD3
ᵐᵏ
ᵐᵐ 3
5V_SPPD4 2 5V_SPPD4
GND
ᵐᵑ GND ᵱᵮᵮᵢᵒ
ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵑ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵑ ᵐᵒ 1
SPPD4 SPPD4
5V_SPPD5
ᵐᵓ
ᵐᵔ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
GND
SPPD5
ᵐᵕ
5V_SLCOV
ᵐᵖ
GND
ᵐᵗ
3 ᵑᵎ
5V_STLD 2 SLCOV ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵑ
ᵱᵲᵪᵢ GND 1 ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵓ 3 1 3
STLD 2 5V_SPPD5 2 2 5V_SPPD5
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ 1 GND 3 1 GND ᵱᵮᵮᵢᵓ
SPPD5 SPPD5
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
3
5V_SPF 2
ᵱᵮᵣᵢᵐ GND 1
D_SPED2 ᵡᵬᵏᵑ 2
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ 1 1 GND
2 5V_STLD SLCOV ᵱᵪᵡᵭᵴ
3 GND ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ
4 STLD
ᵭᵮᵲᵧᵭᵬ 5V_SPF
5
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵒ 6 GND
1 4 7 D_SPED2 3
2 +24V 3 8 24V 2 5V_SOCD
3 D_STAMPS 2 9 D_STAMPS 1 GND ᵱᵭᵡᵢ
ᵱᵲᵫᵮᵱ 4 D_STSET 1 10 D_STSET SOCD
GND 11 GND ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵒ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵒ 12 5V_SPOD
ᵟᵰᵱᵳᵏ GND
IF00a 13
D_SPOD 2
ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ 1-292207-3 1 /D_STRC
3 +24V ᵱᵲᵰᵡ
5V_SPOD 5V_SOCD
ᵏ
2 ᵐ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ
ᵱᵮᵭᵢ GND 1 GND
D_SPOD SOCD
ᵑ
/D_STRC
ᵒ
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵓ
+24V 7
SPUFM_LD
ᵔ SPUFM_LD

ᵕ 6
SPUFM_CW 5 SPUFM_CW
SPUFM_BRAKE
ᵖ SPUFM_BRAKE
ᵗ 4
SPUFM_CLK 3 SPUFM_CLK ᵱᵮᵳᵤᵫ
PGND
ᵏᵎ (NC)
ᵏᵏ 2
ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵑ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵑ +24V 1 PGND
/D_STRRC
ᵏᵐ +24V
+24V
ᵏᵑ
ᵏᵒ ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵕ ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵕ
/D_SRRC
+24V
ᵏᵓ
ᵡᵬᵖ
1 UL10272-26-Purple 10 ᵑᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵎ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵓ
/D_LUMBout 2 UL10272-26-Purple 9 /D_LUMBout Ώ ῭ᾉᵑᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵎ 2
/D_LUMAout 3 UL10272-26-Purple 8 /D_LUMAout 1 /D_STRRC
ᵱᵪᵳᵫ +24V 4 UL10272-26-Purple 7 +24V +24V ᵱᵲᵰᵰᵡ
+24V 5 UL10272-26-Purple 6 +24V ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ
D_LUMBout 6 UL10272-26-Purple 5 D_LUMBout
D_LUMAout 4 D_LUMAout
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵔ 3 D_SPOMAout 2
2 D_SPOMBout 1 /D_SRRC
1 /D_SPOMAout +24V ᵱᵰᵰᵡ
/D_SPOMBout ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵐ
ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵎ ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵎ
1 UL10272-26-Purple
D_SPUMAOUT 2 UL10272-26-Purple
D_SPUMBOUT 3 UL10272-26-Purple
ᵱᵮᵭᵫ /D_SPUMAOUT 4 UL10272-26-Purple 3
/D_SPUMBOUT 2 GND
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵒ 1 D_SPLS1 ᵱᵮᵪᵱᵏ
ᵡᵬᵏᵐ 5V
1 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ
D_SPLS1 3 UL10272-26-Purple ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵓᵒᵋᵑ
ᵡᵬᵏ ᵡᵬᵕ 5V 4 UL10272-26-Purple 3 1
1 1 GND 5 UL10272-26-Purple 2 GND 2 GND
LED PWB LED_ANODE 2 2 LED_ANODE D_SPWS 6 UL10272-26-Purple 1 D_SPWS 3 D_SPWS ᵱᵮᵵᵱ
GND 3 3 GND 3.3V 7 UL10272-26-Purple +3.3V +3.3V
LED_CATHODE/ 4 LED_CATHODE/ GND 8 UL10272-26-Purple ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵑ
LED_ANODE/ D_SPLS2
Ⴚ˄Ậ
ᵓᵎᵐᵑᵖᵔᵋᵎᵑᵕᵎ ᵓᵎᵐᵑᵖᵎᵋᵎᵑᵎᵎ 5 9 UL10272-26-Purple
6 GND 5V 10 UL10272-26-Purple
LED_CATHODE GND 3
11 UL10272-26-Purple GND
5V_LED 2
ᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵔ ᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵔ D_SPLS2 ᵱᵮᵪᵱᵐ
1
ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵏ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵏ 5V
ᵡᵬᵏ
1
LED PWB LED_ANODE 2
GND 3
LED_CATHODE/ 3
ᵓᵎᵐᵑᵖᵔᵋᵎᵑᵕᵎ ᵓᵎᵐᵑᵖᵎᵋᵎᵑᵎᵎ 2 GND
1 LED_PD POT LED PWB
5V_LED
ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵑ 292250-3
L. RSPF
SCN MFP PWB RSPF Driver PWB ᵖᵋᵐᵗᵐᵏᵓᵓᵋᵐ

2 1
1 +24VPD SPRS 2
SPRS/ ᵱᵮᵰᵱ
173977-2 179228-2
CN36 CN1
14 UL10272-26-Purple 1
SPPD1 13 UL10272-26-Purple 2 SPPD1
SPFM_CLK 12 UL10272-26-Purple 3 SPFM_CLK
GND 11 UL10272-26-Purple 4 GND
SPFM_ENB 10 UL10272-26-Purple 5 SPFM_ENB 2
SPUM_M0 9 UL10272-26-Purple 6 SPUM_M0 1 /SRRC
SPUM_CLK 8 UL10272-26-Purple 7 SPUM_CLK CN6 24V ᵱᵰᵰᵡ
SPRS 7 UL10272-26-Purple 8 SPRS 1 353293-2
SRRC 6 UL10272-26-Purple 9 SRRC 24V 2
SPWS 5 UL10272-26-Purple 10 SPWS /SPRS 3
SEL_B 4 UL10272-26-Purple 11 SEL_B /SRRC 4
SEL_OUT 3 UL10272-26-Purple 12 SEL_OUT 24V 5 4
SPFM_CNT 2 UL10272-26-Purple 13 SPFM_CNT SPUM OUT_/B 6 3 SPUM OUT_/B
SPPD4 1 UL10272-26-Purple 14 SPPD4 SPUM OUT_B 7 2 SPUM OUT_B
GND GND SPUM OUT_/A 8 1 SPUM OUT_/A ᵱᵮᵳᵫ
2-292208-8 ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ SPUM OUT_A 9 SPUM OUT_A
SPFM OUT_/B 10 ᵏᵕᵑᵗᵕᵕᵋᵒ
SPFM OUT_B 11
SPFM OUT_/A 12
SPFM OUT_A
1-173977-2
28 UL10272-26-Gray 15 4
SPED 27 16 SPED 1-292132-2 3 SPFM OUT_/B
(RSPF_SEL) 26 UL10272-26-Gray 17 (RSPF_SEL) 2 SPFM OUT_B ᵱᵮᵤᵫ
SPPD3 25 UL10272-26-Gray 18 SPPD3 1 SPFM OUT_/A
SPUM_CNT 24 UL10272-26-Gray 19 SPUM_CNT SPFM OUT_A
SEL_C 23 UL10272-26-Gray 20 SEL_C 173977-4
SEL_A 22 21 SEL_A ᵡᵬᵒ 292215-6
(SRVC) 21 UL10272-26-Gray 22 (SRVC) 6 1 6
STMPS 20 UL10272-26-Gray 23 STMPS SPPD3 5 2 SPPD3 5
SPUM_CWCCW 19 UL10272-26-Gray 24 SPUM_CWCCW GND 4 3 GND 4
SPUM_ENB 18 UL10272-26-Gray 25 SPUM_ENB 5V_SPPD3 3 4 5V_SPPD3 3
SPFM_CWCCW 17 UL10272-26-Gray 26 SPFM_CWCCW SOCD 2 5 SOCD 2
SPFM_M1 16 UL10272-26-Gray 27 SPFM_M1 GND 1 6 GND 1
SPFM_M0 15 UL10272-26-Gray 28 SPFM_M0 5V_SOCD 5V_SOCD
SPPD2 SPPD2 ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ 353293-6 ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵔ 1
ᵐᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵖ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ ᵐᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵖ 2 SPPD3
ᵐᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵖ ᵐᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵖ ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵔ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ 3 GND ᵱᵮᵮᵢᵑ
5V_SPPD3
ᵡᵬᵒᵎ 173977-3
1 UL10272-26-Purple
GND 2
GND 3 UL10272-26-Purple 1
24V 4 UL10272-26-Purple CN7 2 SOCD
24V 5 8 3 GND ᵱᵭᵡᵢ
24V 6 7 GND 5V_SOCD
24V 7 6 24V 173977-3
12V 8 UL10272-26-Purple 5 24V
5V 9 UL10272-26-Purple 4 5V
5VO 10 UL10272-26-Purple 3 5VO
5VO_DUTY 11 UL10272-26-Purple 2 5VO_DUTY
3.3V 12 UL10272-26-Purple 1 3.3V
3.3V 13 GND
GND 14 353293-8 ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵖ
GND ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ
ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵒ ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵒ
UL1061-22-Gray
ᵱᵟᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵑᵌᵓᵪ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵑ
1
2 SCOV
3 GND ᵱᵡᵭᵴ
5V_SOCV
173977-3
ᵡᵬᵑ
12
SCOV 11 1
GND 10 2 SPED
5V_SOCV 9 3 GND2 ᵱᵮᵣᵢ
SPED 8 +5V SPED
GND 7 173977-3
5VO_SPED 6
SPPD1 5
GND 4 1
5V_SPPD1 3 2 SPPD1
SPPD2 2 3 GND ᵱᵮᵮᵢᵏ
GND 1 5V_SPPD1
5V_SPPD2 173977-3
ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵐ
ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵐ 1
2 SPPD2
3 GND ᵱᵮᵮᵢᵐ
5V_SPPD2
173977-3
ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ

ᵡᵬᵓ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ
7 ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ ᵱᵰᵟᵋᵐᵏᵲᵋᵒ 1
SPPD4 6 2 SPPD4
GND 5 3 GND ᵱᵮᵮᵢᵒ
5V_SPPD4 4 5V_SPPD4
GND 3 173977-3
STMPU 2
/STMPS 1
24V_STMPS 292254-4
ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵕ 1 4 ᵭᵮᵲᵧᵭᵬ
2 GND 3
3 STMPU 2
ᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵕ
4 /STMPS 1
24V_STMPS ᵱᵲᵫᵮᵱ
173977-4 179228-4
1
2 SPLS1
3 GND ᵱᵮᵪᵱᵏ
5V_SPLS1
CN2 173977-3
9
SPLS1 8
GND 7
5V_SPLS1 6 1
SPLS2 5 2 SPLS2
GND 4 3 GND ᵱᵮᵪᵱᵐ
5V_SPLS2 3 5V_SPLS2
GND 2 173977-3
SPWS 1
3.3V
353293-9
1
292207-9 2 GND
3 SPWS ᵱᵮᵵᵱ
3.3V
ᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵑᵋᵑ
M. Option
PCU PWB SCN MFP PWB

ᵡᵬᵏᵔ
1
2 TXD_FIN ᵡᵬᵏᵖ
3 /TRC_FIN(NC) 1
4 RXD_FIN TXD_DSK 2
5 5VN 5VN 3
6 DTR_FIN RXD_DSK 4
7 GND GND 5
8 DSR_FIN /DTR_DSK 6 ᵡᵬᵐᵒ ᵡᵬᵏᵑ
9 RES_FIN GND 7 ᵏᵍᵐᵍᵑᵍᵲᵿᶌᶂᶃᶋᴾᶂᶃᶑᶉ 1 1
),1,6+(5 10 24V4(OP) /DSR_DSK 8 2 LPC_CLK1_TPM GND 2
GND(OP) RES_DSK 9 3 GND +3.3V_F 3
ᵏᵋᵏᵕᵗᵐᵐᵖᵋᵎ ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵏᵑᵐᵋᵎ /TRC_DSK 10 4 LPC_FRAME_N +3.3V_F 4
24V4(OP) 11 5 BT_GPI_TPM_SEL FAXD_TXD_N 5
ᵡᵬᵏᵓ GND(OP) 6 PMC_PLTRST_N NCNCT_FAX 6
1 ᵏᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵕᵋᵏ 7 BP_V3P3A_S3 FAXD_TXD_P 7
2 24V4 8 LPC_LAD3 +5V_(OFF) 8
PGND 9 LPC_LAD2 FAXCS_TXD_P 9
ᵓᵏᵎᵔᵕᵋᵎᵐᵎᵎ ᵓᵑᵐᵓᵖᵋᵑᵎᵎᵐ 10 B_3R3V_ECO NRES_FAX 10
62/29$ 11 LPC_LAD1 FAXCS_TXD_N 11
12 LPC_LAD0 GND 12
13 GND FAXD_RXD_N 13
14 LPC_CLKRUN_N NFAX_WUP 14
15 PMC_SUS_STAT FAXD_RXD_P 15
ᵡᵬᵏᵕ 16 BP_V1P8S_ECO 5V_(OFF) 16
1 17 BP_V1P8A_S3 FAXCS_RXD_P 17
(#:29$
Board to Board
(NC) 2 18 GND GND 18
24V3 3 19 LPC_SERIRQ_TPM_18 FAXCS_RXD_N 19
GND 4 20 UART_TXD_DEBUG GND 20
C2LUD 5 UART_RXD_DEBUG NFAXD_RTS 21
C2PED 6 ᵧᵫᵱᵟᵋᵗᵎᵑᵐᵠᵋᵐᵎᵮᵋᵥᵤ FLVPP 22
C2PFD 7 NFAXD_CTS 23
C2PFPD 8 +5V_A 24
5VN+R 9 NFAXCS_RTS 25
5VN+R 10 +24V 26
5VN+R 11 NFAXCS_CTS 27
5VN+R 12 +3.3V_F 28
DSW_C2 13 +3.3V_F 29
5VN+R 14 GND 30
5VN(C2PFD) 15 PGND
5VN 16 ᵢᵤᵓᵎᵋᵑᵎᵢᵮᵋᵏᵴᵆᵓᵏᵇ DF50S-30DS-1C
GND 17
24V4(OP) 18
GND(OP) 19
/TRC_LCC 20
(NC) 21
RES_LCC 22
%5.%%
GND 23
/DSR_LCC 24
/DTR_LCC 25
ᵡᵬᵏᵒ RXD_LCC 26
1 TXD_LCC 27
2 GND C2SSSET_M 28
3 12V C2SSSET_D 29
4 PDCF_V C2SPD 30
5 PDCF_VL C2SS4 31
6 FAN_LD C2SS3 32
7 PPD1 C2SS2 33
8 PPD2 C2SS1 34
9 DSW1 GND 35
10 DSW2 C2LUM 36
11 DCLHP GND 37
(NC) 24V3 38
/CPFC2 39
ᵮᵿᶎᶃᶐᴾᶎᵿᶑᶑᴾᵳᵬ 12 24V3 40
13 (NC) /C2PUC
14 DCLSET ᵒᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵎ
15 VREF-SEL
16 ENABLE
17 CLK
18 CW/CCW
19 MODE1
20 MODE0
21 5VN
22 24V4(OP)
GND

ᵏᵋᵑᵓᵑᵗᵎᵖᵋᵏ ᵐᵋᵐᵗᵐᵐᵎᵖᵋᵐ
ᵐᵋᵑᵓᵑᵐᵗᵒᵋᵐ ᵡᵬᵏᵗ
16
/CV_SIZE3 15
/CV_SIZE2 14
/CV_SIZE1 13
/CV_SIZE0 12
5VN 11
/CV_DUPLEX 10
/CV_COLOR0 9
/CV_STAPLE 8 &2,19(1'(5
/CV_COLOR1 7
/CV_CLCOPY 6
/CV_CA 5
/CV_START 4
/CV_COUNT 3
/CV_COPY 2
P-GND 1
24V3
ᵏᵋᵏᵒᵕᵎᵏᵎᵗᵋᵔ
[13] OTHERS
MX-4071
Service Manual
1. TOOL LIST
Name PARTS CODE NOTE
Y toner powder CKOG-0345DS51 Primary transfer belt
Conductive grease (FLOIL GE-676) UKOG-0012QSZZ For shaft
Grease (FLOIL GP-501MR) UKOG-0013QSZZ Paper feed roller shaft
Grease (MOLYKOTE X5-6020) UKOG-0158FCZZ Scanner rail
Gray test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ
Grease (JFE552) UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease (HANARL FL-955R) UKOG-0299FCZZ
Grease (FLOIL G-313S) UKOG-0307FCZZ
Stearic acid powder UKOG-0312FCZZ OPC drum
Color copy test chart UKOG-0326FCZZ / UKOG-0326FC11
Shading adjustment sheet UKOG-0333FCZZ DSPF
Scanner adjustment chart UKOG-0356FCZZ
2. VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING

A. HDD / eMMC PWB memory contents (2) eMMC PWB data contents
(1) HDD data contents No. File system Stored data
L-101 Universal ICU firmware
No. File system Stored data
S-101 Universal Font
L-1 Not available ICU firmware Spdl
I -1 Image data Image data (ERDH + document filing) Option font ROM
I -2 Image data Image data (temporary storage) L-102 Not available Snapshot image
I -3 Image data Image data (user watermark / stamp) S-102 Universal e-manual
I -4 Image data FAX/internet FAX received images Watermark
L-2 Not available System storage data OCR dictionary
S-1 Universal System storage data (for backup) Voice data
S-2 Universal Download font S-103 Universal System setting data
Download color profile S-104 Universal BPS system data
User macro I -101 Image data FAX/internet FAX received data (backup)
Key operation storage data S-105 Universal Backup data
Database system file S-106 Universal Log data
Custom icon, background data
L-105 Not available Swap area
S-3 Universal System log
S-4 Universal Document filing B. Necessary steps when replacing PWB, HDD and
Job log
Job log completion list
eMMC PWB
S-5 Universal Address book (1) SCN MFP PWB replacement procedure (work flow)
Account management data
Registered user information will not be recovered if SCN MFP PWB is
Paper property registration data
Billing account data affected by U2-05 trouble.
Cookie file for OSA application 1) Attach EEPROM, eMMC PWB of the SCN MFP PWB onto the
S-6 Universal Database file new SCN MFP PWB and install it to the main unit.
S-7 Universal Spool area for printer Ground your body with grounding band during the work.
S-8 Universal Print release storage data
2) U2 trouble occurs, use Sim16 to cancel it.
Print release file management information
S-9 Universal Work area for OCR 3) Set as follows after rebooting the main unit.
S-10 Universal Work area for application Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-2 (clear software
S-11 Universal eOSA application file switch related to FAX).
S-12 Universal Log data (2) Procedures necessary for HDD replacement
S-14 Universal User file (SMB)
• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex
S-15 Universal User data of set value etc which must not be erased
when installing the DSK machine. If HDD operates normally and data backup is possible
L-3 Not available Firmware recovery data before replacement, perform data backup and then replace HDD.
• HDD does not operate normally, data cannot backed up.
• HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that
with a normal HDD.
MX-4071 OTHERS 13 – 1
(3) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, some storage data can be reinstalled, If HDD operate normally before replacement and can be backed
up data before replacement of the HDD referring to the HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
Before After
installation installation Data Backup Data Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind
(when shipping (after use by backup method reinstallation procedures operator
from the factory) users)
1 Address book Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service/
Device cloning/ Device cloning/ User
Storage backup Storage backup
2 Image send registration data Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service/
(sender's information, meta data etc) Device cloning/ Device cloning/ User
3 User authentication Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service
Account management Device cloning/ Device cloning/
4 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
5 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
6 JOB log Not available Available Enable Sim56-4/ Disable --- ---
WEB PAGE
7 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
8 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
9 User font Not available Available Disable --- Enable WEB PAGE Service/
User
10 User macro Not available Available Disable --- Enable WEB PAGE Service/
User
11 Document filing Not available Available Enable SIM56-3/ Enable SIM56-3/ Service/
WEB PAGE WEB PAGE User
12 System setting data Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service/
Device cloning/ Device cloning/ User
13 User color profile Not available Available Disable --- Enable WEB PAGE Service/
User
14 Cookie file for OSA application Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
15 User file saved in the SMB Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
16 Paper property registration data Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service/
Device cloning Device cloning User
17 Billing account data Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service
Device cloning/ Device cloning/
18 Print release storage data Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
19 eOSA application file Not available Install Disable --- Disable Re-install Service
application application
MX-4071 OTHERS 13 – 2
(4) Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can (5) Replacement procedures when HDD storage data
be backed up cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Work contents and procedures a. Display when HDD breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03 is
When a new HDD
popped up.
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which is (used in the same In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD must
normal but a program error model) is used * be replaced.
occurs in it is used.
b. Work contents and procedures
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) When a new HDD
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB Procedures used, or when a HDD which is (used in the same
memory.) normal but a program error model) is used *
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 1, 2, 3 occurs in it is used.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
authentication data))
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User or  Formatting is automatically complex machine.
servicing) performed.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
Step 2 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format the
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 6, 11 (JOB
automatically formatted, there is HDD.
LOG data, Document filing data))
no need to perform formatting
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62 procedure with SIM.
to backup the image data from the eMMC PWB to the USB
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62
memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and
to backup the image data from the eMMC PWB to the USB
cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given
memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and
to the user.)
cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given
Step 4 Replace the HDD. to the user.)
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex Step 4 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory
 Formatting is automatically machine. is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data
performed. and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions.
Step 6 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format the (The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but
automatically formatted, there is HDD. in the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
no need to perform formatting
procedure with SIM. With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Step 7 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory shipping.
is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data
and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions.
(The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in
the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
Step 8 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup to
import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 1, 2, 3
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 9 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in Step
2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use
macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)
MX-4071 OTHERS 13 – 3
(6) eMMC PWB storage data and backup
Some eMMC PWB storage data can be backed up, some storage data can be reinstalled, If eMMC PWB operate normally before replacement and
can be backed up data before replacement of eMMC PWB referring to eMMC PWB storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of
eMMC PWB.
a. eMMC PWB storage data list
Before installation After installation

Backup Data Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (when shipping (after use by Data backup
method reinstallation procedures operator
from the factory) users)
1 ICU firmware/ Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-1 Service
Snapshot
2 font Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-1 Service
spdl
3 Option font ROM Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-1 Service
4 e-Manual Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-7 Service
5 Watermark Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-7 Service
6 OCR dictionary Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-7 Service
7 Voice data Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-7 Service
8 Backup data Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
9 System setting data Available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service/User
Device cloning/ Device cloning/
10 FAX/internet FAX Not available Available Enable SIM66-62 Disable --- ---
received data
b. Work contents and procedures
Step
Step 1 Use Sim56-2 to backup eMMC PWB data to USB memory
Step 2 Backup eMMC PWB by device cloning function when operation
panel screen is customized
Step 3 Replace eMMC PWB with new one
Step 4 Upgrade firmware to the latest version
Step 5 Use Sim56-2 to restore data backed up in step1)
Step 6 Restore data backed up in step2) by using device cloning function
3. Advanced Settings 2) Log in with administrator privileges.
Describing on access procedure to advanced settings and operation.

MX-xxxx
Setting items list
ID Setting item name
00001 Display Setting for Sharp OSA Browser Setting.
00002 Setting of Shortcut Dialog Display upon Inserting External
Memory Device.
Access to advanced setting screen

1) Access the web page of the main machine.
MX-xxxx
3) Select [System settings].
MX-xxxx
NOTE: Depending on the authentication method, a screen differ-

ent from the above is displayed.
MX-4071 OTHERS 13 – 4
4) Select [System Control]. How to use advanced settings
1) Select [OK(Y)] on the warning text screen.
MX-xxxx
MX-xxxx
5) Select [Advanced settings].

Advanced setting page is displayed. 2) Enter the setting item ID in the ID text box and press [Show(N)].
MX-xxxx MX-xxxx
3) Change the setting of the target item.
MX-xxxx
MX-4071 OTHERS 13 – 5
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about CORPORATION
40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2021 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
x Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 8.1, Windows® 10, Windows® Server 2016,
Windows® Server 2019, Internet Explorer® Active Directory, Excel, Office 365,
SharePoint and One Drive are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
x PostScript is registered trademarks of Adobe in the US and/or other countries.
x Apple, macOS, AppleTalk and EtherTalk are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S.A. and other countries.
x Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
x PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
x Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
x Sharp OSA is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
x All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Smart Business Solutions BU
First edition: October 2018

Latest edition: November 2021

Manuale Principale 2651 3061 4071 00ZMX4071S1E

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manuale Principale 2651 3061 4071 00ZMX4071S1E

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TopPage

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

[13] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICE [6] SIMULATION

CAUTION : Double pole, neutral fusing.

MX-4071 NOTE FOR SERVICE – i

• Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

• Place of much dust

• Place near a wall

11-13/16" • When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the proce-

• Unstable or irregular surface

MX-4071 NOTE FOR SERVICE – ii

• Do not modify the LSU. Tapping screws (for iron)

7. Screw tightening torque

Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an electrode or

MX-4071 NOTE FOR SERVICE – iii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

MX-DE29 N MX-DE25 N MX-DE26 N MX-DE27 N MX-DE28 N

MX-PK13 MX-PF10 MX-PU10 MX-EB19 MX-EB20 MX-FX15

AR-SU1 MX-FWX1 MX-FR62U MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10

MX-US50 MX-USA0 MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-EB18

MX-4071 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

STD: Standard equipment

MX-4071 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

1. Basic specifications (2) Bypass

A. Engine specification 26 ppm 30 ppm 35 ppm 40 ppm

Document transport Sheet-through method

12x18 (A3W) 305x457 Yes Yes Support TCP/IP(IPv4, IPv6): Supported

*1: Power ON. Dehumidiator switch: OFF

method G4 = MMR (Modified MR)

D. Number of available Fax sending/receiving

*Use ITU-T No.1 chart

5. Dimension and weight

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

1. Consumable system table

(2) Europe, Australia

MX-4071 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

(4) Asia (Except for Singapore, India), Hong Kong

(5) Singapore, India

MX-4071 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 2

(7) Taiwan, Philippines, Israel

MX-4071 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 3

(2) Europe, Australia

(3) New Zealand

MX-4071 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 4

(5) Singapore, India

MX-4071 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 5

(7) Taiwan, Philippines, Israel

MX-4071 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 6